JP7511267B2 - Gaming Machines - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to an amusement machine.

Among conventional gaming machines, there are gaming machines in which players play using gaming value that they own.

Some of these gaming machines are equipped with a notification means that notifies the player of the occurrence of a specified event when that event occurs (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2021-16405 A

However, in gaming machines such as those described in the above patent documents, there was room for improvement in terms of appropriately notifying the occurrence of a specified event.

The present invention was made in consideration of the above-mentioned problems, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can appropriately notify the occurrence of a specified event.

In order to solve the above problems, the present invention provides a gaming machine in which a player can play a game using a gaming value owned by the player, the gaming machine comprising: a first control means for controlling whether or not a special game advantageous to the player is to be played ; a second control means for storing the gaming value owned by the player and controlling the update of the gaming value; a counting means for counting specific information when a counting condition is satisfied; a door body that can be opened and closed; a detection means for detecting the state of the door body ; a third control means for controlling game presentation related to the special game ; and an informing means , the first control means being capable of restricting a predetermined control when a value of the specific information satisfies a predetermined value, The stage is capable of performing discharge control for discharging a gaming medium corresponding to the gaming value outside the gaming machine, the notification means is capable of performing a first notification in response to detection by the detection means and a second notification in response to the discharge control, the first notification and the second notification have different priorities, and the third control means is capable of controlling the execution of a normal game presentation as a game presentation related to the special game before the value of the specific information satisfies a predetermined value, and is capable of controlling the execution of a specific game presentation different from the normal game presentation as a game presentation related to the special game after the value of the specific information satisfies the predetermined value .

The present invention makes it possible to appropriately notify the occurrence of a specified event.

FIG. 2 is an oblique view of a portion of the front side of the gaming machine. This is an oblique view of the gaming machine without the glass frame. FIG. 1 is a rear view of the gaming machine. FIG. FIG. 1 is an exploded perspective view of a main control device; 4 is a diagram showing the relationship of distances between two points for each part of the main control device. FIG. A diagram showing a sticker affixed to a main control board case. FIG. 2 illustrates a frame control device. This is an exploded oblique view of the frame control device. FIG. 4 is a plan view of the frame control board. FIG. 1 is an enlarged view of the frame control unit and the frame control display unit and its surroundings. This is a diagram excluding the frame control unit and various electronic components around the frame control display. FIG. 1 is a partial perspective view of the periphery of a frame control unit and a frame control display unit; 13 is a diagram showing the arrangement of electronic components inside a frame control board case. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing the arrangement of electronic components inside a frame control board case. FIG. A diagram showing the relationship in distance between two points for each part of the frame control device. A diagram showing the relationship of the distance between two points for each part based on the frame control display. 13 is a diagram showing a sticker affixed to the frame control board case. FIG. A diagram showing the relationship between various seals on the frame control board case and various electronic components. A diagram showing the relationship in distance between two points for each part of the main control device and the frame control device. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing the positional relationship between each seal and each operation unit of each control device. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing the relationship of distances from a power switch to each element of the control device. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a modified example of the main control device. FIG. 2 is a block diagram of the gaming machine and peripheral devices. FIG. 2 is a block diagram of the gaming machine and peripheral devices. 4A and 4B are diagrams illustrating memory maps of a main control unit and a frame control unit. A diagram showing the relationship between the game area and the information area. FIG. 2 is a system configuration diagram of the gaming machine and peripheral devices. FIG. 2 is a diagram specifically explaining the flow of information transmission and reception. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a jackpot determination table for special symbols. A figure showing a special pattern determination table. A figure showing a special chart variation pattern determination table. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a pre-determination table. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing modified examples of the specifications of the gaming machine. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing modified examples of the specifications of the gaming machine. A diagram showing a list of messages related to communication between the main control board and the frame control board. A diagram showing gaming machine installation information transmitted from the main control board to the frame control board. A diagram showing hall control and fraud monitoring information transmitted from the main control board to the frame control board. A diagram showing details of the hall control and fraud monitoring information transmitted from the main control board to the frame control board. A diagram showing details of the hall control and fraud monitoring information transmitted from the main control board to the frame control board. A diagram showing details of the hall control and fraud monitoring information transmitted from the main control board to the frame control board. A diagram showing a list of functions and implementation areas of the gaming machine. A diagram showing a list of functions and implementation areas of the gaming machine. A diagram showing the communication procedures between the main control board and the frame control board that enable play after the gaming machine is started. A diagram showing the communication procedures between the main control board and the frame control board that are not playable after the gaming machine is started. A diagram showing the communication procedures between the main control board and the frame control board that enter a setting change/setting confirmation state after the gaming machine is started. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a communication procedure in which the main control board determines that the communication line is disconnected. 13 is a diagram showing a communication procedure in which the frame control board determines that the communication line is disconnected. 4 is a flowchart showing main processing of a main control board. 4 is a flowchart showing main processing of a main control board. 4 is a flowchart showing main processing of a main control board. 13 is a flowchart showing a setting change process of a main control board. 13 is a flowchart showing a setting change process of a main control board. 13 is a flowchart showing the RWM clear process of the main control board. 13 is a flowchart showing a setting confirmation process of a main control board. 13 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing of the main control board. 13 is a flowchart showing an input control process of a main control board. A flowchart showing the first start hole detection switch input processing of the main control board. 13 is a flowchart showing the special diagram special voltage control processing of the main control board. 13 is a flowchart showing the special pattern memory determination process of the main control board. 13 is a flowchart showing the acquisition upper limit management process of the main control board. 13 is a flowchart showing an increment counter update process of a main control board. 13 is a flowchart showing the acquisition upper limit device operation determination process of the main control board. 13 is a flowchart showing an error control process of the main control board. 13 is a flowchart showing the HC/fraud monitoring information management processing of the main control board. A diagram showing a list of messages related to communication between the frame control board and the dedicated unit. A diagram showing a gaming machine information notification transmitted from the frame control board to a dedicated unit. A diagram showing gaming machine performance information transmitted from the frame control board to the dedicated unit. A diagram showing gaming machine installation information transmitted from the frame control board to the dedicated unit. A diagram showing hole control and fraud monitoring information transmitted from the frame control board to the dedicated unit. A diagram showing fraud detection states 2 and 3 of hole control and fraud monitoring information. A diagram showing game information such as hall control and fraud monitoring information. 13A and 13B are diagrams showing counting notifications transmitted from the frame control board to the dedicated unit. A figure showing a loan notification sent from the dedicated unit to the frame control board. A figure showing a loan acceptance result response sent from the frame control board to the dedicated unit. A diagram showing a basic communication sequence between the frame control board and the dedicated unit. A diagram showing the startup sequence 1 of the frame control board and dedicated unit. A diagram showing the startup sequence 2 of the frame control board and dedicated unit. A diagram showing the gaming machine information notification sequence 1 of the frame control board and dedicated unit. A diagram showing the gaming machine information notification sequence 2 of the frame control board and dedicated unit. A diagram showing counting notification sequence 1 of the frame control board and dedicated unit. A diagram showing counting notification sequence 2 of the frame control board and dedicated unit. A diagram showing the frame control board and dedicated unit lending notification sequence 1. A diagram showing the frame control board and dedicated unit lending notification sequence 2. A diagram showing a recovery sequence when a dedicated PIF that connects the frame control board and the dedicated unit is disconnected. A diagram showing the notification sequence of hole control and fraud monitoring information for the frame control board and dedicated unit. 13 is a flowchart showing a main process of the frame control board. 13 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing of the frame control board. 13 is a flowchart showing the ball removal operation processing of the frame control board. 13 is a flowchart showing the gaming machine installation information receiving process of the frame control board. 13 is a flowchart showing the gaming machine information receiving process of the frame control board. 13 is a flowchart showing the number of game balls update process of the frame control board. 13 is a flowchart showing an error control process of the frame control board. 13 is a flowchart showing a severe error notification control process of the frame control board. 13 is a flowchart showing a hardware error notification control process of the frame control board. 13 is a flowchart showing a minor error notification control process of the frame control board. A figure showing the display contents and display priority order of the frame control display when various alarm events occur. 13 is a flowchart showing a display performance information calculation process for a frame control board. 13 is a flowchart showing the gaming machine performance information calculation process of the frame control board. 13 is a flowchart showing the gaming machine information notification processing of the frame control board. 13 is a flowchart showing the game ball counting process of the frame control board. 13 is a flowchart showing the game ball lending process of the frame control board. 13 is a flowchart showing the main processing of the performance control unit. 13 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing of the performance control unit. 13 is a flowchart showing the predictive performance processing of the performance control unit. 13 is a flowchart showing an icon change performance determination process performed by the performance control unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an icon final display mode determination table. A figure showing a variable presentation pattern determination table for presentation modes A to C. A figure showing a variable presentation pattern determination table for presentation modes D to G. 13 is a flowchart showing the jackpot preview performance determination process performed by the performance control unit. 11 is a diagram showing a type of notifiable event, a priority order of notifiable events, and a notifiable manner of notifiable events. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a type of notifiable event, a priority order of notifiable events, and a notifiable manner of notifiable events. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a type of notifiable event, a priority order of notifiable events, and a notifiable manner of notifiable events. FIG. A diagram showing the relationship between the number of game balls cleared and the notification mode for each event when the power is turned on. A diagram showing the relationship between the number of game balls cleared and the notification mode for each event when the power is turned on. 13 is a time chart showing the relationship between the initial operation of the movable presentation device when the number of game balls is cleared and when the power is restored. A diagram showing the relationship between the number of game balls cleared and the notification mode for each event (abnormality). A diagram showing the relationship between the number of game balls cleared and the notification mode for each event (abnormality). A diagram showing the relationship between the number of game balls cleared and the notification mode for each event (abnormality). A diagram showing the relationship between the number of game balls cleared and the notification mode for each event (abnormality). A diagram showing the relationship between the number of game balls cleared and the notification mode for each event (abnormality). A diagram showing the relationship between the number of game balls cleared and the notification mode for each event (abnormality). A diagram showing the relationship between a glass frame (inner frame) opening error and the ball removal operation. A diagram showing the relationship between the number of game balls cleared and the notification mode for each event (abnormality, etc.). A diagram showing the relationship between the number of game balls cleared and the notification mode for each event (abnormality, etc.). A diagram showing the relationship between the number of game balls cleared and the notification mode for each event (abnormality, etc.). A diagram showing the relationship between the number of game balls cleared and the notification mode for each event (abnormality, etc.). A diagram showing the relationship between the number of game balls cleared and the notification mode for each event (abnormality, etc.). 11A and 11B are diagrams showing information output and notification modes of various events. 11A and 11B are diagrams illustrating information output and notification modes of various events. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing the effects that are produced when various events occur. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing the effects that are produced when various events occur.

First Embodiment
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of the present invention will be specifically described with reference to the drawings.

(Configuration of gaming machine)
First, the configuration of the gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to Figures 1 to 4. Figure 1 is a front view of the gaming machine 1, Figure 2 is a perspective view of a portion of the front side of the gaming machine 1, Figure 3 is a perspective view of the gaming machine 1 without the glass frame 4, and Figure 4 is a rear view of the gaming machine.

The gaming machine 1 is provided with an outer frame 2, an inner frame 3 rotatably supported on the front side of the outer frame 2, a glass frame 4 rotatably supported on the front side of the inner frame 3, and a gaming board 5 on which a gaming area 5a is formed, through which gaming balls (gaming media) flow down.

The outer frame 2 is made up of a rectangular base frame 2a with a central opening in the front-rear direction, to which a decorative plate 2b is attached at the lower front. The outer frame 2 is fixed to the island equipment of the amusement arcade via fastening members (e.g., nails, fasteners, etc.).

The inner frame 3 has a recessed game board mounting section 25 with an open front for mounting the game board 5 from the front, and is detachably connected to the outer frame 2 via a first hinge mechanism section 6 at one horizontal end (left side in FIG. 3 ), and is supported rotatably with the first hinge mechanism section 6 as a fulcrum. Therefore, when the inner frame 3 is rotated like a door relative to the outer frame 2, the back side of the inner frame 3 is exposed to the front, making it possible to perform maintenance on various devices provided on the back side of the inner frame 3.

The glass frame 4 is detachably connected to the front side of the inner frame 3 via the second hinge mechanism 7 at one horizontal end (left side in FIG. 3) so as to cover the front of the game board mounting portion 25 of the inner frame 3, and is supported rotatably with the second hinge mechanism 7 as a fulcrum. Therefore, when the glass frame 4 is rotated like a door relative to the inner frame 3, the game area 5a of the game board 5 and the front portion of the inner frame 3 can be opened or closed.

An opening 8 (window) that opens in the front-to-rear direction is formed in the approximate center near the top of the glass frame 4, and a transparent member 8a (such as a glass plate or acrylic plate) is attached to cover the opening 8 from the rear, making it possible to see the playing area 5a of the playing board 5 attached to the playing board attachment portion 25 of the inner frame 3 through the opening 8 and the transparent member 8a.

Around the opening 8 of the glass frame 4, there are provided an audio output device 9 consisting of a speaker, a frame lighting device 10 having multiple decorative LEDs, an operation unit section 11 in which various operation devices (such as the performance button device 16 and selection button device 18 described below) are provided, a launch operation device 13 that can be operated to launch game balls, and a third image display device 72 (left side sub-display device) and a fourth image display device 73 (right side sub-display device) consisting of liquid crystal displays.

The audio output devices 9 are provided at two locations on the top and two locations on the bottom of the glass frame 4, spaced apart from each other, and output background music (BGM), sound effects (SE), etc. to create a sound (music, audio) effect. A number of frame lighting devices 10 are provided around the opening 8, and lighting effects are created by changing the direction of light irradiation and the color of light emitted by each lamp (LED). The frame lighting devices 10 are also equipped with an alarm LED 10a that is controlled to light when the inner frame 3 or glass frame 4 is opened, and a top lamp 10b that is controlled to light when a specified effect is to be executed, etc.

The operation unit 11 has a shape that bulges forward, and in the center of the top surface is a presentation button device 16 that can be operated by the player, and on the left side of the top surface is a selection button device 18 that can be operated by the player, and between the presentation button device 16 and the selection button device 18 and behind the selection button device 18 is a counting button 20 that can be operated by the player, and behind the counting button 20 is a game ball number display 135 for displaying the number of game balls (game value amount) owned by the player.

In addition, an item storage area (receiving section) for placing items (such as a mobile phone, drinks, cigarettes, etc.) that the player will need to use to secure (play) the gaming machine 1 may be provided in a position on the operation unit 11 that does not overlap the game ball count display 135 (for example, a position toward the right of the top surface of the operation unit).

The effect button device 16 is provided with an effect button 17 that can be pressed by the player, an effect button detection switch 17a (see FIG. 26) that detects the pressing of the effect button 17, and a button drive device 17b (see FIG. 26) for driving the effect button 17, allowing the player to input predetermined information into the gaming machine 1.

The performance button 17 can perform light-emitting performance by lighting the performance button LED (full color), which is part of the frame lighting device 10 (see FIG. 26), in a predetermined light-emitting state (e.g., white, red, rainbow). In addition, the driving force of the button drive motor, which is part of the button drive device 17b, can move the button 17 up and down between a standby position (origin position) located below and a performance position located above, and the button position detection sensor (not shown) detects that the button 17 is in the origin position. In addition, the driving force of the button vibration motor, which is part of the button drive device 17b, can vibrate in a predetermined vibration state to perform a performance operation.

The selection button device 18 is equipped with a joystick 19 that the player can operate in the up, down, left and right directions, and a joystick detection switch 19a (see FIG. 26) for detecting operations on the joystick 19, allowing the player to input specific information into the gaming machine 1.

The counting button 20 is provided with a counting button switch 20a for detecting pressing of the counting button 20, and when operated by the player, the number of game balls (game value) owned by the player, which is displayed on the game ball count display 135, can be counted (linked to identification information stored in a storage medium such as a member card or visitor card inserted into the dedicated unit 170 described later, and stored and settled on the card itself or in the hall computer described later).

The launch operation device 13 is equipped with a base 14 fixed to the glass frame 4, a launch handle 15 rotatably attached to the base 14, a touch sensor 15a (see Figure 26) that detects when the player's hand is touching the launch handle 15, and a launch volume 15b (see Figure 26) consisting of a variable resistor whose resistance value changes depending on the rotation angle of the launch handle 15. It is possible to perform a light-emitting effect by lighting it in a predetermined light-emitting mode using a launch handle light-emitting device (not shown) that is part of the frame lighting device 10 (see Figure 26).

When a launch permission signal is input from both the main control device 110A and the frame control device 120A described later, when the touch sensor 15a detects that the player's hand is touching the launch handle 15, and when the launch volume 15b detects that the launch handle 15 is being rotated, the ball feed unit 91 described later is driven to send game balls one by one to the launch pad of the launch device 92 described later, and the game balls are launched into the game area 5a of the game board 5 by the launch device 92. Note that in this embodiment, the sending of the game balls to the launch pad and the subsequent launch of the game balls are operated as a set, so that even if the hand is released from the launch handle 15 at the time when the game ball is sent to the launch pad (before the game ball is launched), the game ball is launched from the launch pad.

The third image display device 72 and the fourth image display device 73 display various effects and various game-related information according to the progress of the game. Specifically, a volume adjustment image for adjusting the volume of the game sounds output from the sound output device 9, a light intensity adjustment image for adjusting the light intensity of various lighting devices and various image displays, a customization image for customizing the game effects, etc. are displayed.

The inner frame 3 is provided with a recessed game board mounting section 25 for mounting the game board 5 from the front opening, a ball circulation mechanism 90 for collecting game balls launched from the launcher 92 into the game area 5a and supplying them back to the launcher 92 in order to circulate the game balls within the gaming machine 1, a locking mechanism 27 for locking the glass frame 4 in a closed state, a glass frame open detection switch 31a (see Figure 26) for detecting the opening (opening/closing) of the glass frame 4, an inner frame open detection switch 31b (see Figure 26) for detecting the opening (opening/closing) of the inner frame 3, and a radio wave detection sensor 54a (see Figure 26) for detecting abnormal radio waves.

The ball circulation mechanism 90 includes a launching device 92 for launching game balls toward the play area 5a, a ball feeding unit 91 for sending game balls one by one to the launch pad of the launching device 92, a lifting and polishing device 95 for lifting the supplied game balls while polishing them, a ball passage unit 94 for allowing game balls that have flowed down the play area 5a to flow down to the entrance of the lifting and polishing device 95 and allowing game balls lifted by the lifting and polishing device 95 to flow down to the entrance of the ball feeding unit 91, and a foul ball passage unit 93 for allowing game balls (foul balls) that have been launched by the launching device 92 but have returned without flying into the play area 5a to join the ball passage unit 94.

The ball delivery unit 91 is provided with a subtraction inlet switch 91b (see FIG. 26) for detecting game balls flowing down the ball passage unit 94, a subtraction solenoid 91a (see FIG. 26) for sending the game balls detected by the subtraction inlet switch 91b to the launching device 92, and a subtraction outlet switch 91c (see FIG. 26) for detecting game balls sent to the launching device 92 by the operation of the subtraction solenoid 91a.

The launch device 92 is provided with a launch pad (not shown) on which the game balls sent out from the ball feeding unit 91 are parked, a launch pad switch 92a (see FIG. 26) for detecting the game balls parked on the launch pad, and a launch solenoid 92b (see FIG. 26) for operating a launch hammer (not shown) for launching the game balls parked on the launch pad.

The foul ball passage unit 93 is provided with a foul ball passage (not shown) for allowing game balls (foul balls) that do not fly into the game area 5a and return to join the ball passage unit 94, and a foul ball switch 93a (see FIG. 26) for detecting game balls flowing down the foul ball passage.

The rear part of the ball passage unit 94 is provided with a winning ball passage (not shown) that collects and allows the game balls that have won the various winning holes provided in the game area 5a to flow down, a winning passage count switch 94a (see FIG. 26) for detecting the game balls (winning balls) flowing down the winning ball passage, a non-winning ball passage (not shown) that collects and allows the game balls that have not won the various winning holes and flow into the out hole to flow down, a non-winning passage count switch 94b (see FIG. 26) for detecting the game balls (out balls) flowing down the non-winning ball passage, a merging passage (not shown) that merges the game balls that have flowed down the winning passage, the game balls that have flowed down the non-winning ball passage, and the game balls that have flowed down the foul ball passage and supplies them to the lifting and polishing device 95, and a lift down switch 94d (see FIG. 26) for detecting the game balls supplied to the lifting and polishing device 95 at the downstream end of the merging passage.

In addition, the front portion of the ball passage unit 94 is provided with a lifted ball passage (not shown) for supplying the game balls lifted by the lifting and polishing device 95 to the ball sending unit 91, a lift up switch 94c (see FIG. 26) for detecting the game balls lifted by the lifting and polishing device 95 at the upstream end of the lifted ball passage, and a switch 94b (see FIG. 27) for detecting the excess (surplus) of game balls (circulating game balls) waiting in the lifted ball passage, which is provided in the midstream portion of the lifted ball passage (downstream of the lift up switch 94c). ), an excess sensor 94e (see FIG. 26) for detecting an excess of balls (circulating balls), a deficiency sensor 94f (see FIG. 26) provided at the downstream part of the lifted ball passage (downstream of the excess sensor 94e) for detecting an insufficiency (shortage) of game balls (game balls circulating) waiting in the lifted ball passage, and a ball removal lever (not shown) for removing game balls from the machine through a ball removal port (not shown) provided at the downstream end of the lifted ball passage (downstream of the deficiency sensor 94f).

The lifting and polishing device 95 is provided with a lift section (not shown) for lifting game balls using the driving force of a motor, a lift origin switch 95b (not shown) for checking the origin position of the lift section, an abrasive (not shown) for polishing the game balls lifted by the lift section, and an abrasive confirmation switch 95a (not shown) for detecting that the abrasive is attached.

The locking mechanism 27 is provided on the right side of the game board attachment portion 25, and the front end of the cylinder in which the keyhole is formed is exposed on the front side of the glass frame 4. When a special key is inserted into the keyhole of the cylinder and rotated in one direction, the lock on the inner frame 3 is released and the inner frame 3 can be opened and closed, and when it is rotated in the other direction, the lock on the glass frame 4 is released and the glass frame 4 can be opened and closed.

Curved inner and outer rails 35 and 36 are provided near the outer edge of the game board 5, and the area surrounded by the inner and outer rails 35 and 36 forms a game area 5a into which game balls can flow. A launched ball guide path 38 is formed between the inner and outer rails 35 and 36, which guides game balls launched by the launching device 92 to the upstream part of the game area 5a. An outlet 39 is formed at the most downstream part of the game area 5a to guide the game balls that have flowed down outside the game area (ball passage unit 94).

A decorative frame 40 is provided in the approximate center of the play area 5a, which is a frame-shaped area known as a center case that restricts the entry of game balls into the interior. This decorative frame 40 divides the play area 5a into a left play area where game balls launched with a first launch force flow down, and a right play area where game balls launched with a second launch force that is stronger than the first launch force flow down, and the left play area and the right play area are connected below the decorative frame 40.

A warp device 41 is provided on the left side of the decorative frame 40 to guide the game balls flowing down the left side game area into the interior of the decorative frame 40, and a stage section 42 is provided on the bottom of the decorative frame 40 to roll the game balls introduced into the decorative frame 40 by the warp device 41 and cause them to flow down below the decorative frame 40.

Three general winning openings 43 through which game balls can always win are provided at intervals at the lower left side of the decorative frame 40, and one general winning opening 43 through which game balls can always win is provided at the lower right side of the decorative frame 40. When a game ball that has won (entered) this general winning opening 43 is detected by the general winning opening detection switch 43a (see FIG. 27), a predetermined number of game balls (e.g., five) are added as prize balls (awarded a game bonus) to the number of game balls (game value) owned by the player, and the number of game balls displayed on the game ball number display 135 and the frame control display 125 described later is updated.

One of the three general winning openings 43 located at the bottom left of the decorative frame 40 (the one on the far left) also serves as the starting area for the normal symbol, and when a game ball that has entered this general winning opening 43 is detected by the general winning opening detection switch 43a, the right to make a winning judgment to determine whether or not to play the auxiliary game described below (opening of the second starting opening 47 described below) is granted (normal symbol judgment information described below is stored).

Below the stage section 42 is a first start hole 45 (first special symbol start winning area) where game balls can always win (enter), and when a game ball that has won (entered) this first start hole 45 is detected by the first start hole detection switch 45a (see FIG. 27), a predetermined number of game balls (e.g., three) are added as prize balls (a game bonus is awarded) to the number of game balls (game value) owned by the player, and the number of game balls displayed on the game ball number display 135 and the frame control display 125 described later is updated. In addition, the right to make a jackpot determination as to whether or not to play a special game (jackpot game) is granted (special symbol determination information described later is stored).

Below the decorative frame 40 and diagonally below and to the right of the first starting hole 45, there is a variable starting section 46 that can be changed from a closed state in which it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter (slot in), to an open state in which it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter, based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (a winning result in the winning judgment described below).

The variable starting section 46 has an upper surface that slopes downward in the left-right direction (left side in FIG. 1) to form a flow path for the game ball, and is provided with a second starting hole opening/closing member 48 that can move in the front-back direction, a second starting hole 47 (starting winning area of the second special pattern) that opens upward directly below the second starting hole opening/closing member 48, a second starting hole detection switch 47a (see FIG. 27) that detects a game ball that has won (entered) the second starting hole 47, and a second starting hole opening/closing solenoid 48b (see FIG. 27) that converts the second starting hole 47 to a closed state by moving the second starting hole opening/closing member 48 forward (winning restriction position) and converts the second starting hole 47 to an open state by moving the second starting hole opening/closing member 48 backward (winning permission position).

When a game ball enters the second start hole 47 that has been opened during the auxiliary game described below and is detected by the second start hole detection switch 47a (see FIG. 27), a predetermined number of game balls (for example, two balls) are added as prize balls (a game bonus is awarded) to the number of game balls owned by the player, and the number of game balls displayed on the game ball count display 135 and the frame control display 125 described below is updated. In addition, the right to make a jackpot determination as to whether or not to play a special game (jackpot game) is granted (special chart determination information described below is stored).

In the right game area to the right of the decorative frame 40, there is a normal gate 44 (starting area for normal symbols) through which game balls can always pass. When a game ball that has passed through the normal gate 44 is detected by the gate detection switch 44a (see FIG. 27), no prize balls (game bonus) are awarded, but the player is given the right to make a winning judgment as to whether or not to play the auxiliary game (opening of the second starting hole 47 described later) (normal symbol judgment information described later is stored). Note that game balls are easier to win (pass) through the normal gate 44 than through the general winning hole 43, which also serves as the starting area for the normal symbols described above.

Below the normal gate 44, there is a variable winning section 49 (variable winning device) that can be changed from a closed state in which it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to win (enter the prize) to an open state in which it is possible or easy to win based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (a jackpot is determined in the jackpot determination).

The variable prize winning section 49 (variable prize winning device) has an upper surface that slopes downward in the left-right direction (right side in FIG. 1) to form a flow path for game balls, and is provided with a large prize winning opening opening/closing member 51 that can move forward and backward, a large prize winning opening 50 (winning area) that opens upward directly below the large prize winning opening opening/closing member 51, a large prize winning opening detection switch 50a (see FIG. 27) that detects game balls that have won (entered) the large prize winning opening 50, and a large prize winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b (see FIG. 27) that converts the large prize winning opening 50 to a closed state by moving the large prize winning opening opening/closing member 51 forward (winning restriction position) and converts the large prize winning opening 50 to an open state by moving the large prize winning opening opening/closing member 51 backward (winning permitted position).

Then, when the large prize opening opening member 51 moves backwards and the large prize opening 50 is converted from a closed state to an open state during a jackpot game described later, and a game ball that has flowed down the top surface of the large prize opening opening member 51 or that has reached the large prize opening 50 enters the large prize opening 50 and is detected by the large prize opening detection switch 50a, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) are added as prize balls (a game bonus) to the number of game balls owned by the player, and the number of game balls displayed on the game ball number display 135 and the frame control display 125 described later are updated.

The game balls launched into the left side game area will either flow directly down along the outer edge of the decorative frame 40, or flow into the warp device 41 and then flow down through the stage section 42, and will enter one of the three general winning openings 43 or the first starting opening 45 located below the decorative frame 40, or will flow into the out opening 39. Therefore, they will not enter (pass through) the general winning gate 44, general winning opening 43, or variable winning section 49 (large winning opening 50) located in the right side game area.

In addition, game balls launched into the right-hand game area flow down through the flow path on the right side of the decorative frame 40, and after almost all of them pass through the normal gate 44, they will win one of the general winning openings 43, the variable starting section 46 (second starting opening 47), and the variable winning section 49 (large winning opening 50) provided in the right-hand game area, or flow into the outlet 39. Therefore, they will not win in the general winning opening 43 or the first starting opening 45 provided in the left-hand game area.

On the back side of the game board 5, there is a safe ball flow path that accepts safe balls (winning balls) that have won the general winning opening 43, the first starting opening 45, the second starting opening 47, and the large winning opening 50, and allows them to flow down and then into the winning ball passage of the ball passage unit 94, and an out ball flow path that accepts out balls (non-winning balls) that have flowed into the out opening 39, and allows them to flow down and then into the non-winning ball passage of the ball passage unit 94, and an out ball detection switch 39a (see Figure 27) is provided at the most downstream part of the out ball flow path to detect out balls.

Outside the play area 5a, there is provided a main information display device 59 consisting of a first special symbol display device 60, a second special symbol display device 61, a normal symbol display device 62, a first special symbol reserved indicator 63, a second special symbol reserved indicator 64, a normal symbol reserved indicator 65, a round count indicator 66, a right hit indicator 67, a status confirmation indicator 68, and a game status indicator (not shown). This main information display device 59 is composed of multiple LEDs.

The first special symbol display 60 is a variable display for displaying (informing) the result of a jackpot determination for a first special symbol, which is made based on the entry (entry) of a game ball into the first starting hole 45, the second special symbol display 61 is a variable display for displaying (informing) the result of a jackpot determination for a second special symbol, which is made based on the entry (entry) of a game ball into the second starting hole 47, and the normal symbol display 62 is a variable display for displaying (informing) the result of a hit determination for a normal symbol, which is made based on the entry (passage, entry) of a game ball into the general winning hole 43 or the normal gate 44, which also serve as the starting area for the normal symbol.

The jackpot determination corresponds to obtaining special symbol determination information (random number value for jackpot determination, random number value for special symbol determination, random number value for reach determination, random number value for special symbol fluctuation pattern determination, etc.) when the game ball enters (enters) the first starting hole 45 or the second starting hole 47, and determining whether or not to execute a jackpot game based on the obtained special symbol determination information.

When a jackpot is determined based on a game ball entering the first starting hole 45, the first special symbol is displayed on the first special symbol display 60 in a varying manner, and after a predetermined time has passed, the first special symbol is displayed stationarily to notify the result of the determination. When a jackpot is determined based on a game ball entering the second starting hole 47, the second special symbol is displayed stationarily to notify the result of the determination, and after a predetermined time has passed, the second special symbol is displayed stationarily to notify the result of the determination.

The first special symbol display 60 and the second special symbol display 61 are each composed of eight LEDs, and the lighting state of the LEDs changes (moving lighting) at a predetermined cycle (32 ms) when each special symbol changes. When a special symbol is displayed in a static state, the LEDs light up in a manner that notifies the result of the jackpot determination (jackpot state, miss state).

In this embodiment, a "jackpot" refers to a state in which it has been determined in the jackpot determination that a jackpot game (special game) will be played. A "jackpot game" refers to a game state that is advantageous to a player who plays a round game in which the big prize opening 50 is converted from a closed state to an open state in a predetermined manner a predetermined number of times (e.g., 4 times, 10 times, etc.) with intervals in between, and in which the player is likely to win prize balls.

The maximum number of times the jackpot opening 50 can be opened and the maximum opening time for each round of play are preset, but if a predetermined number of game balls (e.g., 10 balls) enter the jackpot opening even before the maximum number of times or maximum opening time is reached, one round of play ends. In this embodiment, it is possible to play one of several types of jackpot games (special games) that differ in the degree of advantage given to the player.

A hit determination refers to obtaining normal symbol determination information (random number value for hit determination, random number value for normal symbol determination, random number value for normal symbol variation pattern determination, etc.) based on the winning (passing through, entering) of a game ball into the normal winning opening 43 or normal symbol gate 44, which also serve as the starting area for the normal symbol, and determining whether or not to execute an auxiliary game based on the obtained normal symbol determination information. When a hit determination is made, the normal symbol display 62 displays the variation of the normal symbol, and after a predetermined time has passed, a stationary normal symbol display is made to notify the judgment result.

The normal symbol display 62 is composed of three LEDs, and the LEDs flash at a predetermined interval or sequence when displaying the normal symbol in a variable manner. When displaying a normal symbol in a static manner, the LEDs light up in a manner that notifies the result of the auxiliary game judgment (win or miss).

In this embodiment, "win" refers to a state in which it has been determined in the auxiliary game judgment that an auxiliary game (a winning game) will be executed. "Auxiliary game" refers to a game state in which the second starting hole 47 is opened in a predetermined manner.

The maximum number of times the second start hole 47 can be opened and the maximum opening time during the auxiliary game (winning game) are preset, but the auxiliary game (winning game) ends when a predetermined number of game balls (e.g., 10 balls) enter the second start hole 47 even before the maximum number of times the balls can be opened and the maximum opening time are reached. In other words, the "auxiliary game" is a game state in which the conditions for starting the variable display of the second special symbol are likely to be met. In this embodiment, multiple types of auxiliary games (winning games) with different degrees of advantage to the player are provided.

The first special symbol reserved indicator 63 is composed of two LEDs, and is intended to display the first reserved number (U1), which is the number of special symbol determination information (first reserved) stored when a game ball enters (enters) the first starting hole 45, and lights up or flashes in a manner indicating the number of first reserved items. Note that up to a maximum of four first reserved items can be stored, but the number may be more or less than four.

The second special symbol reserved indicator 64 is composed of two LEDs, and is intended to display the second reserved number (U2), which is the number of special symbol determination information (second reserved) stored when a game ball enters (enters) the second starting hole 47, and lights up or flashes in a manner indicating the number of second reserved. Note that, although a maximum of four second reserved items can be stored, the number may be less than or more than four, or no second reserved items may be stored.

The normal symbol reserve indicator 65 is composed of two LEDs, and is intended to display the number of reserved normal symbols, which is the number of normal symbol judgment information (reserved normal symbols) stored when a game ball enters (passes through) the normal symbol gate 44, and lights up or flashes in a manner indicating the number of reserved normal symbols. Note that up to four reserved normal symbols can be stored, but the number may be less or more than four, or no reserved normal symbols may be stored.

The first special symbol display 60 and/or the second special symbol display 61 can be configured with a seven-segment LED. For example, if the jackpot is determined to be a jackpot, numbers such as "3" or "7" can be displayed as static numbers, and if a jackpot is determined to be a miss, a static "-" can be displayed, and during the varying display, the light can be turned off and the "-" can be displayed alternately.

The round number indicator 66 is made up of six LEDs and is intended to display the number of rounds when a jackpot state (special game) occurs. When a jackpot game starts, the LEDs start to light up in a predetermined manner indicating the number of rounds, the LEDs continue to light up during the jackpot game, and when the jackpot game ends, the LEDs are turned off. For example, if the jackpot game has four rounds, only the leftmost LED lights up, and if the jackpot game has ten rounds, all LEDs light up.

The right-hit indicator 67 is made up of one LED and is used to issue a right-hit notification that prompts the player to fire the game ball toward the right-side game area (a so-called right hit). Basically, the LED does not light up during normal game play, but lights up during a jackpot state (special game), during a special probability game state (described later), and during a specific time-saving game state.

The status confirmation indicator 68 is composed of one LED and is used to notify the player that the time-saving mode is in effect. When the time-saving mode begins, the LED lights up, and when the time-saving mode ends, the LED goes out.

The game status indicator (not shown) is composed of one LED and is used to notify the player that the game is in the high probability game state or the time-limited game state. When the game machine 1 is powered on, the LED lights up if the game is in the high probability game state or the time-limited game state, and then turns off when the high probability game state or the time-limited game state ends (the game state changes).

Inside the play area 5a, a sub information display device 80 is provided, which is made up of a sub first change indicator, a sub second change indicator, a sub first hold indicator, a sub second hold indicator, a sub regular map change indicator, a sub regular map hold indicator, and a sub right-hit indicator. This sub information display device 80 is basically composed of LEDs.

The sub-first variable indicator is for displaying (informing) whether or not the first special symbol is being displayed, and the sub-second variable indicator is for displaying (informing) whether or not the second special symbol is being displayed, and each is composed of one LED. Then, when the display of the corresponding special symbol begins to change, the LED flashes (on for 0.5 seconds → off for 0.5 seconds) at a predetermined cycle (1 second) to display the first lamp symbol LZ1 or the second lamp symbol LZ2, and goes out when the corresponding special symbol is displayed stationary.

The result of the special symbol jackpot determination may be announced on the sub-first variable indicator or the sub-second variable indicator. In this case, the LED may be lit in the event of a jackpot and turned off in the event of a miss.

The sub-first hold indicator is for displaying the number of first hold information items (first hold number) described below, and the sub-second hold indicator is for displaying the number of second hold information items (second hold number) described below, and each is composed of two LEDs. When the hold number is "0", the left and right LEDs are turned off, when the hold number is "1", the left LED is turned on and the right LED is turned off, when the hold number is "2", the left LED is turned on, when the hold number is "3", the left LED is blinking and the right LED is turned on, and when the hold number is "4", the left and right LEDs are blinking.

The sub-regular symbol variation display is used to display (announce) the result of the winning lottery, and is composed of one LED. Then, when the variation display of the regular symbol starts, the LED flashes (varies) at a specified interval. Then, when the regular symbol is displayed in a static state, the mode indicating the result of the winning lottery (lights up in the case of a win, and goes out in the case of a loss) is displayed in a static state.

In addition, the sub-regular pattern change indicator may be configured to flash while displaying a regular pattern change, and to light up or go out when the regular pattern stops, so that it is possible to know whether or not the regular pattern change is being displayed.

The sub-regular map reserve indicator is used to display the number of reserved regular map memories (regular map reserve number) and is composed of two LEDs. When the regular map reserve number is "0", the left and right LEDs are turned off, when the regular map reserve number is "1", the left LED is lit and the right LED is turned off, when the regular map reserve number is "2", the left and right LEDs are lit, when the regular map reserve number is "3", the left LED flashes and the right LED is lit, and when the regular map reserve number is "4", the left and right LEDs flash.

The sub right-hit indicator is intended to encourage the player to shoot the game ball toward the right-hand area of the game area 5a (so-called right hit), and is composed of one LED. The LED lights up during the jackpot state (special game) and the time-saving state, and is turned off in other game states.

A first image display device 70 (main display device) consisting of a liquid crystal display is provided at the back of the performance space 40a defined inside the decorative frame 40, a second image display device 71 (central sub-display device) consisting of a liquid crystal display smaller in size and display area than the first image display device 70 is provided at the bottom of the performance space 40a and in front of the first image display device 70, and a movable performance device 77 for executing action performances is provided at the top of the performance space 40a.

The first image display device 70 and the second image display device 71 display various effects according to the progress of the game. The effects include a customer waiting demo effect that is performed when the variable display of the special symbol is not being executed, a variable effect involving the variable display of multiple performance symbols 70a that is performed when the variable display of the special symbol is being executed, a variable display (update variable) of the special symbol TZ (the so-called fourth symbol) that is performed when the variable display of the special symbol is being executed, and a jackpot effect that is performed during the execution of a jackpot game.

The second image display device 71 can also perform a moving effect by moving using a liquid crystal movable device (not shown) composed of a solenoid, motor, etc. while the first image display device 70 is performing a moving effect.

Specifically, the movement effect is achieved by vertical movement (rising and descending) between a standby position (lower position) located near the end of the first image display device 70 and a performance position (upper position) located near the center of the first image display device 70. Note that the movement direction of the second image display device 71 may be left-right or front-back, or the movement effect may be achieved by operating the performance button 17.

The display section (effective display area) of the first image display device 70 includes a variable display area for displaying three performance patterns 70a (left pattern, center pattern, right pattern) and a display area for executing a display performance (such as displaying a background image) according to the performance mode related to the execution of the variable performance.

The performance pattern 70a is composed of patterns showing numbers from "1" to "9", for example, and starts to change in response to the start of the changing display of the special pattern executed by the first special pattern display device 60 and the second special pattern display device 61, and stops in response to the stop of the changing display of the special pattern. The performance pattern 70a may be a pattern showing the alphabet such as "A" to "F".

The effect symbols 70a are displayed stationary for a predetermined time (e.g., 0.5 seconds) in a state that notifies the result of the jackpot determination (miss state, jackpot state). A jackpot state is a combination of the same effect symbols 70a, such as "777" or "555," and a miss state is any other state.

The display of the effect pattern 70a changes in a vertical scroll mode, but it may also scroll horizontally, or it may switch on the spot or rotate (spin).

In addition, during the changing display (changing performance) of the performance pattern 70a, various performance images such as background images and characters, movies, etc. are displayed on the first image display device 70 and the second image display device 71 depending on the result of the jackpot determination, thereby increasing the player's anticipation for the execution of the jackpot game (special game).

The first image display device 70 is provided with a first hold icon display area 70B for displaying a number of first hold icons (first hold information) corresponding to the first hold number (U1) in normal play mode, a second hold icon display area 70D for displaying a number of second hold icons (second hold information) corresponding to the second hold number (U2) in time-saving play mode, an icon display area 70C for displaying the icon (execution information) indicating that a variable presentation is being executed, a first hold number display area 70E for displaying the first hold number (U1) numerically, and a second hold number display area 70F for displaying the second hold number (U2) numerically.

The first hold icon display area 70B is divided into a first display section (first area), a second display section (second area), a third display section (third area), and a fourth display section (fourth area) from the side closest to the icon display area 70C, and the first display section to the fourth display section display a number of first hold icons corresponding to the first hold number (U1).

Specifically, in the first pending icon display area, the first display section of 70B displays the first pending icon indicating the first pending information in which the first special pattern variable display is executed first, the second display section displays the first pending icon indicating the first pending information in which the first special pattern variable display is executed second, the third display section displays the first pending icon indicating the first pending information in which the first special pattern variable display is executed third, and the fourth display section displays the first pending icon indicating the first pending information in which the first special pattern variable display is executed fourth.

The second hold icon display area 70D is divided into a first display section (first area), a second display section (second area), a third display section (third area), and a fourth display section (fourth area) from the left, and the first to fourth display sections display a number of second hold icons corresponding to the second hold number (U2).

Specifically, in the second hold icon display area 70D, the first display section displays a second hold icon indicating the second hold memory in which the variable display of the second special pattern is executed first, the second display section displays a second hold icon indicating the second hold memory in which the variable display of the second special pattern is executed second, the third display section displays a second hold icon indicating the second hold memory in which the variable display of the second special pattern is executed third, and the fourth display section displays a second hold icon indicating the second hold memory in which the variable display of the second special pattern is executed fourth.

The icon display area 70C is formed directly above a pedestal image to clearly distinguish it from the first hold icon display area 70B and the second hold icon display area 70D, and the icon is displayed as if it is sitting or floating on top of this pedestal image.

Specifically, as the variable display of the first special pattern (performance pattern 70a) begins, the first reserved icons displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B move (shift) one by one toward the icon display area 70C, and the first reserved icon displayed in the first display section of the first reserved icon display area 70B moves (shifts) to the icon display area 70C, becoming the icon, and the icon disappears (is erased) when the variable display of the first special pattern (performance pattern 70a) ends. In other words, a disappearance (erasing) performance of the icon is performed.

In addition, as the display of the second special pattern (performance pattern 70a) begins, the second reserved icons displayed in the second reserved icon display area 70D move (shift) one by one toward the icon display area 70C, and the second reserved icon displayed in the first display section of the second reserved icon display area 70D moves (shifts) to the icon display area 70C, becoming the icon, and the icon disappears (is erased) when the display of the second special pattern (performance pattern 70a) ends. Note that the icon may be made to disappear during the display of the special pattern (performance pattern 70a).

The movable performance device 77 has a first movable member 77a and a second movable member 77b that can be operated, and can perform a motion performance by making the first movable member 77a and the second movable member 77b perform a predetermined motion during a variable performance or a big win game performance executed by the first image display device 70. In addition, the first movable member 77a and the second movable member 77b are provided with a board lighting device 76 having multiple decorative LEDs, and can emit light in a predetermined manner while the motion performance is being executed.

Specifically, the first movable member 77a moves (rising and descending) between a standby position located toward the end (upper) of the first image display device 70 and a performance position located toward the center (lower) of the first image display device 70. The second movable member 77b moves between a standby position that covers a portion of the front of the first movable member 77a and a performance position where it retreats from the front of the first movable member 77a.

On the back side of the game board 5, there is a main control device 110A that incorporates a main control board 110 that controls the progress of the game, a presentation control device 130A that incorporates a presentation control board 130 that controls the presentation of the game, and an upper cover member 23 made of transparent resin that covers the rear of the main control device 110A and the presentation control device 130A, and the main control device 110A and the presentation control device 130A are arranged so that they are lined up one above the other.

At the rear of the performance control device 130A, a changeover switch 22 is provided for switching to one of a number of adjustment modes in which the volume of the performance sound output from the audio output device 9 and the reference value of the light intensity of the various light sources (various lighting devices, various display devices) are set, and in the normal state, the rear is covered by an upper cover member 23.

On the back side of the inner frame 3, there is a frame control device 120A (value control device) incorporating a frame control board 120 that controls the number of game balls (game value amount) owned by the player and controls information communication with the dedicated unit 170, a power supply device 160A incorporating a power supply board 160, a lending device connection terminal board 100 provided with a lending device connection terminal 101 for connecting dedicated wiring for communication with the dedicated unit 170 installed alongside the gaming machine 1, and a lower cover member 120B made of transparent resin that covers the upper rear of the frame control device 120A.

The power supply unit 160A is located near one of the left and right ends of the lower part of the inner frame 3 (the right side in Figure 4), and on one of the left and right sides (the part near the rotation axis of the inner frame 3 on the right side in Figure 4), there is provided an outlet for a power cord with a power plug 161 at the end, as well as a power switch 164 that can be turned ON and OFF.

The frame control device 120A is positioned so that it overlaps the rear of the power supply device 160A, toward the other left or right side of the inner frame 3 (near the free rotation end of the inner frame 3, which is the left side in Figure 4), so that the power cord outlet and power switch of the power supply device 160A are exposed at the rear.

A rental device connection terminal board 100 for communicating with the dedicated unit 170 is provided on the back side of the inner frame 3 above the power switch 164, and the rental device connection terminal board 100 is provided with a rental device connection terminal 101 into which a connector provided at the end of a dedicated cable for communicating with the dedicated unit 170 is inserted.

The frame control board 120 built into the frame control device 120A is provided with a frame control display 125 for displaying the number of game balls (game value amount) owned by the player, similar to the game ball count display 135 provided in the glass frame 4, but the game ball count display 135 and the frame control display 125 are offset in the vertical and horizontal directions of the gaming machine 1. Specifically, the game ball count display 135 is disposed closer to the rotation axis of the glass frame 4, and the frame control display 125 is disposed lower than the game ball count display 135 and closer to the free rotation end of the inner frame 3.

In this way, by arranging the game ball count display 135 on the front side of the gaming machine closer to the rotation axis of the glass frame 4, even when the gaming store clerk opens the inner frame 3 or the glass frame 4, the movement range of the game ball count display 135 is small and the visibility of the game ball count display 135 is not extremely reduced, making it possible to improve the convenience of the gaming store clerk and the player when checking the display contents of the game ball count display 135.

In addition, because the frame control display 125 on the back side of the gaming machine is located near the free rotation end of the inner frame 3, when the gaming store clerk opens the inner frame 3 to check the frame control display 125, the frame control display 125 is easier to see than if the frame control display 125 was located closer to the rotation axis of the inner frame 3, making it possible to improve the convenience of the gaming store clerk when checking the display content of the frame control display 125.

The lower cover member 120B covers only the upper side of the frame control device 120A (such as the various female connectors 127a to 127f exposed from the frame control board case 300 described later), and does not cover the various buttons provided on the lower side of the frame control device 120A (the game ball number clear button 121b related to the game ball number clear switch 121 described later, the ball removal button 122b related to the ball removal switch 122, and the error reset button 123b related to the error reset switch 123 described later). This makes it easier to operate the various buttons provided on the lower side of the frame control device 120A (the game ball number clear button 121b related to the game ball number clear switch 121 described later, the ball removal button 122b related to the ball removal switch 122, and the error reset button 123b related to the error reset switch 123 described later), which improves the convenience of the game store staff.

The lower cover member 120B is also designed not to cover the various stickers (the frame control number sticker 308 and the operation guide sticker 309 described below) attached to the frame control device 120A, or the frame control indicator 125 mounted on the frame control board 120. Therefore, the lower cover member 120B does not obstruct the visibility of the various stickers and the frame control indicator 125, which improves convenience for game store staff.

In addition, a winning limit device operation indicator for displaying the operation status of the winning limit device described later may be provided on the front side of the glass frame 4. The winning limit device operation indicator may be configured with an LED or 7-segment display that lights up when the winning limit device is operating, or the winning limit device operation indicator may be configured with a sliding panel that can be operated by game store staff (it cannot be operated when the glass frame 4 is closed, but can be operated when the glass frame 4 is open), and the panel section may slide to display the inactive state when the winning limit device is not operating, and slide to display the active state when it is operating.

(Configuration of main control device)
The configuration of main control device 110A will be described with reference to Figures 5 and 6. Figure 5(a) is a front view of main control device 110A, Figure 5(b) is a rear view of main control device 110A, and Figure 6 is an exploded perspective view of main control device 110A.

The main control device 110A comprises a rectangular main control board 110 on which various electronic components (main control unit 110m, various connectors, various switches, integrated circuits, capacitors, resistors, resistor arrays, etc.) are mounted, a main control board case 200 made of transparent resin that houses the main control board 110 inside, a sealing seal 223 for restricting the opening of the main control board case 200 (leaving a trace of opening), a cutter member 222 made of transparent resin for breaking the sealing seal 223, and a sealing cover member 221 made of transparent resin that is attached to the main control board case 200 so as to cover the sealing seal 223.

At one end of the short side of the main control board 110 (near the long side at the back in FIG. 6), there are mounted a main control unit 110m (a one-chip microcomputer having a CPU, ROM, and RWM) that controls the progress of the game, a main inspection connector 116 into which a male connector is inserted at the end of the wiring for electrically connecting to an inspection device for inspecting the main control device 110A (specifically, the main control unit 110m) at the game center, and an information display 115 for displaying the setting values described below.

In addition, multiple female connectors 117a to 117g are mounted on the other short end of the main control board 110 (near the long side in front of Figure 6) into which male connectors provided at the ends of the wiring for electrical connection to the frame control board 120 and the performance control board 130 are inserted.

Also, at one end of the main control board 110 in the longitudinal direction (near the short side on the right side in Figure 6), there are mounted an RWM clear switch 111a which, when operated by a gaming store clerk, inputs a signal to clear the contents stored in the main RAM 110c of the main control unit 110m or to update a setting value which is the stage of the advantageous degree of the game (corresponding to the probability of winning the jackpot in the jackpot determination described below), and a setting key switch 112a which, when operated by a gaming store clerk using a setting key, inputs a signal to transition to a state in which the setting value can be changed or a state in which the setting value can be confirmed.

The main control board case 200 is equipped with an upper case member 201 formed in a recessed shape that is open at the bottom and covers the front side of the main control board 110, and a lower case member 211 formed in a recessed shape that is open at the top and covers the back side of the main control board 110, and by closing the upper case member 201 and the lower case member 211, a storage space for storing the main control board 110 is formed.

The upper case member 201 has an opposing wall (top plate portion 202, etc.) that faces the surface of the main control board 110 and serves as the top plate of the recessed chamber, an upper peripheral wall portion 203 that hangs down (extends) from the end (peripheral edge) of the opposing wall and serves as the side wall of the recessed chamber, and an upper flange portion 210 for mounting the main control device 110A to the back side of the game board 5.

The opposing walls of the upper case member 201 have a top plate portion 202 at the highest position (uniform thickness of 2 mm), a first step portion 205a that forms a step with the top plate portion 202 at one end side of the upper case member 201 in the longitudinal direction and one end side in the lateral direction (upper left corner of Figure 5(a)), and a second step portion 205b that forms a step with the top plate portion 202 at the other end side of the upper case member 201 in the lateral direction (lower side of Figure 5(a)).

The distance from the surface of the main control board 110 decreases in the following order: top plate portion 202 (first opposing wall) > first step portion 205a (second opposing wall) > second step portion 205b (third opposing wall).

A main control number sticker attachment section 207 is provided to the right of the center of the top panel 202 (at a position that does not overlap the main control section 110m, RWM clear switch 111a, setting key switch 112a, or information display 115) for attaching a main control number sticker 208 printed with the management information (identification information) of the main control board 110.

The main control number sticker attachment section 207 is a rectangular area formed by recessing part of the top panel 202 one step downward. A main control number sticker 208 is attached to the main control number sticker attachment section 207, and a model information sticker 209 on which model information of the gaming machine 1 is printed is affixed to the attachment area lined up on the left side of the main control number sticker attachment section 207 (in a position that does not overlap the main control section 110m, RWM clear switch 111a, setting key switch 112a, or information display 115).

The surface of the main control number sticker affixing section 207 is designed to be approximately flush or flush with the back surface of the top panel section 202 (the surface facing the main control board 110). Therefore, the height (distance, width) from the surface of the main control board 110 to the main control number sticker 208 is approximately the same as the height (distance, width) from the surface of the main control board 110 to the back surface of the top panel section 202 (the surface facing the main control board 110).

At a position on the top panel 202 corresponding to the RWM clear switch 111a mounted on the main control board 110, an opening is formed to allow the RWM clear switch 111a to be operated, and an RWM clear button 111b for pressing the operation part of the RWM clear switch 111a is loosely fitted in this opening so that it can move up and down. By pressing the RWM clear button 111b, the RWM clear switch 111a can be turned ON.

In addition, a cylinder opening for exposing the key cylinder of the setting key switch 112a is formed at a position on the top panel 202 corresponding to the setting key switch 112a mounted on the main control board 110, and the setting key can be inserted into the keyhole of the key cylinder and rotated.

At a position of the first step 205a corresponding to the main inspection connector 116 mounted on the main control board 110, an opening is formed to expose the main inspection connector 116 to the outside, and a male connector provided at the end of the wiring extending from the inspection device can be inserted into the main inspection connector 116.

In the second stage 205b, at positions corresponding to the multiple female connectors 117a-117g mounted on the main control board 110, multiple openings are formed to expose the multiple female connectors 117a-117f to the outside, and male connectors provided at the ends of wiring for electrical connection to the frame control device 120A and performance control device 130A can be inserted into the various female connectors 117a-117g.

The lower case member 211 has an opposing wall (bottom plate portion 212, etc.) that faces the back surface of the main control board 110 and serves as the bottom plate of the recessed chamber, a lower peripheral wall portion 213 that rises (extends) upward from the end portion (peripheral edge) of the opposing wall and serves as the side wall of the recessed chamber, and a lower flange portion 220 that cooperates with the upper flange portion 210 of the upper case member 201 to attach the main control device 110A to the back surface of the game board 5.

At one longitudinal end of the main control board case 200 (left side in FIG. 5(a)), a main crimping portion 204A is provided for sealing the main control board case 200 when the upper case member 201 and the lower case member 211 are closed with the main control board 110 housed therein, and at the other longitudinal end of the main control board case 200 (right side in FIG. 6(a)), a seal sticker attachment portion 206A is provided for accommodating a cutter member 222 and attaching a seal sticker 223 across the upper case member 201 and the lower case member 211.

The main crimping part 204A has an upper crimping part 204 that is connected to the upper case member 201 via a breakage part, a lower crimping part 214 that is connected to the lower case member 211 via a breakage part, and a fastening member that is pressed from the upper crimping part 204 into the lower crimping part 214 to fasten the upper crimping part 204 and the lower crimping part 214.

The upper crimping portion 204 has a first upper crimping portion 204a that is used to initially seal the main control board case 200, and a second upper crimping portion 204b that is used to reseal the main control board case 200 after the main control board case 200 is first opened, and the first upper crimping portion 204a and the second upper crimping portion 204b are arranged side by side in the short direction of the main control board case 200.

The lower crimping portion 214 has a first lower crimping portion 214a that is used to initially seal the main control board case 200, and a second lower crimping portion 214b that is used to reseal the main control board case 200 after the main control board case 200 is first opened, and the first lower crimping portion 214a and the second lower crimping portion 214b are arranged side by side in the short direction of the main control board case 200.

The sealing seal affixing portion 206A has an upper affixing portion 206a that protrudes laterally from the upper peripheral wall portion 203 of the upper case member 201, and a lower affixing portion 216a that protrudes laterally from the lower peripheral wall portion 213 of the lower case member 211, and an accommodation space for the cutter member 222 is formed between the upper affixing portion 206a and the lower affixing portion 216a that are arranged vertically. Then, with the cutter member 222 accommodated in the accommodation space, the sealing seal 223 is affixed across the upper affixing portion 206a and the lower affixing portion 206b, thereby sealing the board case.

The seal cover member 221 is formed in a recessed chamber with one side open, and has an engagement portion (not shown) formed inside the recessed chamber that engages with both longitudinal ends of the cutter member 222. When the seal cover member 221 is attached to the main control board case 200 so as to enclose the seal seal attachment portion 206A with the seal seal 223 affixed thereto, the engagement portion formed inside the recessed chamber of the seal cover member 221 engages with the cutter member 222, protecting the seal seal 223.

When the main control board case 200 configured in this manner is first opened for inspection or the like, the seal cover member 221 is first removed, and at this time the cutter member 222 engaged with the seal cover member 221 moves in conjunction with the movement of the seal cover member 221, thereby breaking the sealing seal 223 and releasing the seal of the main control board case 200. Then, the breaking portion of the first upper crimping portion 204a and the breaking portion of the first lower crimping portion 214a are broken using a tool such as pliers to release the seal provided by the main crimping portion 204A, and the main control board case 200 is opened.

When resealing the main control board case 200 after opening it, the main control board 110 is housed in the main control board case 200, and the second upper crimping portion 204b and the second lower crimping portion 214b are fixed with a fixing member to reseal the main control board case 200. Then, the seal cover member 221 is attached so as to enclose the seal seal affixing portion 206A. Note that, although the cutter member 222 is not housed in the seal seal affixing portion 206A when resealing the main control board case 200, it may be housed therein.

In this way, the main control number sticker 208 and the model information sticker 209 are affixed to the main control board case 200 in positions (areas) that do not overlap with the main control unit 110m, RWM clear switch 111a, setting key switch 112a, and information display 115 mounted on the main control board 110. This ensures visibility of electronic components that require a high level of visual inspection or operation, and improves convenience for game store staff.

In addition, various female connectors 117 for transmitting signals to and from the frame control device 120A, which is provided below the main control device 110A, are mounted on one end of the main control board 110 closer to the frame control device 120A, and the main control unit 110m and information display 115 are mounted on the other end of the main control board 110. This makes it possible to avoid the inconvenience of the wiring for electrically connecting the main control device 110A and the frame control device 120A overlapping with the main control unit 110m and information display 115, and ensures the visibility of the main control unit 110m and information display 115.

Note that multiple female connectors 117a-117g are mounted on one short end of the main control board 110 for transmitting signals to and from the frame control board 120 and the performance control board 130, but they may be mounted on one long end of the main control board 110, or the female connector for transmitting signals to and from the frame control board 120, which is located below the main control board 110, may be mounted on the end of the main control board 110 closer to the frame control board 120, and the female connector for transmitting signals to and from the performance control board 130, which is located above the main control board 110, may be mounted on the end of the main control board 110 closer to the performance control board 130, or other mounting arrangements may be used.

In addition, the information display 115 is mounted on the other end of the main control board 110 in the short direction, but it may be located closer to the center of the main control board 110 as long as it is near the RWM clear switch 111a or the setting key switch 112a, or it may be mounted in another position.

In addition, in the case of a gaming machine 1 that is not equipped with a setting key switch 112a (a setting change mode for changing a setting value or a setting confirmation mode for confirming and displaying a setting value), the information display 115 may not be implemented.

(Relationship between the distances between two points on each part of the main control device)
The relationship of the distance between two points for each part of main control device 110A will be described with reference to Fig. 7. The left diagram of Fig. 7 is a cross-sectional view taken along line AA in Fig. 5, and the right diagram of Fig. 7 is an enlarged view of the part circled by the dotted line in the left diagram.

First, the main control unit 110m is operated by inserting multiple terminals protruding from the bottom of the main body, which has a vertical width greater than the width between the two sides, into through holes formed in the main control board 110. On one side of the main body, chip information 110m1 (chip model number, product code, manufacturer name, etc.) indicating the main control unit 110m is printed in black, and a main chip model information sticker 110m2 on which model information (manufacturer name, model name, etc.) is printed is affixed next to the chip information 110m1.

The distance (height, width) L1 in the thickness direction of the board from the surface of the main control board 110 to the surface (model information sticker 209) of the top plate 202 of the main control board case 200 is greater than the distance (height, width) L2 in the thickness direction of the board from the surface of the main control board 110 to the back surface (main management number sticker 208) of the top plate 202 of the main control board case 200.

The distance (height, width) L2 in the thickness direction of the board from the surface of the main control board 110 to the underside (main control number sticker 208) of the top plate 202 of the main control board case 200 is greater than the distance (height, width) L4 in the thickness direction of the board from the surface of the main control board 110 to the upper end of the main control unit 110m.

The distance (height, width) L4 in the thickness direction of the board from the surface of the main control board 110 to the upper end of the main control unit 110m is greater than the distance (height, width) L7 in the thickness direction of the board from the surface of the main control board 110 to the upper end of the main chip model information sticker 110m2 that is affixed to the side of the main control unit 110m (one-chip microcomputer).

The distance (height, width) L7 in the thickness direction of the board from the surface of the main control board 110 to the upper end of the main chip model information sticker 110m2 affixed to the side of the main control unit 110m (one-chip microcomputer) is greater than the distance (height, width) L3 in the thickness direction of the board from the surface of the main control board 110 to the upper end of the main inspection connector 116.

The distance (height, width) L3 in the thickness direction of the board from the surface of the main control board 110 to the upper end of the main inspection connector 116 is approximately the same as the distance (height, width) L5 in the thickness direction of the board from the surface of the main control board 110 to the upper end of the chip information 110m1 printed on the side of the main control unit 110m (one-chip microcomputer).

The distance (height, width) L5 in the thickness direction of the board from the surface of the main control board 110 to the upper end of the chip information 110m1 printed on the side of the main control unit 110m (one-chip microcomputer) is greater than the distance (height, width) L6 in the thickness direction of the board from the surface of the main control board 110 to the lower end of the chip information 110m1 printed on the side of the main control unit 110m (one-chip microcomputer).

The distance (height, width) L6 in the thickness direction of the board from the surface of the main control board 110 to the bottom end of the chip information 110m1 printed on the side of the main control unit 110m (one-chip microcomputer) is greater than the distance (height, width) L8 in the thickness direction of the board from the surface of the main control board 110 to the bottom end of the main chip model information sticker 110m2 affixed to the side of the main control unit 110m (one-chip microcomputer).

The distance (height, width) L2 in the thickness direction of the board from the surface of the main control board 110 to the underside of the top plate 202 of the main control board case 200 (main control number sticker 208) is greater than the distance (height, width) H5 in the thickness direction of the board from the display surface of the information display 115 to the surface of the top plate 202 of the main control board case 200 (model information sticker 209).

The distance (height, width) H5 in the thickness direction of the board from the display surface of the information display 115 to the surface (model information sticker 209) of the top plate 202 of the main control board case 200 is approximately the same as the distance (height, width) H7 in the thickness direction of the board from the upper end of the main inspection connector 116 to the surface (model information sticker 209) of the top plate 202 of the main control board case 200.

The distance (height, width) H7 in the thickness direction of the board from the upper end of the main inspection connector 116 to the surface (model information sticker 209) of the top plate 202 of the main control board case 200 is greater than the distance (height, width) H6 in the thickness direction of the board from the display surface of the information display 115 to the back surface (main management number sticker 208) of the top plate 202 of the main control board case 200.

The distance (height, width) H6 in the thickness direction of the board from the display surface of the information display 115 to the back surface (main control number sticker 208) of the top plate 202 of the main control board case 200 is approximately the same as the distance (height, width) H8 in the thickness direction of the board from the upper end of the main inspection connector 116 to the back surface (main control number sticker 208) of the top plate 202 of the main control board case 200.

The distance (height, width) H8 in the thickness direction of the board from the upper end of the main inspection connector 116 to the underside of the top plate 202 of the main control board case 200 (main control number sticker 208) is greater than the distance (height, width) H3 in the thickness direction of the board from the upper end of the main control unit 110m (one-chip microcomputer) to the surface of the top plate 202 of the main control board case 200 (model information sticker 209).

The distance (height, width) H3 in the thickness direction of the board from the top end of the main control unit 110m (one-chip microcomputer) to the surface (model information sticker 209) of the top plate 202 of the main control board case 200 is greater than the distance (height, width) H4 in the thickness direction of the board from the top end of the main control unit 110m (one-chip microcomputer) to the back surface (main management number sticker 208) of the top plate 202 of the main control board case 200.

The distance (height, width) L4 in the thickness direction of the board from the surface of the main control board 110 to the upper end of the main control unit 110m may be smaller than the distance (height, width) L3 in the thickness direction of the board from the surface of the main control board 110 to the upper end of the main inspection connector 116. In this case, the distance (height, width) L7 in the thickness direction of the board from the surface of the main control board 110 to the upper end of the main chip model information sticker 110m2 attached to the side of the main control unit 110m (one-chip microcomputer) and the distance (height, width) L5 in the thickness direction of the board from the surface of the main control board 110 to the upper end of the chip information 110m1 printed on the side of the main control unit 110m (one-chip microcomputer) are also smaller than the distance (height, width) L3 in the thickness direction of the board from the surface of the main control board 110 to the upper end of the main inspection connector 116.

(Sticker attached to the main control board case)
The stickers affixed to the main control board case 200 will be described with reference to Fig. 8. Fig. 8(a) is a diagram showing a main control number sticker 208 affixed to the main control number sticker affixing section 207, and Fig. 8(b) is a diagram showing a model information sticker 209 affixed to the main control board case 200 alongside the main control number sticker 208.

As shown in FIG. 8(a), the main control number sticker 208 is a transparent rectangular sticker with a watermark (pattern) to prevent counterfeiting, and includes a light-transmitting section 208a that allows the rear to be seen through, a main control information printing section 208b on which the control information of the main control device 110A is printed, an opener entry section 208c for entering the name of the opener of the main control board case 200, an opening date entry section 208d for entering the date of opening of the main control board case 200, an information printing section 208e on which predetermined text information is printed, a line section 208f that is printed to follow the outline of the main control number sticker 208, and a light-transmitting window section 208g that allows the rear of the main control number sticker 208 to be seen through.

The main management information printed section 208b is provided at a position toward the top of the main management number sticker 208, and has a white printed section (opaque section) consisting of a square first area and a rectangular second area extending rightward from the right side of the first area, a two-dimensional code (QR code: registered trademark) printed in the first area of the white printed section (opaque section) that is an information image for identifying the main control device 110A (main control board 110), and an identification code "AA-1" indicating the name of the manufacturer of the main control device 110A (main control board 110) and a management number "No. 111111" for identifying the main control device 110A (main control board 110) printed in the second area. The two-dimensional code (QR code: registered trademark) contains information on the manufacturer's name and the management number.

The opener entry field 208c is a white printed area (opaque area) that is long from side to side and is located to the left of the center in the vertical direction of the main control number sticker 208. It has a first opener entry field 208c1 for recording the first opener, and a second opener entry field 208c2 that is located below the first opener entry field 208c1 with a gap and for recording the second opener.

The opening date entry field 208d is a rectangular white printed area (opaque area) that is long from side to side, and is provided to the right of the main management number sticker 208 with a gap to the right of the first opener entry field 208c1. It has a first opening date entry field 208d1 for entering the opening date first, and a second opening date entry field 208d2 for entering the opening date secondly, which is provided with a gap to the right of the second opener entry field 208c2 and below the first opening date entry field 208d1.

The information printing section 208e has a first information printing section 208e1 of "Main board control number" printed in black above the main management information printing section 208b, a second information printing section 208e2 of "Opener" printed in black above the first opener entry field 208c1, a third information printing section 208e3 of "Opening date" printed in black above the first opening date entry field 208d1, and a fourth information printing section 208e4 of the manufacturer's name "〇 ABC" printed in black near the bottom end of the main management number sticker 208.

The line portion 208f has a left line portion 208f1 printed along the outer edge of the left side of the main management number sticker 208 from near the first information printed portion 208e1 to near the fourth information printed portion 208e4, and a right line portion 208f2 printed along the outer edge of the right side of the main management number sticker 208 from near the first information printed portion 208e1 to near the fourth information printed portion 208e4, and the left line portion 208f1 and the right line portion 208f2 surround the main management information printed portion 208b, the opener entry field 208c, the opening date entry field 208d, etc.

The light-transmitting window 208g is a first light-transmitting window 208g1 provided between the main management information printed section 208b and the first opener's entry section 208c1, a second light-transmitting window 208g2 provided between the first opener's entry section 208c1 and the second opener's entry section 208c2, a third light-transmitting window 208g3 provided between the main management information printed section 208b and the first opening date entry section 208d1, a fourth light-transmitting window 208g4 provided between the first opener's entry section 208d1 and the second opening date entry section 208d2, and a fourth light-transmitting window 208g5 provided between the first opener's entry section 208c1 and the first opening date entry section 208d3. It has a fifth light-transmitting window 208g5 provided between the entry column 208d1, a sixth light-transmitting window 208g6 provided between the second opener entry column 208c2 and the second opening date entry column 208d2, a seventh light-transmitting window 208g7 provided between the opener entry column 208c and the left line portion 208f1, an eighth light-transmitting window 208g8 provided between the opening date entry column 208d and the right line portion 208f2, and a ninth light-transmitting window 208g9 provided between the opener entry column 208c or the opening date entry column 208d and the fourth information printing section 208e4.

The main control unit 110m, RWM clear switch 111a, setting key switch 112a, information display 115, various female connectors 117a-117g, and other electronic components (integrated circuits, capacitors, resistors, resistor arrays, etc.) mounted on the main control board 110 can be seen through each of the light-transmitting windows 208g1-208g9 and the main control board case 200.

In addition, the visibility of the various electronic components mounted on the main control board 110 differs between viewing only through (through) the main control board case 200 and viewing the various electronic components mounted on the main control board 110 through (through) the light-transmitting window portion 208g and the main control board case 200 (specifically, the former provides higher visibility).

As shown in FIG. 8(b), the model information sticker 209 is a transparent rectangular sticker and includes a light-transmitting section 209a that allows the rear to be seen through, an information section 209b on which the model code of the gaming machine 1 (main control device 110A) is printed, a dividing line section 209c that divides the model information sticker 209 into upper and lower sections, an information printing section 209d on which predetermined text information is printed, and a light-transmitting window section 209e that allows the rear of the model information sticker 209 to be seen through. Note that the model information sticker 209 does not have a watermark (pattern) to prevent counterfeiting, and is smaller in width (area) in the vertical and horizontal directions than the main control number sticker 208.

The information section 209b is located toward the lower right side of the model information sticker 209, and has a rectangular white printed section (opaque section) that is long from side to side, and the model symbol printed in the rectangular part of the white printed section (opaque section).

The dividing line portion 209c is composed of a white printed portion (opaque portion) that is provided in the left-right direction at the center position of the model information sticker 209.

The information printing section 209d has a model information printing section 209d1 in which the model name of the gaming machine 1 (main control device 110A) "Pachinko XXXXXXABCD" is printed in black in the area above the dividing line section 209c, and a manufacturer name printing section 209d2 in which the manufacturer name of the gaming machine 1 (main control device 110A) "Manufacturer name: Co., Ltd." is printed in black in the area below the dividing line section 209c and to the left of the model information sticker 209.

The light-transmitting window 209e is provided between the information section 209b and the dividing line section 209c.

The main control unit 110m, RWM clear switch 111a, setting key switch 112a, information display 115, various female connectors 117a-117g, and other electronic components (integrated circuits, capacitors, resistors, resistor arrays, etc.) mounted on the main control board 110 can be seen through the transparent window 209e and the main control board case 200.

In addition, the visibility of the various electronic components mounted on the main control board 110 differs when the electronic components are viewed only through (through) the main control board case 200 compared to when the electronic components are viewed through (through) the light-transmitting window portion 209e and the main control board case 200 (specifically, the visibility is higher in the former case than in the latter case).

In this way, the main control number sticker 208 is configured to include an identification information display area (main control information printing section 208b) having a two-dimensional code (first information) which is an information image for identifying the main control device 110A (main control board 110), an identification symbol (second information) indicating the name of the manufacturer of the main control device 110A, and a control number (third information) for identifying the main control device 110A, and an opening information entry area (opener entry field 208c, opening date entry field 208d) for entering opening information for the main control device 110A. This makes it easier to inspect and check the main control device 110A, improving convenience for game store staff.

In addition, the main control number sticker 208 includes an identification information display area (main control information printing section 208b) having a two-dimensional code (first information) which is an information image for identifying the main control device 110A (main control board 110), an identification symbol (second information) which indicates the name of the manufacturer of the main control device 110A, and a control number (third information) for identifying the main control device 110A, and an opening information entry area (opener entry field 208c, Between the identification information display area and the opening information entry area, there is a see-through area (light-transmitting area 208a, light-transmitting window 208g) through which various electronic components (main control unit 110m, RWM clear switch 111a, setting key switch 112a, information display 115, various female connectors 117a-117g, other electronic components (integrated circuits, capacitors, resistors, resistor arrays, etc.)) mounted on the rear main control board 110 can be seen. Therefore, even if the main control number sticker 208 is attached to the main control board case 200, various electronic components behind the main control number sticker 208 can be seen through the see-through area, which ensures the security of the gaming machine.

In addition, the main control number sticker 208 (opening information entry area) includes a first entry area (opener entry field 208c) in which the person who opened the main control device 110A can be entered, and a second entry area (opening date entry field 208d) in which the date of opening of the main control device 110A can be entered, and between the first entry area (opener entry field 208c) and the second entry area (opening date entry field 208d) there is provided a see-through area (transparent section 208a, translucent window section 208g) in which the various electronic components mounted on the rear main control board 110 (main control unit 110m, RWM clear switch 111a, setting key switch 112a, information display 115, various female connectors 117a to 117g, other electronic components (integrated circuits, capacitors, resistors, resistor arrays, etc.)) can be seen. Therefore, even if the main control number sticker 208 is attached to the main control board case 200, the various electronic components behind the main control number sticker 208 can be visually confirmed through the see-through area, making it possible to ensure the security of the gaming machine.

The model information sticker 209 also includes a model information display area (information section 209b, model information printing section 209d1, manufacturer name printing section 209d2) for identifying the model of the main control device 110A (gaming machine 1). This makes it easier to identify the model of the main control device 110A (gaming machine 1), improving convenience for gaming store staff.

The model information sticker 209 also includes an information section 209b on which the model code is printed, and a dividing line section 209c that divides the model information sticker. Between the information section 209b and the dividing line section 209c, there is a see-through area (transparent section 209a, transparent window section 209e) through which various electronic components (main control section 110m, RWM clear switch 111a, setting key switch 112a, information display 115, various female connectors 117a to 117g, and other electronic components (integrated circuits, capacitors, resistors, resistor arrays, etc.)) mounted on the rear main control board 110 can be seen. Therefore, even if the model information sticker 209 is attached to the main control board case 200, various electronic components behind the model information sticker 209 can be seen through the see-through area, which ensures the security of the gaming machine.

In addition, the area of the model information sticker 209, which contains less information important for the management and security of the gaming machine 1 and therefore contains less information, is smaller than the area of the main management number sticker 208, which contains a large amount of information important for the management and security of the gaming machine 1. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the main control board 110 from being extremely reduced by the model information sticker 209, which contains less information important for the management and security of the gaming machine 1 (small amount of information), and it is possible to ensure the security of the gaming machine.

In addition, the visibility of the various electronic components mounted on the main control board 110 at the rear (main control unit 110m, RWM clear switch 111a, setting key switch 112a, information display 115, various female connectors 117a-117g, other electronic components (integrated circuits, capacitors, resistors, resistor arrays, etc.)) is higher when viewed through the transparent portion 209e of the model information sticker 209, which does not have a watermark (pattern) for anti-counterfeiting, than when viewed through the transparent portion 208a of the main management number sticker 208, which has a watermark (pattern) for anti-counterfeiting. Therefore, even if two stickers are affixed to the main control board case 200, security is not significantly reduced.

The RWM clear switch 111a, setting key switch, and various female connectors 117a to 117g mounted on the main control board 110 may be made invisible through the light-transmitting window 208g and the light-transmitting window 209e.

(Configuration of frame control device)
The configuration of the frame control device 120A will be described with reference to Figures 9 and 10. Figure 9(a) is a front view of the frame control device 120A, Figure 9(b) is a rear view of the frame control device 120A, and Figure 10 is an exploded perspective view of the frame control device 120A.

The frame control device 120A includes a rectangular frame control board 120 on which various electronic components (frame control unit 120m, various connectors, various switches, etc.) are mounted, and a frame control board case 300 made of transparent resin that houses the frame control board 120 inside.

A frame control unit 120m (a one-chip microcomputer with a CPU, ROM, and RWM) that controls the number of game balls (game value) owned by the player is mounted in a position toward the center of the frame control board 120, and at one end of the short side of the frame control board 120 (along the upper long side of Figure 10), multiple female connectors 127a to 127f are mounted into which male connectors provided at the ends of wiring for electrical connection to the main control board 110 and the performance control board 130 are inserted, and a test connector 128 is mounted into which a male connector provided at the end of wiring for electrical connection to an inspection jig when testing the gaming machine 1 is inserted.

At the other end of the short side of the frame control board 120 (along the long side at the bottom of Figure 10), there are a game ball number clear switch 121 for clearing the number of game balls (game value) owned by the player stored in the frame control unit 120m on the condition that the game store clerk operates the power switch 164 simultaneously, a ball removal switch 122 for removing game balls that are circulated in the gaming machine 1 from the gaming machine (ball removal operation) on the condition that the game store clerk operates the power switch 164 simultaneously, and a ball removal switch 123 for removing a desired number of game balls (game value) owned by the player stored in the frame control unit 120m on the condition that the game store clerk operates the power switch 164 simultaneously. The device is equipped with an error release switch 123 for performing a process to release a certain error or error notification, a frame control display 125 for displaying multiple pieces of information such as the number of game balls (game value amount) owned by the player, an error code according to the type of error, performance information calculated as a result of play (normal base value, etc.), and information indicating that a ball removal operation is in progress, and a frame inspection connector 126 into which a male connector is inserted at the end of the wiring for electrically connecting to an inspection device for inspecting the frame control device 120A (specifically, the frame control unit 120m) at the game facility.

The frame control board case 300 is equipped with a first case member 301 formed in a recessed chamber shape that opens downward and covers the front side of the frame control board 120, and a second case member 311 formed in a recessed chamber shape that opens upward and covers the back side of the frame control board 120, and a storage space for storing the frame control board 120 is formed by closing the first case member 301 and the second case member 311.

The first case member 301 has an opposing wall (e.g., top plate portion 302, etc.) that faces the surface of the frame control board 120 and serves as the top plate of the recessed chamber, and an upper peripheral wall portion 303 that hangs down (extends) from the end portion (peripheral edge) of the opposing wall and serves as the side wall of the recessed chamber.

The opposing walls of the first case member 301 are the top plate portion 302 at the highest position (uniform thickness of 2 mm), a first step portion 305a that forms a step with the top plate portion 302 at one end side of the first case member 301 in the longitudinal direction (left side of Figure 9(a)), a second step portion 305b that forms a step with the top plate portion 302 at one end side of the first case member 301 in the lateral direction (upper side of Figure 9(a)), a third step portion 305c that forms a step with the second step portion 305b so as to be continuous with the second step portion 305b in the outward direction (upper side of Figure 9(a)), and a third step portion 305d that forms a step with the second step portion 305b at the other end side of the first case member 301 in the lateral direction (upper side of Figure 9(a)). 9(a)) and forms a step between the top plate 302 and the fourth step 305d at the other end side in the longitudinal direction (right side of FIG. 9(a)), a fifth step 305e at the other end side in the lateral direction of the first case member 301 (lower side of FIG. 9(a)) and forms a step between the top plate 302 and the fourth step 305d at the other end side in the longitudinal direction (right side of FIG. 9(a)), and a sixth step 305f at one end side in the lateral direction of the first case member 301 (lower side of FIG. 9(a)) and forms a step between the top plate 302 and the first step 305a at one end side in the longitudinal direction (left side of FIG. 9(a)).

The distance from the surface of the frame control board 120 decreases in the following order: top plate portion 302 (first opposing wall) > first step portion 305a (second opposing wall) > second step portion 305b (third opposing wall) > fourth step portion 305d (fifth opposing wall) > fifth step portion 305e (fifth opposing wall) > third step portion 305c (third opposing wall) = sixth step portion 305f (sixth opposing wall).

A frame management number sticker attachment section 307 is provided at the other end of the top plate 302 in the longitudinal direction and at one end in the lateral direction (near the upper right in FIG. 9(a)) for attaching a frame management number sticker 308 on which management information (identification information) of the frame control board 120 is printed. The frame management number sticker attachment section 307 is a rectangular area formed by recessing part of the top plate 302 one step downward.

Then, a frame management number sticker 308 is affixed to the frame management number sticker affixing section 307, and an operation guide sticker 309, on which information indicating the ball removal switch 122 and the error reset switch 123 is printed, is affixed between the frame management number sticker affixing section 307 and the fifth section 305e in a position corresponding to the ball removal switch 122 and the error reset switch 123.

The surface of the frame management number sticker attachment section 307 is designed to be approximately flush or flush with the back surface of the top plate section 302 (the surface facing the frame control board 120). Therefore, the height (distance, width) from the surface of the frame control board 120 to the frame management number sticker 308 and the height (distance, width) from the surface of the frame control board 120 to the back surface of the top plate section 302 (the surface facing the frame control board 120) are approximately the same or the same.

The third stage 305c has multiple openings formed at positions corresponding to the multiple female connectors 127a-127f mounted on the frame control board 120, and the multiple female connectors 127a-127f are exposed to the outside from each of the multiple openings, making it possible to insert male connectors provided at the ends of wiring for electrical connection to the main control device 110A and the performance control device 130A into the multiple female connectors 127a-127f.

At a position on the sixth step 305f corresponding to the frame inspection connector 126 mounted on the frame control board 120, an opening is formed to expose the frame inspection connector 126 to the outside, and a male connector provided at the end of the wiring extending from the inspection device can be inserted into the frame inspection connector 126.

At a position of the fifth step 305e corresponding to the game ball count clear switch 121 mounted on the frame control board 120, an opening is formed to allow operation of the game ball count clear switch 121, and a game ball count clear button 121b for pressing the operation part of the game ball count clear switch 121 is loosely fitted in this opening so that it can move up and down. By pressing the game ball count clear button 121b, the game ball count clear switch 121 can be turned ON.

In addition, at a position of the fifth step 305e corresponding to the ball removal switch 122 mounted on the frame control board 120, an opening is formed to allow the ball removal switch 122 to be operated, and a ball removal button 122b for pressing the operation part of the ball removal switch 122 is loosely fitted in this opening so that it can move up and down. By pressing the ball removal button 122b, the ball removal button 122b can be turned ON.

In addition, an opening is formed in the fifth step 305e at a position corresponding to the error reset switch 123 mounted on the frame control board 120, allowing the error reset switch 123 to be operated, and an error reset button 123b for pressing the operation part of the error reset switch 123 is loosely fitted in this opening so that it can move up and down. By pressing the error reset button 123b, the error reset switch 123 can be turned ON.

A button cover member 310 made of transparent resin is attached to the fourth step 305d, which can be rotated between a first state in which it covers the game ball count clear button 121b and a second state in which it exposes the game ball count clear button 121b. When the game ball count clear switch 121 is operated, the button cover member 310 is converted from the normal first state to the second state.

The top surface of the button cover member 310 is provided with an engraved portion 310a engraved with the words "game ball count clear switch" indicating the game ball count clear switch 121. Therefore, the first case member 301 is provided with information indicating the game ball count clear switch 121, the ball removal switch 122, and the error release switch 123, but the first case member 301 and the second case member (frame control board case 300) are not provided with information indicating the frame control display 125.

The second case member 311 has an opposing wall (bottom plate portion 312) that faces the rear surface of the frame control board 120 and serves as the bottom plate of the recessed chamber, and a lower peripheral wall portion 313 that rises (extends) upward from the end portion (peripheral edge portion) of the opposing wall and serves as the side wall of the recessed chamber.

At one longitudinal end of the frame control board case 300 (left side in FIG. 9(a)), a frame crimping portion 304A is provided for sealing the frame control board case 300 when the first case member 301 and the second case member 311 are closed while the frame control board 120 is housed therein.

The frame crimping portion 304A has a crimping portion 304 that is connected to the upper peripheral wall portion 303 of the first case member 301 via a break portion, a crimp receiving portion 314 that is connected to the lower peripheral wall portion 313 of the second case member 311 via a break portion, and a fastening member that is pressed from the crimping portion 304 into the crimp receiving portion 314 to fasten the crimping portion 304 and the crimp receiving portion 314.

The crimping portion 304 of the first case member 301 has a first crimping portion 304a that is used to initially seal the frame control board case 300, and a second crimping portion 304b that is used to reseal the frame control board case 300 after the frame control board case 300 is first opened, and the first crimping portion 304a and the second crimping portion 304b are arranged side by side in the short direction of the frame control board case 300.

The crimping portion 314 of the second case member 311 has a first crimping portion 314a used to initially seal the frame control board case 300, and a second crimping portion 314b for resealing the frame control board case 300 after the frame control board case 300 is first opened, and the first crimping portion 314a and the second crimping portion 314b are arranged side by side in the short direction of the frame control board case 300.

Two mounting shafts 315a, 315b are provided on the lower peripheral wall 313, which is one end of the second case member 311 in the short direction (the upper long side in FIG. 10), and two flanges 317a, 317b are provided on the lower peripheral wall 313, which is the other end of the second case member 311 in the short direction (the lower long side in FIG. 10), and locking members 318a, 318b are attached to each of the two flanges 317a, 317b.

A locking claw 316 is provided on the other short end side of the second case member 311 at a position (lower right side in FIG. 10) corresponding to the button cover member 310 attached to the first case member 301, to engage with the free end side of the button cover member 310 attached to the first case member 301 and restrict the button cover member 310 from being converted to the second state and to maintain it in the first state.

When assembling the frame control device 120A configured in this manner, first, with the frame control board 120 facing the storage space formed by the first case member 301 and the second case member 311, the first case member 301 and the second case member 311 are closed, and the first crimping portion 304a and the first crimping receiving portion 314a are fixed with a fixing member, thereby sealing the frame control board case 300.

Furthermore, by converting the button cover member 310 from the second state to the first state, the locking claw 316 provided on the second case member 311 engages with the button cover member 310, thereby restricting the conversion of the button cover member 310 to the second state.

When the frame control device 120A is attached to the back side of the inner frame 3 (specifically, at a position overlapping the rear side of the power supply device 160A), the mounting shafts 315a, 315b of the second case member 311 are supported by two mounting bearings (not shown) provided on the back side of the inner frame 3, and in this state, the locking members 318a, 318b attached to the second case member 311 are fixed to two lock receiving portions (not shown) provided on the back side of the inner frame 3.

On the other hand, when opening and inspecting the frame control device 120A of the gaming machine 1 installed in an amusement facility, the locking members 318a, 318b are removed from the lock receiving portions, and then the mounting shafts 315a, 315b are removed from the mounting shafts to remove the frame control device 120A from the back side of the inner frame 3. Then, the break portion of the first crimping portion 304a and the break portion of the first crimp receiving portion 314a are broken using a tool such as pliers to release the seal by the frame crimping portion 304A, thereby opening the frame control board case 300.

When the frame control board 120 is then housed in the frame control board case 300 to reassemble the frame control device 120A, first, the first case member 301 and the second case member 311 are closed with the frame control board 120 facing the housing space formed by the first case member 301 and the second case member 311, and the second crimping portion 304b and the second crimping receiving portion 314b are fixed with a fixing member, thereby resealing the frame control board case 300.

Furthermore, by converting the button cover member 310 from the second state to the first state, the locking claw 316 provided on the second case member 311 engages with the button cover member 310, thereby restricting the conversion of the button cover member 310 to the second state.

When the resealed frame control device 120A is attached to the back side of the inner frame 3 (specifically, at a position overlapping the rear side of the power supply device 160A), one end of the frame control device 120A on which the various connectors are provided is turned upward, and this end is tilted toward the back so that the mounting shafts 315a, 315b of the second case member 311 are supported by each of the two mounting bearings (not shown) provided on the back side of the inner frame 3, and the frame control device 120A is rotated from this state to an upright state in which the one end on which the various connectors are provided and the other end on which the various connectors are not provided are lined up vertically, and the locking members 318a, 318b attached to the second case member 311 are fixed to each of the two lock receiving parts (not shown) provided on the back side of the inner frame 3.

Then, the lower cover member 120B is attached to the back side of the inner frame 3 so as to cover the upper rear of the frame control device 120A and protect the various connectors of the frame control device 120A, completing the installation of the frame control device 120A.

In this way, the frame management number sticker 308 is affixed to the frame management number sticker attachment portion 307, which is recessed from the surface (surface of the top plate portion 302) of the frame control board case 300. Therefore, even if the frame control board case 300 is hit by something when transporting or installing the gaming machine 1, the frame management number sticker 308 is less likely to be damaged, and it is possible to prevent inconveniences such as the management information (identification information) printed on the frame management number sticker 308 becoming difficult to read.

In addition, instead of directly operating the operation part of the game ball count clear switch 121, the game ball count clear button 121b is operated, which is loosely fitted into an opening that allows the game ball count clear switch 121 to be operated. This makes it possible to prevent inconveniences such as the game ball count clear switch 121 breaking down due to static electricity or the like when operating the game ball count clear switch 121. In addition, since the game ball count clear button 121b is loosely fitted into the opening that allows the game ball count clear switch 121 to be operated, it is possible to prevent this opening from being left open all the time, and it is also possible to prevent fraudulent behavior such as the intrusion of foreign objects into the inside of the frame control device 120A.

In addition, instead of directly operating the operating part of the ball removal switch 122, the ball removal button 122b, which is loosely fitted into the opening that allows the operation of the ball removal switch 122, is operated. This makes it possible to prevent inconveniences such as the ball removal switch 122 breaking down due to static electricity, etc., when operating the ball removal switch 122. In addition, by loosely fitting the ball removal button 122b into the opening that allows the operation of the ball removal switch 122, it is possible to prevent this opening from being left open all the time, and it is also possible to prevent fraudulent behavior such as the intrusion of foreign objects into the interior of the frame control device 120A.

In addition, instead of directly operating the operation part of the error reset switch 123, the error reset button 123b is operated, which is loosely fitted into an opening that allows the operation of the error reset switch 123. This makes it possible to prevent inconveniences such as the error reset switch 123 breaking down due to static electricity or the like when operating the error reset switch 123. In addition, by loosely fitting the error reset button 123b into the opening that allows the operation of the error reset switch 123, it is possible to prevent this opening from being left open all the time, and it is also possible to prevent fraudulent acts such as the intrusion of foreign objects into the interior of the frame control device 120A.

The frame control board case 300 is also provided with a button cover member 310 that can be switched between a first state in which the game ball count clear button 121b is covered and a second state in which the game ball count clear button 121b is exposed. This makes it possible to prevent the game ball count clear button 121b (game ball count clear switch 121) from being accidentally pressed, thereby preventing the number of game balls owned by the player from being cleared.

The frame control board case 300 is also provided with a locking claw 316 that prevents the button cover member 310 from changing from a first state in which the game ball count clear button 121b is covered to a second state in which the game ball count clear button 121b is exposed. This makes it possible to prevent the button cover member 310 from unintentionally changing to the second state in which the game ball count clear button 121b is exposed, and makes it possible to prevent inconveniences such as the game ball count clear button 121b (game ball count clear switch 121) being inadvertently pressed, thereby clearing the number of game balls owned by the player.

In addition, an engraved portion 310a (guidance information relating to the game ball count clear switch 121) is provided at a position on the frame control board case 300 (button cover member 310) corresponding to the game ball count clear switch 121, on which the words "game ball count clear switch" indicating the game ball count clear switch 121 are engraved. This makes it easier to grasp the presence and position of the game ball count clear switch 121, improving the convenience of the game store staff who operate the game ball count clear switch 121.

In addition, an operation guide sticker 309 on which information indicating the ball removal switch 122 (guide information relating to the ball removal switch 122) is printed is affixed to the position of the frame control board case 300 (top panel portion 302) corresponding to the ball removal switch 122. This makes it easier to grasp the presence and position of the ball removal switch 122, improving the convenience of the arcade staff who operates the ball removal switch 122.

In addition, an operation guide sticker 309 on which information indicating the error reset switch 123 (guide information relating to the error reset switch 123) is printed is affixed to the frame control board case 300 (top panel 302) at a position corresponding to the error reset switch 123. This makes it easier to grasp the presence and location of the error reset switch 123, improving convenience for game store staff who operate the error reset switch 123.

In addition, the frame control board case 300 (the position of the first case member 301 corresponding to the frame control display 125) is not provided with information indicating the frame control display 125 (guidance information related to the frame control display 125). This makes it possible to prevent inconveniences such as information indicating the frame control display 125 (guidance information related to the frame control display 125) impeding the visibility of the frame control display 125 and other electronic components (frame control unit 120m, integrated circuits, capacitors, resistors, connectors, etc.), and improves convenience for game store staff.

In addition, the frame control device 120A, which is attached to the back side of the inner frame 3, can rotate via the mounting shafts 315a and 315b. This makes it easy to check whether any unauthorized parts have been attached to the back side of the frame control device 120A, improving convenience for game store staff.

In addition, the locations where the various connectors of the frame control device 120A are provided (second step 305b, third step 305c) are protected by covering them with the lower cover member 120B. This makes it possible to prevent damage to the various connectors provided on the frame control device 120A and breakage of the wiring due to external factors, and makes it possible to properly send and receive signals with the main control device 110A.

In addition, the frame control display 125 mounted on the frame control board 120 is not covered by the lower cover member 120B. Therefore, the visibility of the frame control display 125 is not reduced by the lower cover member 120B, making it easier to check the display content of the frame control display 125.

In addition, the game ball count clear button 121b may not be provided and the operation part of the game ball count clear switch 121 may be directly operated, or the game ball count clear switch 121 and the game ball count clear button 121b may be integrated to form a game ball count clear button.

In addition, the ball removal button 122b may not be provided and the operation part of the ball removal switch 122 may be operated directly, or the ball removal switch 122 and the ball removal button 122b may be integrated to form a ball removal button.

In addition, the error reset button 123b may not be provided and the operation part of the error reset switch 123 may be operated directly, or the error reset switch 123 and the error reset button 123b may be integrated to form an error reset button.

The second case member 311 is provided with a locking claw 316 that prevents the button cover member 310 from being converted to the second state. However, this locking claw 316 may be provided on the first case member 301, or may be made of a separate member from the first case member 301 and the second case member 311 and attached to the first case member 301 or the second case member 311.

(Configuration of frame control board)
The configuration of the frame control board 120 will be described with reference to Figures 11 to 15. Figure 11 is a plan view of the frame control board 120, Figure 12 is a perspective view of the frame control board 120, Figure 13 is an enlarged view of the frame control unit 120m and the frame control display 125, Figure 14 is a view excluding various electronic components around the frame control unit and the frame control display, and Figure 15 is a partial perspective view of the frame control unit 120m and the frame control display 125. Note that the above-mentioned multiple electronic components (integrated circuits, resistors, capacitors, etc.) for outputting signals from the test connector 128 are mounted on the gaming machine 1 to be tested, but are not mounted on the frame control board 120 of the gaming machine 1 sold to the gaming establishment, and are therefore omitted from the illustration here.

The frame control board 120 is formed in a roughly rectangular shape with a corner (lower right of Figure 11) cut out at one end of the longitudinal direction of a long flat plate, and has a blue (or green) surface with a mounting reference line KJ, which serves as a reference for the mounting position of various electronic components, and identification symbols (e.g., "IC1") indicating various electronic components printed in white on it, and various electronic components (frame control unit 120m, game ball count clear switch 121, ball removal switch 122, error release switch 123, frame control display 125, integrated circuits (ICs), capacitors, resistors, resistor arrays, connectors, etc.) are mounted in accordance with the mounting reference line KJ and corresponding identification symbols.

In this embodiment, the integrated circuits are marked with IC "〇〇 (1-2 digit number)" or X "〇 (1 digit number)", the capacitors are marked with BC or C "〇〇 (1-2 digit number)", the resistors are marked with R "〇〇 (1-2 digit number)", the resistor arrays are marked with RA "〇 (1 digit number)", the mounting reference line is marked with KJ, the identification symbols of the integrated circuits are marked with IC "〇〇 (1-2 digit number)"b or X "〇 (1 digit number)"b, the identification symbols of the capacitors are marked with C "〇〇 (1-2 digit number)"b, the identification symbols of the resistors are marked with R "〇〇 (1-2 digit number)"b, and the identification symbols of the resistor arrays are marked with RA "〇 (1 digit number)".

A frame control unit 120m (one-chip microcomputer) is mounted in a position toward the center of the frame control board 120, and at the other end of the short side of the frame control board 120 (near the end opposite the main control unit 110A along the long side on the right side of Figure 10), there are mounted a game ball count clear switch 121 for operation by game store staff, a ball removal switch 122, an error reset switch 123, a frame control display 125 for displaying specified information in red, and a frame inspection connector 126 into which a male connector provided at the end of the wiring for electrically connecting to an inspection device for inspecting the gaming machine 1 at the game store is inserted.

The frame control display 125 is spaced farther from the edge of the frame control board 120 (the long side on the right side in FIG. 11) than the game ball count clear switch 121, the ball removal switch 122, and the error release switch 123.

At one end of the short side of the frame control board 120 (near the end on the main control device 110A side along the long side on the left side of Figure 11), multiple female connectors 127a to 127f are mounted, into which male connectors provided at the ends of wiring for electrical connection to the main control board 110 and performance control board 130 are inserted, and other electronic components (integrated circuits, capacitors, resistors, resistor arrays, etc.) are mounted in appropriate locations across almost the entire area of the frame control board 120.

The position near one end of the frame control board 120 in the longitudinal direction is a high component concentrated mounting area HM (an area where the mounting density of high components is higher than other areas) for electronic components that are taller than the frame control display 125, such as electrolytic capacitors BC and integrated circuits IC14, and the area around the frame control display 125 is a low component concentrated mounting area (an area where the mounting density of low components is higher than that of high components) for electronic components that are shorter than the frame control display 125, such as integrated circuits and resistors.

The frame control unit 120m (one-chip microcomputer) is mounted by inserting inverted L-shaped terminals protruding from both sides of the main body (circuit section) which is rectangular in plan view into sockets mounted on the frame control board 120. The sockets are mounted by inserting them into multiple through-holes formed inside a rectangular mounting reference line KJ (slightly larger than the outline of the socket) printed in white on the surface of the frame control board 120.

In addition, chip information 120m1 (chip model number and product code) indicating the frame control unit 120m is printed in black on the top surface of the main body of the frame control unit 120m, and a frame chip model information sticker 120m2, which has chip information (model number, manufacturer name, etc.) indicating the frame control unit 120m printed in black on a white base sticker, is attached next to the chip information 120m1, and an identification symbol for IC1 indicating the frame control unit 120m is printed in white near the frame control unit 120m (one-chip microcomputer) (in a position where the sockets do not overlap).

The game ball count clear switch 121, ball removal switch 122, and error reset switch 123 are the same part with an operating part (button part) protruding from the top surface of the cubic switch body, and multiple terminals protruding from the bottom of the switch body are inserted into multiple through holes formed inside the square-shaped mounting reference line KJ (slightly larger than the outline of the switch body) printed in white on the surface of the frame control board 120.

In addition, near each of the game ball count clear switch 121, ball removal switch 122, and error reset switch 123 (outside the installation reference line KJ), an identification symbol SW "O (one digit number)" indicating the corresponding switch is printed in white.

The frame control display 125 is mounted by inserting multiple terminals protruding from the bottom of a cubic (rectangular in plan view) main body (package) in which six seven-segment displays are arranged into multiple through-holes formed inside a rectangular mounting reference line KJ (slightly larger than the frame control display 125) printed in white on the surface of the frame control board 120.

In addition, frame control display information such as the model number 125a1 and lot number 125a2 of the frame control display 125 is printed in white on the top surface (display surface 125a) of the main body (package) of the frame control display 125, and an identification symbol "IC5" indicating the frame control display 125 is printed in white near the frame control display 125 (outside the mounting reference line KJ).

The frame inspection connector 126 is mounted by inserting multiple terminals protruding from the bottom of the recessed connector body, which is open at the top, into multiple through holes formed inside the mounting reference line KJ (slightly larger than the outline of the connector body) printed in white on the surface of the frame control board 120.

In addition, near the frame inspection connector 126 (outside the mounting reference line KJ), an identification symbol CN1 indicating the corresponding frame inspection connector is printed in white.

Each female connector 127a-127f is mounted by inserting multiple terminals protruding from the bottom of a recessed connector body with an open top into multiple through holes formed inside an attachment reference line KJ (slightly larger than the outline of the connector body) printed in white on the surface of the frame control board 120.

In addition, near each of the female connectors 127a to 127f (outside the mounting reference line KJ), an identification symbol CN "O (one digit number)" indicating the corresponding female connector is printed in white.

The various integrated circuits (IC1, IC2, IC3, IC4, IC5, IC6, X1, etc.) are mounted by inserting multiple inverted L-shaped terminals protruding from both sides of the main body (circuit section) that is rectangular in plan view into multiple through holes formed outside the rectangular mounting reference line KJ printed in white on the surface of the frame control board 120.

In addition, integrated circuit information such as the frame control display 125 model number and manufacturer name is printed in white on the top surface of the main body of each integrated circuit, and an identification symbol indicating the corresponding integrated circuit, such as IC "XX (1-2 digit number)" or X "XX (1 digit number)" (IC "XX (1-2 digit number)"b, X1a, etc.), is printed in white near each integrated circuit.

The electrolytic capacitor (BC, C "XX (1-2 digit number)") is mounted by inserting multiple terminals protruding from the bottom of the cylindrical body into multiple through holes formed inside the circular mounting reference line KJ printed in white on the surface of the frame control board 120.

Capacitor information such as the electrolytic capacitor model number and capacitance (C67a for electrolytic capacitor C67) is printed in black on the top and sides of the electrolytic capacitor body, and an identification symbol C"XX (1- to 2-digit number)" (C"XX (1- to 2-digit number)"b) indicating the corresponding electrolytic capacitor is printed in white near each electrolytic capacitor. Note that the font size of the capacitor information printed on the side of the electrolytic capacitor body is larger than the font size of the capacitor information printed on the top of the electrolytic capacitor body, and the font size of the capacitor information printed on the lower side of the electrolytic capacitor body is larger than the font size of the capacitor information printed on the upper side.

The resistor (R "XX (1-2 digit number)") is mounted by inserting the two terminals protruding from the longitudinal ends of the main body into through holes formed inside two circular mounting reference lines KJ (not shown) printed in white on the surface of the frame control board 120.

In addition, near each resistor, an identification symbol (R"〇〇 (1-2 digit number)" b) indicating the corresponding resistor is printed in white.

The resistor array (RA "O (single digit number)") is implemented by inserting multiple terminals protruding from the bottom of the horizontally elongated main body into multiple through holes formed inside the rectangular mounting reference line KJ printed in white on the surface of the frame control board 120.

In addition, resistor array information (not shown), such as the resistor array model number and manufacturer, is printed on the side of the main body of each resistor array, and a CRA "O (single digit number)" identification symbol (RA "O (single digit number)" b) indicating the corresponding resistor array is printed in white near each resistor array.

The inside of each mounting reference line KJ is a non-printed area where no identification symbols indicating electronic components are printed, and electronic components other than the corresponding electronic components are not to be mounted.

When various electronic components are mounted, the height from the surface of the frame control board 120 is higher for the frame control unit 120m, cylindrical electrolytic capacitors (e.g., C55, C67, etc.), various connectors, and resistor arrays than the frame control display 125, while the various integrated circuits (integrated circuits excluding IC14), small capacitors, and resistors are lower than the frame control display 125.

Between the end of the frame control board 120 corresponding to the frame control display 125 and the frame control display 125, there is a non-mounting area NZA where no electronic components are mounted, and on one longitudinal side of the frame control display 125 (upper side of FIG. 15), there is a low mounting area MA where electronic components shorter than the frame control display 125 are mounted and electronic components taller than the frame control display 125 are not mounted, and on the other longitudinal side of the frame control display 125 (lower side of FIG. 15), there is a high mounting area HA where both electronic components taller than the frame control display 125 are mounted.

In addition, the mounting area around the frame control display 125 has fewer electronic components taller than the frame control display 125 compared to other mounting areas (e.g., the area where the electrolytic capacitor BC is mounted).

The identification symbols of the various electronic components printed on the frame control board 120 are all in white text in a first font (first typeface), the chip information 120m1 (chip model number and product code) printed on the top surface of the main body of the frame control unit 120m is in black text in a second font (second typeface), and the chip information (model number and manufacturer name) printed on the frame chip model information sticker 120m2 affixed to the top surface of the main body of the frame control unit 120m is in black text in a third font (third typeface).

The frame control display information (model number 125a1, lot number 125a2) printed on the top surface of the main body of the frame control display 125 is written in white text in the fourth font (fourth typeface), and the various information (number of game balls, error codes, performance information, etc.) displayed on the display section (7-segment) of the frame control display 125 is written in red text in the fifth font (fifth typeface).

In addition, the integrated circuit information (model number, manufacturer name) printed on the top surface of the main body of each integrated circuit is in white text in the sixth font (sixth typeface), the capacitor information (model number, capacity, manufacturer name, etc.) printed on the top and sides of the main body of each electrolytic capacitor is in black text in the seventh font (seventh typeface), and the resistor array information (model number, manufacturer name, etc.) printed on the side of the main body of each resistor array is in white text in the eighth font (eighth typeface).

In this way, the connectors 127a to 127f for electrically connecting to the main control board 110 and the performance control board 130 are provided near one end of the frame control board 120 (one end in the short direction that faces the main control device 110A), and the frame control display 125 is provided near an end different from the one end of the frame control board 120 (the other end in the short direction that faces the main control device 110A). This prevents the frame control display 125 from getting in the way when attaching or detaching the connector, and prevents the wiring extending from the connector from impeding visibility of the frame control display 125, improving convenience for game store staff.

In addition, the connectors 127a to 127f for electrically connecting to the main control board 110 and the performance control board 130 are provided near one end of the frame control board 120 (one end in the short direction on the main control device 110A side), and the game ball count clear switch 121 is provided near an end different from the one end of the frame control board 120 (the other end in the short direction opposite the main control device 110A). This makes it possible to prevent the inconvenience of operating the game ball count clear switch 121 when attaching or detaching the connector, and also to prevent the inconvenience of the wiring extending from the connector interfering with the operation of the game ball count clear switch 121, thereby improving convenience for game store staff.

In addition, the connectors 127a to 127f for electrically connecting to the main control board 110 and the performance control board 130 are provided near one end of the frame control board 120 (one end in the short direction that faces the main control device 110A), and the ball removal switch 122 is provided near an end different from the one end of the frame control board 120 (the other end in the short direction that faces the opposite side to the main control device 110A). This prevents the inconvenience of operating the ball removal switch 122 when attaching or detaching the connector, and also prevents the inconvenience of the wiring extending from the connector interfering with the operation of the ball removal switch 122, improving convenience for game store staff.

In addition, the connectors 127a to 127f for electrically connecting to the main control board 110 and the performance control board 130 are provided near one end of the frame control board 120 (one end in the short direction on the main control device 110A side), and the error release switch 123 is provided near an end different from the one end of the frame control board 120 (the other end in the short direction opposite the main control device 110A). This prevents the inconvenience of operating the error release switch 123 when attaching or detaching the connector, and also prevents the inconvenience of the wiring extending from the connector interfering with the operation of the error release switch 123, improving convenience for game store staff.

In addition, the frame control display 125, which displays the number of game balls (amount of game value) owned by the player, and the game ball count clear switch 121, which clears the number of game balls (amount of game value) owned by the player, are located near the same end of the frame control board 120. This makes it easier to check the frame control display 125 when operating the game ball count clear switch 121, improving convenience for game store staff.

In addition, the frame control display 125, which displays information indicating that the ball removal operation is in progress to remove the game balls circulated in the game machine 1 from the game machine, and the ball removal switch 122 for performing the ball removal operation are provided at a position near the same end of the frame control board 120. This makes it easier to check the frame control display 125 when operating the ball removal switch 122, improving convenience for game store staff.

In addition, the frame control display 125, which displays an error code according to the type of error, and the error reset switch 123 for resetting the error or error notification are located near the same end of the frame control board. This makes it easier to check the frame control display 125 when operating the error reset switch 123, improving convenience for game store staff.

In addition, the frame control display 125 is spaced farther from the edge of the frame control board 120 (the long side on the right side in FIG. 10) than the game ball count clear switch 121, the ball removal switch 122, and the error release switch 123. As a result, the frame control display 125 is positioned closer to the center of the frame control board 120, which makes it possible to improve the visibility of the frame control display 125.

In addition, a non-mounting area NZA where no electronic components are mounted is provided between the end of the frame control board 120 that corresponds to the frame control display 125 and the frame control display 125. Therefore, if an unauthorized electronic component is mounted below the frame control display 125 or between the end of the frame control board 120 and the frame control display 125, it becomes easier to find the unauthorized component.

In addition, a low mounting area MA is provided on one longitudinal side of the frame control display 125 (upper side of FIG. 15) where electronic components shorter than the frame control display 125 are mounted but no electronic components taller than the frame control display 125 are mounted, and a high mounting area HA is provided on the other longitudinal side of the frame control display 125 (lower side of FIG. 15) where both electronic components taller than the frame control display 125 are mounted. Therefore, it is possible to ease restrictions on the placement of electronic components while making the frame control display 125 easier to see due to the presence of the low mounting area MA.

In addition, the frame control board 120 is printed with mounting reference lines KJ for various electronic components that will be mounted on the frame control board 120 of the gaming machine 1 sold to the gaming establishment, but is not printed with mounting reference lines KJ for various electronic components (integrated circuits, capacitors, resistors, test connectors 128, etc.) that will be mounted on the gaming machine 1 being tested but not on the frame control board 120 of the gaming machine 1 sold to the gaming establishment. This makes it possible to prevent the misunderstanding that no electronic components are mounted even though mounting reference lines are printed when visually checking the frame control board 120 of one of the gaming machines sold to the gaming establishment.

The mounting reference line KJ includes a first mounting reference line printed at the mounting position of the first electronic component (frame control unit 120m, integrated circuit, etc.) whose terminals protrude laterally from both sides, and a second mounting reference line printed at the mounting position of the second electronic component (game ball count clear switch 121, ball removal switch 122, error release switch 123, frame control display 125, electrolytic capacitor BC, etc.) whose terminals protrude downward from the bottom. The first mounting reference line is formed between the terminals protruding from both sides of the first electronic component, and the second mounting reference line is formed to surround the terminals protruding from the bottom of the second electronic component. Therefore, the arrangement efficiency of the mounting reference line KJ on the frame control board 120 can be improved, and the frame control board 120 can be downsized.

The mounting reference line KJ is also formed to surround the external shape of the main body of the electronic component (a shape that mimics the outline), with the inside of the mounting reference line KJ being a non-printing area for the identification symbol of the electronic component, and the outside of the mounting reference line KJ being a printing area for the identification symbol of the electronic component. This makes it possible to prevent the identification symbol of the electronic component from becoming obscured by the electronic component, and also makes it possible to prevent unauthorized electronic components from being mounted inside the mounting reference line KJ.

The mounting reference line KJ is formed to surround the outer shape of the main body of the electronic component, and the inside of the mounting reference line KJ of the first electronic component (frame control unit 120m, integrated circuit, etc.) whose terminals protrude laterally from both sides is set as a non-mounting area for the electronic component. This makes it possible to prevent unauthorized electronic components from being mounted inside the mounting reference line KJ.

In addition, the frame control board 120 is printed with identification symbols of various electronic components that will be mounted on the frame control board 120 of the gaming machine 1 sold to amusement establishments, and identification symbols of various electronic components that will be mounted on the gaming machine 1 being tested but not on the frame control board 120 of the gaming machine 1 being sold to amusement establishments. Therefore, the frame control board 120 of the gaming machine 1 being tested and the frame control board 120 of the gaming machine 1 being sold to amusement establishments can be made common, which makes it possible to improve development efficiency and production efficiency.

In addition, a tall component concentrated mounting area HM for electronic components taller than the frame control display 125, such as the electrolytic capacitor BC, is provided near the longitudinal end of the frame control board 120, and the frame control display 125 is mounted near the longitudinal center of the frame control board 120. Therefore, even if the resin frame control board case 300 is pressed and the central portion of the frame control board case 300 is bent, the frame control board 120 is less likely to collide with electronic components taller than the frame control display 125, such as the electrolytic capacitor BC, and the frame control display 125 is easier to see, making it possible to improve the efficiency of electronic component placement on the frame control board 120.

In addition, the normal viewing direction (the direction in which the information can be read correctly) of the various information displayed on the display surface 125a (six 7-segment displays) of the frame control display 125 is the same as the normal viewing direction of the frame control display information printed on the display surface 125a of the frame control display 125. This prevents the frame control display 125 from being installed incorrectly, and makes it easier to simultaneously check the various information displayed on the display surface 125a (six 7-segment displays) of the frame control display 125 and the frame control display information.

In addition, the display format (font, display color) of the various information (number of game balls, error codes, performance information, etc.) displayed on the display section (six 7-segment displays) of the frame control display 125 is different from the display format (font, print color) of the frame control display information printed on the display surface 125a of the frame control display 125. This makes it difficult to confuse the various information displayed on the display section (six 7-segment displays) of the frame control display 125 with the frame control display information, making it possible to improve the distinguishability of the various information displayed on the display section of the frame control display 125.

In addition, the display mode (font, display color) of the various information (number of game balls, error codes, performance information, etc.) displayed on the display unit (six 7-segment displays) of the frame control display 125 is different from the display mode (font, display color) of the identification symbols of the various electronic components printed on the frame control board 120 (e.g., X1, IC2, C26, C67, R7, etc.). This makes it difficult to confuse the various information displayed on the display unit of the frame control display 125 with the identification symbols of the various electronic components printed on the frame control board 120, making it possible to improve the identifiability of the various information displayed on the display unit of the frame control display 125.

In addition, the display format (font, display color) of the various information (number of game balls, error codes, performance information, etc.) displayed on the display unit (six 7-segment displays) of the frame control display 125 is different from the display format (font, display color) of the various information (model number, manufacturer name, etc.) printed on the various electronic components (integrated circuits, capacitors, etc.) mounted on the frame control board 120. This makes it difficult to confuse the various information displayed on the display unit of the frame control display 125 with the various information printed on the various electronic components mounted on the frame control board 120, improving the distinguishability of the various information displayed on the display unit of the frame control display 125 and making it possible to improve convenience for game store staff.

In addition, the display format (font, printing color) of the frame control display information (model number, lot number, etc.) printed on the display surface 125a of the frame control display 125 is different from the display format (font, display color) of the various information (model number, manufacturer name, etc.) printed on the various electronic components (integrated circuits, capacitors, resistor arrays, etc.) mounted on the frame control board 120. This makes it difficult to confuse the frame control display information printed on the display surface 125a of the frame control display 125 with the various information printed on the various electronic components mounted on the frame control board 120, improving the distinguishability of the frame control display information and the various information printed on the various electronic components, and improving convenience for game store staff.

In addition, the display mode (font, display color) of the various information (number of game balls, error code, performance information, etc.) displayed on the display unit (six 7-segment displays) of the frame control display 125 is different from the display mode (font, display color) of the various information (model number, product code, manufacturer name, etc.) printed on the frame control unit 120m or the model information sticker 120m2 for the frame chip. This makes it difficult to confuse the various information displayed on the display unit of the frame control display 125 with the various information printed on the frame control unit 120m or the model information sticker 110m2 for the main chip, improving the identifiability of the various information displayed on the display unit of the frame control display 125 and making it possible to improve convenience for game store staff.

In addition, the display mode (font, printing color) of the frame control display information (model number, lot number, etc.) printed on the display surface 125a of the frame control display 125 is different from the display mode (font, display color) of the various information (model number, product code, etc.) printed on the frame control unit 120m or the model information sticker 120m2 for the frame chip. Therefore, it is difficult to confuse the frame control display information printed on the display surface 125a of the frame control display 125 with the various information (model number, product code, etc.) printed on the frame control unit 120m or the model information sticker 110m2 for the main chip, and the distinguishability of the frame control display information and the various information printed on the frame control unit 120m or the model information sticker 110m2 for the main chip can be improved, and the convenience of the game store staff can be improved.

Note that multiple female connectors 127a-117f for transmitting signals to and from the main control board 110 and the performance control board 130 are mounted on one end of the frame control board 120 in the short side direction, but they may be mounted on one end of the frame control board 120 in the long side direction, or the female connector for transmitting signals to and from the main control board 110 may be arranged on one end of the frame control board 120 in the short side direction, and the female connector for transmitting signals to and from the performance control board 130 may be arranged on one end of the frame control board 120 in the long side direction, or the female connector for transmitting signals to and from the main control board 110 may be arranged on one end of the frame control board 120 in the long side direction, and the female connector for transmitting signals to and from the performance control board 130 may be arranged on one end of the frame control board 120 in the short side direction, or other mounting arrangements may be used.

The frame control display 125 is mounted on the other short end of the frame control board 120 (the end opposite the main control device 110A), but it may be mounted closer to the center of the frame control board 120, or on the long end of the frame control board 120, as long as it is near the game ball count clear switch 121, the ball removal switch 122, or the error release switch 123.

In addition, the game ball count clear switch 121, ball removal switch 122, and error release switch 123 are mounted on the other short end side of the frame control board 120, but they may be mounted on the long end side of the frame control board 120, or in other mounting arrangements, as long as it is on an end side of the frame control board 120 different from the mounting positions of the multiple female connectors 127a to 117f for transmitting and receiving signals to and from the main control board 110 and the performance control board 130.

In addition, on the frame control board 120, identification symbols indicating the test connectors 128 and electronic components (integrated circuits, resistors, capacitors, etc.) for outputting signals from the test connectors 128 that are not mounted on the frame control board 120 of the gaming machine 1 sold to gaming establishments are printed, but the mounting reference lines KJ for these components are not printed. However, it is possible to choose not to print both the identification symbols and the mounting reference lines KJ, or to print both the identification symbols and the mounting reference lines KJ, or to print the mounting reference lines KJ without printing the identification symbols.

In addition, the chip information 120m1 printed on the frame control unit 120m, the integrated circuit information (model number, manufacturer name) printed on the top surface of the main body of the various integrated circuits, the capacitor information (model number, capacity, etc.) printed on the top and side of the main body of each electrolytic capacitor, and the resistor array information (model number, manufacturer name, etc.) printed on the side of the main body of each resistor array are written in different fonts, but they may also be written in the same font. Even in this case, it is preferable to use a different font from the frame control display information (model number 125a1, lot number 125a2) printed on the top surface of the main body of the frame control display 125 and the various information (number of game balls, error code, performance information, etc.) displayed on the main body (7 segments) of the frame control display 125.

(Layout of electronic components in the frame control board case)
The layout of electronic components in the frame control board case 300 will be described with reference to Figures 16 and 17. Figure 16 is a diagram showing the layout of electronic components in the frame control board case 300 in which the frame control board 120 is housed, and Figure 17 is a cross-sectional view taken along line H-H in Figure 15.

The first case member 301 covering the front side of the frame control board 120 has multiple steps (first step to sixth step) that form a step between the top plate 302 (first opposing wall) and a position near the end of the frame control board 120. In other words, the transparency changes around the boundary between the top plate 302 and each step (the drop from the top plate 302 to each step), so the visibility of the frame control board 120 is poor when the frame control board 120 is viewed from above around the boundary between the top plate 302 and each step.

The top plate 302 of the first case member 301 is provided with a frame management number sticker attachment section 307 at a position near the edge of the frame control board 120, and a frame management number sticker 308, which has various information printed on a transparent base sticker, is attached to the frame management number sticker attachment section 307. In other words, the transparency changes at the boundary between the top plate 302 and the frame management number sticker attachment section 307 and around the frame management number sticker 308, so the visibility of the frame control board 120 is poor when viewed from above around the boundary between the top plate 302 and the frame management number sticker attachment section 307 and around the frame management number sticker 308.

The top panel 302 of the first case member 301 is adapted to have an operation guide sticker 309, on which various information is printed on a transparent base sticker, affixed at a position between the frame management number sticker affixing section 307 and the fifth step (sixth opposing wall). In other words, the transparency changes around the operation guide sticker 309, so the visibility of the frame control board 120 is poor when the frame control board 120 is viewed from above around the operation guide sticker 309.

In such a frame control board case 300, the frame control unit 120m (one-chip microcomputer), which is shorter when mounted than tall components such as the electrolytic capacitor BC, is mounted in a position overlapping the top plate portion 302 (first opposing wall) front to back (thickness direction of the frame control board 120) so as not to overlap the first stage (second opposing wall) to sixth stage (seventh opposing wall), the frame management number sticker 308, and the operation guide sticker 309 front to back.

The frame control display 125, which is shorter when mounted than tall components such as the electrolytic capacitor BC, is mounted in a position that overlaps the top plate portion 302 (first opposing wall) from front to back (thickness direction of the frame control board 120) so as not to overlap the first step portion (second opposing wall) to the sixth step portion (seventh opposing wall), the frame management number sticker 308, and the operation guide sticker 309 from front to back.

In addition, the multiple electrolytic capacitors BC, which are taller components than the frame control unit 120m and the frame control display 125, are mounted in a position that overlaps front to back (in the thickness direction of the frame control board 120) with the frame management number sticker attachment portion 307 and the frame management number sticker 308, which have reduced visibility.

The integrated circuit IC14, which is a taller component than the frame control unit 120m and the frame control display 125 but has a lower height when mounted than the electrolytic capacitor BC, is mounted in a position where it overlaps front to back (in the thickness direction of the frame control board 120) with the operation guide sticker 309, which has low visibility.

The frame control display 125 is positioned near the end of the frame control board 120 (adjacent to the upper peripheral wall portion 303) so that the display surface 125a can be seen through the frame control board case 300 from both viewpoint 1, which looks down on the top plate portion 302 of the frame control board case 300 from above, and viewpoint 2, which looks down diagonally on the side wall portion (upper peripheral wall portion 303) of the frame control board case 300 from above.

In this way, the frame control unit 120m (one-chip microcomputer) is mounted in a position that overlaps with the top plate portion 302 (first opposing wall) front to back (thickness direction of the frame control board 120) so as not to overlap with the first stage portion (second opposing wall) to the sixth stage portion (seventh opposing wall), the frame management number sticker 308, and the operation guide sticker 309. This ensures visibility of the frame control unit 120m (one-chip microcomputer), making it possible to prevent the occurrence of fraudulent acts on the frame control unit 120m.

The frame control display 125, which is shorter when mounted than tall components such as the electrolytic capacitor BC, is mounted in a position that overlaps the top plate 302 (first opposing wall) from front to back (thickness direction of the frame control board 120) so as not to overlap the first step (second opposing wall) to sixth step (seventh opposing wall), the frame management number sticker 308, and the operation guide sticker 309 from front to back. This ensures the visibility of the frame control display 125, making it easier to check the various information displayed on the frame control display 125.

In addition, multiple electrolytic capacitors BC, which are taller than the frame control unit 120m and the frame control display 125, are mounted in positions that overlap (in the thickness direction of the frame control board 120) with the frame management number sticker attachment portion 307 and the frame management number sticker 308, where visibility is reduced. This makes it possible to achieve an optimal component arrangement that allows the information printed on the top surface of the electrolytic capacitors BC to be read.

The integrated circuit IC14, which is a taller component than the frame control unit 120m and the frame control display 125, is mounted in a position that overlaps front to back (thickness direction of the frame control board 120) with the frame management number sticker attachment portion 307 and the frame management number sticker 308, where visibility is reduced. This makes it possible to arrange the components in an optimal manner so that information printed on the top surface of the integrated circuit IC14 can be read.

The frame control display 125 is also positioned at a position where the display surface 125a can be seen from outside the side wall portion (upper peripheral wall portion 303) of the frame control board case 300. This makes it easier to see the display surface 125a of the frame control display 125, and makes it easier to check the various information displayed on the frame control display 125.

(Relationship between the distances between two points on each part of the frame control device)
The relationship of the distance between two points for each part of the frame control device 120A will be described with reference to Fig. 18. Fig. 18 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line DD in Fig. 16.

The distance (height, width) K1 in the thickness direction of the board from the surface of the frame control board 120 (the surface on which the identification symbols of each electronic component are printed) to the surface (operation guide sticker 309) of the top plate portion 302 (opposing wall) of the frame control board case 300 is greater than the distance (height, width) K2 in the thickness direction of the board from the surface of the frame control board 120 to the back surface (frame management number sticker 308) of the top plate portion 302 of the frame control board case 300.

The distance (height, width) K2 in the thickness direction of the board from the surface of the frame control board 120 (the surface on which the identification symbols of each electronic component are printed) to the back surface of the top plate portion 302 of the frame control board case 300 (the frame management number sticker 308) is greater than the distance (height, width) K8 in the thickness direction of the board from the surface of the frame control board 120 to the top surface of the electrolytic capacitor C67 (the surface on which the capacitor information is printed).

The distance (height, width) K8 in the thickness direction of the board from the surface of the frame control board 120 (the surface on which the identification symbols of each electronic component are printed) to the top surface of the electrolytic capacitor C67 (the surface on which the capacitor information is printed) is greater than the distance (height, width) K3 in the thickness direction of the board from the surface of the frame control board 120 to the back surface of the first step portion 305a (opposing wall).

The distance (height, width) K3 in the thickness direction of the board from the surface of the frame control board 120 (the surface on which the identification symbols of each electronic component are printed) to the rear surface of the first step portion 305a (opposing wall) is greater than the distance (height, width) K7 in the thickness direction of the board from the surface of the frame control board 120 to the top surface of the electrolytic capacitor C41 (the surface on which the capacitor information is printed).

The distance (height, width) K7 in the thickness direction of the board from the surface of the frame control board 120 (the surface on which the identification symbols of each electronic component are printed) to the top surface of the electrolytic capacitor C41 (the surface on which the capacitor information is printed) is greater than the distance (height, width) K9 in the thickness direction of the board from the surface of the frame control board 120 to the top end of the frame inspection connector 126.

The distance (height, width) K9 in the thickness direction of the board from the surface of the frame control board 120 (the surface on which the identification symbols of each electronic component are printed) to the upper end of the frame inspection connector 126 is greater than the distance (height, width) K6 in the thickness direction of the board from the surface of the frame control board 120 to the upper surface of the main body of the frame control unit 120m (the surface on which the chip information 120m1 is printed, the model information sticker for frame chip 120m2).

The distance (height, width) K6 in the thickness direction of the board from the surface of the frame control board 120 (the surface on which the identification symbols of each electronic component are printed) to the top surface of the main body of the frame control unit 120m (the surface on which chip information 120m1 is printed, the model information sticker for frame chip 120m2) is greater than the distance (height, width) K5 in the thickness direction of the board from the surface of the frame control board 120 to the display surface 125a of the frame control display 125 (the surface on which frame control display information such as model number 125a1 and lot number 125a2 is printed).

The distance (height, width) K5 in the thickness direction of the board from the surface of the frame control board 120 (the surface on which the identification symbols of each electronic component are printed) to the display surface 125a of the frame control display 125 (the surface on which frame control display information such as model number 125a1 and lot number 125a2 is printed) is greater than the distance (height, width) K4 in the thickness direction of the board from the surface of the frame control board 120 to the top surface of the main body of the integrated circuit IC12 (the surface on which integrated circuit information such as model number and manufacturer name is printed). The same is true for the integrated circuit X1, the integrated circuit IC15, etc.

The distance (height, width) K2 in the thickness direction of the board from the surface of the frame control board 120 (the surface on which the identification symbols of each electronic component are printed) to the back surface of the top plate 302 of the frame control board case 300 (frame management number sticker 308) is greater than the distance (height, width) M4 in the thickness direction of the board from the top surface of the integrated circuit IC12 (the surface on which integrated circuit information such as model number and manufacturer name are printed) to the back surface of the top plate 302 of the frame control board case 300.

The distance M4 (height, width) in the thickness direction of the board from the surface of the integrated circuit IC12 (printed surface of integrated circuit information such as model number and manufacturer name) to the back surface of the top plate 302 of the frame control board case 300 (frame control number sticker 308) is greater than the distance M5 (height, width) in the thickness direction of the board from the display surface 125a of the frame control display 125 (printed surface of frame control display information such as model number 125a1 and lot number 125a2) to the back surface of the top plate 302 of the frame control board case 300.

The distance (height, width) M5 in the thickness direction of the board from the display surface 125a of the frame control display 125 (the printed surface of the frame control display information such as model number 125a1 and lot number 125a2) to the back surface of the top plate portion 302 of the frame control board case 300 (frame management number sticker 308) is greater than the distance (height, width) M3 in the thickness direction of the board from the surface of the frame control board 120 to the back surface of the first step portion 305a (opposing wall) of the frame control board case 300.

The distance (height, width) M3 in the thickness direction of the board from the surface of the frame control board 120 (the surface on which the identification symbols of each electronic component are printed) to the back surface of the first step 305a (opposing wall) of the frame control board case 300 is greater than the distance (height, width) M9 in the thickness direction of the board from the upper end of the frame inspection connector 126 to the back surface of the top plate portion 302 of the frame control board case 300 (frame management number sticker 308).

The distance (height, width) M9 in the thickness direction of the board from the upper end of the frame inspection connector 126 to the underside of the top plate 302 of the frame control board case 300 (frame management number sticker 308) is greater than the distance (height, width) M6 in the thickness direction of the board from the upper surface of the main body of the frame control unit 120m (printed surface of chip information 120m1, model information sticker for frame chip 120m2) to the underside of the top plate 302 of the frame control board case 300.

The distance M6 (height, width) in the thickness direction of the board from the top surface of the main body of the frame control unit 120m (printed surface with chip information 120m1, model information sticker for frame chip 120m2) to the back surface of the top plate 302 of the frame control board case 300 (frame management number sticker 308) is greater than the distance M7 (height, width) in the thickness direction of the board from the top surface (printed surface with capacitor information) of the electrolytic capacitor C41 to the back surface of the top plate 302 of the frame control board case 300.

The distance M7 (height, width) in the thickness direction of the board from the top surface (the surface on which the capacitor information is printed) of electrolytic capacitor C41 to the back surface (frame management number sticker 308) of the top plate portion 302 of frame control board case 300 is greater than the distance M8 (height, width) in the thickness direction of the board from the top surface (the surface on which the capacitor information is printed) of electrolytic capacitor C67 to the back surface of the top plate portion 302 of frame control board case 300.

In this way, the identification display of the frame control display 125 (frame control display information such as model number 125a1 and lot number 125a2) is higher than the identification display of a specified integrated circuit (e.g., integrated circuit X1, IC12, IC15) (integrated circuit information such as model number and manufacturer name) in the thickness direction of the board from the surface of the frame control board 120 (distance, width). Therefore, even when viewed through (through) the frame control board case 300, it is difficult to confuse the identification display of the frame control display 125 with the identification display of the specified integrated circuit, making it possible to improve the distinguishability of the identification display of the frame control display 125 and the identification display of the specified integrated circuit, and improving convenience for game store staff.

In addition, the identification display of the frame control display 125 (frame control display information such as model number 125a1 and lot number 125a2) is lower than the identification display of a specified capacitor (e.g., electrolytic capacitors C41, C67) (capacitor information such as model number, capacity, and manufacturer name) in the thickness direction of the board from the surface of the frame control board 120 (distance, width). Therefore, even when viewed through (through) the frame control board case 300, it is difficult to confuse the identification display of the frame control display 125 with the identification display of the specified capacitor, making it possible to improve the distinguishability of the identification display of the frame control display 125 and the identification display of the specified capacitor, and improving convenience for game store staff.

In addition, the height (distance, width) of the frame control board 120 in the thickness direction of the board is different between the identification display of the frame control display 125 (frame control display information such as model number 125a1 and lot number 125a2) and the identification display of the frame control unit 120m (chip information 120m1 indicating the frame control unit 120m, chip information such as model number and manufacturer name printed on the frame chip model information sticker 120m2). Therefore, even when viewed through the frame control board case 300, it is difficult to confuse the identification display of the frame control display 125 and the identification display of the frame control unit 120m, and it is possible to improve the distinguishability of the identification display of the frame control display 125 and the identification display of the frame control unit 120m, and it is possible to improve the convenience of the game store staff.

Although the frame control unit 120m is mounted on the frame control board 120 using a socket, multiple terminals of the frame control unit 120m may be inserted into multiple through holes provided in the frame control board 120 for mounting. In this case, the distance (height, width) H6 in the thickness direction of the board from the surface of the frame control unit 120m (printed surface of chip information, chip model information sticker) to the back surface of the top plate 302 of the frame control board case 300 is greater than the distance (height, width) H5 in the thickness direction of the board from the display surface 125a of the frame control display 125 (printed surface of frame control display information such as model number 125a1 and lot number 125a2) to the back surface of the top plate 302 of the frame control board case 300, and is smaller than the distance (height, width) K2 in the thickness direction of the board from the surface of the frame control board 120 (printed surface of the identification symbols of each electronic component) to the back surface of the top plate 302 of the frame control board case 300 (or frame management number sticker 308).

(Relationship between the distances of two points for each part based on the frame control indicator)
19, the relationship of the distance between two points for each portion will be described with reference to the frame control display 125. FIG. 19 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line E-E in FIG.

The distance (height, width) K2 in the thickness direction of the board from the surface of the frame control board 120 (the surface on which the identification symbols of each electronic component are printed) to the back surface of the top plate portion 302 of the frame control board case 300 (the frame management number sticker 308) is greater than the distance (height, width) K10 in the thickness direction of the board from the surface of the frame control board 120 to the top end of the game ball count clear button 121b.

In addition, the distance (height, width) K2 in the thickness direction of the board from the surface of the frame control board 120 to the back surface (frame management number sticker 308) of the top plate portion 302 of the frame control board case 300 is greater than the distance (height, width) in the thickness direction of the board from the surface of the frame control board 120 (the surface on which the identification symbols of various electronic components are printed) to the upper end of the game ball count clear switch 121.

The distance (height, width) K10 in the thickness direction of the board from the surface of the frame control board 120 (the surface on which the identification symbols of various electronic components are printed) to the top end of the game ball count clear button 121b is approximately the same as or is identical to the distance (height, width) K11 in the thickness direction of the board from the surface of the frame control board 120 (the surface on which the identification symbols of various electronic components are printed) to the top end of the ball removal button 122b.

In addition, the distance (height, width) in the thickness direction of the board from the surface of the frame control board 120 (the surface on which the identification symbols of various electronic components are printed) to the upper end of the game ball count clear switch 121 is approximately the same as or the distance (height, width) in the thickness direction of the board from the surface of the frame control board 120 (the surface on which the identification symbols of various electronic components are printed) to the upper end of the ball removal switch 122.

The distance (height, width) K11 in the thickness direction of the board from the surface of the frame control board 120 (the surface on which the identification symbols of various electronic components are printed) to the top end of the ball removal button 122b is approximately the same as or is the same as the distance (height, width) K12 in the thickness direction of the board from the surface of the frame control board 120 (the surface on which the identification symbols of various electronic components are printed) to the top end of the error release button 123b.

In addition, the distance (height, width) in the thickness direction of the board from the surface of the frame control board 120 (the surface on which the identification symbols of various electronic components are printed) to the upper end of the ball removal switch 122 is approximately the same as or the same as the distance (height, width) in the thickness direction of the board from the surface of the frame control board 120 (the surface on which the identification symbols of various electronic components are printed) to the upper end of the error release switch 123.

The distance (height, width) M13 in the thickness direction of the board from the display surface 125a of the frame control display 125 to the top ends of the various buttons (game ball count clear button 121b, ball removal button 122b, error release button 123b) is greater than the distance (height, width) K5 in the thickness direction of the board from the surface of the frame control board 120 (the surface on which the identification symbols of each electronic component are printed) to the display surface 125a of the frame control display 125 (the surface on which frame control display information such as model number 125a1 and lot number 125a2 is printed).

The distance (height, width) K5 in the thickness direction of the board from the surface of the frame control board 120 (the surface printed with the identification symbols of each electronic component) to the display surface 125a of the frame control display 125 (the surface printed with the frame control display information such as model number 125a1 and lot number 125a2) is greater than the distance (height, width) M10 in the thickness direction of the board from the display surface 125a of the frame control display 125 to the top surface of the main body of the frame control unit 120m (the surface printed with the chip information 120m1, the model information sticker for frame chip 120m2).

The distance (height, width) M10 in the thickness direction of the board from the display surface 125a of the frame control display 125 (printed surface of frame control display information such as model number 125a1 and lot number 125a2) to the top surface of the main body of the frame control unit 120m (printed surface of chip information 120m1, model information sticker for frame chip 120m2) is greater than the distance (height, width) M11 in the thickness direction of the board from the display surface 125a of the frame control display 125 to the top surface of the main body of the integrated circuit X1 (printed surface of integrated circuit information such as model number and manufacturer name).

The distance (height, width) M11 in the thickness direction of the board from the display surface 125a of the frame control display 125 (printed surface of frame control display information such as model number 125a1 and lot number 125a2) to the top surface of the main body of the integrated circuit X1 (printed surface of integrated circuit information such as model number and manufacturer name) is approximately the same as the distance (height, width) M12 in the thickness direction of the board from the display surface 125a of the frame control display 125 to the top surface of the main body of the integrated circuit IC15 (printed surface of integrated circuit information such as model number and manufacturer name).

In this way, the distance in the thickness direction of the board from the surface of the frame control board 120 (the printed surface of the identification symbols of each electronic component) to the display surface 125a of the frame control display 125 (the printed surface of the frame control display information such as model number 125a1 and lot number 125a2) is different from the distance in the thickness direction of the board from the display surface 125a of the frame control display 125 (the printed surface of the frame control display information such as model number 125a1 and lot number 125a2) to the upper surface of the main body of the frame control unit 120m (the printed surface of the chip information 120m1, the model information sticker for frame chip 120m2). Therefore, it is difficult to confuse (and easier to distinguish) the information displayed on the surface of the frame control board 120 and the information displayed on the display surface 125a of the frame control display 125, and it is possible to improve the convenience of the game store staff who visually inspects the various electronic components of the frame control board 120 through the frame control board case 300.

In addition, the distance in the thickness direction of the board from the display surface 125a of the frame control display 125 (printed surface of frame control display information such as model number 125a1 and lot number 125a2) to the top surface of the main body of the frame control unit 120m (printed surface of chip information 120m1, model information sticker for frame chip 120m2) is different from the distance in the thickness direction of the board from the display surface 125a of the frame control display 125 to the top surface of the main body of the integrated circuit X1 (height, width). Therefore, it is difficult to confuse (and easier to distinguish) the information displayed on the display surface 125a of the frame control display 125, the information displayed on the top surface of the main body of the frame control unit 120m, and the information displayed on the top surface of the integrated circuit X1, and it is possible to improve the convenience of the game store staff who visually inspects various electronic components of the frame control board 120 through the frame control board case 300.

In addition, the distance in the thickness direction of the board from the display surface 125a of the frame control display 125 (printed surface of frame control display information such as model number 125a1 and lot number 125a2) to the top surface of the main body of the frame control unit 120m (printed surface of chip information 120m1, model information sticker for frame chip 120m2) is different from the distance in the thickness direction of the board from the display surface 125a of the frame control display 125 to the top surface of the main body of the integrated circuit IC15 (height, width). Therefore, it is difficult to confuse (and easier to distinguish) the information displayed on the display surface 125a of the frame control display 125, the information displayed on the top surface of the main body of the frame control unit 120m, and the information displayed on the top surface of the integrated circuit IC15, and this improves the convenience of game store staff who visually inspect various electronic components of the frame control board 120 through the frame control board case 300.

The distance (height, width) M11 in the thickness direction of the board from the display surface 125a of the frame control display 125 (printed surface of frame control display information such as model number 125a1 and lot number 125a2) to the top surface of the main body of the integrated circuit X1 (printed surface of integrated circuit information such as model number and manufacturer name) may be different from the distance (height, width) M12 in the thickness direction of the board from the display surface 125a of the frame control display 125 to the top surface of the main body of the integrated circuit IC15 (printed surface of integrated circuit information such as model number and manufacturer name).

(Sticker attached to the frame control board case)
The stickers affixed to the frame control board case 300 will be described with reference to Fig. 20. Fig. 20(a) is a diagram showing a frame control number sticker 308 affixed to the frame control number sticker affixing section 307, Fig. 20(b) is a diagram showing an operation guide sticker 309 affixed to the frame control board case 300 alongside the frame control number sticker 308, and Fig. 20(c) is a diagram for comparing the main control number sticker 208 and the frame control number sticker 308.

As shown in FIG. 20(a), the frame management number sticker 308 is a transparent rectangular sticker and includes a light-transmitting section 308a that allows the rear to be seen through, a frame management information printing section 308b on which management information for the frame control device 120A is printed, an opener entry section 308c for recording the person who opened the frame control board case 300, an opening date entry section 308d for recording the date of opening of the frame control board case 300, an information printing section 308e on which predetermined text information is printed, a line section 308f that is printed to follow the outline of the frame management number sticker 308, and a light-transmitting window section 308g that allows the rear of the frame management number sticker 308 to be seen through.

The frame management information printed section 308b is provided at a position toward the top of the frame management number sticker 308, and has a white printed section (opaque section) consisting of a square first area and a rectangular second area extending rightward from the right side of the first area, a two-dimensional code (QR code: registered trademark) printed in the first area of the white printed section (opaque section), an identification symbol "AA-1" indicating the manufacturer's name printed in the second area, and the management number "No. 111111" of the frame control board 120. The two-dimensional code (QR code: registered trademark) contains information on the manufacturer's name and management number.

The opener entry section 308c is a white printed area (opaque area) that is long from side to side and is located to the left of the lower side of the frame control number sticker 308.

The opening date entry field 308d is a rectangular white printed area (opaque area) that is long from side to side, and is provided to the right of the frame control number sticker 308 and to the right of the opener entry field 208c with some space between them.

The information printing section 308e has a first information printing section 308e1 of "Frame control board management number" printed in black above the frame management information printing section 308b, a second information printing section 308e2 of "Opener" printed in black above the opener entry field 308c, a third information printing section 308e3 of "Date of opening" printed in black above the opening date entry field 308d, and a fourth information printing section 308e4 of "Manufacturer name: Co., Ltd." printed in black near the bottom end of the frame management number sticker 308.

Line portion 308f has a left line portion 308f1 printed along the left outer edge of frame management number sticker 308 from near first information printed portion 308e1 to near fourth information printed portion 308e4, and a right line portion 308f2 printed along the right outer edge of frame management number sticker 308 from near first information printed portion 308e1 to near fourth information printed portion 308e4, and left line portion 308f1 and right line portion 308f2 surround frame management information printed portion 308b, opener entry field 308c, opening date entry field 308d, etc.

The light-transmitting window 308g has a first light-transmitting window 308g1 provided between the frame management information printed section 308b and the opener's entry section 308c, a second light-transmitting window 308g2 provided between the frame management information printed section 308b and the opening date entry section 308d, a third light-transmitting window 308g3 provided between the opener's entry section 308c and the opening date entry section 308d, a fourth light-transmitting window 308g4 provided between the opener's entry section 308c and the left line section 308f1, and a fifth light-transmitting window 308g5 provided between the opening date entry section 308d and the right line section 308f2.

The various electronic components mounted on the frame control board 120 can be seen through each of the light-transmitting windows 308g1-308g5 and the frame control board case 300, and the visibility of the various electronic components differs between when the various electronic components are seen only through the frame control board case 300 and when the various electronic components are seen through the light-transmitting window 308g and the frame control board case 300 (specifically, the former has higher visibility). Details will be described later.

In addition, the various information printed on the frame control number sticker 308 (two-dimensional code, identification symbol, control number, "frame control board control number," "opener," "date of opening," "manufacturer name: Co., Ltd.", and line section 308f) is written in black text in the 9th font (9th typeface).

As shown in FIG. 20(b), the operation guide sticker 309 is a transparent rectangular sticker, and includes a light-transmitting portion 209a that allows the rear to be seen through, and an information printing portion 309b on which operation guide information for the various buttons provided on the frame control device 120A is printed. The operation guide sticker 309 does not have a watermark (pattern) to prevent counterfeiting, and is smaller in width (area) in the vertical and horizontal directions than the frame management number sticker 308.

The information printing section 309b has a first guide printing section 309b1 on the right side of the operation guide sticker 309 where a "ball removal button + arrow mark" is printed in yellow to indicate the position of the ball removal button 122b (ball removal switch 122), and a second guide printing section 309b2 on the left side of the operation guide sticker 309 where a "error release button + arrow mark" is printed in yellow to indicate the position of the error release button 123b (error release switch 123).

The various information printed on the operation guide sticker 309 ("ball removal button + arrow mark", "error release button + arrow mark") is written in yellow text in the 10th font (10th typeface).

As shown in FIG. 20(c), when comparing the main management number sticker 208 and the frame management number sticker 308, the widths of the frame management number sticker 308 in the up, down, left and right directions are smaller than the widths of the main management number sticker 208 in the up, down, left and right directions. In other words, the area of the frame management number sticker 308 is smaller than the area of the main management number sticker 208.

In addition, the main management number sticker 208 has two opener entry fields 208c, while the frame management number sticker 308 has one opener entry field 308c. In other words, the frame management number sticker 308 has fewer opener entry fields 308c than the main management number sticker 208.

In addition, the main management number sticker 208 has two opening date entry fields 208d, while the frame management number sticker 308 has one opening date entry field 308d. In other words, the number of opening date entry fields 308d on the frame management number sticker 308 is fewer than the number of opening date entry fields 208d on the main management number sticker 208.

In addition, the main management number sticker 208 has a watermark (pattern) to prevent counterfeiting, whereas the frame management number sticker 308 does not have a watermark (pattern) to prevent counterfeiting. In other words, the light transmittance (transmittance, visibility of electronic components mounted on the frame control board 120) of the light-transmitting portion 308a and the light-transmitting window portion 308g of the frame management number sticker 308 is higher than the light transmittance (transmittance, visibility of electronic components mounted on the main control board 110) of the light-transmitting portion 208a and the light-transmitting window portion 208g of the main management number sticker 208.

In addition, a two-dimensional code, an identification symbol, and the management number of the main control board are printed on the main management information printing section 208b of the main management number sticker 208, and a two-dimensional code, an identification symbol, and the management number of the frame control board are printed on the frame management information printing section 308b of the frame management number sticker 308. In other words, the same information is printed on the main management information printing section 208b of the main management number sticker 208 and the frame management information printing section 308b of the frame management number sticker 308.

In this way, the frame control number sticker 308 is configured to include an identification information display area (frame control information printing section 308b) having a two-dimensional code (first information) which is an information image for identifying the frame control device 120A (frame control board 120), an identification symbol (second information) indicating the name of the manufacturer of the frame control device 120A (frame control board 120), and a management number (third information) for identifying the frame control device 120A (frame control board 120), and an opening information entry area (opener entry field 308c, opening date entry field 308d) for entering opening information of the frame control device 120A. This makes it easier to inspect and check the main control device 110A, and improves convenience for the manufacturer's employees and game store staff.

In addition, the frame control number sticker 308 includes an identification information display area (frame control information printing section 308b) having a two-dimensional code (first information) which is an information image for identifying the frame control device 120A (frame control board 120), an identification symbol (second information) indicating the name of the manufacturer of the frame control device 120A, and a management number (third information) for identifying the frame control device 120A, and an opening information writing area (opener entry field 308c, opening date entry field 308d) for writing opening information of the frame control device 120A, and between the identification information display area and the opening information writing area, there is provided a see-through area (first light-transmitting window portion 308g1, second light-transmitting window portion 308g2) through which various electronic components (integrated circuits, capacitors, resistors, resistor arrays, etc.) mounted on the frame control board 120 at the rear can be seen. Therefore, even if the frame control number sticker 308 is attached to the frame control board case 300, various electronic components behind the frame control number sticker 308 can be visually confirmed through the see-through area, making it possible to ensure the security of the gaming machine. It is also possible to improve the convenience of the manufacturer's employees and gaming store staff.

The frame management number sticker 308 (opening information entry area) includes a first entry area (opener entry field 308c) in which the name of the opener of the frame control device 120A can be entered, and a second entry area (opening date entry field 308d) in which the date of opening of the frame control device 120A can be entered, and between the first entry area (opener entry field 308c) and the second entry area (opening date entry field 308d), a see-through area (third transparent window portion 308g3) is provided in which various electronic components (integrated circuits, capacitors, resistors, resistor arrays, etc.) mounted on the rear frame control board 120 can be seen. Therefore, even if the frame management number sticker 308 is attached to the frame control board case 300, various electronic components behind the frame management number sticker 308 can be visually confirmed through the see-through area, making it possible to ensure the security of the gaming machine. It is also possible to improve the convenience of the manufacturer's employees and gaming store staff.

The operation guide sticker 309 also includes a first guide printing section 309b1 on which operation guide information for the first operation section (ball removal button 122b) provided on the frame control device 120A is printed, and a second guide printing section 309b2 on which operation guide information for the second operation section (error release button 123b) provided on the frame control device 120A is printed. This makes it possible to improve convenience for game store staff who operate the first and second operation sections.

The operation guide sticker 309 includes a first guide printing section 309b1 on which operation guide information for the first operation section (ball removal button 122b) provided on the frame control device 120A is printed, and a second guide printing section 309b2 on which operation guide information for the second operation section (error release button 123b) provided on the frame control device 120A is printed. Between the first guide printing section 309b1 and the second guide printing section 309b2, a see-through area (transparent section 309a) is provided through which various electronic components (integrated circuits, capacitors, resistors, resistor arrays, etc.) mounted on the rear frame control board 120 can be seen. Therefore, even if the operation guide sticker 309 is attached to the frame control board case 300, various electronic components behind the operation guide sticker 309 can be visually confirmed through the see-through area, making it possible to ensure the security of the gaming machine.

In addition, the area of the operation guide sticker 309, which contains less information important for the management and security of the gaming machine 1 and therefore contains less information, is smaller than the area of the frame management number sticker 308, which contains a large amount of information important for the management and security of the gaming machine 1. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the frame control device 120A from being extremely reduced by the operation guide sticker 309, which contains less information important for the management and security of the gaming machine 1 (small amount of information), and it is possible to ensure the security of the gaming machine.

In addition, the main control number sticker 208, which is attached to the main control device 110A and has a see-through area that allows the various electronic components mounted on the rear main control board 110 to be seen through, has a predetermined pattern (anti-counterfeiting watermark) added to it, while the frame control device 120A and the frame control number sticker 308, which is attached to the frame control device 120A and has a see-through area that allows the various electronic components mounted on the rear frame control board 120 to be seen through, does not have the predetermined pattern (anti-counterfeiting watermark) added to it. As a result, it is possible to increase the physical security of the main control device 110A while increasing the visual security of the frame control device 120A, thereby ensuring the security of the gaming machine.

The transparency of the main control number sticker 208, which is attached to the main control device 110A and has a see-through area that allows various electronic components mounted on the rear main control board 110 to be seen (low transparency due to watermark), is different from the transparency of the frame control device 120A and has a see-through area that allows various electronic components mounted on the rear frame control board 120 to be seen (high transparency due to no watermark). This makes it possible to make the ease of visual confirmation of the main control device 110A and the frame control device 120A different, and makes it difficult to counterfeit the main control number sticker 208 and the frame control number sticker 308 using the same method, thereby ensuring the security of the gaming machine.

The area of the main control number sticker 208, which is affixed to the main control device 110A and has a see-through area that allows various electronic components mounted on the rear main control board 110 to be seen through, is made different from the area of the frame control device 308, which is affixed to the frame control device 120A and has a see-through area that allows various electronic components mounted on the rear frame control board 120 to be seen through. This makes it possible to make the main control device 110A and the frame control device 120A easier to visually confirm, and makes it difficult to counterfeit the main control number sticker 208 and the frame control number sticker 308 using the same method (same process), thereby ensuring the security of the gaming machine.

The main control number sticker 208, which is affixed to the main control device 110A and has a see-through area that allows the various electronic components mounted on the rear main control board 110 to be seen through, has a different number of fields (two for the opener and two for the date of opening) from the frame control number sticker 308, which is affixed to the frame control device 120A and has a see-through area that allows the various electronic components mounted on the rear frame control board 120 to be seen through, and has a different number of fields (one for the opener and one for the date of opening). This makes it difficult to counterfeit the main control number sticker 208 and the frame control number sticker 308 using the same method (same process), and makes it possible to ensure the security of the gaming machine.

The name of the opener is to be written in the first writing area (opener entry field 308c) of the frame control number sticker 308, but the name of the opening hall may be written, a personal seal may be affixed, a description of the situation when it was opened may be written, or the date of opening may be written.

In addition, the second entry area (opener entry area 308c) of the frame management number sticker 308 is designed to be used to enter the date of opening, but it may also be used to enter the date and time of opening, the location of opening, the state of the item when it was opened, or the name of the person who opened it.

In addition, although the main management number sticker 208 is watermarked and the frame management number sticker 308 is not, both the main management number sticker 208 and the frame management number sticker 308 may be watermarked. In this case, the transparency of the main management number sticker 208 and the frame management number sticker 308 may be the same or different (for example, the transparency of one of the main management number sticker 208 and the frame management number sticker 308 may be higher).

Also, the frame management number sticker 308 may be watermarked, while the main management number sticker 208 may not be watermarked. In this case, the transparency of the main management number sticker 208 may be made higher than the transparency of the frame management number sticker 308, or may be made the same.

In addition, the area of the frame management number sticker 308 is smaller than the area of the main management number sticker 208, but the area of the main management number sticker 208 may also be made smaller than the area of the frame management number sticker 308.

In addition, while the shapes of the main management number sticker 208 and the frame management number sticker 308 are both rectangular (rectangular), the shapes of the main management number sticker 208 and the frame management number sticker 308 may be different (for example, one of the main management number sticker 208 and the frame management number sticker 308 may be round or triangular, and the other rectangular).

In addition, the number of fields provided on the frame management number sticker 308 (one field for the opener and one field for the date of opening) is fewer than the number of fields provided on the main management number sticker 208 (two fields for the opener and two fields for the date of opening), but the number of fields provided on the main management number sticker 208 may be fewer than the number of fields provided on the frame management number sticker 308 (for example, the frame management number sticker 308 may have two fields for the opener and two fields for the date of opening, and the main management number sticker 208 may have one field for the opener and one field for the date of opening).

In addition, the main management number sticker 208 and the frame management number sticker 308 are each made up of a single sticker and have a management information printed section and various entry fields, but the main management number sticker 208 and the frame management number sticker 308 may each be made up of two stickers, with one sticker having a management information printed section and the other sticker having various entry fields.

(The relationship between the various seals on the frame control board case and the various electronic components)
The relationship between the various seals on the frame control board case 300 and the various electronic components will be described with reference to FIG.

The frame management number sticker 308 is attached to the frame management number sticker attachment portion 307 of the first case member 301 at a position corresponding to the tall component concentrated mounting area HM where tall components such as electrolytic capacitors BC of the frame control board 120 are concentrated, and so as to span multiple electronic components DB.

Specifically, the frame management number sticker 308, frame control unit 120m, game ball count clear button 121b (game ball count clear switch 121), ball removal button 122b (ball removal switch 122), error reset button 123b (error reset switch 123), frame control display 125, and various connectors (female connectors 127a to 127f, test connector 128) are arranged so that they do not overlap front to back.

Through each light-transmitting window 308g (or light-transmitting portion 308a) on the frame control number sticker 308, it is possible to see the various electronic components BC (integrated circuits IC11, 17, etc., capacitors C20-22, etc., resistors R57, 75, etc., connectors 127a-127c, etc.) including the electrolytic capacitor BC mounted in the tall component concentrated mounting area HM, as well as the various identification symbols and mounting reference lines KJ printed on the frame control board 120 corresponding to these various electronic components.

On the other hand, through each of the light-transmitting windows 308g (or light-transmitting portions 308a) provided in the frame management number sticker 308, the frame control unit 120m, the game ball count clear button 121b (game ball count clear switch 121), the ball removal button 122b (ball removal switch 122), the error reset button 123b (error reset switch 123), the frame control display 125 (display surface 125a), specific connectors (connectors 127d-127f, test connector 128), etc., as well as the various identification symbols and mounting reference lines KJ printed on the frame control board 120 corresponding to these various electronic components, are difficult or impossible to see.

The operation guide sticker 309 is attached to the first case member 301 in a position corresponding to the ball removal button 122b (ball removal switch 122) and the error reset button 123b (error reset switch 123), which are located below the frame management number sticker 308 (right side in Figure 21), and so as to span multiple electronic component DBs.

Specifically, the operation guide sticker 309, the frame control unit 120m, the game ball count clear button 121b (game ball count clear switch 121), the ball removal button 122b (ball removal switch 122), the error reset button 123b (error reset switch 123), the frame control display 125, and the various connectors (female connectors 127a to 127f, test connector 128) are arranged so that they do not overlap front to back.

In addition, the arrow mark in the first guide print section ("ball removal button + arrow mark") of the operation guide sticker 309 is positioned so as to point to the ball removal button 122b, and the arrow mark in the second guide print section ("error release button + arrow mark") of the operation guide sticker 309 is positioned so as to point to the error release button 123b.

Through the translucent portion 309a provided on the operation guide sticker 309, it is possible to see the various electronic components BC (integrated circuits IC6, 11, 14, etc.; capacitors C9, 31, 36, etc.; resistors R57, 75, 103, etc.; game ball count clear switch 121; ball removal switch 122; error release switch 123; frame control display 125, etc.) and the various identification symbols and mounting reference lines KJ printed on the frame control board 120 corresponding to these various electronic components.

On the other hand, through the translucent portion 309a provided on the operation guide sticker 309, the frame control unit 120m, the game ball count clear button 121b (game ball count clear switch 121), the ball removal button 122b (ball removal switch 122), the error reset button 123b (error reset switch 123), the frame control display 125 (display surface 125a), specific connectors (connectors 127d-127f, test connector 128), etc., as well as the various identification symbols and mounting reference lines KJ printed on the frame control board 120 corresponding to these various electronic components, are difficult or impossible to see.

In addition, the engraved portion 310a of the button cover member 310 converted to the first state, on which the words "game ball count clear switch" are engraved, is positioned to cover the top of the game ball count clear button 121b (game ball count clear switch 121) so as not to overlap the frame management number sticker 308 from the front to the back.

In this way, the frame control board case 300 has an identification information display area (frame management information printed section 308b) in which a two-dimensional code (first identification information), an identification symbol (second identification information), and the management number of the frame control board (third identification information) are displayed, and the game ball count clear button 121b (game ball count clear switch 121) for clearing the number of game balls (game value amount) owned by the player is provided on the frame control board 120 so as not to overlap the identification information display area (frame management information printed section 308b) from the front to the back. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the identification information display area (frame management information printed section 308b) makes it difficult to operate the game ball count clear button 121b (game ball count clear switch 121), and it is possible to improve the convenience of game store staff.

The frame control board case 300 also has an identification information display area (frame management information printed section 308b) in which a two-dimensional code (first identification information), an identification symbol (second identification information), and the management number of the frame control board (third identification information) are displayed, and guidance information (engraved section 310a engraved with the words "game ball count clear switch") indicating the game ball count clear button 121b (game ball count clear switch 121) for clearing the number of game balls (game value amount) owned by the player is provided so as not to overlap the identification information display area (frame management information printed section 308b). This makes it easier to grasp the presence of the game ball count clear button 121b (game ball count clear switch 121), improving convenience for game store staff.

The frame control board case 300 has an identification information display area (frame management information printed section 308b) in which a two-dimensional code (first identification information), an identification symbol (second identification information), and the management number of the frame control board (third identification information) are displayed, and the ball removal button 122b (ball removal switch 122) for removing the gaming medium from the gaming machine is provided on the frame control board 120 so as not to overlap the identification information display area (frame management information printed section 308b) from the front to the back. This makes it possible to avoid the inconvenience of the identification information display area (frame management information printed section 308b) making it difficult to operate the ball removal button 122b (ball removal switch 122), and improves convenience for gaming store staff.

The frame control board case 300 also has an identification information display area (frame management information printed section 308b) in which a two-dimensional code (first identification information), an identification symbol (second identification information), and the management number of the frame control board (third identification information) are displayed, and guidance information (first guidance printed section 309b1 with "ball removal button + arrow mark" printed on it) indicating the ball removal button 122b (ball removal switch 122) for removing the gaming medium from the gaming machine is provided so as not to overlap the identification information display area (frame management information printed section 308b) in front or behind. This makes it easier to grasp the presence of the ball removal button 122b (ball removal switch 122), improving convenience for gaming store staff.

The frame control board case 300 has an identification information display area (frame management information printed section 308b) in which a two-dimensional code (first identification information), an identification symbol (second identification information), and the management number of the frame control board (third identification information) are displayed, and an error reset button 123b (error reset switch 123) for clearing a specified abnormality or a specified abnormality notification is provided on the frame control board 120 so as not to overlap the identification information display area (frame management information printed section 308b) from the front to the back. This makes it possible to avoid the inconvenience of the identification information display area (frame management information printed section 308b) making it difficult to operate the error reset button 123b (error reset switch 123), and improves convenience for game store staff.

The frame control board case 300 also has an identification information display area (frame management information printed section 308b) in which a two-dimensional code (first identification information), an identification symbol (second identification information), and the management number of the frame control board (third identification information) are displayed, and guidance information (second guidance printed section 309b2 with "error reset button + arrow mark" printed on it) indicating the error reset button 123b (error reset switch 123) for clearing a specified abnormality or a specified abnormality notification is provided so as not to overlap the identification information display area (frame management information printed section 308b). This makes it easier to grasp the presence of the error reset button 123b (error reset switch 123), improving convenience for game store staff.

In addition, through each light-transmitting window 308g (or light-transmitting portion 308a) provided on the frame management number sticker 308, the frame control unit 120m, the game ball count clear button 121b (game ball count clear switch 121), the ball removal button 122b (ball removal switch 122), the error reset button 123b (error reset switch 123), the frame control display 125 (display surface 125a), specific connectors (connectors 127d to 127f, test connector 128), etc., as well as various identification symbols and some or all of the mounting reference line KJ printed on the frame control board 120 corresponding to these various electronic components may be easily or completely visible.

(Relationship between the distances between two points on each part of the main control device and the frame control device)
The relationship between the distance between two points at each part of main control device 110A and frame control device 120A will be described using Fig. 22. Fig. 22(a) is a diagram showing the distance between two points at each part of main control device 110A, and Fig. 22(b) is a diagram showing the distance between two points at each part of frame control device 120A. Here, the distance between two points at each part not mentioned above will be described.

As shown in FIG. 22(a), the distance (height, width) L2 in the thickness direction of the board from the surface of the main control board 110 to the back surface (main control number sticker 208) of the top plate 202 of the main control board case 200 is greater than the distance (height, width) H9 in the thickness direction of the board from the upper end (top surface of the operation section) of the RWM clear switch 111a to the back surface (main control number sticker 208) of the top plate 202 of the main control board case 200.

The distance (height, width) H9 in the thickness direction of the board from the top end (top surface of the operation part) of the RWM clear switch 111a to the back surface (main control number sticker 208) of the top plate 202 of the main control board case 200 is greater than the distance (height, width) H7 in the thickness direction of the board from the top end of the main inspection connector 116 to the surface (model information sticker 209) of the top plate 202 of the main control board case 200.

The distance (height, width) H4 in the thickness direction of the board from the top end of the main control unit 110m (one-chip microcomputer) to the back surface (main control number sticker 208) of the top plate 202 of the main control board case 200 is greater than the distance (height, width) H10 in the thickness direction of the board from the top end of the RWM clear button 111b to the back surface (main control number sticker 208) of the top plate 202 of the main control board case 200.

As shown in FIG. 22(b), the distance H10 (height, width) in the thickness direction of the board from the upper end of the frame inspection connector 126 to the surface (operation guide sticker 309) of the top plate 302 of the frame control board case 300 is greater than the distance M9 (height, width) in the thickness direction of the board from the upper end of the frame inspection connector 126 to the back surface (frame management number sticker 308) of the top plate 302 of the frame control board case 300.

The distance (height, width) K2 in the thickness direction of the board from the surface of the frame control board 120 to the back surface of the top plate 302 of the frame control board case 300 (frame management number sticker 308) is greater than the distance (height, width) M13 in the thickness direction of the board from the upper end (top surface of the operation part) of the game ball count clear switch 121 to the back surface of the top plate 302 of the frame control board case 300 (frame management number sticker 308).

The distance (height, width) M13 in the thickness direction of the board from the top end (top surface of the operation part) of the game ball count clear switch 121 to the back surface (frame management number sticker 308) of the top plate part 302 of the frame control board case 300 is greater than the distance (height, width) M6 in the thickness direction of the board from the top surface (printed surface of the chip information, model information sticker for frame chip 120m2) of the main body part of the frame control part 120m to the back surface (frame management number sticker 308) of the top plate part 302 of the frame control board case 300.

The distance (height, width) M13 in the thickness direction of the board from the top end (top surface of the operation part) of the game ball count clear switch 121 to the back surface (frame management number sticker 308) of the top plate part 302 of the frame control board case 300 is approximately the same as or is the same as the distance (height, width) M15 in the thickness direction of the board from the top end (top surface of the operation part) of the ball removal switch 122 to the back surface (frame management number sticker 308) of the top plate part 302 of the frame control board case 300.

In addition, the distance (height, width) M15 in the thickness direction of the board from the upper end (upper surface of the operation part) of the ball removal switch 122 to the underside of the top plate part 302 of the frame control board case 300 (frame management number sticker 308) is approximately the same as or is identical to the distance (height, width) M17 in the thickness direction of the board from the upper end (upper surface of the operation part) of the error release switch 123 to the underside of the top plate part 302 of the frame control board case 300 (frame management number sticker 308).

The distance (height, width) M9 in the thickness direction of the board from the upper end of the frame inspection connector 126 to the back surface of the top plate 302 of the frame control board case 300 (frame management number sticker 308) is greater than the distance (height, width) M14 in the thickness direction of the board from the upper end of the game ball count clear button 121b to the back surface of the top plate 302 of the frame control board case 300 (frame management number sticker 308).

The distance (height, width) M14 in the thickness direction of the board from the top end of the game ball count clear button 121b to the back surface of the top plate portion 302 of the frame control board case 300 (frame management number sticker 308) is approximately the same as or is the same as the distance (height, width) M16 in the thickness direction of the board from the top end of the ball removal button 122b to the back surface of the top plate portion 302 of the frame control board case 300 (frame management number sticker 308).

The distance (height, width) M16 in the thickness direction of the board from the top end of the ball removal button 122b to the back surface of the top plate 302 of the frame control board case 300 (frame management number sticker 308) is approximately the same as or is the same as the distance (height, width) M18 in the thickness direction of the board from the top end of the error release button 123b to the back surface of the top plate 302 of the frame control board case 300 (frame management number sticker 308).

As shown in Figures 22(a) and 22(b), the distance (height, width) K1 in the thickness direction of the board from the surface of the frame control board 120 to the surface of the top plate 302 of the frame control board case 300 (operation guide sticker 309) is greater than the distance (height, width) L1 in the thickness direction of the board from the surface of the main control board 110 to the surface of the top plate 202 of the main control board case 200 (model information sticker 209).

The distance (height, width) K2 in the thickness direction of the board from the surface of the frame control board 120 to the back surface of the top plate portion 302 of the frame control board case 300 (frame management number sticker 308) is greater than the distance (height, width) L2 in the thickness direction of the board from the surface of the main control board 110 to the back surface of the top plate portion 202 of the main control board case 200 (main management number sticker 208).

The distance (height, width) M6 in the thickness direction of the board from the top surface of the main body of the frame control unit 120m (printed surface of chip information 120m1, model information sticker 120m2 for frame chip) to the underside of the top plate 302 of the frame control board case 300 (frame management number sticker 308) is greater than the distance (height, width) H3 in the thickness direction of the board from the top end of the main control unit 110m (one-chip microcomputer) to the surface of the top plate 202 of the main control board case 200 (model information sticker 209).

The distance (height, width) M6 in the thickness direction of the board from the top surface of the main body of the frame control unit 120m (printed surface of chip information 120m1, model information sticker for frame chip 120m2) to the back surface of the top plate 302 of the frame control board case 300 (frame management number sticker 308) is greater than the distance (height, width) H4 in the thickness direction of the board from the top end of the main control unit 110m (one-chip microcomputer) to the back surface of the top plate 202 of the main control board case 200 (main management number sticker 208).

The distance (height, width) L4 in the thickness direction of the board from the surface of the main control board 110 to the upper end of the main control unit 110m is greater than the distance (height, width) K6 in the thickness direction of the board from the surface of the frame control board 120 to the upper surface of the main body of the frame control unit 120m (printed surface of chip information 120m1, model information sticker for frame chip 120m2).

The distance (height, width) M9 in the thickness direction of the board from the upper end of the frame inspection connector 126 to the back surface of the top plate 302 of the frame control board case 300 (frame management number sticker 308) is greater than the distance (height, width) H8 in the thickness direction of the board from the upper end of the main inspection connector 116 to the back surface of the top plate 202 of the main control board case 200 (main management number sticker 208).

The distance (height, width) M10 in the thickness direction of the board from the upper end of the frame inspection connector 126 to the surface (operation guide sticker 309) of the top plate 302 of the frame control board case 300 is greater than the distance (height, width) H7 in the thickness direction of the board from the upper end of the main inspection connector 116 to the surface (model information sticker 209) of the top plate 202 of the main control board case 200.

The distance (height, width) M13 in the thickness direction of the board from the top end (top surface of the operation part) of the game ball count clear switch 121 to the back surface (frame management number sticker 308) of the top plate part 302 of the frame control board case 300 is greater than the distance (height, width) H9 in the thickness direction of the board from the top end (top surface of the operation part) of the RWM clear switch 111a to the back surface (main management number sticker 208) of the top plate part 202 of the main control board case 200.

The distance (height, width) M15 in the thickness direction of the board from the top end (top surface of the operation part) of the ball removal switch 122 to the back surface (frame management number sticker 308) of the top plate 302 of the frame control board case 300 is greater than the distance (height, width) H9 in the thickness direction of the board from the top end (top surface of the operation part) of the RWM clear switch 111a to the back surface (main management number sticker 208) of the top plate 202 of the main control board case 200.

The distance (height, width) M17 in the thickness direction of the board from the top end (top surface of the operation part) of the error release switch 123 to the back surface (frame management number sticker 308) of the top plate 302 of the frame control board case 300 is greater than the distance (height, width) H9 in the thickness direction of the board from the top end (top surface of the operation part) of the RWM clear switch 111a to the back surface (main management number sticker 208) of the top plate 202 of the main control board case 200.

The distance (height, width) M14 in the thickness direction of the board from the top end of the game ball count clear button 121b to the back surface of the top plate 302 of the frame control board case 300 (frame management number sticker 308) is greater than the distance (height, width) H10 in the thickness direction of the board from the top end of the RWM clear button 111b to the back surface of the top plate 202 of the main control board case 200 (main management number sticker 208).

In this way, the distance (height, width) in the thickness direction of the board from the surface of the main control board 110 to the model information sticker 209 (identification mark) affixed to the surface of the top plate 202 of the main control board case 200 is made different from the distance (height, width) in the thickness direction of the board from the surface of the frame control board 120 to the operation guide sticker 309 (identification mark) affixed to the surface of the top plate 302 of the frame control board case 300. This makes it easier to distinguish between the main control device 110A and the frame control device 120A (enhancing identifiability), improving the convenience of game store staff and preventing inconveniences such as incorrect installation positions during the manufacture of the gaming machine 1 or inspection at the game store.

In addition, the distance (height, width) in the thickness direction of the board from the surface of the main control board 110 to the main control number sticker 208 (identification mark) affixed to the surface (main control number sticker affixing section 207) of the top plate 202 of the main control board case 200 is different from the distance (height, width) in the thickness direction of the board from the surface of the frame control board 120 to the frame control number sticker 308 (identification mark) affixed to the surface (frame control number sticker affixing section 307) of the top plate 302 of the frame control board case 300. This makes it easier to distinguish between the main control device 110A and the frame control device 120A (enhancing identifiability), improving the convenience of game store staff and preventing inconveniences such as incorrect installation positions during the manufacture of the gaming machine 1 or inspection at the game store.

In addition, the distance (height, width) in the thickness direction of the board from the upper end of the main control unit 110m (one-chip microcomputer) to the model information sticker 209 (identification mark) affixed to the surface (main management number sticker affixing section 207) of the top plate section 202 of the main control board case 200 is different from the distance (height, width) in the thickness direction of the board from the upper surface (printed surface of chip information 120m1, model information sticker for frame chip 120m2) of the main body section of the frame control unit 120m to the frame management number sticker 308 (identification mark) affixed to the surface (frame management number sticker affixing section 307) of the top plate section 302 of the frame control board case 300. Therefore, it becomes easier to distinguish between the main control unit 110A and the frame control unit 120A (the distinguishability can be increased), which improves the convenience of the game store staff and also makes it possible to suppress inconveniences such as incorrect installation positions during the manufacture of the game machine 1 or inspection at the game store.

The distance (height, width) in the thickness direction of the board from the upper end of the main control unit 110m (one-chip microcomputer) to the main control number sticker 208 (identification mark) affixed to the surface (main control number sticker affixing section 207) of the top plate section 202 of the main control board case 200 is different from the distance (height, width) in the thickness direction of the board from the upper surface (printed surface of chip information 120m1, model information sticker for frame chip 120m2) of the main body section of the frame control unit 120m to the frame control number sticker 308 (identification mark) affixed to the surface (frame control number sticker affixing section 307) of the top plate section 302 of the frame control board case 300. Therefore, it becomes easier to distinguish between the main control unit 110A and the frame control unit 120A (the distinguishability can be increased), which improves the convenience of game store staff and also makes it possible to suppress inconveniences such as incorrect installation positions during the manufacture of the game machine 1 or inspection at the game store.

In addition, the distance (height, width) in the thickness direction of the board from the upper end of the main inspection connector 116 to the model information sticker 209 (identification mark) affixed to the surface (main management number sticker affixing portion 207) of the top plate portion 202 of the main control board case 200 is different from the distance (height, width) in the thickness direction of the board from the upper end of the frame inspection connector 126 to the operation guide sticker 309 (identification mark) affixed to the surface (frame management number sticker affixing portion 307) of the top plate portion 302 of the frame control board case 300. Therefore, it becomes easier to distinguish between the main control device 110A and the frame control device 120A (the distinguishability can be increased), which improves the convenience of game store staff and prevents inconvenience such as incorrect installation positions during the manufacture of the game machine 1 or inspection at the game store.

In addition, the distance (height, width) in the thickness direction of the board from the upper end of the main inspection connector 116 to the main control number sticker 208 (identification mark) affixed to the surface (main control number sticker affixing section 207) of the top plate 202 of the main control board case 200 is different from the distance (height, width) in the thickness direction of the board from the upper end of the frame inspection connector 126 to the frame control number sticker 308 (identification mark) affixed to the surface (frame control number sticker affixing section 307) of the top plate 302 of the frame control board case 300. This makes it easier to distinguish between the main control device 110A and the frame control device 120A (enhancing identifiability), and makes it possible to prevent inconveniences such as incorrect installation positions during the manufacture of the gaming machine 1 or during inspection at a gaming facility.

In addition, the distance (height, width) in the thickness direction of the board from the upper end (upper surface of the operation part) of the RWM clear switch 111a to the main control number sticker 208 (identification mark) affixed to the surface (main control number sticker affixing part 207) of the top plate part 202 of the main control board case 200 is different from the distance (height, width) in the thickness direction of the board from the upper end (upper surface of the operation part) of the game ball count clear switch 121 to the frame control number sticker 308 (identification mark) affixed to the surface (frame control number sticker affixing part 307) of the top plate part 302 of the frame control board case 300. Therefore, it becomes easier to distinguish between the main control device 110A and the frame control device 120A (the distinguishability can be improved), which improves the convenience of the game store staff and makes it possible to suppress inconveniences such as incorrect installation positions during the manufacture of the game machine 1 or inspection at the game store.

In addition, the distance (height, width) in the thickness direction of the board from the upper end (upper surface of the operation part) of the RWM clear switch 111a to the main control number sticker 208 (identification mark) affixed to the surface (main control number sticker affixing part 207) of the top plate part 202 of the main control board case 200 is different from the distance (height, width) in the thickness direction of the board from the upper end (upper surface of the operation part) of the ball removal switch 122 to the frame control number sticker 308 (identification mark) affixed to the surface (frame control number sticker affixing part 307) of the top plate part 302 of the frame control board case 300. Therefore, it becomes easier to distinguish between the main control device 110A and the frame control device 120A (the distinguishability can be improved), which improves the convenience of the game store staff and prevents inconvenience such as incorrect installation during the manufacture of the game machine 1 or inspection at the game store.

In addition, the distance (height, width) in the thickness direction of the board from the top end (top surface of the operation unit) of the RWM clear button 111b to the main control number sticker 208 (identification mark) affixed to the surface (main control number sticker affixing section 207) of the top plate section 202 of the main control board case 200 is different from the distance (height, width) in the thickness direction of the board from the top end (top surface of the operation unit) of the error release switch 123 to the frame control number sticker 308 (identification mark) affixed to the surface (frame control number sticker affixing section 307) of the top plate section 302 of the frame control board case 300. Therefore, it becomes easier to distinguish between the main control device 110A and the frame control device 120A (their identifiability can be improved), which improves the convenience of game store staff and also makes it possible to prevent inconveniences such as incorrect installation positions during the manufacture of the game machine 1 or during inspection at the game store.

The distance (height, width) L1 in the thickness direction of the board from the surface of the main control board 110 to the model information sticker 209 (identification mark) affixed to the surface of the top plate 202 of the main control board case 200 may be greater than the distance (height, width) K1 in the thickness direction of the board from the surface of the frame control board 120 to the operation guide sticker 309 (identification mark) affixed to the surface (frame management number sticker affixing section 307) of the top plate 302 of the frame control board case 300.

In addition, the distance (height, width) L2 in the thickness direction of the board from the surface of the main control board 110 to the main control number sticker 208 (identification mark) affixed to the surface (main control number sticker affixing section 207) of the top plate 202 of the main control board case 200 may be made larger than the distance (height, width) K2 in the thickness direction of the board from the surface of the frame control board 120 to the frame control number sticker 308 (identification mark) affixed to the surface (frame control number sticker affixing section 307) of the top plate 302 of the frame control board case 300.

In addition, the distance (height, width) H3 in the thickness direction of the board from the upper end of the main control unit 110m (one-chip microcomputer) to the model information sticker 209 (identification mark) affixed to the surface (main control number sticker affixing section 207) of the top plate 202 of the main control board case 200 may be made larger than the distance (height, width) M6 in the thickness direction of the board from the upper surface (chip information printed surface, 120m1) of the main body of the frame control unit 120m to the frame control number sticker 308 (identification mark) affixed to the surface (frame control number sticker affixing section 307) of the top plate 302 of the frame control board case 300.

In addition, the distance (height, width) H4 in the thickness direction of the board from the upper end of the main control unit 110m (one-chip microcomputer) to the main control number sticker 208 (identification mark) affixed to the surface (main control number sticker affixing section 207) of the top plate section 202 of the main control board case 200 may be made larger than the distance (height, width) M6 in the thickness direction of the board from the upper surface (printed surface of chip information 120m1, model information sticker for frame chip 120m2) of the main body section of the frame control unit 120m to the frame control number sticker 308 (identification mark) affixed to the surface (frame control number sticker affixing section 307) of the top plate section 302 of the frame control board case 300.

In addition, the distance (height, width) H7 in the thickness direction of the board from the upper end of the main inspection connector 116 to the model information sticker 209 (identification mark) affixed to the surface of the top plate 202 of the main control board case 200 may be greater than the distance (height, width) M10 in the thickness direction of the board from the upper end of the frame inspection connector 126 to the operation guide sticker 309 (identification mark) affixed to the surface of the top plate 302 of the frame control board case 300.

In addition, the distance (height, width) H8 in the thickness direction of the board from the upper end of the main inspection connector 116 to the main management number sticker 208 (identification mark) affixed to the surface (main management number sticker affixing section 207) of the top plate 202 of the main control board case 200 may be made larger than the distance (height, width) M9 in the thickness direction of the board from the upper end of the frame inspection connector 126 to the frame management number sticker 308 (identification mark) affixed to the surface (frame management number sticker affixing section 307) of the top plate 302 of the frame control board case 300.

In addition, the distance (height, width) H9 in the thickness direction of the board from the upper end (upper surface of the operation section) of the RWM clear switch 111a to the main control number sticker 208 (identification mark) affixed to the surface (main control number sticker affixing section 207) of the top plate section 202 of the main control board case 200 may be made larger than the distance (height, width) M13 in the thickness direction of the board from the upper end (upper surface of the operation section) of the game ball count clear switch 121 to the frame control number sticker 308 (identification mark) affixed to the surface (frame control number sticker affixing section 307) of the top plate section 302 of the frame control board case 300.

In addition, the distance (height, width) H9 in the thickness direction of the board from the upper end (upper surface of the operation section) of the RWM clear switch 111a to the main management number sticker 208 (identification mark) affixed to the surface (main management number sticker affixing section 207) of the top plate section 202 of the main control board case 200 may be made larger than the distance (height, width) M15 in the thickness direction of the board from the upper end (upper surface of the operation section) of the ball removal switch 122 to the frame management number sticker 308 (identification mark) affixed to the surface (frame management number sticker affixing section 307) of the top plate section 302 of the frame control board case 300.

In addition, the distance (height, width) H9 in the thickness direction of the board from the upper end (upper surface of the operation section) of the RWM clear switch 111a to the main management number sticker 208 (identification mark) affixed to the surface (main management number sticker affixing section 207) of the top plate section 202 of the main control board case 200 may be made larger than the distance (height, width) M17 in the thickness direction of the board from the upper end (upper surface of the operation section) of the error release switch 123 to the frame management number sticker 308 (identification mark) affixed to the surface (frame management number sticker affixing section 307) of the top plate section 302 of the frame control board case 300.

In addition, the distance (height, width) M13 in the thickness direction of the board from the upper end (top surface of the operation section) of the game ball count clear switch 121 to the frame management number sticker 308 (identification mark) affixed to the surface (frame management number sticker affixing section 307) of the top plate section 302 of the frame control board case 300 may be made larger than the distance (height, width) K2 in the thickness direction of the board from the surface of the frame control board 120 to the frame management number sticker 308 (identification mark) affixed to the surface (frame management number sticker affixing section 307) of the top plate section 302 of the frame control board case 300.

In addition, the distance (height, width) M6 in the thickness direction of the board from the top surface (printed surface of chip information 120m1, model information sticker for frame chip 120m2) of the main body of the frame control unit 120m to the frame management number sticker 308 (identification mark) affixed to the surface (frame management number sticker affixing section 307) of the top plate section 302 of the frame control board case 300 may be greater than the distance (height, width) M13 in the thickness direction of the board from the top end (top surface of the operation section) of the game ball count clear switch 121 to the frame management number sticker 308 (identification mark) affixed to the surface (frame management number sticker affixing section 307) of the top plate section 302 of the frame control board case 300.

In addition, the distance (height, width) M14 in the thickness direction of the board from the upper end of the game ball count clear button 121b to the frame management number sticker 308 (identification mark) affixed to the surface (frame management number sticker affixing portion 307) of the top plate portion 302 of the frame control board case 300 may be greater than the distance (height, width) M9 in the thickness direction of the board from the upper end of the frame inspection connector 126 to the frame management number sticker 308 (identification mark) affixed to the surface (frame management number sticker affixing portion 307) of the top plate portion 302 of the frame control board case 300.

In addition, the distance (height, width) K6 in the thickness direction of the board from the surface of the frame control board 120 to the top surface of the main body of the frame control unit 120m (printed surface of chip information 120m1, model information sticker for frame chip 120m2) may be made larger than the distance (height, width) L4 in the thickness direction of the board from the surface of the main control board 110 to the top end of the main control unit 110m.

In addition, the distance (height, width) H10 in the thickness direction of the board from the upper end of the RWM clear button 111b to the main control number sticker 208 (identification mark) affixed to the surface (main control number sticker affixing section 207) of the top plate 202 of the main control board case 200 may be made larger than the distance (height, width) M14 in the thickness direction of the board from the upper end of the game ball count clear button 121b to the frame control number sticker 308 (identification mark) affixed to the surface (frame control number sticker affixing section 307) of the top plate 302 of the frame control board case 300.

(Positional relationship between each seal of each control device and each operation part)
The positional relationship between each sticker and each operation unit of each control device (main control device 110A, frame control device 120A) will be described with reference to Fig. 23. Fig. 23(a) is a rear view of the periphery of each control device, and Fig. 23(b) is a diagram showing the positional relationship between each sticker and each operation unit.

As shown in FIG. 23(a), the frame control number sticker 308 affixed to the frame control board case 300 is positioned closer to the rotation axis of the inner frame 3 (toward the right in FIG. 23(a)) than the main control number sticker 208 and the model information sticker 209 affixed to the main control board case 200.

In addition, the operation guide sticker 309 affixed to the frame control board case 300 is closer to the rotation axis of the inner frame 3 (toward the right in FIG. 23(a)) than the model information sticker 209 affixed to the main control board case 200, and is positioned closer to the free rotation end of the inner frame 3 (toward the left in FIG. 23(a)) than the end of the main management number sticker 208 affixed to the main control board case 200 that is located on the rotation axis side of the inner frame 3.

In addition, the game ball count clear switch 121 (game ball count clear button 121b), ball removal switch 122 (ball removal button 122b), and error reset switch 123 (error reset button 123b) mounted on the frame control board 120 are positioned closer to the free rotation end of the inner frame 3 (towards the left in Figure 23 (a)) than the RWM clear switch 111a (RWM clear button 111b) mounted on the main control board 110.

As shown in FIG. 23(b), the main control number sticker 208 and the model information sticker 209 affixed to the main control board case 200 are arranged so that the model information sticker 209 is located toward the rear of the gaming machine, and the frame control board case 300 is arranged so that the frame control board case 300 is arranged so that the operation guide sticker 309 is located toward the rear of the gaming machine.

In addition, the frame control number sticker 308 and operation guide sticker 309 affixed to the frame control board case 300 are positioned toward the rear of the gaming machine relative to the main control number sticker 208 and model information sticker 209 affixed to the main control board case 200.

In addition, since the frame control board 120 is positioned further back in the gaming machine than the main control board 110, the game ball count clear switch 121, ball removal switch 122, and error release switch 123 mounted on the frame control board 120 are positioned further back in the gaming machine than the RWM clear switch 111a mounted on the main control board 110.

The game ball count clear button 121b, ball removal button 122b, and error release button 123b, which are loosely fitted into the frame control board case 300, are positioned toward the rear of the gaming machine relative to the RWM clear button 111b, which is loosely fitted into the main control board case 200.

Here, we will explain the amount of operation and the force required for each operation section located on the front side of the gaming machine (effect button 17, count button 20) and each operation section located on the back side of the gaming machine (RWM clear button 111b, game ball count clear button 121b, ball removal button 122b, error release button 123b).

The amount of operation required for each operation section to change the switches (effect button detection switch 17a, count button switch 20a, RWM clear switch 111a, game ball count clear switch 121, ball removal switch 122, error reset switch 123) from OFF to ON is as follows: RWM clear button 111b = game ball count clear button 121b = ball removal button 122b = error reset button 123b < count button 20 < effect button 17.

In addition, the final operating force just before the switches in each operating section (effect button detection switch 17a, counting button switch 20a, RWM clear switch 111a, game ball count clear switch 121, ball remove switch 122, error release switch 123) switch from the OFF state to the ON state is greater than the initial operating force when the button in each operating section (effect button 17, counting button 20, RWM clear button 111b, game ball count clear button 121b, ball remove button 122b, error release button 123b) begins to be pressed.

In addition, the initial operating force when starting to press a button on each operation section (effect button 17, count button 20, RWM clear button 111b, game ball count clear button 121b, ball removal button 122b, error release button 123b) is as follows: RWM clear button 111b = game ball count clear button 121b = ball removal button 122b = error release button 123b < count button 20 < effect button 17.

In addition, the final operating force immediately before the switches in each operating section (effect button detection switch 17a, count button switch 20a, RWM clear switch 111a, game ball count clear switch 121, ball removal switch 122, error release switch 123) switch from OFF to ON is as follows: RWM clear button 111b = game ball count clear button 121b = ball removal button 122b = error release button 123b < count button 20 < effect button 17.

In this way, the frame control number sticker 308 and operation guide sticker 309 affixed to the frame control device 120A, which is disposed below the main control device 110A, are positioned toward the rear of the gaming machine, rather than the main control number sticker 208 and model information sticker 209 affixed to the main control device 110A. Therefore, when the inner frame 3 is opened while the gaming machine 1 is installed on the island equipment, it becomes easier to simultaneously check the main control number sticker 208 and model information sticker 209 of the main control device 110A, which are located below the line of sight of the gaming store clerk, and the frame control number sticker 308 and operation guide sticker 309 of the frame control device 120A, improving convenience for the gaming store clerk.

In addition, the game ball count clear button 121b (game ball count clear switch 121) provided on the frame control device 120A is located toward the rear of the gaming machine, rather than the tip of the operation part of the RWM clear button 111b (RWM clear switch 111a) provided on the main control device 110A. Therefore, when the inner frame 3 is opened while the gaming machine 1 is installed on the island equipment, it becomes easier to check the RWM clear button 111b (RWM clear switch 111a) and the game ball count clear button 121b (game ball count clear switch 121) at the same time, and it is possible to improve the distinguishability of the RWM clear button 111b (RWM clear switch 111a) and the game ball count clear button 121b (game ball count clear switch 121), which makes it possible to improve the convenience of the gaming store staff.

In addition, the ball removal button 122b (ball removal switch 122) provided on the frame control device 120A is located toward the rear of the gaming machine, rather than the tip of the operation part of the RWM clear button 111b (RWM clear switch 111a) provided on the main control device 110A. Therefore, when the inner frame 3 is opened while the gaming machine 1 is installed on the island equipment, it becomes easier to check the RWM clear button 111b (RWM clear switch 111a) and the ball removal button 122b (ball removal switch 122) at the same time, and it is possible to improve the distinguishability of the RWM clear button 111b (RWM clear switch 111a) and the ball removal button 122b (ball removal switch 122), which makes it possible to improve convenience for gaming store staff.

In addition, the error reset button 123b (error reset switch 123) provided on the frame control device 120A is located toward the rear of the gaming machine, rather than the tip of the operation part of the RWM clear button 111b (RWM clear switch 111a) provided on the main control device 110A. Therefore, when the inner frame 3 is opened while the gaming machine 1 is installed on the island equipment, it becomes easier to check the RWM clear button 111b (RWM clear switch 111a) and the error reset button 123b (error reset switch 123) at the same time, and it is possible to improve the distinguishability of the RWM clear button 111b (RWM clear switch 111a) and the error reset button 123b (error reset switch 123), which makes it possible to improve convenience for gaming store staff.

In addition, the amount of operation required for each operation unit is as follows: RWM clear button 111b = game ball count clear button 121b = ball removal button 122b = error release button 123b < count button 20 < effect button 17. This makes it easier to operate the operation units operated by game store staff (RWM clear button 111b, game ball count clear button 121b, ball removal button 122b = error release button 123b), and improves the operability (feeling of having pressed) of the operation units operated by players (count button 20, effect button 17), giving players a sense of satisfaction.

In addition, the final operating force of each operating part (effect button 17, counting button 20, RWM clear button 111b, game ball count clear button 121b, ball removal button 122b, error release button 123b) is greater than the initial operating force. Therefore, the force with which each operating part is operated weakens at the time of final operation, making it possible to prevent inconveniences such as each operating part (each switch) becoming more susceptible to damage.

The frame control number sticker 308 and operation guide sticker 309 affixed to the frame control device 120A, which is disposed below the main control device 110A, may be positioned closer to the front of the gaming machine than the main control number sticker 208 and model information sticker 209 affixed to the main control device 110A.

In addition, the game ball count clear button 121b (game ball count clear switch 121), ball removal button 122b (ball removal switch 122), and error reset button 123b (error reset switch 123) provided on the frame control device 120A may be positioned closer to the front of the gaming machine than the tip of the operation part of the RWM clear button 111b (RWM clear switch 111a) provided on the main control device 110A.

The required amount of operation for each operation section may be different for the RWM clear button 111b, the game ball count clear button 121b, the ball removal button 122b, and the error reset button 123b, or one or two of the RWM clear button 111b, the game ball count clear button 121b, the ball removal button 122b, and the error reset button 123b may be different. Even in this case, it is preferable to make the counting button 20 and the performance button 17 require more operation than the RWM clear button 111b, the game ball count clear button 121b, the ball removal button 122b, and the error reset button 123b.

(Relationship of distance from power switch to each element of the control device)
Using Figure 24, the relationship of the distance from the power switch 164 to each element of the control device (main control device 110A, frame control device 120A) will be described.

As shown in FIG. 24, the distance LS1 (straight-line distance and/or planar distance) from the power switch 164 to the frame management number sticker 308 is shorter than the distance LS2 (straight-line distance and/or planar distance) from the power switch 164 to the operation guide sticker 309.

In addition, the distance LB1 (straight-line distance and/or horizontal distance) from the power switch 164 to the game ball count clear switch 121 (game ball count clear button 121b) is shorter than the distance LH (straight-line distance and/or horizontal distance) from the power switch 164 to the frame control display 125.

In addition, the distance LB2 (straight-line distance and/or planar distance) from the power switch 164 to the ball removal switch 122 (ball removal button 122b) is shorter than the distance LH (straight-line distance and/or planar distance) from the power switch 164 to the frame control display 125.

In addition, the distance LB3 (straight-line distance and/or horizontal distance) from the power switch 164 to the error reset switch 123 (error reset button 123b) is shorter than the distance LH (straight-line distance and/or horizontal distance) from the power switch 164 to the frame control display 125.

The distances (straight-line distance and/or planar distance) from the power switch 164 increase in the following order: distance LS1 < distance LB1 < distance LS2 < distance LB2 < distance LB3 < distance LH.

In addition, the distance LS5 (straight line distance and/or planar distance) from the power switch 164 to the main management number sticker 208 is shorter than the distance LS4 (straight line distance and/or planar distance) from the power switch 164 to the model information sticker 209.

In addition, the distance LB4 (straight-line distance and/or planar distance) from the power switch 164 to the RWM clear switch 111a (RWM clear button 111b) is shorter than the distance LJ (straight-line distance and/or planar distance) from the power switch 164 to the information display 115.

In addition, the distance LK (straight line distance and/or planar distance) from the power switch 164 to the setting key switch 112a is shorter than the distance LJ (straight line distance and/or planar distance) from the power switch 164 to the information display 115.

The distance (straight-line distance and/or planar distance) from the power switch 164 increases in the following order: distance LB4 < distance LS5 < distance LK < distance LJ < distance LS4.

In addition, the distance LS1 (straight line distance and/or planar distance) from the power switch 164 to the frame management number sticker 308 is shorter than the distance LS5 (straight line distance and/or planar distance) from the power switch 164 to the main management number sticker 208.

In addition, the distance LS1 (straight line distance and/or planar distance) from the power switch 164 to the operation guide sticker 309 is shorter than the distance LS5 (straight line distance and/or planar distance) from the power switch 164 to the main control number sticker 208.

In addition, the distance LB1 (straight-line distance and/or horizontal distance) from the power switch 164 to the game ball count clear switch 121 (game ball count clear button 121b) is shorter than the distance LB4 (straight-line distance and/or horizontal distance) from the power switch 164 to the RWM clear switch 111a (RWM clear button 111b).

In addition, the distance LB2 (straight-line distance and/or planar distance) from the power switch 164 to the ball removal switch 122 (ball removal button 122b) is shorter than the distance LB4 (straight-line distance and/or planar distance) from the power switch 164 to the RWM clear switch 111a (RWM clear button 111b).

In addition, the distance LB3 (straight-line distance and/or planar distance) from the power switch 164 to the error reset switch 123 (error reset button 123b) is shorter than the distance LB4 (straight-line distance and/or planar distance) from the power switch 164 to the RWM clear switch 111a (RWM clear button 111b).

In addition, the distance LH (straight line distance and/or horizontal distance) from the power switch 164 to the frame control display 125 is shorter than the distance LJ (straight line distance and/or horizontal distance) from the power switch 164 to the information display 115.

The distances (straight-line distance and/or planar distance) from the power switch 164 increase in the following order: distance LS1 < distance LS2 < distance LB1 < distance LB2 < distance LB3 < distance LH < distance LB4 < distance LS5 < distance LK < distance LJ < distance LS4.

In this way, the distance LB1 (straight line distance and/or horizontal distance) from the power switch 164 to the game ball count clear switch 121 (game ball count clear button 121b) is different from the distance LH (straight line distance and/or horizontal distance) from the power switch 164 to the frame control display 125. Therefore, when the gaming store clerk is operating or about to operate the game ball count clear switch 121 (game ball count clear button 121b), the frame control display 125, which displays the number of game balls (game value amount) owned by the player, is less likely to be covered by the gaming store clerk's hand or arm, making it possible to improve convenience for the gaming store clerk.

In addition, the distance LB2 (straight-line distance and/or horizontal distance) from the power switch 164 to the ball removal switch 122 (ball removal button 122b) is different from the distance LH (straight-line distance and/or horizontal distance) from the power switch 164 to the frame control display 125. Therefore, when a store clerk is operating or about to operate the ball removal switch 122 (ball removal button 122b), the frame control display 125, on which specific information is displayed during the ball removal operation, is less likely to be covered by the store clerk's hand or arm, making it possible to improve convenience for the store clerk.

In addition, the distance LB3 (straight line distance and/or horizontal distance) from the power switch 164 to the error reset switch 123 (error reset button 123b) is different from the distance LH (straight line distance and/or horizontal distance) from the power switch 164 to the frame control display 125. Therefore, when a gaming store clerk is operating or about to operate the error reset switch 123 (error reset button 123b), the frame control display 125, on which an error code corresponding to the type of error that has occurred, is less likely to be covered by the gaming store clerk's hand or arm, making it possible to improve convenience for the gaming store clerk.

In addition, the distance LB4 (straight-line distance and/or planar distance) from the power switch 164 to the RWM clear switch 111a (RWM clear button 111b) provided on the main control board 110 is different from the distance LB1 (straight-line distance and/or planar distance) from the power switch 164 to the game ball count clear switch 121 (game ball count clear button 121b) provided on the frame control board 120. Therefore, the difference in distance can increase the distinguishability of the two types of switches (buttons), and it is possible to improve the convenience of the gaming store staff who will be operating the two types of switches (buttons).

In addition, the distance LB4 (straight-line distance and/or planar distance) from the power switch 164 to the RWM clear switch 111a (RWM clear button 111b) provided on the main control board 110 is different from the distance LB2 (straight-line distance and/or planar distance) from the power switch 164 to the ball removal switch 122 (ball removal button 122b) provided on the frame control board 120. Therefore, the difference in distance can increase the distinguishability of the two types of switches (buttons), and it is possible to improve the convenience of the game store staff who will be operating the two types of switches (buttons).

In addition, the distance LB4 (straight-line distance and/or planar distance) from the power switch 164 to the RWM clear switch 111a (RWM clear button 111b) provided on the main control board 110 is different from the distance LB3 (straight-line distance and/or planar distance) from the power switch 164 to the error reset switch 123 (error reset button 123b) provided on the frame control board 120. Therefore, the difference in distance can increase the distinguishability of the two types of switches (buttons), and it is possible to improve the convenience of the game store staff who will be operating the two types of switches (buttons).

In addition, the distance LJ (straight line distance and/or planar distance) from the power switch 164 to the information display 115 provided on the main control board 110 is different from the distance LH (straight line distance and/or planar distance) from the power switch 164 to the frame control display 125 provided on the frame control board 120. Therefore, the difference in distance can increase the distinguishability of the two types of displays, and it is possible to improve the convenience of game store staff who will be operating two types of switches (buttons).

In addition, the distance LB1 (straight line distance and/or horizontal distance) from the power switch 164 to the game ball count clear switch 121 (game ball count clear button 121b), which must be operated simultaneously with the power switch 164, is shorter than the distance LB3 (straight line distance and/or horizontal distance) from the power switch 164 to the error reset switch 123 (error reset button 123b), which does not need to be operated simultaneously with the power switch 164. This makes it possible to improve the convenience of game store staff when operating the game ball count clear switch 121 (game ball count clear button 121b), which needs to be operated simultaneously with the power switch 164.

In addition, the distance LB2 (straight line distance and/or horizontal distance) from the power switch 164 to the ball removal switch 122 (ball removal button 122b), which must be operated simultaneously with the power switch 164, is shorter than the distance LB3 (straight line distance and/or horizontal distance) from the power switch 164 to the error removal switch 123 (error removal button 123b), which does not need to be operated simultaneously with the power switch 164. This makes it possible to improve the convenience of game store staff when operating the ball removal switch 122 (ball removal button 122b), which needs to be operated simultaneously with the power switch 164.

The distance LS2 (straight line distance and/or planar distance) from the power switch 164 to the operation guide sticker 309 may be shorter than the distance LS1 (straight line distance and/or planar distance) from the power switch 164 to the frame management number sticker 308.

In addition, the distance LH (straight-line distance and/or horizontal distance) from the power switch 164 to the frame control display 125 may be shorter than the distance LB1 (straight-line distance and/or horizontal distance) from the power switch 164 to the game ball count clear switch 121 (game ball count clear button 121b).

In addition, the distance LH (straight-line distance and/or planar distance) from the power switch 164 to the frame control display 125 may be shorter than the distance LB2 (straight-line distance and/or planar distance) from the power switch 164 to the ball removal switch 122 (ball removal button 122b).

In addition, the distance LH (straight-line distance and/or planar distance) from the power switch 164 to the frame control display 125 may be shorter than the distance LB3 (straight-line distance and/or planar distance) from the power switch 164 to the error reset switch 123 (error reset button 123b).

In addition, the distance LB2 (straight-line distance and/or horizontal distance) from the power switch 164 to the ball removal switch 122 (ball removal button 122b) may be shorter than the distance LB1 (straight-line distance and/or horizontal distance) from the power switch 164 to the game ball count clear switch 121 (game ball count clear button 121b).

In addition, the distance LS4 (straight-line distance and/or planar distance) from the power switch 164 to the model information sticker 209 may be shorter than the distance LS5 (straight-line distance and/or planar distance) from the power switch 164 to the main management number sticker 208.

In addition, the distance LJ (straight-line distance and/or planar distance) from the power switch 164 to the information display 115 may be shorter than the distance LB4 (straight-line distance and/or planar distance) from the power switch 164 to the RWM clear switch 111a (RWM clear button 111b).

In addition, the distance LJ (straight line distance and/or planar distance) from the power switch 164 to the information display 115 may be shorter than the distance LK (straight line distance and/or planar distance) from the power switch 164 to the setting key switch 112a.

In addition, the distance LS5 (straight-line distance and/or planar distance) from the power switch 164 to the main management number sticker 208 may be shorter than the distance LS1 (straight-line distance and/or planar distance) from the power switch 164 to the frame management number sticker 308.

In addition, the distance LB4 (straight-line distance and/or horizontal distance) from the power switch 164 to the RWM clear switch 111a (RWM clear button 111b) may be shorter than the distance LB1 (straight-line distance and/or horizontal distance) from the power switch 164 to the game ball count clear switch 121 (game ball count clear button 121b).

In addition, the distance LB4 (straight-line distance and/or planar distance) from the power switch 164 to the RWM clear switch 111a (RWM clear button 111b) may be shorter than the distance LB2 (straight-line distance and/or planar distance) from the power switch 164 to the ball removal switch 122 (ball removal button 122b).

In addition, the distance LB4 (straight-line distance and/or planar distance) from the power switch 164 to the RWM clear switch 111a (RWM clear button 111b) may be shorter than the distance LB3 (straight-line distance and/or planar distance) from the power switch 164 to the error reset switch 123 (error reset button 123b).

In addition, the distance LJ (straight-line distance and/or planar distance) from the power switch 164 to the information display 115 may be shorter than the distance LH (straight-line distance and/or planar distance) from the power switch 164 to the frame control display 125.

(Modifications of the main control device)
A modified example of main control device 110A will be described with reference to Fig. 25. Fig. 25(a) is a front view of main control device 110A in the modified example, and Fig. 25(b) is a diagram showing main control number sticker 208 in the modified example. Note that a description of the same parts as in the above-mentioned embodiment will be omitted, and only the different parts will be described.

As shown in FIG. 25(a), one longitudinal end of the main control board case 200 (the left side of FIG. 25(a)) is provided with a main crimping portion 204A for sealing the main control board case 200 when the upper case member 201 and the lower case member 211 are closed with the main control board 110 housed therein.

The main crimping part 204A has an upper crimping part 204 that is connected to the upper case member 201 via a breakage part, a lower crimping part 214 that is connected to the lower case member 211 via a breakage part, and a fastening member that is pressed from the upper crimping part 204 into the lower crimping part 214 to fasten the upper crimping part 204 and the lower crimping part 214.

The upper crimping portion 204 has a first upper crimping portion 204a used to initially seal the main control board case 200, a second upper crimping portion 204b for resealing the main control board case 200 after the first opening of the main control board case 200, and a third upper crimping portion 204c for resealing the main control board case 200 after the second opening of the main control board case 200, and the first upper crimping portion 204a, the second upper crimping portion 204b, and the third upper crimping portion 204c are arranged side by side in the short direction of the main control board case 200.

The lower crimping portion 214 has a first lower crimping portion 214a used to initially seal the main control board case 200, a second lower crimping portion 214b for resealing the main control board case 200 after the first opening of the main control board case 200, and a third lower crimping portion 214c for resealing the main control board case 200 after the second opening of the main control board case 200, and the first lower crimping portion 214a, the second lower crimping portion 214b, and the third lower crimping portion are arranged side by side in the short direction of the main control board case 200.

As shown in FIG. 25(b), the main control number sticker 208 is a transparent rectangular sticker with a watermark (pattern) to prevent counterfeiting, and includes a light-transmitting section 208a that allows the rear to be seen through, a main control information printing section 208b on which the control information of the main control device 110A is printed, an opener entry section 208c for entering the name of the opener of the main control board case 200, an opening date entry section 208d for entering the date of opening of the main control board case 200, an information printing section 208e on which predetermined text information is printed, a line section 208f that is printed to follow the outline of the main control number sticker 208, and a light-transmitting window section 208g that allows the rear of the main control number sticker 208 to be seen through.

The opener entry field 208c is a white printed area (opaque area) that is long from side to side and is located to the left of the center in the vertical direction of the main control number sticker 208. It has a first opener entry field 208c1 for recording the first opener, a second opener entry field 208c2 that is located below the first opener entry field 208c1 with a gap and for recording the second opener, and a third opener entry field 208c3 that is located below the second opener entry field 208c2 with a gap and for recording the third opener.

The opening date entry field 208d is a white printed area (opaque area) in the shape of a long rectangle, and is located to the right of the main management number sticker 208, with a gap to the right of the first opener entry field 208c1, and includes a first opening date entry field 208d1 for entering the opening date first, a second opening date entry field 208d2 for entering the opening date second, and a third opening date entry field 208d3 for entering the opening date third, which is located to the right of the third opener entry field 208c3 and with a gap below the second opening date entry field 208d2.

In this way, the number of crimping parts (2) of the frame crimping part 304A provided on the frame control board case 300 is different from the number of crimping parts (3) of the main crimping part 204A provided on the main control board case 200. This makes it possible to increase the number of times that the main control device 110A, which is more susceptible to fraudulent activity than the frame control device 120A, can be opened and inspected, ensuring the security of the gaming machine 1.

In addition, the number of columns for entering the name of the opener and the date of opening on the main management number sticker 208 corresponds to the number of crimping parts (three) of the main crimping part 204A on the main control board case 200. Therefore, each time the main control board case 200 is opened, opening information such as the opener and the date of opening can be entered, thereby ensuring the security of the gaming machine 1.

In addition, the number of fields for entering the name of the opener and the date of opening provided on the main management number sticker 208 is greater than the number of fields for entering the name of the opener and the date of opening provided on the frame management number sticker 308. Therefore, it is possible to increase the number of times opening information can be entered for the main control device 110A, which is more susceptible to fraudulent activity than the frame control device 120A, and it is possible to ensure the security of the gaming machine 1.

Although the number of crimping parts of the main crimping part 204A provided on the main control board case 200 is three, it may be more than three, or it may be less than the number of crimping parts (two) of the frame crimping part 304A provided on the frame control board case 300.

In addition, the number of crimping parts of the frame crimping part 304A provided on the frame control board case 300 is two, but it may be more than two, or it may be more than the number of crimping parts (three) of the main crimping part 204A provided on the main control board case 200.

(Block diagram of the entire gaming machine)
Next, block diagrams of the gaming machine 1 and peripheral devices in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 26 and FIG.

First, the gaming machine 1 uses gaming balls (gaming media) that are used in conventional pachinko gaming machines, but the gaming balls are not discharged outside the gaming machine 1 (to the player's hand) but circulate within the gaming machine, so the player cannot touch the gaming balls. Therefore, the total number of gaming balls displayed on the "gaming ball count display 135" and the "frame control display 125" is information recorded by electromagnetic means (for example, addition by ball lending or prize balls, and subtraction by firing). In this embodiment, for convenience, the term "payout" of gaming balls is used, but this does not mean that gaming balls are paid out outside the gaming machine as in conventional pachinko gaming machines, but rather means the above-mentioned addition.

This makes it possible to prevent people from bringing game balls into game establishments and playing games there. It also makes it possible to prevent people from tampering with game balls (for example, tying string to game balls, applying oil to game balls, using game balls of a different size than the standard size, etc.) in order to obtain game balls illegally.

The game balls used in the game machine 1 may be the same as those used in conventional pachinko game machines (game balls that react to magnets), or they may be non-magnetic (for example, stainless steel). The former reduces the cost of manufacturing new game balls, while the latter makes it possible to create a game machine that is more resistant to fraud. When using game balls that do not react to magnets, a magnet detector may be placed on the ball path to monitor the game balls that react to magnets in order to prevent them from being mixed in with the game balls that react to magnets.

The main control board 110 controls the overall progress of the game (basic operations). The main control board 110 is equipped with a main control unit 110m as a one-chip microcomputer equipped with a main CPU 110a that performs arithmetic processing, a main ROM 110b that stores game control programs, and a main RAM 110c that serves as a work area during arithmetic processing, as well as input and output ports for main control. The main CPU 110a receives an operating clock from a crystal oscillator, reads out the programs stored in the main ROM 110b, and performs arithmetic processing related to the game while using the main RAM 110c as a work area, thereby controlling controlled devices (various solenoids and various displays) and sending predetermined commands based on the results of the arithmetic processing to the performance control board 130, etc. It also sends predetermined information (described later) to the frame control board 120.

In this embodiment, the term "RAM" and the term "RWM" are sometimes used, but they are synonymous.

Here, the communication between the main control board 110 and the frame control board 120 is configured to allow information to be communicated in both directions, and the communication between the main control board 110 and the performance control board 130 is configured to allow information to be communicated in only one direction, from the main control board 110 to the performance control board 130.

The input port of the main control board 110 is connected to various switches, various sensors, and the frame control board 120, and when detection signals from the various switches and various sensors are input to the main control board 110 via the input port, control processing is performed according to the detection signals.

The various switches are a general winning port detection switch 43a for detecting game balls that have won (entered) the general winning port 43, a gate detection switch 44a for detecting game balls that have passed through the general gate 44, a first starting port detection switch 45a for detecting game balls that have won (entered) the first starting port 45, a second starting port detection switch 47a for detecting game balls that have won (entered) the second starting port 47, a special winning port detection switch 50a for detecting game balls that have won (entered) the special winning port 50, and a switch 51a for detecting game balls that flow down the most downstream part of the out ball flow path. the out ball detection switch 39a for detecting the out ball, the RWM clear switch 111a for inputting a signal to clear the memory contents of the main RAM 110c of the main control unit 110m or to update the setting value which is the stage of the game's advantage degree (differentiating the game's advantage degree), and the setting key switch 112a for inputting a signal to move to a state in which the setting value can be changed or confirmed by operating the setting key, and the various sensors are a first magnetic detection sensor 53a and a second magnetic detection sensor 53b for detecting magnets.

In this embodiment, the number of game balls launched by the player is counted by the out ball detection switch 39a, but the number of launched balls may be counted by providing a detection switch at the position where the game ball flies into the game area 5a (a position where it will not become a foul ball after the launched ball is detected), or the number of launched balls may be counted by providing a detection switch on the launched ball guide path 38 (a position where it may become a foul ball after the launched ball is detected). Note that in cases where a detection switch is provided on the launched ball guide path 38, if a foul ball is detected after the launch ball is detected, the number of launched balls is incremented by 1 and then decremented by 1.

The main information display device 59, various solenoids, information display 115, frame control board 120, and performance control board 130 are connected to the output ports of the main control board 110, and drive control signals for controlling the various solenoids, display control signals for controlling the various displays, and specified information are sent to the frame control board 120 via the output ports.

The various solenoids are the second start port opening/closing solenoid 48b and the big prize port opening/closing solenoid 51b, the main information display device 59 is the special pattern display 60, the special pattern display 61, the normal pattern display 62, the special pattern reserved display 63, the special pattern reserved display 64, the normal pattern reserved display 65, the number of rounds display 66, the right hit display 67, and the status confirmation display 68, and the information display 115 is a display (a four-digit seven-segment display) for displaying setting values, etc.

The frame control board 120 is equipped with a frame control CPU 120a that performs calculation processing, a frame control ROM 120b that stores the operation program of the frame control CPU 120a, a frame control unit 120m that is a one-chip microcomputer equipped with a frame control RAM 120c that serves as a work area during calculation processing, and input and output ports for frame control. The frame control CPU 120a receives an operating clock from a crystal oscillator, reads out the program stored in the frame control ROM 120b, and performs calculation processing related to the game while using the frame control RAM 120c as a work area, thereby controlling controlled devices (various solenoids and various displays), communicating with the main control board 110 (described later), and transmitting specified information (described later) to the dedicated unit 170.

The input port of the frame control board 110 includes a touch sensor 15a that detects when the player's hand is touching the launch handle 15, a launch volume 15b consisting of a variable resistor whose resistance value changes depending on the rotation angle of the launch handle 15, a ball removal switch 122 that detects when the ball removal button 122b has been operated, an error release switch 123b that detects when the error release button 123b has been operated, a lending device connection terminal board 100 for communicating with a dedicated unit 170 that is arranged in parallel with the gaming machine 1, a launch pad switch 92a for detecting game balls parked on the launch pad, a subtraction entrance switch 91b for detecting game balls that have flowed down the ball passage unit 94, a subtraction solenoid 91a for detecting game balls sent to the launch device 95 by the operation of the subtraction solenoid 91a, and a ball removal switch 92b for detecting when the ball removal button 122b has been operated. A subtraction port switch 91c for detecting the number of balls, a counting button switch 20a for detecting that the counting button 20 has been operated, a glass frame open detection switch 31a for detecting the opening (opening/closing) of the glass frame 4, an inner frame open detection switch 31b for detecting the opening (opening/closing) of the inner frame 3 (indicated as various open detection switches 31a, 31b in the drawing), a radio wave detection sensor 54a for detecting abnormal radio waves, a lifting and polishing device 95 for lifting the game balls while polishing them, a game ball count clear switch 121 for detecting that the game ball count clear button 121b has been operated, various passage units 93, 94, etc. are connected, and when detection signals from the various detection switches and various detection sensors are input to the frame control board 120 via the input port, control processing is performed according to the detection signals.

The glass frame open detection switch 31a, which detects whether the glass frame 4 is open (opened or closed), may be ON when the glass frame 4 is open (in this case, it is determined to be open when there is an ON input), or it may be ON when the glass frame 4 is closed (in this case, it is determined to be open when there is no ON input). The same applies to the inner frame open detection switch 31b.

The various passage units 93, 94 include a foul ball switch 93a for detecting game balls flowing down the foul ball passage to allow game balls (foul balls) that have returned without entering the play area 5a to join the ball passage unit 94, a winning passage count switch 94a for detecting game balls (winning balls) flowing down the winning ball passage (not shown) that collects and allows game balls that have won the various winning ports provided in the play area 5a to flow down, a non-winning passage count switch 94b for detecting game balls (out balls) flowing down the non-winning ball passage (not shown) that collects and allows game balls that have flowed into the outlet 39 without winning the various winning ports to flow down, and a non-winning passage count switch 94c for detecting game balls (out balls) flowing down the non-winning ball passage (not shown) that collects and allows game balls that have flowed into the outlet 39 without winning the various winning ports to flow down, and a non-winning passage count switch 94d for detecting game balls lifted by the lifting polishing device 95 at the upstream end of the lifting ball passage. A lift up switch 94c, a lift down switch 94d for detecting game balls supplied to the lifting and polishing device 95 at the downstream end of a junction passage (not shown) that joins game balls flowing down the winning passage, game balls flowing down the non-winning ball passage, and game balls flowing down the foul ball passage and supplies them to the lifting and polishing device 95, an excess sensor 94e installed in the midstream part of the lifting ball passage (downstream of the lift up switch 94b) for detecting an excess (surplus) of game balls (circulating game balls) waiting in the lifting ball passage, and a shortage sensor 94f installed in the downstream part of the lifting ball flow path (downstream of the excess sensor 94e) for detecting a shortage (shortage) of game balls (circulating game balls) waiting in the lifting ball passage.

The output port of the frame control board 120 is connected to the performance control board 130, the lending device connection terminal board 100, the launch solenoid 92b for operating the launch hammer (not shown) for launching the game balls parked on the launch pad, the subtraction solenoid 91a for sending game balls to the launch device 95, the lifting and polishing device 95, the game ball count display 135, the frame control display 125, etc., and drive control signals for controlling the various solenoids and display control signals for controlling the various displays are output via the output port.

The communication between the frame control board 120 and the performance control board 130 is configured so that information can be communicated in only one direction, from the frame control board 120 to the performance control board 130. This allows, for example, if an error is detected in the frame control board 120, the performance control board 130 can notify the user of the error. Note that communication between the frame control board 120 and the performance control board 130 may be performed via the main control board 110. In other words, the frame control board 120 and the performance control board 130 do not need to be directly connected.

The "game ball count display 135" is a display for displaying the total number of game balls that the player can fire (hereinafter simply referred to as the "total number of game balls"), and is configured, for example, as a six-digit seven-segment display. It may also be used as a display for displaying an error code indicating the type of error that has occurred in the gaming machine 1. In this case, when no error has occurred, only the total number of game balls is displayed, and when an error has occurred, the total number of game balls and the error code are displayed alternately. The display of the error code will be described in detail later.

The "frame control display 125" is a display for displaying the total number of game balls, and is, for example, a 6-digit 7-segment display. For example, if the "game ball count display 135" displays "100" as the total number of game balls, the total number of game balls displayed on the "frame control display 125" will also be "100". If the "game ball count display 135" malfunctions and is unable to display the total number of game balls, the player can check the total number of game balls displayed on the "frame control display 125" to determine the total number of game balls he or she owns (this display serves as insurance in case of malfunction).

It may also be used as a display that displays an error code indicating the type of error that has occurred in the gaming machine 1, or as a display that displays the "display performance information (normal base value)" (see "Frame control board display performance information calculation process" described below). In this case, when no error has occurred, the total number of gaming balls and the "display performance information (normal base value)" are displayed alternately, and when an error has occurred, the total number of gaming balls, the "display performance information (normal base value)", and the error code are displayed alternately.

The "counting button 20" is a button for transmitting data on the total number of game balls to the dedicated unit 170. The frame control CPU 120a judges whether the "counting button 20" is pressed for a "short press" or a "long press" depending on the time the button is pressed. Specifically, if the button is pressed for less than 0.5 seconds, it is judged to be a "short press," and if the button is pressed for 0.5 seconds or more, it is judged to be a "long press."

If the frame control CPU 120a judges it to be a "short press", it counts one game ball, and if it judges it to be a "long press", it counts 250 game balls at the count notification timing every 0.3 seconds. If the total number of game balls is less than 250 (for example, 200), it judges it to be a "long press" and counts all 200. A count possible lamp may be provided that lights up when counting is possible and goes out when counting is not possible.

The "game ball count clear button 121b" is a button for clearing the number of game balls recorded by electromagnetic means. For example, it is conceivable that game balls may be recorded on the game machine 1 when it is shipped from the manufacturing factory to the game arcade, or that after it is installed in the game arcade, a player may stop playing when only a few game balls (for example, one ball) are recorded. In such cases, a problem occurs in which it is difficult for a new player to play (the player may mistakenly think that the previous player is still playing). To solve this problem, the game balls recorded above can be cleared by pressing and holding down the game ball count clear button 121b while turning on the power switch 164.

In addition, the game ball count clearing process may be performed in a situation where no game balls are recorded (0 balls), or the game ball count clearing process may not be performed (even if the game ball count clear button 121b is pressed) if the game ball count clearing process is performed in a situation where no game balls are recorded (0 balls). In addition, if the game ball count clearing process is performed in a situation where no game balls are recorded (0 balls), the "HC/fraud monitoring information" indicating that the game balls have been cleared may be transmitted from the gaming machine 1 to the gaming machine information center in the end, or if the game ball count clearing process is not performed in a situation where no game balls are recorded (0 balls), the "HC/fraud monitoring information" indicating that the game balls have been cleared may not be transmitted from the gaming machine 1. In the case where the game ball count clearing process is performed in a situation where no game balls are recorded (0 balls), the control related to the game ball count clearing can be uniform regardless of the game ball recording status, and the control load can be reduced. On the other hand, if the game ball count clear process is not performed when no game balls have been recorded (0 balls) (even if the game ball count clear button 121b has been pressed), it is possible to prevent the game ball count clear process (meaningless process) from being performed even when there are no game balls to be cleared.

When the recorded game balls are cleared, a notification that the number of game balls has been cleared is given by audio output under the control of the audio control unit 148, display control under the control of the image control unit 145, and light emission control under the control of the lamp control unit 150. This notification will be described in detail later.

In addition, "HC/fraud monitoring information" indicating that the game balls have been cleared is ultimately transmitted from the game machine 1 to the game machine information center. This allows the game machine information center to also know that the game ball count has been cleared on the game machine 1.

The number of game balls is cleared only when the power switch 164 is turned ON while the game ball count clear button 121b is being pressed. In other words, even if the "game ball count clear button 121b" is pressed while power is being supplied to the gaming machine 1, the number of game balls is not cleared. In this case, the state of the gaming machine 1 does not change, and no notification is made by sound, display, or light emission. For example, even if the "game ball count clear button 121b" is pressed while a variable display is being executed, the variable display continues, and sound output, display control, and light emission control corresponding to the variable display continue. This prevents the player from suffering any disadvantages, for example, even if an amusement store employee accidentally presses the "game ball count clear button 121b" while a variable display is being executed.

The "game ball count clear button 121b" is a button used to clear the game ball count, and has no other functions. For example, operating this button cannot clear an error, cannot eject game balls from the gaming machine 1 (remove balls), and cannot initialize the main RAM 110c and the frame control RAM 120c.

The "ball removal button 122b" is a button for ejecting game balls from the gaming machine 1. The game balls are not touched by the player's hands, but regular inspection, cleaning, and replacement are recommended. In such cases, the game balls can be ejected from the gaming machine 1 by turning on the power switch 164 while pressing the ball removal button 122b.

When the game balls are being ejected from the gaming machine 1, the player is notified that the ball ejection mode is in progress by a voice notification under the control of the audio control unit 148 and a visual notification under the control of the image control unit 145. This notification will be described in more detail later.

Note that game balls are ejected from the gaming machine 1 only when the power switch 164 is turned ON while the ball ejection button 122b is being pressed. In other words, even if the "ball ejection button 122b" is pressed while power is being supplied to the gaming machine 1, game balls will not be ejected from the gaming machine 1. In this case, the state of the gaming machine 1 does not change, and no notification is made by sound or display. For example, even if the "ball ejection button 122b" is pressed while a variable display is being executed, the variable display continues, and sound output, display control, and light emission control corresponding to the variable display continue. This prevents players from suffering any disadvantages, for example, even if an amusement store employee accidentally presses the "ball ejection button 122b" while a variable display is being executed.

The "ball removal button 122b" is a button used to eject game balls from the gaming machine 1, and has no other functions. For example, operating this button cannot clear an error, cannot clear the number of game balls, and cannot initialize the main RAM 110c and the frame control RAM 120c.

When the glass frame open detection switch 31a detects that the glass frame 4 is open, it becomes impossible to launch game balls by operating the launch handle 15. Similarly, when the inner frame open detection switch 31b detects that the inner frame 3 is open, it becomes impossible to launch game balls by operating the launch handle 15. This prevents game balls circulating inside the gaming machine from flying out of the gaming machine, preventing the player from being disadvantaged by being unable to secure the (circulating) game balls necessary for play. Note that the gaming machine 1 is equipped with, for example, 45 game balls.

In addition, to make it easier to win a prize in each prize slot, a small ball detection switch (or sensor) may be provided to prevent fraudulent use of game balls smaller than the specified size.

The dedicated unit 170 includes a U (unit) board 171, a U (unit) control unit 172, a hall control output unit 173, and a display unit (touch panel) 174.

The U board 171 and the lending device connection terminal board 100 of the frame control board 120 are electrically connected by a dedicated PIF wiring, and the U board 171 and the frame control board 120 are capable of communicating "predetermined information" (described later). The lending device connection terminal board 100 can be used in common for a pachinko game machine that uses game balls (the game machine 1 of this embodiment) and a medal-less reel type game machine. For example, when used for a pachinko game machine, the switch SW is operated to select the pachinko game machine, and when used for a medal-less reel type game machine, the switch SW is operated to select the medal-less reel type game machine.

The U board 171 has a function (security function) of encrypting and transmitting the specified information received from the frame control board 120 before finally transmitting it to the gaming machine information center (described below). It also has a function (security function) of decrypting and transmitting the specified information received from the gaming machine information center before finally transmitting it to the frame control board 120.

The U control unit 172 has a CPU (not shown), a ROM (not shown) that stores programs and control data for the CPU to operate, and a RAM (not shown) that functions as a work area.

The U control unit 172 has a function to read and store the card ID of the inserted member card or visitor card, and a function to transmit the stored card ID to a management computer. When the management computer receives the card ID, it transmits the card ID to the card company data center (described below) and the gaming machine information center.

The U control unit 172 has a function of storing the game balls (held balls) held by the player while the player is playing and displaying the held balls on the display unit (touch panel) 174, and if a bill is inserted, a function of displaying the remaining balance on the display unit (touch panel) 174.

The display unit (touch panel) 174, in addition to displaying the number of balls held and the remaining balance, can display a ball lending button image for lending game balls and a return button image for returning a membership card or visitor card, and the U control unit 172 can input an operation signal when the ball lending button image is operated by the player, and can input an operation signal when the return button image is operated by the player. When these operation signals are input, the U control unit 172 performs the process corresponding to the operation signal (ball lending, return). The display unit (touch panel) 174 can also display error codes, which will be described later. This will be described later.

Note that the display unit (touch panel) 174 is configured to display a ball lending button image and a return button image so that the player can operate them, but this is not limited to the above. For example, the ball lending button and the return button may be provided on the dedicated unit 170, or the ball lending button and the return button may be provided on the gaming machine 1.

The U control unit 172 is capable of counting and storing the playing time and number of times played (e.g., number of visits to the gaming establishment) while the membership card is inserted, and is also capable of storing the number of gaming media stored on the membership card, the amount used for playing, and the number of gaming media used for playing. This stored information is then ultimately sent to the gaming machine information center and stored in the addiction countermeasure server of the gaming machine information center (to be used to counteract players' gaming addiction).

The U control unit 172 includes a hall computer output unit 173, which outputs hall computer information (e.g., information indicating that a jackpot game is in progress, information indicating that a high probability game state is in progress, information indicating that the variable time reduction function is in operation, information indicating the number of winning balls in each winning slot, etc.) to the hall computer. The hall computer output unit 173 includes an external terminal board pulse output signal terminal 1, an external terminal board pulse output signal terminal 2, an external terminal board pulse output signal terminal 3, and an external terminal board pulse output signal terminal 4.

The hall computer is a dedicated computer installed in an amusement facility, is communicatively connected to the gaming machine 1 via a relay device or the like, and is a device capable of collecting hall computer information.

The performance control board 130 is a slave control board (slave control means) that controls the performance related to the game (performed in the gaming machine 1) based on the reception of the performance command from the main control board 110. The performance control board 130 is equipped with a sub-CPU 130a that performs arithmetic processing, a sub-ROM 130b that stores the performance control program, and a performance control unit 130m that has a sub-RAM 130c that serves as a work area during arithmetic processing, an image control unit 145 that controls the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal), the third image display device 72 (left image display device), the fourth image display device 73 (right image display device), and the sound output device 9 (speaker), a lamp control unit 150 that controls the frame lighting device 10, the button drive device 17b, the board drive device 75, the board lighting device 76, and input and output ports for performance control.

The sub-CPU 130a receives an operating clock from the crystal oscillator, reads out the game program stored in the sub-ROM 130b, and performs calculation processing related to the presentation while using the sub-RAM 130c as a work area, thereby controlling (outputting data and commands) the various control units (image control unit 145, lamp control unit 150) to execute various presentations in response to commands received from the main control board 110 and input signals from the presentation button detection switch 17a and joystick detection switch 19a.

The input port of the performance control board 130 is connected to the performance button detection switch 17a, the joystick detection switch 19a, and a button position detection sensor (not shown). When the performance button detection switch 17a inputs a performance button detection signal indicating that the performance button 17 has been operated, or when the joystick detection switch 19a inputs a joystick detection signal (up button detection signal, left button detection signal, down button detection signal, right button detection signal) indicating that the joystick 19 has been operated, the performance control board 130 performs processing to execute a performance according to the detection signal.

The image control unit 145 receives commands from the performance control unit 130m and controls the first image display device 70 (main LCD), the second image display device 71 (sub LCD), the third image display device 72 (left image display device), and the fourth image display device 73 (right image display device) to display a specified image.

The audio control unit 148 is connected to the audio output device 9, and controls the audio output device 9 to output audio data, music data (BGM, SE), etc. in accordance with the display of the first image display device 70 (main LCD), the second image display device 71 (sub LCD), the third image display device 72 (left image display device), and the fourth image display device 73 (right image display device) based on various performance data (including commands) sent from the performance control unit 130m.

Between the performance control unit 130m, the image control unit 145, and the audio control unit 148, there is provided a general control unit (not shown) that performs general control of image display and audio output based on reception of performance control commands from the performance control unit 130m. Based on reception of a display control command (display list) from the general control unit, the image control unit 145 reads out a CGROM (not shown) in which image data and the like are stored, and controls the first image display device 70, the second image display device 71, the third image display device 72 (left image display device), and the fourth image display device 73 (right image display device). Based on reception of an audio control command from the general control unit, the audio control unit 148 reads out an audio ROM in which audio data and the like are stored, and controls the audio output device 9.

The VRAM (not shown) provided in the image control unit 145 has a display list storage area for temporarily storing the display list output from the overall control unit (overall CPU), a frame buffer area corresponding to the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), the second image display device 71 (sub-liquid crystal), the third image display device 72 (left image display device), and the fourth image display device 73 (right image display device), etc.

This frame buffer area is a storage area for drawing or displaying images, and further includes a first frame buffer area and a second frame buffer area. The first frame buffer area and the second frame buffer area alternate between being a "drawing frame buffer" and a "display frame buffer" each time drawing begins.

Therefore, based on instructions (display list) from the general control unit, the image control unit 145 draws the drawing data stored in the CGROM in the "drawing frame buffer" in the frame buffer area of the VRAM, reads the drawing data from the "display frame buffer" in the frame buffer area, generates video signals (RGB signals, etc.) based on the read drawing data, and outputs them to the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), the second image display device 71 (sub-liquid crystal), the third image display device 72 (left image display device), and the fourth image display device 73 (right image display device) to display various images.

The image control unit 145 receives an operating clock from a crystal oscillator, and divides the operating clock to generate a synchronization signal (horizontal synchronization signal/vertical synchronization signal) for synchronizing with the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal), the third image display device 72 (left image display device), and the fourth image display device 73 (right image display device), and outputs the synchronization signal to the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal), the third image display device 72 (left image display device), and the fourth image display device 73 (right image display device). In this embodiment, the frame rate of the VDP is 30 fps (1/30 seconds = about 33 ms) so that 30 drawings (image displays) are performed per second, but it may be 60 fps (1/60 seconds = about 16.6 ms) so that 60 drawings (image displays) are performed per second.

The lamp control unit 150 includes a lamp CPU (not shown) that performs calculation processing, a lamp ROM (not shown) that stores the lamp control program, a lamp RAM (not shown) that serves as a work area during calculation processing, and input/output ports, etc.

The lamp CPU receives an operating clock from the crystal oscillator, reads the lamp control program stored in the lamp ROM, and performs calculations related to the performance while using the lamp RAM as a work area, thereby controlling (outputting data and commands) the controlled devices such as various lighting devices and various driving devices to perform a specified performance in accordance with the performance instruction commands received from the performance control unit 130m.

The input/output ports of the lamp control unit are connected to the frame lighting device 10, the button drive device 17b, the board drive device 75, the board lighting device 76, and the sub-information display device 80, and based on various performance data (including commands) sent from the performance control unit 130m (sub-CPU 130a), it controls the lighting of various LEDs in the frame lighting device 10, the board drive device 75, the board lighting device 76, and the sub-information display device 80, and controls the drive of drive sources such as the motors and solenoids of the button drive device 17b and the board drive device 75.

The power supply board 160 generates the main power supply (operating power supply) required for the operation of the gaming machine 1 from a power supply supplied from outside the gaming machine 1, and supplies it to the gaming machine 1 (the main control board 110, the frame control board 120, the performance control board 130, and various electronic components). The power supply board 160 is equipped with a power interruption detection circuit 162 that detects whether a power interruption (power outage) has occurred and outputs a power interruption detection signal to the main control board 110 based on the occurrence of a power interruption (power outage), and a backup power supply circuit 163 that supplies backup power to the main control board 110 in the event of a power interruption (power outage).

The power supply board 160 also has a power switch 164 that can be operated by an arcade staff member to switch between an ON state that supplies main power to the gaming machine 1 (main control board 110, frame control board 120, presentation control board 130, and various electronic components) and an OFF state that stops the supply. When the power switch 164 is turned ON, the supply of main power begins and the gaming machine 1 starts operating. Note that the supply of backup power to the main control board 110 is maintained even when the power switch 164 is turned OFF.

The power interruption detection circuit 162 monitors the power supply voltage supplied to the gaming machine 1, and when the power supply voltage falls below a predetermined value, outputs a power interruption detection signal to the main control board 110. More specifically, when the power interruption detection signal goes high, the main CPU 110a enters an operable state, and when the power interruption detection signal goes low, the main CPU 110a enters a stopped state.

The backup power circuit 163 is equipped with a capacitor that stores electricity when the gaming machine is energized, and in the event of a power outage (blackout), the backup power supply voltage stored in the capacitor is supplied to the main RAM 110c of the main control board 110 and the frame control RAM 120c of the frame control board 120. This allows the memory contents of the main RAM 110c and the frame control RAM 120c to be retained even in the event of a power outage (blackout), and after recovery from the power outage (blackout), the game control state and the number of game balls (game value) owned by the player can be restored to the state before the power outage (blackout). In addition, a backup power source may be supplied to the performance control board 130.

(Explanation of game state)
Next, the game states when the game progresses will be described. In this embodiment, there are a "low probability game state" and a "high probability game state" as states related to the special game judgment (jackpot judgment), and there are a "non-time-saving game state" and a "time-saving game state" as states related to the movable member 48 of the second starting hole 47. Therefore, in this embodiment,
(1) A "low probability non-time-saving gaming state" which is a low probability gaming state and a non-time-saving gaming state;
(2) A "low probability time-saving game state" which is a low probability game state and a time-saving game state;
(3) A "high probability time-saving gaming state" is provided, which is both a high probability gaming state and a time-saving gaming state.

The initial gaming state of the gaming machine 1 is set to a "low probability non-time-saving gaming state," and this gaming state will be referred to as the "normal gaming state" in this embodiment. The gaming state during a jackpot game will also be set to a "low probability non-time-saving gaming state," but this is a different gaming state from the normal gaming state.

Here, a "low probability gaming state" refers to a gaming state in which, for example, when the set value (of the jackpot probability in the jackpot lottery), which is the stage of the game's advantageous degree, is "1," and the probability of winning a jackpot is set low at approximately 1/300 in a special gaming judgment (jackpot judgment) that is made on the condition that a gaming ball enters the first starting hole 45 or the second starting hole 47.

In contrast, a "high probability game state" refers to a game state that is more advantageous to the player than a low probability game state, in which the probability of winning a jackpot is set high at approximately 1/60 when the setting value is "1." The transition from the low probability game state to the high probability game state occurs after the jackpot game ends.

In addition, the "non-time-saving game state" refers to a game state in which the probability of winning is set low at 1/16 in the auxiliary game judgment (win judgment) that is performed on the condition that the game ball has passed through the normal symbol gate 44, the average time for the normal symbol fluctuation display is set to about 30 seconds, and the opening time of the second start hole 47 in the event of a win is set to 0.2 seconds.

In contrast, the "time-saving game state" (variable time-saving function activated state) is a game state that is advantageous to the player in that it reduces the consumption of game balls compared to the non-time-saving game state, by setting the probability of winning high at 15/16, setting the average time for the variable display of normal symbols to about 3 seconds, and setting the opening time of the second starting hole 47 in the event of a winning combination to 5 seconds. The transition from the non-time-saving game state to the time-saving game state takes place after the big win game has ended.

The "time-saving game state" is set to be more favorable than the "non-time-saving game state" in terms of the average change time of the normal symbols, the opening time of the second start port 47, and the winning probability of the winning lottery, but it may be set to be more favorable in terms of only one of the average change time of the normal symbols, the opening time of the second start port 47, and the winning probability of the winning lottery.

In addition, the probability of winning in the auxiliary game judgment in the non-time-saving game state is the same and does not change depending on the setting value, but it may be made different depending on the setting value so that the larger the setting value, the more favorable the winning probability becomes. In addition, the probability of winning in the auxiliary game judgment in the time-saving game state is the same and does not change depending on the setting value, but it may be made different depending on the setting value so that the larger the setting value, the more favorable the winning probability becomes.

(Memory map of main control unit and frame control unit)
FIG. 28 shows a memory map of a memory area consisting of the main ROM 110b and main RAM 110c in the main control unit 110m, and a memory map of a memory area consisting of the frame control ROM 120b and frame control RAM 120c in the frame control unit 120m.

The memory area of the main control unit 110m includes a memory area (8000H to FFFFH) allocated to the main ROM 110b and a memory area (0000H to 7FFFH) allocated to the main RAM 110c.

The memory areas of the main ROM 110b are, in order, a game ROM area (8000H-9FFFH) in which programs and data related to game progress are stored, an information ROM area (A000H-A52EH) in which programs and data related to the gaming machine's winning limit device (described below) are stored, an unused area of 16 bytes or more (A52FH-A6FFH) in which access is prohibited and "0" is stored, a ROM comment area (A700H-A77FH) in which data such as program titles and versions are stored, a vector table area (A780H-A7A7H) in which the start address of the timer interrupt process (described below) and other information are set, and a HW parameter area (A7A8H-A7FFFH) in which parameters such as the start address and end address of the access prohibited area are set.

The game ROM area is arranged in the following order: a game program area (8000H-8BDCH) in which programs related to game progress are stored, a first unused area (8BDDH-8FFFH) in which access is prohibited and in which "0" is stored, a game data area (9000H-9976H) in which data related to game progress is stored, and a second unused area (9977H-9FFFH) in which access is prohibited and in which "0" is stored.

The information ROM area is arranged in the following order: an information program area (A000H-A437H) in which programs related to the gaming machine's win limit device are stored, an unused area (A438H-A47FH) in which access is prohibited and in which "0" is stored, and an information data area (A480H-A52EH) in which data related to the gaming machine's win limit device is stored.

The memory area of the main RAM 110c is arranged in the following order: a game RWM area (0000H to 018FH) that is used as a work area when executing game programs, and an information RWM area (0190H to 01FFH) that is used as a work area when executing information programs.

The game RWM area is arranged in the following order: a game work area (0000H-0128H) used by the game program as work, a first unused area (0129H-0171H) that is prohibited from being accessed and in which "0" is stored, a game stack area (0172H-017FH) for temporarily saving data being processed by the game program, and a second unused area (0180H-018FH) that is prohibited from being accessed and in which "0" is stored.

The game work area is arranged in the following order: a setting value area for storing setting values, a judgment information area for storing judgment information (checksum, described below) for judging abnormalities in the RWM area, and a game data area for storing game data that changes as the game progresses.

The information RWM area is arranged in the following order: an information work area (0190H-01E8H) used by information programs as work, an unused area (01E9H-01EAH) where access is prohibited and where "0" is stored, and an information stack area (01EBH-01FFH) where information programs temporarily save data being processed.

The information work area is arranged, in order, with a gaming media acquisition information area for storing information related to the upper limit of gaming media that can be acquired by the gaming machine 1, and an error information area for storing information related to various error judgments.

The memory map of the memory area consisting of the frame control ROM 120b and frame control RAM 120c of the frame control unit 120m is configured in a similar manner, so a description thereof will be omitted. The main control unit 110m, main ROM 110b, and main RAM 110c can be read as frame control unit 120m, frame control ROM 120b, and frame control RAM 120c, respectively.

(Relationship between game area and information area)
Fig. 29 is a diagram showing the relationship between the game area (game ROM area, game RWM area) that performs processing based on the game program and the information area (information ROM area, information RWM area) that performs processing based on the information program. Note that Fig. 29 is common to the main control unit 110m and the frame control unit 120m.

As shown in FIG. 29(a), when the main CPU 110a performs processing based on a game program, it basically refers to the game data area, and refers to and updates the contents of the game RWM area while using the game RWM area as work. Also, when the main CPU 110a performs processing based on an information program, it basically refers to the information data area, and refers to and updates the contents of the information RWM area while using the information RWM area as work.

However, in processing based on the game program, the contents of the information RWM area cannot be updated, but can be referenced. Also, in processing based on the information program, the contents of the game RWM area cannot be updated, but can be referenced.

As shown in FIG. 29(b), when processing based on the information program is performed, the flag register is saved to the game RWM area during processing based on the game program, and then the information program is called to execute processing based on the information program, and the flag register is restored from the game RWM area immediately after processing based on the information program ends and returns to the game program.

In addition, immediately after the information program starts, the stack pointer of the game stack area is saved to the information RWM area, and then the stack pointer of the information stack area is set, all registers used in the game program are saved to the information RWM area, and immediately before the information program ends, all registers used in the game program are restored from the information RWM area and the stack pointer of the game stack area is restored.

By doing this, data used by the game program can be protected when performing processing based on the information program, and no inconvenience occurs when returning from the information program to the game program.

(system configuration diagram)
FIG. 30 is a system configuration diagram (overall schematic diagram) of the gaming machine 1 and peripheral devices.

In the gaming establishment, a combination of a gaming machine 1 and a dedicated unit 170 is installed next to the gaming machine 1, and the gaming machine 1 and the dedicated unit 170 are connected to each other to enable playing. In addition, a hall computer and a management computer are installed in the office of the gaming establishment.

If the gaming machine 1 and the dedicated unit 170 are not connected, or if the gaming machine 1 and the dedicated unit 170 are connected but the power of the dedicated unit 170 is turned off, it is not possible to count the gaming balls by operating the counting button 20, or to launch the gaming balls by operating the launch handle 15.

The management computer is communicatively connected to the card company data center, which is communicatively connected to the gaming machine information center.

The gaming machine information center is equipped with a machine history server, a fraud monitoring server, a performance information server, and an addiction countermeasure server. It is also connected so that it can communicate with an association (the Japan Machinery Association) to which multiple gaming machine manufacturers related to pachinko machines belong, an addiction countermeasure organization, and a card company organization. The gaming machine information center is also capable of collecting (centrally managing) the information described below from all gaming facilities where gaming machines 1 are installed.

Next, the details and flow of information (the above-mentioned "predetermined information") and the flow of goods will be described.
Among the information transmitted from the gaming machine 1 (main control board 110, frame control board 120), the information to be transmitted to the gaming machine information center is encrypted by the U board 171. The encrypted and transmitted information can be decrypted only by the gaming machine information center. This makes the "main control chip ID number" and "frame control chip ID number" included in the information transmitted from the gaming machine 1 unknown to third parties, and makes it difficult to obtain the information of the "main control chip ID number" and the "frame control chip ID number" during the process of transmitting the information to the gaming machine information center, for example. As a result, it is possible to prevent the information of the "main control chip ID number" and the "frame control chip ID number" from being illegally obtained and the information obtained being loaded on an illegal main control board 110 or frame control board 120 and then installed in an amusement facility.

When the game medium lending button on the dedicated unit 170 is operated, a "ball lending signal" is sent from the dedicated unit 170 → lending device connection terminal board 100 → frame control board 120 ((1) in the figure). When the frame control board 120 receives the "ball lending signal," it updates the number of game balls (game value amount) owned by the player, which is displayed on the game ball count display 135 and the frame control display 125.

When the count button 20 is operated by a player, "counting information" is sent from the frame control board 120 → lending device connection terminal board 100 → dedicated unit 170 in order to store the number of game balls (game value) owned by the player, which is displayed on the game ball count display 135, in a storage medium such as a member card or visitor card inserted into the dedicated unit 170 ((2) in the figure). When the dedicated unit 170 inputs the "counting information", it stores the number of game balls (game value) in a storage medium such as a member card or visitor card (prepaid card). The number of game balls (game value) may also be stored in the hall computer in association with the identification information of the member card or visitor card.

When power is supplied to the gaming machine 1 from the power supply board 160, the gaming machine installation information is sent in the following order: main control board 110 → frame control board 120 → lending device connection terminal board 100 → dedicated unit 170 → management computer → card company data center → gaming machine information center ((2) (4) (7) in the figure).

The "gaming machine installation information" refers to six pieces of information: the "main control chip manufacturer code," "main control chip product code," and "main control chip ID number" (serial number) attached to the main control unit 110m, and the "frame control chip manufacturer code," "frame control chip product code," and "frame control chip ID number" (serial number) attached to the frame control unit 120m. The "gaming machine installation information" will be explained in more detail later.

After power is supplied to the gaming machine 1 from the power supply board 160, when it is ready to play (all interrupts are permitted in step S33 of the main process described below), it periodically transmits "HC/fraud monitoring information" from the main control board 110 → frame control board 120 → lending device connection terminal board 100 → dedicated unit 170 → management computer → card company data center → gaming machine information center ((2) (4) (7) in the figure).

"HC/fraud monitoring information (hall control/fraud monitoring information)" is information that mainly indicates the state of the gaming machine 1, such as information indicating that a jackpot game is in progress, information indicating that a high probability game state is in progress, information indicating an error occurring in the gaming machine 1, information indicating fraud occurring in the gaming machine 1, and information indicating that a gaming ball has entered one of the various winning holes (first starting hole 45, second starting hole 47, general winning hole 43, large winning hole 50). The "HC/fraud monitoring information" will be explained in more detail later.

After power is supplied to the gaming machine 1 from the power supply board 160, when it is ready to play (all interrupts are permitted in step S33 of the main process described below), "gaming machine performance information" is periodically sent from the frame control board 120 → lending device connection terminal board 100 → dedicated unit 170 → management computer → card company data center → gaming machine information center ((2) (4) (7) in the figure).

"Gaming machine performance information" is information mainly related to the balls dispensed by the gaming machine 1, and examples of this include information indicating the total number of gaming balls fired, information indicating the total number of gaming balls acquired, information indicating the ratio of special features, information indicating the ratio of consecutive special features, and information indicating the maximum number of balls dispensed. The "gaming machine performance information" will be explained in more detail later.

When a player inserts a membership card, "player information related to addiction countermeasures" is sent from the dedicated unit 170 → management computer → card company data center → gaming machine information center (addiction countermeasure server) ((4) and (7) in the diagram).

"Player information related to addiction countermeasures" includes player information stored on a membership card, gaming medium information stored on a membership card, information indicating playing time, information indicating the number of times played (e.g., the number of visits to an amusement facility), information indicating the amount of money used for playing, and information on the gaming media used for playing. When the gaming machine information center (addiction countermeasure server) receives this information, it updates the player information corresponding to that information. In this way, acquiring and managing "player information related to addiction countermeasures" can help prevent players from becoming too addicted to gaming.

The dedicated unit 170 has an output terminal (not shown) for outputting to the hall computer, and outputs "hall computer information" based on the "HC/fraud monitoring information" from the output terminal ((3) in the figure). Examples of "hall computer information" include information indicating that a jackpot game is in progress, information indicating that a high probability game state is in progress, information indicating that the variable time reduction function is in operation, and information indicating the number of winning balls at each winning slot.

When a visitor card (prepaid card) is inserted into the dedicated unit 170, "prepaid card information" is sent from the dedicated unit 170 → management computer → card company data center ((4) (6) in the figure). The card company data center collects the received "prepaid card information" and can check, for example, whether unregistered visitor cards (prepaid cards) are in circulation.

The gaming machine information center stores the received "gaming machine installation information," "HC/fraud monitoring information," and "gaming machine performance information" in the server, determines whether there are any abnormalities, and transmits the "verification and security results" in the following order: gaming machine information center → management computer → dedicated unit 170 ((8) (5) in the diagram).

The gaming machine information center has a "machine history server," a "fraud monitoring server," a "performance information server," and an "addiction countermeasure server." When a "main control chip" and a "frame control chip" are supplied to each gaming machine manufacturer by a gaming machine management control chip supplier ((12) in the diagram), and each gaming machine manufacturer manufactures a gaming machine (and it becomes ready to ship), the "machine history server" registers the installation information of the above-mentioned "main control chip manufacturer code," "main control chip product code," "main control chip ID number" (serial number), "frame control chip manufacturer code," "frame control chip product code," and "frame control chip ID number" (serial number), as well as shipping information such as the shipping date and time ((11) in the diagram), and when the registration is complete, each gaming machine manufacturer ships the gaming machine to the gaming establishment.

Similarly, when a U-board is manufactured by a U-board manufacturer (when it is ready to be shipped), the gaming machine information center registers the manufacturing information of the U-board (e.g., registering the serial number) and the installation information in the "fraud monitoring server" ((10) in the figure), and when this registration is complete, the U-board is shipped by the U-board manufacturer to the dedicated unit manufacturer ((9) in the figure).

As a result, after a gaming machine is installed in an amusement facility, when the "gaming machine installation information" is received, it is compared with the shipping information registered in the "machine history server" to determine whether the "main control chip" and "frame control chip" of the gaming machine installed in the amusement facility are genuine (determining whether there are any abnormalities).

If the "verification and security result" is normal, the U board 171 makes the gaming machine 1 playable, but if the "verification and security result" is abnormal, it can make the gaming machine 1 unplayable. This makes it possible to prevent attempts to illegally obtain winning balls by replacing the main control board 110 or the frame control board 120 with illegal ones.

In addition to registering the installation and shipping information mentioned above, the "machine history server" also stores information on the movement of used machines between gaming establishments, and disposal information when gaming machines are discarded, allowing for detailed tracking of gaming machines from the time they are installed at a gaming establishment until they are discarded. This can help prevent illegal dumping of gaming machines.

In addition to registering the above-mentioned U-board manufacturing information and installation information, the "fraud monitoring server" generates "security result information" that indicates the above-mentioned "verification and security results," and generates "encryption keys and communication keys" to prevent the "security result information" from being tampered with. This makes it possible to prevent the "security result information" from being tampered with during the process of (8) in the diagram.

The "fraud monitoring server" also stores fraud/error information that occurs in the gaming machine 1. For example, if a magnet detection error occurs in the gaming machine 1, the server receives an error code corresponding to the magnet detection error and "HC/fraud monitoring information" indicating a fraud detection signal, thereby storing the fact that a magnet error has been detected in the gaming machine 1.

The "performance information server" stores "display performance information (normal base value)" that is calculated by the frame control board 120 of the gaming machine 1 and displayed on the frame control display 125, as well as gaming machine performance information that is calculated by the frame control board 120 of the gaming machine 1 and not displayed on the frame control display 125.

In addition, the information stored in the "machine history server," "fraud monitoring server," and "performance information server" is sent to an association (the Japan Machinery Manufacturers' Union) to which multiple gaming machine manufacturers belong. As a result, gaming machine 1 is placed under the management of the gaming machine information center and the Japan Machinery Manufacturers' Union, and for this reason it is also called a "managed gaming machine."

The "addiction countermeasure server" stores the membership number, playing time, amount of money spent, and number of times played for each registered player, and transmits the stored information to the "addiction countermeasure agency." Note that the system may be configured so that if any of the playing time, amount of money spent, or number of times played exceeds a specified value, the player will be unable to play.

In addition, in transmitting and receiving each of the above-mentioned information, it is preferable that the transmitting side records the transmission date and time, and the receiving side is configured to be able to record the reception date and time. With this configuration, for example, when the gaming machine information center receives a "setting change signal" or an "RWM clear signal" (HC/fraud monitoring information), it can check whether the reception time is during or outside the business hours of the gaming facility, and it can be monitored to see whether "setting changes" or "RWM clears" are being made during business hours.

(Information transmission flow)
FIG. 31 is a diagram specifically explaining the flow of information transmission and reception described in FIG.

First, when power is supplied to the gaming machine 1 from the power supply board 160, it enters the "matching phase." In the "matching phase," the "main control chip ID number" is sent from the main control board 110 to the frame control board 120, and the "main control chip ID number" and "frame control chip ID number" are sent from the frame control board 120 to the U board 171, and the information related to the "main control chip ID number" and "frame control chip ID number" is encrypted by the U board 171.

Then, the encrypted information relating to the "main control chip ID number" and "frame control chip ID number" is transmitted to the gaming machine information center via the U control unit 172, the management computer, and the card company data center.

When the gaming machine information center receives the encrypted information related to the "main control chip ID number" and "frame control chip ID number," it decrypts it and compares it with the installation information stored in the machine history server to determine whether or not there is an abnormality as described above.

Then, it generates "security result information" indicating the "matching and security result", encrypts it, and transmits it to the U board 171 via the card company data center, management computer, and U control unit 172.

When the U board 171 receives the "security result information", it decrypts it and checks for the presence or absence of the above-mentioned abnormalities. If no abnormalities are found, it ends the "verification phase" and moves to the "status communication phase", but if an abnormality is found, it does not move to the "status communication phase" and makes the gaming machine 1 unplayable.

In the "status communication phase", first, when a player sits down to play gaming machine 1, inserts valuables (banknotes or a membership card with gaming media stored on it) and operates the loan button, the number of loaned balls (e.g., 125 balls) corresponding to one press of the loan button is transmitted from U control unit 172 to U board 171, and the number of loaned balls (e.g., 125 balls) is then transmitted from U board 171 to frame control board 120.

When the frame control board 120 receives the number of loaned balls (e.g., 125 balls), it displays the number of loaned balls (e.g., 125 balls) on the game ball number display 135. This makes it possible to launch game balls into the game area 5a when the launch handle 15 is rotated.

When the count button 20 is operated while the number of game balls is displayed on the game ball count display 135 as a result of playing the game, the counted number of balls is transmitted from the frame control board 120 to the U board 171. For example, when the count button 20 is operated while the number of game balls displayed on the game ball count display 135 is 1000, the counted number of balls is transmitted as "1000."

Similarly, the number of counted balls is transmitted from the U board 171 to the U control unit 172. Upon receiving the number of counted balls, the U control unit 172 stores the number of counted balls on the member card or visitor card.

The U control unit 172 allows the member card or visitor card to be returned to the player once the number of counted balls has been stored on the member card or visitor card. In other words, when the return button image on the display unit 174 is operated when the number of counted balls has been stored, the member card or visitor card can be returned to the player. On the other hand, when the number of counted balls has not been stored (in the middle of being stored, or not stored at all), even if the return button image on the display unit 174 is operated, the member card or visitor card will not be returned to the player. This makes it possible to prevent a player from leaving their seat (or leaving the facility) with game balls remaining in the gaming machine 1.

When the return button image on the display unit 174 is operated while the number of counted balls has not been stored, the U control unit 172 displays a notification on the display unit 174 prompting the player to count, such as a message saying "Press the count button 20 to count." This makes it easier for players who are unfamiliar with the game to understand the operation method.

The notification prompting the player to count is not limited to a display, but may be a sound, a lamp, or a combination of these. The notification may also be made by the gaming machine 1. This makes it easier to understand the operation method.

The number of game balls (game value amount) owned by the player, displayed on the game ball count display 135, is sent as "HC/fraud monitoring information" every 300 ms from the frame control board 120 to the U board 171, and is further sent from the U board 171 to the U control unit 172. This allows the dedicated unit 170 to know the number of game balls owned by the player.

The number of game balls released in the gaming machine 1 (for example, game balls detected by the out ball detection switch 39a) is transmitted as "HC/fraud monitoring information" from the frame control board 120 to the U board 171 every 300 ms, and is further transmitted from the U board 171 to the U control unit 172. This allows the dedicated unit 170 to know the number of game balls released by the player.

The number of prize balls obtained by having game balls enter each winning slot (general winning slot 43, start slots 45 and 47, large winning slot 50) in the gaming machine 1 is transmitted as "gaming machine information (HC/fraud monitoring information)" from the main control board 110 to the frame control board 120 every 108 ms, and is further transmitted as "HC/fraud monitoring information" from the frame control board 120 to the U board 171 every 300 ms, and is further transmitted from the U board 171 to the U control unit 172. This allows the dedicated unit 170 to know the number of prize balls generated in the gaming machine 1.

The dedicated unit 170 obtains the number of game balls displayed on the game ball count display 135, the number of game balls fired on the game machine 1, and the number of prize balls obtained by having game balls enter each winning slot on the game machine 1, and can determine that the number of game balls displayed on the game ball count display 135 is not legitimate, based on the separately obtained information on the number of game balls fired and the number of prize balls, even if fraud has occurred with the numerical value of the number of game balls displayed on the game ball count display 135.

The frame control board 120 periodically transmits "game machine information (HC/fraud monitoring information)," while the dedicated unit 170 transmits "hall computer information" based on the "HC/fraud monitoring information." This allows the hall computer to grasp the state of the game machine 1 (during jackpot play, during high probability play, during variable time reduction function operation, number of winning balls at each winning slot).

The frame control board 120 transmits "gaming machine performance information" to the U board 171, and when the U board 171 receives the "gaming machine performance information", it encrypts it and transmits it to the gaming machine information center via the U control unit 172, the management computer, and the card company data center. This allows the gaming machine information center to grasp, for example, information indicating the total number of gaming balls fired, information indicating the total number of gaming balls acquired, information indicating the ratio of special features, information indicating the ratio of consecutive special features, information indicating the maximum number of balls dispensed, etc.

When the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on, the main control board 110 transmits "gaming machine installation information" to the frame control board 120 (installation information notification), and the frame control board 120 transmits "gaming machine installation information" to the U board 171 every 300 ms (installation information). The U board 171 then encrypts the "gaming machine installation information" and finally transmits it to the gaming machine information center. This allows the gaming machine information center to periodically receive the "gaming machine installation information", and constantly monitor whether the genuine main control board 110 and frame control board 120 are installed.

The main control board 110 transmits "HC/fraud monitoring information" to the frame control board 120 every 108 ms. As described later, the "HC/fraud monitoring information" includes "main control state 1", "main control state 2", "game machine error state", "fraud detection state 1", etc., so for example, information related to errors detected by the main control board 110 and the frame control board 120 is also periodically transmitted in the "game machine error state" (error notification). The U board 171 encrypts the "HC/fraud monitoring information" (error notification) received from the main control board 110 and the frame control board 120 and finally transmits it to the gaming machine information center. It also transmits information related to the error to the management computer of the gaming store. This allows the gaming machine information center to periodically receive information related to errors that have occurred in the gaming machine, and allows errors that have occurred in the main control board 110 and the frame control board 120 to be constantly monitored. In addition, the management computer can also receive information about errors that have occurred in the gaming machines, so the gaming establishment can quickly grasp the information about the error and quickly resolve the error. The same process applies to the "fraud information" sent in "fraud detection state 1."

In addition, in "Main Control State 1" and "Main Control State 2", for example, the status of the gaming machine (during jackpot, in high probability gaming state) is periodically transmitted. Then, the "HC/fraud monitoring information" is encrypted by the U board 171 and ultimately transmitted to the gaming machine information center. This allows the gaming machine information center to periodically receive the status of the gaming machine, and for example, if information indicating a jackpot is frequently received, it can be determined that there is a possibility of fraud.

Next, we will explain the details of the various tables stored in main ROM 110b with reference to Figures 32 to 35.

(Big win determination table)
Figure 32(a) is a jackpot determination table for the first special pattern for determining (jackpot determination) special pattern determination information obtained based on the entry (sinking) of a gaming ball into the first starting hole 45, and Figure 32(b) is a jackpot determination table for the second special pattern for determining (jackpot determination) special pattern determination information obtained based on the entry (sinking) of a gaming ball into the second starting hole 47.

As shown in Figures 32(a)-(b), the jackpot determination table associates the current setting value, the current probability state, the random number value for jackpot determination, and the jackpot determination result (jackpot, miss), and for reference, the rightmost column lists the approximate probability of winning in the case of a "jackpot."

The main CPU 110a refers to the jackpot determination table for the first special symbol shown in FIG. 32(a) or the jackpot determination table for the second special symbol shown in FIG. 32(b), and determines whether it is a "jackpot" or a "miss" based on the current setting value, the probability state, and the random number value for jackpot determination.

For example, according to the jackpot determination table for the first special symbol shown in FIG. 32(a), when the set value is "1" and normal play is in progress, 200 random numbers for jackpot determination, from "100" to "299," are determined to be "jackpots." Any random numbers for jackpot determination other than those determined to be jackpots are determined to be "misses."

In the jackpot determination table of this embodiment, a four-stage setting value is used, but this is not limited to this, and a six-stage setting value, a two-stage setting value, a one-stage setting value, or no setting function may be provided.

The special symbol determination information obtained based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting hole 45 is stored in the first special symbol determination information reserve memory area of the main RAM 110c, and the special symbol determination information obtained based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting hole 47 is stored in the second special symbol determination information reserve memory area of the main RAM 110c. When a jackpot determination is made, the special symbol determination information stored in the first special symbol determination information reserve memory area or the second special symbol determination information reserve memory area is shifted to the special symbol determination information storage area of the main RAM 110c, and the shifted special symbol determination information is used to make a jackpot determination.

The first special pattern determination information reservation memory area is divided into a first storage section to a fourth storage section, and reservation icons corresponding to the special pattern determination information stored in the first storage section to the fourth storage section are displayed in the first display section 70B1 to the fourth display section 70B4 of the first reservation icon display area 70B, respectively. The second special pattern determination information reservation memory area is divided into a first storage section to a fourth storage section, and reservation icons corresponding to the special pattern determination information stored in the first storage section to the fourth storage section are displayed in the first display section 70D1 to the fourth display section 70D4 of the second reservation icon display area 70D, respectively.

(Special symbol determination table)
FIG. 33(a) is a special pattern determination table for a jackpot for determining the type of special pattern when a jackpot is determined, and FIG. 33(b) is a special pattern determination table for a miss for determining the type of special pattern when a miss is determined.

As shown in Figures 33(a)-(b), the special symbol determination table associates the type of special symbol to be stopped, a random number value for special symbol determination, the special symbol determination result, the special stop symbol data corresponding to the determination result, and the special symbol designation command corresponding to the determination result.

The special symbols "00" and "10" are loss symbols that do not trigger a jackpot game. The special symbols "01" and "04" are jackpot special symbols that trigger a first jackpot game, the special symbols "02" and "05" are jackpot special symbols that trigger a second jackpot game, and the special symbols "03" and "06" are jackpot special symbols that trigger a third jackpot game.

In the "first jackpot game", the big prize winning hole 50 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds, and then closed for 2 seconds in a round game that is executed up to 6 times. Note that in the round game, if a specified number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) enter the big prize winning hole 50 even before the opening time has elapsed, one round game ends. In addition, after the first jackpot game ends, the game is set to a low probability non-time-saving game state (time-saving game state) until the special pattern variable display is performed 100 times.

In the "second jackpot game", the big prize opening 50 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds, and then the big prize opening is closed for 2 seconds. This round game is played up to 10 times. After the second jackpot game ends, the machine is set to a high probability time-saving game state (probability change game state) until the special pattern variation display is performed 10,000 times. Therefore, based on the probability of winning the jackpot in the high probability game state, the next jackpot is almost certain.

In the "third jackpot game", the second jackpot opening 56 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds, and then the opening is closed for two seconds in a round game that is played up to four times. After the third jackpot game ends, the game is set to a high probability time-saving game state (probability change game state) until the special symbol variation display is performed 10,000 times. Therefore, based on the probability of winning a jackpot in the high probability game state, the next jackpot is almost guaranteed.

Note that one losing special symbol is associated with each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, but multiple losing special symbols may be associated with at least one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

The main CPU 110a refers to the special symbol determination table shown in any one of Figures 33(a) to (b), and determines the type of special symbol, the stopped special symbol data, and the special symbol designation command based on the type of special symbol to be stopped and the random number value for special symbol determination, and transmits the special symbol designation command to the performance control board 130.

The first feature of the special symbol determination table shown in Figure 33 is that the type of the big win special symbol and the type of the losing special symbol are the same and do not change depending on the setting value. This allows the player to play with confidence without complicating the gameplay.

The second feature of the special symbol determination table shown in Figure 33 is that the selection rate of various special jackpot symbols and the selection rate of various losing symbols are constant and do not change depending on the setting value. By doing this, the player's degree of advantage does not change drastically depending on the setting value, allowing the player to play with peace of mind.

(Special chart fluctuation pattern determination table)
Figure 34(a) is a special pattern change pattern determination table for the non-time-saving state for determining the change pattern of the special pattern in the non-time-saving state, and Figure 34(b) is a special pattern change pattern determination table for the time-saving state for determining the change pattern of the special pattern in the time-saving state.

As shown in FIG. 34, the special pattern change pattern determination table associates the type of special pattern (starting hole) that performs the change display, the jackpot determination result, the special pattern determination result (stop special pattern data), a random number value for reach determination, the first special pattern reserved number (U1) or the second special pattern reserved number (U2), a random number value for special pattern change pattern determination, the special pattern change pattern as the determination result, the special pattern change time, and a special pattern change pattern designation command that indicates the special pattern change pattern.

Therefore, a "special pattern change pattern" can be said to be something that can specify the type of special pattern, the result of the jackpot determination, the type of special pattern, and the change time of the special pattern.

The main CPU 110a refers to the special symbol variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 34, and determines the special symbol variation pattern based on the jackpot determination result, the special symbol determination result (stop special symbol data), the random number value for reach determination, the first special symbol reserved number (U1) or the second special symbol reserved number (U2), and the random number value for special symbol variation pattern determination, and transmits a special symbol variation pattern designation command corresponding to the special symbol variation pattern to the performance control board 130.

In addition, as described below, the performance control board 130 determines the content (performance mode) of the variable performance accompanied by the variable display of the performance pattern 70a according to the variable pattern designation command (jackpot determination result, special pattern determination result, etc.), so that the rightmost column of the special pattern variable pattern determination table shown in Figure 34 lists the performance content that can be executed in the variable performance for reference.

The effect contents shown in the fluctuation pattern determination table in FIG. 34, "normal fluctuation," "shortened fluctuation," "ultra-shortened fluctuation," and "long fluctuation," mean that the three effect patterns 70a fluctuate independently at high speed and stop without reaching a reach.

"Reach" refers to a variation mode that makes the player expect a jackpot game to be played, such as when some of the combinations of performance symbols 70a that indicate a jackpot temporarily stop and other performance symbols 70a change. For example, when the combination of three performance symbols 70a, "777," is set as the combination of performance symbols 70a that indicate a jackpot, the same performance symbol 70a temporarily stops at "7" in the left and right areas, and the remaining performance symbols 70a change in the center area.

Note that a "temporary stop" refers to a state in which the performance pattern 70a slightly shakes or deforms, making it appear to the player that the performance pattern 70a is stopped (but is not completely stopped).

"Normal reach" refers to a reach effect in which the same effect symbol 70a temporarily stops in the left and right areas, and the remaining effect symbol 70a fluctuates in the center area, and is the reach effect with the lowest expectation of a jackpot.

In addition, "SP reach" and "special SP reach" are super reach effects that have a higher chance of winning than a normal reach, and are executed after an advanced effect is executed from the normal reach effect. For example, the two effect patterns 70a shrink and move to the corners of the first image display device 70, and a special reach effect is executed using almost the entire display area of the first image display device 70. Note that a "special SP reach" executes a more special effect than an "SP reach".

In addition, the "SPSP Reach" and "SPSP "7" Reach" are special reach effects that have a higher chance of winning than the Super Reach, and are executed after the Normal Reach effect or the Super Reach effect. For example, an extension effect is executed from the Normal Reach effect, and then the three effect symbols 70a shrink and move to the corners of the first image display device 70, and a more special reach effect than the "SP Reach" is executed using almost the entire display area of the first image display device 70. In the "SPSP Reach", the reach effect is executed with the effect symbols 70a other than "7", and in the "SPSP "7" Reach", the reach effect is executed with the "7" symbol.

The "full rotation reach" is a reach that guarantees a jackpot, and is executed after a normal reach performance. For example, an advanced performance is executed from a normal reach performance, and then the three performance patterns 70a all move at a slow speed while being identical, and a more special reach performance (a reach performance that guarantees a jackpot) than the "SPSP reach" or "SPSP "7" reach" is performed using almost the entire display area of the first image display device 70.

The first feature of the special chart variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 34 is that the type of special chart variation pattern that is determined is the same and does not change depending on the setting value. This makes it difficult to determine the setting value from the special chart variation pattern, making it possible to provide fair play.

The second feature of the special chart variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 34 is that the selection ratio of each special chart variation pattern is the same and does not change depending on the setting value. This makes it difficult to determine the setting value from the special chart variation pattern, making it possible to provide fair play.

The third feature of the special symbol change pattern determination table shown in FIG. 34 is that when the number of reserved first special symbols increases to 2 or 3 during non-time-saving mode, shortened change is more likely to be determined as the change pattern of the first special symbol, whereas shortened change is not determined as the change pattern of the second special symbol even if the number of reserved second special symbols increases to 2 or 3 during non-time-saving mode. By doing this, it is possible to increase the time efficiency (execution efficiency) of the special symbol change display when hitting left compared to when hitting right during non-time-saving mode, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

The fourth feature of the special symbol change pattern determination table shown in FIG. 34 is that even if the number of reserved first special symbols increases from 1 to 3 during the time-saving state, the (super) shortened change is not determined as the change pattern of the first special symbol, whereas if the number of reserved second special symbols increases from 1 to 3 during the time-saving state, the (long) shortened change is more likely to be determined as the change pattern of the second special symbol. By doing this, it is possible to increase the time efficiency (execution efficiency) of the special symbol change display when hitting from the right compared to when hitting from the left during the time-saving state, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

(Pre-judgment table)
Figure 35 (a) is a pre-judgment table for the non-time-saving state for pre-judging (reading ahead) special chart judgment information obtained based on the winning of a game ball into the first starting hole 45 during the non-time-saving state, and Figure 35 (b) is a pre-judgment table for the time-saving state for pre-judging (reading ahead) special chart judgment information obtained based on the winning of a game ball into the second starting hole 47 during the time-saving state.

As shown in FIG. 35, the advance judgment table associates the type of special symbol (starting hole), the jackpot judgment result, the special symbol judgment result, the random number value for reach judgment, the random number value for special symbol fluctuation pattern judgment, the special symbol planned fluctuation pattern as the judgment result, and the look-ahead specification command indicating the special symbol planned fluctuation pattern.

Therefore, the "special symbol planned change pattern" can be said to be something that can identify the type of special symbol, the result of the jackpot determination, the type of special symbol, and the special symbol change pattern that is planned to be executed.

The main CPU 110a refers to the advance determination table shown in FIG. 35, and determines the planned special symbol variation pattern based on the random number value for determining a jackpot, the random number value for determining a special symbol, the random number value for determining a reach, and the random number value for determining a special symbol variation pattern, and transmits a look-ahead command corresponding to the planned special symbol variation pattern to the performance control board 130.

Next, modified examples of the specifications of the gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to Figs. 36 and 37. In this embodiment, as described in Figs. 32 and 33 and in the description of the gaming state, the so-called "probability loop type" is used. The "probability loop type" is, for example, a "jackpot" is determined in a "normal gaming state (low probability non-time-saving gaming state)" and a special symbol "02" or "03" is determined, after the jackpot game ends the "high probability gaming state (high probability time-saving gaming state)" is entered, but thereafter, if the special symbol "04" (or "01") is not determined in the "high probability gaming state" and the special symbol "05" or the special symbol "06" is determined, the "high probability gaming state" continues.

Figure 36 shows the so-called "Type 1, Type 2". The "Type 1, Type 2" has two game states: "Normal game state (low probability non-time-saving game state)" and "Time-saving game state (low probability time-saving game state)". When a "jackpot" is determined in the "normal game state" (for example, the probability of a jackpot is "1/199"), as shown in (1), the game transitions to "jackpot game 1 (4 rounds)" or "jackpot game 2 (8 rounds)" at a predetermined rate.

When "Big Win Game 1 (4 rounds)" ends, the game moves to "Time-saving Game State 1". The maximum number of times that this "Time-saving Game State 1" can be played is "1". However, during "Time-saving Game State 1", it is possible to have a game ball enter the second start hole 47 and store special game determination information in the first to fourth memory sections of the second special game determination information reserve memory area, and a maximum of "5" "Big Win Determinations" and "Small Win Determinations" can be performed using the special game determination information obtained by having a game ball enter the second start hole 47.

On the other hand, when "Big Win Game 2 (8 rounds)" ends, the game moves to "Time-saving Game State 2". The maximum number of times that this "Time-saving Game State 2" can be played is "7". However, during "Time-saving Game State 2", it is possible to have the game ball enter the second start hole 47 and store the special game determination information in each of the first to fourth memory sections of the second special game determination information reserve memory area, and a maximum of "Big Win Determination" and "Small Win Determination" can be performed "11" times using the special game determination information obtained by having the game ball enter the second start hole 47.

We will not go into the detailed control flow, but if the result of the "big hit determination" is that it is a "big hit," then the "small hit determination" is not performed; if the result of the "big hit determination" is that it is not a "big hit," then the "small hit determination" is performed; and if the "small hit determination" does not determine that it is a "small hit," then it is a "miss."

The special chart determination information obtained by having the game ball enter the second starting hole 47 is determined to be a "big win" with a probability of, for example, "1/199", and if it is not determined to be a "big win", it is determined to be a "small win" with a probability of, for example, "1/8". Note that the special chart determination information obtained by having the game ball enter the first starting hole 45 may be such that a "small win" is not won, or may be such that it is difficult to win.

Between "time-saving game state 1" and "time-saving game state 2," "time-saving game state 2" has a higher upper limit on the number of times the time-saving game state can be played, and is therefore more advantageous to the player. Therefore, on the image display device 70, etc., "time-saving game state 1" is displayed as "RUSH acquisition challenge mode," and "time-saving game state 2" is displayed as "RUSH mode," so that the player can identify the advantage or disadvantage from the display mode.

The game state during the "RUSH Acquisition Challenge Mode" is "Time-saving Game State 1" until the first variable display ends, and is the "Normal Game State" from the start of the second variable display. The game state during the "RUSH Mode" is "Time-saving Game State 2" until the seventh variable display ends, and is the "Normal Game State" from the start of the eighth variable display.

If a "small win" is determined during the "RUSH acquisition challenge mode", as shown in (2), the game moves to "jackpot game 3 (4 rounds)". However, the first round of "jackpot game 3 (4 rounds)" is a small win game, and if the game ball can be placed in the "special area" provided in the large prize opening during the small win game, the jackpot game (2nd to 4th rounds) will be executed. On the other hand, if the game ball cannot be placed in the "special area" during the small win game, the jackpot game (2nd to 4th rounds) will not be executed.

In addition, if a "jackpot" is determined during the "RUSH acquisition challenge mode", as shown in (1), the game will transition to "jackpot game 4 (8 rounds)". Then, when "jackpot game 3 (4 rounds)" and "jackpot game 4 (8 rounds)" are completed, the game will transition to "RUSH mode".

On the other hand, if neither a "big win" nor a "small win" is determined during the "RUSH acquisition challenge mode", the "RUSH acquisition challenge mode" ends and transitions to "normal mode".

If a "small win" is determined during "RUSH mode", the mode will transition to "jackpot game 3 (4 rounds)" as shown in (2), and if a "jackpot" is determined, the mode will transition to "jackpot game 4 (8 rounds)" as shown in (1). Then, when "jackpot game 3 (4 rounds)" or "jackpot game 4 (8 rounds)" ends, the mode will transition to "RUSH mode".

On the other hand, if neither a "big win" nor a "small win" is determined during "RUSH mode", "RUSH mode" ends and transitions to "normal mode".

The gaming machine 1 in this embodiment is not limited to the "probable loop type" described above, but may be a "type 1/type 2" like this.

Figure 37 shows the so-called "small win rush type." The "small win rush type" has game states of "normal game state (low probability non-time-saving game state)," "time-saving game state (low probability time-saving game state)," and "high probability game state (high probability time-saving game state)." When a "jackpot" is determined in the "normal game state" (for example, the jackpot probability is "1/319"), as shown in (1), it transitions to "jackpot game 1 (4 rounds)" or "jackpot game 2 (16 rounds)" at a predetermined rate.

When "jackpot game 1 (4 rounds)" is completed, the game transitions to a "time-saving game state." The maximum number of times that the game can be played in this "time-saving game state" is, for example, 50 times. When "jackpot game 2 (16 rounds)" is completed, the game transitions to a "high probability game state."

When a "jackpot" is determined in the "time-saving game state" (for example, the probability of a jackpot is "1/319"), as shown in (1), a transition to "jackpot game 4 (2 rounds)" or "jackpot game 3 (16 rounds)" occurs at a predetermined rate. When "jackpot game 4 (2 rounds)" ends, a transition to the "time-saving game state" occurs, and when "jackpot game 3 (16 rounds)" ends, a transition to the "high probability game state" occurs. In addition, when the variable display is executed "50" times without a determination of a "jackpot", the "time-saving game state" ends and a transition to the "normal game state" occurs.

When a "jackpot" is determined in the "high probability game state" (for example, the jackpot probability is "1/77"), as shown in (2), a transition to "jackpot game 4 (2 rounds)" or "jackpot game 3 (16 rounds)" occurs at a predetermined rate.

Furthermore, when a "small win" is determined in the "high probability game state" (for example, the probability of a small win is "1/2.5"), the game transitions to the "small win game" as shown in (3), in which the small win large prize opening is opened for a predetermined period of time, and for example, in "one" "small win game", it is possible to win approximately three game balls in the small win large prize opening. After the "small win game" ends, the game transitions to the "high probability game state."

For example, the probability of a small win is 1/2.5, making it very easy to win. After the small win game ends, the game enters a high probability game state again, so in the high probability game state, it is more advantageous for the player to continue winning the small win probability of 1/2.5 without winning the big win probability of 1/77, for example, since this allows the player to increase the number of game balls they have through the small win game.

The gaming machine 1 in this embodiment is not limited to the above-mentioned "high probability loop type," but may be such a "small win rush type."

In addition, the gaming machine 1 in this embodiment is not limited to the "probability loop type", "type 1/2 type", or "small win rush type", but may be a so-called "ST probability type" in which the upper limit number of times in the "high probability game state (high probability time-saving game state)" is set to, for example, "100", or may be a so-called "probability type" in which the "high probability game state (high probability time-saving game state)" falls to the "normal game state (low probability non-time-saving game state)" or the "time-saving game state (low probability time-saving game state)" with a predetermined probability.

Next, we will explain the details of the "gaming machine installation information" and "HC/fraud monitoring information" using Figures 38 to 43.

Figure 38 shows a list of messages related to communication between the main control board 110 and the frame control board 120. No. 1 has the message name "Game machine installation information notification", the transmission direction "Main control board 110 → Frame control board 120", the command "0x01", and the message summary "Notify game machine installation information". No. 2 has the message name "Game machine installation information response", the transmission direction "Frame control board 120 → Main control board 110", the command "0x11", and the message summary "Respond game machine installation information receipt result". No. 3 has the message name "Game machine information notification", the transmission direction "Main control board 110 → Frame control board 120", the command "0x02", and the message summary "Notify game machine information". Note that "game machine information" here refers to "HC/fraud monitoring information". No. 4, the message name is "Amusement machine information response", the transmission direction is "Frame control board 120 → Main control board 110", the command is "0x12", and the message summary is "Respond with the gaming machine information reception result and frame control status".

The "gaming machine installation information" is configured as shown in FIG. 39. No. 1 has the data name "Message length" and the content "0x19". No. 2 has the data name "Command" and the content "0x01". No. 3 has the data name "Communication serial number" and the content "Fixed at 0". No. 4 has the data name "Gaming machine type" related to the gaming machine installation information, the content of which will be described later. No. 5 has the data name "Main control chip ID number" related to the gaming machine installation information, the content of which will be described later. No. 6 has the data name "Main control chip manufacturer code" related to the gaming machine installation information, the content of which will be described later. No. 7 has the data name "Main control chip product code" related to the gaming machine installation information, the content of which will be described later. 8 has the data name "Checksum" and the contents "-".

As shown in Figure 39, the data name of No. 4, "Machine type", is composed of 1 byte, with Bit 3 to Bit 0 indicating the type of machine. If Bit 3 to Bit 0 are "0001", it indicates a "pachinko machine", if Bit 3 to Bit 0 are "0010", it indicates a "slot machine", if Bit 3 to Bit 0 are "0011", it indicates an "arrange ball machine", if Bit 3 to Bit 0 are "0100", it indicates a "janball machine", and the rest are unused.

Bits 6 to 4 indicate the organization classification of the union. If Bits 6 to 4 are "000", it indicates the "Nikkoso" (an organization mainly related to pachinko machines), if Bits 6 to 4 are "001", it indicates the "Nichidenkyo" (an organization mainly related to slot machines), and the rest are unused.

Bit 7 indicates the management medium, and if Bit 7 is "0", it indicates a gaming ball, and if Bit 7 is "1", it indicates a gaming medal. For example, if gaming machine 1 is a pachinko gaming machine, Bit 7 will be "0", Bit 6 to Bit 4 will be "000", and Bit 3 to Bit 0 will be "0001", which will be 1 byte of data.

The "main control chip ID number" is omitted from the drawing, but the ID of each main control chip manufacturer is transmitted via telegram. For example, if the main control chip is from manufacturer A, a total of 9 bytes of data consisting of the chip individual number "23456789" + identification code is transmitted via telegram, and if the main control chip is from manufacturer B, a total of 9 bytes of data consisting of the chip individual number "45678912" + identification code is transmitted via telegram.

The "gaming machine installation information response" is a response from the frame control board 120 to the main control board 110 after the main control board 110 transmits the "gaming machine installation information" to the frame control board 120. No. 1 has the data name "message length" and the content "0x05". No. 2 has the data name "command" and the content "0x11". No. 3 has the data name "communication number" and the content "fixed at 0". No. 4 has the data name "gaming machine installation information receipt result", and if the content is "0x00", it means "received OK", and if the content is "0x01", it means "ball removal state" indicating that the frame control board 120 is in a ball removal state. No. 5 has the data name "checksum" and the content "addition result from message length to data section". In addition, the main control board 110 will not enter a playable state unless it receives the content "0x00" (reception OK) as the "gaming machine installation information receipt result" from the frame control board 120. This will be explained in more detail later using a flowchart.

The "HC/fraud monitoring information" is configured as shown in Figure 40. No. 1 has the data name "Message length" and the contents "0x0B-0x15". No. 2 has the data name "Command" and the contents "0x02". No. 3 has the data name "Communication serial number" and the contents "Sequence number (0-255)". No. 4 has the data name "Main control status 1" and the contents are Bit 0 "Jackpot 1", Bit 1 "Jackpot 2", Bit 2 "Jackpot 3", Bit 3 "Machine status signal 1", Bit 4 "Machine status signal 2", Bit 5 "Machine status signal 3", Bit 6 "Machine status signal 4", and Bit 7 "Unused". For example, during the execution of a jackpot game corresponding to "jackpot 1," Bit 0 and Bit 1 are ON ("1"), and the fact that Bit 0 and Bit 1 of main control state 1 are ON ("1") is ultimately transmitted to the gaming machine information center.

No. 5 has the data name "Main Control State 2" and the contents are Bit 0 "During big win + time-saving or advantageous state", Bit 1 "High probability", Bit 2 "Time-saving or advantageous state", and Bits 3 to 7 "Unused". For example, during a high probability game state, Bit 1 is ON ("1"), and the fact that Bit 1 of Main Control State 2 is ON ("1") is ultimately transmitted to the gaming machine information center.

No. 6 has the data name "Game Machine Error Status", and the contents are Bit 0 to Bit 5 are "Error Code", Bit 6 is "0 = Frame Control, 1 = Main Control" (0 is an error detected by the frame control board 120, 1 is an error detected by the main control board 110), and Bit 7 is "0 = Alert only, 1 = Alert + Output to Hall Controller" (0 is an error alert only, 1 is an error alert and output to the hall controller). For example, if an error corresponding to Bit 0 occurs, Bit 0 becomes ON ("1"), and the fact that Bit 0 of the game machine error status is ON ("1") is finally transmitted to the game machine information center.

No. 7 has the data name "Fraud Detection Status 1" and the contents are Bit 0 "Settings Change Signal", Bit 1 "Settings Check Signal", Bit 2 "RWM Clear Signal", Bit 3 "Fraud Detection Signal 1", Bit 4 "Fraud Detection Signal 2", Bit 5 "Fraud Detection Signal 3", Bit 6 "Winning Limit Device Activated Signal", and Bit 7 "Unused". For example, if the settings are being changed as described below, Bit 0 will be ON ("1"), and the fact that Bit 0 of Fraud Detection Status 1 is ON ("1") will ultimately be transmitted to the gaming machine information center.

No. 8 has the data name "Number of prize balls from the device activation" and the content "Number of prize balls from the device activation" (for example, the number of prize balls from the game ball entering the second start opening 47). No. 9 has the data name "Number of prize balls from continuous device activation" and the content "Number of prize balls from the continuous device activation device operation" (for example, the number of prize balls from the game ball entering the large prize opening 50).

No. 10 has the name of the data related to the game information "Number of game information" and the content "Number of type information and count information (n) (n) = 0 to 5 (variable length)". No. 11 has the name of the data related to the game information "Type information 1" and the content "Type information 1". No. 12 has the name of the data related to the game information "Count information 1" and the content "Count information 1".

In the first example, when one game ball enters the first start opening 45, the count information is "data indicating the first start opening 45," "data indicating the number of winning balls (1)," and "data indicating the number of prize balls (3)." In the second example, when one game ball enters the large prize opening 50, the count information is "data indicating the large prize opening 50," "data indicating the number of winning balls (1)," and "data indicating the number of prize balls (15)." In the third example, when one game ball passes through the out ball detection switch 39a, the count information is "data indicating the out ball detection switch 39a" and "data indicating the number of passing balls (1)." These data are finally transmitted to the gaming machine information center as a telegram.

No. 13 has the data name "Type information n" related to the game information and the content "Type information n". No. 14 has the data name "Count information n" related to the game information and the content "Count information n". No. 15 has the data name "Checksum" and the content "Addition result from message length to data section".

Figure 41 is a diagram explaining the details of the above-mentioned "main control state 1," "main control state 2," and "fraud detection state 1."

"Main control state 1" is Bit 0's name "Jackpot 1", with details "Jackpot 1 information: set to 1 during the jackpot to be notified", Bit 1's name "Jackpot 2", with details "Jackpot 2 information: set to 1 during all jackpots", Bit 2's name "Jackpot 3", with details "Jackpot 3 information: set to 1 during states such as small jackpot rush and special time-saving", Bit 3's name "Gaming machine status signal 1", with details "Gaming machine status signal: set to 1 while gaming machine status signal 1 is ON", Bit 4's name "Gaming machine status signal 2", with details "Gaming machine status signal: set to 1 while gaming machine status signal 2 is ON", Bit 5's name "Gaming machine status signal 3", with details "Gaming machine status signal: set to 1 while gaming machine status signal 3 is ON", and Bit 6's name "Gaming machine status signal 4", with details "Gaming machine status signal "Set to 1 while gaming machine status signal 4 is ON," and the name of Bit 7 is "Unused," with details "Fixed to 0."

"Game machine status signal 1" corresponds to external terminal board pulse output signal terminal 1 of the hall control output unit 173, "game machine status signal 2" corresponds to external terminal board pulse output signal terminal 2 of the hall control output unit 173, "game machine status signal 3" corresponds to external terminal board pulse output signal terminal 3 of the hall control output unit 173, and "game machine status signal 4" corresponds to external terminal board pulse output signal terminal 4 of the hall control output unit 173.

The small win rush is as described in FIG. 37. The special time-saving mode corresponds to, for example, a time-saving game mode (so-called ceiling time-saving mode) that operates as a rescue when a low-probability game mode has been played a specified number of times (for example, 1000 variable displays) since the end of a big win game, or a time-saving game mode (so-called symbol time-saving mode) that operates with a specified probability when a big win is judged to be a miss.

In "Main Control State 2", Bit 0 is named "Jackpot + Time-saving or Advantageous State", with details "Game Status Information: Set to 1 during jackpot and time-saving or advantageous state", Bit 1 is named "High Probability", with details "Game Status Information: Set to 1 during high probability", Bit 2 is named "Time-saving or Advantageous State", with details "Game Status Information: Set to 1 during time-saving or advantageous state", and Bits 3 to 7 are named "Unused" and details "Fixed to 0".

"Fraud detection status 1" is bit 0's name "settings changing signal", details "0 = normal, 1 = settings changing", bit 1's name "settings checking signal", details "0 = normal, 1 = settings checking", bit 2's name "RWM clear signal", details "0 = normal, 1 = RWM clear (RWM initialization) occurred", bit 3's name "Fraud detection signal 1", details "urgency: weak 0 = normal, 1 = abnormality occurred", bit 4's name "Fraud detection signal 2", details "urgency: medium 0 = normal, 1 = abnormality occurred", bit 5's name "Fraud detection signal 3", details "urgency: strong 0 = normal, 1 = abnormality occurred", bit 6's name "acquisition limit device operating signal", details "0 = not operating, 1 = operating", and bit 7's name "unused", details "fixed at 0".

Figure 42 is a diagram explaining the details of the "game information" mentioned above.

The "game information" is made up of two bytes, "type information (1 byte)" and "count information (1 byte)". Furthermore, the "type information (1 byte)" is made up of "data type (Bit 4 to Bit 7)" and "data number (Bit 0 to Bit 3)".

For example, "Data type (Bit 4 to Bit 7)" is Bit 4 to Bit 7 "0000" with the type name "Unused" and the content "-", Bit 4 to Bit 7 "0001" with the type name "Winning at the starting gate" and the content "Notification that a win has been made at the starting gate", Bit 4 to Bit 7 "0010" with the type name "Winning at the large winning gate due to the operation of a special electric device" and the content "Notification that a win has been made at the large winning gate", Bit 4 to Bit 7 "0011" with the type name "Winning at the winning gate" and the content "Winning gate Bit 4 to Bit 7 “0100” are the type name “All start gates win” and the content “Notification of passing through the start gate or normal gate related to the game”. Bit 4 to Bit 7 “0101”, “0110”, “0111”, and “1000” are the type name “Unused” and the content “-”. Bit 4 to Bit 7 “1001” are the type name “Number of times the pattern has been determined” and the content “Notification of the number of times the pattern related to the game has changed”. Bit 4 to Bit 7 “1010” are the type name “Large The bit number is "Number of hits" and the content is "Notification that the consecutive operation device of the accessory has been activated", Bit 4 to Bit 7 "1011" are the type name "Unused" and the content is "-", Bit 4 to Bit 7 "1100" are the type name "Number of hits (Number of times the large prize opening is opened)" and the content is "Notification of the opening of the large prize opening when the consecutive operation device of the accessory has not been activated, in case the number of times the large prize opening is opened at the time of a small win is to be set as the starting number" (see the small win game for the first round of "Big Win Game 3 (4 rounds)" in FIG. 36). , Bits 4 to 7 "1101" are type name "Passing through a specific area" and content "Notification of passing through a specific area" (see "Specific area" in Figure 36), Bits 4 to 7 "1110" are type name "External terminal board pulse output" and content "Instruction to output a pulse from the dedicated unit (Hall control output section 173)", and Bits 4 to 7 "1111" are type name "Performance information status notification" and content "Notification of the status required to calculate performance information".

If the "Data Type (Bit 4 to Bit 7)" is "Winning at Start Gate", the "Data Number (Bit 0 to Bit 3)" transmits the content (start gate number) of Bit 0 to Bit 3 "0001" (winning at start gate 1), "0010" (winning at start gate 2), or "0011" (winning at start gate 3) (other than the above are unused). For example, if a game ball wins at the first start gate 45, type information (1 byte) consisting of "Data Type (Bit 4 to Bit 7)" being "0001" and "Data Number (Bit 0 to Bit 3)" being "0001" is transmitted.

If the "Data Type (Bits 4 to 7)" is "Winning at the large prize slot due to the operation of a special electric device," then either Bit 0 to Bit 3 "0001" (winning at large prize slot 1) or "0010" (winning at large prize slot 2) is transmitted as the content (large prize slot number) (other than the above are unused). For example, if a game ball wins at large prize slot 50, type information (1 byte) consisting of "Data Type (Bits 4 to 7)" as "0010" and "Data Number (Bits 0 to 3)" as "0001" is transmitted.

If the "Data Type (Bits 4 to 7)" is "Winning at a Winning Gate", then the content (winning gate number) is transmitted as one of the following bits 0 to 3: "0001" (winning at winning gate 1), "0010" (winning at winning gate 2), ... "1111" (winning at winning gate 15) ("0000" is unused). For example, if a game ball wins at the general winning gate 43 located at the bottom right of the decorative frame 40, type information (1 byte) is transmitted with "Data Type (Bits 4 to 7)" set to "0011" and "Data Number (Bits 0 to 3)" set to "0001".

If the "Data Type (Bit 4 to Bit 7)" is "Winning at all start gates", then the contents of Bit 0 to Bit 3 "0001" (winning or passing) are transmitted (others are unused). For example, if the game ball wins at the first start gate 45, type information (1 byte) with "Data Type (Bit 4 to Bit 7)" being "0100" and "Data Number (Bit 0 to Bit 3)" being "0001" is transmitted, and if the game ball passes through the normal gate 44, type information (1 byte) with "Data Type (Bit 4 to Bit 7)" being "0100" and "Data Number (Bit 0 to Bit 3)" being "0001" is transmitted.

If "Data type (Bit 4 to Bit 7)" is "Number of times a pattern has been confirmed," then Bit 0 to Bit 3 "0001" (the number of times the patterns related to the game (special patterns, normal patterns) have been confirmed) is transmitted as the content (the rest are unused). For example, if the first special pattern is stopped and displayed, type information (1 byte) consisting of "Data type (Bit 4 to Bit 7)" being "1001" and "Data number (Bit 0 to Bit 3)" being "0001" is transmitted, and similar type information is transmitted when the second special pattern is stopped and displayed. Similarly, similar type information is transmitted when a normal pattern is stopped and displayed.

If the "Data Type (Bit 4 to Bit 7)" is "Number of jackpots", Bit 0 to Bit 3 "0001" (the continuous operation device for the special feature is activated) is transmitted as the content (others are unused). For example, when the first jackpot (see Figure 33) is executed, type information (1 byte) consisting of "Data Type (Bit 4 to Bit 7)" as "1010" and "Data Number (Bit 0 to Bit 3)" as "0001" is transmitted.

If the "Data Type (Bit 4 to Bit 7)" is the "Number of Features (Number of Times the Big Win Gate is Opened)", then Bit 0 to Bit 3 "0001" (Feature 1) is transmitted as the content (the rest are unused). For example, if the "Big Win Game 3" described in Figure 36 is executed, type information (1 byte) consisting of "Data Type (Bit 4 to Bit 7)" being "1100" and "Data Number (Bit 0 to Bit 3)" being "0001" is transmitted.

If the "Data Type (Bit 4 to Bit 7)" is "Passing through a specific area", then Bit 0 to Bit 3 "0001" (specific area 1) is transmitted as the content (the rest are unused). For example, when the "Big Win Game 3" described in FIG. 36 is executed and the game ball passes through the specific area, type information (1 byte) with "Data Type (Bit 4 to Bit 7)" being "1101" and "Data Number (Bit 0 to Bit 3)" being "0001" is transmitted.

In addition, to touch upon the count information in the case of "passing through a specific area," as shown in FIG. 43, if Bit 4 to Bit 7 are "unused" and "fixed to 0," and Bit 0 to Bit 3 are "0001," it is transmitted that "the number of times the specific area has been passed is 1" (the rest are unused). In other words, as shown in Example 1 of FIG. 43, when the game ball passes through specific area 1 once, game information "0xD101" is transmitted, which is broken down into type information (1 byte) with "data type (Bit 4 to Bit 7)" being "1101" and "data number (Bit 0 to Bit 3)" being "0001," and count information (1 byte) with "unused (Bit 4 to Bit 7)" being "0000" and "number of passes (Bit 0 to Bit 3)" being "0001" (1 time).

If the "data type (Bit 4 to Bit 7)" is "external terminal board pulse output", the contents indicate that a pulse is output from the dedicated unit (hall control output section 173).
If the "data type (Bit 4 to Bit 7)" is a "performance information status notification", the status (fixed to 1) required for calculating the performance information is transmitted as the content (the others are unused).

Note that in the case of "performance information status notification," as shown in FIG. 43, Bit 4 to Bit 7 are "fixed to 0," Bit 0 is for indicating "base," and Bit 0 indicates "low base" when it is "0" (e.g., low probability non-time-saving game state), and Bit 0 indicates "high base" when it is "1" (e.g., low probability time-saving game state, high probability time-saving game state). Bit 1 is for indicating "jackpot," and Bit 0 indicates "normal" when it is "0" (e.g., low probability non-time-saving game state), and Bit 1 indicates "jackpot." Bit 2 is for indicating "high probability," and Bit 0 indicates "low probability" when it is "0" (e.g., low probability non-time-saving game state, low probability time-saving game state), and Bit 1 indicates "high probability" when it is "1" (e.g., high probability time-saving game state). Bit 3 is unused.

As shown in Example 2 of Figure 43, when the status changes to high base, the game information "0xF101" is sent, which is broken down into type information (1 byte) with "Data type (Bits 4 to 7)" being "1111" and "Data number (Bits 0 to 3)" being "0001", and count information (1 byte) with "Unused (Bits 4 to 7)" being "0000" and "Status flag" Bit 0 being "1" (Bits 1 to 3 are "0").

The "HC/fraud monitoring information response" in Figure 43 is a response from the frame control board 120 to the main control board 110 after the main control board 110 sends "HC/fraud monitoring information" to the frame control board 120. No. 1 has the data name "Message length" and the content "0x05". No. 2 has the data name "Command" and the content "0x12". No. 3 has the data name "Communication number" and the content "Communication sequence number (0-255)". No. 4 has the data name "HC/fraud monitoring information receipt result" and the content "0x00" indicates that "receipt OK". No. 5 has the data name "Checksum" and the content "Addition result from message length to data section". In addition, the main control board 110 will not enter a playable state unless it receives the content "0x00" (received OK) as the "HC/fraud monitoring information receipt result" from the frame control board 120. This will be explained in more detail later using a flowchart.

Next, a list of functions and implementation areas of the gaming machine will be described with reference to Figures 44 and 45. The "usage area" corresponds to the "game area" described in Figures 28 and 29, and the "outside the use area" corresponds to the "information area" described in Figures 28 and 29.
In the figure, "◎" indicates a mounting area, "◯" indicates a mountable area, and "×" indicates that mounting is not possible.

For No. 1 "Function to control game execution", the "Use area" of the "Main control unit 110m" is "◎", and the "Outside use area" of the "Main control unit 110m", "Use area" of the "Frame control unit 120m", and "Outside use area" are "X". In this embodiment, the function is executed in the "Use area" of the "Main control unit 110m", and the "Function to control game execution" corresponds to, for example, the process executed in the "Main control board timer interrupt process" described below.

For No. 2 "control game state", the "usage area" of the "main control unit 110m" is "◎", and the "outside the use area" of the "main control unit 110m", the "use area" of the "frame control unit 120m", and "outside the use area" are "×". In this embodiment, the function is executed in the "use area" of the "main control unit 110m", and "control game state" corresponds to the function of controlling the above-mentioned "normal game state", "time-saving game state", and "high probability game state".

For No. 3 "Control related to launch", the "Use area" of the "Main control unit 110m" is "◎", and the "Outside the use area" of the "Main control unit 110m", "Use area" of the "Frame control unit 120m", and "Outside the use area" are "X". In this embodiment, the function is executed in the "Use area" of the "Main control unit 110m", and "Control related to launch" corresponds to the control for launching the game ball into the game area 5a.

For No. 4 "Generation of random numbers for internal lottery", the "usage area" of the "main control unit 110m" is "◎", and the "outside the use area" of the "main control unit 110m", "use area" of the "frame control unit 120m", and "outside the use area" are "×". In this embodiment, the function is executed in the "use area" of the "main control unit 110m", and "generation of random numbers for internal lottery" corresponds to the generation of random numbers used in each process executed in the "main control board timer interrupt process" described below.

For No. 5 "Detection of winning game balls and payout of prize balls", the "Use area" of the "Main control unit 110m" is "◎", and the "Outside use area" of the "Main control unit 110m", "Use area" of the "Frame control unit 120m", and "Outside use area" are "X". In this embodiment, the function is executed in the "Use area" of the "Main control unit 110m", and "Detection of winning game balls and payout of prize balls" corresponds to steps S200 and S500 of the "Main control board timer interrupt processing" described below.

For No. 6 "Control related to special symbol display device", the "Use area" of the "Main control unit 110m" is "◎", and the "Outside use area" of the "Main control unit 110m", "Use area" of the "Frame control unit 120m", and "Outside use area" are "X". In this embodiment, the function is executed in the "Use area" of the "Main control unit 110m", and "Control related to special symbol display device" corresponds to steps S700 and S750 of the "Main control board timer interrupt processing" described below.

For No. 7 "Control related to special electric props," the "Use area" of the "Main control unit 110m" is "◎," and the "Outside the use area" of the "Main control unit 110m," "Use area" of the "Frame control unit 120m," and "Outside the use area" are "×." In this embodiment, the function is executed in the "Use area" of the "Main control unit 110m," and "Control related to special electric props" corresponds to step S340 of the "Special chart special electric control process" described below.

For No. 8 "Control related to normal pattern display device", the "Use area" of the "Main control unit 110m" is "◎", and the "Outside use area" of the "Main control unit 110m", "Use area" of the "Frame control unit 120m", and "Outside use area" are "X". In this embodiment, the function is executed in the "Use area" of the "Main control unit 110m", and "Control related to normal pattern display device" corresponds to steps S700 and S750 of the "Main control board timer interrupt processing" described below.

For No. 9 "Control related to normal electric props," the "Use area" of the "Main control unit 110m" is "◎," and the "Outside use area" of the "Main control unit 110m," "Use area" of the "Frame control unit 120m," and "Outside use area" are "X." In this embodiment, the function is executed in the "Use area" of the "Main control unit 110m," and "Control related to normal electric props" corresponds to step S250 of the "Input control process" described below.

For No. 10 "Other control related to game execution," the "Use area" of the "Main control unit 110m" is "◎," and the "Outside use area" of the "Main control unit 110m," "Use area" of the "Frame control unit 120m," and "Outside use area" are "×." In this embodiment, the function is executed in the "Use area" of the "Main control unit 110m."

For No. 11 "Function to control the game ball count display device," the "Use area" of the "Frame control unit 120m" is "◎," and the "Use area" of the "Main control unit 110m," "Outside the use area," and "Outside the use area" of the "Frame control unit 120m" are "X." Note that in this embodiment, the function is executed in the "Use area" of the "Frame control unit 120m," and the "Function to control the game ball count display device" corresponds to steps W650 and W700 of the "Frame control board timer interrupt processing" described below.

For No. 12 "electromagnetically record the number of game balls," the "usage area" of the "frame control unit 120m" is "◎," and the "usage area" of the "main control unit 110m," "outside the use area," and "outside the use area" of the "frame control unit 120m" are "x." In this embodiment, the function is executed in the "use area" of the "frame control unit 120m," and "electromagnetically record the number of game balls" corresponds to the "frame control board game ball number update process" described below.

For No. 13 "Display the number of game balls", the "Use area" of the "Frame control unit 120m" is "◎", and the "Use area" of the "Main control unit 110m", "Outside the use area", and "Outside the use area" of the "Frame control unit 120m" are "X". In this embodiment, the function is executed in the "Use area" of the "Frame control unit 120m", and "Display the number of game balls" corresponds to steps W650 and W700 of the "Frame control board timer interrupt processing" described below.

For No. 14 "Add the number of loaned game balls", the "Use area" of the "Frame control unit 120m" is "◎", and the "Use area" of the "Main control unit 110m", "Outside the use area", and "Outside the use area" of the "Frame control unit 120m" are "×". In this embodiment, the function is executed in the "Use area" of the "Frame control unit 120m", and "Add the number of loaned game balls" corresponds to the "Frame control board game ball loan process" described below.

For No. 15 "Subtract the number of counted game balls", the "Use area" of the "Frame control unit 120m" is "◎", and the "Use area" of the "Main control unit 110m", "Outside the use area", and "Outside the use area" of the "Frame control unit 120m" are "×". In this embodiment, the function is executed in the "Use area" of the "Frame control unit 120m", and "Subtract the number of counted game balls" corresponds to the "Frame control board game ball counting process" described below.

For No. 16 "Subtract the number of launched game balls", the "Use area" of the "Frame control unit 120m" is "◎", and the "Use area" of the "Main control unit 110m", "Outside the use area", and "Outside the use area" of the "Frame control unit 120m" are "×". In this embodiment, the function is executed in the "Use area" of the "Frame control unit 120m", and "Subtract the number of launched game balls" corresponds to steps W301 and W302 of the "Frame control board game ball number update process" described below.

Regarding No. 17 "Add the number of game balls (foul balls) that were not shot onto the board and returned," the "Use area" of the "Frame control unit 120m" is "◎," and the "Use area" of the "Main control unit 110m," "Outside the use area," and "Outside the use area" of the "Frame control unit 120m" are "×." In this embodiment, the function is executed in the "Use area" of the "Frame control unit 120m," and "Add the number of game balls (foul balls) that were not shot onto the board and returned" corresponds to steps W303 and W304 of the "Frame control board game ball number update process" described below.

For No. 18 "Add the number of paid-out game balls", the "Use area" of the "Frame control unit 120m" is "◎", and the "Use area" of the "Main control unit 110m", "Outside the use area", and "Outside the use area" of the "Frame control unit 120m" are "×". In this embodiment, the function is executed in the "Use area" of the "Frame control unit 120m", and "Add the number of paid-out game balls" corresponds to steps W305 to W311 of the "Frame control board game ball number update process" described below.

Regarding No. 19 "Initialize the number of game balls with the game ball count clear button", the "usage area" of the "frame control unit 120m" is "◎", and the "usage area" of the "main control unit 110m", "outside the use area", and "outside the use area" of the "frame control unit 120m" are "x". In this embodiment, the function is executed in the "use area" of the "frame control unit 120m", and "initialize the number of game balls with the game ball count clear button" corresponds to the process in which the frame control unit 120m clears the number of game balls when an input is made from the game ball count clear switch 121 when power is supplied.

For No. 20 "Function to control communication with game ball etc. lending devices," the "usage area" of the "frame control unit 120m" is "◎," and the "usage area" of the "main control unit 110m," "outside the use area," and "outside the use area" of the "frame control unit 120m" are "x." In this embodiment, the function is executed in the "usage area" of the "frame control unit 120m," and the "function to control communication with game ball etc. lending devices" corresponds to control related to communication with the dedicated unit 170.

For No. 21 "VL power supply monitoring," the "usage area" of the "frame control unit 120m" is "○," and the "usage area" of the "main control unit 110m," "outside the use area," and "outside the use area" of the "frame control unit 120m" are "×." In this embodiment, the function is executed in the "usage area" of the "frame control unit 120m," and "VL power supply monitoring" corresponds to the power supply for connection confirmation input from the dedicated unit 170.

For No. 22 "Communication control, communication timer management", the "usage area" of the "frame control unit 120m" is "◎", and the "usage area" of the "main control unit 110m", "outside the use area", and "outside the use area" of the "frame control unit 120m" are "x". In this embodiment, the function is executed in the "usage area" of the "frame control unit 120m", and "communication control, communication timer management" corresponds to time management related to communication with the dedicated unit 170.

No. 23 For the generation and transmission of the "gaming machine information notification (gaming machine performance information)" message, the "usage area" of the "frame control unit 120m" is "◎", and the "usage area" of the "main control unit 110m", "outside the use area", and "outside the use area" of the "frame control unit 120m" are "x". In this embodiment, the function is executed in the "usage area" of the "frame control unit 120m", and the generation and transmission of the "gaming machine information notification (gaming machine performance information)" message corresponds to the processing of step W507 of the "frame control board gaming machine information notification processing" described below.

No. 24 For the generation and transmission of the "gaming machine information notification (gaming machine installation information)" message, the "usage area" of the "frame control unit 120m" is "◎", and the "usage area" of the "main control unit 110m", "outside the use area", and "outside the use area" of the "frame control unit 120m" are "x". In this embodiment, the function is executed in the "usage area" of the "frame control unit 120m", and the generation and transmission of the "gaming machine information notification (gaming machine installation information)" message corresponds to the processing of steps W505 and W509 of the "frame control board gaming machine information notification processing" described below.

No. 25 For the generation and transmission of the "Game Machine Information Notification (HC/Fraud Monitoring Information)" message, the "Use Area" of the "Frame Control Unit 120m" is "◎", and the "Use Area" of the "Main Control Unit 110m", "Outside the Use Area", and "Outside the Use Area" of the "Frame Control Unit 120m" are "X". In this embodiment, the function is executed in the "Use Area" of the "Frame Control Unit 120m", and the generation and transmission of the "Game Machine Information Notification (HC/Fraud Monitoring Information)" message corresponds to the processing of step W513 of the "Frame Control Board Game Machine Information Notification Processing" described below.

For No. 26 "Counting notification message generation and transmission," the "Use area" of the "Frame control unit 120m" is "◎," and the "Use area" of the "Main control unit 110m," "Outside the use area," and "Outside the use area" of the "Frame control unit 120m" are "×." In this embodiment, the function is executed in the "Use area" of the "Frame control unit 120m," and "Counting notification message generation and transmission" corresponds to step W567 of the "Frame control board game ball counting process" described below.

For No. 27 "Receive loan notification", the "Use area" of the "Frame control unit 120m" is "◎", and the "Use area" of the "Main control unit 110m", "Outside the use area", and "Outside the use area" of the "Frame control unit 120m" are "X". In this embodiment, the function is executed in the "Use area" of the "Frame control unit 120m", and "Receive loan notification" corresponds to step W601 of the "Frame control board game ball loan processing" described below.

For No. 28 "Generating and sending a response message of loan receipt result", the "usage area" of the "frame control unit 120m" is "◎", and the "usage area" of the "main control unit 110m", "outside the use area", and "outside the use area" of the "frame control unit 120m" are "×". In this embodiment, the function is executed in the "usage area" of the "frame control unit 120m", and "generating and sending a response message of loan receipt result" corresponds to steps W609 and W610 of the "frame control board game ball loan processing" described below.

For No. 29 "Main control unit-frame control unit communication control", the "usage area" of the "main control unit 110m" and the "usage area" of the "frame control unit 120m" are marked with "◎", while the "outside of the use area" of the "main control unit 110m" and the "outside of the use area" of the "frame control unit 120m" are marked with "x". In this embodiment, the function is executed in the "use area" of the "main control unit 110m" and the "use area" of the "frame control unit 120m", and corresponds to all processing related to communication between the main control unit 110m and the frame control unit 120m (for example, "game machine installation information notification" and "game machine installation information response" in "main control board main processing").

For No. 30 "Compilation of gaming machine performance information," the "outside the use area" of the "frame control unit 120m" is "◎," and the "use area" of the "main control unit 110m," "outside the use area," and "use area" of the "frame control unit 120m" are "x." In this embodiment, the function is executed outside the use area of the "frame control unit 120m," and "compilation of gaming machine performance information" corresponds to the "frame control board gaming machine performance information calculation process" described below.

In addition, No. 30 to No. 38 are data for one day from when the gaming machine 1 is turned on to when it is turned off, and the data is collected when the gaming machine 1 is turned on and cleared when it is turned off. In other words, they are different from the values calculated in the "frame control board display performance information calculation process" described later.
Furthermore, the aggregated data is not displayed on a display device (e.g., the frame control display device 125) or the like, but is transmitted to the gaming machine information center and shared and managed with the Nikkoso.

For No. 31 "Total number of balls fired," the "outside the use area" of the "frame control unit 120m" is "◎," and the "use area" of the "main control unit 110m," "outside the use area," and "use area" of the "frame control unit 120m" are "x." In this embodiment, the function is executed outside the use area of the "frame control unit 120m," and the "total number of balls fired" corresponds to step W451 of the "frame control board gaming machine performance information calculation process" described below.

For No. 32 "Total number of acquired game balls", the "outside the use area" of the "frame control unit 120m" is "◎", and the "use area" of the "main control unit 110m", "outside the use area", and "use area" of the "frame control unit 120m" are "x". In this embodiment, the function is executed outside the use area of the "frame control unit 120m", and the "total number of acquired game balls" corresponds to step W452 of the "frame control board gaming machine performance information calculation process" described below.

For No. 33 "Ball payout rate", the "outside the use area" of the "frame control unit 120m" is "◎", and the "use area" of the "main control unit 110m", "outside the use area", and "use area" of the "frame control unit 120m" are "x". In this embodiment, the function is executed outside the use area of the "frame control unit 120m", and the "ball payout rate" corresponds to step W453 of the "frame control board gaming machine performance information calculation process" described below.

For No. 34 "Number of game balls acquired per minute (low base)," the "outside the use area" of the "frame control unit 120m" is "◎," and the "use area" of the "main control unit 110m," "outside the use area," and "use area" of the "frame control unit 120m" are "x." In this embodiment, the function is executed outside the "use area" of the "frame control unit 120m," and the "number of game balls acquired per minute (low base)" corresponds to step W454 of the "frame control board gaming machine performance information calculation process" described below.

For No. 35 "Gem Ratio", the "outside the use area" of the "frame control unit 120m" is "◎", and the "use area" of the "main control unit 110m", "outside the use area", and "use area" of the "frame control unit 120m" are "x". In this embodiment, the function is executed outside the use area of the "frame control unit 120m", and the "gem ratio" corresponds to step W455 of the "frame control board gaming machine performance information calculation process" described below.

For No. 36 "Continuous feature ratio", the "outside the use area" of the "frame control unit 120m" is "◎", and the "use area" of the "main control unit 110m", "outside the use area", and "use area" of the "frame control unit 120m" are "x". In this embodiment, the function is executed outside the use area of the "frame control unit 120m", and the "continuous feature ratio" corresponds to step W456 of the "frame control board gaming machine performance information calculation process" described below.

For No. 37 "Number of times the continuous operation device of the gadget has been operated," the "outside the use area" of the "frame control unit 120m" is "◎," and the "use area" of the "main control unit 110m," "outside the use area," and "use area" of the "frame control unit 120m" are "x." In this embodiment, the function is executed outside the "use area" of the "frame control unit 120m," and the "number of times the continuous operation device of the gadget has been operated" corresponds to step W457 of the "frame control board gaming machine performance information calculation process" described below.

For No. 38 "Maximum ball output", the "outside the use area" of the "frame control unit 120m" is "◎", and the "use area" of the "main control unit 110m", "outside the use area", and "use area" of the "frame control unit 120m" are "×". In this embodiment, the function is executed outside the use area of the "frame control unit 120m", and "maximum ball output" corresponds to step W458 of the "frame control board gaming machine performance information calculation process" described below.

For No. 39 "Generation of gaming machine installation information," the "Use area" and "Outside the use area" of the "Main control unit 110m" and the "Use area" and "Outside the use area" of the "Frame control unit 120m" are all marked with "○." In this embodiment, the function is executed in the "Use area" of the "Main control unit 110m" and the "Use area" of the "Frame control unit 120m." Specifically, the following information No. 40 to No. 42 is generated in the "Use area" of the "Main control unit 110m," and the following information No. 43 to No. 45 is generated in the "Use area" of the "Frame control unit 120m," and the "Frame control unit 120m" transmits a total of six pieces of information, including the information No. 40 to No. 42 received from the "Main control unit 110m" and the information No. 43 to No. 45 generated by itself, to the U board 171 (ultimately to the gaming machine information center). In other words, "generation of gaming machine installation information" corresponds to step S5 of the "Main Control Board Main Processing" described below, and steps W505 and W509 of the "Frame Control Board Gaming Machine Information Notification Processing" described below.

For No. 40 "Main control chip ID number", the "Use area" and "Outside use area" of the "Main control unit 110m" are marked with "○", and the "Use area" and "Outside use area" of the "Frame control unit 120m" are marked with "X (excluded)". In this embodiment, the function is executed in the "Use area" of the "Main control unit 110m". The "Main control chip ID number" will be described later in FIG. 39.

For No. 41 "Main control chip manufacturer code", the "Use area" and "Outside use area" of the "Main control unit 110m" are marked with "○", and the "Use area" and "Outside use area" of the "Frame control unit 120m" are marked with "X (excluded)". In this embodiment, the function is executed in the "Use area" of the "Main control unit 110m". The "Main control chip manufacturer code" will be described later in FIG. 39.

For No. 42 "Main control chip product code", the "Use area" and "Outside use area" of the "Main control unit 110m" are marked with "○", and the "Use area" and "Outside use area" of the "Frame control unit 120m" are marked with "X (excluded)". In this embodiment, the function is executed in the "Use area" of the "Main control unit 110m". The "Main control chip product code" will be described later in FIG. 39.

For No. 43 "Frame control chip ID number", the "Use area" and "Outside use area" of the "Frame control unit 120m" are marked with "○", while the "Use area" and "Outside use area" of the "Main control unit 110m" are marked with "X (excluded)". In this embodiment, the function is executed in the "Use area" of the "Frame control unit 120m". The "Frame control chip ID number" will be described later in FIG. 71.

For No. 44 "Frame control chip manufacturer code", the "area of use" and "outside area of use" of the "frame control unit 120m" are marked with "○", while the "area of use" and "outside area of use" of the "main control unit 110m" are marked with "× (excluded)". In this embodiment, the function is executed in the "area of use" of the "frame control unit 120m". The "frame control chip manufacturer code" will be described later in FIG. 71.

For No. 45 "Frame control chip product code", the "Use area" and "Outside use area" of the "Frame control unit 120m" are marked with "○", while the "Use area" and "Outside use area" of the "Main control unit 110m" are marked with "X (excluded)". In this embodiment, the function is executed in the "Use area" of the "Frame control unit 120m". The "Frame control chip product code" will be described later in FIG. 71.

For No. 46 "Generation of HC/fraud monitoring information," the "Use area" and "Outside use area" of the "Main control unit 110m" and the "Use area" and "Outside use area" of the "Frame control unit 120m" are all marked "○." In this embodiment, the "Use area" of the "Main control unit 110m" and the "Use area" of the "Frame control unit 120m" are used. This will be explained in detail below.

No. 47 "Number of game balls": "Use area" of "Main control unit 110m" and "Use area" of "Frame control unit 120m" are "○", and "Outside of use area" of "Main control unit 110m" and "Outside of use area" of "Frame control unit 120m" are "×". "Number of game balls" refers to the "balls in possession" held by the player, and in this embodiment, the function is executed in the "Use area" of "Frame control unit 120m". For example, this corresponds to the "Frame control board game ball number update process" described later.
On the other hand, in this embodiment, the function is not executed in the "use area" of the "main control unit 110m" that can be implemented. Of course, the function may be executed in the "use area" of the "main control unit 110m", but since this is realized by transmitting information related to the "number of game balls" from the "frame control unit 120m" to the "main control unit 110m", in consideration of the control load, it can be said that it is more efficient to execute the function in the "use area" of the "frame control unit 120m".

No. 48 "Number of shot balls": "Use area" of "Main control unit 110m" and "Use area" of "Frame control unit 120m" are "○", and "Outside use area" of "Main control unit 110m" and "Outside use area" of "Frame control unit 120m" are "×". "Number of shot balls" refers to the number of game balls shot by the player, and in this embodiment, the function is executed in the "Use area" of "Frame control unit 120m". For example, this corresponds to the "Frame control board game ball number update process" described later.
On the other hand, in this embodiment, the function is not executed in the "use area" of the "main control unit 110m" that can be implemented. Of course, the function may be executed in the "use area" of the "main control unit 110m", but since this is realized by transmitting information related to the "number of shot balls" from the "frame control unit 120m" to the "main control unit 110m", in consideration of the control load, it can be said that it is more efficient to execute the function in the "use area" of the "frame control unit 120m".

No. 49 "Total number of winning balls": "Use area" of "Main control unit 110m" and "Use area" of "Frame control unit 120m" are "○", and "Outside of use area" of "Main control unit 110m" and "Outside of use area" of "Frame control unit 120m" are "×". "Total number of winning balls" refers to the total number of winning balls paid out to the player, and in this embodiment, the function is executed in the "Use area" of "Frame control unit 120m". For example, this corresponds to the "Frame control board game ball number update process" described later.
On the other hand, in this embodiment, the function is not executed in the "use area" of the "main control unit 110m" that can be implemented. Of course, the function may be executed in the "use area" of the "main control unit 110m", but since this is realized by sending information related to the "total number of winning balls" from the "frame control unit 120m" to the "main control unit 110m", in consideration of the control load, it can be said that it is more efficient to execute the function in the "use area" of the "frame control unit 120m".

For No. 50 "Main control state 1" (see FIG. 40), the "Use area" of the "Main control unit 110m" is "○", and the "Outside use area" of the "Main control unit 110m", "Use area" of the "Frame control unit 120m", and "Outside use area" are "X". In this embodiment, the relevant function (the process of turning each bit of the main control state 1 ON/OFF, and the process related to the message generation/transmission of the main control state 1) is executed in the "Use area" of the "Main control unit 110m".

For No. 51 "Main control state 2", the "Use area" of the "Main control unit 110m" is "○", and the "Outside the use area" of the "Main control unit 110m", "Use area" of the "Frame control unit 120m", and "Outside the use area" are "X". In this embodiment, the relevant function (the process of turning each bit of the main control state 2 ON/OFF, and the process related to the message generation/transmission of the main control state 2) is executed in the "Use area" of the "Main control unit 110m".

For No. 52 "Game Machine Error State", the "Use Area" and "Outside the Use Area" of the "Main Control Unit 110m" and the "Use Area" and "Outside the Use Area" of the "Frame Control Unit 120m" are all marked with "○". The "Game Machine Error State" corresponds to, for example, a communication abnormality between the main control board 110 and the frame control board 120, and a communication abnormality between the frame control board 120 and the dedicated unit 170. In this embodiment, the above-mentioned communication abnormality is monitored in the "Use Area" of the "Main Control Unit 110m" and the "Use Area" of the "Frame Control Unit 120m", and the above-mentioned communication abnormality is not monitored in the "Outside the Use Area" of the "Main Control Unit 110m" and the "Outside the Use Area" of the "Frame Control Unit 120m", but the above-mentioned communication abnormality may be monitored in the "Outside the Use Area" of the "Main Control Unit 110m" and the "Outside the Use Area" of the "Frame Control Unit 120m".

For No. 53 "Fraud Detection State 1", the "Use Area" and "Outside the Use Area" of the "Main Control Unit 110m" are marked with "○", and the "Use Area" and "Outside the Use Area" of the "Frame Control Unit 120m" are marked with "X". In this embodiment, for example, in the "Fraud Detection State 1" (FIG. 40), the "Change Settings", "Check Settings", and "RWM Clear" processes of Bit 0 to Bit 2 are executed in the "Use Area" of the "Main Control Unit 110m", and the "Fraud Detection" processes of Bit 3 to Bit 5 and the "Acquisition Limit Device" of Bit 6 (counting game balls, etc.) are executed in the "Outside the Use Area" of the "Main Control Unit 110m". In addition, the 8-bit telegram generation of "Fraud Detection State 1" is executed in the "Use Area" of the "Main Control Unit 110m". This allows the "Use Area" and "Outside the Use Area" of the "Main Control Unit 110m" to be used efficiently, preventing processing from concentrating on just one area.

Note that the use of the "use area" and "outside the use area" for "fraud detection state 1" is merely an example and may be changed as appropriate. For example, the process executed in the "use area" may be executed "outside the use area", and the process executed "outside the use area" may be executed in the "use area". In addition, all may be executed in the "use area", or all may be executed "outside the use area". Also, execution may be performed in the "use area" and "outside the use area" of the "frame control unit 120m". For example, the process of the "acquisition limit device" (counting game balls, etc.) may be executed in the "use area" and "outside the use area" of the "frame control unit 120m".

For No. 54 "Fraud Detection State 2 (Frame Control)", the "Use Area" and "Outside the Use Area" of the "Frame Control Unit 120m" are marked with "○", and the "Use Area" and "Outside the Use Area" of the "Main Control Unit 110m" are marked with "X". In this embodiment, for example, in the "Fraud Detection State 2" (see FIG. 72), the processing of "Glass Frame Open", "Inner Frame Open", and "Fraud Radio Wave Detection" of Bit 0 to Bit 2, and the processing of "Winning Ball Count Abnormal Notification" and "Fired Ball Count Abnormal Notification" of Bit 4 to Bit 5 are executed in the "Use Area" of the "Frame Control Unit 120m", and the processing of "Game Ball Count Clear Detection" of Bit 3 is executed in the "Use Area" of the "Frame Control Unit 120m". In addition, the generation of the 8-bit telegram of "Fraud Detection State 2" is executed in the "Use Area" of the "Frame Control Unit 120m". In addition, message generation outside the "usage area" of the "frame control unit 120m" is realized, for example, by a program in the "outside the use area" referencing the RWM of the "usage area" and generating message outside the "use area". This allows the "use area" and "outside the use area" of the "frame control unit 120m" to be used efficiently, preventing processing from concentrating in just one area.

Note that the use of "area of use" and "outside area of use" for "fraud detection status 2" is merely an example and may be changed as appropriate. For example, a process executed in the "area of use" may be executed "outside area of use", and a process executed "outside area of use" may be executed in the "area of use". In addition, all processes may be executed in the "area of use", or all processes may be executed "outside area of use".

For No. 55 "Fraud Detection State 3 (Frame Control)", the "Use Area" and "Outside the Use Area" of the "Frame Control Unit 120m" are marked with "○", and the "Use Area" and "Outside the Use Area" of the "Main Control Unit 110m" are marked with "X". In this embodiment, for example, in "Fraud Detection State 3" (see FIG. 72), the "Small Ball Detection" and "Iron Ball Detection" functions of Bit 0 to Bit 1 are executed outside the use area of the "Frame Control Unit 120m", and the generation of the 8-bit telegram of "Fraud Detection State 3" is executed outside the use area of the "Frame Control Unit 120m". This allows the "Use Area" and "Outside the Use Area" of the "Frame Control Unit 120m" to be used efficiently, preventing processing from concentrating on just one area.

Note that the use of "area of use" and "outside area of use" for "fraud detection state 3" is merely an example and may be changed as appropriate. For example, a process executed in the "area of use" may be executed "outside area of use", and a process executed "outside area of use" may be executed in the "area of use". In addition, all processes may be executed in the "area of use", or all processes may be executed "outside area of use".

For No. 56 "Function to control the setting change device", the "Usage area" of the "Main control unit 110m" is "○", and the "Outside the usage area" of the "Main control unit 110m", "Usage area" of the "Frame control unit 120m", and "Outside the usage area" are "X". In this embodiment, the function is executed in the "Usage area" of the "Main control unit 110m", and the "Function to control the setting change device" corresponds to the "Setting change process" and "Setting confirmation process" described below.

Regarding No. 57 "Function of transmitting information related to the performance to the peripheral board", the "usage area" of the "main control unit 110m" and the "usage area" of the "frame control unit 120m" are "○", and the "outside the use area" of the "main control unit 110m" and the "outside the use area" of the "frame control unit 120m" are "×". In this embodiment, the "use area" of the "main control unit 110m" executes the function of transmitting information to the performance control board 130, and the "use area" of the "frame control unit 120m" executes the function of transmitting information to the performance control board 130. For example, a "special chart variation pattern designation command" is sent from the "main control unit 110m" to the performance control board 130, and the performance control board 130 determines the variation performance pattern (game performance) based on the received "special chart variation pattern designation command". In addition, information regarding the "error" detected by the "main control unit 110m" is sent from the "main control unit 110m" to the performance control board 130, and the performance control board 130 issues a notification corresponding to the received information regarding the "error". Similarly, information regarding the "error" detected by the "frame control unit 120m" is sent from the "frame control unit 120m" to the performance control board 130, and the performance control board 130 issues a notification corresponding to the received information regarding the "error".

For No. 58 "Function of transmitting gaming machine information to peripheral boards," the "usage area" of the "main control unit 110m" and the "usage area" of the "frame control unit 120m" are marked with "○," while the "outside of the use area" of the "main control unit 110m" and the "outside of the use area" of the "frame control unit 120m" are marked with "×." Note that No. 58 is the same as No. 57 described above, so a description will be omitted.

For No. 59 "Fraud monitoring (excluding No. 60, 61)," the "usage area" and "outside the use area" of the "main control unit 110m" are marked with "○," while the "usage area" and "outside the use area" of the "frame control unit 120m" are marked with "×." "Fraud monitoring (excluding No. 60, 61)" corresponds to monitoring so-called "hanging" fraud, for example, where counterfeit wiring or illegal parts are attached to illegally obtain jackpot random numbers, etc. In this embodiment, the monitoring is performed outside the use area of the "main control unit 110m." Note that the monitoring may also be performed in the use area of the "main control unit 110m."

For No. 60 "Monitoring of illegal ball payouts," the "use area" and "outside use area" of the "main control unit 110m" and the "use area" and "outside use area" of the "frame control unit 120m" are all marked "○." In this embodiment, the monitoring is performed in the "use area" and "outside use area" of the "frame control unit 120m." Note that instead of the two-chip configuration of the "main control unit 110m" and the "frame control unit 120m" as in this embodiment, it is also possible to configure the gaming machine 1 with a one-chip configuration of only the "main control unit 110m," for example. In this case, the monitoring can be performed in the "use area" and "outside use area" of the "main control unit 110m."

For No. 61 "Monitoring of fraudulent activity related to the lending of game balls," the "Use area" and "Outside the use area" of the "Main control unit 110m" and the "Use area" and "Outside the use area" of the "Frame control unit 120m" are all marked "○." Note that No. 61 is the same as No. 60 described above, so a description will be omitted.

For No. 62 "Error processing (stop playing)", the "usage area" of the "main control unit 110m" is "○", and the "outside the use area" of the "main control unit 110m", "use area" of the "frame control unit 120m", and "outside the use area" are "×". In this embodiment, the processing is executed in the "use area" of the "main control unit 110m". For example, "error processing (stop playing)" corresponds to the process after the process of step S9 in FIG. 51 is completed, the process of step S10 in FIG. 51 is completed, the process of the unrecoverable error in step S17 in FIG. 52 is completed, the process of step S27 in FIG. 52 is completed, or the process of step S600-6 in FIG. 67 is completed.

For No. 63 "Error handling (notification only)," the "Use area" and "Outside use area" for the "Main control unit 110m" and the "Use area" and "Outside use area" for the "Frame control unit 120m" are all marked "○." Details of "Error handling (notification only)" will be described later in "Error code display priority order" (Figure 99).

For No. 64 "Function to control the display of the performance display monitor," the "usage area," "outside the use area" of the "main control unit 110m," and the "outside the use area" of the "frame control unit 120m" are marked with "○," while the "usage area" of the "frame control unit 120m" is marked with "×." The "function to control the display of the performance display monitor" corresponds to the "frame control board display performance information calculation process" (FIG. 100) described below, and in this embodiment, both the process itself and the process to display on the frame control display 125 are executed "outside the use area" of the "frame control unit 120m."

For No. 65 "Function of generating signals necessary for testing the gaming machine," the "usage area" and "outside the use area" of the "main control unit 110m" and the "usage area" and "outside the use area" of the "frame control unit 120m" are all marked "○." In this embodiment, the "main control unit 110m" executes the function in the "outside the use area," and the "frame control unit 120m" executes the function using both the "usage area" and the "outside the use area."

Note that for No. 1 to No. 65 above, the areas marked with an "x" are not implementable, but the areas marked with an "x" may be implementable (various processes are executed in the areas marked with an "x"). In addition, the process executed in the "usage area" or "outside the use area" of the main control unit 110m may be executed in the "frame control unit 120m," and the process executed in the "usage area" or "outside the use area" of the "frame control unit 120m" may be executed in the "usage area" or "outside the use area" of the main control unit 110m.

(Communication procedure between the main control board and the frame control board that enables play after the gaming machine is started)
Using Fig. 46, we will explain the communication procedure between the main control board 110 and the frame control board 120 that becomes playable after the game machine is started (when the frame control board 110 is not in the ball removal state). Note that the "game machine information" in Fig. 46 corresponds to the "HC/fraud monitoring information" described in Figs. 40 to 43.

First, when the power supply of the gaming machine 1 is turned on, the main control board 110 and the frame control board 120 start to start up, and the frame control board 120 completes its startup before the main control board 110. After that, when the main control board 110 completes its startup within a maximum of 3 minutes, the main control board 110 sends a gaming machine installation information notification (communication number = 0) to the frame control board 120 as the first telegram. Within 10 ms, the frame control board 120 sends a gaming machine installation information response (communication number = 0, receipt result = receipt OK) to the main control board 110 as the second telegram, and the main control board 110 checks the gaming machine installation information receipt result. In this case, since the receipt result = receipt OK, the main control board 110 allows the launch of gaming balls and becomes playable.

Then, 108 ms after the transmission of the first gaming machine installation information notification, the main control board 110 transmits a gaming machine information notification (communication number = 1) to the frame control board 120 as the third telegram. Within 10 ms, the frame control board 120 transmits a gaming machine information response (communication number = 1, receipt result = receipt OK) to the main control board 110 as the fourth telegram, and the main control board 110 confirms the gaming machine installation information receipt result. After that, the communication sequence of transmitting and receiving telegrams in the order of gaming machine information notification and gaming machine information response is repeated at a cycle of 108 ms.

If the frame control board 120 is unable to receive gaming machine installation information within three minutes of startup, it will notify the user of the error by displaying an error code on the frame control display 125 to indicate a communication line abnormality and/or sending an error designation command to the performance control board 130. If the gaming machine installation information notification is successfully received after the communication line abnormality occurs, the error notification will end.

(Communication procedure between the main control board and the frame control board when the gaming machine is not playable after startup)
Using Figure 47, we will explain the communication procedure between the main control board 110 and the frame control board 120 when play is not possible after the gaming machine is started (the case when the frame control board 110 is in a ball-removing state).

First, when the power supply of the gaming machine 1 is turned on, the main control board 110 and the frame control board 120 start to start up, and the frame control board 120 completes its startup before the main control board 110, and the ball removal operation starts and the ball removal state is entered. After that, when the main control board 110 completes its startup within a maximum of 3 minutes, the main control board 110 sends a gaming machine installation information notification (communication number = 0) to the frame control board 120 as the first telegram. Within 10 ms from that, the frame control board 120 sends a gaming machine installation information response (communication number = 0, reception result = ball removal state) to the main control board 110 as the second telegram, and the main control board 110 checks the gaming machine installation information reception result. Here, since the reception result = ball removal state, the main control board 110 allows the launch of gaming balls, but performs infinite loop processing without making the game available for play.

In addition, after the main control board 110 and the frame control board 120 send and receive the gaming machine installation information response indicating the reception result = ball removal state, they do not communicate, and the frame control board 120 continues the ball removal operation until the gaming machine 1 is powered off.

(Communication procedure between the main control board and the frame control board when the setting is changed or the setting is confirmed after the gaming machine is started)
Using Figure 48, we will explain the communication procedure between the main control board 110 and the frame control board 120, which enters a setting change/setting confirmation state after the gaming machine is started (when the frame control board 110 is not in a ball removal state).

First, when the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on, the main control board 110 and the frame control board 120 start to start up, and the frame control board 120 completes its startup before the main control board 110. After that, when the main control board 110 completes its startup within a maximum of 3 minutes, the main control board 110 sends a gaming machine installation information notification (communication number = 0) to the frame control board 120 as the first telegram. Within 10 ms, the frame control board 120 sends a gaming machine installation information response (communication number = 0, receipt result = receipt OK) to the main control board 110 as the second telegram, and the main control board 110 checks the gaming machine installation information receipt result.

Here, when the main control board 110 detects that both the RWM clear switch 111a and the setting key switch 112a have been operated, or that only the setting key switch 112a has been operated, it transitions to a setting change state (setting change mode) or a setting confirmation state (setting confirmation mode), and the setting value is displayed on the information display 115 implemented on the main control board 110.

After the setting change state or setting confirmation state is entered and 108 ms has elapsed since the transmission of the first gaming machine installation information notification, the main control board 110 transmits a gaming machine information notification (communication number = 1) as the third telegram to the frame control board 120. Within 10 ms, the frame control board 120 transmits a gaming machine information response (communication number = 1) as the fourth telegram to the main control board 110, and the main control board 110 confirms the gaming machine installation information reception result. After that, regardless of whether the setting change state or setting confirmation state is entered, the communication sequence of transmitting and receiving telegrams in the order of gaming machine information notification and gaming machine information response is repeated at 108 ms intervals.

When the setting key switch 112a is operated to end the setting change state or setting confirmation state, the reception result of the gaming machine installation information response already received is OK, so the main control board 110 allows the launch of gaming balls and the game becomes playable. After that, the communication sequence of sending and receiving messages in the order of gaming machine information notification and gaming machine information response is repeated at a cycle of 108 ms.

(Communication procedure by which the main control board determines that the communication line is disconnected)
Using Figure 49, the communication procedure in which the main control board 110 determines that the communication line has been disconnected will be described.

First, when the main control board 110 sends a notification message (gaming machine installation information notification, gaming machine information notification) to the frame control board 120, the frame control board 120 should send a response message (gaming machine installation information response, gaming machine information response) within 10 ms, but a situation occurs in which the main control board 110 is unable to receive the response message.

This is the first time that a notification message is sent from the main control board 110 to the frame control board 120 at 108m intervals, but if the main control board 110 is unable to receive a response message from the frame control board 120 10 times in a row, it will assume that a communication line disconnection has occurred and will send an error designation command to the performance control board 130 to notify the error. After that, the game machine 1 will be powered off/on to restore from the communication line disconnection.

(Communication procedure by which the frame control board determines that the communication line is disconnected)
Using FIG. 50, the communication procedure in which the main control board 120 determines that the communication line has been disconnected will be described.

First, the main control board 110 sends a notification message (gaming machine installation information notification, gaming machine information notification) to the frame control board 120, and within 10 ms, the frame control board 120 sends a response message (gaming machine installation information response, gaming machine information response). After that, when the timing for sending the notification message arrives, which arrives every 108 ms, the main control board 110 sends the notification message to the frame control board 120, but a state occurs in which the frame control board 120 cannot receive the notification message.

After that, notification messages are sent from the main control board 110 to the frame control board 120 at intervals of 108 ms, but if the frame control board 120 is unable to receive notification messages for 1000 ms from the time it received the last notification message, the frame control board 120 will notify the error by displaying an error code on the frame control display 125 or sending an error specification command to the performance control board 130, assuming that a communication line disconnection has occurred. After that, if the notification message from the main control board 110 is successfully received, the error notification will end.

In addition, when the gaming machine 1 is in a ball removal state, information indicating that the gaming machine 1 is in a ball removal state may be transmitted to the dedicated unit 170 and the gaming machine information center.

(Main processing of the main control board)
The main processing of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to Fig. 51. Fig. 51 is a flow chart showing the main processing of the main control board 110. This main processing is performed when a system reset, which occurs when a power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board 160, is input to the main CPU 110a.

First, the main CPU 110a prohibits all interrupts in step S1, performs initial CPU settings such as setting built-in registers in step S2, and performs processing to wait for other boards to start up in step S3. Specifically, it waits for one second for the frame control board 120 and performance control board 130 to start up so that no commands from the main control board 110 are missed. In addition, in step S4, access to the RWM area of the main RAM 110c is permitted.

In step S5, the main CPU 110a notifies the game machine installation information. Specifically, it transmits "game machine installation information" (see FIG. 39) to the frame control board 120. That is, when power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board 160, the main control board 110 transmits "game machine installation information" to the frame control board 120.

In step S6, the main CPU 110a increments the "notification counter" provided in the main RAM 110c by "+1". Then, in step S7, it is determined whether or not the reception result of the gaming machine installation information notification has been responded to. If the reception result of the gaming machine installation information notification has been responded to, processing proceeds to step S10, and if the reception result of the gaming machine installation information notification has not been responded to, processing proceeds to step S8. In other words, it is determined whether or not the reception result has been responded (received) from the frame control board 120 as a result of sending "gaming machine installation information" to the frame control board 120.

In step S8, the main CPU 110a determines whether the value of the "notification counter" is "10". If it determines that the value of the "notification counter" is "10", the process proceeds to step S9, and if it determines that the value of the "notification counter" is not "10" (is less than 10), the process proceeds to step S5.

In step S9, the main CPU 110a performs processing to notify the error. Specifically, it determines that there is an abnormality (e.g., a disconnection) in the communication between the main control board 110 and the frame control board 120, transmits a "game machine communication abnormality start command" to the performance control board 130, and notifies the "game machine communication abnormality error" under the control of the performance control board 130 (see FIG. 115). Then, it waits until the supply of power voltage is completely cut off. In other words, if the frame control board 120 is notified of "game machine installation information" "10" times but is unable to respond with the reception result of the game machine installation information notification, it notifies the error and does not make the game available, assuming that there may be a disconnection or the like (communication abnormality) between the main control board 110 and the frame control board 120. This makes it possible to prevent the game from being played despite the occurrence of a disconnection or the like (communication abnormality) between the main control board 110 and the frame control board 120.

As in this process, a process may be performed to determine whether or not there is an abnormality (e.g., a broken wire) in the communication between the main control board 110 and the frame control board 120, but the control program (main control program) that determines that a response could not be received from the frame control board 120 can also be said to be a detection means that detects whether or not there is an abnormality (e.g., a broken wire) in the communication between the main control board 110 and the frame control board 120.

In step S10, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the machine is in a ball-removed state. Specifically, the main CPU 110a refers to the reception result of the gaming machine installation information notification, and if the result is "0x00", it determines that the notification is "received OK", and if the result is "0x01", it determines that the notification is in a "ball-removed state" (see FIG. 39). If the notification is in a "ball-removed state", the main CPU 110a waits until the supply of power supply voltage is completely cut off.

If the ball is being removed, after completing the processing of step S10, the system will wait until the supply of power voltage is completely cut off, so the processing from step S11 onwards will not be executed (processing related to power restoration will not be executed and the control state before the power cut will not be restored). In other words, the "power restoration designation command" will not be sent to the performance control board 130 in step S24, so the audio, visual and electric light notifications of "power restoration" (described below) will not be executed. In this case, the audio and visual notifications of "ball removal operation in progress" (described below) will be executed. This prevents the various notifications of "power restoration" being executed during the ball removal state, or the initial operations described below from being executed, which can cause the player to lose focus on the ball removal work. On the other hand, if the processing of step S10 is denied (if the ball is not being removed), the system will proceed to step S24 and the "power restoration designation command" will be sent to the performance control board 130, so the audio, visual and electric light notifications of "power restoration" (described below) will be executed.

Similarly, when in the ball removal state, even if the RWM clear switch 111a is pressed and the power switch 164 is turned ON, the process does not proceed to the "RWM clear process" of step S19, so the "RWM clear process" is not executed and the "RWM clear designation command" is not sent to the performance control board 130. As a result, the audio, visual and electric light notifications of "power on (RWM clear)" (described below) are not executed. In this case, the audio and visual notifications of "ball removal operation in progress" (described below) are executed. This prevents the "power on (RWM clear)" notifications from being executed during the ball removal state, which could result in the player being unable to concentrate on the ball removal task. On the other hand, if the processing of step S10 is denied (if the ball is not removed), the process proceeds to step S19, where the "RWM clear processing" is executed, and an "RWM clear command" is sent to the performance control board 130, resulting in an audio notification, visual notification, and illumination notification of "power on (RWM clear)" (described below).

Similarly, when the ball is removed, even if the power switch 164 is turned on with the setting change operation described below, the process does not proceed to the "setting change process" of step S14, so the "setting change process" is not executed and the "setting change designation command" is not sent to the performance control board 130. As a result, the audio, visual, and electric notification of the "setting change" (described below) is not executed. In this case, the audio and visual notifications of the "ball removal operation in progress" (described below) are executed. This prevents the various notifications of the "setting change" from being executed during the ball removal state, which can prevent the player from being unable to concentrate on the ball removal work. On the other hand, if the process of step S10 is denied (if the ball is not removed), the process proceeds to the "setting change process" of step S14, the "setting change process" is executed, and the "setting change designation command" is sent to the performance control board 130, so that the audio, visual, and electric notification of the "setting change" (described below) is executed.

Similarly, when the ball is removed, even if the power switch 164 is turned on with the setting confirmation operation described below, the process does not proceed to the "setting confirmation process" of step S22, so the "setting confirmation process" is not executed and the "setting confirmation designation command" is not sent to the performance control board 130. As a result, the audio, visual, and electric notification of "setting confirmation" (described below) is not executed. In this case, the audio and visual notifications of "ball removal operation in progress" (described below) are executed. This prevents the various notifications of "setting confirmation" from being executed during the ball removal state, which can prevent the player from being unable to concentrate on the ball removal work. On the other hand, if the process of step S10 is denied (if the ball is not removed), the process proceeds to the "setting confirmation process" of step S22, the "setting confirmation process" is executed, and the "setting confirmation designation command" is sent to the performance control board 130, so that the audio, visual, and electric notification of "setting confirmation" (described below) is executed.

Similarly, if the machine is in the ball removal state, the process does not transition to "all interrupts allowed" in step S33, and the machine is not ready to play. This prevents the machine from becoming ready to play despite the ball removal state, which would result in delays in the ball removal process. For example, if the machine becomes ready to play while a game ball is being discharged outside the machine during the ball removal state, the game ball may be launched into the game area 5a, and the ball removal process may not be completed until the game ball returns to a position where it can be discharged again (a position where the ball can be removed), but this process can be prevented. On the other hand, if the process of step S10 is denied (if the machine is not in the ball removal state), "all interrupts allowed" is executed in step S33, and the machine is ready to play.

Similarly, if the ball is being removed, the process does not proceed to "All interrupts allowed" in step S33, and does not proceed to "Error control process" in the main interrupt process, so that "Error control process" is not executed, and for example "Magnet detection" or "Abnormal winning detection" is not executed. As a result, the audio, visual, and electric notifications of "Fraud detection 1 (Magnet detection error)" and "Fraud detection 2 (Abnormal winning error)" (both described below) are not executed. In this case, the audio and visual notifications of "Ball removal operation in progress" (described below) are executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the notifications of "Fraud detection 1 (Magnet detection error)" and "Fraud detection 2 (Abnormal winning error)" from being executed during the ball removal state, which makes it possible to prevent the player from being unable to concentrate on the ball removal work. On the other hand, if the process of step S10 is denied (if the ball is not being removed), "All interrupts allowed" is executed in step S33, and the "Error control process" in the main interrupt process can be executed, so that "Magnet detection" and "Abnormal winning detection" can also be executed.

Note that even if the ball is removed, the process may proceed to step S11 and subsequent steps. In other words, since "power restoration", "power on (RWM clear)", "setting change", "setting check", and "all interrupts allowed" are processes executed by the main control board 110, and control related to the "ball removed state" is a process executed by the frame control board 120, "power restoration", "power on (RWM clear)", "setting change", "setting check", and "all interrupts allowed" may be performed during the ball removed state.
Furthermore, when these are performed simultaneously, the performance control board 130 may report the event with the higher priority according to the priority order described in Figures 113 and 114, or may report both events regardless of priority, or may always give priority to the ball-removed state.

In step S11, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a backup flag indicating that power has been restored has been saved in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c. If the backup flag has been saved, it is assumed that power has been restored and the process proceeds to step S12. If the backup flag has not been saved, it is assumed that power has been turned on for the first time and the process proceeds to step S13.

In step S12, the main CPU 110a calculates a checksum (abnormality determination data) for the game RWM area (excluding the setting value area) of the main RAM 110c.

In step S13, the main CPU 110a determines whether a setting change operation has been performed. Specifically, it determines whether the setting key switch 112a and the RWM clear switch 111a are ON. If a setting change operation has been performed, the process proceeds to step S14 to transition to setting change mode, and if a setting change operation has not been performed, the process proceeds to step S15.

The main CPU 110a performs a setting change process in step S14. Specifically, the main CPU 110a performs a process to change (update) the setting value (of the jackpot probability in the jackpot lottery), which is the stage of the advantageous degree of the game, based on the operation of the RWM clear switch 111a. The setting change process will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 54. When this process is completed, the process proceeds to step S19.

In step S15, the main CPU 110a determines whether the checksum is normal. Specifically, it determines whether the checksum saved in the gaming RWM area matches the checksum calculated in step S12. If the checksum is normal (there is no abnormality in the data in the gaming RWM area), the process proceeds to step S16. If the checksum is not normal (there is an abnormality in the data in the gaming RWM area), the process proceeds to step S17. Note that if the backup flag has not been saved, that is, when the power is turned on for the first time, the checksum is determined to be abnormal.

In step S16, the main CPU 110a determines whether the setting value in the setting value (during play) area is within the appropriate range (here, 1 to 4). If it is determined that the setting value in the setting value (during play) area is within the appropriate range, the process proceeds to step S18, and if it is determined that the setting value in the setting value (during play) area is not within the appropriate range, the process proceeds to step S17.

In step S17, the main CPU 110a processes the irrecoverable error as an RWM abnormality. Specifically, it sets Bit 5 of "Fraud Detection Status 1" (see FIG. 40) to "1" and performs processing to send "HC/Fraud Monitoring Information" in which Bit 5 of "Fraud Detection Status 1" is "1" to the frame control board 120. It also displays error information "E" indicating an irrecoverable error on the information display 115, sends an irrecoverable error designation command to the performance control board 130 indicating that an irrecoverable error has occurred, and then sets interrupt inhibition to inhibit timer interrupts and waits until the power supply is completely cut off. This causes the performance control board 130 to perform processing to notify the irrecoverable error.

An "irrecoverable error" is an error state in which game control is not performed (the game control is not transferred), and the error cannot be released unless a setting change process is performed. Therefore, when an irrecoverable error occurs, the error cannot be released even if the power switch provided on the power supply board 160 is turned OFF and then turned ON without changing the settings, and the power switch must be turned ON with the setting change operation. During an irrecoverable error, the presence or absence of signal input from various input devices (various switches, various sensors) is not monitored at all.
Incidentally, the "irrecoverable error" is not cleared unless a setting change process is executed, but it may also be cleared when an RWM clear is executed without a setting change process.

In step S18, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not an RWM clear operation has been performed. Specifically, it determines whether or not the RWM clear switch 111a is in the ON state. If an RWM clear operation has been performed, the process proceeds to step S19 to execute RWM clear, and if an RWM clear operation has not been performed, the process proceeds to step S21.

The main CPU 110a performs an RWM clear process in step S19. Specifically, it performs a process to initialize the game control state (initialize everything other than the set value area of the game RWM area). Details of the RWM clear process will be described later with reference to FIG. 56. When this process ends, the process proceeds to step S20.

In step S20, the main CPU 110a transmits a power-on command to the presentation control board 130, indicating that the game control state has been initialized and the current game state (here, the low-probability non-time-limited game state as the normal game state). This causes the presentation control board 130 to carry out processing to execute a power-on notification.

The "power-on notification" is a notification to make the player aware that the game control state has been initialized, and involves displaying the initial screen (background image and initial performance pattern "135") when power is turned on on the first image display device 70, lighting the frame lighting device 10 and board lighting device 76 in a predetermined light color (e.g. red) for a predetermined period of time (e.g. 60 seconds), and outputting a power-on notification sound ("RWM has been cleared" + buzzer sound) from the audio output device 9 for a predetermined period of time (e.g. 30 seconds) indicating that the RWM area has been initialized.
In addition, in the power-on notification, instead of displaying the initial screen on the first image display device 70, a display notifying that the RWM has been cleared may be displayed on the first image display device 70.

In step S21, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a setting confirmation operation has been performed. Specifically, it determines whether or not the setting key switch 112a is ON. If a setting confirmation operation has been performed, the process proceeds to step S22 to transition to setting confirmation mode, and if a setting confirmation operation has not been performed, the process proceeds to step S23 to return the game control state to the state before the power was turned off.

The main CPU 110a performs a setting confirmation process in step S22. Specifically, the main CPU 110a performs a process to display the setting values saved in the setting value (during play) area of the game RWM area on the information display 115. Details of the setting confirmation process will be described later with reference to FIG. 57.

In step S23, the main CPU 110a clears (clears to 0) the backup flag and checksum saved in the game RWM area, and sets the game RWM area when power is restored. This returns (restores) the game progress state (control state) to the state before the power was cut off, making it possible to resume play from the state before the power was cut off.

In step S24, the main CPU 110a transmits a power restoration command to the presentation control board 130, indicating that the game control state has been restored and the game state before the power outage occurred. This causes the presentation control board 130 to perform processing to terminate the setting confirmation notification, etc., described below, and execute the power restoration notification.

A "power restoration notification" is a notification to make the player aware that the game control state has returned to the state before the power was cut off, and involves displaying the initial screen at the time of power restoration (background image and initial performance pattern "135") on the first image display device 70, lighting up the frame lighting device 10 and board lighting device 76 in a predetermined light color (e.g. blue) for a predetermined period of time (e.g. 60 seconds), and outputting a power restoration notification sound ("Power has been restored" + buzzer sound) from the audio output device 9 for a predetermined period of time (e.g. 30 seconds) indicating that power has been restored (from a power outage).
In addition, when notifying the restoration of power, instead of displaying the initial screen on the first image display device 70, a display notifying that the power has been restored may be displayed on the first image display device 70.

In step S25, the main CPU 110a sends other commands (such as a special symbol storage command and a normal symbol storage command, which will be described later) to the performance control board 130. This allows the performance control board 130 to grasp the number of special symbols on hold, and also performs processing to display the first hold icon and the second hold icon on the first image display device 70.

In step S26, the main CPU 110a transmits a setting value designation command to the performance control board 130. This allows the performance control board 130 to grasp the current setting value. Note that this setting value designation command may be transmitted not only at the timing of this step S26, but also each time the variable display of the special pattern starts, or each time a jackpot game starts.

In step S27, the main CPU 110a determines whether the acquisition limit device activation flag is ON. Specifically, the main CPU 110a refers to the main RAM 110c to determine whether the acquisition limit device activation flag is ON (e.g., 0=OFF, 1=ON). If the acquisition limit device activation flag is OFF (e.g., 0), the process proceeds to step S28, and if the acquisition limit device activation flag is ON (e.g., 1), the process proceeds to step S29.

The "acquisition limit device activation flag" is a flag that is turned ON when it is determined that the maximum increase (also called "Max MY") has reached a predetermined value (e.g., 95,000) in the "acquisition limit activation determination process" described later. In other words, the "acquisition limit device" is a device that activates when it is determined that the maximum increase has reached a predetermined value (e.g., 95,000) (when in a jackpot, it activates after the jackpot ends), and when the device is activated, play on the gaming machine becomes impossible, and the main RAM 110c of the gaming machine is initialized after the gaming store closes, making it practically impossible to play on the gaming machine until the opening time of the next day. Note that "the maximum increase has reached a predetermined value (e.g., 95,000)" means, for example, that it is "more than" 95,000, and depending on the situation, it may be determined that the predetermined value (e.g., 95,000) has been reached at exactly "95,000", or it may be determined that the predetermined value (e.g., 95,000) has been reached at "95,005".

In step S28, the main CPU 110a causes the main control board 110 to turn ON (output) a launch permission signal that allows the launching device to launch game balls. This allows the launching device to launch game balls when the launch permission signal from the frame control board 120 is ON (output). Note that the frame control board 120 may not output a launch permission signal, but the main control board 110 may output a launch permission signal, and the launching device may be able to launch game balls when the launch permission signal is output from the main control board 110.

In step S29, the main CPU 110a sends an acquisition limit device operation command to the performance control board 130, indicating that the "acquisition limit device" has been activated. This causes the performance control board 130 to carry out processing to notify the user that the acquisition limit device has been activated. Then, once the acquisition limit device operation command has been sent to the performance control board 130, processing proceeds to step S30.

"Notification that the acquisition limit device has been activated" refers to a notification to make the user aware that it is no longer possible to continue playing, and is to display on the first image display device 70, for example, a message in white letters on a black background such as "The acquisition limit device has been activated. Today's play has ended."

As an example of the operation of the "capture limit device", as described above, if the maximum increase in the number of prize balls (also called "Max MY") generated by game balls entering the jackpot entry port 50 or the general entry port 43 during a jackpot reaches a predetermined value (e.g. 95,000), the capture limit device will be activated after the jackpot ends. For example, in a jackpot that awards 10 rounds, if the maximum increase in the number of prize balls reaches a predetermined value (e.g. 95,000) in the 5th round, the jackpot can be played up to the 10th round, but the capture limit device will be activated after the 10th round and the jackpot ending have finished. This prevents the jackpot from ending midway, causing discomfort to the player, while still providing a healthy gameplay.

As another example of the operation of the "winning limit device," regardless of the game state, if the maximum increase in the number of winning balls generated by having game balls enter the first start port 45, the second start port 47, or the general winning port 43 during the variable display or customer waiting state (or during the customer waiting demo performance) reaches a predetermined value (for example, 95,000), the winning limit device will immediately operate.

As another example of the operation of the "capture limit device", in the case of the above-mentioned "small prize rush type", if the maximum increase in the number of winning balls generated by placing a game ball in the small prize large prize opening during the "small prize game" (see Figure 37) reaches a predetermined value (e.g. 95,000), the capture limit device will be activated after the "small prize game" ends. This allows for a healthy game experience while preventing the small prize game from ending midway, causing discomfort to the player.

As another example of the operation of the "capture limit device", in the case of the above-mentioned "Type 1/Type 2" type, for example, in the small prize game of the first round of "Big Win Game 3 (4 rounds)", if the maximum increase in the number of prize balls generated by winning a game ball in the "specific area" provided in the big prize opening reaches a predetermined value (e.g. 95,000), the capture limit device will be activated after the end of the big prize game (rounds 2 to 4) that was activated by the winning in the "specific area". On the other hand, in the small prize game of the first round of "Big Win Game 3 (4 rounds)", if the game ball cannot be made to win the "specific area" provided in the big prize opening and the game ball wins in the "non-specific area", and if the maximum increase in the number of prize balls generated by the game ball winning in the "non-specific area" reaches a predetermined value (e.g. 95,000), the capture limit device will be activated after the end of the small prize game of the first round (it will not be activated in the big win games of rounds 2 to 4). This means that if the ball is won in a "specific area," the winning limit device will activate after the big win game ends, and if the ball is won in a "non-specific area," the winning limit device will activate after the small win game ends, preventing players from feeling uncomfortable in either case.

In addition, if a player who is not familiar with gaming machines plays without knowing about the existence of the "winning limit device" and the "winning limit device" is activated, this may confuse or dissatisfy the player. For this reason, it is preferable to actively notify the player that the gaming machine 1 is equipped with an "winning limit device." For example, on the customer waiting demo screen during the customer waiting demo performance, "Equipped with winning limit device" may be displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), or may be constantly displayed on the third image display device 72 (left image display device) or the fourth image display device 73 (right image display device). It may also be displayed at the end of a big win game.

In step S30, the main CPU 110a clears (initializes) an increment counter (also called the "MY counter"), which will be described later. After clearing the increment counter, the process proceeds to step S31.

In step S31, the main CPU 110a starts the CTC (counter timer circuit) to generate a timer interrupt (4 milliseconds), and in step S32, it allows all interrupts and proceeds to step S34.

In step S34, the main CPU 110a performs a process of updating the random number value for reach determination and the random number value for special pattern determination, which are used to determine the fluctuation mode (fluctuation time) of the special pattern, and in step S35, performs an initial value random number update process to update the initial value random number value for jackpot determination, the initial value random number value for special pattern determination, the initial value random number value for hit determination, and the initial value random number value for normal pattern determination.

In step S36, the main CPU 110a determines whether a power interruption (blackout) has occurred. Specifically, it determines whether a power interruption detection signal has been input from the power interruption detection circuit of the power supply board 160, and if the power interruption detection signal has not been input, it proceeds to step S34, and if the power interruption detection signal has been input, it proceeds to step S37.

In step S37, the main CPU 110a sets an interrupt prohibition to prohibit timer interrupts, in step S38, it clears the output port, in step S39, it calculates a checksum (abnormality determination data) of the game RWM area (excluding the set value area) of the main RAM 110c and saves it in the game RWM area, in step S40, it saves a backup flag in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c, in step S41, it prohibits RAM access, and waits until the power supply voltage is completely cut off.

(Main control board setting change processing)
The setting change processing of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to Fig. 54. Fig. 54 is a flow chart showing the setting change processing of the main control board 110.

First, in step S14-1, the main CPU 110a performs HC/fraud monitoring information notification. Specifically, it sets bit 0 of "fraud detection status 1" (see FIG. 40) to "1" and performs processing to transmit "HC/fraud monitoring information" in which bit 0 of "fraud detection status 1" is "1" to the frame control board 120.

In step S14-2, the main CPU 110a increments the "notification counter" provided in the main RAM 110c by "+1". Then, in step S14-3, it is determined whether or not the receipt result of the HC/fraud monitoring information notification has been responded to. If the receipt result of the HC/fraud monitoring information notification has been responded to, processing proceeds to step S14-6, and if the receipt result of the HC/fraud monitoring information notification has not been responded to, processing proceeds to step S14-4. In other words, it is determined whether or not the receipt result has been responded (received) from the frame control board 120 as a result of sending "HC/fraud monitoring information" to the frame control board 120.

In step S14-4, the main CPU 110a determines whether the value of the "notification counter" is "10." If it determines that the value of the "notification counter" is "10," the process proceeds to step S14-5. If it determines that the value of the "notification counter" is not "10" (is less than 10), the process proceeds to step S14-1.

The main CPU 110a performs processing to issue an error notification in step S14-5. Note that the processing to issue an error notification is the same as in step S9, so a description thereof will be omitted here. The main CPU 110a then waits until the supply of power supply voltage is completely cut off. In other words, if the frame control board 120 is notified of "HC/fraud monitoring information" 10 times but is unable to respond with a result of receipt of the HC/fraud monitoring information notification, an error notification is issued and the game is not made playable, as there is a possibility that a disconnection or the like (communication abnormality) has occurred between the main control board 110 and the frame control board 120. This makes it possible to prevent gameplay from being played despite the existence of a disconnection or the like (communication abnormality) between the main control board 110 and the frame control board 120.

In step S14-6, the main CPU 110a sends a setting change command to the performance control board 130. This causes the performance control board 130 to carry out processing to execute a setting change notification to notify the user that the setting value is being changed.

A "setting change notification" refers to displaying a setting change screen on the first image display device 70 indicating that the setting value is being changed, or lighting the frame lighting device 10 and board lighting device 76 in a specified light color (e.g., white) throughout the setting change. In addition, a setting change notification sound indicating that the setting is being changed ("setting is being changed") may be output from the audio output device 9. This allows game staff to know that the setting is being changed by checking the first image display device 70, frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 76, and audio output device 9.

In step S14-7, the main CPU 110a decrements the setting value in the setting value (during play) area by 1 and saves it in the setting value (changing) area, and in step S14-8, initializes (clears to 0) the setting value (during play) area in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c.

In step S14-9, the main CPU 110a determines whether the setting value in the setting value (changing) area is within the appropriate range (here, 0 to 3). If it is determined that the setting value in the setting value (changing) area is within the appropriate range, the process proceeds to step S14-11, and if it is determined that the setting value in the setting value (changing) area is not within the appropriate range, the process proceeds to step S14-10.

In step S14-10, the main CPU 110a sets the setting value in the setting value (changing) area to an initial value of "0". Then, in step S14-11, the main CPU 110a displays the current setting value on the information display 113. Specifically, by referencing the setting value in the setting value (changing) area, the value obtained by adding +1 (here, 1 to 4) is displayed on one of the 7-segment LEDs of the information display 115. This allows the gaming store staff to know the setting value before the change by checking the information display 115.

In step S14-12, the main CPU 110a determines whether a setting value update operation has been performed. Specifically, it determines whether the RWM clear switch 111a has changed from an OFF state to an ON state. If a setting value update operation has been performed, the process proceeds to step S14-13; if a setting value update operation has not been performed, the process proceeds to step S14-16.

In step S14-13, the main CPU 110a updates the setting value in the setting value (changing) area by +1, and in step S14-14 performs a setting value correction process. Specifically, if the updated setting value is "4" which exceeds the appropriate range (here, 0 to 3), the main CPU 110a performs a process to correct the setting value to "0".

In step S14-15, the main CPU 110a displays the current setting value on the information display 115. Specifically, it references the setting value in the setting value (changing) area, and displays the value +1 added (here, 1 to 4) on one of the 7-segment LEDs on the information display 115. This allows the gaming store staff to know the setting value before it is confirmed by checking the information display 115.

In step S14-16, the main CPU 110a determines whether a setting value confirmation operation has been performed. Specifically, it determines whether the setting key switch 112a has changed from an ON state to an OFF state. If a setting value confirmation operation has been performed, the setting value is assumed to have been confirmed (setting change mode is terminated) and processing proceeds to step S14-17. If a setting value confirmation operation has not been performed, the setting value is assumed to be updated and processing proceeds to step S14-12.

In step S14-17, the main CPU 110a increments the setting value in the setting value (changing) area by +1 and saves it in the setting value (playing) area, and in step S14-18 initializes (clears to 0) the setting value in the setting value (changing) area.

In step S14-18, the main CPU 110a ends the display of the setting value on the information display 115 and ends the current setting change process. Note that the LED of the status confirmation display 68 is turned on when the setting change process starts, and the LED of the status confirmation display 68 is turned off when the setting change process ends. This allows the gaming store staff to know that the setting is being changed by checking the status confirmation display 68.

(Modification of main control board setting change process)
A process for changing settings of the main control board 110 (variant example) will be described with reference to Fig. 55. Fig. 55 is a flow chart showing the process for changing settings of the main control board 110. Note that in Fig. 55, only the points different from Fig. 54 will be described.

In step S14-5, the main CPU 110a sets an error notification flag in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c. Then, when the error notification flag is set, processing proceeds to step S14-6. That is, in FIG. 54, error notification processing is performed and gameplay is stopped in step S14-5, but in FIG. 55, the difference is that only the error notification flag is set, error notification processing is not performed, and gameplay is not stopped, and processing proceeds to step S14-6.

Then, in step S14-20, the main CPU 110a refers to a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c to determine whether or not the error notification flag is set. For example, if the bit indicating the error notification flag is ON, it is determined that the error notification flag is set, and if the bit indicating the error notification flag is OFF, it is determined that the error notification flag is not set. If it is determined that the error notification flag is set, the process proceeds to step S14-21, and if it is determined that the error notification flag is not set, the current setting change process is terminated. That is, in FIG. 54, the current setting change process is terminated in step S14-19, but in FIG. 55, the process is not terminated in step S14-19, but rather, in step S14-20 it is determined whether or not the error notification flag is set, and if it is set, a "game machine communication abnormality start designation command" is set and transmitted to the performance control board 130 to notify an "game machine communication abnormality error".

In other words, in the modified example of FIG. 55, if HC/fraud monitoring information (here, fraud detection status 1 Bit 0 is "1") is sent to the frame control board 120 a predetermined number of times, but a receipt result cannot be received from the frame control board 120 (for example, if there is a high probability that a disconnection has occurred between the main control board 110 and the frame control board 120), an "internal gaming machine communication abnormality error" is notified in steps S14-20 and S14-21 after the main processing in the setting change processing is completed. This prevents the "internal gaming machine communication abnormality error" from being confusingly generated by multiple notifications being made at the same time. Also, the "internal gaming machine communication abnormality error" can be dealt with after the setting change processing is completed, improving the work efficiency of employees.

The setting change process is performed after the main control board main process in FIG. 51 is completed, so in step S7, the reception result of the gaming machine installation information notification was received normally, that is, at this point, the main control board 110 and the frame control board 120 were in a state where they could communicate normally (a state where no disconnection or the like occurred). On the other hand, in FIG. 54 or FIG. 55, the reception result of the HC/fraud monitoring information cannot be received normally, which means that the main control board 110 and the frame control board 120 were in a state where they could not communicate normally (a state where a disconnection or the like occurred) before the setting change process was performed after the processing in step S7 was confirmed. In this way, by periodically monitoring whether the main control board 110 and the frame control board 120 are in a state where they can communicate normally even after the end of step S7, it is possible to prevent a situation where the main control board 110 and the frame control board 120 cannot communicate with each other and cause a disadvantage to the player.

(Main control board RWM clear processing)
The RWM clear processing of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to Fig. 56. Fig. 56 is a flowchart showing the RWM clear processing of the main control board 110.

First, in step S19-1, the main CPU 110a performs HC/fraud monitoring information notification. Specifically, it sets Bit 2 of "Fraud Detection Status 1" (see FIG. 40) to "1" and performs processing to transmit "HC/fraud monitoring information" in which Bit 2 of "Fraud Detection Status 1" is "1" to the frame control board 120.

In step S19-2, the main CPU 110a increments the "notification counter" provided in the main RAM 110c by "+1". Then, in step S19-3, it is determined whether or not the receipt result of the HC/fraud monitoring information notification has been responded to. If the receipt result of the HC/fraud monitoring information notification has been responded to, processing proceeds to step S19-6, and if the receipt result of the HC/fraud monitoring information notification has not been responded to, processing proceeds to step S19-4. In other words, it is determined whether or not the receipt result has been responded (received) from the frame control board 120 as a result of sending "HC/fraud monitoring information" to the frame control board 120.

In step S19-4, the main CPU 110a determines whether the value of the "notification counter" is "10". If it determines that the value of the "notification counter" is "10", the process proceeds to step S19-5, and if it determines that the value of the "notification counter" is not "10" (is less than 10), the process proceeds to step S19-1.

The main CPU 110a performs processing to issue an error notification in step S19-5. Note that the processing to issue an error notification is the same as in step S9, so a description thereof will be omitted here. The main CPU 110a then waits until the supply of power supply voltage is completely cut off. In other words, if the frame control board 120 is notified of "HC/fraud monitoring information" 10 times but is unable to respond with a result of receipt of the HC/fraud monitoring information notification, an error notification is issued and the game is not made playable, as there is a possibility that a disconnection or the like (communication abnormality) has occurred between the main control board 110 and the frame control board 120. This makes it possible to prevent gameplay from being played despite the existence of a disconnection or the like (communication abnormality) between the main control board 110 and the frame control board 120.

In step S19-6, the main CPU 110a determines whether the setting value saved in the setting value (during play) area of the gaming RWM area is within the appropriate range (here, 1 to 4). If the setting value is within the appropriate range (setting change processing has been performed in the past), the process proceeds to step S19-7; if the setting value is not within the appropriate range (setting change processing has not been performed in the past), the process proceeds to step S19-9.

In step S19-7, the main CPU 110a initializes (clears to 0) everything except the setting value area of the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c. This initializes the game progress state to the initial state (the state when the gaming machine 1 was shipped), and the data (other than the setting values) in the game RWM area before the RWM was cleared is not carried over.

In step S19-8, the main CPU 110a determines whether the acquisition upper limit activation device flag is ON. Specifically, the main RAM 110c is referenced to determine whether the acquisition upper limit activation device flag is ON (e.g., 1). If the acquisition upper limit activation device flag is ON, processing proceeds to step S19-9, and if the acquisition upper limit activation device flag is not ON, processing proceeds to step S19-10.

In step S19-9, the main CPU 110a turns the acquisition limit activation device flag OFF. Specifically, in the main RAM 110c, the acquisition limit activation device flag is turned OFF (for example, set to 0). In this way, if the acquisition limit device is activated, the acquisition limit device will be deactivated by performing the RWM clear process on the main control board, and play will be possible. Therefore, if the acquisition limit device is activated, the player cannot deactivate it, and it will always be deactivated by the gaming facility manager by clearing the RWM on the main control board, so that actions such as continuing to play even when the maximum increase number reaches a predetermined value (for example, 95,000) can be prevented, and healthy play can be achieved.

In step S19-10, the main CPU 110a sends an RWM clear command to the frame control board 120 and the performance control board 130, and ends this RWM clear process.

In the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, when the RWM clear process (initialization of the main RAM 110c) is performed on the main control board 110, an RWM clear command is sent to the frame control board 120, and the frame control RAM 120c is also initialized on the frame control board 120. As a result, if the power switch 164 is pressed while pressing the RWM clear switch 111a (performing an RWM clear operation), both the main RAM 110c and the frame control RAM 120c are initialized, eliminating the need to perform an RWM clear operation on both the main control board 110 and the frame control board 120, improving work efficiency.

The areas (information) that are initialized in the frame control RAM 120c by the RWM clear operation are the various pieces of "data type" (see FIG. 42) information in the HC/fraud monitoring information received from the main control board 110, and if the received information is temporarily stored in a buffer before being processed, the information stored in the buffer is cleared. The various pieces of "data type" (see FIG. 42) information are "starting gate winning", "large winning gate winning when special electric role is activated", "winning gate winning", "all starting gate winning", "number of times the pattern is determined", "number of jackpots", "number of roles (number of times the large winning gate is opened)", "passing through a specific area", "external terminal board pulse output", and "performance information status notification".

On the other hand, the areas (information) in the frame control RAM 120c that are not initialized by the RWM clear operation are the game ball count memory area, the memory area related to "display performance information (normal base value)," and the buffer in which information to be sent from the frame control board 120 to the U board 171 is temporarily stored. This makes it possible to prevent even necessary information from being initialized.

In addition, by sending the RWM clear command to the performance control board 130, the performance control board 130 controls the device to notify the user that the RWM has been cleared (an error notification for "power-on (RWM clear)" described later), but the notification is made by repeatedly outputting the voice "RWM has been cleared" and the "power-on BGM" BGM. In other words, the RWM clear operation initializes both the main RAM 110c and the frame control RAM 120c, but the notification by the performance control board 130 simply outputs the voice "RWM has been cleared", and does not notify the user of, for example, "the main RWM has been cleared" or "the frame control RWM has been cleared". This allows the device to use only one piece of voice data, and there is no need to create new voice data for the frame control RAM 120c, so the notification that the RWM has been cleared can be made efficiently.

In addition, audio such as "The main RWM has been cleared" and "The frame control RWM has been cleared" may be output. By configuring it in this way, it becomes easy for employees to understand that both RWMs have been initialized, making it possible to provide an gaming machine that is easy for employees to understand.

The main CPU 110a performs irrecoverable error processing in step S19-11. Specifically, it displays the setting value error information "E" on the information display 115, transmits an irrecoverable error designation command to the performance control board 130 indicating that an irrecoverable error has occurred, sets an interrupt prohibition to prohibit timer interrupts, and waits until the power supply is completely cut off.

(Main control board setting confirmation process)
The process for checking the settings of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to Fig. 57. Fig. 57 is a flow chart showing the process for checking the settings of the main control board 110.

First, in step S22-1, the main CPU 110a performs HC/fraud monitoring information notification. Specifically, it sets Bit 1 of "Fraud Detection Status 1" (see FIG. 40) to "1" and performs processing to transmit "HC/fraud monitoring information" in which Bit 1 of "Fraud Detection Status 1" is "1" to the frame control board 120.

In step S22-2, the main CPU 110a increments the "notification counter" provided in the main RAM 110c by "+1". Then, in step S22-3, it is determined whether or not the receipt result of the HC/fraud monitoring information notification has been responded to. If the receipt result of the HC/fraud monitoring information notification has been responded to, processing proceeds to step S22-6, and if the receipt result of the HC/fraud monitoring information notification has not been responded to, processing proceeds to step S22-4. In other words, it is determined whether or not the receipt result has been responded (received) from the frame control board 120 as a result of sending "HC/fraud monitoring information" to the frame control board 120.

In step S22-4, the main CPU 110a determines whether the value of the "notification counter" is "10". If it determines that the value of the "notification counter" is "10", the process proceeds to step S22-5, and if it determines that the value of the "notification counter" is not "10" (is less than 10), the process proceeds to step S22-1.

The main CPU 110a performs processing to issue an error notification in step S22-5. Note that the processing to issue an error notification is the same as in step S9, so a description thereof will be omitted here. The main CPU 110a then waits until the supply of power supply voltage is completely cut off. In other words, if the frame control board 120 is notified of "HC/fraud monitoring information" 10 times but is unable to respond with a result of receipt of the HC/fraud monitoring information notification, an error notification is issued and the game is not made playable, as there is a possibility that a disconnection or the like (communication abnormality) has occurred between the main control board 110 and the frame control board 120. This makes it possible to prevent gameplay from being played despite the existence of a disconnection or the like (communication abnormality) between the main control board 110 and the frame control board 120.

In step S22-6, the main CPU 110a determines whether the setting value saved in the setting value (during play) area of the gaming RWM area is within the appropriate range (here, 1 to 4). If the setting value is within the appropriate range (setting change processing has been performed in the past), processing proceeds to step S22-7; if the setting value is not within the appropriate range (setting change processing has not been performed in the past), processing proceeds to step S22-11.

In step S22-7, the main CPU 110a sends a setting confirmation command to the performance control board 130. This causes the performance control board 130 to perform processing to execute a setting confirmation notification to notify the user that a setting confirmation is being performed.

A "setting confirmation notification" refers to displaying a setting confirmation screen on the first image display device 70 indicating that the settings are being confirmed, or lighting the frame lighting device 10 and board lighting device 76 in a specified light color (e.g., white) throughout the setting confirmation period. In addition, a setting confirmation notification sound indicating that the settings are being confirmed ("Confirming setting values") may be output from the audio output device 9. This allows game staff to know that the settings are being confirmed by checking the first image display device 70, frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 76, and audio output device 9.

In step S22-8, the main CPU 110a displays the current setting value on the information display 115. Specifically, it references the setting value in the setting value (during play) area and displays a number (1 to 4 in this case) indicating the setting value on one of the 7-segment LEDs on the information display 115. This allows game store staff to know the current setting value by checking the information display 113.

The main CPU 110a determines in step S22-9 whether or not a confirmation end operation has been performed. Specifically, it determines whether or not the setting key switch 112a has changed from an ON state to an OFF state. If a confirmation end operation has been performed, the process proceeds to step S27-7, and if a confirmation end operation has not been performed, the process of step S22-9 is repeated.

In step S22-10, the main CPU 110a ends the display of the setting value on the information display 115 and ends the current setting change process. Note that the LED of the status confirmation display 68 is turned on when the setting confirmation process starts, and the LED of the status confirmation display 68 is turned off when the setting confirmation process ends. This allows the gaming store staff to know that the setting confirmation is being performed by checking the status confirmation display 68.

The main CPU 110a performs irrecoverable error processing in step S22-11. Specifically, it displays the setting value error information "E" on the information display 115, transmits an irrecoverable error designation command to the performance control board 130 indicating that an irrecoverable error has occurred, and then performs processing to inhibit timer interrupts and wait until the power supply is completely cut off.

In this way, if a "setting change operation" is performed, "HC/fraud monitoring information" indicating that Bit 0 of "fraud detection state 1" is "1" is transmitted in step S14-1, if an "RWM clear operation" is performed, "HC/fraud monitoring information" indicating that Bit 2 of "fraud detection state 1" is "1" is transmitted in step S19-1, and if a "setting check operation" is performed, "HC/fraud monitoring information" indicating that Bit 1 of "fraud detection state 1" is "1" is transmitted in step S22-1. This allows the gaming machine information center to know that each operation that affects the game has been performed, and to monitor, for example, whether each operation is being performed more than necessary, whether each operation is being performed during the business hours of the gaming facility, whether the RWM clear operation has been performed outside business hours after the winning limit device has been activated, etc.

In addition, even when the power switch 164 is turned ON while the game ball count clear button 121b is pressed (when the process of clearing the game ball count is performed), information indicating that Bit 3 of the fraud detection status 2 of the frame control board 120 is "1" is transmitted to the gaming machine information center.
On the other hand, when the power switch 164 is turned ON while the ball removal button 122b is pressed (when the ball removal operation processing is performed), no information is sent to the gaming machine information center from either the main control board 110 or the frame control board 120.
In other words, the ball removal operation for ejecting game balls from the game machine is mainly intended for the maintenance of game balls, and is unlikely to be a fraudulent act, so it can be said to have a lower impact on the game and a lower level of security than the above-mentioned "setting change operation", etc. Therefore, no problems will arise even if the ball removal operation is excluded from the management of the game machine information center, and a line can be drawn between information necessary for the proper management of the game machine 1 and unnecessary information, and it is possible to prevent the game machine information center from receiving all information (receiving everything) and having to manage too much information, which can lead to neglected management.

In summary, when the power switch 164 is turned ON and a first operation (e.g., a "setting change operation," an "RWM clear operation," an "setting confirmation operation," or an "operation to clear the number of game balls") is performed, information indicating that each operation has been performed is sent to the gaming machine information center, but when the power switch 164 is turned ON and a second operation (e.g., a "ball removal operation") is performed, information indicating that the operation has been performed is not sent to the gaming machine information center.
In addition, when a second operation (e.g., a "ball removal operation") is performed when the power switch 164 is turned ON, there is no problem in transmitting information indicating that the operation has been performed to the gaming machine information center.

Although the modified example of the setting confirmation process is omitted, the setting confirmation process may also be configured as in the modified example of the setting change process (Fig. 55). Specifically, in step S22-5, only the error notification flag is set, and the process proceeds to step S22-6. After completing the process of step S22-10, it is determined in step S22-11 whether the error notification flag is set or not. If the error notification flag is set, a "game machine communication abnormality start command" is set in step S22-12 and transmitted to the performance control board 130 to notify an "game machine communication abnormality error." This can provide the same effect as described in the explanation of the modified example of the setting change process (Fig. 55).

(Timer interrupt processing on the main control board)
The timer interrupt processing of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to Fig. 58. Fig. 58 is a flow chart showing the timer interrupt processing in the main control board 110.

This timer interrupt process is executed by inputting a clock pulse at a predetermined period (4 milliseconds) from the reset clock pulse generating circuit provided on the main control board 110 after all interrupts are permitted in step S33 of FIG. 52.

First, in step S100, the main CPU 110a saves the information stored in the registers to the stack area, and in step S105, performs time control processing. Specifically, it performs processing to update various timer counters, such as the stop time of special symbols and the opening time of special electric roles.

In step S110, the main CPU 110a refers to the main RAM 110c to determine whether the acquisition limit device activation flag is OFF. If the acquisition limit device activation flag is OFF, the process proceeds to step S120 as it is determined that game progress control (specific control processing) is to be performed, and if the acquisition limit device activation flag is ON, the process proceeds to step S500 as it is determined that game progress control (specific control processing) is not to be performed. The acquisition limit device and the acquisition limit device activation flag will be described later.

The main CPU 110a performs a specific random number value update process in step S120. Specifically, the random number value for determining a big win, the random number value for determining a special symbol, the random number value for determining a special symbol variation pattern, the random number value for determining a win, the random number value for determining a normal symbol, and the random number value for determining a normal symbol variation pattern are updated. Specifically, the process is performed to update each random number value and the random number counter by adding +1. Note that if the incremented random number counter value exceeds the maximum value of the random number range (if the random number counter has completed one revolution), the random number counter is reset to 0, and if the random number counter has returned to the initial value for the revolution, the corresponding initial random number value is set as the new initial value for the revolution, and the random number value is updated.

In step S130, the main CPU 110a performs an initial random number value update process. Specifically, similar to step S35 in FIG. 53, the main CPU 110a performs a process of updating the initial random number value for determining the big win, the initial random number value for determining the special symbol, the initial random number value for determining the win, and the initial random number value for determining the normal symbol.

The main CPU 110a performs input control processing in step S200. Specifically, it determines whether or not there has been input to various switches such as the general winning hole detection switch 43a, the special winning hole detection switch 50a, the first start hole detection switch 45a, the second start hole detection switch 47a, and the gate detection switch 44a, and performs processing to set predetermined data if there has been input. Details of the input control processing will be described later.

In step S300, the main CPU 110a performs special symbol special electricity control processing. Specifically, the main CPU 110a performs processing such as judging the special symbol determination information obtained based on the winning of the game ball into the first start hole 45 or the second start hole 47, displaying the variation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, opening and closing the big prize hole 50, and setting the game state. The details of the special symbol special electricity control processing will be described later.

In step S400, the main CPU 110a performs normal symbol and normal power control processing. Specifically, it performs processing such as judging the normal symbol judgment information acquired based on the passage of the game ball through the normal symbol gate 44, displaying the normal symbol fluctuation, and opening and closing the second start hole 47 (auxiliary play).

The main CPU 110a performs the winning limit management process in step S450. Specifically, when there is an input to the general winning hole detection switch 43a, the large winning hole detection switch 50a, the first starting hole detection switch 45a, the second starting hole detection switch 47a, or the out detection switch 39a, the counters corresponding to each switch are updated. The winning limit management process will be described in detail later.

The main CPU 110a performs payout control processing in step S500. Specifically, it references various prize ball counters stored in the main RAM 110c, and performs processing to send payout number designation commands corresponding to the various winning ports (general winning port 43, first starting port 45, second starting port 47, large winning port 50) to the frame control board 120. This causes the frame control board 120 to execute processing to pay out prize balls (processing to add up the number of game balls (game value) owned by the player).

The main CPU 110a performs error control processing in step S550. For example, if a magnet is detected, it performs processing to set Bit 3 of fraud detection state 1 (FIG. 40) to "1" and processing to send a command indicating magnet detection to the performance control board 130 to notify that a magnet has been detected. This causes the performance control board 130 to execute processing to notify of magnet detection. Details of the error control processing will be described later.

The main CPU 110a performs HC/fraud monitoring information management processing in step S600. Specifically, it performs processing to transmit HC/fraud monitoring information to the frame control board 120 every 108 ms. For example, if bit 3 of fraud detection state 1 (Figure 40) is set to "1" in step S550, HC/fraud monitoring information indicating that bit 3 of fraud detection state 1 (Figure 40) has been set to "1" is transmitted to the frame control board 120, and ultimately to the gaming machine information center. The HC/fraud monitoring information management processing will be described in detail later.

The main CPU 110a performs data creation processing in step S700. Specifically, the main CPU 110a performs processing to create data such as start port opening/closing data to be output to the second start port opening/closing solenoid 48b, large prize port opening/closing data to be output to the large prize port opening/closing solenoid 51b, special pattern display data to be output to the first special pattern display 60 and the second special pattern display 61, normal pattern display data to be output to the normal pattern display 62, special pattern reserved display data to be output to the first special pattern reserved display 63 and the second special pattern reserved display 64, and normal pattern reserved display data to be output to the normal pattern reserved display 65.

The main CPU 110a performs output control processing in step S750. Specifically, it performs processing for executing port output processing for outputting signals such as the start gate opening/closing data and the big prize gate opening/closing data created in step S600 above, display output processing for outputting signals such as special symbol display data, normal symbol display data, special symbol reserved display data, and normal symbol reserved display data to various displays, payout command transmission processing for transmitting commands set in the payout transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c to the frame control board 120, and performance command transmission processing for transmitting commands set in the performance transmission data storage area (transmission buffer) of the main RAM 110c to the frame control board 120 and the performance control board 130.

In step S900, the main CPU 110a restores the information saved in step S100 to the register of the main CPU 110a and ends this timer interrupt process.

(Input control processing of main control board)
The input control process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to Fig. 59. Fig. 59 is a flowchart showing the input control process in the main control board 110.

First, in step S210, the main CPU 110a performs general winning hole detection switch input processing. Specifically, it determines whether a detection signal has been input from the general winning hole detection switch 43a, i.e., whether a game ball has entered the general winning hole 43, and then performs processing to pay out prize balls.

In step S220, the main CPU 110a performs a large prize opening detection switch input process. Specifically, the main CPU 110a determines whether a detection signal has been input from the large prize opening detection switch 50a, i.e., whether a game ball has entered the large prize opening 50, and then performs a process to pay out prize balls.

The main CPU 110a performs a first start hole detection switch input process in step S230. Specifically, the main CPU 110a determines whether a detection signal has been input from the first start hole detection switch 45a, i.e., whether a game ball has entered the first start hole 45, and performs a process to pay out prize balls and a process to obtain and store special chart determination information. The details of the first start hole detection switch input process will be described later.

The main CPU 110a performs second start hole detection switch input processing in step S240. Specifically, it determines whether a detection signal has been input from the second start hole detection switch 47a, i.e., whether a game ball has entered the second start hole 47, and performs processing to pay out prize balls and to obtain and store special chart determination information.

In step S250, the main CPU 110a performs gate detection switch input processing. Specifically, it determines whether a detection signal has been input from the gate detection switch 44a, i.e., whether the game ball has passed through the normal gate 44, and performs processing to obtain and store normal gate determination information.

In step S260, the main CPU 110a performs out detection switch input processing. Specifically, it determines whether a detection signal has been input from the out detection switch 39a, i.e., whether the game ball has entered the out hole 39, and ends the current input control processing.

(First start port detection switch input processing of the main control board)
The first start hole detection switch input processing of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to Fig. 60. Fig. 60 is a flowchart showing the first start hole detection switch input processing in the main control board 110.

First, in step S230-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a detection signal has been input from the first start hole detection switch 45a. If a detection signal has been input from the first start hole detection switch 45a, the process proceeds to step S230-2. If a detection signal has not been input from the first start hole detection switch 45a, the current first start hole detection switch input process is terminated.

In step S230-2, the main CPU 110a performs a process of updating the 3 prize ball counter used for the 3 prize balls by adding data indicating 3 prize balls, and in step S230-3, obtains special symbol determination information (random number value for determining a jackpot, random number value for determining special symbols, random number value for determining reach, random number value for determining special symbol fluctuation pattern).

In step S230-4, the main CPU 110a determines whether the number of reserved first special symbols (U1) is less than 4. If the number of reserved first special symbols (U1) is less than 4, the process proceeds to step S230-5. If the number of reserved first special symbols (U1) is not less than 4, the process ends the current first start hole detection switch input process.

In step S230-5, the main CPU 110a performs a process of adding "1" to the first special symbol reservation number (U1) to update it (U1←U1+1), and in step S230-6, sets a first special symbol storage designation command corresponding to the first special symbol reservation number (U1) in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the first special symbol storage designation command is sent to the performance control board 130, and the first image display device 70 displays a number of first reservation icons corresponding to the first special symbol reservation number (U1).

In step S230-7, the main CPU 110a searches for available storage units in the first special pattern determination information storage area, starting from the first storage unit, and stores the special pattern determination information acquired in step S230-3 in the available storage unit.

In step S230-8, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the game is currently in a non-time-saving game state. If the game is in a non-time-saving game state, the process proceeds to step S230-9. If the game is not in a non-time-saving game state, the process ends the current first start hole detection switch input process.

The main CPU 110a performs a first pre-determination process in step S230-9. In this first pre-determination process, the pre-determination table shown in FIG. 35 is referenced, and the currently acquired special symbol determination information is pre-determined before the first special symbol variation display is performed, and a first start port winning designation command is generated to notify the performance control board 130 of the result of the pre-determination (special symbol planned variation pattern).

In step S230-10, the main CPU 110a sets the first start port winning designation command generated in step S230-9 above in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c.

This allows the first start winning information to be sent to the presentation control board 130 as a first start opening winning designation command, and the sub-CPU 130a of the presentation control board 130 that receives the first start opening winning designation command can execute a pre-reading notice (e.g., a continuous notice performance, an icon change performance) that gives the player the expectation that a jackpot game will be played over one or more variable displays before the variable display of the first special pattern corresponding to the first start opening winning designation command begins.

The second start hole detection switch input process is also processed in the same way as the first start hole detection switch input process, so the first start hole detection switch 45a, 3 prize ball counter, first special symbol reserved number (U1), first special symbol determination information reserved memory area, non-time-saving play state, first advance determination process, and first start hole winning designation command can be read as second start hole detection switch 47a, 2 prize ball counter, second special symbol reserved number (U2), second special symbol determination information reserved memory area, time-saving play state, second advance determination process, and second start hole winning designation command.

In this embodiment, the upper limit of the second special drawing reservation number (U2) is "4", but it may be more or less than this. Also, the upper limit of the second special drawing reservation number may be lower than the upper limit of the first special drawing reservation number. Furthermore, the second reservation memory itself may be eliminated by storing the special drawing determination information only in the 0th memory section of the second special drawing determination information storage area.

(Special diagram special electric control processing of the main control board)
The special pattern special voltage control process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to Fig. 61. Fig. 61 is a flowchart showing the special pattern special voltage control process in the main control board 110.

First, in step S301, the main CPU 110a loads the value of the special chart special power processing data, and in step S302, references the branch destination address from the loaded special chart special power processing data, executes the process corresponding to the branch destination address, and ends the current special chart special power control process.

Specifically, if the special symbol special line processing data = 0, a special symbol memory determination process (step S310) is executed to start the variable display of the special symbol based on the reserved memory, if the special symbol special line processing data = 1, a special symbol variable process (step S320) is executed to stop the display of the special symbol as the variable time elapses, if the special symbol special line processing data = 2, a special symbol stop process (step S330) is executed to transition to the jackpot game depending on the elapse of the stop time and the type of special symbol that has been stopped, if the special symbol special line processing data = 3, a jackpot game process (step S340) is executed to execute the jackpot game, and if the special symbol special line processing data = 4, a jackpot game end process (step S350) is executed to end the jackpot game. Details of the special symbol memory determination process will be described later.

This "special chart special electricity processing data" is set as necessary within each subroutine of the special chart special electricity control processing, as described below, so that the subroutines required for that game are processed appropriately.

(Special pattern memory determination process of the main control board)
The special symbol storage determination process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to Fig. 62. Fig. 62 is a flow chart showing the special symbol storage determination process in the main control board 110.

First, in step S310-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the special symbol is being displayed in a changing state. If the special symbol is being displayed in a changing state, the main CPU 110a ends the current special symbol memory determination process, and if the special symbol is not being displayed in a changing state, the process proceeds to step S310-2.

In step S310-2, the main CPU 110a determines whether the number of reserved second special drawings (U2) is 1 or greater. If the number of reserved second special drawings (U2) is 1 or greater, the process proceeds to step S310-3. If the number of reserved second special drawings (U2) is not 1 or greater, the process proceeds to step S310-4.

In step S310-3, the main CPU 110a updates the second special symbol reserved number (U2) by subtracting "1", and in step S310-6, sets a special symbol storage command corresponding to the second special symbol reserved number (U2) after subtraction in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the special symbol storage command is sent to the performance control board 130, and processing is performed to update the reserved icon displayed on the first image display device 70 and the display of the icon.

In step S310-7, the main CPU 110a sets a game state designation command corresponding to the current game state in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S310-8, shifts the data stored in the second special pattern determination information storage area, shifting the special pattern determination information stored in the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit to the previous storage unit.

For example, the special pattern determination information stored in the fourth memory section of the second special pattern determination information holding memory area is shifted to the third memory section of the second special pattern determination information holding memory area. In addition, the special pattern determination information stored in the first memory section of the second special pattern determination information holding memory area is shifted to the zeroth memory section, which is the special pattern determination information execution memory area, and the special pattern determination information used in the previous game that was stored in the zeroth memory section is erased.

On the other hand, in step S310-4, the main CPU 110a determines whether the number of reserved first special drawings (U1) is 1 or more. If the number of reserved first special drawings (U1) is 1 or more, the process proceeds to step S310-5, and if the number of reserved first special drawings (U1) is not 1 or more, the process proceeds to step S319-1.

The main CPU 110a updates the first special symbol reserved number (U1) by subtracting "1" in step S310-5, and sets a special symbol storage command corresponding to the first special symbol reserved number (U1) after subtraction in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c in step S310-6. This causes the special symbol storage command to be sent to the performance control board 130, and processing is performed to update the reserved icon and the display of the icon displayed on the first image display device 70.

In step S310-7, the main CPU 110a sets a game state designation command corresponding to the current game state in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S310-8, shifts the data stored in the first special symbol reserve memory area, shifting the special symbol determination information stored in the first memory unit to the fourth memory unit to the previous memory unit.

For example, the special symbol determination information stored in the fourth memory section of the first special symbol reserve memory area is shifted to the third memory section of the first special symbol reserve memory area. In addition, the special symbol determination information stored in the first memory section of the first special symbol reserve memory area is shifted to the zeroth memory section, which is the special symbol determination information execution memory area, and the special symbol determination information used in the previous game that was stored in the zeroth memory section is erased.

In addition, in conjunction with the shifting process of the special symbol determination information in step S310-8, special symbol reserved display data indicating the first special symbol reserved number (U1) and the second special symbol reserved number (U2) after subtraction is set in a specified area of the main RAM 110c. This updates the display contents of the first special symbol reserved indicator 63 and the second special symbol reserved indicator 64.

In addition, in this embodiment, the second special chart determination information reserve memory area is shifted with priority over the first special chart determination information reserve memory area in steps S310-2 to S310-8 (the second special chart reserved number is subtracted with priority over the first special chart reserved number), but the first special chart determination information reserve memory area or the second special chart determination information reserve memory area may be shifted in the order in which the game ball enters the starting hole (the first special chart reserved number and the second special chart reserved number are subtracted in the order of winning), or the first special chart determination information reserve memory area may be shifted with priority over the second special chart determination information reserve memory area (the first special chart reserved number is subtracted with priority over the second special chart reserved number).

In step S311, the main CPU 110a executes a jackpot determination process to determine whether or not a jackpot has been reached and the special symbol stop data for the special symbol based on the special symbol determination information stored in the 0th memory unit, which is the special symbol determination information execution memory area.

In step S312, the main CPU 110a sets a special symbol designation command corresponding to the type of special symbol determined in the big win determination process in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. This causes the special symbol designation command to be sent to the performance control board 130, and processing is performed to determine the performance symbol 70a that will be displayed in a stopped state as a result of the variable performance.

In step S313, the main CPU 110a performs a special pattern change pattern determination process to determine the change pattern (change time) of the special pattern based on the special pattern determination information stored in the 0th memory unit, which is the special pattern determination information execution memory area. The details of the special pattern change pattern determination process will be described later.

In step S314, the main CPU 110a sets a special pattern change pattern designation command corresponding to the type of special pattern change pattern determined in the special pattern change pattern determination process in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. This causes the special pattern change pattern designation command to be sent to the performance control board 130, and processing is performed to determine the change performance pattern, which is the performance mode of the change performance performed during the special pattern change display.

In step S315, the main CPU 110a sets the special symbol fluctuation time (counter value) corresponding to the type of special symbol fluctuation pattern determined in the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination process in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S316 starts displaying the fluctuation of the special symbol. As a result, the data creation process in step S700 creates LED lighting data for displaying the fluctuation of the special symbol, and the created lighting data is output in the output control process in step S750, thereby displaying the fluctuation of the special symbol on the first special symbol display device 60 or the second special symbol display device 61.

In step S317, the main CPU 110a clears the customer waiting state flag to end the customer waiting state, and in step S318, sets the special symbol special signal processing data to "1" and ends this special symbol memory determination process.

(Main control board acquisition upper limit management process)
The earned upper limit management process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to Fig. 63. Fig. 63 is a flowchart showing the earned upper limit management process of the main control board 110.

First, the main CPU 110a performs an increment counter update process in step S450-1. Specifically, the main CPU 110a performs a process to update the increment counter in accordance with the number of payouts (number of acquired balls) to be paid out as a result of game balls entering various winning ports, the number of outs (number of shot balls) discharged from the game area 5a (shot into the game area), etc. Details of the increment counter update process will be described later using FIG. 64.

In step S450-2, the main CPU 110a performs a maximum increase update process. Specifically, the main CPU 110a refers to an increase counter (also called an "MY counter") provided in the main RAM 110c, and updates the maximum increase (information relating to the maximum increase stored in the main RAM 110c) if the value of the increase counter is greater than the (current) maximum increase (also called "maximum MY").

The main CPU 110a performs output control processing in step S450-3. Specifically, in order to send information related to the maximum increase to the performance control board 130, the main CPU 110a sets a maximum increase command in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c.

The maximum increase command may be sent periodically to the performance control board 130, or it may not be sent before the maximum increase reaches a specified value (e.g., 90,000), but may be sent periodically after the specified value is reached.

The main CPU 110a performs an acquisition upper limit device activation determination process in step S450-4. Specifically, it determines whether the maximum increase reaches a predetermined value (e.g., 95,000), and if the maximum increase reaches the predetermined value (e.g., 95,000), it performs a process to activate the acquisition upper limit device. The details of the acquisition upper limit device activation determination process will be described later using FIG. 65. Then, the current acquisition upper limit device activation determination process ends.

(Main control board increment counter update process)
The increment counter update process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to Fig. 64. Fig. 64 is a flow chart showing the increment counter update process in the main control board 110.

First, in step S450-1-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether there is general prize opening winning information indicating that a game ball has won the general prize opening 43. Specifically, it determines whether the 5 prize ball counter updated in the general prize opening detection switch input process in step S210 described above is greater than 0. If there is no general prize opening winning information, the process proceeds to step S450-1-3. If there is general prize opening winning information, in step S450-1-2, the increment counter (MY counter) is added with "5", which is the number of prize balls in the general prize opening 43.

In step S450-1-3, the main CPU 110a determines whether there is any special prize opening winning information indicating that a game ball has won the special prize opening 50. Specifically, it determines whether the 15-ball counter updated in the special prize opening detection switch input process in step S220 described above is greater than 0. If there is no special prize opening winning information, the process proceeds to step S450-1-5. If there is special prize opening winning information, in step S450-1-4, the increment counter (MY counter) is incremented by "15", which is the number of prize balls in the special prize opening 50.

In step S450-1-5, the main CPU 110a determines whether there is first start hole winning information indicating that a game ball has won in the first start hole 45. Specifically, it determines whether the 3 prize ball counter updated in the first start hole detection switch input process in step S230 described above is greater than 0. If there is no first start hole winning information, the process proceeds to step S450-1-7. If there is first start hole winning information, in step S450-1-6, the increment counter (MY counter) is added with "3", which is the number of prize balls in the first start hole 45.

In step S450-1-7, the main CPU 110a determines whether there is second start hole winning information indicating that a game ball has won in the second start hole 47. Specifically, it determines whether the 2 prize ball counter updated in the second start hole detection switch input process in step S240 described above is greater than 0. If there is no second start hole winning information, the process proceeds to step S450-1-9. If there is second start hole winning information, in step S450-1-8, the increment counter (MY counter) is added with "2", which is the number of prize balls in the second start hole 47.

In step S450-1-9, the main CPU 110a determines whether there is out ball detection information indicating that a game ball has entered the out hole 39. Specifically, it determines whether the out ball detection counter updated in the out detection switch input process in step S260 described above is greater than 0. If there is no out ball detection information, the current increment counter update process is terminated, and if there is out ball detection information, in step S450-1-10, it determines whether the increment counter (MY counter) is greater than "0". If the increment counter is not greater than "0", that is, if it is "0", the current increment counter update process is terminated, and if the increment counter is greater than "0", in step S450-1-11, "1" is subtracted from the increment counter and the current increment counter update process is terminated.

The "increase counter" is a counter for calculating the maximum increase (also called "maximum MY"). When the game establishment is opened (when the game machine 1 is turned on), the value of the increase counter is "0" and the value of the maximum increase is also "0". For example, when a game is started after the game establishment is opened and a game ball shot into the game area 5a wins in various winning holes (general winning hole 43, first start hole 45, second start hole 47, large winning hole 50), the increase counter is incremented by the number of winning balls. On the other hand, when a game ball shot into the game area 5a flows into the outlet 39, if the increase counter is a value greater than "0", the increase counter is decremented by 1, and if the increase counter is "0", the increase counter remains at "0" without being decremented. Therefore, when a big win game is executed in which a game ball can win in the large winning hole 50, the value of the increase counter changes significantly. For example, if 100 game balls are shot during a jackpot game that starts with the increment counter at "0," and 1,500 prize balls are awarded as a result of the launch of 100 game balls, a net 1,400 game balls will have been acquired, and the increment counter value will be "1,400." In the maximum increment update process (step S450-2) executed at this time, if the stored maximum increment is smaller than "1,400," the maximum increment is updated to "1,400." After that, multiple jackpot games are executed before the increment counter value is reduced to "0," and the increment counter value gradually increases to "95,000" or greater. When the maximum increment also becomes "95,000" or greater, the acquisition upper limit device will be activated.

The increment counter is set in the information RWM area, and the upper limit of the count that can be stored is "95013". For example, when one game ball is shot when the increment counter value is "94999", the increment counter value is updated to "94998", and when one game ball enters the large prize winning port 50 (10 prize balls) at this time, the increment counter value becomes "95008". Thus, according to the gaming machine of this embodiment, the condition for the winning upper limit device to operate is that the increment counter value reaches "95000", but due to differences in the number of prize balls for each prize winning port and winning conditions, it is rare for the increment counter to actually end counting at exactly "95000", and there are cases where the increment counter exceeds "95000". Therefore, for example, the increment counter can be counted up to "95013" (a margin is provided), and counting and storing beyond "95013" is not performed. The reason for the number being "95013" is that the increment counter is designed to be compatible with gaming machines equipped with specifications that can award the maximum number of prize balls "15" for one winning as stipulated by the rules of the gaming machine after one game ball is shot and the increment counter value is updated to "94998" when the increment counter value is "94999". Since the maximum number of prize balls for the gaming machine in this embodiment is "10" (the prize balls for the large prize opening 50), the upper limit value that can be counted and stored by the increment counter should be "95008". However, if a gaming machine equipped with a specification that can award the maximum number of prize balls "15" is to be developed and designed in the future, the upper limit value that can be counted and stored by the increment counter should be set to "95013" from the beginning, which can reduce the effort required for design changes. However, the upper limit value that can be counted and stored by the increment counter may be set to a value that takes into account the maximum number of prize balls for each gaming machine.

Although it has been stated that counts exceeding "95013" will not be stored (an upper limit has been set for the values that can be stored), it is not necessary to set an upper limit. For example, if a jackpot game is started when the increment counter is "94990", the increment counter may be increased by "1400" in the above example, so that the increment counter becomes "96390". In other words, even after the increment counter reaches "95000" during a jackpot game, the increment counter may continue to be updated until the jackpot game ends (until the win limit device is activated).

When the increment counter reaches a predetermined value (for example, 90,000), the value of the increment counter is displayed on the third image display device 72 (advance warning is given). The display of the increment counter value is linked to the value of the increment counter in real time. For example, if one win is made, an updated display corresponding to that one win is made. This makes it easy to know how much longer the win limit device will be activated before it is activated, preventing the player from being surprised by the win limit device being activated suddenly without any warning.

The display of the value of the increment counter (advance notification) is not limited to the third image display device 72, but may also be displayed on the second image display device 71 (sub-LCD), the first image display device 70 (main LCD), or the fourth image display device 73 (right-side image display device).

Although the value of the increment counter is displayed, it is also possible to display, for example, "xxxx more shots until the win limit device activates" (a countdown-style advance warning) without displaying the value of the increment counter. In this case, the "xxxx more shots" display may be incremented and decremented when a win or loss occurs.

In addition, after the advance notification is displayed when the increment counter reaches a specified value (e.g., 90,000), it may continue to be displayed until the power supply switch is turned off, regardless of how the value changes thereafter. For example, if an unfavorable situation continues for the player after the increment counter value is displayed, the increment counter may continue to be displayed even if it reaches 80,000. This allows the player to recognize that the player has reached the point where the winning limit device will be activated.

On the other hand, if the player is put in an unfavorable state after the value of the increment counter is displayed, the display of the value of the increment counter may be erased. For example, if the player is put in an unfavorable state after the value of the increment counter is displayed, for example, if the increment counter reaches 89,000, the display of the value of the increment counter may be erased. This prevents the player from misunderstanding that the winning limit device will soon be activated (compared to when the value is displayed once and then continues to be displayed until the power is turned off).

The advance notification may be set to continue displaying even when a notification event type (e.g., an error) described below is being notified. It may also be set to continue displaying during variable display, during jackpot play, or during demo performance. This increases the opportunities for the player to see the advance notification, making it easier to predict when the win limit device will be activated. This prevents the player from being surprised by the sudden activation of the win limit device.

On the other hand, it is preferable to suspend the display during an SP reach or SPSP reach. This allows the player to concentrate on the SP reach or SPSP reach. Also, depending on the type of notification event (e.g., an error) described below, the display may be continued or suspended. For example, if a magnet detection error, unauthorized radio wave detection error, or RWM abnormality error occurs, the display may be suspended, and if a glass frame opening error or inner frame opening error occurs, the display may be continued. This allows proper advance notification.

(Main control board acquisition upper limit device operation determination process)
The earning upper limit device operation determination process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to Fig. 65. Fig. 65 is a flow chart showing the earning upper limit device operation determination process in the main control board 110.

First, in step S450-4-1, the main CPU 110a references the value of the maximum increase number stored in the main RAM 110c. Then, once the maximum increase number value has been referenced, the process proceeds to step S450-4-2.

In step S450-4-2, the main CPU 110a determines whether the maximum increase has reached a predetermined value (e.g., 95,000). If it determines that the maximum increase has reached the predetermined value (e.g., 95,000), it proceeds to step S450-4-3. If it determines that the maximum increase has not reached the predetermined value (e.g., 95,000), it proceeds to step S450-4-9.

In addition, as in this process, the control program (main control program) in which the main CPU 110a determines whether the maximum increase has reached a predetermined value (e.g., 95,000) can also be considered a detection means for detecting specific information that is counted when a counting condition is met.

In step S450-4-3, the main CPU 110a refers to the value of the special symbol special electric processing data and determines whether the value of the special symbol special electric processing data is "3" (during jackpot play). If the value of the special symbol special electric processing data is "3" (during jackpot play), the process proceeds to step S450-4-4. If the value of the special symbol special electric processing data is not "3" (during jackpot play), the process proceeds to step S450-4-5. Note that in the case of the above-mentioned 1 type 2 type or small jackpot rush type, the process may determine whether a small jackpot play or a jackpot play is in progress.

In step S450-4-4, the main CPU 110a turns on the operation recognition flag in a specified area of the main RAM 110c. It is expected that the process will be performed multiple times during a jackpot game, but after the operation recognition flag has been turned on once, it is not necessary to turn it on each time the process is performed (nothing needs to be done in this process). Then, once the operation recognition flag is turned on, the current win limit device operation determination process is terminated.

In step S450-4-9, the main CPU 110a determines whether the activation recognition flag is ON. If the activation recognition flag is ON, the process proceeds to step S450-4-3. If the activation recognition flag is not ON, the process ends for this upper limit acquisition device activation determination.

The "operation recognition flag" is a flag that is turned ON when the maximum increase reaches a predetermined value (e.g., 95,000) but the acquisition upper limit device cannot be activated immediately (e.g., during a jackpot game). By setting this flag, for example, the value of the increase counter can be adjusted in conjunction with the end of a jackpot game (e.g., the value of the increase counter can be set to less than "95,000"), preventing a situation in which the acquisition upper limit activation device does not activate because the value of the increase counter at the end of the jackpot game is "94,900". In other words, once the maximum increase reaches a predetermined value (e.g., 95,000), the acquisition upper limit device will activate even if the value of the increase counter at the end of a subsequent jackpot game is less than "95,000". This leads to healthy play.

In step S450-4-5, the main CPU 110a turns on the acquisition limit device activation flag in the main RAM 110c. As described above, the flag will not be turned off unless the main RAM 110c is initialized (RWM clear process), so the flag will remain even if the control state before the power outage is restored (power is restored).

In step S450-4-5, the main CPU 110a causes the main control board 110 to turn OFF (output) the launch permission signal that permits the launching device to launch game balls. This makes it impossible for the launching device to launch game balls.

In step S450-4-7, the main CPU 110a sets an acquisition limit device activation command. Specifically, in order to send information that the acquisition limit device has been activated to the performance control board 130, the acquisition limit device activation command is set in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. When the performance control board 130 receives this command, it will display, for example, on the first image display device 70, "The acquisition limit device has been activated. Today's game is over" in white text on a black background. This allows the player to recognize that he or she is in a situation where he or she cannot continue playing any further.

In step S450-4-8, the main CPU 110a generates HC/fraud monitoring information indicating that the win limit device has been activated. Specifically, it sets Bit 6 of "Fraud Detection Status 1" (see FIG. 40) to "1" to prepare for sending "HC/fraud monitoring information" in which Bit 6 of "Fraud Detection Status 1" is "1" to the frame control board 120. The HC/fraud monitoring information generated here will be sent to the frame control board 120 in the HC/fraud monitoring information management process described above. This ultimately enables the gaming machine information center to know that the win limit device has been activated.

After the processing of step S450-4-6 is completed, the game progress control (specific control processing) is not performed until the supply of power voltage is completely cut off, and it is impossible to launch the game ball. However, the processing of detecting errors in the main control board 110, the processing of detecting errors in the frame control board 120, and the processing of notifying errors in the performance control board 130 can be executed. For example, if the main control board 110 detects a magnet after the processing of step S450-4-6 is completed, it is possible to notify "Fraud Detection 1 (Magnet Detection Error)" (described later) by audio, image, or illumination. Also, if the frame control board 120 detects unauthorized radio waves after the processing of step S450-4-6 is completed, it is possible to notify "Fraud Detection Error" (described later) by audio, image, or illumination. This allows the security level to be maintained even after the "capture limit device" is activated.

After the processing of step S450-4-6 is completed, any processing related to errors may also be stopped. That is, after the processing of step S450-4-6 is completed, for example, since no prize balls are generated even if game balls enter each winning slot, there is little (or nothing) to be gained even if someone tries to cheat with a magnet or the like, so the processing for detecting errors in the main control board 110 and the frame control board 120 and the processing for receiving and reporting commands related to errors in the performance control board 130 may be stopped. This reduces the control load on each control board.

In addition, after the processing of step S450-4-6 is completed, the progress of the game is not controlled (specific control processing) and it is impossible to launch the game ball, but the function of adjusting the volume and light intensity on the performance control board 130 (volume adjustment and light intensity adjustment by the player) can be executed. This allows for greater freedom in adjusting the volume and light intensity.

After the acquisition limit device is activated, if the power switch 164 is turned off and then only the power switch 164 is turned on without pressing the RWM clear switch 111a, a notification that "the acquisition limit device has been activated, please clear the RWM" is executed. However, if the checksum is determined to be abnormal in step S15 of the main process executed by turning on the power switch 164, for example, an unrecoverable error occurs in step S17, so the processing of step S29 to send the acquisition limit device activation command (a command to execute the above notification) is not executed. In other words, if there is an abnormality in the main RAM 110c, even if the power is turned on after the acquisition limit device is activated, the above notification (acquisition limit device activation notification) is not executed, and an RWM abnormality error is notified. In this case, the processing of step S29 is not executed, so that the acquisition limit device activation notification is not executed by voice notification, screen notification, or illumination notification. This allows the RWM abnormal error to be reported first, even in situations where the RWM needs to be cleared after the earning limit device has been activated, allowing employees to respond quickly.

(Main control board error control processing)
The error control processing of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to Fig. 66. Fig. 66 is a flowchart showing the error control processing in the main control board 110.

First, in step S550-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether the magnet detection flag is not set and whether the first magnetic detection sensor 53a or the second magnetic detection sensor 53b has detected an abnormal magnetic field for a predetermined period of time. If it is determined that an abnormal magnetic field has been detected for the predetermined period of time, the process proceeds to step S550-2. If it is determined that an abnormal magnetic field has not been detected for the predetermined period of time, the process proceeds to step S550-4.

In step S550-2, the main CPU 110a sets a magnet detection flag in the main RAM 110c, and sets a magnet detection designation command in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c in order to transmit information about the magnet detection to the performance control board 130. When the performance control board 130 receives this command, it notifies the user of a magnet detection error. Details of the magnet detection error will be described later.

In step S550-3, the main CPU 110a generates HC/fraud monitoring information indicating that a magnet detection error has occurred. Specifically, it sets Bit 3 of "Fraud Detection Status 1" (see FIG. 40) to "1" to prepare for sending "HC/fraud monitoring information" in which Bit 3 of "Fraud Detection Status 1" is "1" to the frame control board 120. The HC/fraud monitoring information generated here will be sent to the frame control board 120 in the HC/fraud monitoring information management process described above. This allows the gaming machine information center to finally understand that magnet detection has occurred.

In step S550-4, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a mismatch has occurred between the number of winning balls and the number of balls discharged. Specifically, it determines whether or not a mismatch has occurred between the number of game balls that have entered the various winning ports (general winning port 43, first starting port 45, second starting port 47, large winning port 50) and the number of game balls that have been discharged from the winning ball flow path through which the winning balls flow (game balls detected by the out ball detection switch 39a). If a mismatch has occurred, the process proceeds to step S550-5; if no mismatch has occurred, the current error control process is terminated.

In step S550-5, the main CPU 110a sets an abnormal winning detection flag in the main RAM 110c, and sets an abnormal winning designation command in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c in order to transmit information on the abnormal winning detection to the performance control board 130. When the performance control board 130 receives this command, it notifies the abnormal winning error. Details of the abnormal winning error will be described later.

In step S550-6, the main CPU 110a generates HC/fraud monitoring information indicating that an abnormal winning error has occurred. Specifically, it sets Bit 4 of "fraud detection state 1" (see FIG. 40) to "1" to prepare for sending "HC/fraud monitoring information" in which Bit 4 of "fraud detection state 1" is "1" to the frame control board 120. The HC/fraud monitoring information generated here will be sent to the frame control board 120 in the HC/fraud monitoring information management process described above. This allows the gaming machine information center to finally understand that magnet detection has been performed. Then, the current error control process ends.

(Main control board HC/fraud monitoring information management processing)
The HC/fraud monitoring information management process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to Fig. 67. Fig. 67 is a flowchart showing the HC/fraud monitoring information management process in the main control board 110.

First, in step S600-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether 108 ms have elapsed. For example, the counter is updated in the time control process of step S110 of the main control board timer interrupt process (every 4 milliseconds), and when it counts to 27 (4 milliseconds x 27 = 108 milliseconds), it is determined that 108 ms have elapsed. Note that the counter starts updating in the first time control process after the interrupt is permitted, and thereafter, when it counts to 27, it is cleared (set to 0) and counts again. If it is determined that 108 ms have elapsed, processing proceeds to step S650-2, and if it is determined that 108 ms have not elapsed, the current HC/fraud monitoring information management process is terminated.

The main CPU 110a notifies gaming machine information (HC/fraud monitoring information) in step S600-2. In other words, the "gaming machine information (HC/fraud monitoring information)" is sent to the frame control board 120 every 108 ms. Note that although the HC/fraud monitoring information management process is executed within the main control board timer interrupt process, it may also be executed within the main control board main process.

In step S600-3, the main CPU 110a increments the "notification counter" provided in the main RAM 110c by "+1". Then, in step S600-4, it is determined whether or not the reception result of the gaming machine information (HC/fraud monitoring information) has been responded to. If the reception result of the gaming machine information (HC/fraud monitoring information) has been responded to, the current HC/fraud monitoring information management process is terminated, and if the reception result of the gaming machine information (HC/fraud monitoring information) has not been responded to, the process proceeds to step S600-5. In other words, it is determined whether or not the reception result has been responded (received) from the frame control board 120 as a result of transmitting "gaming machine information (HC/fraud monitoring information)" to the frame control board 120.

In step S600-6, the main CPU 110a sets a communication line disconnection error designation command in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, indicating that an abnormality has occurred in the communication line with the frame control board 120, and ends this HC/fraud monitoring information management process. When the performance control board 130 receives this command, it notifies the user of a communication line disconnection error.

If there is a possibility that a disconnection or the like (communication abnormality) has occurred between the main control board 110 and the frame control board 120, the game progress control (specific control processing) may not be executed, or the launch permission signal may be turned OFF to prevent the launch of the game ball. In this way, it is possible to prevent the game from being played despite the occurrence of a disconnection or the like (communication abnormality) between the main control board 110 and the frame control board 120.

(Message related to communication between the frame control board and the dedicated unit)
68, a description will be given of messages related to communication between the frame control board 120 and the dedicated unit 170. FIG. 68 is a diagram showing a list of messages related to communication between the frame control board 120 and the dedicated unit 170.

As shown in FIG. 68, No. 1 has the message name "Game Machine Information Notification", the transmission direction "Frame Control Board 120 → Dedicated Unit 170", the command "0x01", and the message summary "Notify Game Machine Information". No. 2 has the message name "Counting Notification", the transmission direction "Frame Control Board 120 → Dedicated Unit 170", the command "0x02", and the message summary "Notify Counting Information". No. 3 has the message name "Lending Notification", the transmission direction "Dedicated Unit 170 → Frame Control Board 120", the command "0x13", and the message summary "Notify Lending Information". No. 4 has the message name "Lending Receipt Result Response", the transmission direction "Frame Control Board 120 → Dedicated Unit 170", the command "0x03", and the message summary "Respond to Lending Information Receipt Result". In this case, "gaming machine information" refers to "HC/fraud monitoring information" and "gaming machine performance information."

(Game machine information notification transmitted from the frame control board to the dedicated unit)
69, a gaming machine information notification transmitted from the frame control board 120 to the dedicated unit 170 will be described. FIG. 69 is a diagram showing the gaming machine information notification.

The "gaming machine information notification" is configured as shown in FIG. 69. No. 1 is the data name "message length" and the contents are "0x12-0x39". No. 2 is the data name "command" and the contents are "0x01". No. 3 is the data name "communication serial number" and the contents are "sequence number: 0x00-0xFF (0-255)". No. 4 is the data name "gaming machine type" related to the gaming machine information and the contents are "type of gaming machine". The gaming machine type is the same as that explained in the gaming machine installation information above. No. 5 is the data name "gaming machine information type" and the contents are "0x00: gaming machine performance information, 0x01: gaming machine installation information, 0x02: hall control/fraud monitoring information". No. 6. are data names related to gaming machine installation information: "Gaming Machine Performance Information," "Gaming Machine Installation Information," and "Hall Control/Fraud Monitoring Information." The contents of gaming machine performance information, gaming machine installation information, and hall control/fraud monitoring information will be described later. No. 7 has the data name "Checksum" and the contents "-".

(Machine performance information transmitted from the frame control board to the dedicated unit)
The gaming machine information transmitted from the frame control board 120 to the dedicated unit 170 will be described with reference to Fig. 70. Fig. 70 is a diagram showing gaming machine performance information.

The gaming machine performance information is made up of 10 pieces of data. The first piece is named "Total number of game balls fired" and has the content "0x000000-0xFFFFFF (0-16777215 balls)". The second piece is named "Total number of game balls acquired (total number of winning balls)" and has the content "0x000000-0xFFFFFF (0-16777215 balls)". The third piece is named "Ball payout rate" and has the content "0x0000-0xFFFF (0%-65535%)". The fourth piece is named "Number of game balls acquired per minute (low base: non-time-saving state)" and has the content "0x00-0xFFFF (0 balls-65535 balls)". The fifth piece is named "Ratio of game devices" and has the content "0x00-0x64 (0%-100%)". The sixth has the data name "Continuous feature ratio" and the content "0x00-0x64 (0%-100%)". The seventh has the data name "Number of jackpots" and the content "0x0000-0xFFFF (0-65535 times)". The eighth has the data name "Maximum ball payout" and the content "0x00000-0xFFFFFF (0 balls-16777215 balls)". The ninth has the data name "Reserve" and the content "Reserve (fixed at 0x00)". The tenth has the data name "Reserved" and the content "Used on SC board (fixed at 0x00)".

The "ball payout rate" is a value calculated by: total number of game balls acquired ÷ total number of game balls fired × 100; the "number of game balls acquired per minute" is the number of game balls acquired in any one minute in a low base (non-time-saving) state; the "role ratio" is a value calculated by: number of game balls acquired that are not the result of winning at a general winning port (number of game balls acquired in auxiliary games, small win games, and jackpot games) ÷ total number of game balls acquired × 100; the "consecutive role ratio" is a value calculated by: number of game balls acquired in jackpot games ÷ total number of game balls acquired × 100; and the "maximum ball payout" is the largest positive value (difference in number of balls) while the counter, which adds the number of prize balls (number of game balls acquired) each time a prize ball is awarded based on a winning at a winning port and subtracts one each time a game ball is fired into the game area, with "0" as the lower limit, is a positive value ("1" or more) (until it reaches "0"). In other words, if we think of it as a slump graph that rises to the right as prize balls are awarded and falls to the right as game balls are released, it is the value of the number of game balls won (the difference in number of balls) when the slump graph reaches its peak from the point when the right-sloping graph begins to rise as prize balls are awarded until the slump graph returns to the starting point again.

(Machine installation information transmitted from the frame control board to the dedicated unit)
The gaming machine installation information transmitted from the frame control board 120 to the dedicated unit 170 will be described with reference to Fig. 71. Fig. 71 is a diagram showing the gaming machine installation information.

The gaming machine installation information is made up of six pieces of data. The first is named "Main control chip ID number" and has the content "Main control chip ID number of gaming machine". The second is named "Main control chip manufacturer code" and has the content "Manufacturer code written in the management area of the main control chip". The third is named "Main control chip product code" and has the content "Product code written in the management area of the main control chip". Although the main control chip ID number is omitted in the drawing, it is the ID number for each manufacturer of the main control chip. For example, if the main control chip is from manufacturer A, a total of 9 bytes of data consisting of the chip individual number "23456789" + identification code is transmitted via telegram, and if the main control chip is from manufacturer B, a total of 9 bytes of data consisting of the chip individual number "45678912" + identification code is transmitted via telegram.

The fourth has the data name "Frame control chip ID number" and the content "Frame control chip ID number of the gaming machine." The fifth has the data name "Frame control chip manufacturer code" and the content "Manufacturer code written in the management area of the frame control chip." The sixth has the data name "Frame control chip product code" and the content "Product code written in the management area of the frame control chip." Although the frame control chip ID number is omitted in the drawing, it is the ID number for each manufacturer of the frame control chip. For example, in the case of a frame control chip from manufacturer A, a total of 9 bytes of data consisting of the chip individual number "34567891" + identification code is transmitted via telegram, and in the case of a frame control chip from manufacturer B, a total of 9 bytes of data consisting of the chip individual number "56789123" + identification code is transmitted via telegram.

(Hole control and fraud monitoring information sent from the frame control board to the dedicated unit)
The hole control/irregularity monitoring information transmitted from the frame control board 120 to the dedicated unit 170 will be described with reference to Fig. 72. Fig. 72 is a diagram showing the hole control/irregularity monitoring information.

The hall control/fraud monitoring information is made up of 10 pieces of data. The first is named "Number of game balls" and has the content "Current number of game balls (owned by the player): 0x000000-0x301B0F (0-990000 balls)." The second is named "Number of fired balls" and has the content "Number of fired balls: 0x80-0x7F (-128-127 balls)." The third is named "Total number of winning balls" and has the content "Total number of winning balls in count information 1-n x number of winning balls: 0x00-0xFF (0-255 balls)."

The fourth has the data name "Main control state 1" and the contents are "Bit 0: jackpot 1, Bit 1: jackpot 2, Bit 2: jackpot 3, Bit 3: gaming machine status signal 1, Bit 4: gaming machine status signal 2, Bit 5: gaming machine status signal 3, Bit 6: gaming machine status signal 4, Bit 7: unused. Specifically, the ON "1" and OFF "0" of Bit 0 to Bit 2 are used to notify whether a jackpot game is not being played or which of the seven types of jackpot games is being played, and the ON and OFF of Bit 3 to Bit 6 are used to notify which of the 16 types of game states is being played. The details of Main control state 1 have been explained above, so a detailed explanation will be omitted here.

The fifth has the data name "Main Control State 2" and the contents "Bit 0: during jackpot play + time-saving or advantageous state, Bit 1: high probability, Bit 2: time-saving or advantageous state, Bits 3-7: unused." For example, during jackpot play, Bit 0 is ON "1" and Bit 1 and Bit 2 are OFF "0", and during time-saving play, Bit 0 and Bit 2 are ON "1" and Bit 1 is OFF "0". Details of Main Control State 2 have been explained above, so a detailed explanation will be omitted here.

The sixth item has the data name "Game machine error status" and the contents "Bit 0 to Bit 5: Error code, Bit 6: Frame control/Main control, Bit 7: Alarm only/Alarm + Hall control output." For example, if an error is detected by the frame control board 120, Bit 6 will be OFF "0", and if the error is an alarm + Hall control output, Bit 7 will be ON "1".

The seventh item has the data name "Fraud detection status 1 (main control)" and the contents "Bit 0: setting change signal, Bit 2: setting confirmation signal, Bit 2: RWM clear signal, Bit 3: fraud detection signal 1, Bit 4: fraud detection signal 2, Bit 5: fraud detection signal 3, Bit 6: acquisition limit device operating signal, Bit 7: unused." Specifically, it indicates whether an event controlled or detected by the main control board 110 has occurred; for example, if a setting change is being made, Bit 0 is ON "1," and if an error corresponding to fraud detection signal 1 has occurred, Bit 3 is ON "1." Details of fraud detection status 1 have been explained above, so a detailed explanation will be omitted here.

The eighth has the data name "Fraud detection state 2 (frame control)" and the contents "Bit 0: glass frame open, Bit 1: inner frame open, Bit 2: illegal radio wave detected, Bit 3: number of game balls cleared detected, Bit 4: abnormal number of winning balls detected, Bit 5: abnormal number of shot balls detected, Bit 6 to Bit 7: unused." Specifically, it indicates the occurrence or non-occurrence of an event detected by the frame control board 120; for example, when the glass frame 4 is open, Bit 0 is ON "1," and when the number of game balls has been cleared, Bit 3 is ON "1." Details of fraud detection state 2 will be described later.

The ninth item has the data name "Fraud detection state 3 (frame control)" and the contents "Bit 0: small ball detected, Bit 1: iron ball detected, Bit 2 to Bit 7: unused." For example, if a small ball, which is a gaming ball smaller than a normal-sized gaming ball, is detected, Bit 0 will be ON "1." Details of fraud detection state 2 will be given later.

The tenth item has the data name "Game Information". Specifically, the data name is "Number of Game Information", the content is "Number of Type Information/Count Information (n): n = 0x00-0x0F (0-15)", the data name is "Type Information 1", the content is "Type Information 1", the data name is "Count Information 1", the content is "Count Information 1", the data name is "Type Information n", the content is "Type Information n", the data name is "Count Information n", the content is "Count Information n".

Specifically, in the first example, when one game ball enters the first start opening 45, the "count information" refers to "data indicating the first start opening 45," "data indicating the number of winning balls (1)," and "data indicating the number of prize balls (3)." In the second example, when one game ball enters the large prize opening 50, the "count information" refers to "data indicating the large prize opening 50," "data indicating the number of winning balls (1)," and "data indicating the number of prize balls (15)." In the third example, when one game ball passes through the out ball detection switch 39a, the "count information" refers to "data indicating the out ball detection switch 39a" and "data indicating the number of passing balls (1)." The details of the game information have been described above, so a detailed explanation will be omitted here.

(Hall control/fraud monitoring information fraud detection status)
The fraud detection state of the hole control and fraud monitoring information will be described with reference to Fig. 73. Fig. 73(a) is a diagram showing a fraud detection state 2, and Fig. 73(b) is a diagram showing a fraud detection state 3.

"Fraud detection state 2" is Bit 0's name "Glass frame open" with details "0 = normal, 1 = glass frame open detected", Bit 1's name "Inner frame open" with details "0 = normal, 1 = inner frame open detected", Bit 2's name "Illegal radio wave detected" with details "0 = normal, 1 = illegal radio wave detected", Bit 3's name "Number of game balls cleared detected" with details "0 = normal, 1 = number of game balls cleared detected", Bit 4's name "Abnormal number of winning balls detected" with details "0 = normal, 1 = abnormal number of winning balls detected", Bit 5's name "Abnormal number of fired balls detected" with details "0 = normal, 1 = abnormal number of fired balls detected", and Bits 6 to 7's names "Unused" with details "Fixed at 0".

In "fraud detection state 3," the name of Bit 0 is "small ball detected" and the details are "0 = normal, 1 = small ball detected," the name of Bit 1 is "iron ball detected" and the details are "0 = normal, 1 = iron ball detected," and the names of Bits 2 to 7 are "unused" and the details are "fixed at 0."

(Hall control and fraud monitoring information)
The gaming information of the hole control and fraud monitoring information will be described with reference to Fig. 74. Fig. 74 is a diagram showing the gaming information.

The "game information" is made up of two bytes, "type information (1 byte)" and "count information (1 byte)". Furthermore, the "type information (1 byte)" is made up of "data type (Bit 4 to Bit 7)" and "data number (Bit 0 to Bit 3)".

For example, Bit 4 to Bit 7 "0000 (=0)" are the type name "unused" and the content "-", Bit 4 to Bit 7 "0001 (=1)" are the type name "winning at the starting gate" and the content "notification that a prize has been won at the starting gate", Bit 4 to Bit 7 "0010 (=2)" are the type name "winning at the large prize gate" and the content "notification that a prize has been won at the large prize gate", and Bit 4 to Bit 7 "0011 (=3)" are the type name "winning at the prize gate" and the content "notification that a prize has been won at the prize gate". Bit 4 to Bit 7 “0100 (= 4)” are the type name “All start gate winnings” and the content “Notification of passing through the start gate or normal gate related to the game”. Bit 4 to Bit 7 “0101 (= 5)”, “0110 (= 6)”, “0111 (= 7)”, and “1000 (= 8)” are the type name “Unused” and the content “-”. Bit 4 to Bit 7 “1001 (= 9)” are the type name “Number of times the pattern is determined” and the content “Notification of the number of times the pattern related to the game changes”. Bit 4 to Bit Bit7 “1010 (=10)” is the type name “number of big wins” and the content is “notification that the consecutive operation device of the accessory has been activated”, Bit4 to Bit7 “1011 (=11)” is the type name “unused” and the content is “-”, Bit4 to Bit7 “1100 (=12)” is the type name “number of times of the accessory (number of times of opening of the large prize opening)” and the content is “notification of opening of the large prize opening when the consecutive operation device of the accessory has not been activated, in case of wanting to set the number of times of opening of the large prize opening at the time of a small win as the start number” ( “Big Win Game 3 (4 Rounds)” in FIG. 36 ). The first round of "1101 (=13)" is a small win game, Bit 4 to Bit 7 "1101 (=13)" are type name "passing through a specific area" and content "notifying that a specific area has been passed" (see "Specific Area" in Figure 36), Bit 4 to Bit 7 "1110 (=14)" are type name "reserve" and content "used to notify data other than data types 1 to 4, 9, 10, 12, and 13", and Bit 4 to Bit 7 "1111 (=15)" are type name "unused" and content "-".

If the "Data Type (Bit 4 to Bit 7)" is "Winning at Start Gate", the "Data Number (Bit 0 to Bit 3)" will notify the content (start gate number) of Bit 0 to Bit 3 "0001 (= 1)" (winning at start gate 1), "0010 (= 2)" (winning at start gate 2), or "0011 (= 3)" (winning at start gate 3) (other than the above are unused). For example, if a game ball wins at the first start gate 45, the type information (1 byte) of "Data Type (Bit 4 to Bit 7)" being "0001" and "Data Number (Bit 0 to Bit 3)" being "0001" will be notified.

If the "Data Type (Bits 4 to 7)" is "Winning at the Large Prize Gate", then the content (large prize gate number) is notified as either Bit 0 to Bit 3 "0001 (=1)" (winning at large prize gate 1) or "0010 (=1)" (winning at large prize gate 2) (other than the above are unused). For example, if a game ball wins at large prize gate 50, type information (1 byte) is notified with "Data Type (Bits 4 to 7)" as "0010 (=2)" and "Data Number (Bits 0 to 3)" as "0001 (=1)".

If the "Data Type (Bit 4 to Bit 7)" is "Winning at a Winning Gate", the content (winning gate number) is notified as one of the following bits 0 to 3: "0001 (=1)" (winning at winning gate 1), "0010 (=2)" (winning at winning gate 2), ... "1111 (=15)" (winning at winning gate 15) ("0000 (=0)" is unused). For example, if a game ball wins at the general winning gate 43 located at the bottom right of the decorative frame 40, the type information (1 byte) is notified, with "Data Type (Bit 4 to Bit 7)" being "0011 (=3)" and "Data Number (Bit 0 to Bit 3)" being "0001 (=1)".

If the "Data Type (Bit 4 to Bit 7)" is "Winning at all start gates", Bit 0 to Bit 3 "0001 (=1)" (winning or passing) is notified as the content (others are unused). For example, if the game ball wins at the first start gate 45, type information (1 byte) consisting of "Data Type (Bit 4 to Bit 7)" being "0100 (=4)" and "Data Number (Bit 0 to Bit 3)" being "0001 (=1)" is notified, and if the game ball passes through the normal gate 44, type information (1 byte) consisting of "Data Type (Bit 4 to Bit 7)" being "0100 (=4)" and "Data Number (Bit 0 to Bit 3)" being "0001 (=1)" is notified.

If the "Data Type (Bit 4 to Bit 7)" is the "Number of times a pattern has been confirmed," then the contents notify Bit 0 to Bit 3 "0001 (=1)" (the number of times the patterns related to the game (special patterns, normal patterns) have been confirmed) (the rest are unused). For example, if the first special pattern is stopped and displayed, type information (1 byte) consisting of "Data Type (Bit 4 to Bit 7)" being "1001 (=9)" and "Data Number (Bit 0 to Bit 3)" being "0001 (=1)" is notified, and similar type information is notified when the second special pattern is stopped and displayed. Similarly, similar type information is notified when a normal pattern is stopped and displayed.

If the "Data Type (Bit 4 to Bit 7)" is the "Number of jackpots", then the contents are notified as Bit 0 to Bit 3 "0001 (=1)" (the continuous operation device for the special feature is activated) (the rest are unused). For example, when the first jackpot (see Figure 33) is executed, the type information (1 byte) is notified, with the "Data Type (Bit 4 to Bit 7)" being "1010 (=10)" and the "Data Number (Bit 0 to Bit 3)" being "0001 (=1)".

If the "Data Type (Bit 4 to Bit 7)" is the "Number of Features (Number of Times the Big Win Gate is Opened)", then Bit 0 to Bit 3 "0001 (=1)" (Feature 1) is notified as the content (the rest are unused). For example, if the "Big Win Game 3" described in FIG. 36 is executed, type information (1 byte) consisting of "Data Type (Bit 4 to Bit 7)" being "1100 (=12)" and "Data Number (Bit 0 to Bit 3)" being "0001 (=1)" is notified.

If the "Data Type (Bit 4 to Bit 7)" is "Passing through a specific area", Bit 0 to Bit 3 "0001 (=1)" (specific area 1) is notified as the content (the rest are unused). For example, when the "Big Win Game 3" described in FIG. 36 is executed and the game ball passes through a specific area, type information (1 byte) consisting of "Data Type (Bit 4 to Bit 7)" being "1101 (=13)" and "Data Number (Bit 0 to Bit 3)" being "0001 (=1)" is notified.

In addition, to touch upon the count information in the case of "passing through a specific area," as shown in FIG. 43, if Bit 4 to Bit 7 are "unused" and "fixed to 0," and Bit 0 to Bit 3 are "0001 (=1)," it is notified that "the number of times the specific area has been passed" (the others are unused). In other words, as shown in Example 1) of FIG. 43, when the game ball passes through specific area 1 once, game information "0xD101" is notified, which is broken down into type information (1 byte) consisting of "data type (Bit 4 to Bit 7)" being "1101 (=13)" and "data number (Bit 0 to Bit 3)" being "0001 (=1)," and count information (1 byte) consisting of "unused (Bit 4 to Bit 7)" being "0000 (=0)" and "number of passes (Bit 0 to Bit 3)" being "0001 (=1)" (1 time).

If the "Data Type (Bit 4 to Bit 7)" is "Reserve", the contents will be notified as either "0001 (=1)", "0010 (=2)", "0011 (=3)", or "0100 (=4)" (reserve number) for Bit 0 to Bit 3 (the rest are unused).

(Counting notification sent from the frame control board to the dedicated unit)
A counting notification transmitted from the frame control board 120 to the dedicated unit 170 will be described with reference to Fig. 75. Fig. 75 is a diagram showing the counting notification.

The "Counting Notification" is configured as shown in Figure 75. No. 1 has the data name "Message Length" and the content "0x07". No. 2 has the data name "Command" and the content "0x02". No. 3 has the data name "Counting Serial Number" and the content "Sequence Number: 0x00-0xFF (0-255)". No. 4 has the data name "Counted Balls" and the content "Counted Balls: 0x00-0xFF (0-255)". No. 5 has the data name "Cumulative Counted Balls" and the content "Cumulative Counted Balls: 0x00-0xFFFF (0-65,535 balls)". No. 6 has the data name "Checksum" and the content "-".

(Lending notification sent from the dedicated unit to the frame control board)
A description will be given of the lending notification transmitted from the dedicated unit 170 to the frame control board 120 with reference to Fig. 76. Fig. 76 is a diagram showing the lending notification.

The "loan notification" is configured as shown in Figure 76. No. 1 has the data name "Message length" and the content "0x05". No. 2 has the data name "Command" and the content "0x13". No. 3 has the data name "Loan serial number" and the content "Sequence number: 0x00-0xFF (0-255)". No. 4 has the data name "Number of loaned balls" and the content "Number of loaned balls: 0x00-0xFF (0-255 balls)". No. 5 has the data name "Checksum" and the content "-".

(Lending receipt result response sent from the frame control board to the dedicated unit)
The loan receipt result response transmitted from the frame control board 120 to the dedicated unit 170 will be described with reference to Fig. 77. Fig. 77 is a diagram showing the loan receipt result response.

The "loan receipt result response" is configured as shown in Figure 77. No. 1 has the data name "Message length" and the content "0x05". No. 2 has the data name "Command" and the content "0x03". No. 3 has the "loan serial number" and the content "Sequence number: 0x00 to 0xFF (0 to 255)". No. 4 has the "loan ball count receipt result" and the content "loan ball count receipt result: 0x00 = normal, 0x01 = abnormal (during ball removal operation, when the number of game balls owned by the player is 100,000 or more)". No. 5 has the data name "Checksum" and the content "-".

(Basic communication sequence between the frame control board and the dedicated unit)
Using Figure 78, the basic communication sequence between the frame control board 120 and the dedicated unit 170 will be described.

First, when it is time to send the gaming machine information notification, which arrives every 300 ms, the frame control board 120 sends the gaming machine information notification (serial number = n) to the dedicated unit 170 as the first telegram, and then 90 to 100 ms later, the frame control board 120 sends the counting notification (counting serial number = m) to the dedicated unit 170 as the second telegram. Then, within 170 ms, the dedicated unit 170 sends the loan notification (serial number = k) to the frame control board 120 as the third telegram, and within 10 ms, the frame control board 120 sends the loan receipt result response (loan serial number = k) to the dedicated unit 170 as the fourth telegram, and the loan ball number receipt result is confirmed by the dedicated unit 170.

After that, after 20 ms or more have elapsed since the transmission of the fourth loan receipt result response and 300 ms have elapsed since the transmission of the first gaming machine information notification, the frame control board 120 transmits a gaming machine information notification (serial number = n + 1) as the fifth telegram to the dedicated unit 170. After that, the first to fourth communication sequences are repeated at 300 ms intervals by transmitting and receiving telegrams in the order of counting notification, loan notification, and loan receipt result response.

(Frame control board and dedicated unit start-up sequence 1)
Using Figure 79, we will explain the startup sequence 1 of the frame control board 120 and the dedicated unit 170 (the case where the gaming machine 1 starts up first).

First, when the power to the frame control board 120 and the dedicated unit 170 is off, the VL (power supply for connection confirmation) of the frame control board 120 is OFF, and the VL (power supply for connection confirmation) and PSI (counting valid signal) of the dedicated unit 170 are OFF. Then, when the power to the frame control board 120 and the dedicated unit 170 is turned on at the same time, the gaming machine 1 and the dedicated unit 170 start up.

After that, when the startup of the gaming machine 1 is completed prior to the dedicated unit 170, messages such as gaming machine information notifications and counting notifications are sequentially sent from the frame control board 120 to the dedicated unit 170 as in the basic communication sequence described above, but the dedicated unit 170 is in a state where it cannot receive the sent messages because it is starting up.

When the startup of the dedicated unit 170 is completed, the VL (power supply for connection confirmation) and PSI (counting valid signal) of the dedicated unit 170 are turned ON, and the gaming machine 1 is able to release gaming balls and is able to operate the counting button 20. After that, messages (gaming machine information notification, counting notification, loan notification, loan receipt result response) are repeatedly sent and received between the frame control board 120 and the dedicated unit 170, as in the basic communication sequence with a cycle of 300 ms shown in FIG. 78.

(Frame control board and dedicated unit start-up sequence 2)
Using Figure 80, the startup sequence 2 of the frame control board 120 and the dedicated unit 170 (the case where the dedicated unit 170 starts first) will be described.

First, when the power of the dedicated unit 170 is turned on prior to the gaming machine 1, the dedicated unit 170 starts to start up, and when the startup of the dedicated unit 170 is completed, the VL (power supply for connection confirmation) and PSI (counting valid signal) of the dedicated unit 170 are turned ON, and the dedicated unit 170 enters a state of waiting for connection to the gaming machine 1.

After that, when the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on, the gaming machine 1 starts to start up, and when the startup of the gaming machine 1 is completed, the gaming machine 1 is capable of releasing gaming balls and the operation of the counting button 20 becomes valid. After that, messages (gaming machine information notification, counting notification, loan notification, loan receipt result response) are repeatedly sent and received between the frame control board 120 and the dedicated unit 170 as in the basic communication sequence with a cycle of 300 ms shown in FIG. 78.

(Frame control board and dedicated unit gaming machine information notification sequence 1)
Using Figure 81, we will explain the gaming machine information notification sequence 1 of the frame control board 120 and the dedicated unit 170 (a case in which no gaming information related to a game is held at the time of sending the gaming machine information notification).

First, the dedicated unit 170 is in a state of waiting for connection with the gaming machine 1, and then when the startup of the gaming machine is completed, the gaming machine 1 is able to release gaming balls and the operation of the counting button 20 becomes valid. Then, as in the basic communication sequence with a cycle of 300 ms shown in FIG. 78, messages (gaming machine information notification, counting notification, loan notification, loan receipt result response) are repeatedly sent and received between the frame control board 120 and the dedicated unit 170.

Then, when the timing for notifying the gaming machine installation information arrives 60 s after the completion of startup of the gaming machine 1 and 300 ms after the previous transmission of the gaming machine information notification, the frame control board 120 transmits a gaming machine information notification consisting of the gaming machine installation information to the dedicated unit 170 as the tenth telegram shown in the figure. After that, telegrams (gaming machine information notification, counting notification, loan notification, loan receipt result response) are repeatedly sent and received between the frame control board 120 and the dedicated unit 170 as in the basic communication sequence with a cycle of 300 ms shown in FIG. 78.

In addition, when the timing of the two notifications of gaming machine installation information and gaming machine performance information overlap 180 s after the completion of the start-up of the gaming machine 1 and 300 ms after the transmission of the previous gaming machine information notification, a gaming machine information notification consisting of gaming machine installation information with a higher priority is transmitted as the 11th telegram shown in the figure. After that, telegrams are transmitted and received in the order of counting notification, loan notification, and loan receipt result response, and after 300 ms has elapsed since the previous gaming machine information notification, a gaming machine information notification consisting of gaming machine performance information with a lower priority is transmitted. After that, telegrams (gaming machine information notification, counting notification, loan notification, loan receipt result response) are repeatedly transmitted and received between the frame control board 120 and the dedicated unit 170 as in the basic communication sequence with a cycle of 300 ms shown in FIG. 78.

(Frame control board and dedicated unit gaming machine information notification sequence 2)
Using Figure 82, we will explain the gaming machine information notification sequence 2 of the frame control board 120 and the dedicated unit 170 (the case in which gaming information related to the game is held at the time of sending the gaming machine information notification).

First, the dedicated unit 170 is in a state of waiting for connection with the gaming machine 1, and then when the startup of the gaming machine is completed, the gaming machine 1 is able to release gaming balls and the operation of the counting button 20 becomes valid. Then, as in the basic communication sequence with a cycle of 300 ms shown in FIG. 78, messages (gaming machine information notification, counting notification, loan notification, loan receipt result response) are repeatedly sent and received between the frame control board 120 and the dedicated unit 170.

Then, 60 s after the start-up of the gaming machine 1 is completed and 300 ms after the previous gaming machine information notification is sent, the timing for notifying the gaming machine installation information comes. However, since gaming information related to the game is held at this point, the frame control board 120 sends a gaming machine information notification consisting of hall control and fraud monitoring information including gaming information, rather than gaming machine installation information, to the dedicated unit 170 as the sixth telegram shown in the figure. After that, telegrams are sent and received in the order of counting notification, loan notification, and loan receipt result response, and 300 ms after the previous gaming machine information notification, a gaming machine information notification consisting of gaming machine installation information is sent. After that, telegrams (gaming machine information notification, counting notification, loan notification, loan receipt result response) are repeatedly sent and received between the frame control board 120 and the dedicated unit 170 as in the basic communication sequence with a cycle of 300 ms shown in FIG. 78.

The timing for notifying the gaming machine performance information comes 180 s after the start-up of the gaming machine 1 is complete and 300 ms after the previous gaming machine information notification is sent. However, since gaming information related to the game is held at this point, the frame control board 120 sends a gaming machine information notification consisting of hall control and fraud monitoring information including gaming information, rather than gaming machine performance information, to the dedicated unit 170 as the 15th telegram shown in the figure. After that, telegrams are sent and received in the order of counting notification, loan notification, and loan receipt result response, and a gaming machine information notification consisting of gaming machine performance information is sent 300 ms after the previous gaming machine information notification. After that, telegrams (gaming machine information notification, counting notification, loan notification, loan receipt result response) are repeatedly sent and received between the frame control board 120 and the dedicated unit 170 as in the basic communication sequence with a cycle of 300 ms shown in FIG. 78.

(Frame control board and dedicated unit counting notification sequence 1)
Using Figure 83, we will explain counting notification sequence 1 between the frame control board 120 and the dedicated unit 170 (a case where no communication abnormality occurs between the frame control board 120 and the dedicated unit 170).

First, when the player owns 1000 gaming balls and the number of balls stored by the dedicated unit 170 is 100, the counting button 20 on the gaming machine 1 is pressed. After that, when it is time to send a gaming machine information notification, which arrives every 300 ms, the frame control board 120 sends the gaming machine information notification (serial number = n, number of gaming balls = 1000) to the dedicated unit 170 as the first telegram. After 100 ms has elapsed, 250 balls are subtracted from the number of game balls owned by the player, making it 750, and when a second telegram is sent from the frame control board 120 to the dedicated unit 170 notifying the dedicated unit 170 that the game balls (game value) have been counted (counting serial number = m, number of counted balls = 250, cumulative counted number of balls = 250), the number of balls owned by the player stored in the dedicated unit 170 is added to the counted number, making it 350.

Then, within 170 ms of receiving the counting notification, the dedicated unit 170 sends a third telegram to the frame control board 120 as a loan notification (loan serial number = k, number of loaned balls = 0), and within 10 ms, the frame control board 120 sends a fourth telegram to the dedicated unit 170 as a loan receipt result response (loan serial number = k, loaned ball number receipt result = normal), and the dedicated unit 170 confirms the loaned ball number receipt result.

300 ms after the previous gaming machine information notification is sent, the frame control board 120 sends the dedicated unit 170 a gaming machine information notification (serial number = n+1, number of gaming balls = 750) as the fifth telegram. 100 ms after that, 250 balls are subtracted from the number of gaming balls owned by the player, making it 500, and the frame control board 120 sends the dedicated unit 170 a sixth telegram (counting serial number = m+1, number of counted balls = 250, cumulative counted number of balls = 500) to inform the dedicated unit 170 that the gaming balls (gaming value) have been counted, and the number of balls owned by the player stored in the dedicated unit 170 is increased by 250 (the counted number), making it 600.

Then, within 170 ms of receiving the counting notification, the dedicated unit 170 sends a seventh telegram as a loan notification (loan serial number = k+1, number of loaned balls = 0) to the frame control board 120, and within 10 ms, the frame control board 120 sends an eighth telegram as a loan receipt result response (loan serial number k+1, loaned ball number receipt result = normal) to the dedicated unit 170, and the loaned ball number receipt result is confirmed by the dedicated unit 170.

After that, after the counting button 20 of the gaming machine 1 is released and 300 ms has elapsed since the previous transmission of the gaming machine information notification, the frame control board 120 sends the gaming machine information notification (serial number = n + 2, number of gaming balls = 500) as the ninth telegram to the dedicated unit 170. 100 ms later, the frame control board 120 sends the counting notification (counting serial number = m + 2, number of counted balls = 0, cumulative number of counted balls = 500) as the tenth telegram to the dedicated unit 170.

Then, within 170 ms of receiving the counting notification, the dedicated unit 170 sends the 11th telegram, a loan notification (loan serial number = k+2, loaned ball count = 0), to the frame control board 120, and within 10 ms, the frame control board 120 sends the 12th telegram, a loan receipt result response (loan serial number k+2, loaned ball count receipt result = normal), to the dedicated unit 170, and the loaned ball count receipt result is confirmed by the dedicated unit 170. After that, messages (game machine information notification, counting notification, loan notification, loan receipt result response) are repeatedly sent and received between the frame control board 120 and the dedicated unit 170 as in the basic communication sequence with a 300 ms cycle shown in Figure 78.

(Frame control board and dedicated unit counting notification sequence 2)
Using Figure 84, we will explain counting notification sequence 2 between the frame control board 120 and the dedicated unit 170 (a case where a communication abnormality occurs between the frame control board 120 and the dedicated unit 170).

First, when the player owns 1000 gaming balls and the number of balls stored by the dedicated unit 170 is 100, the counting button 20 on the gaming machine 1 is pressed. After that, when it is time to send a gaming machine information notification, which arrives every 300 ms, the frame control board 120 sends the gaming machine information notification (serial number = n, number of gaming balls = 1000) to the dedicated unit 170 as the first telegram. After 100 ms has elapsed, 250 balls are subtracted from the number of game balls owned by the player, making it 750, and when a second telegram is sent from the frame control board 120 to the dedicated unit 170 notifying the dedicated unit 170 that the game balls (game value) have been counted (counting serial number = m, number of counted balls = 250, cumulative counted number of balls = 250), the number of balls owned by the player stored in the dedicated unit 170 is added to the counted number, making it 350.

Then, within 170 ms of receiving the counting notification, the dedicated unit 170 sends a third telegram to the frame control board 120 as a loan notification (loan serial number = k, number of loaned balls = 0), and within 10 ms, the frame control board 120 sends a fourth telegram to the dedicated unit 170 as a loan receipt result response (loan serial number = k, loaned ball number receipt result = normal), and the dedicated unit 170 confirms the loaned ball number receipt result.

300 ms after the previous gaming machine information notification is sent, the frame control board 120 sends the dedicated unit 170 a gaming machine information notification (serial number = n+1, number of gaming balls = 750) as the fifth electronic message. 100 ms after that, 250 balls are subtracted from the number of gaming balls owned by the player to make it 500, and the frame control board 120 sends the dedicated unit 170 a counting notification (counting serial number = m+1, number of counted balls = 250, cumulative number of counted balls = 500) as the sixth electronic message to inform the dedicated unit 170 that the gaming balls (gaming value) have been counted. However, due to a communication error, the dedicated unit 170 is unable to receive the counting notification, and the number of balls owned by the player stored in the dedicated unit 170 is not updated.

After that, 300 ms after the previous gaming machine information notification was sent, the seventh telegram is sent from the frame control board 120 to the dedicated unit 170, which is a gaming machine information notification (serial number = n + 2, number of gaming balls = 500). However, due to a communication error, the dedicated unit 170 is unable to receive the counting notification, and the number of balls held by the player stored in the dedicated unit 170 is not updated.

Then, 300 ms after the dedicated unit 170 detects the communication abnormality in the gaming machine information notification, the VL (power supply for connection confirmation) of the frame control board 120 turns OFF, and the VL (power supply for connection confirmation) and PSI (counting valid signal) of the dedicated unit 170 turn OFF, and the launch of gaming balls in the gaming machine 1 stops and the operation of the counting button 20 becomes invalid.

After that, 100 ms after the transmission of the gaming machine information notification, it is time to send the counting notification, but at this point, the operation of the counting button 20 is invalid (= the counting button 20 is deemed to have been released), so a counting notification with counted balls = 0 (counting serial number m + 2, counted balls = 0, cumulative counted balls = 500) is sent, but due to a communication error, the dedicated unit 170 is unable to receive the counting notification, and the number of balls held by the player stored in the dedicated unit 170 is not updated. At this time, the dedicated unit 170 is waiting for the error in the CU board to be recovered, and waits until the error is recovered by the gaming store clerk's processing, and when the error is recovered, it turns on the VL (power supply for connection confirmation) and PSI (counting valid signal).

(Frame control board and dedicated unit rental notification sequence 1)
Using Figure 85, we will explain the lending notification sequence 1 between the frame control board 120 and the dedicated unit 170 (the case where no communication abnormality occurs between the frame control board 120 and the dedicated unit 170).

First, when the player owns 50 gaming balls, he presses the loan button on the dedicated unit 170. After that, when it is time to send the gaming machine information notification, which arrives every 300 ms, the frame control board 120 sends the gaming machine information notification (serial number = n, number of gaming balls = 50) as the first telegram to the dedicated unit 170. 100 ms later, the frame control board 120 sends the counting notification (counting serial number = m, number of counted balls = 0, cumulative number of counted balls = 0) as the second telegram to the dedicated unit 170.

Then, within 170 ms of receiving the counting notification, the dedicated unit 170 sends the frame control board 120 a third telegram instructing it to lend game balls (game value) (loan serial number = k, number of loaned balls = 125), and the number of game balls owned by the player stored in the frame control board 120 is added to the number of loaned balls, totaling 175. Within 10 ms, the frame control board 120 sends the dedicated unit 170 a fourth telegram indicating the loan receipt result (loan serial number = k, loaned ball number receipt result = normal), and the dedicated unit 170 confirms the loaned ball number receipt result.

After that, 300 ms after the previous gaming machine information notification was sent, the fifth message is sent from the frame control board 120 to the dedicated unit 170 (serial number n+1, number of gaming balls 175). After that, messages (gaming machine information notification, counting notification, loan notification, loan receipt result response) are repeatedly sent and received between the frame control board 120 and the dedicated unit 170 as in the basic communication sequence with a cycle of 300 ms shown in FIG. 78.

(Frame control board and dedicated unit lending notification sequence 2)
Using Figure 86, we will explain the lending notification sequence 2 between the frame control board 120 and the dedicated unit 170 (a case where a communication abnormality occurs between the frame control board 120 and the dedicated unit 170).

First, when the player owns 50 gaming balls, he presses the loan button on the dedicated unit 170. After that, when it is time to send the gaming machine information notification, which arrives every 300 ms, the frame control board 120 sends the gaming machine information notification (serial number = n, number of gaming balls = 50) as the first telegram to the dedicated unit 170. 100 ms later, the frame control board 120 sends the counting notification (counting serial number = m, number of counted balls = 0, cumulative number of counted balls = 0) as the second telegram to the dedicated unit 170.

Then, within 170 ms of receiving the counting notification, the dedicated unit 170 sends the frame control board 120 a third telegram instructing it to lend game balls (game value) (loan serial number = k, number of loaned balls = 125), and the number of game balls owned by the player stored in the frame control board 120 is increased by 125 loaned balls, making it 175 balls. Within 10 ms, the frame control board 120 sends the dedicated unit 170 a fourth telegram informing it of the loan receipt result (loan serial number = k, loaned ball number receipt result = normal), but a communication error occurs and the dedicated unit 170 is unable to receive the loan receipt result response, and as it has not received the loan receipt result response 10 ms after the loan notification, it determines that the loan is incomplete.

In addition, 300 ms after the previous gaming machine information notification is sent, the fifth telegram is sent from the frame control board 120 to the dedicated unit 170: gaming machine information notification (serial number = n+1, number of gaming balls = 175). 100 ms after that, the sixth telegram is sent from the frame control board 120 to the dedicated unit 170: counting notification (counting serial number = m+1, number of counted balls = 0, cumulative number of counted balls = 0).

Then, within 170 ms from receiving the counting notification, the dedicated unit 170 transmits (resends) to the frame control board 120 a seventh telegram instructing the lending of the same game balls (game value) as the previously transmitted loan notification (loan serial number = k, number of loaned balls = 125). However, since the frame control board 120 has already added the loaned amount to the number of game balls (game value) owned by the player based on the loan notification of loan serial number = k, within 10 ms, the frame control board 120 transmits to the dedicated unit 170 an eighth telegram in response to the loan receipt result (loan serial number = k, loaned ball number receipt result = abnormal). As a result, the dedicated unit 170 checks the loaned ball number receipt result, and since the serial number matches the previous loan notification, it determines that the previous loan notification has been received by the frame control board 120 and completes the loan that was left incomplete.

After that, 300 ms after the previous gaming machine information notification was sent, the frame control board 120 sends the gaming machine information notification (serial number n+2, number of gaming balls 175) to the dedicated unit 170 as the ninth telegram. After that, the frame control board 120 and the dedicated unit 170 repeatedly send and receive telegrams (gaming machine information notification, counting notification, loan notification, loan receipt result response) as in the basic communication sequence with a 300 ms cycle shown in FIG. 78.

(Restoration sequence when the dedicated PIF that connects the frame control board and the dedicated unit is disconnected)
A recovery sequence when a dedicated PIF that connects the frame control board 120 and the dedicated unit 170 is disconnected will be described with reference to FIG.

First, when the player owns 1000 gaming balls and it is time to send a gaming machine information notification, which arrives every 300 ms, the frame control board 120 sends the first electronic message to the dedicated unit 170, a gaming machine information notification (serial number = n, number of gaming balls = 1000). 100 ms later, the frame control board 120 sends the second electronic message to the dedicated unit 170, a counting notification (counting serial number = m, number of counted balls = 0, cumulative number of counted balls = 0). Then, within 170 ms of receiving the counting notification, the dedicated unit 170 sends a third telegram to the frame control board 120 as a loan notification (loan serial number = k, number of loaned balls = 0), and within 10 ms, the frame control board 120 sends a fourth telegram to the dedicated unit 170 as a loan receipt result response (loan serial number = k, loaned ball number receipt result = normal), and the loaned ball number receipt result is confirmed by the dedicated unit 170.

After that, after 20 ms or more have elapsed since the transmission of the fourth loan receipt result response and 300 ms have elapsed since the transmission of the first gaming machine information notification, the frame control board 120 sends a gaming machine information notification (serial number = n+1, number of gaming balls = 1000) to the dedicated unit 170 as the fifth telegram. Then, when a break in the dedicated PIF is detected, the VL (power supply for connection confirmation) of the frame control board 120 turns OFF, and the VL (power supply for connection confirmation) and PSI (counting enable signal) of the dedicated unit 170 turn OFF, the launch of gaming balls in the gaming machine 1 stops, and the operation of the counting button 20 becomes invalid.

After that, 100 ms after the transmission of the gaming machine information notification, the frame control board 120 transmits a counting notification (counting serial number = m+1, number of counted balls = 0, cumulative number of counted balls = 0) to the dedicated unit 170 as the sixth telegram, but the dedicated unit 170 is unable to receive the counting notification due to a PIF disconnection. Also, 300 ms after the transmission of the previous gaming machine information notification, the frame control board 120 transmits a gaming machine information notification (serial number = n+2, number of gaming balls = 1000) to the dedicated unit 170 as the seventh telegram, but the dedicated unit 170 is unable to receive the gaming machine information notification due to a PIF disconnection. After 100 ms has elapsed, the frame control board 120 sends the eighth telegram, a counting notification (counting serial number = m + 2, number of balls counted = 0, cumulative number of balls counted = 0), to the dedicated unit 170, but the PIF is disconnected, meaning the dedicated unit 170 cannot receive the counting notification.

When the disconnection of the dedicated PIF is restored (the connection is confirmed), the VL (power supply for connection confirmation) of the frame control board 120 turns ON, and the VL (power supply for connection confirmation) and PSI (counting enable signal) of the dedicated unit 170 turn ON, and the launch of game balls is permitted in the gaming machine 1 and operation of the counting button 20 becomes valid.

After that, 300 ms after the previous gaming machine information notification was sent, the frame control board 120 sends the gaming machine information notification (serial number = n + 3, number of gaming balls = 1000) as the ninth telegram to the dedicated unit 170. 100 ms after that, the frame control board 120 sends the counting notification (counting serial number = m + 3, number of counted balls = 0, cumulative counted number of balls = 0) as the tenth telegram to the dedicated unit 170. Then, within 170 ms of receiving the counting notification, the dedicated unit 170 sends an 11th telegram as a loan notification (loan serial number = 0, number of loaned balls = 0) to the frame control board 120, and within 10 ms, the frame control board 120 sends an 11th telegram as a loan receipt result response (loan serial number = k, loaned ball number receipt result = abnormal) to the dedicated unit 170, and the loaned ball number receipt result is confirmed by the dedicated unit 170.

In addition, 300 ms after the previous transmission of the gaming machine information notification, the frame control board 120 transmits a gaming machine information notification (serial number = n + 4, number of gaming balls = 1000) as the 12th telegram to the dedicated unit 170. 100 ms after that, the frame control board 120 transmits a counting notification (counting serial number = m + 4, number of counted balls = 0, cumulative number of counted balls = 0) as the 13th telegram to the dedicated unit 170. Then, within 170 ms of receiving the counting notification, the dedicated unit 170 sends a loan notification (loan serial number = k+1, number of loaned balls = 0) to the frame control board 120 as the 14th telegram, and within 10 ms, the frame control board 120 sends a loan receipt result response (loan serial number = k+1, loaned ball number receipt result = normal) to the dedicated unit 170 as the 15th telegram, and the loaned ball number receipt result is confirmed by the dedicated unit 170.

(Frame control board and dedicated unit hole control/false monitoring information notification sequence)
Using Figure 88, the notification sequence of hole control and fraud monitoring information (number of shot balls, returned balls) of the frame control board 120 and the dedicated unit 170 will be described.

First, when the player owns 1000 gaming balls and the cumulative number of balls fired stored in the dedicated unit 170 is 100, and the timing for sending a gaming machine information notification arrives every 300 ms, the frame control board 120 sends the gaming machine information notification (serial number = n, number of gaming balls = 1000) as the first telegram to the dedicated unit 170. 90 to 100 ms later, the frame control board 120 sends the counting notification as the second telegram to the dedicated unit 170.

After that, one game ball is released, bringing the number of game balls owned by the player to 999, and within 170 ms of the count notification, a loan notification is sent from the dedicated unit 170 to the frame control board 120 as the third telegram, and within 10 ms thereafter, a loan receipt result response is sent from the frame control board 120 to the dedicated unit 170, and the result of receipt of the number of loaned balls is confirmed by the dedicated unit 170.

Then, when it is time to send the gaming machine information notification, which arrives every 300 ms, the frame control board 120 sends the gaming machine installation information reflecting one ball fired (serial number = n+1, number of gaming balls = 999, number of fired balls = 1) to the dedicated unit 170 as the fifth telegram, and the cumulative number of fired balls stored in the dedicated unit 170 becomes 101. 90 to 100 ms later, the frame control board 120 sends the counting notification to the dedicated unit 170 as the sixth telegram.

After that, one returned ball occurs, bringing the number of game balls owned by the player to 1,000, and within 170 ms of the counting notification, the dedicated unit 170 sends a loan notification to the frame control board 120 as the seventh telegram, and within 10 ms from that, the frame control board 120 sends a loan receipt result response to the dedicated unit 170 as the eighth telegram, and the dedicated unit 170 confirms the loan ball number receipt result.

Then, when it is time to send the gaming machine information notification, which arrives every 300 ms, the frame control board 120 sends the gaming machine installation information (serial number = n+2, number of gaming balls = 1000, number of shot balls = -1) reflecting one returned ball as the ninth telegram to the dedicated unit 170, and the cumulative number of shot balls stored in the dedicated unit 170 becomes 100. 90 to 100 ms later, the frame control board 120 sends the count notification to the dedicated unit 170 as the tenth telegram.

In addition, within 170 ms of the counting notification, the dedicated unit 170 sends a loan notification to the frame control board 120 as the 11th telegram, and within 10 ms thereafter, the frame control board 120 sends a loan receipt result response to the dedicated unit 170 as the 12th telegram, and the dedicated unit 170 confirms the loan ball count receipt result.

After that, when it is time to send the gaming machine information notification, which arrives every 300 ms, the frame control board 120 sends gaming machine installation information (serial number = n + 3, number of gaming balls = 1000) to the dedicated unit 170 as the 13th telegram. After that, one gaming ball is released, bringing the number of gaming balls owned by the player to 999, and 90 to 100 ms after the transmission of the gaming machine installation information, the frame control board 120 sends a counting notification to the dedicated unit 170 as the 14th telegram.

Furthermore, one returned ball occurs, bringing the number of game balls owned by the player to 1,000, and within 170 ms of the counting notification, a loan notification is sent from the dedicated unit 170 to the frame control board 120 as the 15th telegram, and within 10 ms from that, a loan receipt result response is sent from the frame control board 120 to the dedicated unit 170 as the 16th telegram, and the loan ball receipt result is confirmed by the dedicated unit 170.

After that, when it is time to send the gaming machine information notification, which arrives every 300 ms, the frame control board 120 sends the gaming machine installation information (serial number = n+4, number of gaming balls = 1000) to the dedicated unit 170 as the 17th telegram. After that, the first to fourth communication sequences are repeated every 300 ms by sending and receiving telegrams in the order of counting notification, loan notification, and loan receipt result response.

(Main processing of the frame control board)
The main processing of the frame control board 120 will be described with reference to Fig. 89. Fig. 89 is a flow chart showing the main processing of the frame control board 120.

First, the frame control CPU 120a prohibits all interrupts in step W1, performs initial CPU settings such as setting internal registers in step W2, and permits access to the RWM area of the frame control RAM 120c in step W3.

In step W4, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether a backup flag indicating that power has been restored is saved in the RWM area of the frame control RAM 120c. If the backup flag has not been saved, the process moves to step W8 assuming that this is the first time the power has been turned on. If the backup flag has been saved, the process assumes that power has been restored and calculates the checksum of the RWM area of the frame control RAM 120c in step W5.

The frame control CPU 120a determines in step W6 whether the checksum is normal. Specifically, it determines whether the checksum saved in the RWM area of the frame control RAM 120c matches the calculated checksum. If the checksum is not normal (there is an anomaly in the data in the RWM area), the process proceeds to step W9. If the checksum is normal (there is no anomaly in the data in the RWM area), the backup flag and checksum saved in the RWM area are cleared in step W7, and the RWM area is set.

In step W8, the frame control CPU 120a initializes (clears to 0) the game ball count memory area for storing the number of game balls (game value) owned by the player, which is set in the RWM area of the frame control RAM 120c, and in step W9, initializes (clears to 0) the areas to be initialized (excluding the game ball count memory area, etc.) in the RWM area of the frame control RAM 120c.

In step W10, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the game ball count clear switch 121 has been operated. If the game ball count clear switch 121 has not been operated, the process moves to step W15 assuming that the number of game balls (game value) owned by the player will not be cleared. If the game ball count clear switch 121 has been operated, the number of game balls (game value) owned by the player stored in the game ball count memory area in the RWM area is cleared.

In step W12, the frame control CPU 120a sets a game ball count clear start command indicating that the game ball count has been cleared in the presentation transmission data storage area of the frame control RAM 120c, and in step W13, sets a game ball count clear flag indicating that the game ball count has been cleared in the frame control RAM 120c, and generates hole control/fraud monitoring information indicating that the game ball count has been cleared (Bit 3 of "fraud detection state 2" is "1"). This causes the game ball count clear start command to be sent to the presentation control board 130, and processing is performed to execute the game ball count clear notification.

In step W14, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether or not the game ball count clear flag is set in the frame control RAM 120c. If the game ball count clear flag is not set, the process proceeds to step W16 assuming that an error code corresponding to clearing the game ball count is not to be displayed. If the game ball count clear flag is set, in step W15, the game ball count display 135 is made to display "0" and the frame control display 125 is made to display "H67", which is an error code corresponding to clearing the game ball count.

The ball count clear flag set in the frame control RAM 120c will not be cleared until a game ball is shot or the number of game balls is counted, and the error code "H64" will continue to be displayed on the frame control display 125. On the other hand, when a game ball is shot or the number of game balls is counted, the ball count clear flag is cleared and the display of the error code "H64" on the frame control display 125 will cease.

In step W16, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the ball removal switch 122 has been operated. If the ball removal switch 122 has not been operated, the process moves to step W20 assuming that the ball removal operation will not be performed. If the ball removal switch 122 has been operated, in step W17, a ball removal operation in progress designation command indicating that the ball removal operation is in progress is set in the performance transmission data storage area of the frame control RAM 120c. This causes the ball removal operation in progress designation command to be sent to the performance control board 130, and processing is performed to execute the ball removal operation in progress notification.

After step W16, there is no determination as to whether the ball removal switch 122 is operated or not. In other words, even if the ball removal switch 122 is operated while power is being supplied after the power is turned on, the ball removal operation command is not set to notify the user that the ball removal operation is in progress, the ball removal operation flag is not set to perform the ball removal operation, and the specific information "-" is not displayed.

In step W18, the frame control CPU 120a sets a ball removal operation in progress flag in the frame control RAM 120c to indicate that the ball removal operation is in progress. The ball removal operation in progress flag set here is referenced in the ball removal operation process described below, and the ball removal operation is performed on the condition that the ball removal operation in progress flag is set.

In step W19, the frame control CPU 120a causes the game ball count display 135 and the frame control display 125 to display the specific information "-", indicating that the ball removal operation is in progress. Note that if the frame control display 125 displays the error code "H67", indicating that the game ball count has been cleared, that display takes priority and the specific information "-" is not displayed on the frame control display 125.

In step W20, the frame control CPU 120a starts the CTC (counter timer circuit) to generate a timer interrupt (4 milliseconds) and allows all interrupts.

In step W21, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether or not an RWM clear command has been received from the main control board 110. If an RWM clear command has not been received, the process proceeds to step W25. If an RWM clear command has been received, interrupts are prohibited in step W22. In step W23, the initialization target area (memory area excluding the game ball count memory area and memory area related to display performance information, etc., and mainly memory area related to game machine information (hall control and fraud monitoring information)) in the RWM area of the frame control RAM 120c is initialized (cleared to 0), and in step W24, interrupts are permitted.

The frame control CPU 120a determines in step W25 whether a power outage has occurred. If a power outage has not occurred, the process proceeds to step W21. If a power outage has occurred, interrupts are prohibited in step W26, and in step W27, the output ports are cleared to stop the operation of various drive sources (motors, solenoids, etc.) and various displays (frame control display 125, game ball count display 135, etc.) and to stop the output of the launch permission signal.

In step W28, the frame control CPU 120a calculates the checksum of the frame control RAM 120c and saves it in the frame control RAM 120c, and in step W29, saves a backup flag indicating that the data in the frame control RAM 120c has been backed up (power has been restored) in the frame control RAM 120c, and in step W30, performs processing to prohibit RWM access and waits until the power supply is completely cut off.

In this way, it is possible for the number of game balls (game value) owned by a player to be cleared, provided that the ball removal switch 122 is operated when the power is ON. Therefore, if the number of game balls is stored in the gaming machine 1 shipped from the manufacturing factory to the gaming establishment, or if the player stops playing when only a small number of game balls (for example, one ball) is stored in the gaming machine 1, it is possible for a new player to play, which makes it possible to improve the convenience of the gaming establishment.

In addition, when the number of game balls is cleared, clear information (error code "H64") indicating that the number of game balls has been cleared is displayed on the frame control display 125, which is visible to the gaming store clerk. This allows the gaming store clerk to easily understand that the number of game balls has been cleared, making it possible to improve convenience for the gaming store clerk.

In addition, if the power supply is restarted after the number of game balls has been cleared and the game control state is restored without the launching of game balls or the counting of the number of game balls, the clear information (error code "H64") indicating that the number of game balls has been cleared is displayed again on the frame control display 125 visible to the gaming store staff. Therefore, the evidence that the number of game balls has been cleared will not disappear when the power outage is restored, which makes it possible to improve convenience for gaming store staff.

In addition, even if the game ball count clear switch 121 is operated while power is being supplied after the power is turned on, the game ball count will not be cleared, a game ball count clear notification will not be made, and clear information indicating that the game ball count has been cleared (error code "H64") will not be displayed. Therefore, even if the game ball count clear switch 121 is unintentionally operated while inspecting the gaming machine, no inconvenience will occur, and the convenience of the gaming facility will not be improved.

In addition, if the ball removal switch 122 is operated when the power is ON, a ball removal operation is performed to remove (discharge) the game balls circulated within the gaming machine 1 from the machine. This allows the game balls circulated within the gaming machine 1 to be replaced, preventing the game from being played with dirty game balls and improving the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, when the ball removal operation is in progress, the frame control display 125 visible to the gaming store clerk and the game ball count display 135 visible to the player display the specific information "- " indicating that the ball removal operation is in progress. This allows the gaming store clerk to easily know that the ball removal operation is in progress, which improves the convenience of the gaming store clerk.

In addition, even if the ball removal switch 122 is operated while power is being supplied after the power is turned on, no notification that the ball removal operation is in progress will be given, the ball removal operation will not be performed, and the specific information "-" indicating that the ball removal operation is in progress will not be displayed. Therefore, even if the ball removal switch 122 is unintentionally operated while inspecting the gaming machine, etc., no inconvenience will occur, and the convenience of the gaming facility will not be improved.

In addition, when an RWM clear command is received from the main control board 110, the memory areas excluding the game ball count memory area and the memory area related to display performance information, etc., and mainly the memory areas related to game machine information (hall control and fraud monitoring information) are initialized (cleared to 0). Therefore, by initializing the game machine information (information sent to the dedicated unit 170) stored in the frame control board 120 when the RWM is cleared by the main control board 110, there is no longer any discrepancy between the game machine information of the main control board 110 and the game machine information of the frame control board 120, and it becomes possible to send game machine information corresponding to the RWM clear of the main control board 110 to the dedicated unit 170.

In addition, the RWM area to be initialized differs depending on whether the checksum is normal (there is an abnormality in the data in the RWM area) or whether an RWM clear command is received from the main control board 110. This makes it possible to initialize the appropriate RWM area depending on the type of initialization factor.

Note that if the checksum is not normal (there is an abnormality in the data in the RWM area), the areas to be initialized except for the game ball count storage area and game ball count clear flag storage area of the frame control RAM 120c are initialized (cleared to 0), but if the checksum is not normal, the game ball count storage area and game ball count clear flag storage area may also be initialized (cleared to 0).

In addition, the main processing determines whether an RWM clear command has been received from the main control board 110 and initializes the RWM area, but in the timer interrupt processing described below, the main processing may determine whether an RWM clear command has been received from the main control board 110 and initialize the RWM area.

(Timer interrupt processing of frame control board)
The timer interrupt processing of the frame control board 120 will be described with reference to Fig. 90. Fig. 90 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt processing of the frame control board 120. This timer interrupt processing is executed by inputting a clock pulse at a predetermined period (4 ms) from a reset clock pulse generating circuit provided in the frame control unit 120m.

First, in step W100, the frame control CPU 120a evacuates the information stored in the register to the stack area of the frame control RAM 120c, and in step W150, performs the ball removal operation process. Specifically, the lifting and polishing device 95 (ball lift) is driven to lift the game balls collected from the game area 5a into the lifted ball passage, and the lifted game balls are discharged outside the game machine from a ball removal port provided midway through the lifted ball passage. The ball removal operation process will be described in detail later.

The frame control CPU 120a performs gaming machine installation information reception processing in step W200. Specifically, when gaming machine installation information transmitted from the main control board 110 is received, the frame control CPU 120a performs processing such as transmitting a gaming machine installation information response to the main control board 110. The gaming machine installation information reception processing will be described in detail later.

The frame control CPU 120a performs gaming machine information reception processing in step W250. Specifically, when gaming machine information (hall control/fraud monitoring information) transmitted from the main control board 110 is received, the frame control CPU 120a performs processing such as updating the gaming machine information stored in the frame control RAM 120c and transmitting a gaming machine information response to the main control board 110. The gaming machine information reception processing will be described in detail later.

The frame control CPU 120a performs a game ball count update process in step W300. Specifically, the number of game balls is subtracted in response to the launch of game balls, and the number of game balls is added in response to the occurrence of foul balls or game balls entering various winning slots. The game ball count update process will be described in detail later.

The frame control CPU 120a performs error control processing in step W350. Specifically, the frame control board 120 detects whether various errors that are monitored have occurred, and performs processing to cause the frame control board 120 to issue an error notification according to the type of error that has occurred (setting an error code to be displayed on the frame control display 125, setting an error notification command to be sent to the performance control board 130, etc.). Details of the error control processing will be described later.

The frame control CPU 120a performs a display performance information calculation process in step W400. Specifically, it counts the number of game balls (number of out balls) that have been shot into the game area 5a, the number of game balls (number of prize balls) that have been awarded to the player as a result of the game, and so on, and performs a process to calculate the display performance information to be displayed on the frame control display 125 based on the counted number of game balls. The display performance information calculation process will be described in detail later.

The frame control CPU 120a performs a gaming machine performance information calculation process in step W450. Specifically, based on the gaming machine information received from the main control board 110 and information on gaming balls counted and managed by the frame control board 120, the frame control CPU 120a performs a process to calculate gaming machine performance information to be sent to the dedicated unit 170 without being displayed on the frame control display 125. The gaming machine performance information calculation process will be described in detail later.

The frame control CPU 120a performs gaming machine information notification processing in step W500. Specifically, it performs processing to transmit (data transfer) to the dedicated unit 170 gaming machine installation information related to the gaming machine 1, gaming machine performance information calculated in the gaming machine performance information calculation processing, and hall control/fraud monitoring information generated from the gaming machine information received from the main control board 110. The gaming machine information notification processing will be described in detail later.

The frame control CPU 120a performs game ball counting processing in step W550. Specifically, based on the player's operation of the counting button 20, the frame control CPU 120a performs processing to transmit (transfer data to) some or all of the game balls owned by the player to the dedicated unit 170. Details of the game ball counting processing will be described later.

The frame control CPU 120a performs a game ball lending process in step W600. Specifically, based on a lending notification sent in response to the player's consumption of the player's valuables (the balance of cash inserted into the dedicated unit) through the player's lending operation on the dedicated unit 170, the frame control CPU 120a adds (lends) the number of game balls notified in the lending notification to the number of game balls owned by the player. Details of the game ball lending process will be described later.

The frame control CPU 120a performs output control processing in step W650. Specifically, it performs processing to transmit commands stored in the performance transmission data storage area of the frame control RAM 120c to the performance control board 130, and to output drive data for the ball sending unit 91, launching device 92, lifting and polishing device 95, etc. from the output port.

In step W700, the frame control CPU 120a performs display control processing. Specifically, the frame control display 125 displays the number of game balls owned by the player, the error code set in the error control processing described above, and the performance information (normal base value) calculated in the display performance information calculation processing described above, and also performs processing to display the number of game balls owned by the player on the game ball number display 135. If an error code is not set, the number of game balls and performance information are switched and displayed every 5 seconds (number of game balls → performance information of the current game section → number of game balls → performance information of the previous game section → number of game balls → performance information of the second previous game section → number of game balls → performance information of the third previous game section). If an error code is set, the number of game balls, performance information, and error code are switched and displayed every 5 seconds.

In step W750, the frame control CPU 120a restores to the register the information that was saved in the stack area of the frame control RAM 120c in step W100 described above, and ends this timer interrupt process.

In addition, in the display control process, when the acquisition limit device is activated, the frame control display 125 displays an error code corresponding to the acquisition limit device, the number of game balls, and performance information (normal base value). However, when the acquisition limit device is activated, the performance information (normal base value) may not be displayed and an error code corresponding to the acquisition limit device and the number of game balls may be displayed, or the number of game balls and performance information (normal base value) may not be displayed and an error code corresponding to the acquisition limit device may be displayed.

(Ball removal operation processing of frame control board)
The ball removal operation process of the frame control board 120 will be described with reference to Fig. 91. Fig. 91 is a flow chart showing the ball removal operation process of the frame control board 120.

First, in step W151, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether or not there is a ball removal operation in progress flag in the frame control RAM 120c, which indicates that the ball removal operation is in progress. If there is no ball removal operation in progress flag, the current ball removal operation process is terminated, and if there is a ball removal operation in progress flag, in step W152, a lifting and polishing device drive process is performed. Specifically, a lifting and polishing device 95 (ball lift) is driven to lift the game ball to the lifting ball passage in order to discharge the game ball from the ball removal port located in the lifting ball passage, which is part of the circulation path of the game ball and slopes downward toward the ball sending device, outside the game machine.

In step W153, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether or not a ball removal lever operation error flag, which will be described later, is present (a ball removal lever operation error is occurring). If the ball removal lever operation error flag is not present, it is assumed that a ball removal lever operation error has not occurred, and processing proceeds to step W154. If the ball removal lever operation error flag is present, it is assumed that a ball removal lever operation error has occurred, and processing proceeds to step W157.

In step W154, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the ON state (a state in which a game ball has been detected) of the lift up switch 94c, which is located in the middle of the lifting ball passage and upstream of the ball removal opening, has continued for a predetermined period (e.g., 30 seconds). If the ON state of the lift up switch 94c has not continued for the predetermined period, processing proceeds to step W156, and if the ON state of the lift up switch 94c has continued for the predetermined period, processing proceeds to step W154 assuming that a ball removal lever operation error has occurred, in which the ball removal lever has not been operated despite the ball removal operation being in progress, causing the ball removal opening to be in a closed state (a state in which balls cannot be discharged).

In step W155, the frame control CPU 120a sets a ball removal lever error flag in the frame control RAM 120c, indicating that a ball removal lever operation error is occurring, and in step W156, sets a ball removal lever operation error start command, indicating that a ball removal lever operation error has occurred, in the performance transmission data storage area of the frame control RAM 120c, and ends this ball removal operation process. As a result, the ball removal lever operation error start command is sent to the performance control board 130, and processing is performed to start the ball removal lever operation error notification.

In step W157, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the lift up switch 94c, which is located in the middle of the lifting ball passage and upstream of the ball removal port, has turned OFF (a state in which no game balls are detected). If the lift up switch 94c is not in the OFF state, the current ball removal operation process is terminated, and if the lift up switch 94c is in the OFF state, in step W158, the ball removal lever operation error flag is cleared, and in step W159, a ball removal lever operation error end command is set, indicating that the ball removal lever operation error has ended, and the current ball removal operation process is terminated. As a result, the ball removal lever operation error end command is sent to the performance control board 130, and processing is performed to end the ball removal lever operation error notification.

In this way, when the power is ON (pre-loop processing of the main processing), the ball removal operation for discharging circulating game balls outside the gaming machine 1 is executed based on the fact that the ball removal operation in progress flag is set, until the power is turned OFF. This makes it possible to reliably discharge circulating game balls in the gaming machine 1 outside the gaming machine 1. In addition, since no special operation is required to end the ball removal operation, it is possible to improve convenience for gaming store staff.

In addition, if the lift upper switch 94c remains ON for a predetermined period (30 seconds), in other words, even though the ball removal operation has been performed for the time required to remove all of the circulating game balls outside the gaming machine 1, the lift upper switch 94c detects game balls and the removal of game balls has not been completed, a ball removal lever operation error notification is initiated. This makes it possible to inform the gaming store staff that they have forgotten to operate the ball removal lever or that the ball removal operation has not been completed, thereby improving the convenience of the gaming store staff.

In addition, the ball removal lever operation error notification is terminated when the lift upper switch 94c is turned OFF. Therefore, the ball removal error operation error termination can inform the player that the game balls circulated in the game machine 1 have been discharged outside the game machine 1, which can improve convenience for game store staff.

(Gaming machine installation information reception process of frame control board)
The gaming machine installation information reception process of the frame control board 120 will be described with reference to Fig. 92. Fig. 92 is a flowchart showing the gaming machine installation information reception process of the frame control board 120.

First, in step W201, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether gaming machine installation information has been received from the main control board 110. If gaming machine installation information has not been received, the process proceeds to step W210. If gaming machine installation information has been received, the process proceeds to step W202, determining whether the communication number included in the gaming machine installation information is "0 (fixed value)." If the communication number is "0," the process proceeds to step W203. If the communication number is not "0," the gaming machine installation information is discarded as abnormal gaming machine installation information has been received, and the current gaming machine installation information reception process is terminated.

In step W203, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether or not the frame control RAM 120c contains an internal machine communication abnormality flag indicating that an internal machine communication abnormality error has occurred, that is, an abnormality has occurred in the communication between the main control board 110 and the frame control board 120. If the internal machine communication abnormality flag is not present, the process proceeds to step W206. If the internal machine communication abnormality flag is present, the internal machine communication abnormality flag is cleared in step W204, and in step W205, an internal machine communication abnormality termination command indicating that the internal machine communication abnormality has ended (resolved) is set in the presentation transmission data storage area of the frame control RAM 120c. This causes the internal machine communication abnormality termination command to be sent to the presentation control board 130, and processing is performed to terminate the internal machine communication abnormality notification.

In step W206, the frame control CPU 120a generates new gaming machine installation information from the main control chip information (main control chip ID number, main control chip manufacturer code, main control chip product code) specified by the received gaming machine installation information and the frame control chip information (frame control chip ID number, frame control chip manufacturer code, frame control chip product code) stored in the frame control unit 120m, and stores it in the frame control RAM 120c. In step W207, it determines whether or not the frame control RAM 120c has a ball removal operation flag indicating that the ball removal operation is in progress. If there is no ball removal operation flag, the process proceeds to step W209. If there is a ball removal operation flag, in step W208, the main control board 110 is sent a gaming machine installation information response (reception result = ball removal state) indicating that the reception result is a ball removal state, and the current gaming machine installation information reception process ends.

In step W209, the frame control CPU 120a sends a gaming machine installation information response (reception result = reception OK) to the main control board 110 indicating that the reception result is OK (the ball removal operation is not in progress, allowing control of the game progress to begin), and in step W210, the frame control board 120 outputs (ON) a launch permission signal to the launching device to permit the launching of gaming balls, terminating this gaming machine installation information reception process.

In step W211, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the period during which the gaming machine installation information has not been received since the start of the frame control board 120 has reached a predetermined period (e.g., 3 minutes). If the period during which the gaming machine installation information has not been received has not reached the predetermined period, the current gaming machine installation information reception process is terminated. If the period during which the gaming machine installation information has not been received reaches the predetermined period, in step W212, the frame control RAM 120c is set to an internal gaming machine communication abnormality flag, and in step W213, a command to start an internal gaming machine communication abnormality indicating that an internal gaming machine communication abnormality has started (occurred) is set in the performance transmission data storage area of the frame control RAM 120c, and the current gaming machine installation information reception process is terminated. As a result, the internal gaming machine communication abnormality start command is sent to the performance control board 130, and processing is performed to start an internal gaming machine communication abnormality notification.

As in this process, a process may be performed to determine whether or not there is an abnormality (e.g., a broken wire) in the communication between the main control board 110 and the frame control board 120, but the control program (frame control program) that determines that information (e.g., gaming machine installation information) has not been received from the main control board 110 can also be said to be a detection means that detects whether or not there is an abnormality (e.g., a broken wire) in the communication between the main control board 110 and the frame control board 120.

In this way, even if gaming machine installation information is received from the main control board 110, if the frame control board 120 is processing the ball removal operation, it will transmit a gaming machine installation information response (received result = ball removal state) that will prevent the main control board 110 from controlling the progress of the game. This makes it possible to avoid inconveniences that would occur if the progress of the game was controlled during the ball removal operation.

In addition, when gaming machine installation information is received from the main control board 110, if the frame control board 120 is not processing the ball removal operation, a gaming machine installation information response (reception result = reception OK) is sent, which causes the main control board 110 to control the progress of the game. Therefore, it is possible to have the main control board 110 and the frame control board 120 control the progress of the game while ensuring communication between the main control board 110 and the frame control board 120.

In addition, if gaming machine installation information cannot be received even after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the frame control board 120 (three minutes, which is the maximum start-up time of the main control board 110), an error notification of an abnormality in communication within the gaming machine is initiated. This makes it possible to inform gaming store staff that an abnormality in communication within the gaming machine has occurred, preventing communication between the main control board 110 and the frame control board 120, and to allow them to take appropriate measures.

In addition, even if the gaming machine internal communication abnormality flag is set and communication between the main control board 110 and the frame control board 120 is not taking place, if gaming machine installation information is subsequently received from the main control board 110, the gaming machine internal communication abnormality flag is cleared and the gaming machine internal communication abnormality error notification is terminated. This makes it possible to avoid inconveniences such as no game progress control being performed even though communication between the main control board 110 and the frame control board 120 is ensured.

(Gaming machine information reception process of frame control board)
The gaming machine information receiving process of the frame control board 120 will be described with reference to Fig. 93. Fig. 93 is a flow chart showing the gaming machine information receiving process of the frame control board 120.

First, in step W251, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether or not it has received gaming machine information (hall control/fraud monitoring information) that is scheduled to be received from the main control board 110 in 108 ms. If it has not received gaming machine information, it moves the process to step W261. If it has received gaming machine information, it determines in step W252 whether or not there is an internal gaming machine communication abnormality flag in the frame control RAM 120c (whether an internal gaming machine communication abnormality has occurred). If there is no internal gaming machine communication abnormality flag, it moves the process to step W255. If there is an internal gaming machine communication abnormality flag, it clears the internal gaming machine communication abnormality flag in step W253, and in step W254, it sets an internal gaming machine communication abnormality end designation command indicating that the internal gaming machine communication abnormality has ended in the performance transmission data storage area of the frame control RAM 120c. This causes a command to specify that the communication abnormality within the gaming machine should be terminated to the performance control board 130, and processing is performed to terminate the communication abnormality error notification within the gaming machine.

In step W255, the frame control CPU 120a stores the main control state 1 and the main control state 2 generated by the main control unit 120m (usage area) in the frame control RAM 120c, in step W256, the gaming machine error state generated by the main control unit 120m (usage area) in the frame control RAM 120c, in step W257, the fraud detection state 1 generated by the main control unit 120m (usage area) in the frame control RAM 120c, and in step W258 The number of prize balls for activation of the game device and the number of prize balls for activation of the consecutive game devices generated by the main control unit 120m (usage area) are stored in the frame control RAM 120c, and in step W259, the various game information generated by the main control unit 120m (usage area) is stored in the frame control RAM 120c, and in step W260, a game machine information response (reception result = reception OK) indicating that the reception result is OK (received normally) is sent to the main control board 110, and the current game machine information reception process is terminated.

The various types of gaming information contained in the received gaming machine information (hall control/fraud monitoring information) are the number of winnings at the starting port, the number of winnings at the large winning port due to the operation of the special electric device, the number of winnings at the winning ports, the number of winnings at all starting ports, the number of times a pattern has been confirmed, the number of times a jackpot has been won, the number of times a device has been activated (the number of times the large winning port has been opened), the number of times a specific area has been passed, the pulse output from the external terminal board, and performance information status notifications, etc.

In step W261, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the setting is currently being changed or confirmed. If the setting is currently being changed or confirmed, it does not determine whether a communication abnormality has occurred within the gaming machine and ends the current gaming machine information reception process. If the setting is not currently being changed or confirmed, the process proceeds to step W262.

In step W262, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the period during which no information has been received since the previous reception of gaming machine information has reached a predetermined period (e.g., 1000 ms). If the period during which no information has been received has not reached the predetermined period, the current gaming machine information reception process is terminated. If the period during which no information has been received has reached the predetermined period, in step W263, an internal gaming machine communication abnormality flag is set in the frame control RAM 120c indicating that an internal gaming machine communication abnormality has occurred, and in step W264, an internal gaming machine communication abnormality start command indicating that an internal gaming machine communication abnormality has occurred is set in the performance transmission data storage area of the frame control RAM 120c, and the current gaming machine information reception process is terminated. As a result, the internal gaming machine communication abnormality start command is sent to the performance control board 130, and processing is performed to start the internal gaming machine communication abnormality notification.

In this way, when the gaming machine internal communication abnormality flag is set (a gaming machine internal communication abnormality has occurred), when gaming machine information (hall control, fraud monitoring information, etc.) is received from the main control board 110, the gaming machine internal communication abnormality error notification is terminated. This makes it possible to prevent inconveniences such as an internal gaming machine communication abnormality error notification being issued even when communication with the main control board 110 is normal, and makes it possible to issue an appropriate error notification.

In addition, when a predetermined period of time has passed since the previous reception of gaming machine information during which gaming machine information has not been received (a period during which the main control board 110 can transmit gaming machine information multiple times), an error notification of an abnormality in communication within the gaming machine is started. This allows the gaming store staff to be notified that communication with the main control board 110 is not normal, and allows the gaming store staff to take appropriate action.

In addition, the various game information that the frame control board 120 has is updated based on the game machine information (hall control and fraud monitoring information) sent from the main control board 110. Therefore, in the game machine performance information calculation process and game machine information notification process described below, it becomes possible to calculate and send detailed game machine performance information that is in line with the actual game.

In addition, if the setting is currently being changed or checked, the execution of the gaming machine communication abnormality error notification by sending a gaming machine communication abnormality start command from the frame control board 120 is restricted (restricted) without determining whether or not a gaming machine communication abnormality has occurred, and after the setting change or setting check is completed, it is possible to determine whether or not a gaming machine communication abnormality has occurred and to execute the gaming machine communication abnormality error notification by sending a gaming machine communication abnormality start command from the frame control board 120. Therefore, by executing the gaming machine communication abnormality error notification while the setting is being changed or checked, it is not disruptive to the setting change or setting check, and it is possible to improve the convenience of the gaming store staff.

Even during a setting change or setting confirmation, it may be possible to determine whether or not a communication abnormality has occurred within the gaming machine, and to issue an error notification of a communication abnormality within the gaming machine by sending a command to start a communication abnormality within the gaming machine from the frame control board 120. When an error notification of a communication abnormality within the gaming machine is issued during a setting change or setting confirmation, an error notification of a communication abnormality within the gaming machine with a lower notification level (for example, one or two of the following: display of an error code by the frame control display 125, output of an error notification sound from the audio output device 9, and/or emission of an error light by the frame lighting device 10) may be issued.

In addition, even if the gaming machine information (hall control/fraud monitoring information) received from the main control board 110 includes information indicating that the winning limit device is operating, the frame control unit 120m continues to output a launch permission signal to the launching device to permit the launch of gaming balls. However, if the gaming machine information includes information indicating that the winning limit device is operating, the frame control unit 120m may stop outputting a launch permission signal to the launching device to permit the launch of gaming balls.

(Ball count update process on frame control board)
The number of game balls update process of the frame control board 120 will be described with reference to Fig. 94. Fig. 94 is a flowchart showing the number of game balls update process of the frame control board 120.

First, in step W301, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether or not a detection signal has been input from the subtraction port switch 91c (a ball has been sent to the launch pad). If a detection signal has not been input from the subtraction port switch 91c, it is assumed that a game ball will not be launched and the process moves to step W303. If a detection signal has been input from the subtraction port switch 91c, it is assumed that a game ball will be launched and in step W302, the number of game balls owned by the player is decremented by one.

In step W303, the frame control CPU 120a judges whether a detection signal has been input from the foul ball switch 93a (a foul ball has been shot but returned without entering the play area 5a). If a detection signal has not been input from the foul ball switch 93a, it is assumed that a foul ball has not been thrown and the process proceeds to step W305. If a detection signal has been input from the foul ball switch 93a, it is assumed that a foul ball has been thrown and the number of play balls owned by the player is increased by 1 in step W304.

In step W305, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether a gaming ball has entered the general winning opening 43. Specifically, it determines whether the number of winning openings included in the gaming machine information (hall control/fraud monitoring information) sent from the main control board 110 is 1 or more. If a gaming ball has not entered the general winning opening 43, the process proceeds to step W307. If a gaming ball has entered the general winning opening 43, in step W306, the number of prize balls corresponding to the general winning opening and the number of prize balls corresponding to the number of winnings are added to the number of gaming balls owned by the player.

In step W307, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether a gaming ball has entered the large prize opening 50. Specifically, it determines whether the number of large prize openings included in the gaming machine information (hall control/fraud monitoring information) sent from the main control board 110 is 1 or more. If a gaming ball has not entered the large prize opening 50, the process proceeds to step W309. If a gaming ball has entered the large prize opening 50, in step W308, the number of prize balls corresponding to the large prize opening and the number of winning balls are added to the number of gaming balls owned by the player.

In step W309, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether a game ball has entered the first start hole 45 or the second start hole 47. Specifically, it determines whether the total number of winning start holes included in the gaming machine information (hall control/fraud monitoring information) sent from the main control board 110 is 1 or more. If a game ball has not entered the first start hole 45 or the second start hole 47, the current game ball count update process is terminated, and if a game ball has entered the first start hole 45 or the second start hole 47, the process proceeds to step W310.

In step W310, the frame control CPU 120a calculates the number of winnings for each type of starting port. Specifically, it identifies the number of winnings at the first starting port 45 from the number of winnings at the starting port included in the gaming machine information (hall control/fraud monitoring information) sent from the main control board 110, and calculates the number of winnings at the second starting port 47 from the number of winnings at the starting port and the number of winnings at all starting ports.

In step W311, the frame control CPU 120a adds the number of prize balls according to the type of start port and the number of prize balls according to the number of winning entries to the number of game balls owned by the player, and ends the current game ball number update process. Specifically, it adds the number of prize balls according to the number of prize balls in the first start port 45 and the number of winning entries into the first start port 45 calculated in step W310, and the number of prize balls in the second start port 47 and the number of winning entries into the second start port 47 calculated in step W310 to the number of game balls owned by the player.

In this way, the number of game balls owned by the player is decremented by one in response to the release of a game ball, and the number of game balls owned by the player is increased by one in response to the occurrence of a foul ball. This allows the number of game balls owned by the player to be appropriately updated taking into account foul balls, making it possible to avoid inconveniences that may cause the player disadvantages.

In addition, the frame control board 120 does not monitor the winnings at the various winning ports, but rather adds the number of prize balls that correspond to the number of winnings at each winning port detected by the main control board 110 to the number of game balls owned by the player. This eliminates the need to connect detection switches installed at the various winning ports to both the main control board 110 and the frame control board 120, making it possible to prevent complicated wiring.

In this embodiment, when a ball transfer occurs in which a game ball is sent to the launch pad, the game ball is always launched, so the number of game balls owned by the player is decremented by one when a detection signal is input from the subtraction port switch 91c. However, it is also possible to detect that a game ball has been launched by the launch pad switch 92a changing from ON to OFF, and decrement the number of game balls owned by the player based on this detection.

(Error control processing of frame control board)
The error control processing of the frame control board 120 will be described with reference to Fig. 95. Fig. 95 is a flowchart showing the error control processing of the frame control board 120.

First, in step W351, the frame control CPU 120a executes a severe error notification control process. Specifically, when a severe error with a high security alert level occurs, the frame control CPU 120a executes a process to start an error notification according to the type of severe error. Details of the severe error notification control process will be described later.

The frame control CPU 120a executes a hardware error notification control process in step W352. Specifically, when a hardware error caused by hardware occurs, the frame control CPU 120a starts an error notification corresponding to the type of hardware error, and when the hardware error is resolved, the frame control CPU 120a performs a process to end the error notification corresponding to the type of hardware error. Details of the hardware error notification control process will be described later.

The frame control CPU 120a executes minor error notification control processing in step W353. Specifically, when a minor error occurs, which has a lower security alert level than a major error, the frame control CPU 120a starts an error notification according to the type of minor error, and when the minor error is resolved, the frame control CPU 120a performs processing to end the error notification according to the type of minor error. Details of the minor error notification control processing will be described later.

The frame control CPU 120a executes an error code display setting process in step W354. Specifically, if any of the various errors (notification events) detected by the frame control board 120 is occurring, a setting is made to display the error code (notification event code) corresponding to the highest priority error among the errors occurring on the frame control display 125 according to the priority of the various errors, and if no error detected by the frame control board 120 is occurring, a process is performed to not display an error code on the frame control display 125. Details of the error priority for displaying error codes will be described later.

In step W355, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the frame control unit 120m is outputting a launch permission signal to the launching device to allow the launch of game balls, and whether a launch non-permission error that restricts the launch of game balls is occurring. If the launch permission signal is being output but a launch non-permission error is not occurring, the process proceeds to step W357. If the launch permission signal is being output but a launch non-permission error is occurring, in step W356, the frame control unit 120m stops outputting the launch permission signal to the launching device to allow the launch of game balls. This stops the operation of the ball feeding unit 91 and the launching device 92 (ball feeding that sends game balls to the launch pad and/or launching of game balls from the launch pad), restricting the launch of game balls.

Note that "launch not permitted errors" in the frame control unit 120m include, as will be described in detail below, entrance switch disconnection errors, entrance switch abnormality errors, communication line abnormality errors, glass frame opening errors, inner frame opening errors, ball removal operation in progress, ball removal lever operation errors, and counting process notifications indicating that the number of game balls is less than 1,000.

In step W357, the frame control CPU 120a judges whether the frame control unit 120m is outputting a launch permission signal to the launching device to permit the launch of game balls, and whether a launch non-permission error that restricts the launch of game balls has occurred. If the launch permission signal is not stopped or a launch non-permission error is occurring, the current error control process is terminated, and if the launch permission signal is stopped and a launch non-permission error is not occurring, in step W358, the frame control unit 120m resumes outputting a launch permission signal to the launching device to permit the launch of game balls, and the current error control process is terminated. This allows the launching device to be driven (ball delivery to send game balls to the launch pad and/or launch of game balls from the launch pad), making it possible to launch game balls.

When the output of the launch permission signal is stopped and the drive of the ball feeding unit 91 and launching device 92 is stopped, if the unit operation of the ball feeding unit 91 (the operation of feeding one game ball) has ended but the unit operation of the launching device 92 (the operation of firing one game ball) is in progress, the drive of the ball feeding unit 91 and the launching device 92 is stopped after the unit operation of the launching device 92 has ended. Also, if the unit operation of the ball feeding unit 91 (the operation of feeding one game ball) is in progress, the drive of the ball feeding unit 91 and the launching device 92 is stopped after the unit operation of the ball feeding unit 91 and the subsequent unit operation of the launching device 92 (the operation of firing one game ball) have ended.

In this way, error codes (alert event codes) corresponding to various errors (alert events) detected by the frame control board 120 are displayed on the frame control display 125, which is visible to game store staff. This makes it possible to notify game store staff of the occurrence of various errors, enabling them to take appropriate action.

In addition, among the various errors (alert events) detected by the frame control board 120, the error codes of errors with higher priority are displayed on the frame control display 125, which is visible to the gaming store staff, in preference to errors with lower priority. This allows the gaming store staff to deal with errors in order of higher priority, making it possible to prevent inconvenience to players.

In addition, error codes (alert event codes) corresponding to various errors (alert events) detected by the frame control board 120 are displayed on the frame control display 125 visible to the gaming store staff, while error codes corresponding to errors detected by the main control board 110 are not displayed on the frame control display 125 visible to the gaming store staff. This makes it possible to avoid the inconvenience of confusing the various errors (alert events) detected by the main control board 110 with the various errors (alert events) detected by the frame control board 120 and being unable to take appropriate action, thereby improving convenience for gaming store staff.

In addition, if a launch disallowance error (alert event) occurs that would cause inconvenience if the game ball were to be launched, the frame control unit 120m stops outputting the launch permission signal that allows the game ball to be launched, thereby stopping the launch of the game ball. This makes it possible to prevent inconvenience (disadvantage to the game facility or player) from occurring if the game ball is launched during the occurrence of a launch disallowance error (alert event).

In addition, when a launch disallowance error (alert event) that makes it inconvenient to launch the game ball is resolved, the frame control unit 120m resumes output of a launch permission signal that permits the launch of the game ball, thereby permitting the launch of the game ball. This makes it possible to prevent inconveniences (disadvantages to the game facility or the player) that arise from the inability to launch the game ball.

In addition, the error control process is executed regardless of whether or not the ball removal operation is being performed by the frame control board 120. In other words, various error notifications (major errors, hardware errors, minor errors) can be issued whether or not the ball removal operation is in progress. This means that various error notifications are no longer restricted by the execution of the ball removal operation, and various error notifications can be issued to game store staff to take appropriate action.

(Frame control board severe error notification control processing)
96, a description will be given of the severe error notification control processing of the frame control board 120. FIG. 96 is a flowchart showing the severe error notification control processing of the frame control board 120.

First, in step W351-1, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether or not unauthorized radio waves have been detected by the radio detection sensor 54a when there is no unauthorized radio wave detection flag in the frame control RAM 120c indicating that an unauthorized radio wave detection error has occurred. If there is an unauthorized radio wave detection flag or no unauthorized radio waves have been detected, processing proceeds to step W351-3. If unauthorized radio waves have been detected when there is no unauthorized radio wave detection flag, in step W351-2, the frame control CPU 120a sets the unauthorized radio wave detection flag in the frame control RAM 120c and sets an unauthorized radio wave detection designation command indicating that an unauthorized radio wave detection error has occurred in the performance transmission data storage area of the frame control RAM 120c. This causes the unauthorized radio wave detection designation command to be sent to the performance control board 130, and processing is performed to start an unauthorized radio wave detection error notification.

In step W351-3, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the winning passage count switch 94a has turned from OFF to ON (whether the game ball has passed through). If the winning passage count switch 94a has not turned from OFF to ON, the process proceeds to step W351-5. If the winning passage count switch 94a has turned from OFF to ON, the number of winning passages that have passed through the winning passage stored in the frame control RAM 120c is updated by +1 in step W351-4.

In step W351-5, the frame control CPU 120a judges whether the difference between the number of winning balls notified by the main control board 110 and the number of passing through the winning passage is equal to or greater than a prescribed number (e.g., 100 balls). If it is not equal to or greater than the prescribed number, it is assumed that a winning ball number abnormality error has not occurred, and processing proceeds to step W351-8. If it is equal to or greater than the prescribed number, it is judged in step W351-6 whether or not there is a winning ball number abnormality flag in the frame control RAM 120c indicating that a winning ball number abnormality error has occurred. If there is a winning ball number abnormality flag, processing proceeds to step W351-8. If there is no winning ball number abnormality flag, it is assumed that a winning ball number abnormality error has occurred, and in step W351-7, a winning ball number abnormality flag is set in the frame control RAM 120c, and a winning ball number abnormality designation command indicating that a winning ball number abnormality error has occurred is set in the performance transmission data storage area of the frame control RAM 120c. This causes a winning ball count abnormality designation command to be sent to the performance control board 130, and processing is performed to start notifying the winning ball count abnormality error.

In step W351-8, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the subtraction calculation port switch 91c has changed from OFF to ON (whether a game ball has passed). If the subtraction calculation port switch 91c has not changed from OFF to ON, the process proceeds to step W351-10. If the subtraction calculation port switch 91c has changed from OFF to ON, in step W351-9, the number of shot balls stored in the frame control RAM 120c is updated by +1.

In step W351-10, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the foul ball switch 93a has turned from OFF to ON (whether the game ball has passed). If the foul ball switch 93a has not turned from OFF to ON, the process proceeds to step W351-12. If the foul ball switch 93a has turned from OFF to ON, the number of shot balls stored in the frame control RAM 120c is updated by -1 in step W351-11.

In step W351-12, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the winning passage count switch 94a or the non-winning passage count switch 94b, which is provided in the collected ball passage (part of the ball passage unit 94) through which the game balls collected from the game area 5a flow, is ON (whether the game ball has passed through). If the winning passage count switch 94a or the non-winning passage count switch 94b is not ON, the process proceeds to step W351-14. If the winning passage count switch 94a or the non-winning passage count switch 94b is ON, in step W351-13, the total number of returned balls stored in the frame control RAM 120c is updated by +1.

In step W351-14, the frame control CPU 120a judges whether the difference between the number of shot balls and the total number of returned balls is equal to or greater than a specified number (e.g., 100 balls). If it is not equal to or greater than the specified number, it is determined that a shot ball number abnormality error has not occurred and the current severe error notification control process is terminated. If it is equal to or greater than the specified number, it is determined in step W351-15 whether the frame control RAM 120c has a shot ball number abnormality flag indicating that a shot ball number abnormality error has occurred. If the shot ball number abnormality flag is present, the current severe error notification control process is terminated. If the shot ball number abnormality flag is not present, it is determined that a shot ball number abnormality error has occurred and the frame control RAM 120c sets a shot ball number abnormality flag in step W351-16, sets a shot ball number abnormality designation command indicating that a shot ball number abnormality error has occurred in the performance transmission data storage area of the frame control RAM 120c, and terminates the current severe error notification control process. This causes a command to specify an abnormality in the number of balls fired to be sent to the performance control board 130, and processing is carried out to start notifying the user of the abnormality in the number of balls fired error.

In this way, when a severe error occurs that requires high security alert, an error notification is initiated according to the type of severe error. This ensures the security of the gaming machine and makes it possible to prevent inconveniences such as losses suffered by gaming establishments or players.

(Frame control board hardware error notification control process)
97, a hardware error notification control process of the frame control board 120 will be described. FIG. 97 is a flowchart showing the hardware error notification control process of the frame control board 120.

First, in step W352-1, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether or not a break has occurred in the subtraction calculation port switch 91c. If a break has not occurred in the subtraction calculation port switch 91c, the process proceeds to step W352-3. If a break has occurred in the subtraction calculation port switch 91c, in step W352-2, an exit switch break flag is set indicating that an exit switch break error has occurred, and an exit switch break designation command indicating that an exit switch break error has occurred is set in the performance transmission data storage area of the frame control RAM 120c. This causes the exit switch break designation command to be sent to the performance control board 130, and processing is performed to start an exit switch break error notification.

In step W352-3, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the subtraction port switch 91c is turned on within a specified time from the operation of the subtraction solenoid 91a. If the subtraction port switch 91c is turned on within the specified time, it is assumed that an exit switch abnormality error has not occurred and processing proceeds to step W352-5. If the subtraction port switch 91c is not turned on within the specified time, in step W352-4, an exit switch abnormality flag indicating that an exit switch abnormality error has occurred is set in the frame control RAM 120c, and an exit switch abnormality designation command indicating that an exit switch abnormality error has occurred is set in the performance transmission data storage area of the frame control RAM 120c. This causes the exit switch abnormality designation command to be sent to the performance control board 130, and processing is performed to start an exit switch abnormality error notification.

In step W352-5, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether or not a break has occurred in the subtraction entrance switch 91b. If a break has not occurred in the subtraction entrance switch 91b, processing proceeds to step W352-7. If a break has occurred in the subtraction entrance switch 91b, in step W352-6, an entrance switch break flag indicating that an entrance switch break error has occurred is set in the frame control RAM 120c, and an entrance switch break designation command indicating that an entrance switch break error has occurred is set in the performance transmission data storage area of the frame control RAM 120c. This causes the entrance switch break designation command to be sent to the performance control board 130, and processing is performed to start an entrance switch break error notification.

In step W352-7, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the OFF time of the subtraction entrance switch 91b (the time when the game ball is not detected) has continued for a specified time (for example, 10 seconds). If the OFF time of the subtraction entrance switch 91b has not continued for the specified time, it is assumed that an entrance switch abnormality error has not occurred, and the process proceeds to step W352-9. If the OFF time of the subtraction entrance switch 91b has continued for the specified time, in step W352-8, an entrance switch abnormality flag indicating that an entrance switch abnormality error has occurred is set in the frame control RAM 120c, and an entrance switch abnormality designation command indicating that an entrance switch abnormality error has occurred is set in the performance transmission data storage area of the frame control RAM 120c. This causes the entrance switch abnormality designation command to be sent to the performance control board 130, and processing is performed to start an entrance switch abnormality error notification.

In step W352-9, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether or not a break has occurred in the foul ball switch 93a. If a break has not occurred in the foul ball switch 93a, the process proceeds to step W352-11. If a break has occurred in the foul ball switch 93a, in step W352-10, a foul ball switch break flag indicating that a foul ball switch break error has occurred is set in the frame control RAM 120c, and a foul ball switch break designation command indicating that a foul ball switch break error has occurred is set in the performance transmission data storage area of the frame control RAM 120c. This causes the foul ball switch break designation command to be sent to the performance control board 130, and processing is performed to start a foul ball switch break error notification.

In step W352-11, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether an abrasive confirmation switch for detecting whether abrasive for polishing the game balls lifted by the lifting and polishing device 95 is attached is OFF (abrasive is not attached). If the abrasive confirmation switch is not OFF, it is assumed that an abrasive not-attached error has not occurred (abrasive is attached), and processing proceeds to step W352-14. If the abrasive confirmation switch is OFF, it is determined in step W352-12 whether the frame control RAM 120c has an abrasive not-attached flag indicating that an abrasive not-attached error has occurred. If there is an abrasive not yet installed flag, processing proceeds to step W352-14. If there is no abrasive not yet installed flag, in step W352-13, an abrasive not yet installed flag is set in the frame control RAM 120c indicating that an abrasive not yet installed error has occurred, and an abrasive not yet installed designation command indicating that an abrasive not yet installed error has occurred is set in the performance transmission data storage area of the frame control RAM 120c. As a result, the abrasive not yet installed designation command is sent to the performance control board 130, and processing is performed to start notifying the abrasive not yet installed error.

In step W352-14, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the processing path switches (winning path count switch 94a, non-winning path count switch 94b, radio wave detection sensor 54a) are not connected. If the processing path switch is not not connected, it is assumed that a path switch unconnected error has not occurred and processing proceeds to step W352-16. If the processing path switch is not connected, in step W352-15, a path switch unconnected designation command indicating that a path switch unconnected error has occurred is set in the performance transmission data storage area of the frame control RAM 120c. This causes the path switch unconnected designation command to be sent to the performance control board 130, and processing is performed to start an aisle switch unconnected error notification.

In step W352-16, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the abrasive confirmation switch has been turned from OFF to ON (abrasive has been installed). If the abrasive confirmation switch has not been turned from OFF to ON (abrasive has not been installed), the process proceeds to step W352-18. If the abrasive confirmation switch has been turned from OFF to ON (abrasive has been installed), in step W352-17, the frame control RAM 120c clears the abrasive not installed flag and sets an abrasive not installed end command indicating that the abrasive not installed error has been resolved in the performance transmission data storage area of the frame control RAM 120c. This causes the abrasive not installed end command to be sent to the performance control board 130, and processing is performed to end the abrasive not installed error notification.

In step W352-18, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the processing path switches (winning path count switch 94a, non-winning path count switch 94b, radio wave detection sensor 54a) have changed from an unconnected state to a connected state. If the processing path switch has not changed from an unconnected state to a connected state, processing proceeds to step W352-20. If the processing path switch has changed from an unconnected state to a connected state, in step W352-19, a processing path switch unconnected end command indicating that the processing path switch unconnected error has been resolved is set in the performance transmission data storage area of the frame control RAM 120c. This causes the processing path switch unconnected end command to be sent to the performance control board 130, and processing is performed to end the processing path switch unconnected error notification.

In step W352-20, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the error release switch 123 has been turned from OFF to ON (operated). If the error release switch 123 has not been turned from OFF to ON, the target error state is not released and the current hardware error notification control process is terminated. If the error release switch 123 has been turned from OFF to ON, in step W352-21, it determines whether the frame control RAM 120c has an exit switch disconnection flag. If there is no exit switch disconnection flag, the process proceeds to step W352-23. If there is an exit switch disconnection flag, in step W352-22, the exit switch disconnection flag is cleared from the frame control RAM 120c and an exit switch disconnection end command indicating that the exit switch disconnection error has been resolved is set in the performance transmission data storage area of the frame control RAM 120c. This causes the exit switch disconnection end command to be sent to the performance control board 130, and processing is performed to end the exit switch disconnection error notification.

In step W352-23, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether or not there is an exit switch abnormality flag in the frame control RAM 120c. If there is no exit switch abnormality flag, processing proceeds to step W352-25. If there is an exit switch abnormality flag, in step W352-26, the exit switch abnormality flag is cleared from the frame control RAM 120c, and an exit switch abnormality termination command indicating that the exit switch abnormality error has been resolved is set in the performance transmission data storage area of the frame control RAM 120c. This causes the exit switch abnormality termination command to be sent to the performance control board 130, and processing is performed to terminate the exit switch abnormality error notification.

In step W352-25, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether or not there is an entrance switch disconnection flag in the frame control RAM 120c. If there is no entrance switch disconnection flag, processing proceeds to step W352-27. If there is an entrance switch disconnection flag, in step W352-26, the entrance switch disconnection flag is cleared from the frame control RAM 120c, and an entrance switch disconnection end command indicating that the entrance switch disconnection error has been resolved is set in the performance transmission data storage area of the frame control RAM 120c. This causes the entrance switch disconnection end command to be sent to the performance control board 130, and processing is performed to end the entrance switch disconnection error notification.

In step W352-27, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether or not there is an entrance switch abnormality flag in the frame control RAM 120c. If there is no entrance switch abnormality flag, processing proceeds to step W352-29. If there is an entrance switch abnormality flag, in step W352-28, the entrance switch abnormality flag is cleared from the frame control RAM 120c, and an entrance switch abnormality termination command indicating that the entrance switch abnormality error has been resolved is set in the performance transmission data storage area of the frame control RAM 120c. This causes the entrance switch abnormality termination command to be sent to the performance control board 130, and processing is performed to terminate the entrance switch abnormality error notification.

In step W352-29, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether or not there is a foul ball switch disconnection flag in the frame control RAM 120c. If there is no foul ball switch disconnection flag, the current hardware error notification control process is terminated. If there is a foul ball switch disconnection flag, in step W352-30, the frame control CPU 120a clears the foul ball switch disconnection flag from the frame control RAM 120c, sets a foul ball switch disconnection end command indicating that the foul ball switch disconnection error has been resolved in the performance transmission data storage area of the frame control RAM 120c, and terminates the current hardware error notification control process. This causes the foul ball switch disconnection end command to be sent to the performance control board 130, and processing is performed to end the foul ball switch disconnection error notification.

In this way, when a hardware error occurs due to the hardware of the gaming machine 1, an error notification is initiated according to the type of hardware error. This allows the gaming store staff to take appropriate action, making it possible to prevent inconveniences such as players being unable to play properly and suffering disadvantages.

In addition, when a hardware error caused by the hardware of the gaming machine 1 has been resolved, the error notification corresponding to the type of hardware error that has been resolved is terminated. This makes it possible to prevent the continued notification of the resolved hardware error from interfering with play, and to reduce the occurrence of inconvenience to gaming establishments or players.

In addition, for certain hardware errors (exit switch disconnection error, exit switch abnormality error, entrance switch disconnection error, entrance switch abnormality error, foul ball switch disconnection error, etc.), it is possible to end the error notification by operating the error release switch 123 after removing the cause of the hardware error. Therefore, it is possible to end the error notification and resume play without turning off the power to the gaming machine 1, improving convenience for gaming establishments and players.

(Frame control board minor error notification control process)
98, a minor error notification control process of the frame control board 120 will be described. FIG. 98 is a flowchart showing the minor error notification control process of the frame control board 120.

First, in step W353-1, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether or not there is a communication line abnormality flag in the frame control RAM 120c indicating that a communication line abnormality error has occurred in the communication line with the dedicated unit 170, and whether or not the VL (power supply for connection confirmation) input from the dedicated unit 170 is OFF. If there is a communication line abnormality flag or the VL is ON, it is assumed that a communication line abnormality error has not occurred, and the process proceeds to step W353-3. If there is no communication line abnormality flag and the VL (power supply for connection confirmation) is OFF, in step W353-2, the frame control RAM 120c is set to a communication line abnormality flag, and a communication line abnormality designation command indicating that a communication line abnormality error has occurred is set in the performance transmission data storage area of the frame control RAM 120c. As a result, the communication line abnormality designation command is sent to the performance control board 130, and processing is performed to start the communication line abnormality error notification.

Incidentally, as in this process, a process may be performed to determine whether or not there is an abnormality (e.g., a disconnection) in the communication between the frame control board 120 and the dedicated unit 170, and such a control program (frame control program) can also be said to be a detection means for detecting whether or not there is an abnormality (e.g., a disconnection) in the communication between the frame control board 120 and the dedicated unit 170.

In step W353-3, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether or not a response has been received within a specified time from the transmission of the specific message to the dedicated unit 170. If a response is received within the specified time, it is assumed that a communication no-response error has not occurred, in which there is no message response from the dedicated unit 170 (there is an abnormality in communication with the dedicated unit 170), and the process proceeds to step W353-5. If there is no response within the specified time, in step W353-4, a communication line abnormality flag is set in the frame control RAM 120c indicating that a communication no-response error has occurred, and a communication no-response designation command indicating that a communication no-response error has occurred is set in the performance transmission data storage area of the frame control RAM 120c. This causes the communication no-response designation command to be sent to the performance control board 130, and processing is performed to start a communication no-response error notification.

In step W353-5, the frame control CPU 120a judges whether the excess sensor 94e is ON during the customer waiting state when the special symbol change display or the jackpot game is not being executed, and during the firing stop when the game balls are not being fired. If the excess sensor 94e is not ON, it is assumed that an excess ball error, in which the number of game balls circulating in the ball circulation mechanism is excessive, has not occurred, and the process proceeds to step W353-7. If the excess sensor 94e is ON, in step W353-6, an excess ball error flag indicating that an excess ball error has occurred is set in the frame control RAM 120c, and an excess ball error designation command indicating that an excess ball error has occurred is set in the performance transmission data storage area of the frame control RAM 120c. As a result, the excess ball error designation command is sent to the performance control board 130, and processing is performed to start the excess ball error notification.

In step W353-7, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the undercount sensor 94f has turned OFF during a customer waiting state in which no special symbol change display or jackpot play is being performed, and during a launch stop in which no game balls are being launched. If the undercount sensor 94f has not turned OFF, it is assumed that a undercount error in which the number of game balls circulating in the ball circulation mechanism is too low has not occurred, and the process proceeds to step W353-9. If the undercount sensor 94f has turned OFF, in step W353-8, a undercount error flag indicating that a undercount error has occurred is set in the frame control RAM 120c, and a undercount error designation command indicating that a undercount error has occurred is set in the performance transmission data storage area of the frame control RAM 120c. This causes the undercount error designation command to be sent to the performance control board 130, and processing is performed to start the undercount error notification.

In step W353-9, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the retry operation of the lifting and polishing device 95 (the operation of driving the lifting mechanism to lift the game ball to the lifted ball passage when the lift down switch 94d located at the downstream end of the recovered ball passage, near the entrance of the lifting and polishing device 95, is in the ON state) has failed three consecutive times (the retry operation was performed but the lift up switch 94c located at the upstream end of the lifted ball passage, near the exit of the lifting and polishing device 95, did not turn ON for the specified time). If the retry operation has not failed three consecutive times, it is assumed that a lifting mechanism error that prevents the lifting and grinding device 95 from lifting the game ball has not occurred, and the process proceeds to step W353-11. If the retry operation has failed three consecutive times, in step W353-10, a lifting mechanism error flag indicating that a lifting mechanism error has occurred is set in the frame control RAM 120c, and a lifting mechanism error designation command indicating that a lifting mechanism error has occurred is set in the performance transmission data storage area of the frame control RAM 120c. As a result, the lifting mechanism error designation command is sent to the performance control board 130, and processing is performed to start a lifting mechanism error notification.

In step W353-11, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the glass frame open detection switch 31a has changed from ON to OFF (the glass frame 4 has opened). If the glass frame open detection switch 31a has not changed from ON to OFF (the glass frame 4 has not been opened), it is assumed that a glass frame open error that would cause the glass frame 4 to be opened has not occurred, and the process moves to step W353-13. If the glass frame open detection switch 31a has changed from ON to OFF (the glass frame 4 has been opened), in step W353-12, a glass frame open designation command indicating that a glass frame open error has occurred is set in the performance transmission data storage area of the frame control RAM 120c. This causes the glass frame open designation command to be sent to the performance control board 130, and processing is carried out to start a glass frame open error notification.

In step W353-13, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the inner frame open detection switch 31b has changed from ON to OFF (the inner frame 3 has opened). If the inner frame open detection switch 31b has not changed from ON to OFF (the inner frame 3 has not opened), it is assumed that an inner frame open error that would open the inner frame 3 has not occurred, and processing moves to step W353-15. If the inner frame open detection switch 31b has changed from ON to OFF (the inner frame 3 has opened), in step W353-14, an inner frame open designation command indicating that an inner frame open error has occurred is set in the performance transmission data storage area of the frame control RAM 120c. This causes the inner frame open designation command to be sent to the performance control board 130, and processing is performed to start an inner frame open error notification.

In step W353-15, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the number of game balls owned by the player stored in the frame control RAM 120c is "0" and whether the launch pad switch 92a is ON (whether there are game balls on the launch pad). If the number of game balls owned by the player is not "0" or the launch pad switch 92a is not ON (there are no game balls on the launch pad), it is assumed that a launch pad remaining ball error has not occurred, in which the game ball to be launched remains on the launch pad even though the number of game balls owned by the player is "0", and processing proceeds to step W353-17. If the number of game balls owned by the player is "0" and the launch pad switch 92a is ON, in step W353-16, a launch pad remaining ball error flag is set in the frame control RAM 120c indicating that a launch pad remaining ball error has occurred, and a launch pad remaining ball error designation command indicating that a launch pad remaining ball error has occurred is set in the performance transmission data storage area of the frame control RAM 120c. As a result, the launch pad remaining ball error designation command is sent to the performance control board 130, and processing is performed to start the launch pad remaining ball error notification.

In step W353-17, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the number of game balls owned by the player stored in the frame control RAM 120c exceeds a specified number (for example, 40,000). If the number of game balls does not exceed the specified number, it is assumed that an over-number of game balls has not occurred, and processing proceeds to step W353-19. If the number of game balls exceeds the specified number, in step W353-18, a game ball over-number flag is set in the frame control RAM 120c indicating that an over-number of game balls has occurred, and an over-number of game balls designation command indicating that an over-number of game balls has occurred is set in the presentation transmission data storage area of the frame control RAM 120c. This causes the over-number of game balls designation command to be sent to the presentation control board 130.

In step W353-19, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether or not there is a communication line abnormality flag in the frame control RAM 120c indicating that a communication line abnormality error has occurred, and whether or not the VL (power supply for connection confirmation) input from the dedicated unit 170 is ON. If there is no communication line abnormality flag or the VL is OFF, the communication line abnormality error is assumed not to have been resolved, and processing proceeds to step W353-21. If there is a communication line abnormality flag and the VL (power supply for connection confirmation) is ON, in step W353-20, the communication line abnormality flag stored in the frame control RAM 120c is cleared, and a communication line abnormality termination command indicating that the communication line abnormality error has been resolved is set in the performance transmission data storage area of the frame control RAM 120c. This causes the communication line abnormality termination command to be sent to the performance control board 130, and processing is performed to terminate the communication line abnormality error notification.

In step W353-21, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether or not there is a communication line abnormality flag in the frame control RAM 120c indicating that a communication no response error has occurred, and whether or not a message has been received from the dedicated unit 170 (communication with the dedicated unit 170 is normal). If there is no communication no response flag or no message has been received, the frame control CPU 120a determines that the communication no response error has not been resolved and proceeds to step W353-23. If there is a communication line abnormality flag and a message has been received from the dedicated unit 170, in step W353-22, the frame control CPU 120a clears the communication no response flag stored in the frame control RAM 120c and sets a communication no response end command indicating that the communication no response error has been resolved in the performance transmission data storage area of the frame control RAM 120c. This causes the communication no response end command to be sent to the performance control board 130, and processing is performed to end the communication no response error notification.

In step W353-23, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether there is an excess ball error flag in the frame control RAM 120c and whether the excess sensor 94e has changed from ON to OFF (the number of game balls in the ball circulation mechanism has decreased to the appropriate number). If there is no excess ball error flag or the excess sensor 94e has not changed from ON to OFF, the excess ball error is deemed not to have been resolved and processing proceeds to step W353-25. If there is an excess ball error flag and the excess sensor 94e has changed from ON to OFF, in step W353-24, the excess ball error flag stored in the frame control RAM 120c is cleared and an excess ball error termination command indicating that the excess ball error has been resolved is set in the performance transmission data storage area of the frame control RAM 120c. This causes the excess ball error termination command to be sent to the performance control board 130, and processing is performed to terminate the excess ball error notification.

In step W353-25, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether there is a too few balls error flag in the frame control RAM 120c and whether the too few balls sensor 94f has changed from OFF to ON (the number of game balls in the ball circulation mechanism has increased to the appropriate number). If there is no too few balls error flag or the too few balls sensor 94f has not changed from OFF to ON, it is assumed that the too few balls error has not been resolved and processing proceeds to step W353-27. If there is an excess balls error flag and the too few balls sensor 94f has changed from OFF to ON, in step W353-26, the too few balls error flag stored in the frame control RAM 120c is cleared and a too few balls error end command indicating that the too few balls error has been resolved is set in the performance transmission data storage area of the frame control RAM 120c. This causes the too few balls error end command to be sent to the performance control board 130, and processing is performed to end the too few balls error notification.

In step W353-27, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the glass frame open detection switch 31a has changed from OFF to ON (the glass frame 4 has entered a closed state). If the glass frame open detection switch 31a has not changed from OFF to ON, the process proceeds to step W353-29. If the glass frame open detection switch 31a has changed from OFF to ON, the process assumes that the glass frame 4 has entered a closed state, and in step W353-28, a glass frame open end command indicating that the glass frame open error has ended is set in the performance transmission data storage area of the frame control RAM 120c. This causes the glass frame open end command to be sent to the performance control board 130, and processing is performed to end the glass frame open error notification.

In step W353-29, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the inner frame open detection switch 31b has changed from OFF to ON (the inner frame 3 has become closed). If the inner frame open detection switch 31b has not changed from OFF to ON, processing proceeds to step W353-31. If the inner frame open detection switch 31b has changed from OFF to ON, the inner frame 3 is deemed to have become closed, and in step W353-30, an inner frame open end designation command indicating that the inner frame open error has ended is set in the performance transmission data storage area of the frame control RAM 120c. This causes the inner frame open end designation command to be sent to the performance control board 130, and processing is performed to end the inner frame open error notification.

In step W353-31, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether or not the frame control RAM 120c has a launch pad remaining ball error flag and the launch pad switch 92a is OFF (there are no game balls on the launch pad). If there is no launch pad remaining ball error flag or the launch pad switch 92a is not OFF, the process proceeds to step W353-33. If there is a launch pad remaining ball error flag and the launch pad switch 92a is OFF, in step W353-32, the launch pad remaining ball error flag stored in the frame control RAM 120c is cleared and a launch pad remaining ball error end command indicating that the launch pad remaining ball error has been resolved is set in the performance transmission data storage area of the frame control RAM 120c. This causes the launch pad remaining ball error end command to be sent to the performance control board 130, and processing is performed to end the launch pad remaining ball error notification.

In step W353-33, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the frame control RAM 120c has an over-number-of-game-balls flag and whether the number of game balls owned by the player stored in the frame control RAM 120c has fallen below the specified number (40,000). If there is no over-number-of-game-balls flag or the number of game balls exceeds the specified number, the minor error notification control process is terminated. If there is an over-number-of-game-balls flag and the number of game balls has fallen below the specified number, the frame control CPU 120a clears the over-number-of-game-balls flag stored in the frame control RAM 120c, sets an over-number-of-game-balls end command indicating that the over-number of game balls has been resolved in the presentation transmission data storage area of the frame control RAM 120c, and terminates the current minor error notification control process. This causes the over-number-of-game-balls end command to be sent to the presentation control board 130.

In this way, when a minor error occurs that requires a low level of security, an error notification is initiated according to the type of minor error. This allows game store staff to take appropriate action, making it possible to prevent inconvenience to game stores or players.

In addition, when a minor error with a low security level is resolved, the error notification corresponding to the type of minor error that has been resolved is terminated. This makes it possible to prevent the continued notification of a resolved error from interfering with play, and to reduce inconvenience to game establishments and players.

(Display contents and display priority of frame control display when various alarm events occur)
Using Figure 99, the display contents and display priority order of the frame control display 125 when various notification events (notification events such as errors) occur will be described.

The table shown in FIG. 99 includes the priority order for each type of notification event, the type of notification event, the detection board (main control board 110, frame control board 120) that detects the occurrence of a notification event, the main control areas used to perform notifications (area used by main control unit 110m, outside the area used by main control unit 110m, area used by frame control unit 120m, outside the area used by frame control unit 120m), error code display on the game ball count display 135, error code display on the frame control display 125, operation restrictions (action of sending balls to the launch pad, action of launching game balls, control of game progress), and the state of the dedicated unit 170 during the occurrence of a notification event (game control based on the operation of the loan button of the dedicated unit 170). The system is associated with the following: loan of game balls by a player within the amount of the deposit balance; replay within the number of game balls owned by the player that is stored in association with the identification information of the member card inserted by the player based on the operation of the replay button on the dedicated unit 170; counting from the number of game balls stored on the frame control board 120 based on the operation of the counting button 20 on the gaming machine 1 (storing the number of game balls associated with the identification information of the member card or visitor card); card operations (insertion of a member card or visitor card into the dedicated unit 170, or return of a member card or visitor card based on the operation of the return button on the dedicated unit 170); and the possibility of controlling deposits into the dedicated unit 170).

For example, "clearing the number of game balls" has the highest priority, and when the frame control board 120 detects the occurrence of a game ball clear, and when detecting or notifying the occurrence of a game ball clear, the area used by the frame control unit 120m is used primarily, with the area outside the area used by the frame control unit 120m used as an auxiliary, the game ball count display 135 does not display a game ball clear error code, and the frame control display 125 displays the error code "H67". When the game ball count is cleared, the operation restrictions include ball feeding operation, firing operation, and game progress control, and the state of the dedicated unit 170 allows control of loan/replay, counting, card operation (insertion/return), and deposit.

In addition, when a notification event occurs that allows ball forwarding operations, such as "clearing the number of game balls," firing operations, and game progress control, or even when a corresponding notification is being executed, if a notification event occurs simultaneously or in parallel that restricts (restricts) one or more of the ball forwarding operations, firing operations, and game progress control, the corresponding operations among the ball forwarding operations, firing operations, and game progress control are restricted (restricted).

In addition, when a notification event occurs in which loan/replay, counting, card operation, or deposit is permitted, such as "clearing the number of game balls," or even when a corresponding notification is being executed, if a notification event occurs simultaneously or in parallel in which one or more of the controls relating to loan/replay, counting, card operation, or deposit are restricted (regulated), the corresponding controls relating to loan/replay, counting, card operation, or deposit are restricted (regulated).

In this way, the "clear number of game balls" function, which clears the number of game balls owned by the player, has a higher priority than the various notification events detected by the main control board 110. This makes it possible for the frame control display 125 to properly notify (display an error code) the player that the number of game balls (game value) owned by the player, which is the most important thing to the player, has been cleared.

In addition, among the various notification events detected by the frame control board 120, the "clear number of game balls" event, which clears the number of game balls owned by the player, has the highest priority. This makes it possible for the frame control display 125 to properly notify (display an error code) the player that the number of game balls (game value) owned by the player, which is the most important thing to the player, has been cleared.

In addition, when "game ball count clear" is performed, an error code is displayed on the frame control display 125 that is visible to game store staff, but when a game ball is released or the number of game balls owned by the player is counted, the display of the error code corresponding to "game ball count clear" on the frame control display 125 is terminated. This makes it possible to end the display of the game ball count clear error code by ensuring that the player has performed a loan operation or played a game, making it possible to prevent the game ball count from being cleared unnecessarily.

In addition, when "game ball count clear" is performed, an error code is displayed on the frame control display 125 that is visible to game store staff, but if the power is restored after the power outage without firing or counting being performed after "game ball count clear" is performed, the error code is displayed again on the frame control display 125. Therefore, evidence that the game ball count has been cleared is not erased by the power outage being restored, which makes it possible to improve convenience for game store staff.

In addition, when various notification events detected by the main control board 110 occur, an error code is not displayed on the frame control display 125 mounted on the frame control board 120, whereas when various notification events detected by the frame control board 120 occur, an error code is displayed on the frame control display 125 mounted on the frame control board 120. Therefore, various notification events detected by the main control board 110 and various notification events detected by the frame control board 120 can be dealt with separately, which improves convenience for game store staff.

In addition, when the "ball removal operation is in progress," an error code ("-") is displayed not only on the frame control display 125 that is provided on the rear side of the gaming machine 1 and visible to game store staff, but also on the game ball count display 135 that is provided on the front side of the gaming machine 1 and visible to players. Therefore, even if the inner frame is closed during the ball removal operation, it is possible to know that the ball removal operation is in progress, which improves convenience for game store staff.

In addition, even for various notification events (notification events) detected by the frame control board 120, for certain notification events (ball removal lever operation error, launch pad remaining ball error, counting process notification, counting process completion) that do not directly disadvantage the player, the performance control board 130 will issue an event notification, but the frame control display 125 will not display an error code (it is regulated or limited). Therefore, by not issuing excessive event notifications, it is possible to avoid inconveniences such as causing game store staff to panic.

In addition, among the various notification events, when a specific notification event (setting change, setting confirmation, RWM abnormal error, acquisition limit device activation, entrance switch disconnection error, entrance switch abnormal error, communication line abnormal error, glass frame opening error, inner frame opening error, ball removal operation in progress, ball removal lever operation error, etc.) occurs that would cause inconvenience if game balls were to be released, the ball feeding operation and/or the release operation is not executed (restricted/restricted). This makes it possible to prevent inconvenience caused by the release of game balls when a specific notification event occurs.

In addition, among the various notification events, when a specific notification event (setting change, setting confirmation, RWM abnormal error, acquisition limit device activation, ball removal operation in progress, ball removal lever operation error, etc.) occurs that would cause inconvenience if game progress control is performed, game progress control is not executed (it is restricted or limited). This makes it possible to prevent inconvenience from occurring if game progress control is performed when a specific notification event occurs.

In addition, when a counting process notification occurs, if the player owns 1000 or more game balls, the ball forwarding operation and the firing operation are executed, but if the player owns less than 1000 game balls, the ball forwarding operation and the firing operation are not executed (are restricted or limited). This makes it possible to avoid inconveniences such as the counting process not being able to end normally due to the counting process clashing with the ball forwarding operation or the firing operation.

In addition, when a notification event that allows ball forwarding or firing operations occurs or is being notified (for example, a notification event such as the number of game balls being cleared), if a notification event that restricts the ball forwarding or firing operations occurs (for example, an acquisition limit device is activated, a communication line abnormality error, a glass frame opening error, or an inner frame opening error notification event), regardless of whether it has a lower or higher priority, the ball forwarding or firing operations are not executed (they are restricted or restricted). This makes it possible to restrict the ball forwarding or firing operations at an appropriate time, making it possible to prevent inconveniences caused by the execution of the ball forwarding or firing operations. In addition, the occurrence of a high-priority notification event (notification event) will not invalidate the restrictions on the ball forwarding or firing operations due to a low-priority notification event (notification event).

In addition, when an alarm event (alert event) that permits lending/replay occurs or is being notified, if an alarm event (alert event) that restricts lending/replay occurs, lending/replay is restricted (regulated/restricted). This makes it possible to prevent inconveniences caused by the execution of lending/replay. Furthermore, the occurrence of an alarm event (alert event) with a high priority does not invalidate the restriction on lending/replay due to an alarm event (alert event) with a low priority, making it possible to operate the dedicated unit 170 appropriately.

In addition, when an alarm event (alert event) that permits card operation (insertion/return) occurs or is being notified, if an alarm event (alert event) that restricts card operation (insertion/return) occurs, regardless of whether it has a lower or higher priority, card operation (insertion/return) is restricted. This makes it possible to prevent inconveniences caused by manufacturer operations being performed. Furthermore, the occurrence of an alarm event (alert event) with a higher priority does not invalidate the restriction on card operation (insertion/return) due to an alarm event (alert event) with a lower priority, making it possible to operate the dedicated unit 170 appropriately.

In addition, when an alarm event (alert event) that allows deposits occurs, regardless of whether the alarm event (alert event) has a higher or lower priority than the alarm event (alert event) that allows deposits, the deposits are restricted. This makes it possible to prevent inconveniences caused by deposits being made. In addition, the occurrence of an alarm event (alert event) with a higher priority does not invalidate the deposit restriction due to an alarm event (alert event) with a lower priority, allowing the dedicated unit 170 to operate appropriately.

In addition, the priority of "clear number of game balls" may be placed below "change settings", below "check settings", below "power on (clear RWM)", below "power restoration", below "fraud detection 3 (RWM abnormal error)", below "fraud detection 2 (abnormal winning error)", below "fraud detection 1 (magnet detection error)", below "win limit device activated", below "fraudulent radio wave detection error", below "abnormal number of winning balls error", below "abnormal number of fired balls error", below "abnormal communication error within game machine", below "exit switch disconnection error", or below "exit switch abnormal error". Or it could be placed under "Entrance switch broken error", or under "Entrance switch abnormal error", or under "Foul ball switch broken error", or under "Communication line abnormal error", or under "No communication response error", or under "Too many balls error", or under "Too few balls error", or under "Lifting mechanism error", or under "Abrasive not installed error", or under "Aisle switch not connected error", or under "Glass frame opening error", or under "Inner frame opening error", or under "Ball removal operation in progress", or under "Ball removal lever operation error", or under "Ball remaining on launch pad error".

Also, the frame control display 125 may display error codes for various notification events detected by the main control board 110. In this case, the error codes for various notification events detected by the main control board 110 may be set to "PXXX" so that they can be distinguished from the error codes ("HXXX") for various notification events detected by the frame control board 120. Specifically, "P64" may be displayed for "setting change", "P65" for "setting confirmation", "P66" for "power on (RWM clear)", "P67" for "fraud detection 3 (RWM abnormal error)", "P68" for "fraud detection 2 (abnormal winning error)", "P69" for "fraud detection 1 (magnet detection error)", and "P70" for "winning limit device activated".

In addition, when the winning limit device is activated, an error code ("P70") indicating that the winning limit device has been activated may be displayed on the frame control display 125 visible to game store staff and/or the game ball count display 135 visible to the player. When displaying an error code indicating that the winning limit device has been activated on the frame control display 125, the number of game balls → performance information → error code may be displayed repeatedly, and when displayed on the game ball count display 135, the number of game balls → error code may be displayed repeatedly, or the error code may be displayed (the number of game balls → error code may be displayed repeatedly or only the error code) only when the number of game balls owned by the player is "0" (when the number of game balls becomes "0" after a game ball is fired, or when the number of game balls is counted and becomes "0")

In addition, during the ball removal operation, instead of displaying the same error code ("-") on the frame control display 125 and the game ball count display 135, different error codes may be displayed on the frame control display 125 and the game ball count display 135, or an error code may be displayed on only one of the frame control display 125 and the game ball count display 135.

In addition, the game ball launching operation may be prevented from being executed when an "entrance switch disconnection error" or "entrance switch abnormality error" occurs, and the ball feeding operation or launching operation may be executed when an "inner frame opening error" occurs.

In addition, when the "counting process notification" occurs and the number of game balls owned by the player is 1000 or more, rather than allowing ball feeding or firing operations, the number may be more than 1000 or less than 1000. However, if it is less than 1000, it is recommended to set it to 250 or more, which is the number that can be counted with one counting operation (single press).

In addition, when a "counting process notification" occurs, ball feeding and firing operations may not be performed regardless of the number of game balls the player owns.

(Display performance information calculation process for frame control board)
The display performance information calculation process of the frame control board 120 will be described with reference to Fig. 100. Fig. 100 is a flowchart showing the display performance information calculation process of the frame control board 120.

First, in step W401, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether or not the current game state is normal. If the current game state is not normal, the process proceeds to step W405. If the current game state is normal, the process proceeds to step W402 to determine whether or not the game information has been updated. Specifically, in step W259 of the game machine information reception process described above, the process proceeds to determine whether or not various game information has been updated based on the game machine information (hall control and fraud monitoring information) received from the main control board 110. If the game information has not been updated, the process proceeds to step W405. If the game information has been updated, the process proceeds to step W403.

In step W403, the frame control CPU 120a calculates the current number of prize balls from the game information (the number of prizes won at the various prize ports and the number of prize balls at the various prize ports), and in step W404, adds the current number of prize balls to the normal prize ball counter, which counts the number of prize balls during normal game mode. For example, if there is one prize at the first start port 45 and the number of prize balls at the first start port 45 is three, it calculates that there were 1 x 3 = 3 prize balls, and adds these three to the normal prize ball counter.

The frame control CPU 120a determines whether a detection signal has been input from the winning passage count switch 94a or the non-winning passage count switch 94b (an out ball that has passed through the play area 5a has been detected). If a detection signal has not been input, the process proceeds to step W409. If a detection signal has been input, in step W406, the total out counter, which counts the number of out balls in all play states in the current play section, is incremented by 1.

The frame control CPU 120a determines whether or not the current game state is normal. If the current game state is not normal, the process proceeds to step W409. If the current game state is normal, the process proceeds to step W408, where the normal out counter, which counts the number of out balls during the normal game state, is incremented by one.

In step W409, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the section counter for counting which game section is currently in is the first game section value (0), indicating that it is the first game section. If it is not the first game section, the process proceeds to step W411 assuming that the current section is a second or subsequent game section for which the display performance information (normal base value) is to be calculated, and if it is the first game section, the process proceeds to step W410 assuming that the current section is a first game section for which the display performance information is not to be calculated.

In step W410, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the total number of outs in the current play section indicated by the total number of outs counter is equal to or greater than the first section update value (300). If the total number of outs is not equal to or greater than the first section update value, the current display performance information calculation process is terminated, and if the total number of outs is equal to or greater than the first section update value, the process proceeds to step W416.

In step W411, the frame control CPU 120a calculates a normal base value, which is the display performance information to be displayed on the frame control display 125, and rounds it off to the first decimal place. The "normal base value" is the ratio (proportion) of the amount of game value that is to be awarded in a game during the normal game state (the number of prize balls that are to be awarded as prize balls) to the amount of game value used in a game during the normal game state (the number of out balls that have passed through the game area 5a), and is calculated using the formula "(the number of prize balls during the normal game state, which is the number of prize balls ÷ the number of out balls during the normal game state, which is the number of out balls) × 100".

In step W412, the frame control CPU 120a saves the calculated normal base value in the first area of the base memory area (first to fourth areas) set in the frame control RAM 120c. The "base memory area" is a memory area for storing normal base values in four play intervals, and is composed of a first area for storing the normal base value in the current play interval, a second area for storing the normal base value in the play interval two intervals ago, and a fourth area for storing the normal base value in the play interval three intervals ago.

In step W413, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the total number of outs in the current play section indicated by the total out counter is equal to or greater than the second section update value (60,000). If the total number of outs is not equal to or greater than the second section update value, the play section is not updated and the current display performance information calculation process is terminated. If the total number of outs is equal to or greater than the second section update value, the play section is updated and processing proceeds to step W414.

The game zones from the second game zone onwards are divided when the total number of outs reaches 60,000. This number of 60,000 is a number that can guarantee approximately one day's operation of the gaming machine 1, which shoots 100 game balls per minute. Therefore, the game zone is updated when the gaming machine 1 has been operating for approximately one day.

In step W414, the frame control CPU 120a shifts down the contents of the first to third areas of the base memory area by one, and in step W415, it clears the first area of the base memory area to 0. As a result, the normal base values stored in each area are stored as the normal base values for the previous play interval, and the normal base values for the current play interval are reset, preparing to move to the next play interval.

In step W416, the frame control CPU 120a adds "1" to the section counter to update the game section, and in step W417, it clears to 0 the total number of outs indicated by the total number of outs counter, the number of normal prize balls indicated by the normal prize ball count counter, and the number of normal outs indicated by the normal outs counter, and then performs processing to transition to the next game section, and ends the current display performance information calculation processing.

In this way, a normal base value (a type of historical information) is calculated and stored as performance information for each game section from the number of normal outs and the number of normal payouts for each game section. This makes it possible to provide information for appropriately grasping (evaluating) the actual performance of the gaming machine 1.

In addition, the calculation of the normal base value is not performed in the first game section. This means that unreliable information that is influenced by operational checks during pre-shipment inspections of the gaming machine (checks of the operation of the detection switches for various winning ports, the winning passage count switch 94a, and the non-winning passage count switch 94b, which are performed by shooting and handling game balls) will not be provided (displayed on the frame control display 125), making it possible to avoid inconveniences such as misunderstanding the actual performance of the gaming machine 1.

In addition, the normal base value is calculated from the second play zone onwards. Therefore, a highly reliable normal base value that is free from the influence of pre-shipment inspection of the gaming machine can be displayed on the frame control display 125, making it possible to provide highly reliable information for accurately grasping the actual performance of the gaming machine 1.

Although the performance information is calculated regardless of whether the acquisition limit device is operating or not, the performance information may not be calculated while the acquisition limit device is operating, or the performance information may be calculated but the calculated performance information may not be displayed on the frame control display 125.

(Frame control board gaming machine performance information calculation process)
The gaming machine performance information calculation process of the frame control board 120 will be described with reference to Fig. 101. Fig. 101 is a flowchart showing the gaming machine performance information calculation process of the frame control board 120.

First, in step W451, the frame control CPU 120a performs a process to calculate the total number of shot balls. Specifically, the frame control CPU 120a performs a process to calculate the total number of shot balls, which is the total number of game balls that have been shot into the game area 5a since the establishment of the counting start condition to the present, based on the game machine information (game information from the hall control and fraud monitoring information) received from the main control board 110 and information on the game balls counted and managed by the frame control board 120.

In step W452, the frame control CPU 120a performs a process to calculate the total number of acquired game balls. Specifically, the process is performed based on the gaming machine information (game information from the hall control and fraud monitoring information) received from the main control board 110 and the information on the game balls counted and managed by the frame control board 120 to calculate the total number of acquired game balls, which is the total number of prize balls that have been awarded to the player since the establishment of the counting start condition to the present.

The frame control CPU 120a performs a ball discharge rate calculation process in step W453. Specifically, the frame control CPU 120a performs a process to calculate the ball discharge rate, which is the ratio (proportion) of the total number of acquired game balls calculated in step W452 described above to the total number of shot balls calculated in step W451 described above, using the formula (total number of acquired game balls ÷ total number of shot balls) × 100.

In step W454, the frame control CPU 120a performs a process to calculate the number of game balls acquired per minute. Specifically, the process calculates the number of game balls acquired per minute, which is the total number of prize balls awarded to the player in the most recent minute, based on the game machine information (game information from the hall control and fraud monitoring information) received from the main control board 110 and information on the game balls counted and managed by the frame control board 120.

In step W455, the frame control CPU 120a performs a role ratio calculation process. Specifically, based on the gaming machine information (game information from the hall control and fraud monitoring information) received from the main control board 110 and information on the gaming balls counted and managed by the frame control board 120, the frame control CPU 120a performs a process to calculate the role ratio, which is the ratio of the number of gaming balls acquired based on the operation of various roles (winning the second start hole 47 opened in the auxiliary game, winning the big winning hole 50 opened in the big win game) to the total number of acquired gaming balls described above.

In step W456, the frame control CPU 120a performs a continuous role ratio calculation process. Specifically, based on the gaming machine information (game information from the hall control and fraud monitoring information) received from the main control board 110 and information on the gaming balls counted and managed by the frame control board 120, the frame control CPU 120a performs a process to calculate a continuous role ratio, which is the ratio of the number of gaming balls acquired based on the operation of the continuous role (winning the big winning slot 50 opened in the big win game) to the total number of acquired gaming balls described above.

In step W457, the frame control CPU 120a performs a process for calculating the number of jackpots. Specifically, the frame control CPU 120a performs a process for calculating the number of jackpots, which is the total number of jackpot games that have been played since the establishment of the counting start condition to the present, based on the gaming machine information (game information from the hall control and fraud monitoring information) received from the main control board 110.

In step W458, the frame control CPU 120a performs a maximum ball output calculation process and ends the current game machine performance information calculation process. Specifically, based on the game machine information (game information from the hall control and fraud monitoring information) received from the main control board 110 and information on game balls counted and managed by the frame control board 120, the frame control CPU 120 performs a process to calculate the maximum ball output, which is the largest value among the difference balls where the total number of winning balls exceeds the total number of balls fired from a certain point in time (for example, the start of a jackpot game).

In this way, the frame control board 120 calculates gaming machine performance information that is not displayed on the frame control display 125 but is sent to the dedicated unit 170. This makes it possible to provide highly reliable information that allows the actual performance of the gaming machine 1 to be accurately understood.

(Gaming machine information notification process of frame control board)
The gaming machine information notification process of the frame control board 120 will be described with reference to Fig. 102. Fig. 102 is a flowchart showing the gaming machine information notification process of the frame control board 120.

First, in step W501, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the main control state (main control state 1, main control state 2) or the game information stored in the frame control RAM 120c has been updated since the last notification of the game machine information to the dedicated unit 170. If the main control state or game information has not been updated, the process proceeds to step W508, and if the main control state or game information has been updated, the process proceeds to step W502.

In step W502, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether 300 ms have elapsed since the start of the frame control board 120 or the timing of the previous transmission of the hall control/fraud monitoring information notification. If 300 ms have not elapsed, it is not the timing to transmit the hall control/fraud monitoring information notification and the process proceeds to step W504. If 300 ms have elapsed, it is the timing to transmit the hall control/fraud monitoring information notification and in step W503, the hall control/fraud monitoring information notification is transmitted to the dedicated unit 170.

In step W504, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether 60 s (60 seconds) have passed since the start of the frame control board 120 or the timing of the previous transmission of the gaming machine installation information notification. If 60 s have not passed, it is not the timing to transmit the gaming machine installation information notification and the process proceeds to step W506. If 60 s have passed, it is the timing to transmit the gaming machine installation information notification and in step W505, the gaming machine installation information notification is transmitted to the dedicated unit 170.

In step W506, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether 180 s (180 seconds) have passed since the start of the frame control board 120 or the timing of the previous transmission of the gaming machine performance information notification. If 180 s have not passed, it is not the timing to transmit the gaming machine performance information notification and the current gaming machine information notification process is terminated. If 180 s have passed, it is the timing to transmit the gaming machine performance information notification and in step W507, the gaming machine performance information notification is transmitted to the dedicated unit 170 and the current gaming machine information notification process is terminated.

In step W508, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether 60 s (60 seconds) have passed since the start of the frame control board 120 or the timing of the previous transmission of the gaming machine installation information notification. If 60 s have not passed, it is not the timing to transmit the gaming machine installation information notification and the process proceeds to step W510. If 60 s have passed, it is the timing to transmit the gaming machine installation information notification and in step W509, the gaming machine installation information is transmitted to the dedicated unit 170.

In step W510, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether 180 s (180 seconds) have passed since the start of the frame control board 120 or the timing of the previous transmission of the gaming machine performance information notification. If 180 s have not passed, it is not the timing to transmit the gaming machine performance information notification and the current gaming machine information notification process is terminated. If 180 s have passed, it is the timing to transmit the gaming machine performance information notification and in step W511, the gaming machine performance information is transmitted to the dedicated unit 170.

In step W512, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether 300 ms have passed since the start of the frame control board 120 or the timing of the previous transmission of the hall control/fraud monitoring information notification. If 300 ms have not passed, it is not the timing to transmit the hall control/fraud monitoring information notification and the process proceeds to step W512. If 300 ms have passed, it is the timing to transmit the hall control/fraud monitoring information notification and in step W513, it transmits the hall control/fraud monitoring information to the dedicated unit 170 and ends the current gaming machine information notification process.

In this way, the order in which the hall control/fraud monitoring information notification, gaming machine installation information notification, and gaming machine performance information notification is sent is switched between cases where the main control state (main control state 1, main control state 2) or gaming information stored in the frame control RAM 120c has been updated since the last gaming machine information notification to the dedicated unit 170, and cases where the main control state (main control state 1, main control state 2) or gaming information stored in the frame control RAM 120c has not been updated since the last gaming machine information notification to the dedicated unit 170. This makes it possible to send various information notifications to the dedicated unit 170 in an appropriate order depending on whether the main control state or gaming information has been updated.

In addition, the gaming machine installation information received from the main control board 110 (main control chip ID number, main control chip manufacturer code, main control chip product code) is sent to the dedicated unit 170 every predetermined time (60 seconds) (periodically), including the installation information of the frame control board 120 (frame control chip ID number, frame control chip manufacturer code, frame control chip product code). This makes it possible for the dedicated unit 170 to determine whether the frame control board 120 is appropriate, making it possible to prevent fraudulent activities such as replacement or modification of the main control board 110 or frame control board 120.

(Game ball counting process of frame control board)
The game ball counting process of the frame control board 120 will be described with reference to Fig. 103. Fig. 103 is a flowchart showing the game ball counting process of the frame control board 120.

First, in step W551, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether 100 ms have passed since the timing of the previous transmission of the gaming machine information notification. If 100 ms have not passed, it is not time to send a counting notification and the current gaming ball counting process is terminated. If 100 ms have passed, it is time to send a counting notification and the process proceeds to step W552.

In step W552, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the counting button switch 20a has been turned ON by operating the counting button 20. If the counting button switch 20a is not turned ON (OFF), the process proceeds to step W561. If the counting button switch 20a is turned ON, the process proceeds to step W553 to determine whether the number of game balls owned by the player is greater than "0". If the number of game balls owned by the player is not greater than "0" ("0" meaning there are no game balls to be transferred to the dedicated unit 170 for counting), the process proceeds to step W561. If the number of game balls owned by the player is greater than "0" ("0" meaning there are no game balls to be transferred to the dedicated unit 170 for counting), the process proceeds to step W554.

In step W554, the frame control CPU 120a sets a counting process in progress flag in the frame control RAM 120c, indicating that counting is in progress, and in step W555, sets a counting process notification designation command, indicating that counting is in progress, in the performance transmission data storage area of the frame control RAM 120c. This causes the counting process notification designation command to be sent to the performance control board 130, and processing is performed to notify the user that counting is in progress.

In step W556, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the number of game balls owned by the player is less than 1000. If the number of game balls owned by the player is not less than 1000 (more than), the process proceeds to step W559. If the number of game balls owned by the player is less than 1000, the process proceeds to step W557. The frame control board 120 determines whether the frame control board 120 is outputting a launch permission signal to the launch device 92 to allow the launch of game balls and a launch permission error (setting change, setting confirmation, fraud detection 3, acquisition limit device operation, entrance switch disconnection error, entrance switch abnormality error, communication line abnormality error, glass frame opening error, inner frame opening error, ball removal operation in progress, ball removal lever operation error, etc.) is occurring. If the launch permission signal is being output and a launch permission error is not occurring, the process proceeds to step W559. If the launch permission signal is being output and a launch permission error is occurring, the process proceeds to step W558. If the launch permission signal is being output and a launch permission error is occurring, the process proceeds to step W559. This stops the operation of the ball feeding unit 91 and launching device 92 (ball feeding to send game balls to the launch pad and/or launching game balls from the launch pad), limiting the launch of game balls.

In step W559, if the number of game balls owned by the player is 250 or more, the frame control CPU 120a subtracts 250 from the counted number of balls, and if the number of game balls owned by the player is less than 250, it subtracts all of the game balls from the counted number of balls. In step W560, the frame control CPU 120a adds the subtracted counted number of balls to the cumulative counted number stored in the frame control RAM 120c, and proceeds to step W567.

In step W561, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether or not there is a counting process in progress flag in the frame control RAM 120c. If there is no counting process in progress flag, the process proceeds to step W567. If there is a counting process in progress flag, the counting process in progress flag is cleared in step W562, and in step W653, a counting process completion designation command indicating that the counting process is complete is set in the performance transmission data storage area of the frame control RAM 120c. This causes the counting process completion designation command to be sent to the performance control board, and processing is performed to end the counting process in progress notification.

In step W564, the frame control CPU 120a clears the cumulative number of counted balls stored in the frame control RAM 120c, and in step W565, determines whether the launch permission signal is stopped and a launch prohibition error is not occurring. If the launch permission signal is being output or a launch prohibition error is occurring, processing proceeds to step W567, and if the launch permission signal is stopped and a launch prohibition error is not occurring, output of the launch permission signal is resumed in step W566. This allows the launch device to be driven (ball delivery to send game balls to the launch pad and/or launch of game balls from the launch pad), making it possible to launch game balls.

In step W567, the frame control CPU 120a sends a counting notification (counting serial number, the number of counted balls corresponding to the subtracted number of counted balls, and the cumulative number of counted balls stored in the frame control RAM 120c) to the dedicated unit 170, and ends this game ball counting process. This causes the number of game balls owned by the player to be stored in association with the identification information (card number, card ID, etc.) of the storage medium (card, coin, etc.) inserted in the dedicated unit 170.

When the output of the launch permission signal is stopped and the drive of the ball feeding unit 91 and launching device 92 is stopped, if the unit operation of the ball feeding unit 91 (the operation of feeding one game ball) has ended but the unit operation of the launching device 92 (the operation of firing one game ball) is in progress, the drive of the ball feeding unit 91 and the launching device 92 is stopped after the unit operation of the launching device 92 has ended. Also, if the unit operation of the ball feeding unit 91 (the operation of feeding one game ball) is in progress, the drive of the ball feeding unit 91 and the launching device 92 is stopped after the unit operation of the ball feeding unit 91 and the subsequent unit operation of the launching device 92 (the operation of firing one game ball) have ended.

In this way, when the counting process is performed, the driving of the ball feeding unit 91 and the launching device 92 (ball feeding that sends game balls to the launch pad and/or launching game balls from the launch pad) is stopped, and the launch of game balls is restricted. Specifically, when the counting button 20 is operated to perform the counting process, if the number of game balls owned by the player is less than the specified number (1,000 balls), the output of the launch permission signal is stopped and the driving of the ball feeding unit 91 and the launching device 92 is stopped. Therefore, the inconvenience of counting the game balls used for the launch operation is no longer generated, the number of game balls that are counted can be stably guaranteed, and the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

On the other hand, when the counting button 20 is operated to perform the counting process, if the player owns 1000 or more game balls, the output of the launch permission signal is not stopped and the operation of the ball sending unit 91 and launching device 92 is permitted. Therefore, even if the counting process is performed, it is possible to guarantee game balls to be launched, which makes the game more interesting.

In addition, when the counting process is completed, the operation of the launching device (ball delivery to the launch pad and/or launching of the game balls from the launch pad) is permitted, making it possible to launch the game balls. Therefore, the launching of the game balls is not restricted indefinitely due to the counting process being completed, which can increase the excitement of the game.

Note that the condition for the counting process to be performed is set to 1,000 or more game balls, but the number may be set to 250 or more, which ensures that the counting process can be performed by at least one operation (single press) of the counting button 20, or may be set to a number greater than 1,000.

(Game ball lending process of frame control board)
The game ball lending process of the frame control board 120 will be described with reference to Fig. 104. Fig. 104 is a flowchart showing the game ball lending process of the frame control board 120.

First, in step W601, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether or not a loan notification has been received, which is sent within 170 ms of the previous counting notification or when the loan button on the dedicated unit 170 is operated. If a loan notification has not been received, the current game ball loan process is terminated. If a loan notification has been received, in step W602, it determines whether or not the loan serial number of the received loan notification is the previous loan serial number stored in the frame control RAM 120c + 1. If it is not the previous loan serial number + 1, the process proceeds to step W610. If it is the previous loan serial number + 1, in step W603, the loan serial number of the received loan notification is stored in the frame control RAM 120c as the previous loan serial number.

In step W604, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether or not there is a ball removal operation in progress flag in the frame control RAM 120c, which indicates that the ball removal operation is in progress. If there is a ball removal operation in progress flag (ball removal operation is in progress), processing proceeds to step W610. If there is no ball removal operation in progress flag (ball removal operation is not in progress), in step W605, it determines whether or not the number of game balls owned by the player (the number of game balls displayed on the game ball number display 135) is less than 100,000. If it is not less than 100,000, processing proceeds to step W610 as it is assumed that game balls will not be lent out, and if it is less than 100,000, processing proceeds to step W606.

In step W606, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the number of loaned balls in the received loan notification is a normal value (0 to 255). If it is not a normal value, it proceeds to step W610, assuming that no game balls will be loaned. If it is a normal value, it proceeds to step W607, determining whether the number of loaned balls in the received loan notification is a value greater than "0". If it is a value greater than "0", it proceeds to step W608. If it is not a value greater than "0" (it is "0"), it terminates the current game ball loan process.

In step W608, the frame control CPU 120a adds the number of loaned balls included in the loan notification to the number of game balls of the player. As a result, the number of game balls displayed on the game ball number display 135 and the frame control display 125 is updated to the number of game balls after the addition. Then, in step W609, a loan receipt result response (reception result = normal) is sent to the dedicated unit 170 indicating that the game balls have been loaned (the loan notification has been received normally), and the current game ball loan process is terminated. This makes it possible for the dedicated unit 170 to know that the game balls have been loaned.

In step W610, the frame control CPU 120a transmits a loan receipt result response (reception result = abnormal) indicating that a normal loan notification could not be received from the dedicated unit 170 and that a game ball cannot be loaned out (the loan notification could not be received normally), and ends this game ball loan process. This makes it possible to understand that a game ball was not loaned out from the dedicated unit 170.

In this way, even if a loan notification based on the operation of the loan button is received from the dedicated unit 170, if the ball removal operation is in progress, the loan process of the game value (game ball) is not performed. This makes it possible to avoid the inconvenience of the game value (game ball) being loaned out even when the ball removal operation is in progress and no game control is being performed, thereby making the game more interesting.

In addition, each time a rental process of gaming value (gaming balls) is performed, a rental receipt result response (reception result = normal) is sent to the dedicated unit 170 indicating that the rental process has been performed, and if a rental process of gaming value (gaming balls) is not performed, a rental receipt result response (rental receipt result response = abnormal) is sent to the dedicated unit 170 indicating that the rental process has not been performed. This allows the dedicated unit 170 to determine whether or not the rental process has been performed, making it possible for the gaming establishment to collect necessary information, such as tallying up sales data.

(Main processing of the production control section)
Next, the main processing of the performance control unit 130m will be described with reference to Fig. 105. Fig. 105 is a flow chart showing the main processing of the performance control unit 130m.

When power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board 160, a system reset occurs in the sub-CPU 130a, and the sub-CPU 130a performs the following main processing.

First, in step E10, the sub-CPU 130a sets interrupt inhibition to inhibit timer interrupts, and in step E20, performs initialization processing. Specifically, in response to power-on, the sub-CPU 130a reads the main processing program from the sub-ROM 130b, initializes flags and the like stored in the sub-RAM 130c, and performs processing such as initial settings.

In step E30, the sub-CPU 130a sets an interrupt permission to allow a timer interrupt, and in step E40, performs a sub-random number update process. Specifically, it performs a process to update various random numbers stored in the sub-RAM 130c. Thereafter, the process of step E40 is repeated until a predetermined interrupt process is performed.

(Timer interrupt processing of the production control unit)
The timer interrupt process of the performance control unit 130m will be described with reference to Fig. 106. Fig. 106 is a flow chart showing the timer interrupt process executed in the performance control unit 130m at predetermined intervals (4 milliseconds).

First, in step E100, the sub CPU 130a saves the information stored in the registers of the sub CPU 130a to the stack area, and in step E120, performs timer update processing. In this timer update processing, the sub CPU 130a performs processing to update various timers.

The sub-CPU 130a performs input control processing in step E130. Specifically, it determines whether or not there has been input to various switches such as the performance button detection switch 17a and the joystick detection switch 19a, and if there has been input, it performs processing to set predetermined data.

In step E150, the sub-CPU 130a performs command analysis processing. Specifically, it determines whether various commands have been sent from the main control board 110 and the frame control board 120, and if various commands have been sent, it stores the received commands in the receive buffer of the sub-RAM 130c.

The sub-CPU 130a performs setting change/confirmation processing in step E170. Specifically, the sub-CPU 130a refers to the reception buffer of the sub-RAM 130c to determine whether a setting change designation command or a setting confirmation designation command has been received, and if a setting change designation command has been received, the sub-CPU 130a performs processing to execute the setting change notification described above, and if a setting confirmation designation command has been received, the sub-CPU 130a performs processing to execute the setting confirmation notification described above.

The sub-CPU 130a performs power-on processing in step E200. Specifically, it refers to the receive buffer in the sub-RAM 130c to determine whether a power-on command has been received, and if so, performs processing to execute a power-on notification. More specifically, it sends a power-on notification command to the image control unit 145, causing the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), the second image display device 71 (sub-liquid crystal), the third image display device 72, and the fourth image display device 73 to display a power-on screen, and causes the audio output device 9 to output a power-on sound.

In step E250, the sub-CPU 130a performs power outage recovery processing. Specifically, it refers to the receive buffer in the sub-RAM 130c to determine whether a power recovery designation command has been received, and if so, performs processing to execute a power outage recovery notification. In more detail, it sends a power recovery notification command to the image control unit 145, causing the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), the second image display device 71 (sub-liquid crystal), the third image display device 72, and the fourth image display device 73 to display a power recovery screen, and causes the audio output device 9 to output a power recovery sound.

The sub-CPU 130a transmits a "power-on command" to the lamp control unit 150 during power-on processing and power outage recovery processing. Then, the lamp control unit 150, which receives the "power-on command," drives the panel drive device 75 to execute the initial operation of the first movable member 77a and the second movable member 77b. The initial operation means that when a power-on notification or power outage recovery notification is being made, the first movable member 77a and the second movable member 77b operate in the same or substantially the same operating mode as during the variable performance. This initial operation allows the operation of the first movable member 77a and the second movable member 77b to be checked to confirm whether they are operating normally.

In step E300, the sub-CPU 130a performs customer waiting performance processing. Specifically, it refers to the receiving buffer of the sub-RAM 130c to determine whether a customer waiting state designation command has been received, and if so, performs processing to perform a customer waiting demo performance after a predetermined time has elapsed. In more detail, it sends a customer waiting performance command to the image control unit 145 to display a customer waiting demo screen on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), the second image display device 71 (sub-liquid crystal), the third image display device 72, and the fourth image display device 73, and to output a customer waiting demo sound from the audio output device 9.

In step E350, the sub-CPU 130a performs a game status update process. Specifically, the sub-CPU 130a refers to the reception buffer of the sub-RAM 130c to determine whether a game status designation command has been received, and if so, performs a process to update the game status information stored in the sub-RAM 130c.

In step E400, the sub-CPU 130a performs a reserved information update process. Specifically, the sub-CPU 130a refers to the reception buffer of the sub-RAM 130c to determine whether a special reserved number designation command or a regular reserved number designation command has been received, and if so, performs a process to update the first special reserved number, second special reserved number, regular reserved number, etc. stored (knowledged) in the sub-RAM 130c.

In step E500, the sub-CPU 130a performs look-ahead performance processing. Specifically, the sub-CPU 130a refers to the reception buffer of the sub-RAM 130c to determine whether a look-ahead specification command or a special chart change pattern specification command has been received, and if so, performs processing related to the look-ahead performance such as icon change performance, continuous preview performance, lamp change performance, and reserved consecutive win performance. Details of the look-ahead performance processing will be described later.

An "icon change effect" is a type of pre-reading preview effect that changes the reserved icon and the display mode of the icon to give the player hope that a jackpot game will be executed. Note that in this embodiment, an icon change effect for a reserved icon may be referred to as a "reserved icon change effect," and an icon change effect for the icon in question may be referred to as a "respective icon change effect."

The "continuous preview performance" is a type of anticipatory preview performance that makes the player anticipate the execution of a jackpot game by executing a predetermined performance over one or more variable performances.
The "lamp change effect" is a type of anticipatory preview effect that changes the lighting state of the winning port lamp over one or more variable effects, giving the player the expectation that a jackpot game will be executed.

The "reserved consecutive win effect" is a type of pre-reading preview effect that is executed during jackpot play. For example, in a high probability time-saving play state, when a random number value for jackpot determination that is determined to be a jackpot is stored in the second special chart determination information reserved memory area of the main RAM 110c, the movable effect device 77 is operated at a predetermined timing to notify the player that the variable display corresponding to the reserved memory that is executed after the jackpot play ends is a jackpot prior to the execution of the variable display.

In step E600, the sub-CPU 130a performs special symbol special electric effect processing. Specifically, the sub-CPU 130a refers to the reception buffer of the sub-RAM 130c to determine whether a special symbol designation command, a special symbol variation pattern designation command, a special symbol stop designation command, a jackpot opening designation command, a round number designation command, and a jackpot ending designation command have been received, and if so, performs processing to execute the effect corresponding to the received command.

In addition, if the special symbol designation command (first information signal) and the special symbol change pattern designation command (second information signal) as the start command (start signal) accompanying the start of the change display are received normally, a change performance accompanied by a change display of the performance pattern (first change performance corresponding to the change display of the first special symbol, second change performance corresponding to the change display of the second special symbol) will be executed. However, if there is an abnormality in the special symbol designation command or the special symbol change pattern designation command (miss, big win relationship does not match, the type of special symbol indicated by the MODE in the command does not match, the DATA side of the command is damaged and has changed to an impossible content, etc.), the command is considered invalid and the change performance is not executed. Also, if the special symbol designation command and the special symbol change pattern designation command are not received normally (the special symbol designation command is not received within a specified time after the special symbol designation command is received, the special symbol change pattern designation command is received without receiving the special symbol designation command, etc.), the command is considered invalid and the change performance is not executed. In the following explanation, a "command error" will be referred to as an abnormality in the command or when the command is not received correctly.

In step E700, the sub-CPU 130a performs normal symbol and normal power presentation processing. Specifically, the sub-CPU 130a refers to the reception buffer of the sub-RAM 130c to determine whether a normal symbol designation command, a normal symbol variation pattern designation command, a normal symbol stop designation command, a winning opening designation command, and a winning ending designation command have been received, and if so, performs processing to execute the presentation corresponding to the received command.

In step E800, the sub-CPU 130a performs a presentation mode update process. Specifically, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether or not an update condition (change in game state, winning a mode update lottery, execution of a SP/SPSP reach presentation that results in a loss, etc.) for the presentation mode (presentation stage) that specifies the presentation elements (background image, presentation image, presentation sound, etc.) in the sound output device 9, the first image display device 70, the second image display device 71, the third image display device 72, the fourth image display device 73, etc., has been met, and if the update condition has been met, the sub-CPU 130a performs a process to update the presentation mode to one of the multiple presentation modes.

The "presentation modes" include presentation modes A to C, which are set in the normal game state (low probability non-time-saving game state), presentation modes D to E, which are set in the probability variable game state (high probability time-saving game state), and presentation mode F, which is set in the time-saving game state (low probability time-saving game state). Note that the presentation mode that is first set when the game is controlled to the normal game state when the power is turned on (for example, after changing the settings, clearing the RWM, or confirming the settings) is always presentation mode A, the presentation mode that is first set when the game is controlled to the probability variable game state when the power is turned on is always presentation mode D, and the presentation mode that is first set when the game is controlled to the time-saving game state when the power is turned on is always presentation mode F.

In addition, in presentation modes A to C, the presentation pattern 70a is composed of numbers (identification characters) + characters (decorative part) corresponding to the numbers + a pattern effect image (decorative part) that decorates the background of the numbers and characters, and the designs of the numbers and characters differ between presentation modes. In presentation modes D to G, the presentation pattern 70a is composed of numbers (identification characters) only, and the design of the numbers is the same between presentation modes. In addition, in presentation modes A to G, the background image corresponding to each presentation mode scrolls left and right (reciprocating motion).

The sub-CPU 130a performs error notification processing in step E850. Specifically, the sub-CPU 130a refers to the receiving buffer of the sub-RAM 130c to determine whether an error designation command or an error reset designation command has been received from the main control board 110 or the frame control board 120, and if an error designation command or an error reset designation command has been received, performs processing to execute an error notification effect corresponding to the received error designation command, or performs processing to end the error notification effect corresponding to the received error reset designation command.

In step E900, the sub-CPU 130a performs output control processing. Specifically, it performs processing such as outputting signals of predetermined data, etc., and transmitting various commands stored in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c to the image control unit 145 and the lamp control unit 150.

In step E950, the sub-CPU 130a restores the information saved in step E100 to the register of the sub-CPU 130a and ends this timer interrupt process.

(Preview processing of the performance control unit)
The read-ahead performance processing of the performance control unit 130m will be described with reference to Fig. 107. Fig. 107 is a flowchart showing the read-ahead performance processing in the performance control unit 130m.

In step E505, the sub-CPU 130a refers to the value of the increment counter (MY counter). Then, having referred to the value of the increment counter (MY counter), in step E506 it is determined whether or not it is a period during which a look-ahead performance can be executed. For example, if the value of the increment counter (MY counter) referred to in step E505 exceeds "93,000", it is determined that it is a period during which a look-ahead performance cannot be executed, and the current look-ahead performance processing is terminated, and if the value of the increment counter (MY counter) does not exceed "93,000", the processing proceeds to step E510. In other words, if the value of the increment counter (MY counter) exceeds a predetermined number, the execution of the look-ahead performance is restricted.

In step E510, the sub-CPU 130a performs an icon change performance determination process to determine whether or not to execute an icon change performance and the performance mode of the icon change performance. The icon change performance determination process will be described in detail later.

In step E520, the sub-CPU 130a performs an icon change performance execution process to execute the icon change performance determined to be executed in the icon change performance determination process (changing the display mode of the pending icon or the icon that is already displayed).

In step E530, the sub-CPU 130a performs a continuous preview performance decision process to determine whether or not to execute a continuous preview performance and the performance mode of the continuous preview performance, and in step E540, performs a continuous preview performance execution process to execute the continuous preview performance that was determined to be executed in the continuous preview performance decision process.

In step E550, the sub-CPU 130a performs a lamp change effect execution process to execute a lamp change effect (to light up the winning port lamp NR so that the light emission mode corresponds to the icon whose display mode has changed).

In step E560, the sub-CPU 130a performs a reserved consecutive wins presentation decision process to determine whether or not to execute a reserved consecutive wins presentation and the presentation mode of the reserved consecutive wins presentation, and in step E570, performs a reserved consecutive wins presentation execution process to execute the reserved consecutive wins presentation that was determined to be executed in the reserved consecutive wins presentation decision process, and ends this look-ahead presentation process.

Note that while the read-ahead effects are permitted to be determined and executed in the situation immediately before the "number of game balls exceeds" described below, their determination and execution is restricted in the situation immediately before the operation of the "capture limit device" as described above. The situation immediately before the "number of game balls exceeds" is, for example, a state in which the game value displayed on the game ball count display 135 exceeds "38,000". On the other hand, the situation immediately before the operation of the "capture limit device" is, for example, a state in which the maximum increase number exceeds "93,000", as described above. In other words, the determination and execution of read-ahead effects is restricted in the period in which the maximum increase number is between "93,000" and "95,000". Note that "38,000" and "93,000" are merely examples, and may be changed as appropriate depending on the specifications of the gaming machine. Restrictions on the determination and execution of read-ahead effects will be described in detail later.

(Icon change performance determination process of the performance control unit)
The icon change effect determination process of the effect control unit 130m will be described with reference to Fig. 108. Fig. 108 is a flowchart showing the icon change effect determination process in the effect control unit 130m.

In step E510-1, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether or not a look-ahead designation command has been received from the main control board 110. If a look-ahead designation command has been received, the process proceeds to step E510-2, and if a look-ahead designation command has not been received, the current icon change performance determination process ends.

In step E510-2, the sub-CPU 130a refers to the received look-ahead command and determines whether or not a jackpot has been reached, the type of jackpot game, and the presentation content (planned variation pattern).

In step E510-3, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether or not the current time is a period during which an icon change performance can be performed. If the current time is a period during which an icon change performance can be performed, the process proceeds to step E510-4. If the current time is not a period during which an icon change performance can be performed, the process proceeds to step E510-7.

The "period during which the icon change effect can be executed" refers to a period when a jackpot game is not being executed, when an icon change effect is not being executed, or when an icon change effect is not scheduled to be executed. Note that it is also possible to set only one or two of the above three conditions. It is also possible to set a normal game state when the received look-ahead designation command is based on winning at the first start port 45, and a specific game state (low-probability time-saving game state, high-probability time-saving game state) when the received look-ahead designation command is based on winning at the second start port 47.

In step E510-4, the sub-CPU 130a acquires a random number value for determining the final display mode of the icon to be additionally displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal display), and in step E510-5, selects an icon final display mode determination table (see FIG. 109) for determining the final display mode of the icon. Details of the icon final display mode determination table will be described later.

In step E510-6, the sub-CPU 130a determines the final icon display mode. Specifically, the sub-CPU 130a refers to the icon final display mode determination table shown in FIG. 109, and determines one of the multiple final icon display modes based on the expected change pattern indicated by the look-ahead specification command and the selection rate (%) of each final icon display mode.

In step E510-7, the sub-CPU 130a determines the normal icon (white icon), which is the normal display mode, as the final icon display mode.

In step E510-8, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether the determined final icon display mode is a display mode (special icon) that executes an icon change performance. If it is a display mode that executes an icon change performance, the process proceeds to step E510-9, and if it is not a display mode that executes an icon change performance, the process proceeds to step E510-12.

In step E510-9, the sub-CPU 130a selects a change scenario determination table (not shown) for determining the change scenario of the icon change presentation. Details of the change scenario determination table will be described later. This change scenario indicates the transition of the display mode from when the reserved icon appears to when it disappears.

In step E510-10, the sub-CPU 130a determines a change scenario and sets it in the look-ahead information storage area of the sub-RAM 130c corresponding to the reserved number counter. Specifically, the sub-CPU 130a refers to the change scenario determination table and determines one change scenario from among multiple change scenarios based on the final icon display state, the reserved number of special symbols corresponding to the look-ahead designation command, and the selection rate (%) of each change scenario.

In step E510-11, the sub-CPU 130a identifies the winning icon, which is the icon display mode that will be displayed first on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal display) from the determined change scenario, sets the icon display command for that winning icon in the transmission buffer, and ends this icon change presentation determination process. As a result, the icon display command is transmitted to the image control unit 145 and lamp control unit 150, and a pending icon in a display mode that corresponds to the icon display command for the winning icon is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal display) and a specified sound effect is output.

In step E510-12, the sub-CPU 130a determines a non-change scenario in which no icon change performance is performed, and sets this in the pre-read information storage area of the sub-RAM 130c corresponding to the pending number counter.

In step E510-13, the sub-CPU 130a sets the icon display command for the normal icon in the transmission buffer and ends the icon change presentation decision process. This causes the icon display command to be sent to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and a reserved icon with a display mode corresponding to the icon display command for the normal icon is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main LCD) and a predetermined sound effect (first winning sound) is output.

(Icon Final Display Mode Determination Table)
FIG. 109 is a diagram showing an icon final display mode determination table which is referred to when determining the icon final display mode.

The icon final display mode determination table associates the expected change pattern indicated by the look-ahead command, the selection rate (%) of each icon final display mode, and the selected icon final display mode, and for reference, the type of notification sound when each icon type is generated is also listed.

The final icon display mode is set to a white icon as a normal icon, and a blue icon, red icon, or rainbow icon as special icons that indicate the possibility of a jackpot (a jackpot game being played).

The likelihood of winning the jackpot for special icons increases in the following order: (white icon <) blue icon < red icon < rainbow icon, with the rainbow icon being the icon that guarantees a jackpot.

The image display device is configured so that when a white icon is displayed on the image display device, a first occurrence alert sound is output, when a blue icon is displayed, a second occurrence alert sound is output, when a red icon is displayed, a third occurrence alert sound is output, and when a rainbow icon is displayed, a fourth occurrence alert sound is output.

The main feature of the final display mode determination table is that the selection rate of the icon final display mode is varied depending on the scheduled fluctuation pattern. Specifically, in this embodiment, when the scheduled fluctuation pattern is an SP reach or SPSP reach, the special icon is selected at a higher rate than when the scheduled fluctuation pattern is a normal fluctuation, shortened fluctuation, or normal reach that is not a reach.

In the icon final display mode determination table, in the event of a jackpot, the normal icon (white icon) is not selected as the icon final display mode, but it may be selected instead.

In this embodiment, a different alert sound is set for each of the multiple icon display modes (four types), but it is also possible to have two types: an alert sound when a white icon appears and an alert sound when the icon changes to a blue icon, red icon, or rainbow icon. Alternatively, no alert sound may be output when a white icon appears, and an alert sound may be output only when the icon changes to one of the modes. Also, for the rainbow icon, which is confirmed to be a jackpot, a dedicated alert sound may be provided, making it possible to have three types.

(Variable performance pattern determination table)
Figure 110 is a diagram showing a variable presentation pattern determination table for presentation modes A to C which is referenced to determine the variable presentation pattern in presentation modes A to C (normal game state), and Figure 111 is a diagram showing a variable presentation pattern determination table for presentation modes D to G (specific game state) which is referenced to determine the variable presentation pattern in presentation modes D to G.

As shown in Figures 110 and 111, the variable presentation pattern determination table associates the special chart variable presentation pattern designation command, the selection rate (%) of each variable presentation pattern, and the selected variable presentation pattern, and for reference, the presentation configuration for each variable presentation pattern is listed.

"Variation" in the performance configuration column indicates that a normal variation display is executed in which no reach state is formed by the performance pattern 70a.
"Shortened variation" indicates that a shortened variation display is executed that is shorter than the normal variation display and does not result in a reach state.
"L fluctuation" indicates that a long fluctuation display is executed in which a reach state is not formed for longer than in the normal fluctuation display.

"Pseudo failure" refers to the execution of a pseudo consecutive failure effect in which the pseudo consecutive effect is not executed after a performance pattern 70a is temporarily stopped during the display of a single changing special pattern and then changed again, which indicates whether or not the pseudo consecutive effect will be executed.
"Pseudo success" indicates that after a presentation is performed to tease out whether or not a pseudo consecutive performance will be performed, a pseudo consecutive success performance is performed, which results in the pseudo consecutive performance being performed.
"(Variation → Pseudo Success) x 2" indicates that two sets of effects are performed, one of which is a teasing effect to hint at whether or not a pseudo consecutive performance will be executed, followed by a pseudo consecutive success performance that results in a pseudo consecutive performance.
"(Variation → Pseudo Success) x 3" indicates that three sets of effects are performed, each of which involves a teasing effect to hint at whether or not a pseudo consecutive performance will be performed, followed by a pseudo consecutive success performance that results in a pseudo consecutive performance being performed.

"N Reach" indicates that the above-mentioned normal reach presentation is executed.
"N "7"Reach" indicates that the above-mentioned normal reach effect is executed when a reach state is formed by the "7" effect pattern 70a.
"SP Reach" indicates that the above-mentioned SP Reach performance is executed.
"Special SP reach" indicates that the above-mentioned special SP reach performance is executed.
"SPSP reach" indicates that the above-mentioned SPSP reach performance is executed.
The "full rotation reach" indicates that the full rotation reach presentation described above is executed.

"SP Development" indicates that a development effect is executed which suggests that an SP reach effect will be executed.
"SPSP Development" indicates that a development effect is executed, which suggests that an SPSP reach effect will be executed.
"Full rotation development" indicates that a development effect is executed that suggests that a full rotation reach will be executed.

"CI" indicates that one of a number of cut-in effects with different odds of winning will be executed depending on whether the effect button 17 is operated during the valid period or the valid period has elapsed.
"Decision" indicates that a decision effect indicating whether or not a jackpot game will be played is executed depending on the operation of the effect button 17 during the valid period or the lapse of the valid period.
"Failure" indicates that a failed decision effect is executed as a result of the decision effect, which suggests that a big win game will not be executed.
"Success" indicates that a successful winning effect is executed as a result of the winning effect, which suggests that a big win game will be executed.

"Miss" refers to the formation of a losing result (a losing display pattern such as "358" or "948" that is different from the initial result described below) by the performance pattern 70a consisting of only numbers and no characters, and then temporarily stopping.
"C pattern miss" indicates that the display pattern 70a including a character forms a missing result (a missing display pattern such as "358" or "948" that is different from the initial result described below) and temporarily stops.
"IC" indicates that an eye-catching effect is executed in which an eye-catching image suggesting that the effect pattern 70a will stop being displayed is displayed on the image display device.
The "pattern matching" refers to a temporary stop of a jackpot result (a jackpot display pattern such as "222" or "777") formed by a performance pattern 70a consisting of numbers only and no characters.
The "c pattern alignment" indicates that a jackpot result (a jackpot display pattern such as "222" or "777") is formed and temporarily stopped by the performance pattern 70a in a display pattern including a character.

"Re-draw" refers to the execution of a re-draw effect in which a promotion success effect that results in a favorable jackpot outcome is performed or a promotion failure effect that does not result in a favorable jackpot outcome is performed after inducing whether the performance pattern 70a that has been provisionally stopped at the jackpot outcome (jackpot display mode) will be a favorable jackpot outcome for the player (whether it will change from an even performance pattern that results in a normal jackpot to an odd performance pattern that results in a special jackpot outcome, or a "7" performance pattern that results in the most favorable jackpot game).

"Strong vibration for 4 seconds" indicates that a strong vibration effect (a vibration effect that guarantees a big win) will be executed in which the button vibration motor for vibrating the effect button 17 will vibrate strongly for 4 seconds.
"Strong vibration for 1 second" indicates that a strong vibration effect (a big win confirmation vibration effect) will be executed in which the button vibration motor for vibrating the effect button 17 will vibrate strongly for one second.

In the variable presentation pattern determination table for presentation modes A to C (normal game state), when the special pattern is 00 (miss) and the variable presentation patterns are 03 (normal reach presentation) and 05 to 06 (SP reach presentation), the probability that a reach presentation will be performed with an even-numbered presentation pattern 70a is 70%, and the probability that a reach presentation will be performed with an odd-numbered presentation pattern 70a other than "7" is 30%.
In the case of special pattern 00 (miss) and variable presentation pattern 07 to 11 (SP reach presentation or SPSP reach presentation), the probability that a reach presentation will occur with an even presentation pattern 70a is 65%, the probability that a reach presentation will occur with an odd presentation pattern 70a other than "7" is 30%, and the probability that a reach presentation will occur with the "7" presentation pattern 70a is 5%.

In the case of the special symbol 01 (normal big win) and the variable presentation patterns 12 to 17 (normal reach presentation, SP reach presentation, SPSP reach presentation), the rate at which the reach presentation occurs with the even-numbered presentation symbols 70a is 100%.
In the case of the special symbol 02 (certain jackpot) and the variable performance pattern 18 to 19 (SP reach performance), the rate at which the reach performance is performed with the even performance symbol 70a is 60%, and the rate at which the reach performance is performed with the odd performance symbol 70a other than "7" is 40%.

In the case of special pattern 02 (probable jackpot) and variable presentation patterns 20 to 22 (SPSP reach presentation), the rate at which the reach presentation is performed with the even presentation pattern 70a is 6%, the rate at which the reach presentation is performed with the odd presentation pattern 70a other than "7" is 4%, and the rate at which the reach presentation is performed with the "7" presentation pattern 70a is 90%.
In the case of the special symbol 03 (certain special jackpot) and variable presentation patterns 23 to 25 (normal reach presentation, SP reach presentation, SPSP reach presentation), the rate at which the reach presentation is performed with the even presentation symbol 70a is 60%, and the rate at which the reach presentation is performed with the odd presentation symbol 70a other than "7" is 40%.

In the case of the special symbol 10 (miss) and the variable presentation pattern 26 to 27 (special SP reach presentation), the rate at which the reach presentation occurs with the even presentation symbol 70a is 100%.
In the case of the special symbols 04 (normal jackpot) & 05 (certain jackpot) and the variable presentation pattern 27 (special SP reach presentation), the rate at which the reach presentation occurs with the even presentation symbols 70a is 100%.

In the variable presentation pattern determination table for presentation modes D to G (specific game states), when the special pattern is 00 (miss) and the variable presentation pattern is 32 (special SP reach presentation), the rate at which a reach presentation is performed with an even-numbered presentation pattern 70a is 100%.
In the case of the special symbols 01 (normal jackpot), 02 (probable jackpot), and 03 (probable jackpot) and the variable presentation pattern 33 (special SP reach presentation), the rate at which the reach presentation occurs with the even-numbered presentation symbols 70a is 100%.

In the case of special pattern 10 (miss) and variable presentation pattern 36 (normal reach presentation), 38 to 42 (SP reach presentation, SPSP reach presentation), the probability that a reach presentation will occur with an even presentation pattern 70a is 60%, and the probability that a reach presentation will occur with an odd presentation pattern 70a other than "7" is 40%.
In the case of the special symbol 04 (normal big win) and the variable presentation patterns 43 to 48 (normal reach presentation, SP reach presentation, SPSP reach presentation), the rate at which the reach presentation occurs with the even-numbered presentation symbols 70a is 100%.

In the case of the special pattern 05 and the special pattern 06 (certain special jackpot) and the variable performance pattern 49 to 50 (SP reach performance), the rate at which the reach performance is performed with the even performance pattern 70a is 60%, and the rate at which the reach performance is performed with the odd performance pattern 70a other than "7" is 40%.
In the case of special pattern 05 and special pattern 06 (probable jackpot) and variable presentation patterns 51 to 53 (SPSP reach presentation), the rate at which the reach presentation is performed with the even presentation pattern 70a is 3%, the rate at which the reach presentation is performed with the odd presentation pattern 70a other than "7" is 2%, and the rate at which the reach presentation is performed with the "7" presentation pattern 70a is 95%.
In the case of special pattern 05 and special pattern 06 (certain jackpot) and variable presentation pattern 54 to 55 (full rotation reach presentation), the probability of a reach presentation being performed with even-numbered presentation pattern 70a is 20%, the probability of a reach presentation being performed with odd-numbered presentation pattern 70a other than "7" is 30%, and the probability of a reach presentation being performed with "7" presentation pattern 70a is 50%.

The first feature of the variable presentation pattern determination table is that when an SP reach presentation or an SPSP reach presentation is executed, an eye-catching presentation is executed that suggests that the presentation pattern 70a will stop, and the presentation pattern 70a returns to a display state including the character. This makes it less likely that the player will feel uncomfortable about the change in the display state of the presentation pattern 70a, and it is possible to suggest in advance that the presentation pattern 70a will stop, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

The second feature of the variable presentation pattern determination table is that, in the event of a jackpot, there are variable presentation patterns in which a successful winning presentation is executed and the symbols line up, and variable presentation patterns in which a successful winning presentation is executed after the symbols line up. This makes it possible to enhance the presentation effect in the event of a jackpot, and to increase the interest of the game.

The third feature of the variable presentation pattern determination table is that, in a variable presentation pattern that results in a jackpot, when a presentation pattern 70a that does not include a character is aligned, a strong vibration presentation (jackpot confirmation vibration presentation) is executed in which the presentation button 17 is strongly vibrated for four seconds. This makes it possible to effectively present a jackpot, which increases the excitement of the game.

The fourth feature of the variable presentation pattern determination table is that when the presentation pattern 70a including the character matches (pattern c), a strong vibration presentation (jackpot confirmation vibration presentation) is executed in which the presentation button 17 is strongly vibrated for one second. This makes it possible to effectively present the jackpot, which increases the excitement of the game.

The fifth feature of the variable presentation pattern determination table is that the rate at which reach presentations (normal reach presentations, SP reach presentations, SPSP reach presentations) are produced with even presentation patterns 70a (presentations that result in a normal jackpot when the presentation is a jackpot) is higher than the rate at which reach presentations (normal reach presentations, SP reach presentations, SPSP reach presentations) are produced with odd presentation patterns 70a other than "7" (presentations that result in a jackpot when the presentation is a jackpot). This effectively stirs up the joy of the player when a jackpot is produced with an odd presentation pattern 70a other than "7", making it possible to increase the excitement of the game.

The sixth feature of the variable presentation pattern determination table is that the rate at which reach presentations (normal reach presentations, SP reach presentations, SPSP reach presentations) are performed with the "7" presentation pattern 70a (the presentation pattern that results in the most favorable guaranteed jackpot when it becomes a jackpot) is lower than the rate at which reach presentations are performed with the even presentation pattern 70a (the presentation pattern that results in a normal jackpot when it becomes a jackpot). This effectively stirs up the player's joy when a jackpot is achieved with the "7" presentation pattern 70a, making it possible to increase the excitement of the game.

The seventh feature of the variable presentation pattern determination table is that the rate at which reach effects (normal reach effects, SP reach effects, SPSP reach effects) are produced with the "7" presentation pattern 70a (the presentation pattern that results in the most favorable probability jackpot when it becomes a jackpot) is lower than the rate at which reach effects (normal reach effects, SP reach effects, SPSP reach effects) are produced with odd presentation patterns 70a other than "7" (presentation patterns that result in a probability jackpot when it becomes a jackpot). Therefore, it is possible to effectively stir up the joy of the player when a jackpot is produced with the "7" presentation pattern 70a, and to increase the excitement of the game.

The eighth feature of the variable performance pattern determination table is that the expectation of a big win is higher when the reach performance is executed with the "7" performance pattern 70a than when the reach performance is executed with an even performance pattern 70a or an odd performance pattern 70a other than "7". Therefore, the player's sense of expectation about which type of performance pattern will execute the reach performance can be increased, and the interest of the game can be increased.

The ninth feature of the variable presentation pattern determination table is that presentation modes D to G (specific game states) are more likely to execute a reach presentation (SPSP reach presentation) with the presentation pattern "7" 70a (the presentation pattern that results in the most favorable probability jackpot when it becomes a jackpot outcome) when the most favorable probability jackpot is reached in the most favorable probability jackpot in presentation modes D to G (specific game states) than in presentation modes A to C (normal game states). This makes it possible to improve the presentation effect in presentation modes D to G (specific game states), and increase the interest in the game.

The tenth feature of the variable presentation pattern determination table is that in presentation modes A to C (normal game state), even if a reach effect is executed with the presentation pattern 70a of "7", a jackpot is not confirmed, but in presentation modes D to G (specific game state), if a reach effect is executed with the presentation pattern 70a of "7", a jackpot is confirmed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the presentation effect in presentation modes D to G (specific game state), and to increase the interest in the game.

Note that, although a reach effect is always executed in a variable performance pattern in which a pseudo consecutive performance is executed, a variable performance pattern in which a reach effect is not executed even if a pseudo consecutive performance is executed may be set.

In addition, if the reel stops provisionally on a losing number after a cut-in or failed-to-win effect, a loss is confirmed, but a revival effect may be executed after a cut-in or failed-to-win effect to confirm a big win.

(Jackpot notice performance determination process of the performance control unit)
The big win notice performance determination process of the performance control unit 130m will be described with reference to Fig. 112. Fig. 112 is a flowchart showing the big win notice performance determination process in the performance control unit 130m, and this process is executed after the variable performance pattern determination process (the process of determining the variable performance pattern based on the special chart variable pattern designation command) in the special chart special line performance process described above.

In step E650-1, the sub-CPU 130a refers to the variable presentation pattern to be executed in the current variable presentation, and in step E650-2, selects a pre-reach notice determination table (not shown) for determining the notice pattern of the pre-reach notice presentation that makes the player expect that a jackpot game will be executed in the presentation period before the reach (high-speed variable period), and determines the notice pattern.

In step E650-3, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether the pre-reach preview pattern is one that executes a dialogue preview. If it is one that executes a dialogue preview, the process proceeds to step E650-4. If it is not one that executes a dialogue preview, the process proceeds to step E650-6.

The "dialogue preview effect" is a type of jackpot preview effect in which an effective period is generated during the fluctuation effect (high-speed fluctuation period), and depending on whether the effect button 17 is operated during the effective period or the effective time has elapsed, a dialogue image suggesting the likelihood of a jackpot is displayed on the image display device, and sound corresponding to the dialogue image is output from the audio output device 9.

In step E650-4, the sub-CPU 130a selects a dialogue preview pattern determination table (not shown) for determining the dialogue preview pattern of the dialogue preview performance to determine the dialogue preview pattern, and in step E650-5, sets a dialogue preview performance command corresponding to the dialogue preview pattern in the transmission buffer. This causes the dialogue preview performance command to be transmitted to the image control unit 145 and lamp control unit 150, and the dialogue preview performance corresponding to the dialogue preview pattern is executed during the fluctuation performance (high-speed fluctuation period).

In step E650-6, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether the pre-reach preview pattern is one that will execute a step-up preview. If it is one that will execute a step-up preview, the process proceeds to step E650-7. If it is not one that will execute a step-up preview, the process proceeds to step E650-9.

The "step-up preview effect" is a type of jackpot preview effect in which step effects are executed in a predetermined order until one of multiple steps from the first step (first stage) to the fifth step (final stage) is reached, without generating an effective period for the effect button 17 during the fluctuation effect (high-speed fluctuation period).

In step E650-7, the sub-CPU 130a selects a step-up preview pattern determination table (not shown) for determining the step-up preview pattern of the step-up preview performance to determine the step-up preview pattern, and in step E650-8, sets a step-up preview performance command corresponding to the step-up preview pattern in the transmission buffer. As a result, the step-up preview performance command is transmitted to the image control unit 145 and the lamp control unit 150, and the step-up preview performance corresponding to the step-up preview pattern is executed during the fluctuation performance (high-speed fluctuation period).

In step E650-9, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether the current variable presentation pattern is a variable presentation pattern that executes a pseudo consecutive presentation. If it is a variable presentation pattern that executes a pseudo consecutive presentation, the process proceeds to step E650-10. If it is not a variable presentation pattern that does not execute a pseudo consecutive presentation, the process proceeds to step E650-12.

In step E650-10, the sub-CPU 130a selects a pseudo-continuous performance pattern determination table (not shown) for determining the pseudo-continuous performance pattern of the pseudo-continuous performance to determine the pseudo-continuous performance pattern, and in step E650-11, sets a pseudo-continuous performance command corresponding to the pseudo-continuous performance pattern in the transmission buffer. This causes the pseudo-continuous performance command to be transmitted to the image control unit 145 and lamp control unit 150, and a pseudo-continuous performance corresponding to the pseudo-continuous performance pattern is executed during the variable performance.

In step E650-12, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether the current variable presentation pattern is a variable presentation pattern that executes an advanced presentation (SP advanced presentation, SPSP advanced presentation, full rotation advanced presentation). If it is a variable presentation pattern that executes an advanced presentation, the process proceeds to step E650-13, and if it is not a variable presentation pattern that executes an advanced presentation, the process proceeds to step E650-15.

In step E650-13, the sub-CPU 130a selects a development performance pattern determination table (not shown) for determining the development performance pattern of the development performance to determine the development performance pattern, and in step E650-14 sets a development performance command corresponding to the development performance pattern in the transmission buffer. As a result, the development performance command is transmitted to the image control unit 145 and the lamp control unit 150, and the development performance corresponding to the development performance pattern is executed during the variable performance.

In step E650-15, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether the current variable presentation pattern is a variable presentation pattern that executes a reach presentation (post-reach presentation). If it is a variable presentation pattern that executes a reach presentation, the process proceeds to step E650-16, and if it is not a variable presentation pattern that executes a reach presentation, the process for determining the current big win preview presentation ends.

In step E650-16, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether the current variation presentation pattern is a variation presentation pattern that executes a cut-in presentation. If it is a variation presentation pattern that executes a cut-in presentation, the process proceeds to step E650-17, and if it is not a variation presentation pattern that executes a cut-in presentation, the process proceeds to step E650-19.

In step E650-17, the sub-CPU 130a selects a cut-in performance pattern determination table (not shown) for determining the cut-in performance pattern of the cut-in performance to determine the cut-in performance pattern, and in step E650-18 sets a cut-in performance command corresponding to the cut-in performance pattern in the transmission buffer. This causes the cut-in performance command to be transmitted to the image control unit 145 and lamp control unit 150, and a cut-in performance corresponding to the cut-in performance pattern is executed during the variable performance.

In step E650-19, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether the current variable performance pattern is a variable performance pattern that executes a deciding performance. If it is a variable performance pattern that executes a deciding performance, the process proceeds to step E650-20, and if it is not a variable performance pattern that executes a deciding performance, the process proceeds to step E650-22.

In step E650-20, the sub-CPU 130a selects a final performance pattern determination table (not shown) for determining the final performance pattern of the final performance to determine the final performance pattern, and in step E650-21, sets a final performance command corresponding to the final performance pattern in the transmission buffer. This causes the final performance command to be transmitted to the image control unit 145 and lamp control unit 150, and the final performance corresponding to the final performance pattern is executed during the variable performance.

In step E650-22, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether the current variable presentation pattern is a variable presentation pattern that executes a re-draw presentation. If it is a variable presentation pattern that executes a re-draw presentation, the process proceeds to step E650-23, and if it is not a variable presentation pattern that executes a re-draw presentation, the process proceeds to step E650-25.

In step E650-23, the sub-CPU 130a selects a re-lottery presentation pattern determination table (not shown) for determining the re-lottery presentation pattern of the re-lottery presentation to determine the re-lottery presentation pattern, and in step E650-24, sets a re-lottery presentation command corresponding to the re-lottery presentation pattern in the transmission buffer. This causes the re-lottery presentation command to be transmitted to the image control unit 145 and the lamp control unit 150, and a re-lottery presentation corresponding to the re-lottery presentation pattern is executed during the variable presentation.

In step E650-25, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether the current variable presentation pattern is a variable presentation pattern capable of executing a definitive presentation (a presentation that definitively notifies the player that a jackpot has been reached) (resulting in a jackpot). If the variable presentation pattern is capable of executing a definitive presentation, the process proceeds to step E650-26. If the variable presentation pattern is not capable of executing a definitive presentation, the process for determining the current jackpot advance presentation is terminated.

In step E650-26, the sub-CPU 130a selects a final performance pattern determination table (not shown) for determining the final performance pattern of the final performance to determine the final performance pattern, and in step E650-27, sets a final performance command corresponding to the final performance pattern in the transmission buffer, and ends this jackpot preview performance determination process. This causes the final performance command to be transmitted to the image control unit 145 and lamp control unit 150, and the final performance corresponding to the final performance pattern is executed during the variable performance.

(Regarding the type of notifiable event, the priority order of notifiable events, and the notification manner of notifiable events)
Using Figures 113 to 115, the notifiable event type, the priority order of notifiable events, and the notifiable event notification mode will be described.

The notification modes are comprised of audio notification, visual notification, and illumination notification, and a combination of these is determined for each notification event type.
The types of notifiable events include events detected by the main control board 110 and events detected by the frame control board 120, and a priority order is set for each type of notifiable event.

Regarding audio notification, when multiple events occur at the same time, the priority order is referenced and the event with the highest priority is notified by audio.
Furthermore, when the audio notification of a high priority event is completed, if it is within the notification time of the low priority event, audio notification of the low priority event is started.
Moreover, if the same event occurs twice (a specific event occurs while another specific event is being notified), a new audio notification is started.
In addition, some events may be alerted simultaneously, and when the audio alert of a high priority event has ended, an audio alert of a low priority event may be made even if the alert time for the low priority event has expired.

In addition, when multiple events occur at the same time, the screen notification is displayed so that the events do not overlap each other (screen notification). In other words, when multiple events occur at the same time, the screen notification is capable of notifying all of the events that have occurred at the same time.
Depending on the event, it may be possible to notify the events individually on the screen without simultaneously notifying the events.

In addition, when a plurality of events occur at the same time, the event with the highest priority is notified by illumination based on the priority order.
In addition, when the illumination notification of an event with a high priority is completed, if it is within the notification time of the event with a low priority, a new illumination notification of the event with a low priority is started.
Moreover, if the same event occurs twice (a specific event occurs while another specific event is being notified), a new illumination notification is started.
In addition, some events may be notified simultaneously with illuminated warnings, and when the illuminated warning of a high priority event has ended, the illuminated warning of a lower priority event may be made even if the warning time for the lower priority event has expired.

The player cannot adjust the volume by operating the joystick 19 while a sound alert is being played, nor can the player adjust the light intensity by operating the joystick 19 while a light alert is being played. On the other hand, the employee can adjust the volume by operating a specific switch located in a position that can only be operated by the employee (but cannot be operated by the player) while a sound alert is being played, and the employee can adjust the light intensity by operating the specific switch while a light alert is being played.

The highest priority notification event type, priority level 1, is "number of game balls cleared."
The notification of "game ball count clear" is started upon receiving the "game ball count clear start command", and the notification mode is as follows:
The audio output device 9 outputs a 5-second audio message "The number of game balls has been cleared" once with "audio notification (volume MAX)";
An icon image "H67 Game Ball Count Clear" is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal display),
The frame lighting device 10 is caused to flash in red (brightness 40%).

The voice output of "The number of game balls has been cleared" is output once and ends, and is not output in a loop or terminated due to receipt of an end notification command.
In addition, the display of the icon image "H67 Game Ball Count Cleared" and the red flashing of the frame lighting device 10 will end 30 seconds after either the launch handle 15 is gripped and the game ball is launched, or the counting button switch 20a detects the operation of the counting button 20.

It is expected that the number of game balls will be cleared mainly before the opening of the amusement arcade, so by ending the audio notification after one time, it is possible to prevent people from being put off playing because the audio notification continues after the arcade has opened. On the other hand, by continuing the visual notification and the electric light notification as long as no shots are fired or counted, it is possible to make it easier for employees to recognize that the number of game balls, which is the highest priority, has been cleared.

As shown in FIG. 115, the screen notification that the number of game balls has been cleared is a rectangular icon image "H67 Number of game balls cleared" displayed in the upper left display area (a position that does not overlap with the three performance symbols 70a) of the first image display device 70 (main LCD). This prevents a situation in which, even if a player starts playing on a gaming machine on which an icon image indicating that the number of game balls has been cleared is displayed, it becomes difficult to see the changing display of the performance symbols 70a (until 30 seconds have passed since the launch).

As shown in "Frame Control Board Main Processing", after the number of game balls stored in the RWM area is cleared, a "game ball count clear start command" is set and sent, so the notification that the number of game balls has been cleared is positioned as a notification after the number of game balls has been cleared (post-clearance notification).

Furthermore, in the past, not only were there players who stopped playing by completely discarding all the game balls, but there were also players who stopped playing without realizing that there were a few game balls remaining. Clearing the number of game balls is the act of clearing the small number of game balls (for example, one game ball) that such players left in the gaming machine 1, and is an important act in which the gaming establishment clears the player's possessions without the player's consent, so the notification priority is set to be the highest. This allows the gaming establishment to recognize that clearing the number of game balls is an important act.

For example, if an amusement parlor opens with a small number of game balls remaining, a new player may end up playing on another player's property, which could lead to trouble. By setting the highest notification priority for the number of game balls being cleared, it is possible to ensure that employees are aware that the number of game balls has been cleared (preventing players from thinking they had cleared the number of game balls when they hadn't), and to prevent such trouble from occurring.

The notification event type with the second priority is "setting change" (see FIG. 54).
Notification of a "setting change" (notification in response to control related to the setting value) is started upon receipt of a "setting change command", and the notification mode is as follows:
The voice output device 9 repeatedly outputs the voice "Voice notification (volume MAX)" saying "Settings are being changed" and the warning sound of a "siren."
The first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal display) displays "Settings being changed" in red letters on a black background using the entire display area.
The frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 76 are turned on in red (40% brightness).

All of the audio, visual, and illumination notifications for "setting change" are terminated when a power-on command (see FIG. 52) is received. This causes all notification means to immediately end notification when the setting change process is completed, making it easier for the user to recognize that the setting change process has ended.

The notification event type with the third priority is "setting check" (see FIG. 57).
The notification of "setting check" (notification according to control related to the setting value) is started upon receiving a "setting check designation command", and the notification mode is as follows:
The voice output device 9 repeatedly outputs the voice "Checking settings" in "voice notification (volume MAX)" and the warning sound of a "siren."
The first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal display) displays "Checking settings" in red letters on a black background using the entire display area.
The frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 76 are turned on in red (40% brightness).

All of the audio, visual, and illumination notifications in the "settings check" are terminated when a power restoration command (see FIG. 52) is received. This allows all notification means to immediately end notification when the settings check process is completed, making it easier for the user to recognize that the settings check process has ended.

The event type with the fourth priority is "power on (RWM clear)" (see FIG. 56).
The notification of "Power On (RWM Clear)" (notification in response to clearing of predetermined information) is started upon receiving an "RWM Clear Designation Command", and the notification mode is as follows:
The audio output device 9 repeatedly outputs the voice "RWM has been cleared" in the "audio notification (volume MAX)" and the BGM "input BGM".
The first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal display) does not directly notify the player that the RWM has been cleared, but displays "123" as the initial result (symbol combination) of the performance symbol 70a.
The frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 76 are turned on in white (40% brightness).

The voice saying "RWM has been cleared" and the "Input BGM" BGM output will end 30 seconds after output begins, and the white lighting of the frame lighting device 10 and board lighting device 76 will end 60 seconds after lighting begins.

As shown in "RWM Clear Processing", after initializing everything except the set value area of the game RWM area, the "RWM Clear Designation Command" is set and sent, so the RWM Clear error notification is positioned as a notification after the RWM clear is completed (post-notification). In other words, it is positioned in the same way as the "Game Ball Count Clear" described above, but the notification time differs between "Game Ball Count Clear" and "Power On (RWM Clear)".

For example, the above-mentioned "game ball count clear" sound output ends after one 5-second sound output, whereas the "RWM clear" sound output and input BGM output are output repeatedly and end after 30 seconds. As a result, for example, if the power switch 164 is turned ON while the RWM clear switch 111a and the game ball count clear switch 121 are both pressed, the "RWM clear" sound output and input BGM output start after the "game ball count clear" sound output ends, so it is possible to prevent the employee from missing the fact that the "RWM clear" has been performed. In other words, since "game ball count clear" and "RWM clear" can be performed at the same time, if the execution times of these sound notifications are made the same, the "RWM clear" sound notification may not be executed according to the priority order, and the employee may miss it. Therefore, by setting the audio output for "game ball count clear" to 5 seconds, and the audio output for "RWM clear" and the input BGM output to 30 seconds on a repeat basis, it is possible to prevent the above-mentioned cases from being missed, so it is preferable to vary the audio notification output times for events that can occur simultaneously (for example, game ball count clear and RWM clear).

In addition, when the power switch 164 is turned ON while both the RWM clear switch 111a and the game ball count clear switch 121 are pressed, the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal display) displays the initial number result of the performance pattern 70a (screen notification of RWM clear), and an icon image notifying "game ball count clear" (screen notification of game ball count clear) is displayed so as not to overlap with the initial number result display of the performance pattern 70a (see FIG. 115). As a result, since both the screen notification of RWM clear and the screen notification of game ball count clear are performed, it is possible to immediately visually recognize that the RWM has been cleared and that the game ball count has been cleared.

In addition, the on-screen notification of "Number of game balls cleared" can continue to be displayed even after the audio notification of "Number of game balls cleared" has ended, so even if you miss the audio output of "Number of game balls cleared," you can recognize that the "Number of game balls cleared" has been performed by checking the display of the icon image.
On the other hand, in the screen notification of "RWM Clear", no icon image is displayed, but the initial result display of the performance pattern 70a, the audio output output for 30 seconds, and the input BGM output allow the player to recognize that "RWM Clear" has been performed without displaying an icon image. This makes it possible to eliminate the need for an icon image to notify "RWM Clear", which is expected to improve development efficiency and reduce memory space.

Furthermore, when the power switch 164 is turned ON while both the RWM clear switch 111a and the game ball count clear switch 121 are pressed, the frame lighting device 10 flashes red (a game ball count clear illumination notification is executed). On the other hand, when a game ball count clear illumination notification is being executed, an RWM clear illumination notification is not executed. This makes it possible to prevent a player from becoming confused as to which error notification is being executed in the illumination notification. Furthermore, even if an RWM clear illumination notification is not executed, an "RWM clear" screen notification is executed as described above, so that the player can recognize that an "RWM clear" has been executed.
The relationship between the notifications from each notification means when the RWM clear switch 111a and the game ball count clear switch 121 are both pressed and the power switch 164 is turned ON will be explained later in the time chart.

In this embodiment, the audio notification time for "clear game ball count", which has a higher priority, is shorter than that for "power on (RWM clear)", but the audio notification time for "clear game ball count" may be longer than that for "power on (RWM clear)", or the notification times for both may be the same.

The event type with priority level 5 is "power restoration."
The notification of "power restoration" is started upon receiving the "power restoration designation command". The notification mode is as follows:
The audio output device 9 outputs the "input BGM" with "audio notification (volume MAX)".
The first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal display) displays "123" as the initial result (symbol combination) of the performance symbol 70a.
The frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 76 are turned on in white (40% brightness).

When "power is restored," the "power-on BGM" BGM output ends 30 seconds after output begins, and the white lighting of the frame lighting device 10 and board lighting device 76 ends 60 seconds after lighting begins. This simplifies the process, since no further operations are required once the power switch 164 has been turned on.

The event type with priority level 6 is "fraud detection 3 (RWM abnormality error)."
The notification of "Fraud Detection 3 (RWM Abnormal Error)" is started upon receiving the "Unrecoverable Error Designation Command", and the notification mode is as follows:
The voice output device 9 repeatedly outputs the voice "Please change the settings" in "Voice notification (volume MAX)" and the warning sound of a "siren."
Using the entire display area of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal display), the word "ERROR" is displayed in red letters on a black background, and the word "Please change the settings" is displayed in white letters.
The frame lighting device 10 is caused to flash in red (brightness 40%).

If the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is cut off and the power switch 164 is turned ON without any setting change operation being performed, the error notification of "Fraud detection 3 (RWM abnormal error)" will start again. In other words, if "Fraud detection 3 (RWM abnormal error)" occurs, it is necessary to turn the power switch 164 OFF, perform the setting change operation, turn the power switch 164 ON, and complete the setting change process.

In the case of "Fraud Detection 3 (RWM Abnormal Error)," the audio, visual, and electric alerts will continue until the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is cut off (the alert will end when the power is turned off). This will encourage the player to turn off the power to the gaming machine 1 and change the settings. Also, changing the settings will resolve the RWM abnormality, so an employee will need to respond, and it will be possible to prevent the player from continuing to play while the RWM abnormality is still present.

The notification event type for priority level 7 is "Fraud detection 2 (abnormal winning error)."
The notification of "Fraud Detection 2 (Abnormal Winning Error)" is started upon receiving the "Abnormal Winning Designation Command", and the notification mode is as follows:
The audio output device 9 repeatedly outputs the voice "Abnormal winning has occurred" in "audio notification (volume MAX)" and the warning sound of a "siren."
An icon image stating "Abnormal winning error. Please turn the power back on" is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal display).
The frame lighting device 10 is caused to flash in red (brightness 40%).

The voice saying "An abnormal winning has occurred" and the "siren" warning sound will end 180 seconds after the start of output, and the icon image saying "Abnormal winning error. Please turn the power back on" will be displayed, and the frame lighting device 10 will continue to flash red until the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is cut off (the warning will end when the power is turned off).

As shown in FIG. 115, the screen notification of an abnormal winning error is a rectangular icon image "Abnormal winning error. Please turn the power back on" displayed in the upper right display area (position that does not overlap with the three performance patterns 70a) of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). This prevents the icon image from becoming difficult to see due to being overlapped with the performance patterns 70a, and makes it easy for employees to understand that an abnormal winning error has occurred.

The notification event type with priority level 8 is "Fraud detection 1 (magnet detection error)."
The notification of "Fraud Detection 1 (Magnet Detection Error)" is started upon receiving a "Magnet Detection Designation Command". The notification mode is as follows:
The voice output device 9 repeatedly outputs the voice "A magnet has been detected" in "voice notification (volume MAX)" and the warning sound of a "siren."
An icon image of "magnet detection" is displayed on the third image display device 72 (left image display device),
The frame lighting device 10 is caused to flash in red (brightness 40%).

In the case of "Fraud Detection 1 (Magnet Detection Error)", the audio, visual and electric alarms will all end 180 seconds after the alarm started.

After audio, visual, and electric alerts have started, alerts will continue for 180 seconds even if the magnet is removed. Also, if a "magnet detection designation command" is received again within 180 seconds, alerts will continue for the next 180 seconds. This provides an additional level of security.

To notify the user of a magnet detection error on screen, as shown in FIG. 115, a rectangular icon image "Magnet Detected" is displayed in the upper display area of the third image display device 72 (left image display device). This prevents the icon image from becoming difficult to see due to being overlapped with other performance images or icon images, and makes it easy for employees to understand that a magnet detection error has occurred.

The screen notification of a magnet detection error may be displayed using the entire display area of the first image display device 70 (main LCD) to display "Magnet detection error" in red or white text on a black background.

The notification event type with priority level 9 is "acquisition upper limit device operation."
The notification of the "acquisition upper limit device operation" is started upon receiving the "acquisition upper limit device operation command", and the notification mode is as follows:
The voice output device 9 repeatedly outputs the voice "Voice notification (volume MAX)" saying "The acquisition limit device has been activated."
An icon image stating "Winning limit device has been activated. Today's game is over" is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal display).
The frame lighting device 10 is caused to flash in white (40% brightness).

The audio output of "The winning limit device has been activated" will end 10 seconds after the start of the output, and the icon image display of "The winning limit device has been activated. Today's play has ended" and the white flashing of the frame lighting device 10 will continue to notify the user until the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is cut off (the notification will end when the power is turned off).

The winning limit device stops operating if the power switch 164 is turned on while pressing the RWM clear switch 111a (if the RWM is cleared) after the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is cut off. If only the power switch 164 is turned on after the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is cut off,
The voice output device 9 repeatedly outputs the voice "Voice notification (volume MAX)" saying "Earning limit device in operation."
An icon image stating "Winning limit device has been activated. Today's game is over" is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal display).
The frame lighting device 10 is made to flash in red (40% brightness). This makes it possible to prevent the game from being made playable simply by turning the power switch 164 OFF and ON after the win limit device has been activated.

As shown in FIG. 115, the screen notification of the operation of the acquisition limit device is a rectangular icon image "The acquisition limit device has been activated. Today's play is over" displayed in the upper left display area (below the display position of the above-mentioned "H67 Game ball count cleared" icon image) of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). The icon image is displayed so that it overlaps with a part of the left performance pattern 70a (so that the icon image is the front layer). In other words, since the operation of the acquisition limit device makes play impossible, there is no need to consider the visibility of the performance pattern 70a, and the freedom of display of the icon image (no need to worry about the display position) can be increased.

In addition, the audio notification ends 10 seconds after it starts, the display screen is displayed as an icon image, and the electric light notification is a flashing white light, so that the notifications are not excessive. This helps to avoid encouraging players to gamble more than necessary, and prevents them from becoming addicted to the game.

The screen notification of the activation of the acquisition limit device may be displayed in white text on a black background using the entire display area of the first image display device 70 (main LCD), stating "The acquisition limit device has been activated. Today's play is over." This configuration makes it difficult to see other presentation images, making it easier for the player to recognize that play cannot continue.

It is also assumed that after the acquisition limit device is activated, the power switch 164 is turned off, and when the power switch 164 is turned on next time, the number of game balls is cleared at the same time (the power switch 164 is turned on while the game ball number clear switch 121 is pressed). In this case, the sound and illumination notification notifies the player that the number of game balls has been cleared, and the icon image notifying the player that the number of game balls has been cleared and the icon image "The acquisition limit device has been activated, please clear the RWM" are displayed so as not to overlap with each other in the screen notification. As a result, while the sound and illumination notification notifies the player that the number of game balls has been cleared, the icon image "The acquisition limit device has been activated, please clear the RWM" can be recognized in the screen notification, so that the player can recognize that the number of game balls has been cleared, but also recognize that the RWM clear operation is required.
The relationship between the notifications from each notification means in this situation will be explained later in the time chart.

The notification event type with priority level 10 is "unauthorized radio wave detection error."
The notification of the "unauthorized radio wave detection error" starts upon receiving the "unauthorized radio wave detection designation command". The notification mode is as follows:
The voice output device 9 repeatedly outputs the voice "Radio waves have been detected" and the warning sound "siren" in "voice notification (volume MAX)".
An icon image "H66 Unauthorized Radio Wave Detection" is displayed on the third image display device 72 (left image display device),
The frame lighting device 10 is caused to flash in red (brightness 40%).

The voice saying "Radio waves detected" and the "siren" warning sound will end 30 seconds after the output started, and the icon image "H66 Unauthorized radio waves detected" will be displayed and the frame lighting device 10 will continue to flash red until the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is cut off (the warning will end when the power is cut off).

After the audio alert has started, the alert will continue for 30 seconds even if the radio waves are removed. Also, if the "unauthorized radio wave detection designation command" is received again within 30 seconds, the audio alert will continue for the next 30 seconds. This provides an additional level of security.

As shown in FIG. 115, the screen notification of an unauthorized radio wave detection error is a rectangular icon image "H66 Unauthorized radio wave detected" displayed in the upper display area (below the display position of the "Magnet detected" icon image described above) of the third image display device 72 (left image display device). This prevents the icon image from becoming difficult to see due to being overlapped with other performance images or icon images, and makes it possible to clearly inform employees that an unauthorized radio wave detection error has occurred.

The notification event type with priority level 11 is an "abnormal number of winning balls error."
The notification of the "winning ball number abnormality error" (notification in response to the detection of the gaming medium corresponding to the gaming value) is started upon receiving the "winning ball number abnormality designation command", and the notification mode is as follows:
The voice output device 9 repeatedly outputs the voice "Please call a staff member" in "voice notification (volume MAX)" and the warning sound of a "siren."
An icon image "H68 Winning ball count abnormality" is displayed on the third image display device 72 (left image display device),
The frame lighting device 10 is caused to flash in red (brightness 40%).

In the event of an "abnormal winning ball count error," the audio, visual, and electric alerts will continue until the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is cut off (the alerts will end when the power is cut off).

As shown in FIG. 115, the screen notification of an abnormal winning ball count error is a rectangular icon image "H68 Abnormal winning ball count" displayed in the upper display area (below the display position of the "H66 Unauthorized radio wave detected" icon image described above) of the third image display device 72 (left image display device). This prevents the icon image from becoming difficult to see due to being overlapped with other performance images or icon images, and makes it easy to inform employees that an abnormal winning ball count error has occurred.

The notification event type with priority level 12 is an "abnormal number of balls fired error."
The notification of the "abnormal number of shot balls error" (notification in response to the detection of a game medium shot into the game area) is started upon receiving the "abnormal number of shot balls designation command", and the notification mode is as follows:
The voice output device 9 repeatedly outputs the voice "Please call a staff member" in "voice notification (volume MAX)" and the warning sound of a "siren."
An icon image "H69 Abnormal number of shots" is displayed on the third image display device 72 (left image display device),
The frame lighting device 10 is caused to flash in red (brightness 40%).

In the event of an "abnormal number of balls fired error," the audio, visual, and electric alerts will continue until the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is cut off (the alerts will end when the power is cut off).

When the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is cut off, the notification ends, but if the abnormality in the number of balls fired has not been resolved (for example, if the condition of a large number of gaming balls remaining on the gaming board has not been resolved), after the power switch 164 is turned ON, a "number of balls fired abnormality designation command" is received and the notification of the "number of balls fired abnormality error" is started again.

As shown in FIG. 115, the screen notification of an abnormal number of balls fired error is displayed in the upper display area (below the display position of the above-mentioned "H68 Abnormal number of winning balls" icon image) of the third image display device 72 (left image display device) by displaying a rectangular icon image "H69 Abnormal number of balls fired." This prevents the icon image from becoming difficult to see due to being overlapped with other performance images or icon images, and makes it possible to clearly inform employees that an abnormal number of balls fired error has occurred.

The notification event type with priority level 13 is an "internal gaming machine communication abnormality error."
The notification of the "gaming machine communication abnormality error" is started upon receiving the "gaming machine communication abnormality start designation command", and the notification mode is as follows:
The voice output device 9 outputs a voice message saying "Please call a staff member" in "voice notification (volume MAX)" and a warning sound of a "siren."
An icon image of "H06 Board connection error. Check the connection" is displayed on the third image display device 72 (left image display device).
The frame lighting device 10 is caused to flash in red (brightness 40%).

In the case of an "internal machine communication abnormality error," audio, visual, and illuminated notifications will continue until the error is resolved (notifications will end when the error is resolved).

As shown in FIG. 115, the screen notification of a communication abnormality error within the gaming machine is a rectangular icon image "H06 Board connection error Check connection" displayed in the upper display area (below the display position of the above-mentioned "H69 Abnormal number of balls fired" icon image) of the third image display device 72 (left image display device). This prevents the icon image from becoming difficult to see due to being overlapped with other performance images or icon images, and makes it possible to clearly inform employees of the occurrence of a communication abnormality error within the gaming machine.

The notification event type with priority level 14 is "exit switch disconnection error."
An "exit switch open circuit error" is an abnormality that occurs when a break in the subtraction exit switch 91c is detected.
The notification of the "exit switch disconnection error" is started upon receiving the "exit switch disconnection designation command", and the notification mode is as follows:
The voice output device 9 repeatedly outputs the voice "Please call a staff member" in "voice notification (volume MAX)" and the warning sound of a "siren."
An icon image of "H14 Abnormality in subtraction port switch. Malfunction in launcher" is displayed on the third image display device 72 (left image display device).
The frame lighting device 10 is caused to flash in red (brightness 40%).

In the case of an "exit switch disconnection error," the audio, visual, and electric light alerts will continue to be issued until the error is resolved and the error release switch 123 is operated (the alerts will end when the error is resolved and the error release switch 123 is operated).

As shown in FIG. 115, the screen notification of the exit switch disconnection error is a rectangular icon image "H14 Abnormal subtraction port switch Malfunction in launcher" displayed in the upper display area (below the display position of the above-mentioned "H06 Board connection error Check connection" icon image) of the third image display device 72 (left image display device). This prevents the icon image from becoming difficult to see due to being overlapped with other performance images or icon images, and makes it possible to clearly inform employees that an exit switch disconnection error has occurred.

The notification event type with priority level 15 is "exit switch abnormality error."
An "exit switch abnormality error" is an abnormality that occurs when the subtraction outlet switch 91c does not turn ON within the specified time after the subtraction solenoid 91a is operated (when the subtraction outlet switch 91c cannot detect the passage of the ball even when the subtraction solenoid 91a is operated).
The notification of the "Exit Switch Abnormal Error" is started upon receiving the "Exit Switch Abnormal Designation Command". The notification mode is as follows:
The voice output device 9 repeatedly outputs the voice "Please call an attendant" in "voice notification (volume MAX)" and the warning sound of a "siren."
An icon image of "H14 Abnormality in subtraction port switch. Malfunction in launcher" is displayed on the third image display device 72 (left image display device).
The frame lighting device 10 is caused to flash in red (brightness 40%).

In the case of an "exit switch abnormal error," the audio, visual, and electric light alerts will continue to be issued until the error is resolved and the error release switch 123 is operated (the alerts will end when the error is resolved and the error release switch 123 is operated).

As shown in FIG. 115, the screen notification of the exit switch abnormality error is a rectangular icon image "H14 Abnormal subtraction port switch Malfunction with launcher" displayed in the upper display area (below the display position of the above-mentioned "H06 Board connection error Check connection" icon image) of the third image display device 72 (left image display device). This prevents the icon image from becoming difficult to see due to being overlapped with other performance images or icon images, and makes it possible to clearly inform employees that an exit switch abnormality error has occurred.

The notification event type with priority level 16 is an "entrance switch disconnection error."
The "entrance switch disconnection error" is an abnormality that occurs when a disconnection of the subtraction entrance switch 91b is detected. Specifically, this is an abnormality that occurs when the subtraction entrance switch 91b cannot be detected as OFF even when the subtraction solenoid 91a is operated (when the game ball is stopped).
The notification of the "entrance switch disconnection error" is started upon receiving the "entrance switch disconnection designation command", and the notification mode is as follows:
The voice output device 9 repeatedly outputs the voice "Please call a staff member" in "voice notification (volume MAX)" and the warning sound of a "siren."
An icon image of "H15 Abnormal subtraction inlet switch. Problem with ball feed section" is displayed on the third image display device 72 (left image display device).
The frame lighting device 10 is caused to flash in red (brightness 40%).

In the case of an "entrance switch disconnection error," the audio, visual, and electric light alerts will continue to be issued until the error is resolved and the error release switch 123 is operated (the alerts will end when the error is resolved and the error release switch 123 is operated).

As shown in FIG. 115, the entrance switch disconnection error is notified on screen by a rectangular icon image "H15 Abnormal subtraction entrance switch, malfunction in ball delivery section" being displayed in the upper display area (below the display position of the above-mentioned "H14 Abnormal subtraction entrance switch, malfunction in launcher" icon image) of the third image display device 72 (left image display device). This prevents the icon image from becoming difficult to see due to being overlapped with other performance images or icon images, and makes it easy to inform employees that an entrance switch disconnection error has occurred.

The notification event type with priority level 17 is "entrance switch abnormality error."
An "entrance switch abnormality error" is an abnormality that occurs when the subtraction entrance switch 91b remains OFF (the time during which no game ball is detected) for a specified period of time (for example, 10 seconds) (the OFF state continues).
The notification of the "entrance switch abnormality error" is started upon receiving the "entrance switch abnormality designation command", and the notification mode is as follows:
The voice output device 9 repeatedly outputs the voice "Please call a staff member" in "voice notification (volume MAX)" and the warning sound of a "siren."
An icon image of "H15 Abnormal subtraction inlet switch. Problem with ball feed section" is displayed on the third image display device 72 (left image display device).
The frame lighting device 10 is caused to flash in red (brightness 40%).

In the case of an "entrance switch abnormality error," the audio, visual, and electric alarms will continue to be issued until the error is resolved and the error release switch 123 is operated (the alarm will end when the error is resolved and the error release switch 123 is operated).

As shown in FIG. 115, the screen notification of the entrance switch abnormality error is displayed in the upper display area (below the display position of the above-mentioned "H14 Subtraction port SW abnormality Malfunction with launcher" icon image) of the third image display device 72 (left image display device) as a rectangular icon image "H15 Subtraction port SW abnormality Malfunction with ball feed section." This prevents the icon image from becoming difficult to see due to being overlapped with other performance images or icon images, and makes it possible to clearly inform employees that an entrance switch abnormality error has occurred.

The notification event type with priority level 18 is a "foul ball switch open circuit error."
The notification of the "Entrance switch abnormal error" is started upon receiving the "Foul ball switch disconnection designation command", and the notification mode is as follows:
The voice output device 9 repeatedly outputs the voice "Please call a staff member" in "voice notification (volume MAX)" and the warning sound of a "siren."
An icon image of "H24 Foul ball switch abnormality Check wiring of foul ball switch" is displayed on the third image display device 72 (left image display device),
The frame lighting device 10 is caused to flash in red (brightness 40%).

In the event of a "foul ball switch disconnection error," the audio, visual, and electric alerts will continue to be issued until the error is resolved and the error release switch 123 is operated (the alerts will end when the error is resolved and the error release switch 123 is operated).

As shown in FIG. 115, the screen notification of the foul ball switch disconnection error is a rectangular icon image "H24 Foul ball switch abnormality Check foul ball switch wiring" displayed in the upper display area (below the display position of the above-mentioned "H15 Subtraction inlet SW abnormality Problem with ball delivery section" icon image) of the third image display device 72 (left image display device). This prevents the icon image from becoming difficult to see due to being overlapped with other performance images or icon images, and makes it possible to clearly inform employees of the occurrence of a foul ball switch disconnection error.

The notification event type with priority level 19 is a "communication line abnormality error."
The notification of the "communication line abnormality error" is started upon receiving the "communication line abnormality designation command". The notification mode is as follows:
The voice output device 9 repeatedly outputs the voice "Please call a staff member" in "voice notification (volume MAX)" and the warning sound of a "siren."
An icon image of "H04 Dedicated unit connection error. Check the connection" is displayed on the third image display device 72 (left image display device).
The frame lighting device 10 is caused to flash in red (brightness 40%).

In the case of a "communication line abnormality error," the audio, visual, and electric light alerts will continue to be issued until the error is resolved and the error reset switch 123 is operated (the alerts will end when the error is resolved and the error reset switch 123 is operated).

As shown in FIG. 115, the screen notification of the communication line abnormality error is displayed in the upper display area of the third image display device 72 (left image display device) (below the display position of the above-mentioned "H24 Foul ball SW abnormality Check wiring of foul ball SW" icon image), with a rectangular icon image "H04 Dedicated unit connection error Check connection." This prevents the icon image from becoming difficult to see due to being overlapped with other performance images or icon images, and makes it possible to clearly inform employees of the occurrence of a communication line abnormality error.

The notification event type with priority level 20 is a "no response communication error."
The notification of the "no response error" is started upon receiving the "no response designation command". The notification mode is as follows:
The voice output device 9 repeatedly outputs the voice "Please call a staff member" in "voice notification (volume MAX)" and the warning sound of a "siren."
An icon image "H05 Dedicated unit communication error Restart unit" is displayed on the third image display device 72 (left image display device),
The frame lighting device 10 is caused to flash in red (brightness 40%).

In the case of a "no response communication error," the audio, visual, and electric alerts will continue to sound until the error is resolved (the alerts will end when the error is resolved).

As shown in FIG. 115, the screen notification of a no-response communication error is displayed in the upper display area (below the display position of the above-mentioned "H04 Dedicated unit connection error Check connection" icon image) of the third image display device 72 (left image display device) as a rectangular icon image "H05 Dedicated unit communication error Restart unit." This prevents the icon image from becoming difficult to see due to being overlapped with other performance images or icon images, and makes it possible to clearly inform employees that a no-response communication error has occurred.

The notification event type with priority level 21 is an "excess ball error."
The notification of the "excess ball error" is started upon receiving the "excess ball error designation command", and the notification mode is as follows:
No notification is made by the audio output device 9.
An icon image of "H25 Excessive Game Ball Error Please Set to Proper Number of Balls" is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal display),
The frame lighting device 10 is caused to flash in red (brightness 40%).

In the case of an "excess ball error," both the visual and electric alerts will continue to be displayed until the error is resolved (the alerts will end when the error is resolved).

As shown in FIG. 115, the screen notification of an excess ball error is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main LCD), and a rectangular icon image "H25 Excessive game ball error Please set the correct number of balls" is displayed so as to overlap part of the right performance pattern 70a. This prevents the icon image from becoming difficult to see due to being overlapped by other performance images or icon images, and makes it easy to inform employees that an excess ball error has occurred.

In addition, the on-screen notification of the excessive ball error continues until the error is resolved (until the correct number of balls is reached), so the situation in which it is difficult to see the effect pattern 70a on the right will continue unless the error is resolved. Therefore, an employee can be called and urged to quickly resolve the error.

The notification event type with priority level 22 is a "few balls error."
The notification of the "few balls error" is started upon receiving the "few balls error designation command", and the notification mode is as follows:
The voice output device 9 repeatedly outputs a voice message (volume MAX) saying "Please refill the out hole with balls" and a warning sound of a "siren."
An icon image of "H24 Insufficient Game Balls Error, Refill Balls from Out Hole" is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal display),
The frame lighting device 10 is caused to flash in red (brightness 40%).

In the case of a "few balls error," the audio, visual, and electric alerts will continue to sound until the error is resolved (the alerts will end when the error is resolved).

As shown in FIG. 115, the screen notification of the insufficient balls error is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main LCD) (displayed below the above-mentioned "H25 Too many game balls error Please set the correct number of balls" icon image), and a rectangular icon image "H24 Too few game balls error Refill balls from the out hole" is displayed so as to overlap with part of the right performance pattern 70a. This prevents the icon image from becoming difficult to see due to being overlapped with other performance images or icon images, and makes it possible to clearly inform employees that a insufficient balls error has occurred.

In addition, the on-screen notification of the insufficient balls error will continue until the error is resolved (until balls are replenished), so the situation in which it is difficult to see the right-side performance pattern 70a will continue unless the error is resolved. Therefore, an employee can be called to promptly resolve the error.

Comparing the "too many balls error" and the "too few balls error," the difference is that the "too many balls error" does not trigger an audio alert, while the "too few balls error" does. If the "too few balls error" continues, if a jackpot game is played, there is a risk of inconvenience, such as a shortage of game balls being fired and the ball not being able to enter the jackpot. Therefore, by also triggering an audio alert for the "too few balls error," it is possible to prompt an employee to quickly replenish balls, which can lead to preventing the above-mentioned inconvenience from occurring.

The notification event type with priority level 23 is "lifting mechanism error."
The notification of the "lifting mechanism error" is started upon receiving the "lifting mechanism error designation command". The notification mode is as follows:
No notification is made by the audio output device 9.
An icon image of "H29 Lift mechanism error. Please check the lift" is displayed on the fourth image display device 73 (right image display device).
The frame lighting device 10 is caused to flash in red (brightness 40%).

In the case of a "lifting mechanism error," both the visual and electric alarms will continue to sound until the error is resolved (the alarm will end once the error is resolved).

As shown in FIG. 115, the lifting mechanism error is notified on screen by a rectangular icon image "H29 Lift mechanism error Please check lift" being displayed in the upper display area of the fourth image display device 73 (right-side image display device). This prevents the icon image from becoming difficult to see due to being overlapped with other performance images or icon images, and makes it easy for employees to understand that a lifting mechanism error has occurred.

The notification event type with priority level 24 is an "abrasive not attached error."
The notification of the "abrasive not yet installed error" is started upon receipt of the "abrasive not yet installed command". The notification mode is as follows:
The voice output device 9 repeatedly outputs the voice "Please call a staff member" in "voice notification (volume MAX)" and the warning sound of a "siren."
An icon image of "H22 Abrasive material attachment error. Abrasive material not set" is displayed on the fourth image display device 73 (right image display device),
The frame lighting device 10 is caused to flash in red (brightness 40%).

The voice saying "Please call an attendant" and the warning sound of the "siren" will end 30 seconds after the output has started, and the icon image "H22 Abrasive loading error Abrasive not set" will be displayed and the frame lighting device 10 will continue to flash red until the error is resolved (the warning will end when the error is resolved).

As shown in FIG. 115, the screen notification of the abrasive not loaded error is a rectangular icon image "H22 Abrasive loaded error Abrasive not loaded" displayed in the upper display area (below the above-mentioned "H29 Lift mechanism error Please check the lift" icon image) of the fourth image display device 73 (right-side image display device). This prevents the icon image from becoming difficult to see due to being overlapped with other presentation images or icon images, and makes it easy for employees to understand that an abrasive not loaded error has occurred.

The notification event type with priority level 25 is "passage switch unconnected error."
The notification of the "passage switch unconnected error" is started upon receiving the "passage switch unconnected designation command". The notification mode is as follows:
The voice output device 9 repeatedly outputs the voice "Please call a staff member" in "voice notification (volume MAX)" and the warning sound of a "siren."
An icon image of "H26 Frame out switch error, check the wiring of frame out switch" is displayed on the third image display device 72 (left image display device),
The frame lighting device 10 is caused to flash in red (brightness 40%).

In the case of an "aisle switch unconnected error," the audio, visual, and electric alarms will continue to sound until the error is resolved (the alarms will end when the error is resolved).

As shown in FIG. 115, the screen notification of the aisle switch unconnected error is displayed in the upper display area (below the above-mentioned "H05 Dedicated unit communication error Restart unit" icon image) of the third image display device 72 (left image display device) with a rectangular icon image "H26 Frame out switch error Check frame out switch wiring." This prevents the icon image from becoming difficult to see due to being overlapped with other performance images or icon images, and makes it easy to inform employees that an aisle switch unconnected error has occurred.

The notification event type with priority level 26 is a "glass frame open error."
The notification of the "glass frame opening error" is started upon receiving the "glass frame opening command". The notification mode is as follows:
The voice output device 9 repeatedly outputs the voice "The door is open" in "Voice notification (volume MAX)".
An icon image "H64 Glass Frame Open Error" is displayed on the third image display device 72 (left image display device),
The frame lighting device 10 is caused to flash in red (brightness 40%).

The audio output of "Door is open" ends when the glass frame 4 is closed or a maximum of 37 seconds after the start of the audio output, the display of the icon image "H64 Glass frame open error" ends when the glass frame 4 is closed, and the frame lighting device 10 stops flashing red 30 seconds after the glass frame 4 is closed.

As shown in FIG. 115, the screen notification of a glass frame opening error is displayed in the upper display area of the third image display device 72 (left image display device) (below the above-mentioned "H26 Frame out SW error Check wiring for frame out SW" icon image), as a rectangular icon image "H64 Glass frame opening error." This prevents the icon image from becoming difficult to see due to being overlapped with other performance images or icon images, and makes it easy to inform employees that a glass frame opening error has occurred.

The notification event type with priority level 27 is "inner frame opening error."
The notification of the "inner frame opening error" is started upon receiving the "inner frame opening designation command", and the notification mode is as follows:
The voice output device 9 repeatedly outputs the voice "The door is open" in "Voice notification (volume MAX)".
An icon image "H65 Inner Frame Open Error" is displayed on the third image display device 72 (left image display device),
The frame lighting device 10 is caused to flash in red (brightness 40%).

The audio output of "Door is open" ends when the inner frame 3 is closed or a maximum of 37 seconds after the start of the audio output, the display of the icon image "H65 Inner frame open error" ends when the inner frame 3 is closed, and the red flashing of the frame lighting device 10 ends 30 seconds after the inner frame 4 is closed.

As shown in FIG. 115, the screen notification of the inner frame opening error is a rectangular icon image "H65 Inner Frame Opening Error" displayed in the upper display area (below the above-mentioned "H64 Glass Frame Opening Error" icon image) of the third image display device 72 (left image display device). This prevents the icon image from becoming difficult to see due to being overlapped with other performance images or icon images, and makes it easy to inform employees that an inner frame opening error has occurred.

In addition, the voice notification format of "The door is open" and the conditions for ending the voice notification are the same for glass frame open errors and inner frame open errors. This allows the control processing related to the voice data and error notification to be standardized, making error notification more efficient.

When a glass frame opening error or an inner frame opening error is being notified, the launch of game balls is not permitted (the launch of game balls into the game area is restricted) to prevent the game balls from flying out of the game machine, but the launch of game balls may be permitted (the launch of game balls into the game area may be permitted).

The notification event type with priority level 28 is "ball removal operation in progress."
The "ball removal operation in progress" notification (notification according to discharge control) is started upon receiving the "ball removal operation in progress command", and the notification mode is as follows:
When the ball removal operation starts, the voice output device 9 outputs a voice message saying "You are in ball removal mode" once for three seconds in a "voice notification (volume MAX)" format, and then, 60 seconds later, a voice message saying "You are in ball removal mode" is output once for five seconds.
An icon image "Ball removal mode in progress" is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal display),
No illuminated notification will be provided by the frame lighting device 10 or the board lighting device 76.

As described above, when the ball removal operation is in progress, the audio notification (volume MAX) will output a voice message saying "You are in ball removal mode" once for three seconds at the start of the ball removal operation, and then 60 seconds later, the audio message saying "Ball removal mode has ended" will be output once for five seconds, ending the operation. The icon image saying "In ball removal mode" will cease to be displayed 60 seconds after it started.

As shown in FIG. 115, the screen notification during the ball removal operation is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main LCD) (displayed below the icon image "Winning limit device has been activated. Today's play is over" mentioned above), and a rectangular icon image "Ball removal mode in progress" is displayed so as to overlap part of the left performance pattern 70a. This prevents the icon image from becoming difficult to see due to being overlapped by other performance images or icon images, and makes it easy to inform employees that the ball removal mode is in progress.

The notification event type with priority level 29 is "ball removal lever operation error."
The notification of the "ball removal lever operation error" is started upon receiving the "ball removal lever operation error start command", and the notification mode is as follows:
The voice output device 9 repeatedly outputs the voice "Please remove the ball" in "voice notification (volume MAX)" mode.
An icon image stating "Please operate the ball removal lever to remove the ball" is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal display),
The frame lighting device 10 is caused to flash in red (brightness 40%).

In the event of a "ball removal lever operation error," the audio, visual, and electric light alerts will continue until the error is resolved (alerts will end when the error is resolved).

As shown in FIG. 115, the screen notification of a ball removal lever operation error is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main LCD) (displayed below the above-mentioned "ball removal mode in progress" icon image), and a rectangular icon image "Please operate the ball removal lever to remove the ball" is displayed so as to overlap part of the left performance pattern 70a. This prevents the icon image from becoming difficult to see due to being overlapped with other performance images or icon images, and makes it possible to clearly inform employees that a ball removal lever operation error has occurred.

The notification event type with priority level 30 is a "launch pad remaining ball error."
The notification of the "Launch Pad Remaining Ball Error" is started upon receiving the "Launch Pad Remaining Ball Error Designation Command", and the notification mode is as follows:
The voice output device 9 repeatedly outputs the voice "voice notification (volume MAX)" saying "There are balls remaining that can be shot" until the error is resolved.
An icon image stating "There are balls remaining that can be shot" is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal display),
No illuminated notification will be provided by the frame lighting device 10 or the board lighting device 76.

Both the audio and visual notifications for the "Launch Pad Remaining Ball Error" will continue until the error is resolved (the notifications will end when the error is resolved).

As shown in FIG. 115, the screen notification of the remaining balls on the launch pad error is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main LCD) (displayed below the above-mentioned "Please operate the ball removal lever to remove the balls" icon image), and a rectangular icon image "There are balls remaining that can be launched" is displayed so as to overlap with part of the left performance pattern 70a. This prevents the icon image from becoming difficult to see due to being overlapped with other performance images or icon images, and makes it possible to clearly inform employees that a remaining balls on the launch pad error has occurred.

The notification event type with priority level 31 is "counting process notification."
The notification of the "counting process notification" is started upon receiving the "counting process notification designation command", and the notification mode is as follows:
The voice output device 9 outputs the voice "Counting processing in progress" repeatedly for 3 seconds in "voice notification (volume MAX)".
An icon image saying "Counting processing in progress" is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal display) for three seconds.
No illuminated notification will be provided by the frame lighting device 10 or the board lighting device 76.

The audio and visual notifications for the "counting process notification" will end when three seconds have elapsed since the start or when counting is complete. If the counting button switch 20a detects the operation of the counting button 20 three seconds after the start, audio and visual notifications will continue for another three seconds, and the same process will be repeated thereafter.

As shown in FIG. 115, the counting process notification screen notification is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main LCD) (displayed below the above-mentioned "balls remaining to be fired" icon image), and a rectangular icon image "Counting process in progress" is displayed so as to overlap with part of the left performance pattern 70a. This prevents the icon image from becoming difficult to see due to being overlapped with other performance images or icon images, and makes it possible to clearly inform players and employees that a counting process notification has occurred.

The notification event type with priority level 32 is "counting process completed."
The notification of "counting process completion" is started upon receiving a "counting process completion command". The notification mode is as follows:
The voice output device 9 outputs a voice message saying "Counting process completed" once for 5 seconds in "voice notification (volume MAX)".
An icon image stating "Counting process completed" is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal display),
No illuminated notification will be provided by the frame lighting device 10 or the board lighting device 76.

As mentioned above, the audio output of "Counting process completed" ends after a single output over five seconds, and the display of the icon image "Counting process completed" ends 30 seconds after it started to be displayed.

As shown in FIG. 115, the screen notification of the completion of the counting process is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main LCD) (displayed below the above-mentioned "Counting process in progress" icon image), and a rectangular icon image "Counting process completed" is displayed so as to overlap part of the left performance pattern 70a. This prevents the icon image from becoming difficult to see due to being overlapped by other performance images or icon images, and makes it possible to clearly inform players and employees that the counting process has been completed.

The notification event type with priority level 33 is "number of game balls exceeded."
When "number of game balls exceeded" occurs, the "number of game balls exceeded command" and the "number of game balls exceeded end command" are received, but the audio notification, visual notification, and electric notification all remain "status quo" (no special notification is given).
The main purpose of the "number of game balls exceeded" is to send it to the gaming machine information center when the number of game balls exceeds the specified number (40,000), so that the gaming machine 1 does not perform any audio notification, visual notification, or illumination notification. This makes it possible to prevent players who are playing in a good mood because the number of game balls exceeds the specified number (40,000) from being upset. On the other hand, since the gaming machine information center can obtain information that the number of game balls exceeds the specified number (40,000), it can recognize that a certain number has been reached before the above-mentioned acquisition upper limit device is activated, and the transition of the number of game balls can be grasped in detail in stages. Note that the "number of game balls exceeded" is information that is sent when the number of game balls exceeds the specified number (40,000), so it may be sent as "40000" exactly or as "40005" depending on the number of game balls owned.

The above-mentioned notification mode is merely an example, and the start condition, end condition, notification time, and notification mode can be changed as appropriate. For example, an event whose end condition is a power outage may end with the passage of time, or an event whose end condition is the passage of time may end with a power outage.

In addition, with regard to on-screen notifications, some events are notified by displaying icon images, but this is not limited to the above. On-screen notifications may be made using the entire display area of the first image display device 70 (main LCD) with red or white text on a black background.

In addition, when multiple events occur, the screen notification can display icon images to notify the occurrence of the events, but it is also possible to display only the events with a high priority among the events that have occurred. Then, when the end condition for the screen notification of a high priority event is met, if the event with a low priority is in the notification period, the screen notification of that event can be performed.

The priority order is also merely an example and may be changed as appropriate. For example, the priority order may be higher for "setting change" (notification according to control related to the setting value), "setting confirmation" (notification according to control related to the setting value), "power on (RWM clear)" (notification according to clearing of predetermined information), and "power restoration" than for "number of game balls clear". For example, the priority order may be higher for "magnet detection error" than for "number of game balls clear", and the priority order may be higher for "unauthorized radio wave detection error" than for "number of game balls clear". For example, the priority order may be higher for "number of winning balls abnormal error" than for "number of game balls clear", and the priority order may be higher for "number of shot balls abnormal error" than for "number of game balls clear". For example, the priority order may be higher for "glass frame opening error" than for "number of game balls clear", and the priority order may be higher for "inner frame opening error" than for "number of game balls clear". Also, for example, "internal gaming machine communication abnormality error" may be given a higher priority than "clearing the number of gaming balls", and "communication line abnormality error" may be given a higher priority than "clearing the number of gaming balls". Also, for example, "ball removal operation in progress" may be given a higher priority than "clearing the number of gaming balls", and "acquisition limit device operation" may be given a higher priority than "clearing the number of gaming balls". Also, "ball removal operation in progress" may be given a higher priority than "glass frame opening error" and "inner frame opening error", and "acquisition limit device operation" and "ball removal operation in progress" may be given a higher priority than "setting change" and "setting confirmation".

Here, we will explain with reference to Figure 99 whether control of game progress is possible or impossible when each type of notification event occurs. If the "Game" column of "Game Action" in Figure 99 shows a "○", it indicates that control of game progress is possible, and if it shows an "×", it indicates that control of game progress is impossible.

Event types that indicate a "state in which game progress cannot be controlled" include "setting change," "setting confirmation," "fraud detection 3 (RWM abnormal error)," "capture limit device activated (partial control impossible)," "ball removal in progress," and "ball removal lever operation error." On the other hand, other event types indicate a "state in which game progress can be controlled." For example, while "setting change" is being executed, execution of the main control board timer interrupt process is not permitted, and the game progress cannot be controlled. On the other hand, while "game ball count clear" is being executed, if "setting change," "setting confirmation," "fraud detection 3 (RWM abnormal error)," or "capture limit device activated" have not occurred in the main control board 110, the game progress can be controlled.

Another feature is that "clearing the number of game balls" is a state in which game progress can be controlled, and takes higher priority than "setting change", "setting confirmation", "fraud detection 3 (RWM abnormal error)", "capture limit device activated (partial control impossible)", "ball removal in progress", and "ball removal lever operation error", which are all "states in which game progress cannot be controlled". This allows the notification of "clearing the number of game balls" to be given priority in any case, ensuring that the player can recognize that the number of game balls has been cleared.

Another feature is that the priorities of the "states in which game progress cannot be controlled", such as "setting change", "setting confirmation", "fraud detection 3 (RWM abnormal error)", "capture limit device activated (partial control impossible)", "ball removal in progress", and "ball removal lever operation error", are different. For example, a "setting change" is required to resolve "fraud detection 3 (RWM abnormal error)", but if a "setting change" is made after the occurrence of "fraud detection 3 (RWM abnormal error)", the "setting change" can be given priority by reporting it (by not reporting "fraud detection 3 (RWM abnormal error)"), allowing the employee to recognize that the correct operation is being performed.

Another feature is that the priorities of "states in which game progress can be controlled", such as "clearing the number of game balls", "powering on (clearing the RWM)", and "power restoration", are different. For example, between "clearing the number of game balls" and "powering on (clearing the RWM)", "clearing the number of game balls" takes priority, and between "clearing the number of game balls" and "power restoration", "clearing the number of game balls" takes priority. This allows the notification of "clearing the number of game balls" to be executed with priority in any case, so that the player can be sure that the number of game balls has been cleared.

As shown in Figures 113 and 114, the conditions for ending the notification differ depending on the type of notification event. For example, notifications can be divided into "events in which notifications end with a power outage (not resumed after power is restored)" and "events in which notifications do not end with a power outage (not resumed after power is restored)." Examples of "events in which notifications end with a power outage (not resumed after power is restored)" include "winning ball count abnormal error," "fired ball count abnormal error," and "RWM abnormal error," while examples of "events in which notifications do not end with a power outage (not resumed after power is restored)" include "number of game balls cleared," "setting change," and "setting confirmation." For example, "number of game balls cleared" is not ended by simply turning the power switch 164 OFF and ON, unless a shot or count is performed. Also, when comparing "an event in which the notification ends when the power is turned off (not restarting notification after power is restored)" with "an event in which the notification does not end when the power is turned off (not restarting notification after power is restored)," the priority tends to be set higher for the "event in which the notification does not end when the power is turned off (not restarting notification after power is restored)." This allows the notification to continue until the number of game balls is cleared, until the balls are fired or counted, so that the player can be informed that the number of game balls has been cleared and that play is possible. Also, if the setting is changed, the notification can continue until the setting key SW112a is returned to its initial position (the operation to end the setting change), so that the employee can be informed that the setting change is completed by ending the notification following the operation.

Another feature is that the priorities of "clearing the number of game balls," "changing the settings," and "checking the settings," which are "events in which the notification does not end due to a power outage (notification resumes after power is restored)," are different. For example, between "clearing the number of game balls" and "changing the settings," "clearing the number of game balls" takes priority, while between "clearing the number of game balls" and "checking the settings," "clearing the number of game balls" takes priority. This allows the notification of "clearing the number of game balls" to be executed with priority in any case, ensuring that the player is aware that the number of game balls has been cleared.

In addition, the "winning ball count abnormal error", "firing ball count abnormal error", and "RWM abnormal error", which are "events in which the notification ends due to a power outage (not restarting the notification after the power is restored)", have different priorities. For example, the "winning ball count abnormal error" is prioritized over the "firing ball count abnormal error". For example, the "winning ball count abnormal error" is assumed to be a fraudulent act in which only the winning SW is detected using a fraudulent device or a game ball with a string attached, and the out ball detection SW 39a downstream of the winning SW is not detected, whereas the "firing ball count abnormal error" is assumed to be a state in which a large number of game balls are stopped on the game board (a state in which so-called "grapes" have occurred). In other words, since the "winning ball count abnormal error" is more likely to be a fraudulent act, security can be increased by prioritizing the "winning ball count abnormal error" and notifying it. In addition, the "RWM abnormal error" is assumed to be prioritized over the "winning ball count abnormal error". This prevents games from being played when there is an abnormality in the main RAM 110c (more serious than an abnormal winning ball count error), and prevents games from being played improperly.

The "RWM abnormality error" notification is terminated on the assumption that a setting change operation is performed and the setting is changed the next time power is supplied after the power supply is cut off. In other words, if a setting change operation is not performed the next time power is supplied after the power supply is cut off, the "RWM abnormality error" notification continues.
Therefore, if a setting change operation is performed the next time power is supplied after the power supply is cut off, this event can be categorized as "an event in which notification ends due to a power outage (notification does not resume after power is restored)."

Note that "an event in which an alert ends due to a power outage (an alert is not resumed after power is restored)" may mean that all of the audio, visual, and illumination alerts end due to a power outage, or that some of the audio, visual, and illumination alerts end due to a power outage. In other words, some of the audio, visual, and illumination alerts may resume. In other words, it may be possible not to resume alerts after power is restored (some may resume and some may not).
Furthermore, "an event in which the notification does not end due to a power outage (notification is resumed after power is restored)" may mean that all of the audio, visual, and illumination notifications do not end due to a power outage, or that some of the audio, visual, and illumination notifications do not end due to a power outage. In other words, it may be possible to resume notifications after power is restored (some notifications may resume and some may not).

In addition, the error codes displayed on the frame control display 125 shown in FIG. 99 have different display termination conditions (non-display conditions) depending on the type of notification event. For example, they can be divided into "events in which the display is terminated by a power outage (the display does not resume after power is restored)" and "events in which the display is not terminated by a power outage (the display resumes after power is restored)." Examples of "events in which the display is terminated by a power outage (the display does not resume after power is restored)" include "unauthorized radio wave detection error," "winning ball count abnormal error," and "fired ball count abnormal error," while examples of "events in which the display is not terminated by a power outage (the display resumes after power is restored)" include "number of game balls cleared." Specifically, the error code "H67" corresponding to "number of game balls cleared" has a display termination condition (non-display condition) met 30 seconds after firing or counting. On the other hand, the error code "H66" corresponding to the "unauthorized radio wave detection error", the error code "H68" corresponding to the "abnormal number of winning balls error", and the error code "H69" corresponding to the "abnormal number of fired balls error" have their display termination conditions (conditions to hide them) met when the power supply to the gaming machine is cut off. This makes it possible to confirm that the high-priority "number of gaming balls cleared" has been performed even after the power supply to the gaming machine is cut off (after the power is turned back on), and allows the user to know for sure that the number of gaming balls has been cleared even in the event of a sudden power outage.

In addition, with regard to "events where the display does not end due to a power outage (the display resumes after the power is restored)," in addition to the above-mentioned "clearing the number of game balls," for example, "glass frame open error" and "inner frame open error" can be included in "events where the display does not end due to a power outage (the display resumes after the power is restored)." For example, if the power supply to the gaming machine is cut off while the glass frame 4 or inner frame 3 is open (with an error code displayed), and the power is turned on without closing the glass frame 4 or inner frame 3, the condition for ending the display of the error code is not met, and if there is a "glass frame open error," "H64" is redisplayed, and if there is an "inner frame open error," "H65" is redisplayed. On the other hand, if the power supply to the gaming machine is cut off while the glass frame 4 or inner frame 3 is open (with an error code displayed), and the power is turned on after closing the glass frame 4 or inner frame 3, the condition for ending the display of the error code is met. In other words, whether or not the condition for ending the display of the error code is met depends on whether or not the action of closing the glass frame 4 or the inner frame 3 is performed (it can be said that it belongs to both events). As a result, if the number of game balls is cleared, the player can be sure that the number of game balls has been cleared even if a power outage occurs unexpectedly. Also, if the error code is displayed when the power is turned back on in the case of a "glass frame open error" or "inner frame open error," the player can be prompted to close the glass frame 4 or the inner frame 3. On the other hand, if the power is turned back on after the action of closing the glass frame 4 or the inner frame 3 has been performed, the display of the error code will end, allowing the player to be aware that appropriate action has been taken.

Note that "an event in which the display ends due to a power outage (the display does not resume after the power is restored)" may be a mode in which no display is performed at all after the power is restored, or a mode in which the display is performed for a predetermined time (e.g., 5 seconds) after the power is restored and then becomes non-displayed after the predetermined time has elapsed. In other words, it may be possible not to resume the display after the power is restored (it may be possible that the display is not displayed at all or that the display is displayed for only a predetermined time).
Furthermore, the "event in which the display does not end due to a power outage (the display is resumed after the power is restored)" may be a mode in which the display continues until the corresponding error is resolved after the power is restored, or a mode in which the display is displayed for a predetermined time (e.g., 30 seconds) after the power is restored and is hidden after the predetermined time has elapsed. In other words, the display may be capable of being resumed after the power is restored (it may continue to be displayed until the error is resolved, or it may be displayed for only a predetermined time).

As described above, in the cases of "setting change", "setting confirmation", "power on (RWM clear)", and "capture limit device operation", the corresponding bit of "fraud detection status 1 (main control)" in "HC/fraud monitoring information" is turned ON and transmitted to the dedicated unit 170 and the gaming machine information center. In the case of "number of game balls clear", bit 3 of "fraud detection status 2 (frame control)" in "HC/fraud monitoring information" is turned ON and the information that has been turned ON is transmitted to the dedicated unit 170 and the gaming machine information center. On the other hand, in the cases of "ball removal operation in progress", "ball removal lever operation error", "communication line abnormality error", "no response communication error", etc., the corresponding bit of "fraud detection status 2 (frame control)" in "HC/fraud monitoring information" is not turned ON and no information is transmitted to the dedicated unit 170 and the gaming machine information center. This allows a distinction to be made between information necessary for proper management of the gaming machine 1 and unnecessary information, and prevents the dedicated unit 170 and gaming machine information center from receiving all information (receiving everything), which can lead to an abundance of information to be managed and poor management.

In addition, in the cases of "setting change", "setting confirmation", and "power on (RWM clear)", the corresponding bit of "fraud detection state 1 (main control)" of "HC/fraud monitoring information" is turned ON and transmitted to the dedicated unit 170 and the gaming machine information center. However, for example, if these events occur outside the business hours of the gaming establishment, the information may not be transmitted, and if these events occur during the business hours of the gaming establishment, the information may be transmitted. In other words, if these events occur during the business hours of the gaming establishment, there is a high probability that fraud has been committed, so that a minimum level of security can be maintained by receiving information only during the business hours of the gaming establishment. In other words, depending on the business hours of the gaming establishment, there may be cases where information related to the event is transmitted to the dedicated unit 170 and the gaming machine information center (during the business hours of the gaming establishment) and cases where information related to the event is not transmitted to the dedicated unit 170 and the gaming machine information center (outside the business hours of the gaming establishment).
On the other hand, in the case of "ball removal operation in progress,""ball removal lever operation error,""communication line abnormality error,""communication no response error," etc., the corresponding bit of "fraud detection status 2 (frame control)" in the "HC/fraud monitoring information" is not turned ON and no information is sent to the dedicated unit 170 and the gaming machine information center, but information related to these events may be sent to the dedicated unit 170 and the gaming machine information center, or may be configured so that it is sent during or outside the business hours of the gaming establishment, or not sent.
In other words, it may be possible to transmit information related to the event to the dedicated unit 170 and the gaming machine information center (it is generally transmitted, but may not be transmitted depending on business hours), or it may be possible not to transmit information related to the event to the dedicated unit 170 and the gaming machine information center (it is generally not transmitted, but may be transmitted depending on business hours).

Here, the display order of the error codes will be explained. As shown in FIG. 99, there are notification events detected by the main control board 110 and notification events detected by the frame control board 120. For notification events detected by the main control board 110, no error code is displayed on the frame control display 125, but for notification events detected by the frame control board 120, an error code is displayed on the frame control display 125. For notification events detected by the main control board 110 and notification events detected by the frame control board 120, an error code is displayed on the frame control display 125 under the control of the performance control means 130, as audio notification, visual notification (display of an error code as an icon image), and illumination notification (except for exceeding the number of game balls). For notification events detected by the frame control board 120, an error code is displayed on the display unit 174 of the dedicated unit 170.

For example, when the frame control board 120 detects that the number of game balls has been cleared, first, the frame control display 125 displays the error code "H67", then the first image display device 70 displays "H67 Number of Game Balls Cleared", and finally, the display unit 174 of the dedicated unit 170 displays "H67". For example, if the order was reversed, the employee performing the game ball clear operation on the back of the gaming machine would have to take the time to look at the first image display device 70 and the display unit 174, which are visible from the front of the gaming machine, but displaying the error codes in the above order has the advantage of making it easier to confirm the game ball clear notification.

Figures 116 and 117 are diagrams showing the relationship between the number of game balls being cleared and the notification modes for each event when the power is turned on. The "audio notification", "screen notification", and "illumination notification" in the figures correspond to those in Figures 113 and 114. Note that Figure 116 assumes the case where the power is turned on after both the number of game balls being cleared and the setting change operation or setting confirmation operation are performed, the case where the number of game balls being cleared and the RWM clear operation are performed, and the case where the number of game balls being cleared and the power is turned on (power restored). The time charts are compared between "number of game balls being cleared" and "setting change or setting confirmation", between "number of game balls being cleared" and "power on (RWM clear)", and between "number of game balls being cleared" and "power restored".

(Comparison between clearing the number of game balls and changing or checking the settings)
(a) is the timing when the power switch 164 is turned on. At this time, if the number of game balls is to be cleared, a game ball count clear operation is performed, if the setting is to be changed, a setting change operation is performed, and if the setting is to be confirmed, a setting confirmation operation is performed.

(b) is the timing when the frame control board 120 clears the number of game balls and the performance control board 130 receives a command to start clearing the number of game balls. Upon receiving this command, the performance control board 130 outputs an audio notification saying "The number of game balls has been cleared," displays an on-screen notification saying "H67 Number of game balls cleared," and causes the frame lighting device 10 to flash red with an electric light notification.

(c) is the timing at which the presentation control board 130 receives the setting change command sent from the main control board 110. In addition, in the gaming machine 1, when the power switch 164 is turned ON, the frame control board 120 and the presentation control board 130 start up slightly earlier than the main control board 110. In other words, the main processing in the frame control board 120 and the main processing in the presentation control board 130 start before the main processing in the main control board 110. Therefore, the game ball count clear notification starts at (b), and the setting change notification or setting confirmation notification starts later at (c).

In (c), although a setting change command has been received, the notification of clearing the number of game balls has been executed, and since the priority order shown in FIG. 113 is that of clearing the number of game balls, audio notification and illumination notification related to the setting change are not initiated. On the other hand, as for visual notification, a display such as "Setting change in progress" is initiated on the first image display device 70.

(d) is the timing 5 seconds have passed since (b). At this timing, the audio notification that the number of game balls has been cleared ends. Meanwhile, the visual notification and the electric light notification continue. Also, when the audio notification that the number of game balls has been cleared ends, a new audio notification of the setting change starts, "Settings are being changed + siren", and this is output repeatedly.

As shown in Fig. 117, setting change and setting confirmation (c) to (d), the notification modes (c) to (d) are as follows: the sound output device 9 and frame lighting device 10 notify that the number of game balls has been cleared, and the first image display device 70 notifies that the number of game balls has been cleared and that the setting is being changed. The first image display device 70 displays "settings being changed" in red letters on a black background, and an icon image of "H67 number of game balls cleared" is displayed in the upper left of the display area so as not to overlap with the display. The icon image displays "H67" in white letters on a red background and "number of game balls cleared" in black letters on a yellow background (the background color is a two-tone red and yellow).

Although the ball count clear notification has a higher priority, the "settings changing" message is displayed in a larger font size than the ball count clear icon image, in red, and in the center of the display area, making it easy for employees to see. This allows employees to be fully aware that the settings are being changed even in a situation where the ball count clear notification is given priority and the audio and electric light notification of the setting change cannot be executed. Also, since both notifications can be identified even if the ball count clear and setting change notifications are executed at the same time, it is possible to prevent situations where employees are unable to recognize that either event is occurring.

(e) is the timing when the performance control board 130 receives the power-on command (or power restoration command in the case of a setting change) sent from the main control board 110. When the performance control board 130 receives this command, it ends the audio and visual notification of the setting change that is being executed.

As shown in FIG. 117, the notification modes (d) to (e) are as follows: the frame lighting device 10 notifies the player that the number of game balls has been cleared, the first image display device 70 notifies the player that the number of game balls has been cleared and that the setting is being changed, and the audio output device 9 notifies the player that the setting is being changed. In this way, if the setting change notification period is still in progress even after the audio notification of the number of game balls has ended, the audio notification of the setting change can be started immediately to make the player more aware that the setting is being changed. Although not shown in the figure, after (e), the first image display device 70 displays an icon image of the number of game balls cleared, the initial number (123) of the performance pattern 70a, and a background image.

(g) is the timing when the player operates the counting button 20 to count the number of game balls (game value) owned by the player, or when the launch handle 15 is gripped and a game ball is shot out. When either of these operations is performed, the visual and illuminated notification that the number of game balls has been cleared ends 30 seconds after the operation. This allows the notification to end without delay after the player takes his seat, preventing the player from feeling uncomfortable and avoiding the game due to the visual and illuminated notification that the number of game balls has been cleared continuing for an extended period of time.

As described above, even if the number of game balls is cleared and the settings are changed or confirmed at the same time, both events can be appropriately notified by audio, visual, or illuminated alerts, which also leads to improved work efficiency for employees.

In addition, in (d), a new audio notification of the setting change is started, but the audio notification of the setting change does not have to be started. Also, although the visual notification of the setting change is decided to start from (c), it may start from (d). Also, the illumination notification of the cleared number of game balls may end in (d) and the illumination notification of the setting change may start.

For ease of explanation, we have used a setting change as an example, but if a setting check is to be performed, the above setting change can be appropriately interpreted as a setting check.

(Comparison between clearing the number of game balls and clearing the RWM)
(a) is the timing when the power switch 164 is turned on. At this time, if the number of game balls is to be cleared, the game ball number clear operation is performed, and if the RWM is to be cleared, the RWM clear operation is performed.

Since (b) is as described above, the explanation will be omitted.
(c) is the timing when the performance control board 130 receives the RWM clear command transmitted from the main control board 110. Although the RWM clear command is received, the game ball count clear notification is being executed, and the game ball count clear has a higher priority as shown in Fig. 113, so the audio notification and the illumination notification related to the RWM clear are not started. On the other hand, as for the screen notification, the first image display device 70 starts displaying the "combination of the performance pattern 70a of the initial result 123" (including the background image).

(d) is the timing 5 seconds have passed since (b). At this timing, the audio notification that the number of game balls has been cleared ends. Meanwhile, the visual notification and the electric light notification continue. Also, when the audio notification that the number of game balls has been cleared ends, a new audio notification that the RWM has been cleared starts: "RAM has been cleared + BGM when the ball is inserted", and this is output repeatedly.

As shown in FIG. 117, power-on (RWM clear) (c) to (d), the notification modes (c) to (d) are as follows: the sound output device 9 and the frame lighting device 10 notify the player that the number of game balls has been cleared, and the first image display device 70 notifies the player that the number of game balls has been cleared and displays the "combination of performance patterns 70a with initial result 123" (including background image). In other words, there is no direct display that the RWM has been cleared, but the display of the "combination of performance patterns 70a with initial result 123" (including background image) indirectly notifies the player that the RWM has been cleared.

(f) is the timing 30 seconds have passed since (d), and the audio notification of RWM clear ends at this timing. Meanwhile, the display of the "combination of the performance pattern 70a of the initial result 123" (including the background image) continues until the player starts playing (it may be interrupted by a demo performance, etc.).

As shown in FIG. 117, power-on (RWM clear) (d) to (f), the notification modes (d) to (f) are as follows: the frame lighting device 10 notifies the player that the number of game balls has been cleared, the first image display device 70 notifies the player that the number of game balls has been cleared and displays the "combination of the performance pattern 70a with the initial result of 123" (including the background image), and the audio output device 9 notifies the player that the RWM has been cleared. In this way, if the audio notification of the number of game balls cleared has ended but the RWM clear notification period is still in progress, the audio notification of the RWM clear can be started immediately, making it easier for the player to recognize that the RWM has been cleared. Note that (g) is as described above, so a description thereof will be omitted.

As described above, even if both the number of game balls and the RWM are cleared, both events can be appropriately notified by audio, visual, and/or electric light alerts, which also leads to improved work efficiency for employees.

Note that in (d), a new audio notification of RWM clear is started, but the audio notification of RWM clear does not have to start. Also, the visual notification of RWM clear is started from (c), but it may start from (d). Also, the illumination notification of the number of game balls cleared may end in (d) and the illumination notification of RWM clear may start.

(Comparison between clearing the number of game balls and power being restored)
(a) is the timing when the power switch 164 is turned on. At this time, if the number of game balls is to be cleared, the game ball count clear operation is performed, and if the power is to be restored, only the power switch 164 is turned on.

Since (b) is as described above, the explanation will be omitted.
(c) is the same as the RWM clear described above, and so a description thereof will be omitted. However, since this is power restoration, the command received from the main control board 110 here is a power restoration command.

(d) is the timing 5 seconds have passed since (b). At this timing, the audio notification of the cleared number of game balls ends. Meanwhile, the visual notification and the illumination notification continue. In addition, when the audio notification of the cleared number of game balls ends, a new audio notification of the power restoration, "Power-on BGM", starts.
(f) is the same as the RWM clear described above, so the explanation will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 117, power recovery (c) to (d), the notification modes (c) to (d) are as follows: the sound output device 9 and the frame lighting device 10 notify the player that the number of game balls has been cleared, and the first image display device 70 notifies the player that the number of game balls has been cleared and displays the "combination of performance symbols 70a with initial numbers 123" (including the background image). In other words, the player is not directly notified that the power has been restored, but is indirectly notified that the power has been restored by displaying the "combination of performance symbols 70a with initial numbers 123" (including the background image). Note that, when the power is restored, the "combination of performance symbols 70a with initial numbers 123" is displayed, as in the case of RWM clear, but a different combination of performance symbols 70a may be displayed. For example, when the power is restored, the "combination of performance symbols 70a with initial numbers 357" may be displayed.

As shown in FIG. 117, power restoration (d) to (f), the notification modes (d) to (f) are as follows: the frame lighting device 10 notifies the player that the number of game balls has been cleared, the first image display device 70 notifies the player that the number of game balls has been cleared and displays the "combination of the initial result 123 performance pattern 70a" (including the background image), and the audio output device 9 notifies the player that the power has been restored (outputs the BGM played when the player inserts the ball). In this way, if the audio notification that the number of game balls has been cleared has ended but the player is still in the power restoration notification period, the audio notification of power restoration can be started immediately, making it easier for the player to recognize that the power has been restored. Note that (g) is as described above, so a description thereof will be omitted.

As described above, even if the number of game balls is cleared and the power is restored at the same time, both events can be appropriately notified by audio, visual, and electric alerts, which also leads to improved work efficiency for employees.

In addition, in (d), a new audio notification of power restoration is started, but the audio notification of power restoration does not have to start. Also, the visual notification of power restoration is started from (c), but it may start from (d). Also, the electric light notification of the cleared number of game balls may end in (d) and the electric light notification of power restoration may start.

Figure 118 is a time chart showing the relationship between the initial operation of the movable effect device 77 (first movable member 77a, second movable member 77b) when the number of game balls is cleared and when the power is restored. Note that Figure 118 is a diagram comparing the notification mode of each effect means when the power is turned on with the game ball count clear operation and when only the power is turned on.

(a) is the timing when the power switch 164 is turned ON. At this time, if the number of game balls is to be cleared, the game ball count clear operation is performed, and if the power is to be restored, only the power switch 164 is turned ON.

(b) is the timing when the number of game balls is cleared by the frame control board 120 and the performance control board 130 receives a command to start clearing the number of game balls. Upon receiving this command, the performance control board 130 outputs an audio notification saying "The number of game balls has been cleared," displays an on-screen notification saying "H67 Number of game balls cleared," and causes the frame lighting device 10 to flash red with an electric light notification.

(c) is the timing at which the performance control board 130 receives the power restoration command sent from the main control board 110.
When the power is turned on with the number of game balls cleared, the first image display device 70 starts displaying the "combination of the performance patterns 70a of the initial result 123" (including the background image),
Even when the power is only ON, the first image display device 70 starts displaying the "combination of the performance patterns 70a of the initial results 123" (including the background image). In other words, regardless of whether the number of game balls is cleared or not, the timing at which the performance control board 130 receives the power restoration command is the same, and the timing at which the display of the "combination of the performance patterns 70a of the initial results 123" (including the background image) starts is also the same.

In addition, when the power is turned on with the number of game balls being cleared, the initial operation of the movable effect device 77 (the first movable member 77a and the second movable member 77b) is started,
Even when the power is only ON, the initial operation of the movable performance device 77 (the first movable member 77a and the second movable member 77b) is started. In other words, regardless of whether the number of game balls is cleared or not, the timing at which the performance control board 130 receives the power restoration command is the same, and the timing at which the initial operation is started is also the same.
This makes it unnecessary to change the timing at which the display of the initial result begins, the timing at which the execution of the initial action begins, or the content of the execution of the initial action depending on whether or not the number of game balls is cleared, thereby preventing an increase in the control load.

In each case, the initial operation is (c) to (g), with the first movable member 77a operating in operation mode 1, then the second movable member 77b operating in operation mode 1, and then the first movable member 77a operating in operation mode 2. In other words, the start timing of the initial operation and the initial operation mode are the same in each case. Therefore, there is no need to prepare initial operation modes according to whether or not the number of game balls has been cleared, and commonality can be achieved, preventing an increase in the control load.

In addition, in (c), when the power is ON and the number of game balls is cleared, the power restoration command is received, but the announcement of the clearing of the number of game balls is being executed, and the priority order shown in FIG. 113 is given to the clearing of the number of game balls, so the audio announcement and the illumination announcement regarding the restoration of the power are not initiated.

In addition, in (c), when the power is only ON, the audio notification of power restoration "Power-on BGM" is output, and the electric notification of power restoration "The frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 76 light up in white" begins.

(d) is the timing 5 seconds have passed since (b). If the power is turned on while the number of game balls is cleared, the audio notification of the cleared number of game balls ends at this timing. Meanwhile, the visual notification and the electric light notification continue. In addition, when the audio notification of the cleared number of game balls ends, a new audio notification of the power being restored, "Power-on BGM", begins to be output.

(e) is the timing when 30 seconds have passed since (c). In the case of only power ON, the audio notification by outputting the BGM for the insertion is terminated. Similarly, in the case of power ON accompanied by clearing the number of game balls, (f) is the timing when 30 seconds have passed since (d), and the audio notification by outputting the BGM for the insertion is terminated at this timing.
Also, (f) when only the power is ON is the timing 60 seconds after (c), and the illumination notification ends at this timing.

(g) is the timing at which the initial operation ends in either case. That is, in either case, the initial operation of the movable effect device 77 (first movable member 77a, second movable member 77b) that began in (c) ends in (g). This makes it unnecessary to change the timing at which the initial operation ends depending on whether or not the number of game balls has been cleared, thereby preventing an increase in the control load.

(h) is the timing when, in the case of power-on accompanied by the clearing of the number of game balls, the player operates the counting button 20 to count the number of game balls (game value) owned by the player, or grips the launch handle 15 to shoot out a game ball. When either of these operations is performed, the on-screen notification and the illuminated notification that the number of game balls has been cleared end 30 seconds after the operation.

Although not specifically shown, in either case, the light emission pattern of the light emitting means of the movable presentation device 77 (first movable member 77a, second movable member 77b) during the initial operation may be the same. For example, whether the power is turned on with the number of game balls being cleared or only the power is turned on, the initial operation may be performed while the light emitting means of the movable presentation device 77 (first movable member 77a, second movable member 77b) is lit in blue. This simplifies the control process since there is no need to change the light emission pattern depending on whether the number of game balls is cleared or not.

In addition, the initial operation of the movable effect device 77 (first movable member 77a, second movable member 77b) was compared between the case where the power is turned on with the number of game balls cleared and the case where the power is turned on only. In the case where the power is turned on only, it may be interpreted as the power is turned on with a setting confirmation operation, or the power is turned on with a setting change operation, or the power is turned on with an RWM clear operation. In other words, in any case, the control load can be simplified by standardizing the execution start timing, execution end timing, operation mode, etc. of the initial operation.

Figures 119 and 120 are diagrams showing the relationship between the number of game balls cleared and the notification mode for each event (abnormality). Note that a magnet detection error and an illegal radio wave detection error are given as examples of each event (abnormality). Also, Figure 119 assumes the case where a magnet is detected when the number of game balls clear operation is performed and the power is turned on, and the case where a radio wave is detected when the number of game balls clear operation is performed and the power is turned on, and the time chart can be read as "number of game balls cleared" and "magnet detection", and "number of game balls cleared" and "radio wave detection".

First, we will explain "clearing the number of game balls" and "magnet detection."
(a) is the timing when the power switch 164 is turned on. At this time, if the number of game balls is to be cleared, the number of game balls is cleared.

(b) is the timing when the frame control board 120 clears the number of game balls and the performance control board 130 receives a command to start clearing the number of game balls. Upon receiving this command, the performance control board 130 outputs an audio notification saying "The number of game balls has been cleared," displays an on-screen notification saying "H67 Number of game balls cleared," and causes the frame lighting device 10 to flash red with an electric light notification.

(c) is the timing when the main processing in the main control board 110 becomes executable, and (d) is the timing when the main control board timer interrupt processing in the main control board 110 becomes executable. In other words, this is the timing when the main control board timer interrupt processing becomes executable and the error control processing executed within the main control board timer interrupt processing becomes executable.

(e) is the timing when magnet detection is performed by the error control process executed within the main control board timer interrupt process, and the performance control board 130 receives a magnet detection designation command. Although the magnet detection designation command is received at this timing, the game ball count clear notification is being executed, and the game ball count clear has a higher priority as shown in FIG. 113, so audio notification and electric light notification related to magnet detection are not initiated. Meanwhile, for the screen notification, the third image display device 72 begins to display an icon image such as "magnet detected."

(f) is the timing 5 seconds have passed since (b). At this timing, the audio notification that the number of game balls has been cleared ends. Meanwhile, the visual notification and the electric light notification continue. Also, when the audio notification that the number of game balls has been cleared ends, a new audio notification of magnet detection starts: "Magnet detected + siren", and this is output repeatedly.

As shown in magnet detection (e) to (f) in Figure 120, the notification modes (e) to (f) are as follows: the sound output device 9 and the frame lighting device 10 notify the player that the number of game balls has been cleared, and the first image display device 70 notifies the player that the number of game balls has been cleared and displays the "combination of performance patterns 70a with initial result 123" (including the background image). The third image display device 72 displays an icon image of "magnet detection" (see Figure 115 for the display position). The design (color, etc.) of the icon image is the same as the icon image for the number of game balls cleared described above.

In this way, if magnet detection occurs when the power is turned on with the game ball count clear operation, a notification of the game ball count clear, which has a high priority, is given and an icon image of "magnet detection" is displayed on the third image display device 72. This makes it possible to distinguish between the notifications even if the game ball count clear and magnet detection are performed at the same time, preventing the user from failing to recognize which event is occurring.

(h) is the timing when 180 seconds have passed since (e). At this timing, the audio notification and visual notification of magnet detection end. Meanwhile, the visual notification and electric light notification of the cleared number of game balls continue to be displayed.

As shown in magnet detection (f) to (h) in FIG. 120, the notification modes (f) to (h) are as follows: the frame lighting device 10 notifies the player that the number of game balls has been cleared, the first image display device 70 notifies the player that the number of game balls has been cleared and displays the initial number (123) of the performance pattern 70a and the background image, the third image display device 72 notifies the player of the magnet detection, and the audio output device 9 notifies the player of the magnet detection. In this way, if the audio notification of the number of game balls being cleared has ended but the player is still in the magnet detection notification period, the audio notification of the magnet detection can be started immediately, making it easier for the player to recognize that a magnet detection has been performed, which is highly likely to be fraudulent.

(i) is the timing when the player operates the counting button 20 to count the number of game balls (game value) owned by the player, or when the launch handle 15 is gripped and a game ball is shot out. When either of these operations is performed, the visual and illuminated notification that the number of game balls has been cleared ends 30 seconds after the operation. This allows the notification to end without delay after the player takes his seat, preventing the player from feeling uncomfortable and avoiding the game due to the visual and illuminated notification that the number of game balls has been cleared continuing for an extended period of time.

As described above, even if both the game ball count is cleared and a magnet is detected, both events can be appropriately notified by audio, visual, and/or electric light alerts, which also leads to improved work efficiency for employees.

If a magnet is not detected at (e) but is detected between (f) and (i), an audio notification and a visual notification of the magnet detection will be immediately issued. On the other hand, as the visual notification of the clearing of the number of game balls has already been issued, no visual notification corresponding to the magnet detection will be issued.

In addition, in (f), a new audio notification of magnet detection is started, but the audio notification of magnet detection does not have to be started. In addition, the visual notification of magnet detection is started from (e), but it may be started from (f). In addition, the illumination notification of the cleared number of game balls may be ended in (f) and the illumination notification of magnet detection may be started.

Next, the "clear number of game balls" and "radio wave detection" will be explained.
(a) is the timing when the power switch 164 is turned on. At this time, if the number of game balls is to be cleared, the number of game balls is cleared.

(b) is the timing when the frame control board 120 clears the number of game balls during the frame control board main processing, and the performance control board 130 receives a command to start clearing the number of game balls. Upon receiving this command, the performance control board 130 outputs an audio notification saying "The number of game balls has been cleared," displays an on-screen notification saying "H67 Number of game balls cleared," and causes the frame lighting device 10 to flash red with an electric light notification.

(e) is the timing when an illegal radio wave is detected in the error control process performed within the frame control board timer interrupt process, which is performed after the frame control board main process, and the performance control board 130 receives an illegal radio wave detection designation command. Although the illegal radio wave detection designation command is received at this timing, the game ball count clear notification is being executed, and the game ball count clear has a higher priority as shown in FIG. 113, so the audio notification and electric light notification related to the radio wave detection are not started. Meanwhile, as for the screen notification, the third image display device 72 starts displaying an icon image such as "H66 illegal radio wave detected". The icon image "H66 illegal radio wave detected" continues to be displayed until the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is cut off.

(f) is the timing 5 seconds have passed since (b). At this timing, the audio notification that the number of game balls has been cleared ends. Meanwhile, the visual notification and the electric light notification continue. In addition, when the audio notification that the number of game balls has been cleared ends, a new audio notification of the detection of illegal radio waves begins, "Radio waves detected + siren," and this is output repeatedly.

As shown in FIG. 120, radio wave detection (e) to (f), the notification modes (e) to (f) are as follows: the sound output device 9 and the frame lighting device 10 notify the player that the number of game balls has been cleared, and the first image display device 70 notifies the player that the number of game balls has been cleared and displays the "combination of the performance patterns 70a with the initial result of 123" (including the background image). The third image display device 72 displays an icon image of "H66 Unauthorized radio wave detected" (see FIG. 115 for the display position). The design (color, etc.) of the icon image is the same as the icon image for the number of game balls cleared described above.

In this way, if radio wave detection occurs when the power is turned on and the game ball count is cleared, a notification of the game ball count being cleared, which has a high priority, is made while an icon image of "unauthorized radio wave detected" is displayed on the third image display device 72. This makes it possible to distinguish between the notifications even if the game ball count is cleared and radio wave detection is performed at the same time, preventing the user from failing to recognize which event has occurred.

(g) is the timing when 30 seconds have passed since (f). At this timing, the audio notification of the detection of unauthorized radio waves ends. Meanwhile, the visual notification of the cleared number of game balls and the illumination notification continue to be displayed. (i) is the same as that described in the section on magnet detection.

As shown in FIG. 120, the notification modes (f) to (g) are as follows: the frame lighting device 10 notifies the player that the number of game balls has been cleared, the first image display device 70 notifies the player that the number of game balls has been cleared and displays the initial number (123) of the performance pattern 70a and the background image, the third image display device 72 notifies the player that an illegal radio wave has been detected, and the audio output device 9 notifies the player that an illegal radio wave has been detected. In this way, if the audio notification that the number of game balls has been cleared has ended but the player is still in the radio wave detection notification period, the audio notification of radio wave detection can be started immediately, making it easier for the player to recognize that a radio wave detection that is highly likely to be illegal has been detected.

As described above, even if both the number of game balls cleared and radio wave detection occur, both events can be appropriately notified by audio, visual, and electric light alerts, which also leads to improved work efficiency for employees.

If radio wave detection is not performed at (e) but is performed between (f) and (i), audio and visual notifications of radio wave detection are immediately issued. On the other hand, as the illumination notification for clearing the number of game balls has already been issued, no illumination notification corresponding to the radio wave detection is issued.

In addition, at (f), a new audio notification of radio wave detection is started, but the audio notification of radio wave detection does not have to be started. Also, the visual notification of radio wave detection is started from (e), but it may be started from (f). Also, the electric light notification of the cleared number of game balls may be ended at (f), and the electric light notification of radio wave detection may be started.

Figures 121 and 122 are diagrams showing the relationship between the clearing of the number of game balls and the notification mode of each event (abnormality). Note that as examples of each event (abnormality), an internal gaming machine communication abnormality error, a communication line abnormality error, and a communication no response error are given. Also, Figure 121 assumes a case where an internal gaming machine communication abnormality is detected when the number of game balls is cleared and the power is turned on, and a communication line abnormality and communication no response are detected when the number of game balls is cleared and the power is turned on, and the time chart can be read as "clearing the number of game balls" and "internal gaming machine communication abnormality error", and "clearing the number of game balls" and "communication line abnormality error, communication no response error".

First, we will explain about "clearing the number of game balls" and "abnormal communication error within the gaming machine."
(a) is the timing when the power switch 164 is turned on. At this time, if the number of game balls is to be cleared, the number of game balls is cleared.

(b) is the timing when the frame control board 120 clears the number of game balls and the performance control board 130 receives a command to start clearing the number of game balls. Upon receiving this command, the performance control board 130 outputs an audio notification saying "The number of game balls has been cleared," displays an on-screen notification saying "H67 Number of game balls cleared," and causes the frame lighting device 10 to flash red with an electric light notification.

(c) is the timing when the main processing in the main control board 110 becomes executable. At this time, the main processing in the main control board 110 issues a "gaming machine installation information notification", but the wiring connecting the main control board 110 and the frame control board 120 is partially inserted or broken, preventing communication, and the receipt result of the "gaming machine installation information notification" is not received.

(d) is the timing when the frame control board 120 determines that the period after startup when gaming machine installation information has not been received is three minutes, and the performance control board 130 receives a command to start an abnormality in gaming machine communications. Although the command to start an abnormality in gaming machine communications is received at this timing, the game ball count clear notification is being executed, and the priority order shown in FIG. 113 is also higher for the game ball count clear, so audio and illumination notifications related to the abnormality in gaming machine communications are not initiated. Meanwhile, as for the screen notification, the third image display device 72 begins to display an icon image such as "H06 Board connection error, check connection."

(e) is the timing 5 seconds have passed since (b). At this timing, the audio notification that the number of game balls has been cleared ends. Meanwhile, the visual notification and the electric light notification continue. Also, when the audio notification that the number of game balls has been cleared ends, a new audio notification of an abnormality in the communication within the gaming machine starts, "Please call an attendant + siren", and this is output repeatedly.

As shown in Fig. 122 for the communication abnormality errors (d) to (e), the notification modes (d) to (e) are as follows: the sound output device 9 and the frame lighting device 10 notify the player that the number of game balls has been cleared, and the first image display device 70 notifies the player that the number of game balls has been cleared and displays the "combination of the performance patterns 70a with the initial result of 123" (including the background image). The third image display device 72 displays an icon image of "H06 board connection error, check the connection" (see Fig. 115 for the display position). The design (color, etc.) of the icon image is the same as the icon image for the game ball count cleared described above.

In this way, if an internal communication abnormality is detected when the power is turned on to clear the number of game balls, a notification of the clearing of the number of game balls, which has a high priority, is issued, while the third image display device 72 displays an icon image of "H06 Board connection error Check connection." This makes it possible to distinguish between the notifications even if the clearing of the number of game balls and the internal communication abnormality are executed at the same time, preventing a situation where the user is unable to recognize which event has occurred.

(f) is the timing when the wiring connecting the main control board 110 and the frame control board 120 is cleared of any partial insertion or disconnection. This ends the audio and visual notification of the abnormal communication error within the gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 122, the notification modes (e) to (f) are as follows: the frame lighting device 10 notifies the player that the number of game balls has been cleared, the first image display device 70 notifies the player that the number of game balls has been cleared and displays the initial number (123) of the performance pattern 70a and the background image, the third image display device 72 notifies the player that the communication error has been abnormal, and the audio output device 9 notifies the player that the communication error has been abnormal. In this way, if the audio notification of the number of game balls cleared has ended but the player is still in the notification period of the communication error in the game machine, the audio notification of the communication error in the game machine can be started immediately to prompt the player to check the connection status between the main control board 110 and the frame control board 120.

(g) is the timing when the player operates the counting button 20 to count the number of game balls (game value) owned by the player, or when the launch handle 15 is gripped and a game ball is shot out. When either of these operations is performed, the visual and illuminated notification that the number of game balls has been cleared ends 30 seconds after the operation. This allows the notification to end without delay after the player takes his seat, preventing the player from feeling uncomfortable and avoiding the game due to the visual and illuminated notification that the number of game balls has been cleared continuing for an extended period of time.

As described above, even if both the number of game balls cleared and an error in the communication within the gaming machine occurs, both events can be appropriately notified by audio, visual, and electric alerts, which also leads to improved work efficiency for employees.

If a communication error within the gaming machine is detected between (e) and (g), an audio notification and a visual notification of the communication error within the gaming machine are immediately issued. On the other hand, as the visual notification of the clearing of the number of game balls has already been issued, no visual notification corresponding to the communication error within the gaming machine is issued.

In addition, in (e), a new audio notification of a communication abnormality error within the gaming machine is started, but the audio notification of the communication abnormality error within the gaming machine does not have to be started. In addition, the visual notification of the communication abnormality error within the gaming machine is started from (d), but it may start from (e). In addition, the electric light notification of the number of game balls cleared may be ended in (e), and the electric light notification of the communication abnormality error within the gaming machine may be started.

Next, we will explain "Number of game balls cleared" and "Communication line abnormality error, communication no response error." Note that since both are connection errors between the frame control board 120 and the dedicated unit 170, we will use the term "communication line abnormality error" to explain them, and consider "communication no response error" to be interchangeable. In this example, the wiring connecting the frame control board 120 and the dedicated unit 170 is half-inserted or broken.

(a) is the timing when the power switch 164 is turned ON. At this time, if the number of game balls is to be cleared, the game ball count clear operation is performed. (b) is the same as (b) in the above-mentioned gaming machine internal communication abnormality error. Also, (c) is the timing related to the gaming machine internal communication abnormality error, so the explanation will be omitted.

(d) is the timing when the frame control board 120 detects that the VL signal (connection signal) with the dedicated unit 170 is OFF, and the performance control board 130 receives a communication line abnormality designation command. Although the communication line abnormality designation command is received at this timing, the game ball count clear notification is being executed, and the game ball count clear has a higher priority as shown in FIG. 113, so audio and electric light notifications related to the communication line abnormality are not initiated. Meanwhile, as for the visual notification, the third image display device 72 begins to display an icon image such as "H04 Dedicated unit connection error, check connection".

(e) is the timing 5 seconds have passed since (b). At this timing, the audio notification that the number of game balls has been cleared ends. Meanwhile, the visual notification and the electric light notification continue. Also, when the audio notification that the number of game balls has been cleared ends, a new audio notification of a communication line abnormality starts, "Please call an attendant + siren", and this is output repeatedly.

As shown in the communication line abnormality errors (d) to (e) in FIG. 122, the notification modes (d) to (e) are as follows: the sound output device 9 and the frame lighting device 10 notify the player that the number of game balls has been cleared, and the first image display device 70 notifies the player that the number of game balls has been cleared and displays the "combination of the performance patterns 70a with the initial result of 123" (including the background image). The third image display device 72 displays an icon image of "H04 Dedicated unit connection error Check connection" (see FIG. 115 for the display position). The design (color, etc.) of the icon image is the same as the icon image for the number of game balls cleared described above.

In this way, if a communication line abnormality is detected when the power is turned on to clear the number of game balls, a notification of the clearing of the number of game balls, which has high priority, is made, while the third image display device 72 displays an icon image of "H04 Dedicated unit connection error Check connection." This makes it possible to distinguish between notifications for both, even if the clearing of the number of game balls and the communication line abnormality are performed at the same time, preventing a situation where the user is unable to recognize which event has occurred.

(f) is the timing when the half-insertion or breakage of the wiring connecting the frame control board 120 and the dedicated unit 170 is resolved. This ends the audio and visual notification of the communication line abnormality error. (g) is the same as (g) in the above-mentioned game machine internal communication abnormality error.

As shown in FIG. 122, the notification modes (e) to (f) are as follows: the frame lighting device 10 notifies the player that the number of game balls has been cleared, the first image display device 70 notifies the player that the number of game balls has been cleared and displays the initial number (123) of the performance pattern 70a and the background image, the third image display device 72 notifies the player of a communication line abnormality error, and the audio output device 9 notifies the player of a communication line abnormality error. In this way, if the communication line abnormality error notification period continues even after the audio notification of the number of game balls has ended, the audio notification of the communication line abnormality error can be started immediately to prompt the player to check the connection status between the frame control board 120 and the dedicated unit 170.

As described above, even if the number of game balls is cleared and a communication line abnormality error or a communication no-response error occurs at the same time, both events can be appropriately notified by audio, visual, and electric light alerts, which also leads to improved work efficiency for employees.

If a communication line abnormality is detected between (e) and (g), an audio notification and a visual notification of the communication line abnormality error will be immediately issued. On the other hand, as the visual notification of the clearing of the number of game balls has already been issued, the visual notification corresponding to the communication line abnormality error will not be issued.

In addition, in (e), a new audio notification of a communication line anomaly error is started, but the audio notification of the communication line anomaly error does not have to be started. In addition, the visual notification of the communication line anomaly error is started from (d), but it may be started from (e). In addition, the electric light notification of the number of game balls cleared may be ended in (e), and the electric light notification of the communication line anomaly error may be started.

Figures 123 and 124 are diagrams showing the relationship between the number of game balls cleared and the notification modes for each event (abnormality). Note that as examples of each event (abnormality), a glass frame opening error, an inner frame opening error, and ball removal operation in progress are given. Also, Figure 123 assumes the case where the number of game balls clear operation is performed and the power is turned on while the glass frame 4 or the inner frame 3 is left open, and the case where the number of game balls clear operation and ball removal operation are performed and the power is turned on. In terms of how to read the time chart, it is "number of game balls cleared" and "glass frame opening error, inner frame opening error", and "number of game balls cleared" and "ball removal operation in progress".

First, we will explain "Number of game balls cleared" and "Glass frame opening error, inner frame opening error." Note that since both errors are door opening system errors detected by the frame control board 120, we will use the term "glass frame opening error" to explain them, and consider "inner frame opening error" to be interchangeable.

(a) is the timing when the power switch 164 is turned ON. At this time, if the number of game balls is to be cleared, the game ball count clear operation is performed.

(b) is the timing when the frame control board 120 clears the number of game balls and the performance control board 130 receives a command to start clearing the number of game balls. Upon receiving this command, the performance control board 130 outputs an audio notification saying "The number of game balls has been cleared," displays an on-screen notification saying "H67 Number of game balls cleared," and causes the frame lighting device 10 to flash red with an electric light notification.

(d) is the timing when frame control board timer interrupt processing is started in the frame control board 120. When frame control board timer interrupt processing is started, the opening of the glass frame 4 or inner frame 3 can be detected in the error control processing performed within the frame control board timer interrupt processing.

(e) is the timing when the opening of the glass frame 4 is detected in the error control process (frame control board minor error notification control process) and the performance control board 130 receives a glass frame opening command. Although the glass frame opening command is received at this timing, the game ball count clear notification is being executed, and the game ball count clear has a higher priority as shown in FIG. 113, so audio notification and electric light notification related to the glass frame opening error are not initiated. Meanwhile, as for the screen notification, the third image display device 72 starts displaying an icon image such as "H64 Glass frame opening error".

(f) is the timing 5 seconds have passed since (b). At this timing, the audio notification that the number of game balls has been cleared ends. Meanwhile, the visual notification and the electric light notification continue. Also, when the audio notification that the number of game balls has been cleared ends, a new audio notification of a glass frame open error starts, "Door is open + siren", and this is output repeatedly.

As shown in FIG. 124, glass frame (inner frame) opening error (e) to (f), the notification modes (e) to (f) are as follows: the sound output device 9 and frame lighting device 10 notify the player that the number of game balls has been cleared, and the first image display device 70 notifies the player that the number of game balls has been cleared and displays the "combination of performance patterns 70a with initial result 123" (including background image). The third image display device 72 displays an icon image of "H64 glass frame opening error" (see FIG. 115 for the display position). The design (color, etc.) of the icon image is the same as the icon image for the number of game balls cleared described above.

In this way, if the game ball count clear operation is performed while the glass frame 4 or inner frame 3 is open and the power is turned on, a notification of the game ball count clear, which has the higher priority, is made while the third image display device 72 displays the icon image "H64 Glass frame open error." This makes it possible to distinguish between the notifications even if the game ball count clear and the glass frame open error are performed at the same time, preventing the player from failing to recognize which event has occurred.

(g) is the timing 37 seconds have passed since (e). At this timing, the audio notification of the glass frame opening error ends. Meanwhile, the on-screen notification continues. Also, the on-screen notification and the illumination notification of the cleared number of game balls continue to be displayed.

As shown in the glass frame (inner frame) opening error (f) to (g) in FIG. 124, the frame lighting device 10 notifies the player that the number of game balls has been cleared, the first image display device 70 notifies the player that the number of game balls has been cleared and displays the initial number (123) of the performance pattern 70a and the background image, the third image display device 72 notifies the player of the glass frame opening error, and the audio output device 9 notifies the player of the glass frame opening error. In this way, if the audio notification of the number of game balls cleared has ended but the player is still in the glass frame opening error notification period, the audio notification of the glass frame opening error is started immediately, so that the player can be made aware that the glass frame 4 has been opened, and it is possible to prevent the player from playing the game with the glass frame 4 open.

(h) is the timing when the glass frame 4 changes from an open state to a closed state. For example, assume that the glass frame 4 is closed by an employee. When the glass frame 4 is closed, the screen notification of the glass frame open error ends. This prevents employees from becoming confused by the icon image "H64 Glass Frame Open Error" not disappearing even when the glass frame 4 is closed.

(j) is the timing when the player operates the counting button 20 to count the number of game balls (game value) owned by the player, or when the launch handle 15 is gripped and a game ball is shot out. When either of these operations is performed, the visual and illuminated notification that the number of game balls has been cleared ends 30 seconds after the operation. This allows the notification to end without delay after the player takes his seat, preventing the player from feeling uncomfortable and avoiding the game due to the visual and illuminated notification that the number of game balls has been cleared continuing for an extended period of time.

As described above, even if both the number of game balls is cleared and a glass frame opening error occurs, both events can be appropriately notified by audio, visual, and electric light alerts, which also leads to improved work efficiency for employees.
In addition, between (b) and (e), that is, during the period when the notification that the number of game balls has been cleared is being made, the state in which the game balls are permitted to be shot into the game area is, but between (e) and (h), that is, during the period when the notification that the number of game balls has been cleared and the notification of the glass frame or inner frame opening error are being made, the state in which the game balls are restricted from being shot into the game area is. This makes it possible to prevent the game balls from being shot out and flying out of the gaming machine, which would result in the game balls required for playing being unable to be secured.

If a glass frame opening error is detected between (f) and (j), an audio notification and a visual notification of the glass frame opening error are immediately executed. On the other hand, as the illumination notification for clearing the number of game balls has been executed, the illumination notification corresponding to the glass frame opening error is not executed.

In addition, at (f), a new audio notification of a glass frame opening error is started, but the audio notification of a glass frame opening error does not have to be started. Also, the visual notification of a glass frame opening error is started from (e), but it may be started from (f). Also, the illumination notification of the cleared number of game balls may be ended at (f), and the illumination notification of a glass frame opening error may be started.

Next, the "clear game ball count" and "ball removal operation in progress" will be explained.
(a) is the timing when the power switch 164 is turned on. At this time, the game ball count clear operation and the ball removal operation are performed. (b) is the same as the case of the glass frame opening error described above.

(c) is the timing when the ball removal operation in progress flag is set by the frame control board 120 and the performance control board 130 receives the ball removal operation in progress command. As described above, in the frame control board main processing, the ball count clearing is executed before the ball removal processing, so the timing chart is in the order of (b) and (c) as shown above. In (c), the ball removal operation in progress command is received, but the ball count clearing notification is being executed, and the priority order shown in FIG. 113 is also higher for the ball count clearing, so the audio notification and electric light notification related to the ball removal operation are not started. Meanwhile, as for the visual notification, the first image display device 70 starts to display "ball removal mode in progress."

(f) is the timing 5 seconds have passed since (b). At this timing, the audio notification that the number of game balls has been cleared ends. Meanwhile, the visual notification and the electric light notification continue. Also, when the audio notification that the number of game balls has been cleared ends, a new audio notification that the ball removal mode is in progress is output, as at the start of (f), "You are in ball removal mode" (once). At the timing (i) when the ball removal mode ends, the audio notification that was in ball removal mode, "You are in ball removal mode" (once), is output.

As shown in (c) to (f) during the ball removal operation in FIG. 124, the sound output device 9 and the frame lighting device 10 notify the player that the number of game balls has been cleared, and the first image display device 70 notifies the player that the number of game balls has been cleared, displays the "combination of the initial result 123 and the performance pattern 70a" (including the background image), and displays "ball removal mode in progress" so as to be superimposed on the "combination of the initial result 123 and the performance pattern 70a".

The "Ball removal mode in progress" display may be superimposed so that part of the "combination of initial numbers 123 and performance patterns 70a" on the back is not visible, or may be superimposed so that part of the "combination of initial numbers 123 and performance patterns 70a" is visible (through the back side).

(i) is the timing when 60 seconds have passed since (c). At this timing, as described above, the voice notification "Ball removal mode has ended" (once) during the ball removal mode is output. In addition, the display of "Ball removal mode in progress" ends. (j) is the same as (j) for the glass frame opening error.

As shown in (f) to (i) during the ball removal operation in FIG. 124, the frame lighting device 10 notifies the player that the number of game balls has been cleared, and the first image display device 70 displays the notification that the number of game balls has been cleared, the "combination of the performance pattern 70a of the initial result 123" (including the background image), and the "ball removal mode in progress" message superimposed on the "combination of the performance pattern 70a of the initial result 123". In this way, if the notification period for the ball removal operation is still in progress even after the audio notification of the number of game balls has ended, the audio notification of the ball removal mode can be started immediately to notify the player that the ball removal mode is in progress, and the ball removal mode can be progressed efficiently.

As described above, even if both the number of game balls has been cleared and the ball removal operation is in progress, both events can be appropriately notified by audio, visual, and electric alerts, which also leads to improved work efficiency for employees.

In (f), the audio notification of the ball removal mode is started, but the audio notification of the ball removal mode does not have to be started. Also, the visual notification of the ball removal mode is started from (c), but it may be started from (f). Also, the illumination notification of the cleared number of game balls may be ended at (f), and the illumination notification of the ball removal mode may be started.

Figure 125 shows the relationship between a glass frame (inner frame) open error and the ball removal operation in progress. The situation is assumed to be one in which the glass frame 4 or inner frame 3 is open and the power switch 164 is turned on while the ball removal operation is being performed. Note that the following explanation uses an example in which the glass frame 4 is opened and closed, but glass frame 4 can be read as inner frame 3.

(a) in Figure 125 is the timing when the power switch 164 is turned ON. At this time, the ball removal operation is performed. (b) is the timing when the ball removal operation process of the frame control board timer interrupt process is executed. In the audio notification, the sound "In ball removal mode" is output once for three seconds, and the display begins to display "In ball removal mode". The display of "In ball removal mode" continues until (f). Note that no illumination notification is specified during the ball removal operation (see Figure 114), so it is not executed.

In addition, the game ball count display 135 (the segment corresponding to the last digit) starts to display "-" (a bar pattern), and the frame control display 125 (the segment corresponding to the last digit) starts to display "-" (a bar pattern), and the display of this "-" (a bar pattern) notifies the user that the ball removal operation is in progress.

(c) is the timing when the frame control board timer interrupt process (the first time after the power is turned on) is executed, and (d) is the timing when the glass frame open command is set in the error control process executed within the frame control board timer interrupt process, and the performance control board 130 receives the glass frame open command.

When the performance control board 130 receives the glass frame opening command, it repeatedly outputs the voice "The door is open" as an audio notification, displays an icon image of "H64 Glass frame opening error" on the third image display device 72 as a visual notification, and flashes the frame lighting device 10 red as an electric light notification.

Note that the glass frame opening error has a higher priority than the ball removal operation (see FIG. 114), so in principle the voice output of "In ball removal mode" output from (b) would be interrupted and the voice output of "Door is open" would be started. However, since the voice output of "In ball removal mode" from (b) is output once every three seconds, if it is interrupted midway through the output, it becomes difficult to understand what the voice notification is about. Therefore, in this example, as an exception, even if a notification event with a higher priority than the notification event being executed occurs during the execution of a voice notification, the voice notification being executed, "In ball removal mode", is output (completed) without interruption. This makes it possible to perform a notification that is easy for employees performing the ball removal operation to understand.

On the other hand, in accordance with the principle of priority, it would be acceptable to interrupt the voice output of "You are in ball removal mode" midway and start outputting the voice "The door is open."

In addition, in (d), the display on the frame control display 125 changes from "-" (bar pattern) to "H64" (segment corresponding to the last 3 digits to the last 1 digit). This notifies the employee who is removing the balls while looking at the back side of the gaming machine that a glass frame opening error has occurred.

On the other hand, the ball count display 135 does not switch to "H64" (the segment corresponding to the last three digits to the last digit), but maintains the "-" (bar pattern) display. The ball count display 135 is located in a position visible from the surface of the gaming machine, and since the first image display device 70 also displays "ball removal mode in progress" on the surface of the gaming machine, it is possible to inform the employee that a glass frame opening error has occurred without switching the ball count display 135 to "H64". This has the advantage of reducing the processing load of the display control on the frame control board 120 (saving the trouble of switching to H64).

In addition, in (d), the display on the game ball count display 135 may be switched to "H64." This prevents, for example, employees from being confused by different information being displayed on the frame control display 125 and the game ball count display 135.

(e) is the timing when the glass frame 4 changes from an open state to a closed state. For example, it is assumed that the glass frame 4 is closed by an employee. When the glass frame 4 is closed, the audio notification, visual notification, and illumination notification of the glass frame open error end. It is assumed that the ball removal operation is still in progress at the timing of (e).

In (e), the game ball count display 135 displays "-" (bar pattern), and the frame control display 125 switches from displaying "H64" to displaying "-" (bar pattern). This allows a notification that the ball removal operation is in progress to be made without delay after the glass frame opening error notification has ended, making it possible to provide a notification that is easy for employees to understand.

(f) is the timing when 60 seconds have passed since (b). At this timing, the ball removal operation ends. In the audio notification, the sound "Ball removal mode has ended" is output once for 5 seconds, and in the visual notification, the display "Ball removal mode in progress" is no longer displayed.

In addition, in (f), the game ball count display 135 stops displaying the "-" (bar pattern) and goes completely dark, and the frame control display 125 stops displaying the "-" (bar pattern) and goes completely dark. This makes it easier for a player who is staring at the back of the game machine while performing the ball removal operation to recognize that the ball removal operation has ended by visually seeing that the frame control display 125 has gone completely dark (along with the audio notification output in (f)).

Then, when the voice output of "Ball removal mode has ended" ends, the ball removal operation ends at (g).
Although the ball removal operation is not indicated by illumination, it may be indicated by a predetermined light emission mode. Also, the "ball removal mode in progress" display is continued between (d) and (e), but the display may be hidden between (d) and (e).

In addition, the game ball count display 135 is always displaying "-" (a bar symbol) between (b) and (f), and the frame control display 125 is always displaying "-" (a bar symbol) between (b) and (d) and (e) and (f), but this is not limited to the above. The game ball count display 135 may always display "-" (a bar symbol) between (b) and (d) and (e) and (f), but the game ball count display 135 may always display "-" (a bar symbol) between (b) and (d) and (e) and (f), and the game ball count display 125 may always display "-" (a bar symbol) between (b) and (d) and (e) and (f), but this is not limited to the above. The game ball count display 135 may always display "-" (a bar symbol) between (b) and (d) and (e) and (f), and the game ball count display 125 may always display "-" (a bar symbol)

Figures 126 to 128 are diagrams showing the relationship between the clearing of the number of game balls and the notification modes for each event (abnormality, etc.). Note that the explanation will be given by taking the acquisition limit device (operation) as an example of each event (abnormality). Figure 126 assumes the power is turned on after the acquisition limit device is activated. In other words, the RWM clear operation is required to stop the operation of the acquisition limit device, and the power is turned on together with the acquisition ball count clear operation. Figure 127 assumes the cases where an RWM abnormality (for example, a checksum abnormality in the main RAM 110c) is detected when the power is turned on after the acquisition limit device is activated, and where it is not detected.

Figure 126 (a) shows the timing when the power switch 164 is turned ON. At this time, if the number of game balls is to be cleared, the game ball count clear operation is performed.

(b) is the timing when the frame control board 120 clears the number of game balls and the performance control board 130 receives a command to start clearing the number of game balls. Upon receiving this command, the performance control board 130 outputs an audio notification saying "The number of game balls has been cleared," displays an on-screen notification saying "H67 Number of game balls cleared," and causes the frame lighting device 10 to flash red with an electric light notification.

(c) shows the start of the main control board 110 startup, and is the timing when the presentation control board 130 receives the acquisition limit activation command sent by the main control board main processing. Although the presentation control board 130 receives the acquisition limit activation command, it is executing a ball count clear notification, and since the priority order shown in FIG. 113 is also higher for ball count clear, audio and illumination notifications related to the acquisition limit device activation are not initiated. Meanwhile, as for the visual notification, the first image display device 70 begins to display a message such as "The acquisition limit device has been activated. Please clear the RWM."

As shown in FIG. 128, the notification modes (b) to (c) of the game ball count clear & acquisition limit device (b) to (c) are performed by the sound output device 9 and the frame lighting device 10 to notify the game ball count clear, and the first image display device 70 to notify the game ball count clear. Note that it is preferable to use a color (a different color) that does not overlap with the display color used for the icon image of the game ball count clear as the background color of the first image display device 70 at this time. This prevents the icon image of the game ball count clear notification from becoming difficult to see.

(d) is the timing 5 seconds have passed since (b). At this timing, the audio notification that the number of game balls has been cleared ends. Meanwhile, the visual notification and the illuminated notification continue. In addition, when the audio notification that the number of game balls has been cleared ends, a new audio notification from the acquisition limit device starts, stating "acquisition limit device in operation," and this is output repeatedly.

As shown in FIG. 128, the notification modes (c) to (d) are as follows: the sound output device 9 and the frame lighting device 10 notify the number of game balls being cleared, and the first image display device 70 notifies the number of game balls being cleared and the operation of the acquisition upper limit device. Specifically, the message "The acquisition upper limit device has been activated. Please clear the RWM" is displayed in the center of the display area, and an icon image of "H67 Number of Game Balls Cleared" is displayed in the upper left of the display area. Note that it is preferable that the background color of the first image display device 70 at this time is a color (different color) that does not overlap with the display color used for the icon image of the game balls being cleared and the display color (text color) used for the acquisition upper limit device operation notification. This prevents the icon image of the game balls being cleared and the acquisition upper limit device operation notification from becoming difficult to see.

(e) is the timing 30 seconds have passed since (c). At this timing, the audio notification from the acquisition limit device ends. Meanwhile, the on-screen notification continues. Note that although the audio notification from the acquisition limit device ends after a predetermined time has passed, it may also end when the power supply is cut off.

As shown in FIG. 128, the notification modes of (d) to (e) are as follows: the frame lighting device 10 notifies the player that the number of game balls has been cleared, the audio output device 9 notifies the player that the upper limit device is in operation, and the first image display device 70 notifies the player that the number of game balls has been cleared and that the upper limit device is in operation. The display modes are the same as those of (c) to (d) described above.

Thus, although the ball count clear notification has a higher priority, the message "The maximum acquisition limit device has been activated, please clear the RWM" is displayed in a larger font size than the icon image for the ball count clear notification, and is displayed in the center of the display area, making it easy for employees to see. This allows employees to be fully aware that the maximum acquisition limit device is in operation, even in a situation where the ball count clear notification takes priority and the audio and light notifications of the maximum acquisition limit device cannot be executed, making it easier for employees to understand the operations required to stop the operation of the maximum acquisition limit device. Also, since both notifications can be distinguished even if the ball count clear notification and the notification that the maximum acquisition limit device is in operation are executed at the same time, it is possible to prevent situations where employees are unable to recognize that either event is occurring.

(h) is the timing when the player operates the counting button 20 to count the number of game balls (game value) owned by the player, or when the launch handle 15 is gripped and a game ball is shot out. When either of these operations is performed, the visual and illuminated notification that the number of game balls has been cleared ends 30 seconds after the operation. This allows the notification to end without delay after the player takes his seat, preventing the player from feeling uncomfortable and avoiding the game due to the visual and illuminated notification that the number of game balls has been cleared continuing for an extended period of time.

(a) in FIG. 127 is the timing when the power switch 164 is turned ON. Then, if there is no RWM abnormality, the notification of the acquisition upper limit device operation is started in (b). Specifically, the audio notification "acquisition upper limit device in operation" is repeatedly output, the screen notification displays "acquisition upper limit device has been activated, please clear the RWM", and the electric notification "frame lighting device 10 flashes red" is executed. As shown in FIG. 128 "acquisition upper limit device in operation, no RWM abnormality", the audio output device 9, frame lighting device 10, and first image display device 70 will notify the acquisition upper limit device operation. In this way, if no RWM abnormality (for example, a checksum abnormality of the main RAM 110c) is detected when the power is turned ON after the acquisition upper limit device is activated, the notification of the acquisition upper limit device operation will be executed, making it easier to understand the operation required to stop the acquisition upper limit device operation.

On the other hand, if an RWM abnormality (e.g., a checksum abnormality in the main RAM 110c) is detected when the power is turned on after the acquisition limit device is activated, the acquisition limit device activation notification is not initiated in (b) but an RWM abnormality notification is initiated. Specifically, the audio notification is "Please change the settings + siren" repeatedly output, the visual notification displays "Error, please change the settings", and the electric notification is "The frame lighting device 10 flashes red". Note that (c) is the timing when the power supply is cut off, and the RWM abnormality notification will continue until the power supply is cut off. In other words, the acquisition limit device activation notification will not be executed as long as the RWM abnormality notification is being executed.

For example, even if the power is turned off in (c) and then turned on without changing the settings, the RWM abnormality notification is started in (b), and if the power is turned off in (c) and then turned on with a setting change operation, the RMW clear process is also executed after the setting change process (the main RAM 110c is initialized), so the operation of the acquisition limit device is also stopped by the initialization of the main RAM 110c, and in this case, the operation notification of the acquisition limit device is not executed. In other words, if an RWM abnormality occurs after the acquisition limit device is activated, the operation notification of the acquisition limit device is not executed even if the power is turned on with a setting change operation or without a setting change operation. This encourages the main RAM 110c to be in an appropriate state, but since initialization to stop the acquisition limit device is not necessary when the power is turned on with a setting change operation, the operation efficiency can be improved by not notifying the operation of the acquisition limit device.

As for the notification mode, as shown in Figure 128, when the winning limit device is operating and there is an RWM abnormality, the audio output device 9, the frame lighting device 10, and the first image display device 70 will notify of an RWM abnormality. The first image display device 70 displays "Error" in red letters on a black background, and below that in white letters "Please change the settings." This makes it possible to promptly perform the setting change operation, and prevents playing from being performed while there is an abnormality in the RWM.

In addition, if priority is given to the notification of the operation of the acquisition limit device when there is an RWM abnormality, there is a concern that the necessary operation that the employee is prompted to perform will be the RWM clear operation, and the RWM abnormality will not be resolved; however, by prioritizing the RWM abnormality notification, such concerns can be eliminated.

Figures 129 and 130 are diagrams showing the relationship between the clearing of the number of game balls and the notification modes for each event (abnormality, etc.). Note that an abnormal number of winning balls error and an abnormal number of shot balls error are given as examples of each event (abnormality). Also, Figure 129 assumes the case where an abnormal number of winning balls is detected when the number of game balls is cleared and the power is turned on, and the case where an abnormal number of shot balls is detected when the number of game balls is cleared and the power is turned on, and the time chart can be read as "clearing the number of game balls" and "abnormal number of winning balls error", and "clearing the number of game balls" and "abnormal number of shot balls error".

Note that an abnormality in the number of winning balls is determined to be an abnormality when the difference between the number of winning balls reported and the number of balls passing through the winning passage is equal to or greater than a specified number (100), as indicated by the frame control board severe error notification control process, and an abnormality in the number of shot balls is determined to be an abnormality when the difference between the number of shot balls and the total number of returned balls is equal to or greater than a specified number (100), as indicated by the frame control board severe error notification control process, so it is difficult to imagine that such an abnormality would occur shortly after power was supplied. Therefore, Figures 129 and 130 assume a situation in which the power supply is cut off when an abnormality in the number of winning balls or the number of shot balls has occurred, and the power is turned on without these abnormalities being resolved.

First, we will explain "clearing the number of game balls" and "winning ball number abnormal error."
(a) is the timing when the power switch 164 is turned on. At this time, if the number of game balls is to be cleared, the number of game balls is cleared.

(b) is the timing when the frame control board 120 clears the number of game balls and the performance control board 130 receives a command to start clearing the number of game balls. Upon receiving this command, the performance control board 130 outputs an audio notification saying "The number of game balls has been cleared," displays an on-screen notification saying "H67 Number of game balls cleared," and causes the frame lighting device 10 to flash red with an electric light notification.

(c) is the timing when the frame control board error control process is executed, an abnormality in the number of winning balls is detected, and the performance control board 130 receives the command to designate an abnormality in the number of winning balls. Although the performance control board 130 receives the command to designate an abnormality in the number of winning balls, it is executing a game ball count clear notification, and since the priority order shown in FIG. 113 is also higher for game ball clearing, audio notification and electric light notification related to the abnormality in the number of winning balls are not initiated. Meanwhile, as for the visual notification, the third image display device 72 begins to display "H68 Abnormality in the number of winning balls".

(d) is the timing 5 seconds have passed since (b). At this timing, the audio notification that the number of game balls has been cleared ends. Meanwhile, the visual notification and the electric light notification continue. In addition, when the audio notification that the number of game balls has been cleared ends, a new audio notification of an abnormal error in the number of winning balls starts, "Please call an attendant + siren", and this is output repeatedly.

As shown in Figure 130, the notification modes (c) to (d) are the winning ball count abnormal error (c) to (d), the sound output device 9 and the frame lighting device 10 notify the player that the number of game balls has been cleared, and the first image display device 70 notifies the player that the number of game balls has been cleared and displays the "combination of the performance pattern 70a with the initial result of 123" (including the background image). Also, the third image display device 72 displays the icon image "H68 winning ball count abnormal".

(e) is the timing when the player operates the counting button 20 to count the number of game balls (game value) owned by the player, or when the launch handle 15 is gripped and a game ball is shot out. When either of these operations is performed, the visual and electric light notification that the number of game balls has been cleared ends 30 seconds after the operation. This allows the notification to end without delay after the player takes his seat, preventing the player from feeling uncomfortable and avoiding the game due to the visual and electric light notification that the number of game balls has been cleared continuing for an extended period of time.

As shown in Figure 130, the notification modes (d) to (e) are as follows: the sound output device 9 and the frame lighting device 10 notify the player of an abnormal winning ball count error, and the first image display device 70 notifies the player of the cleared number of game balls and displays the "combination of the initial result 123 performance pattern 70a" (including the background image). The third image display device 72 displays an icon image of "H68 abnormal winning ball count" (see Figure 115 for the display position). The design (color, etc.) of the icon image is the same as the icon image for the cleared number of game balls described above.

In this way, if an abnormality in the number of winning balls is detected when the game ball count is cleared and the power is turned on, a notification of the clearing of the number of winning balls, which has the higher priority, is made, while the third image display device 72 displays an icon image of "H68 Abnormal number of winning balls." This makes it possible to distinguish between the notifications even if the game ball count is cleared and an abnormality in the number of winning balls error is executed at the same time, thereby preventing a situation where the user is unable to recognize which event has occurred.

As described above, even if both the game ball count clear and the winning ball count abnormal error occur, both events can be appropriately notified by audio, visual, and electric alerts, which also leads to improved work efficiency for employees.

Note that in (d), a new audio notification of an abnormal number of winning balls error is started, but the audio notification of an abnormal number of winning balls error does not have to be started. Also, the visual notification of an abnormal number of winning balls error is started from (c), but it may start from (d). Also, the electric light notification of the cleared number of playing balls may be ended in (d), and the electric light notification of an abnormal number of winning balls error may be started.

Next, we will explain "clearing the number of game balls" and "abnormal error in the number of fired balls."
(a) is the timing when the power switch 164 is turned on. At this time, if the number of game balls is to be cleared, the number of game balls is cleared. (b) is the same as (b) of the winning ball number abnormality error.

(c) is the timing when the frame control board error control process is executed, an abnormality in the number of balls fired is detected, and the performance control board 130 receives a command to designate an abnormality in the number of balls fired. Although the performance control board 130 receives the command to designate an abnormality in the number of balls fired, it is executing a notification of the clearing of the number of game balls, and since the priority order shown in FIG. 113 is also given to clearing the number of game balls, audio and electric light notifications related to the abnormality in the number of balls fired error are not initiated. Meanwhile, as for the visual notification, a display such as "H69 Abnormal number of balls fired" is initiated on the third image display device 72.

(d) is the timing 5 seconds have passed since (b). At this timing, the audio notification that the number of game balls has been cleared ends. Meanwhile, the visual notification and the electric light notification continue. In addition, when the audio notification that the number of game balls has been cleared ends, a new audio notification of an abnormal error in the number of released balls starts, "Please call an attendant + siren", and this is output repeatedly.

As shown in Figure 130, the notification modes (c) to (d) are as follows: the sound output device 9 and the frame lighting device 10 notify the player that the number of game balls has been cleared, and the first image display device 70 notifies the player that the number of game balls has been cleared and displays the "combination of the performance pattern 70a with the initial result of 123" (including the background image). The third image display device 72 displays an icon image of "H69 Abnormal number of game balls fired."

(e) is the same as (e) of an abnormal error in the number of winning balls.
As shown in Fig. 130, the notification modes (d) to (e) are as follows: the sound output device 9 and the frame lighting device 10 notify the user of the abnormal error in the number of shot balls, and the first image display device 70 notifies the user of the cleared number of game balls and displays the "combination of the performance pattern 70a with the initial result of 123" (including the background image). The third image display device 72 displays an icon image of "H69 Abnormal Number of Shot Balls" (see Fig. 115 for the display position). The design (color, etc.) of the icon image is the same as the icon image of the cleared number of game balls described above.

In this way, if an abnormality in the number of balls fired is detected when the game ball count clear operation is performed and the power is turned on, a notification of clearing the number of game balls, which has the higher priority, is made, while the third image display device 72 displays an icon image of "H69 Abnormal number of balls fired." This makes it possible to distinguish between the notifications even if the game ball count clear and the abnormal number of balls fired error are performed at the same time, preventing the user from failing to recognize which event has occurred.

As described above, even if both the number of game balls cleared and an abnormal number of balls fired error occur, both events can be appropriately notified by audio, visual, and electric alerts, which also leads to improved work efficiency for employees.

In addition, in (d), a new audio notification of an abnormal number of balls fired error is started, but the audio notification of an abnormal number of balls fired error does not have to be started. Also, although the visual notification of an abnormal number of balls fired error is decided to start from (c), it may start from (d). Also, the electric light notification of the cleared number of game balls may end in (d) and an electric light notification of an abnormal number of balls fired error may start.

Figure 131 shows the information output and notification of various events. Note that the number of game balls exceeded and the activation of the acquisition limit device are given as examples of each event (abnormality).

(a) is the timing (during a jackpot) when the game value displayed on the game ball count display 135 exceeds "40,000 balls" as a result of the player's play. Note that, although it is stated here that the game value displayed on the game ball count display 135 exceeds "40,000 balls" as a result of the player's play, since this is the game value displayed on the game ball count display 135, the "40,000 balls" may also include the game value obtained by loaning game balls.

In (a), one byte of information is sent from the frame control board 120 to the U board 171, indicating that the number of game balls has exceeded the limit as a gaming machine error state, and is ultimately sent to the gaming machine information center. In addition, the frame control display 125 displays the error code "H23", indicating that the number of game balls has exceeded the limit. This makes it possible to confirm from the back side of the gaming machine that the number of game balls has exceeded the limit. The error code display goes out after a predetermined time has elapsed.

In (a), as an example, the game value displayed on the game ball count display 135 during a jackpot exceeds "40,000 balls", so the sound output device 9 outputs BGM during a jackpot, the first image display device 70 displays a jackpot performance, and the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 76 emit light during a jackpot. Even if the game value displayed on the game ball count display 135 during a jackpot exceeds "40,000 balls", these performance means do not notify the player that the number of game balls has exceeded the limit. In other words, from the player's perspective, the player cannot recognize that the number of game balls has exceeded the limit, and the player can enjoy playing the jackpot. On the other hand, as described above, one byte of information indicating the number of game balls exceeded is transmitted as an error state of the game machine, so that the administrator (game parlor, game machine information center) can grasp the necessary information.

The exceeding of the number of game balls may be notified using at least one of the sound output device 9, the first image display device 70, the third image display device 72, the fourth image display device 73, the frame lighting device 10, and the board lighting device 76. As an example, the game value displayed on the game ball count display 135 during a jackpot exceeds "40,000 balls", but this is not limited to this. In each of the low-probability non-time-saving game state, low-probability time-saving game state, and high-probability time-saving game state, a winning may be made when a variable display is being displayed, or when a customer waiting demo performance is being performed.

In addition, it was mentioned that the "40,000" may include game value obtained by lending out game balls, but even if the entire "40,000" is game value obtained by lending out, it may still be considered an excess over the number of game balls.

(b) is the timing when the maximum increase reaches "95,000" (during a jackpot). Note that this "95,000" does not include the gaming value obtained by lending out gaming balls. When the maximum increase reaches "95,000", the acquisition limit device is activated. Note that the timing of the acquisition limit device's activation for each situation when "95,000" is reached (during a jackpot, during a variable display, during a customer waiting demo performance) is as described above (see the explanation of step S28 of the main control board main processing).

When the winning limit device is activated, the audio output device 9 repeatedly outputs the sound "The winning limit device has been activated" (for 10 seconds) as an audio notification, the first image display device 72 displays "The winning limit device has been activated. Today's play has ended" as an on-screen notification (displayed until power is turned off), and the frame lighting device 10 flashes white (flashes white until power is turned off) as an illuminated notification. On the other hand, the frame control display 125 does not provide any notification corresponding to the activation of the winning limit device and remains hidden.

The display mode of the first image display device 70 will be described in detail below. The message "The winning limit device has been activated. Today's play is over" is displayed above the display area, and below that, a message such as "Please press the count button to count" is displayed to encourage the player to operate the count button 20. This allows the game value displayed on the game ball count display 135 to be recorded on the inserted member card or visitor card, reducing the number of cases where the player stops playing without operating the count button 20 and incurs a loss.

In addition, below the display saying "Press the count button to count," caution promotion images saying "Watch out, don't get addicted!" and "Watch out, don't forget to take your card!" are displayed. "Watch out, don't get addicted!" is a display encouraging players to avoid excessive playing, while "Watch out, don't forget to take your card!" is a display encouraging players to avoid forgetting to take their inserted membership card or visitor card. The display of a caution promotion image like "Watch out, don't get addicted!" can calm players down when they have gained a lot of gaming value and are feeling overjoyed. In addition, the display of a caution promotion image like "Watch out, don't forget to take your card!" can reduce the number of situations where players forget to take their cards and end up losing money.

The message "Please press the count button to count" may remain displayed until the count button 20 is operated. This makes it easier for the user to notice that the count button 20 has not been operated.

The background color of the first image display device 70 may be black, for example, with the various text images displayed in white, or the background color may be white with the various text images displayed in black (the background color and text color are different colors). However, when the acquisition limit device is activated, the audio notification ends in 10 seconds, the screen notification is displayed in a relatively small size, and the electric notification is only the frame lighting device 10 flashing white, so it is preferable to use a combination of white and black for the background color and text color. Such notifications with a limited amount of presentation can prevent players who are likely to have acquired a lot of game value from standing out too much. They can also prevent the player's motivation to play from being stimulated more than necessary.

The various text images may all be displayed at the same time, or may be displayed at different times. For example, first it may display "The winning limit device has been activated. Today's play is over" and "Please press the counting button to count", followed by "Be careful not to get addicted!" and "Be careful not to forget to take your cards!". Arranging the display in this way makes it more effective as each piece of information is more easily seen by the player.

Also, first, it is possible to display "The winning limit device has been activated. Today's game is over" and "Please press the counting button to count", and when the counting button 20 is operated, "Please press the counting button to count" is hidden and "Be careful not to get addicted!" and "Be careful not to forget to take your cards!" are displayed. This makes it possible to display information in accordance with the player's operation, and makes it more effective as each piece of information is more easily noticeable to the player.

In addition, in (a), a message such as "Please press the counting button to count" may be displayed, or a warning image such as "Be careful not to get addicted!" and a warning image such as "Be careful not to forget to take your card!" may be displayed.
Also, in (b), it is possible to prevent the display of messages such as "Press the count button to count" and caution images such as "Be careful not to get addicted!" and "Be careful not to forget to take your cards!". For example, it is possible that the player may change just before reaching (b). In such a case, the display of caution images and the like may be annoying to a player who started playing just before reaching (b). Therefore, it is possible to provide a detection means for detecting a change in player, etc., and prevent the display of caution images and the like when a change in player is detected.

Figure 132 is a diagram showing information output and notification modes for various events. As with Figure 131, an excess of game balls and activation of the maximum acquisition device are given as examples of each event (abnormality). Figure 132 is a diagram explaining an exceptional case in which an excess of game balls and activation of the maximum acquisition device occur at the same time.

In (a), gaming machine 1 is in a playable state (a so-called "empty machine"), and the maximum increase in the number of coins for that gaming machine 1 is "55,000." In (b), a player sits down to play that gaming machine 1. Furthermore, suppose that the player immediately wins a jackpot.

After that, in (c), successive jackpots occur due to the high probability time-saving game state (probability change), and in (d), the game value displayed on the game ball count display 135 becomes "40,000 balls" (the player has won 40,000 balls). In such a case, the number of game balls is exceeded, and since the maximum increase also reaches "95,000", the acquisition limit device is activated. Therefore, one byte of information indicating the number of game balls exceeded as a game machine error state is sent from the frame control board 120 of the game machine 1 to the U board 171, and one byte of information indicating that Bit 6 of the fraud detection state 1 is "1" is sent. Then, it is finally sent to the game machine information center.

It should be noted that either the 1-byte information indicating that the gaming machine has exceeded the number of game balls as an error state, or the 1-byte information indicating that Bit 6 of the fraud detection state 1 is "1", can be sent first, but it is rare for the number of game balls to exceed and the acquisition limit device to be activated at the same time. Basically, the number of game balls exceeds the number, and depending on the situation after that, the acquisition limit device will be activated. Therefore, it is preferable to basically follow the flow and send the 1-byte information indicating that the gaming machine has exceeded the number of game balls as an error state first, and then send the 1-byte information indicating that Bit 6 of the fraud detection state 1 is "1" later. This makes it possible to prevent confusion, for example, caused by the gaming machine information center receiving the 1-byte information indicating that Bit 6 of the fraud detection state 1 is "1" first.

Note that in Fig. 132, numbers such as "55,000", "40,000", and "95,000" are used for ease of explanation, but in actual play, due to differences in the number of winning balls for each winning slot, the numbers may slightly exceed the above numbers, and the number of game balls may exceed the limit and the winning limit device may be activated at the same time. Therefore, some error (an error slightly exceeding the above numbers) is included in the example in Fig. 132.

Figures 133 and 134 are diagrams showing the effects that occur when various events occur. As with Figures 131 and 132, as examples of each event (abnormality), we will explain the exceeding of the number of game balls and the activation of the acquisition limit device, and in particular, the relationship with the look-ahead effects will be explained. Note that explanations of parts common to Figures 131 and 132 will be omitted.

First, as described above, the gaming machine 1 is assumed to have a state immediately before the "number of game balls exceeded" and a state immediately before the "capture limit device" is activated. The state immediately before the "number of game balls exceeded" corresponds to a state in which the game value displayed on the game ball count display 135 exceeds "39,000", and the state immediately before the "capture limit device" is activated corresponds to a state in which the maximum increase exceeds "94,000".

More specifically, if the number of game balls is "over," the game value displayed on the game ball count display 135 will be "39,000" and the second jackpot game (10 rounds) will be executed; that is, the game value displayed on the game ball count display 135 will reach "40,000" as a result of the second jackpot game being executed; or the game value displayed on the game ball count display 135 will be "39,990" and a high-probability time-saving game state (low-probability time-saving game state or low-probability non-time-saving game state) in which game balls are more likely to enter each winning slot will start (during the variable display or customer waiting demo performance).

Similarly, in the case of a "capture limit device," cases such as the maximum increase being "94,000" and the second jackpot game (10 rounds) being played, i.e. the second jackpot game being played and the maximum increase reaching "95,000," or the maximum increase being "94,990" and a high-probability time-saving game state (low-probability time-saving game state, low-probability non-time-saving game state) in which game balls are more likely to enter each winning slot can be assumed (during the variable display, during the customer waiting demo performance). Note that the following explanation will be given using as an example a jackpot, when it is expected that the maximum increase is most likely to reach the above value.

(a) shows a jackpot win in a high-probability time-saving game state, and during the jackpot, a right-hit image is displayed to encourage the player to launch the ball toward the right-side game area. This is the timing when the game value displayed on the game ball count display 135 becomes "40,000 balls" due to winning the big prize slot 50 or the like during the jackpot. In other words, this is a situation in which the game value displayed on the game ball count display 135 becomes "40,000 balls" due to the execution of the second jackpot game. Although not shown in particular, it is assumed that a random number value for jackpot determination, which is determined to be a jackpot, is stored in the second special chart determination information reserve memory area of the main RAM 110c. The high-probability time-saving game state may be read as a low-probability time-saving game state. The high-probability time-saving game state may be read as a low-probability non-time-saving game state. In this case (when interpreted as a low probability non-time-saving game state), a random number value for determining a jackpot that is determined to be a jackpot is stored in the first special chart determination information reserve memory area of the main RAM 110c.

In the case of "over number of game balls", it is possible to execute a reserved consecutive win effect during a jackpot. That is, since a random number value for jackpot determination that is determined to be a jackpot is stored in the second special chart determination information reserved memory area of the main RAM 110c, a lottery is held to execute the reserved consecutive win effect with a predetermined probability, and if it is determined to be executed, the reserved consecutive win effect is executed. Specifically, as shown in (b), the movable effect device 77 (first movable member 77a and second movable member 77b) is operated in front of the first image display device 70, and the variable display corresponding to the reserved memory executed after the jackpot game ends notifies the player that it is a jackpot prior to the execution of the variable display. Then, in (c), the jackpot game ends, and the variable display corresponding to the reserved memory is executed to notify the player that it is a jackpot.

This means that there is no need to restrict the execution of predictive effects just because the number of game balls is about to be exceeded, and interest in the game can be maintained without restricting the freedom of the effects.

Although the execution of the reserved consecutive win effect during a jackpot has been explained as an example, the execution of a look-ahead effect when there is no jackpot game may also be permitted. For example, when the game value displayed on the game ball count display 135 is "39990", an icon change effect may be executed, or a continuous preview effect or a lamp change effect may be executed. On the other hand, the execution of a look-ahead effect may be restricted in a situation just before the "game ball count exceeds the limit".

(d) is the timing when a jackpot is won in the high-probability time-saving game state, the maximum increase number is "94,000", and the second jackpot game (10 rounds) begins. In other words, the second jackpot game is executed, and the maximum increase number reaches "95,000". Although not shown in the figure, it is assumed that a random number value for jackpot determination that is determined to be a jackpot is stored in the second special pattern determination information reserve memory area of the main RAM 110c. The high-probability time-saving game state may be read as a low-probability time-saving game state. The high-probability time-saving game state may be read as a low-probability non-time-saving game state. In this case (when reading as a low-probability non-time-saving game state), it is assumed that a random number value for jackpot determination that is determined to be a jackpot is stored in the first special pattern determination information reserve memory area of the main RAM 110c.

In the case of "acquisition limit device operation", the execution of the reserved consecutive win performance during the jackpot is limited. That is, although a random number value for jackpot determination that is determined to be a jackpot is stored in the second special chart determination information reservation memory area of the main RAM 110c, a lottery for the execution of the reserved consecutive win performance is not performed, and naturally the reserved consecutive win performance is not executed. Specifically, as shown between (d) and (e), the jackpot game ends without the movable performance device 77 (the first movable member 77a and the second movable member 77b) operating. Then, when the jackpot game ends, the acquisition limit device is activated at (f) and the notification described in FIG. 131 is executed. Also, the progress of the game (specific control processing) is not controlled, and the game cannot be continued any further.

(f) In a situation where it is impossible to play after that, if the reserved consecutive win effect is executed just because the random number value for determining a jackpot is stored in the reserved memory, the player will be disappointed that he or she cannot play even though he or she has won a jackpot. To address this issue, the execution of the reserved consecutive win effect can be restricted if the situation is immediately before the operation of the "winning limit device," thereby preventing the player from feeling disappointed.

Although the execution of the reserved consecutive win effect during a jackpot has been explained as an example, the execution of look-ahead effects when there is no jackpot may also be restricted. For example, when the maximum increase value is "94990", the icon change effect may be restricted, and the continuous preview effect and the lamp change effect may be restricted. On the other hand, the execution of look-ahead effects may be permitted even in a situation just before the "acquisition upper limit device is activated". This eliminates the need to determine whether the situation is just before the "acquisition upper limit device is activated", which is expected to reduce the control load.

The "restrictions" in the above-mentioned restriction on the execution of the reserved consecutive win effect during a jackpot include the following:
For example, the execution of the reserved consecutive performance during the big win is not performed at all (not executed),
For example, it becomes difficult to execute the reserved consecutive win performance during the jackpot (it may be executed with a low probability),
For example, in the case where there are multiple types of reserved consecutive win effects during a big win, reserved consecutive win effect A will not be executed, but reserved consecutive win effect B can be executed.
For example, when realizing the effect of consecutive reserved jackpots during a jackpot by operating the movable effect device 77 and changing the reserved icon, the movable effect device 77 may not be operated but the reserved icon may be allowed to change.

Similarly, the "restriction" in the restriction on the execution of pre-reading effects when a jackpot game is not being played includes the following:
For example, if the icon changes,
For example, icon change effects may not be performed at all (not executed),
For example, it may be difficult to execute an icon change effect (it may be executed with a low probability).
For example, certain icons (red icon, rainbow icon) in the icon change presentation may not be displayed (changed), but certain icons (blue icon, green icon) may be displayed (changed).
The same applies to restrictions on consecutive preview effects and lamp change effects. In a look-ahead type effect (e.g., an icon change effect, consecutive preview effects, lamp change effects), for example, the icon change effect may not be performed (executed) at all, but the consecutive preview effects and lamp change effects may be executed as a "restriction."

Figure 134 is a diagram explaining the presentation mode when "number of game balls exceeded" occurs during a jackpot, and when "capacity limit device activated" occurs during a jackpot.

(a) shows a jackpot win in a high probability time-saving game state, during which a right-hit image is displayed encouraging the player to launch the ball toward the right-hand game area. During the jackpot, the ball wins in the jackpot opening 50 and the like, and the game value displayed on the game ball count display 135 reaches "40,000 balls." During the jackpot, a character introduction effect (normal effect) that is displayed during the execution of an SP reach or SPSP reach is executed, and the jackpot game ends at (b). Note that the normal effect can also be executed in jackpot games other than those in which the "number of game balls exceeded" or the "acquisition limit device is activated." For example, it is an effect that can be executed in the first jackpot won after the opening of the game arcade.

(c) is the timing when a jackpot is won in the high probability time-saving game state, the maximum increase number is 94,000, and the second jackpot game (10 rounds) begins. In other words, the second jackpot game is played, and the maximum increase number reaches 95,000. In (d), the maximum increase number reaches 95,000.

In (d), a pre-notification message such as "You are hitting the jackpot. Please continue playing. After you hit the jackpot, the maximum winning device will be activated and your game will end" is displayed using a part of the display area of the first image display device 70. This pre-notification message is displayed in a manner that darkens (makes it difficult to see) the performance image displayed on the back side during the jackpot, and is displayed using almost the entire display area, making it easier for the player to recognize in advance that the maximum winning device will be activated, and preventing the player from being disappointed by the maximum winning device being activated unexpectedly. In addition, by including the message "You are hitting the jackpot. Please continue playing" in the pre-notification message, it is possible to prevent the player from stopping the shooting of the game balls just because the pre-notification message is displayed, which would cause the player to be at a disadvantage in not being able to win prize balls. In addition, by displaying the pre-notification message so as not to overlap with the right-hit image that encourages the player to shoot toward the right-side play area, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming unaware of the game technique while being aware in advance that the maximum winning device will be activated.

The advance notification message may be erased after a predetermined time (e.g., 10 seconds) has elapsed, or may continue to be displayed until the end of the jackpot, or may continue to be displayed until the player operates the effect button 17. The message may also be displayed using the entire display area of the first image display device 70.

In this case, when the jackpot game ends at (e), a completion effect is executed. In other words, only when the acquisition limit device is activated, a completion effect is executed, which notifies the player that no more gameplay is possible and congratulates the player who is likely to have acquired a lot of game value. The completion effect is expected to display, for example, special images that are different from the normal effects described above, or an image that grants a special title (for example, "Master"), and also to display a text image such as "Game will end soon" below the display area.

By executing the completion effect in this way, it is possible to give a sense of satisfaction to the player who activated the winning limit device. Also, by displaying a text image such as "Play will end soon", it is possible to prepare the player mentally compared to when notification (g) is suddenly executed after the end of the jackpot, and it is possible to smoothly lead to the end of the game even if notification (g) is executed after that.

Then, at (g), the maximum winning limit device is activated, and the notification described in FIG. 131 is executed. Furthermore, no progress control of the game (specific control processing) is performed, and the game cannot be continued any further. The execution period of the completion presentation carried out from (e) to (f) is expected to be, for example, three minutes. Furthermore, when the completion presentation ends at (f), the maximum winning limit device is immediately activated, and the game ends promptly.

The completion effect is executed after the end of the jackpot game by setting an execution period, but it may be executed from the timing when the maximum increase reaches "95,000". In addition, in the above-mentioned 1 type 2 type, when the maximum increase reaches "95,000" by winning a specific area in the small jackpot game (first round), the completion effect may be executed from the start of the jackpot game (second round onwards) that is executed after that. However, regardless of the specification, considering that the execution period of the effect is not determined depending on the winning status at the large winning port 50 during the jackpot game, it is preferable to execute the effect after the end of the jackpot game.

In addition, although in (a) a normal presentation is performed, a special jackpot presentation corresponding to "excessive game balls" may be executed. In this case, it is preferable that the game value "40,000 balls" does not include the game value obtained by lending game balls. In other words, since the purpose is to congratulate the player for having gained game value through hard work, it is preferable to exclude the game value obtained by lending even if a special jackpot presentation is executed.

In addition, multiple types of completion effects may be provided, and one of them may be selected and executed. In a gaming machine that has multiple levels of set values, the set value may be suggested depending on the type of completion effect being executed. Since it is not possible to continue playing after the completion effect is executed, the suggestion of the set value does not suggest useful information, but it can be said that there is merit in executing it because it is possible to know at what set value the winning limit device was activated.

Also, like the above-mentioned attention-promoting image, if a change of player is detected just before the acquisition limit device is activated, the completion effect may not be executed. This can prevent players who have just started playing from feeling uneasy (as they may wonder what the effect is for having completed).

(Content 1 of the invention described in this embodiment)
Here, in conventional gaming machines, there are gaming machines in which a player plays using a gaming value owned by the player. Among such gaming machines, there are some equipped with a control device that stores and updates the gaming value owned by the player (see, for example, JP 2021-083516 A). However, in the gaming machines described in the above patent documents, there was a problem that the convenience of the gaming store staff who check and inspect the control device that stores and updates the gaming value owned by the player was low.

◆The first configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine that allows a player to play using gaming value owned by the player, and includes a control device (frame control device 120A) that stores the gaming value owned by the player and controls the update of the gaming value, and a power supply device (power supply device 160A) that supplies power to the control device by operating a power switch. The control device has a specific display (frame control display 125) that can display the value of the gaming value owned by the player, and an operation unit (game ball count clear switch 121, game ball count clear switch 121 + game ball count clear button 121b) for clearing the gaming value owned by the player, and the distance from the power switch to the specific display is different from the distance from the power switch to the operation unit. This makes it possible to improve convenience for gaming store staff.

◆The second configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine that allows a player to play using gaming value owned by the player, and includes a control device (frame control device 120A) that stores the gaming value owned by the player and controls the update of the gaming value, and a power supply device (power supply device 160A) that supplies power to the control device by operating a power switch. The control device has a specific display (frame control display 125) that can display the value amount of the gaming value owned by the player, and an operation unit (ball removal switch 122, ball removal switch 122 + ball removal button 122b) that can perform an ejection operation to eject the gaming medium used in the game from the gaming machine, and the distance from the power switch to the specific display is different from the distance from the power switch to the operation unit. This makes it possible to improve convenience for gaming store staff.

◆A third configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine that allows a player to play using a gaming value owned by the player, and includes a control device (frame control device 120A) that stores the gaming value owned by the player and controls the update of the gaming value, a power supply device (power supply device 160A) that supplies power to the control device by operating a power switch, and a specific notification unit (speaker, display device, lighting device) that can issue a specific notification (error notification, etc.) indicating that a specific notification event has occurred, and the control device has a specific display (frame control display 125) that can display the value amount of the gaming value owned by the player, and an operation unit (error release switch 123, error release switch 123 + error release button 123b) for canceling the specific notification by the specific notification unit, and the distance from the power switch to the specific display is different from the distance from the power switch to the operation unit. This makes it possible to improve the convenience of gaming store staff.

◆A fourth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine that allows a player to play using a gaming value owned by the player, and includes a control device (frame control device 120A) that stores the gaming value owned by the player and controls the update of the gaming value. The control device has a control board (frame control board 120) on whose surface multiple electronic components are mounted, and a transparent board case (frame control board case 300) that houses the control board. The multiple electronic components include an electronic component (e.g., an integrated circuit) having a first identification (model number, manufacturer name, etc.) and a specific display (frame control display 125) having a second identification (model number, lot number, etc.) and capable of displaying the value amount of the gaming value owned by the player. The height from the surface of the control board to the second identification is higher than the height from the surface of the control board to the first identification. This makes it possible to improve the convenience of gaming store staff.

◆A fifth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine in which a game can be played using game value owned by a player, the gaming machine being equipped with a control device (frame control device 120A) that stores the game value owned by the player and controls the update of the game value, the control device having a control board (frame control board 120) on whose surface a plurality of electronic components are mounted, and a transparent board case (frame control board case 300) that houses the control board, the plurality of electronic components including a first electronic component (e.g., an integrated circuit) having a first identification mark (model number, manufacturer name, etc.), a second electronic component (e.g., an electrolytic capacitor) having a second identification mark (model number, manufacturer name, etc.), and a specific display (frame control display 125) having a third identification mark (model number, lot number, etc.) and capable of displaying the value amount of the game value owned by the player, the height from the surface of the control board to the third identification mark being lower than the height from the surface of the control board to the second identification mark. This will improve convenience for game store staff.

◆A sixth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine that allows a player to play using a gaming value owned by the player, and includes a control device (frame control device 120A) that stores the gaming value owned by the player and controls the update of the gaming value. The control device has a control board (frame control board 120) on whose surface a plurality of electronic components are mounted, and a transparent board case (frame control board case 300) that houses the control board. The plurality of electronic components include a control part (frame control unit 120m) that has a first identification (model number, manufacturer name, etc.) and can execute update control of the gaming value owned by the player, and a specific display (frame control display 125) that has a second identification (model number, lot number, etc.) and can display the value amount of the gaming value owned by the player, and the height from the surface of the control board to the first identification is different from the height from the surface of the control board to the second identification. This makes it possible to improve the convenience of gaming store staff.

◆The seventh configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine that allows a player to play using gaming value owned by the player, and includes a control device (frame control device 120A) that stores the gaming value owned by the player and controls the update of the gaming value. The control device has a specific display (frame control display 125) that can display the value of the gaming value owned by the player, and an operation unit (game ball count clear switch 121, game ball count clear switch 121 + game ball count clear button 121b) for clearing the gaming value owned by the player. While the control device does not have guidance information related to the specific display, guidance information related to the operation unit (engraved portion 310a of the "game ball count clear button" on the button cover member 310) is provided at a position corresponding to the operation unit. This makes it possible to improve convenience for gaming store staff.

◆The eighth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine that allows a player to play using gaming value owned by the player, and includes a control device (frame control device 120A) that stores the gaming value owned by the player and controls the update of the gaming value. The control device has a specific display (frame control display 125) that can display the amount of the gaming value owned by the player, and an operation unit (ball removal switch 122, ball removal switch 122 + ball removal button 122b) that can perform an ejection operation to eject the gaming medium used in the game from the gaming machine. While the control device does not have guidance information related to the specific display, guidance information related to the operation unit (the letters "ball removal button + arrow" on the operation guide sticker 309) is provided at a position corresponding to the operation unit. This makes it possible to improve the convenience of the gaming store staff.

◆A ninth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine in which a player can play using a gaming value owned by the player, the gaming machine being equipped with a control device (frame control device 120A) that stores the gaming value owned by the player and controls the update of the gaming value, and a specific notification unit (display device, lighting device) that can issue a specific notification (error notification, etc.) indicating that a specific notification event has occurred, the control device having a specific display (frame control display 125) that can display the value amount of the gaming value owned by the player, and an operation unit (error release switch 123, error release switch 123 + error release button 123b) for releasing the specific notification by the specific notification unit, and while the control device is not provided with guidance information related to the specific display, guidance information related to the operation unit (the letters "error release button + arrow" on the operation guide sticker 309) is provided at a position corresponding to the operation unit. This makes it possible to improve the convenience of gaming store staff.

◆A tenth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine in which a player can play using gaming value owned by the player, which is equipped with a control device (frame control device 120A) that stores the gaming value owned by the player and controls the update of the gaming value, and the control device has a control board (frame control board 120) on whose surface multiple electronic components are mounted, and a transparent board case (frame control board case 300) that houses the control board, and the multiple electronic components include a specific display (frame control display 125) that can display the value amount of the gaming value owned by the player, and a connector to which a specific wiring is connected, and the specific display is mounted near one end of the control board, and the connector is mounted near an end different from the one end of the control board. This makes it possible to improve convenience for gaming store staff.

◆An eleventh configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine that allows a player to play using gaming value owned by the player, and includes a control device (frame control device 120A) that stores the gaming value owned by the player and controls the update of the gaming value. The control device has a control board (frame control board 120) on whose surface multiple electronic components are mounted, and a board case (frame control board case 300) that houses the control board. The multiple electronic components include an operation unit (game ball count clear switch 121) for clearing the gaming value owned by the player, and a connector to which a specified wiring is connected, and the operation unit is mounted near one end of the control board, and the connector is mounted near an end different from the one end of the control board. This makes it possible to improve convenience for gaming store staff.

◆A twelfth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine in which a player can play using gaming value owned by the player, which is equipped with a control device (frame control device 120A) that stores the gaming value owned by the player and controls the update of the gaming value, and the control device has a control board (frame control board 120) on whose surface multiple electronic components are mounted, and a board case (frame control board case 300) that houses the control board, and the multiple electronic components include an operation unit (ball removal switch 122) that can perform an ejection operation to eject the gaming medium used in the game from the gaming machine, and a connector to which a specified wiring is connected, and the operation unit is mounted near one end of the control board, and the connector is mounted near an end different from the one end of the control board. This makes it possible to improve the convenience of gaming store staff.

◆A thirteenth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine in which a player can play using a gaming value owned by the player, the gaming machine being equipped with a control device (frame control device 120A) that stores the gaming value owned by the player and controls the update of the gaming value, and a specific notification unit (display device, lighting device) that can issue a specific notification (error notification, etc.) indicating that a specific notification event has occurred, the control device having a control board (frame control board 120) on whose surface a number of electronic components are mounted, and a board case (frame control board case 300) that houses the control board, the number of electronic components including an operation unit (error release switch 123) for canceling the specific notification by the specific notification unit, and a connector to which a specific wiring is connected, the operation unit being mounted near one end of the control board, and the connector being mounted near an end of the control board different from the one end. This makes it possible to improve the convenience of gaming store staff.

◆A fourteenth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine that allows a player to play using a gaming value owned by the player, and includes a control device (frame control device 120A) that stores the gaming value owned by the player and controls the update of the gaming value. The control device has a control board (frame control board 120) on whose surface a number of electronic components are mounted, a board case (frame control board case 300) that houses the control board, and an identification sticker (frame management number sticker 308) that is affixed to the board case. The identification sticker has an identification information display area (frame management information printing section 308b) that includes first information (two-dimensional code), second information (identification symbol indicating the manufacturer's name), and third information (management number), and an information entry area (opener entry field 308c, opening date entry field 308d) in which predetermined information can be entered. This makes it possible to improve the convenience of gaming store staff.

◆A fifteenth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine in which a player can play using gaming value owned by the player, the gaming machine being equipped with a control device (frame control device 120A) that stores the gaming value owned by the player and controls the updating of the gaming value, the control device comprising a control board (frame control board 120) having a plurality of electronic components mounted on its surface, a transparent board case (frame control board case 300) that houses the control board, and an opposing board case that faces the surface of the control board. The identification sticker (frame management number sticker 308) is attached to the wall (top panel 302), and the identification sticker has a first writing area (opener entry field 308c) in which the first information (opener) can be written, and a second writing area (opening date entry field 308d) in which the second information (opening date) different from the first information can be written, and between the first writing area and the second writing area, a see-through area (third transparent window portion 308g3) is provided that allows the electronic components mounted on the control board to be viewed. This makes it possible to improve convenience for game store staff.

◆A sixteenth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine in which a game can be played using a gaming value owned by a player, the gaming machine being equipped with a control device (frame control device 120A) that stores the gaming value owned by the player and controls the updating of the gaming value, the control device comprising a control board (frame control board 120) having a plurality of electronic components mounted on its surface, a transparent board case (frame control board case 300) that houses the control board, and an identification sticker (frame control board 120A) that is affixed to an opposing wall (top panel portion 302) of the board case that faces the surface of the control board. The identification sticker has an identification information display area (frame management information print area 308b) including first information (two-dimensional code), second information (identification symbol indicating manufacturer name), and third information (management number), and an information entry area (opener entry area 308c, opening date entry area 308d) in which predetermined information can be entered, and between the identification information display area and the information entry area, a see-through area (first light-transmitting window portion 308g1, second light-transmitting window portion 308g2) is provided that allows the electronic components mounted on the control board to be seen. This makes it possible to improve the convenience of game store staff.

◆A seventeenth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine that allows a player to play using a gaming value owned by the player, and includes a control device (frame control device 120A) that stores the gaming value owned by the player and controls the update of the gaming value. The control device has a control board (frame control board 120) on whose surface a number of electronic components are mounted, a board case (frame control board case 300) that houses the control board, and an identification sticker (frame management number sticker 308) that is affixed to an opposing wall (top plate portion 302) of the board case that faces the surface of the control board. The electronic components include an operation unit (number of game balls clear switch 121) for clearing the gaming value owned by the player, and the operation unit is mounted in a position on the control board that does not overlap the identification sticker in the front and rear. This makes it possible to improve the convenience of gaming store staff.

◆An 18th configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine in which a game can be played using game value owned by a player, the gaming machine being equipped with a control device (frame control device 120A) that stores the game value owned by the player and controls the update of the game value, the control device having a control board (frame control board 120) on whose surface a number of electronic components are mounted, and a board case (frame control board case 300) that houses the control board, the number of electronic components including an operation unit (number of game balls clear switch 121) for clearing the game value owned by the player, the board case being provided with an identification information display area including first information (two-dimensional code), second information (identification symbol indicating the manufacturer's name), and third information (management number), and a guidance information unit relating to the operation unit (engraved portion 310a of the ``number of game balls clear button'' on the button cover member 310) is provided in a position that does not overlap the identification information display area of the control device in the front or rear and corresponds to the operation unit. This will improve convenience for game store staff.

◆A 19th configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine in which a player can play using a gaming value owned by the player, the gaming machine being equipped with a control device (frame control device 120A) that stores the gaming value owned by the player and controls the update of the gaming value, and a specific notification section (display device, lighting device) that can issue a specific notification (error notification, etc.) indicating that a specific notification event has occurred, the control device having a control board (frame control board 120) on whose surface a plurality of electronic components are mounted, a board case (frame control board case 300) that houses the control board, and an identification sticker (frame management number sticker 308) that is affixed to an opposing wall (top plate section 302) of the board case that faces the surface of the control board, the plurality of electronic components including an operation section (error release switch 123) for canceling the specific notification by the specific notification section, and the operation section being mounted in a position on the control board that does not overlap the identification sticker in the front and rear. This makes it possible to improve the convenience of gaming store staff.

◆A twentieth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine in which a game can be played using a gaming value owned by a player, the gaming machine comprising a control device (frame control device 120A) that stores the gaming value owned by the player and controls the updating of the gaming value, and a specific notification unit (display device, lighting device) that can issue a specific notification (error notification, etc.) indicating that a specific notification event has occurred, the control device comprising a control board (frame control board 120) on whose surface a number of electronic components are mounted, and a board case (frame control board case 300) that houses the control board. ), the electronic components include an operation unit (error release switch 123) for releasing the specific notification by the specific notification unit, the circuit board case is provided with an identification information display area including first information (two-dimensional code), second information (identification symbol indicating the manufacturer's name), and third information (control number), and a guide information unit related to the operation unit (second guide print unit 309b2 with "error release button + arrow mark" printed on it) is provided in a position of the control device that does not overlap the identification information display area in the front and rear and corresponds to the operation unit. This makes it possible to improve convenience for game store staff.

◆A twenty-first configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine in which a player can play using a gaming value owned by the player, which includes a control device (frame control device 120A) that stores the gaming value owned by the player and controls the update of the gaming value, and the control device has a control board (frame control board 120) on whose surface a plurality of electronic components are mounted, a board case (frame control board case 300) that houses the control board, and an identification sticker (frame management number sticker 308) that is affixed to an opposing wall (top plate portion 302) of the board case that faces the surface of the control board, and the plurality of electronic components include an operation unit (ball removal switch 122) that can perform an ejection operation to eject the gaming medium used in the game out of the gaming machine, and the operation unit is mounted in a position on the control board that does not overlap the identification sticker in the front and rear. This makes it possible to improve the convenience of the gaming store staff.

◆A 22nd configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine in which a player can play using gaming value owned by the player, the gaming machine being equipped with a control device (frame control device 120A) that stores the gaming value owned by the player and controls the update of the gaming value, the control device having a control board (frame control board 120) on whose surface a number of electronic components are mounted, and a transparent board case (frame control board case 300) that houses the control board, the number of electronic components including an operation unit (ball removal switch 122) that can perform an ejection operation to eject the gaming medium used in the game from the gaming machine, the board case being provided with an identification information display area including first information (two-dimensional code), second information (identification symbol indicating the manufacturer's name), and third information (management number), and a guidance information unit relating to the operation unit (first guidance printing unit 309b1 with "ball removal button + arrow mark" printed on it) is provided in a position on the control device that does not overlap the identification information display area in the front or back and corresponds to the operation unit. This will improve convenience for game store staff.

◆A 23rd configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine that allows a player to play using a gaming value owned by the player, and includes a control device (frame control device 120A) that stores the gaming value owned by the player and controls the update of the gaming value. The control device has a control board (frame control board 120) on whose surface multiple electronic components are mounted, and a transparent board case (frame control board case 300) that houses the control board. The multiple electronic components include a first electronic component (integrated circuit, capacitor, etc.) that displays first identification information (model number, manufacturer name, etc.) and a second electronic component (frame control display 125) that displays second identification information (model number, lot number, number of game balls, etc.), and the display mode (font, color, size) of the first identification information and the display mode (font, color, size) of the second identification information are made different. This makes it possible to improve the convenience of gaming store staff.

◆A twenty-fourth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine in which a player can play using a gaming value owned by the player, which includes a control device (frame control device 120A) that stores the gaming value owned by the player and controls the update of the gaming value. The control device has a control board (frame control board 120) on whose surface a plurality of electronic components are mounted, and a transparent board case (frame control board case 300) that houses the control board. The plurality of electronic components include a first electronic component (e.g., an integrated circuit) that displays first identification information (model number, manufacturer name, etc.), a second electronic component (e.g., a capacitor) that displays second identification information (model number, lot number, number of game balls, etc.), and a third electronic component (frame control display 125) that displays third identification information (model number, lot number, number of game balls, etc.), and the display mode (font, color, size) of the first identification information and the display mode (font, color, size) of the third identification information are made different. This makes it possible to improve the convenience of gaming store staff.

◆A twenty-fifth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine in which a player can play using a gaming value owned by the player, which includes a control device (frame control device 120A) that stores the gaming value owned by the player and controls the update of the gaming value. The control device has a control board (frame control board 120) on whose surface a plurality of electronic components are mounted, and a transparent board case (frame control board case 300) that houses the control board. The plurality of electronic components include a first electronic component (e.g., an integrated circuit) that displays first identification information (model number, manufacturer name, etc.), a second electronic component (e.g., a capacitor) that displays second identification information (model number, lot number, number of game balls, etc.), and a third electronic component (frame control display 125) that displays third identification information (model number, lot number, number of game balls, etc.), and the display mode (font, color, size) of the second identification information and the display mode (font, color, size) of the third identification information are made different. This makes it possible to improve the convenience of gaming store staff.

◆A 26th configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine in which a game can be played using a gaming value owned by a player, the gaming machine comprising a first control device (main control device 110A) for controlling the progress of the game, and a second control device (frame control device 120A) for storing the gaming value owned by the player and for controlling updates to the gaming value, the first control device comprising a first control board (main control board 110) having a surface on which a number of electronic components are mounted, a first board case (main control board case 200) for housing the first control board, and an opposing wall of the first board case that faces the surface of the first control board. The second control device has a second control board (frame control board 120) on whose surface a plurality of electronic components are mounted, a second board case (frame control board case 300) that houses the second control board, and a second identification sticker (frame management number sticker 308) that is attached to the opposing wall (top board 302) of the second board case that faces the surface of the second control board, and the height from the surface of the first control board to the first identification sticker is different from the height from the surface of the second control board to the second identification sticker. This makes it possible to improve the convenience of game store staff.

◆A 27th configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine in which a game can be played using a gaming value owned by a player, the gaming machine comprising a first control device (main control device 110A) that controls the progress of the game, and a second control device (frame control device 120A) that stores the gaming value owned by the player and controls the update of the gaming value, the first control device having a first control board (main control board 110) having a plurality of electronic components mounted on its surface, a first board case (main control board case 200) that houses the first control board, and a first identification sticker (main management number sticker 208) affixed to an opposing wall (top plate portion 202) of the first board case that faces the surface of the first control board, the plurality of electronic components mounted on the first control board having The second control device includes a first control part (main control part 110m) capable of controlling the progress of the game, and the second control device has a second control board (frame control board 120) on whose surface a plurality of electronic components are mounted, a second board case (frame control board case 300) that houses the second control board, and a second identification sticker (frame management number sticker 308) that is affixed to the opposing wall (top plate part 302) of the second board case that faces the surface of the second control board, and the plurality of electronic components mounted on the second control board include a second control part (frame control part 120m) capable of executing update control of the game value owned by the player, and the height from the top end of the first control part to the first identification sticker is different from the height from the top end of the second control part to the second identification sticker. Therefore, it is possible to improve the convenience of game store staff.

◆A 28th configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine in which a game can be played using a gaming value owned by a player, the gaming machine comprising a first control device (main control device 110A) that controls the progress of the game, and a second control device (frame control device 120A) that stores the gaming value owned by the player and controls the update of the gaming value, the first control device having a first control board (main control board 110) on whose surface a plurality of electronic components are mounted, a first board case (main control board case 200) that houses the first control board, and a first identification sticker (main management number sticker 208) that is affixed to an opposing wall (top plate portion 202) of the first board case that faces the surface of the first control board, and includes a first connector (main inspection connector 116) for connecting a predetermined wiring, and the second control device has a second control board (frame control board 120) on whose surface a plurality of electronic components are mounted, a second board case (frame control board case 300) for housing the second control board, and a second identification seal (frame management number seal 308) affixed to the opposing wall (top plate portion 302) of the second board case that faces the surface of the second control board, and the plurality of electronic components mounted on the second control board include a second connector (frame inspection connector 126) for connecting a predetermined wiring, and the height from the top end of the first connector to the first identification seal is different from the height from the top end of the second connector to the second identification seal. This makes it possible to improve convenience for game store staff.

◆A 29th configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine in which a game can be played using a gaming value owned by a player, the gaming machine comprising a first control device (main control device 110A) that controls the progress of the game, and a second control device (frame control device 120A) that stores the gaming value owned by the player and controls the update of the gaming value, the first control device having a first control board (main control board 110) on whose surface a plurality of electronic components are mounted, a first board case (main control board case 200) that houses the first control board, and a first identification sticker (main management number sticker 208) that is affixed to an opposing wall (top plate portion 202) of the first board case that faces the surface of the first control board, the plurality of electronic components mounted on the first control board having predetermined information ( The second control device includes a first operation unit (RWM clear switch 111a) for clearing information related to the progress of the game, and the second control device has a second control board (frame control board 120) on whose surface a plurality of electronic components are mounted, a second board case (frame control board case 300) for housing the second control board, and a second identification sticker (frame management number sticker 308) attached to the opposing wall (top plate portion 302) of the second board case that faces the surface of the second control board, and the plurality of electronic components mounted on the second control board include a second operation unit (number of game balls clear switch 121) for clearing the game value stored in the second control device, and the height from the top end of the first operation unit to the first identification sticker is different from the height from the top end of the second operation unit to the second identification sticker. Therefore, it is possible to improve the convenience of game store staff.

◆A 30th configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine in which a game can be played using a game value owned by a player, the machine comprising a first control device (main control device 110A) that controls the progress of the game, a second control device (frame control device 120A) that stores the game value owned by the player and controls updates to the game value, and a power supply device (power supply device 160A) that supplies power to the first control device and the second control device by operating a power switch, the first control device storing a predetermined The second control device has a first operation unit (RWM clear switch 111a, RWM clear switch 111a + RWM clear button 111b) for clearing information (information related to the progress of the game, etc.), and the second control device has a second operation unit (game ball count clear switch 121, game ball count clear switch 121 + game ball count clear button 121b) for clearing the game value stored in the second control device, and the distance from the power switch to the first operation unit is different from the distance from the power switch to the second operation unit. This makes it possible to improve convenience for game store staff.

◆A thirty-first configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine in which a player can play using gaming value owned by the player, the gaming machine comprising a first control device (main control device 110A) that controls the progress of the game, and a second control device (frame control device 120A) that stores the gaming value owned by the player and controls the update of the gaming value, the first control device having a first control board (main control board 110) on whose surface a plurality of electronic components are mounted, a first board case (main control board case 200) that houses the first control board, and a first identification sticker (main management number sticker 208) that is affixed to an opposing wall (top plate portion 202) of the first board case that faces the surface of the first control board, the plurality of electronic components mounted on the first control board storing predetermined information (progress of the game) stored in the first control device. The second control device includes a first operation unit (RWM clear switch 111a) for clearing information related to the game (information related to the game, etc.), and the second control device has a second control board (frame control board 120) on whose surface a plurality of electronic components are mounted, a second board case (frame control board case 300) that houses the second control board, and a second identification sticker (frame management number sticker 308) that is affixed to the opposing wall (top plate portion 302) of the second board case that faces the surface of the second control board, and the plurality of electronic components mounted on the second control board include a second operation unit (ball removal switch 122) that can perform an ejection operation for ejecting the game medium used in the game from the gaming machine, and the height from the top end of the first operation unit to the first identification sticker and the height from the top end of the second operation unit to the second identification sticker are made different. Therefore, it is possible to improve the convenience of the gaming store staff.

◆A 32nd configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine in which a game can be played using a game value owned by a player, the machine comprising a first control device (main control device 110A) that controls the progress of the game, a second control device (frame control device 120A) that stores the game value owned by the player and controls updates to the game value, and a power supply device (power supply device 160A) that supplies power to the first control device and the second control device by operating a power switch, the first control device storing a predetermined The machine has a first operation unit (RWM clear switch 111a, RWM clear switch 111a + RWM clear button 111b) for clearing information (such as information related to the progress of the game), and the second control device has a second operation unit (ball removal switch 122, ball removal switch 122 + ball removal button 122b) that can perform an ejection operation to eject the game media used in the game from the gaming machine, and the distance from the power switch to the first operation unit is different from the distance from the power switch to the second operation unit. This makes it possible to improve convenience for game store staff.

◆A thirty-third configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine in which a game can be played using a gaming value owned by a player, the machine comprising a first control device (main control device 110A) that controls the progress of the game, a second control device (frame control device 120A) that stores the gaming value owned by the player and controls the updating of the gaming value, and a specific notification unit (display device, lighting device) that can issue a specific notification (error notification, etc.) that indicates the occurrence of a specific notification event, the first control device having a first control board (main control board 110) having a plurality of electronic components mounted on its surface, a first board case (main control board case 200) that houses the first control board, and a first identification sticker (main management number sticker 208) that is affixed to an opposing wall (top plate portion 202) of the first board case that faces the surface of the first control board, and The plurality of electronic components includes a first operation unit (RWM clear switch 111a) for clearing predetermined information (information related to the progress of the game, etc.) stored in the first control device, and the second control device has a second control board (frame control board 120) on whose surface a plurality of electronic components are mounted, a second board case (frame control board case 300) for housing the second control board, and a second identification seal (frame management number seal 308) affixed to an opposing wall (top plate portion 302) of the second board case that faces the surface of the second control board, and the plurality of electronic components mounted on the second control board include a second operation unit (error release switch 123) for canceling the specific notification by the specific notification unit, and the height from the top end of the first operation unit to the first identification seal is different from the height from the top end of the second operation unit to the second identification seal. This makes it possible to improve the convenience of game store staff.

◆A thirty-fourth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine in which a game can be played using a gaming value owned by a player, comprising a first control device (main control device 110A) that controls the progress of the game, a second control device (frame control device 120A) that stores the gaming value owned by the player and controls updates to the gaming value, a power supply device (power supply device 160A) that supplies power to the first control device and the second control device by operating a power switch, and a specific notification unit (display device, lighting device) that can issue a specific notification (error notification, etc.) indicating that a specific notification event has occurred. The first control device has a first operation unit (RWM clear switch 111a, RWM clear switch 111a + RWM clear button 111b) for clearing predetermined information (information related to the progress of the game, etc.) stored in the first control device, and the second control device has a second operation unit (error reset switch 123, error reset switch 123 + error reset button 123b) for canceling the specific notification by the specific notification unit, and the distance from the power switch to the first operation unit is different from the distance from the power switch to the second operation unit. This makes it possible to improve convenience for game store staff.

(Content 2 of the invention described in this embodiment)
Here, in conventional gaming machines, there are gaming machines in which a player plays a game using a gaming value owned by the player. Among such gaming machines, there are those equipped with a first control device that controls the progress of the game and a second control device that controls the storage and update of the gaming value owned by the player (see, for example, JP 2021-083516 A). However, the gaming machine described in the above patent document has a problem of low security.

◆A first configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine in which a game can be played using gaming value owned by a player, comprising a first control device (main control device 110A) that controls the progress of the game, and a second control device (frame control device 120A) that stores the gaming value owned by the player and controls the update of the gaming value, the first control device having a first control board (main control board 110) having a plurality of electronic components mounted on its surface, a transparent first board case (main control board case 200) that houses the first control board, and a first identification sticker (main management number sticker 208) affixed to an opposing wall (top plate portion 202) of the first board case that faces the surface of the first control board, and the second control device, The device has a second control board (frame control board 120) on whose surface a plurality of electronic components are mounted, a transparent second board case (frame control board case 300) that houses the second control board, and a second identification sticker (frame management number sticker 308) that is affixed to the opposing wall (top plate portion 302) of the second board case that faces the surface of the second control board, the first identification sticker having a see-through area that allows the electronic components mounted on the first control board to be seen through, the second identification sticker having a see-through area that allows the electronic components mounted on the second control board to be seen through, and the see-through area of the second identification sticker has no predetermined pattern added, while the see-through area of the first identification sticker has a predetermined pattern added. This makes it possible to improve the security of the gaming machine.

◆A second configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine in which a game can be played using a gaming value owned by a player, the gaming machine comprising a first control device (main control device 110A) that controls the progress of the game, and a second control device (frame control device 120A) that stores the gaming value owned by the player and controls the update of the gaming value, the first control device having a first control board (main control board 110) on whose surface a plurality of electronic components are mounted, a transparent first board case (main control board case 200) that houses the first control board, and a first identification sticker (main management number sticker 208) that is affixed to an opposing wall (top plate portion 202) of the first board case that faces the surface of the first control board, The second control device has a second control board (frame control board 120) on whose surface a plurality of electronic components are mounted, a transparent second board case (frame control board case 300) that houses the second control board, and a second identification sticker (frame management number sticker 308) that is affixed to the opposing wall (top plate portion 302) of the second board case that faces the surface of the second control board, the first identification sticker having a see-through area that allows the electronic components mounted on the first control board to be seen through, the second identification sticker having a see-through area that allows the electronic components mounted on the second control board to be seen through, and the transparency of the see-through area of the first identification sticker and the transparency of the see-through area of the second identification sticker are made different. This makes it possible to improve the security of the gaming machine.

◆A third configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine in which a player can play using a gaming value owned by the player, the gaming machine being equipped with a first control device (main control device 110A) that controls the progress of the game, and a second control device (frame control device 120A) that stores the gaming value owned by the player and controls the update of the gaming value, the first control device being a first control board (main control board 110) on whose surface a number of electronic components are mounted, a transparent first board case (main control board case 200) that houses the first control board, and a first control unit (main control board case 200) of the first board case. The second control device has a first identification sticker (main control number sticker 208) attached to the opposing wall (top plate 202) facing the surface of the control board, and the second control device has a second control board (frame control board 120) on whose surface a plurality of electronic components are mounted, a transparent second board case (frame control board case 300) that houses the second control board, and a second identification sticker (frame control number sticker 308) attached to the opposing wall (top plate 302) of the second board case that faces the surface of the second control board, and the area of the first identification sticker and the area of the second identification sticker are made different. This makes it possible to improve the security of the gaming machine.

◆A fourth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine in which a game can be played using a gaming value owned by a player, the gaming machine comprising a first control device (main control device 110A) that controls the progress of the game, and a second control device (frame control device 120A) that stores the gaming value owned by the player and controls the update of the gaming value, the first control device having a first control board (main control board 110) on whose surface a number of electronic components are mounted, a first board case (main control board case 200) that houses the first control board, and a first identification sticker (main management number sticker 208) that is affixed to an opposing wall (top plate portion 202) of the first board case that faces the surface of the first control board, and the first identification sticker has a number for writing predetermined information (person who opened the game, date of opening) on the first control board. The second control device has a second control board (frame control board 120) on whose surface a plurality of electronic components are mounted, a second board case (frame control board case 300) that houses the second control board, and a second identification sticker (frame management number sticker 308) that is affixed to the opposing wall (top plate 302) of the second board case that faces the surface of the second control board, and the second identification sticker has a second information writing area (opener writing area 308c, opening date writing area 308d) for writing predetermined information (opener, opening date), and the number of the first information writing areas provided on the first identification sticker is different from the number of the second information writing areas provided on the second identification sticker. This makes it possible to improve the security of the gaming machine.

◆A fifth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine in which a player can play using gaming value owned by the player, the gaming machine comprising a first control device (main control device 110A) that controls the progress of the game, and a second control device (frame control device 120A) that stores the gaming value owned by the player and controls the update of the gaming value, the first control device having a first control board (main control board 110) on whose surface a number of electronic components are mounted, and a first board case (main control board case 200) that houses the first control board, the first board case having a first control board and a second control device (frame control device 120A) that stores the first control board and a second control device (frame control device 120A) that stores the first control board and a third control device (frame control device 120A) that stores the third control board and a fourth control device (frame control device 120A) that stores the fourth ...). The second control device has a second control board (frame control board 120) on whose surface a plurality of electronic components are mounted, and a second board case (frame control board case 300) that houses the second control board. The second board case is provided with a second crimping portion (frame crimping portion 304A) for sealing the second board case that houses the second control board. The number of the first crimping portions provided on the first board case is different from the number of the second crimping portions provided on the second board case. This makes it possible to improve the security of the gaming machine.

(Content 3 of the invention described in this embodiment)
Here, in conventional gaming machines, there are gaming machines in which a player plays using a gaming value owned by the player. Some of these gaming machines are equipped with a notification means for notifying the occurrence of a predetermined event when the predetermined event occurs (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2021-16405). However, in the gaming machines described in the above patent documents, there is room for improvement in appropriately notifying the occurrence of the predetermined event.

(A) A first configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine in which a player can play using gaming value owned by the player, the machine comprising a first control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, a second control means (frame control board 120) for storing the gaming value owned by the player and for controlling updates to the gaming value, and an alarm means (audio output device 9, image display devices 70-73, frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 76), the first control means storing a predetermined area (e.g., main RAM 11 The second control means is capable of performing control to clear the predetermined information stored in the frame control RAM 120c (RWM clear processing), the second control means is capable of performing control to clear the game value (clearing the number of game balls), and the notification means is capable of performing a first notification (RWM clear notification) in response to the clearing of the predetermined information and a second notification (number of game balls clear notification) in response to the clearing of the game value, and the first notification and the second notification have different notification priorities. Therefore, notification of the occurrence of a predetermined event can be performed in an optimal manner.

(B) A second configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine in which a player can play using a gaming value owned by the player, which includes a first control means (main control board 110) that can restore the state before the power supply is stopped when the power supply is restored after the power supply is stopped, a second control means (frame control board 120) that stores the gaming value owned by the player and controls the update of the gaming value, and an alarm means (audio output device 9, image display devices 70 to 73, frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 76), and the second control means is capable of controlling the clearing of the gaming value (clearing the number of gaming balls), and the alarm means is capable of issuing a first alarm (power restoration alarm) in response to the restoration and a second alarm (number of gaming balls clear alarm) in response to the clearing of the gaming value, and the first alarm and the second alarm have different priorities. Therefore, the occurrence of a predetermined event can be preferably alarmed.

(C) A third configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine in which a game can be played using a game value owned by a player, comprising a first control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, a second control means (frame control board 120) that stores the game value owned by the player and controls the update of the game value, and an alarm means (audio output device 9, image display devices 70-73, frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 76), wherein the first control means is capable of performing control related to settings (setting change processing, setting confirmation processing), the second control means is capable of performing control to clear the game value (clearing the number of game balls), and the alarm means is capable of performing a first alarm (setting change alarm, setting confirmation alarm) in response to the control related to the setting and a second alarm (number of game balls clear alarm) in response to the clearing of the game value, and the first alarm and the second alarm have different priorities. This allows for optimal notification of the occurrence of a specific event.

(D) A fourth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine in which a game can be played using a game value owned by a player, the gaming machine comprising a first control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, a second control means (frame control board 120) for storing the game value owned by the player and controlling the update of the game value, a detection means (first magnetic detection sensor 53a, second magnetic detection sensor 53b) for detecting magnetism, and an alarm means (audio output device 9, image display devices 70-73, frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 76), the second control means being capable of controlling the clearing of the game value (clearing the number of game balls), the alarm means being capable of making a first alarm (magnet detection error alarm) in response to detection by the detection means and a second alarm (number of game balls cleared alarm) in response to the clearing of the game value, and the first alarm and the second alarm having different priorities. This allows for optimal notification of the occurrence of a specific event.

(E) A fifth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine in which a game can be played using a game value owned by a player, the machine comprising a first control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, a second control means (frame control board 120) for storing the game value owned by the player and controlling the update of the game value, a detection means (radio wave detection sensor 54a) for detecting radio waves, and an alarm means (audio output device 9, image display devices 70-73, frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 76), the second control means being capable of controlling the clearing of the game value (clearing the number of game balls), the alarm means being capable of making a first alarm (unauthorized radio wave detection error alarm) in response to detection by the detection means and a second alarm (number of game balls clear alarm) in response to the clearing of the game value, and the first alarm and the second alarm having different priorities. This allows for optimal notification of the occurrence of a specific event.

(F) A sixth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine in which a player can play using game value owned by the player, comprising a first control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, a second control means (frame control board 120) for storing the game value owned by the player and controlling the update of the game value, and a detection means (general winning port sw43a, first start port sw45a, second start port sw47a, big winning port sw50a, out port sw3) for detecting a gaming medium corresponding to the game value. 9a) and notification means (audio output device 9, image display devices 70-73, frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 76), the second control means is capable of performing control to clear the game value (clearing the number of game balls), the notification means is capable of performing a first notification (winning ball count abnormality error notification) in response to detection by the detection means, and a second notification (game ball count clear notification) in response to the clearing of the game value, and the first notification and the second notification have different notification priorities. Therefore, notification of the occurrence of a specified event can be performed in an optimal manner.

(G) A seventh configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine in which a game can be played using a game value owned by a player, comprising a first control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, a second control means (frame control board 120) for storing the game value owned by the player and controlling the update of the game value, a detection means (subtraction port SW91C) for detecting the game medium corresponding to the game value being released into the game area, and an alarm means (sound The device is equipped with a voice output device 9, image display devices 70-73, frame lighting device 10, and board lighting device 76), the second control means is capable of performing control to clear the game value (clearing the number of game balls), the notification means is capable of performing a first notification (anomaly error notification of the number of shot balls) in response to detection by the detection means, and a second notification (a notification that the number of game balls has been cleared) in response to the clearing of the game value, and is characterized in that the first notification and the second notification have different notification priorities. Therefore, notification of the occurrence of a specified event can be performed in an optimal manner.

(H) An eighth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine in which a game can be played using game value owned by a player, comprising a first control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, a second control means (frame control board 120) for storing the game value owned by the player and for controlling the update of the game value, an openable and closable door body (inner frame 3, glass frame 4), detection means for detecting the state of the door body (glass frame open detection switch 31a, inner frame open detection switch 31b), and an alarm means (sound The device is equipped with a voice output device 9, image display devices 70-73, frame lighting device 10, and board lighting device 76), the second control means is capable of performing control to clear the game value (clearing the number of game balls), the notification means is capable of performing a first notification (glass frame opening error notification, inner frame opening error notification) in response to detection by the detection means, and a second notification (game ball count clear notification) in response to the clearing of the game value, and is characterized in that the first notification and the second notification have different notification priorities. Therefore, notification of the occurrence of a specified event can be performed in an optimal manner.

(I) A ninth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine in which a game can be played using game value owned by a player, comprising a first control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, a second control means (frame control board 120) capable of communicating with the first control means, storing the game value owned by the player and controlling updates to the game value, and a detection means (main control board 110, frame control board 120) for detecting when communication between the first control means and the second control means is not possible. and notification means (audio output device 9, image display devices 70-73, frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 76), the second control means is capable of performing control to clear the game value (clearing the number of game balls), the notification means is capable of performing a first notification (notification of an internal gaming machine communication abnormality error) in response to detection by the detection means, and a second notification (notification of the number of game balls cleared) in response to the clearing of the game value, and the first notification and the second notification have different notification priorities. Therefore, notification of the occurrence of a specified event can be performed in an optimal manner.

(J) A tenth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine that allows a player to play using a gaming value owned by the player, comprising a control means (frame control board 120) that stores the gaming value owned by the player and controls the update of the gaming value, a detection means (frame control board 120) that detects that the gaming machine cannot communicate with the outside of the gaming machine (dedicated unit 170), and an alarm means (audio output device 9, image display devices 70-73, frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 76), the control means being capable of performing control to clear the gaming value (clearing the number of gaming balls), the alarm means being capable of performing a first alarm (communication line abnormality error alarm) in response to detection by the detection means, and a second alarm (number of gaming balls clear alarm) in response to the clearing of the gaming value, and the first alarm and the second alarm have different priorities. Therefore, the occurrence of a predetermined event can be preferably notified.

(K) An eleventh configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine in which a game can be played using a game value owned by a player, comprising a first control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, a second control means (frame control board 120) for storing the game value owned by the player and controlling the update of the game value, and an alarm means (audio output device 9, image display devices 70-73, frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 76), wherein the second control means is capable of performing discharge control (frame control board ball removal operation processing) for discharging a game medium corresponding to the game value outside the gaming machine and control for clearing the game value (game ball count clearing), and the alarm means is capable of performing a first alarm (ball removal operation in progress alarm) in response to the discharge control and a second alarm (game ball count clear alarm) in response to the clearing of the game value, and the first alarm and the second alarm have different priorities. This allows for optimal notification of the occurrence of a specific event.

(L) A twelfth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine in which a game can be played using a gaming value owned by a player, comprising a first control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, a second control means (frame control board 120) for storing the gaming value owned by the player and controlling the update of the gaming value, a detection means (main control board 110) for detecting specific information (e.g., a maximum increase number) that is counted when a counting condition is met, and an alarm means (audio output device). The device is equipped with a plurality of control means (9, image display devices 70-73, frame lighting device 10, and board lighting device 76), the second control means is capable of performing control to clear the game value (clearing the number of game balls), the notification means is capable of performing a first notification (announcement that the acquisition limit device has been activated) in response to detection by the detection means, and a second notification (announcement that the number of game balls has been cleared) in response to the clearing of the game value, and the first notification and the second notification have different notification priorities. Therefore, notification of the occurrence of a specified event can be performed in an optimal manner.

(M) A thirteenth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine in which a game can be played using game value owned by a player, comprising a first control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, a second control means (frame control board 120) for storing the game value owned by the player and for controlling the update of the game value, an openable and closable door body (inner frame 3, glass frame 4), detection means for detecting the state of the door body (glass frame open detection switch 31a, inner frame open detection switch 31b), and an alarm means (audio output device 9, image The gaming machine is equipped with a plurality of display devices (image display devices 70-73, frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 76), the second control means is capable of performing discharge control (frame control board ball removal operation processing) for discharging gaming media corresponding to the gaming value from the gaming machine, and the notification means is capable of performing a first notification (glass frame opening error notification, inner frame opening error notification) in response to detection by the detection means and a second notification (ball removal operation in progress) in response to the discharge control, and is characterized in that the first notification and the second notification have different notification priorities. Therefore, notification of the occurrence of a specified event can be performed in an optimal manner.

(S) A fourteenth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine in which a game can be played using a game value owned by a player, the gaming machine is equipped with a first control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, a second control means (frame control board 120) that stores the game value owned by the player and controls the update of the game value, and a notification means (audio output device 9, image display devices 70-73, frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 76), and is capable of clearing the predetermined information stored in the first control means and the predetermined information stored in the second control means based on the fact that a specific operation (RWM clear operation) has been performed, and the notification means is capable of making a notification according to the specific operation when the specific operation is performed, without making a notification in a manner that distinguishes between the fact that the predetermined information stored in the first control means has been cleared and the fact that the predetermined information stored in the second control means has been cleared. Therefore, it is possible to preferably notify the occurrence of a predetermined event.

(a) A fifteenth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine in which a game can be played using a gaming value owned by a player, comprising a control means (frame control board 120) for storing the gaming value owned by the player and controlling the update of the gaming value, an openable and closable door body (inner frame 3, glass frame 4), a detection means for detecting the state of the door body (glass frame open detection switch 31a, inner frame open detection switch 31b), and an alarm means (audio output device) capable of issuing an alarm (glass frame open error, inner frame open error) in response to detection by the detection means. The gaming machine is equipped with a control unit 9, image display units 70-73, frame lighting unit 10, and board lighting unit 76, the control unit being capable of performing discharge control (frame control board ball removal operation processing) for discharging gaming media corresponding to the gaming value from the gaming machine, and the notification unit being capable of issuing a notification in response to detection by the detection unit in both cases where the detection unit detects when the discharge control is being performed and where the detection unit detects when the discharge control is not being performed. Therefore, it is possible to preferably issue a notification of the occurrence of a specified event.

(b) A sixteenth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine in which a game can be played using a gaming value owned by a player, comprising a first control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, a second control means (frame control board 120) capable of communicating with the first control means, storing the gaming value owned by the player and controlling updates to the gaming value, a detection means (main control board 110, frame control board 120) for detecting that the first control means and the second control means are unable to communicate, and a detection means (main control board 110, frame control board 120) for detecting that the first control means and the second control means are unable to communicate, and The first control means is capable of performing control related to the settings (setting change processing, setting confirmation processing), and the notification means is characterized in that while the control related to the settings is being performed, the notification means does not provide a notification in response to the detection even if the detection means detects something, but can provide a notification in response to the detection when the control related to the settings is finished. Therefore, it is possible to preferably provide a notification of the occurrence of a predetermined event.

(h) A seventeenth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine in which a player can play using a gaming value owned by the player, comprising a first control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, a second control means (frame control board 120) for storing the gaming value owned by the player and controlling the update of the gaming value, and a notification means (audio output device 9, image display devices 70-73, frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 76), and the notification means is capable of issuing a first notification (e.g., setting change notification, setting confirmation notification) in response to a first event in which it is not possible to control the progress of the game, and a second notification (e.g., game ball count clear notification, RWM clear notification) in response to a second event in which it is possible to control the progress of the game, and is characterized in that the first notification and the second notification have different priorities. Therefore, notification of the occurrence of a predetermined event can be preferably issued.

(i) The eighteenth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine that allows a player to play using a gaming value owned by the player, and includes a first control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, a second control means (frame control board 120) that stores the gaming value owned by the player and controls the update of the gaming value, and a notification means (audio output device 9, image display devices 70-73, frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 76), and the notification means is capable of issuing a first notification (e.g., setting change notification, setting confirmation notification) in response to a first event that makes it impossible to control the progress of the game, and a second notification (e.g., winning limit device activation notification, ball removal operation notification) in response to a second event that makes it impossible to control the progress of the game, and is characterized in that the first notification and the second notification have different priorities. Therefore, notification of the occurrence of a predetermined event can be preferably issued.

(j) A 19th configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine in which a player can play using a gaming value owned by the player, comprising a first control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, a second control means (frame control board 120) for storing the gaming value owned by the player and controlling the update of the gaming value, and a notification means (audio output device 9, image display devices 70-73, frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 76), and the notification means is capable of issuing a first notification (e.g., notification of the number of game balls cleared) in response to a first event that can control the progress of the game, and a second notification (e.g., notification of RWM clear, power restoration notification) in response to a second event that can control the progress of the game, and is characterized in that the first notification and the second notification have different priorities. Therefore, notification of the occurrence of a predetermined event can be preferably issued.

(k) As a twentieth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine in which a game can be played using a game value owned by a player, the machine is provided with a first control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, a second control means (frame control board 120) for storing the game value owned by the player and for controlling the update of the game value, and an alarm means (audio output device 9, image display devices 70-73, frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 76), and the alarm means issues a first alarm in response to a first event (for example, an abnormal error in the number of winning balls The device is capable of issuing a first notification in response to a second event different from the first event (e.g., notification of a cleared number of game balls, notification of a change in settings, notification of a confirmation of settings), and a second notification in response to a second event different from the first event (e.g., notification of the number of game balls cleared, notification of a change in settings, notification of a confirmation of settings), and the device is characterized in that the first notification can be made without resuming when the power supply is restored after the power supply is cut off while the first event is occurring, and the second notification can be made with the power supply being cut off while the second event is occurring and being resumed when the power supply is restored. Therefore, notification of the occurrence of a specified event can be made in an ideal manner.

(l) A twenty-first configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine in which a game can be played using a game value owned by a player, the machine comprising a first control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, a second control means (frame control board 120) for storing the game value owned by the player and for controlling the update of the game value, and a notification means (audio output device 9, image display devices 70-73, frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 76), the notification means being configured to issue a first notification ( For example, a notification that the number of game balls has been cleared) and a second notification in response to a second event different from the first event (for example, a setting change notification, a setting confirmation notification) can be made, and the first notification can be resumed when the power supply is restored after the power supply is cut off while the first event is occurring, and the second notification can be resumed when the power supply is restored after the power supply is cut off while the second event is occurring. Therefore, it is possible to preferably make a notification of the occurrence of a predetermined event.

(m) A 22nd configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine in which a game can be played using a game value owned by a player, the machine comprising a first control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, a second control means (frame control board 120) for storing the game value owned by the player and for controlling updates to the game value, and a notification means (audio output device 9, image display devices 70-73, frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 76), the notification means providing a first notification in response to a first event (e.g., a winning ball The device is capable of issuing a first notification in response to a first event (a notification of an abnormal error in the number of shots) and a second notification in response to a second event different from the first event (e.g., a notification of an abnormal error in the number of shots, a notification of an abnormal RWM error), and the device is characterized in that the first notification can be made without resuming when the power supply is restored after the power supply is cut off while the first event is occurring, and the second notification can be made without resuming when the power supply is restored after the power supply is cut off while the second event is occurring. Therefore, notification of the occurrence of a specified event can be made in an optimal manner.

(n) A 23rd configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine in which a game can be played using a game value owned by a player, the machine comprising a first control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, a second control means (frame control board 120) for storing the game value owned by the player and controlling the update of the game value, and a display means (frame control display 125), the display means displaying first information corresponding to a first event (for example, error code "H66" indicating an illegal radio wave detection error, error code "H68" indicating an abnormal error in the number of winning balls, error code "H69" indicating an abnormal error in the number of fired balls) and , and second information corresponding to a second event different from the first event (for example, error code "H68" indicating that the number of game balls has been cleared, error code "H64" indicating a glass frame opening error, error code "H65" indicating an inner frame opening error), and the display of the first information can be prevented from being resumed when the power supply is restored after the power supply is cut off while the first information is being displayed, and the display of the second information can be resumed when the power supply is restored after the power supply is cut off while the second information is being displayed. Therefore, it is possible to preferably notify the occurrence of a predetermined event.

(o) A 24th configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine in which a game can be played using a game value owned by a player, the machine comprising a first control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, a second control means (frame control board 120) for storing the game value owned by the player and controlling the update of the game value, and a display means (frame control display 125), the display means displaying first information corresponding to a first event (for example, an error code "H68" indicating that the number of game balls has been cleared) and a second event different from the first event. The display device is characterized in that it is capable of displaying a second information corresponding to the event (for example, an error code "H64" indicating a glass frame open error, an error code "H65" indicating an inner frame open error), and that the display of the first information can be resumed when the power supply is restored after the power supply is cut off while the first information is being displayed, and that the display of the second information can be resumed when the power supply is restored after the power supply is cut off while the second information is being displayed. Therefore, it is possible to preferably notify the occurrence of a predetermined event.

(p) A twenty-fifth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine in which a game can be played using a game value owned by a player, the machine comprising a first control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, a second control means (frame control board 120) for storing the game value owned by the player and controlling updates to the game value, and a display means (frame control display 125), the display means displaying first information corresponding to a first event (for example, an error code "H66" indicating an illegal radio wave detection error) and a second event different from the first event. and second information corresponding to the error (for example, error code "H68" indicating an abnormal error in the number of winning balls, and error code "H69" indicating an abnormal error in the number of shot balls), and the display of the first information can be prevented from being resumed when the power supply is restored after the power supply is cut off while the first information is being displayed, and the display of the second information can be prevented from being resumed when the power supply is restored after the power supply is cut off while the second information is being displayed. This makes it possible to preferably notify the occurrence of a specified event.

(Content 4 of the invention described in this embodiment)
Here, in conventional gaming machines, there are gaming machines in which a player plays using a gaming value owned by the player. Among such gaming machines, there are some that perform a gaming ball number clearing process to clear the gaming value when power is supplied to the gaming machine (for example, see JP 2021-104306 A). However, if the gaming ball number clearing process is performed when power is supplied, there is a risk that the control process of the control means will become complicated.

(N) A first configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine that is equipped with a movable presentation means (movable presentation device 77) that can operate in a predetermined manner and that allows a player to play using game value owned by the player, comprising a first control means (main control board 110) that can restore the state to the state before the power supply was stopped when the power supply is restored after the power supply is stopped, a second control means (frame control board 120) that stores the game value owned by the player and controls the update of the game value, a third control means (presentation control board 130) that controls the initial operation of the movable presentation means, and an alarm means (audio output device 9, image display The game machine includes a power supply unit 70-73, a frame lighting unit 10, and a board lighting unit 76), the second control unit is capable of performing control to clear the game value (clearing the number of game balls), the notification unit is capable of performing different notifications (different notifications for audio notification, visual notification, and illumination notification) for the notification in response to the restoration (power restoration notification) and the notification in response to the clearing of the game value (game ball count clear notification), and the third control unit is capable of initializing the movable presentation unit in the same manner when the restoration is performed and when the game value is cleared. This makes it possible to simplify the control process of the control unit in a game machine in which the game ball count clear process is performed.

(Content 5 of the invention described in this embodiment)
Here, in conventional gaming machines, there are gaming machines in which a player plays using a gaming value owned by the player. Some of these gaming machines are equipped with a ball removal switch for discharging gaming balls circulating in the gaming machine to the outside of the gaming machine (see, for example, JP 2020-39943 A). However, there is room for improvement in appropriately notifying that a gaming ball is being discharged.

(O) A first configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine in which a player can play using gaming value owned by the player, comprising a control means (frame control board 120) that stores the gaming value owned by the player and controls the update of the gaming value, and a specific display (gaming ball count display 135) that can display the value of the gaming value, the control means being capable of performing discharge control (frame control board ball removal operation processing) for discharging gaming media corresponding to the gaming value out of the gaming machine, and being capable of displaying specific information (error code "-") on the specific display when the discharge control is being performed. This makes it possible to appropriately notify the player that gaming balls are being discharged.

(P) A second configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine in which a player can play using a gaming value owned by the player, comprising a control means (frame control board 120) that stores the gaming value owned by the player and controls the update of the gaming value, a first display unit (frame control display 125) that can display the value of the gaming value, and a second display unit (game ball count display 135) that can display the value of the gaming value, and the control means is capable of performing discharge control (frame control board ball removal operation processing) for discharging gaming media corresponding to the gaming value out of the gaming machine, and is capable of displaying specific information (error code "-") on the first display and the second display when the discharge control is being performed. This makes it possible to appropriately notify the player that game balls are being discharged.

(Q) A third configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine capable of playing a game using a gaming value owned by a player, which includes a first control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, a second control means (frame control board 120) that stores the gaming value owned by the player and controls updates to the gaming value, and an alarm means (audio output device 9, image display devices 70-73, frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 76), and the first control means controls a predetermined area (e.g., main RAM 110c, frame control RAM 1 20c), the second control means is capable of executing discharge control (frame control board ball removal operation process) for discharging gaming media corresponding to the gaming value from the gaming machine, the notification means is capable of executing a first notification (RWM clear notification) in response to the clearing of the predetermined information and a second notification (ball removal operation in progress notification) in response to the discharge control, and is characterized in that the execution of the first notification can be restricted while the second notification is being executed. Therefore, it is possible to preferably notify that gaming balls are being discharged.

(R) A fourth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine in which a game can be played using a game value owned by a player, comprising a first control means (main control board 110) capable of restoring the game to the state before the power supply was stopped when the power supply is restored after the power supply is stopped, a second control means (frame control board 120) that stores the game value owned by the player and executes update control of the game value, and an alarm means (audio output device 9, image display devices 70-73, frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 76), wherein the second control means is capable of executing discharge control (frame control board ball removal operation processing) for discharging game media corresponding to the game value outside the gaming machine, and the alarm means is capable of executing a first alarm (power restoration alarm) in response to the recovery and a second alarm (ball removal operation in progress alarm) in response to the discharge control, and the execution of the first alarm can be restricted while the second alarm is being executed. This makes it possible to conveniently notify the player that a game ball is being dispensed.

(Content 6 of the invention described in this embodiment)
Here, in conventional gaming machines, there are gaming machines in which a player plays using a gaming value owned by the player. Some of these gaming machines transmit information from the gaming machine to the outside of the gaming machine (for example, see JP 2021-104306 A, FIGS. 4 to 9, etc.). However, the amount of information transmitted from the gaming machine to the outside of the gaming machine is large, which causes a control load on the control means.

(T) A first configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine in which a game can be played using a game value owned by a player, the machine comprising a first control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, and a second control means (frame control board 120) for storing the game value owned by the player and controlling the update of the game value, the first control means performing a predetermined process (setting change process, setting confirmation process, RWM clear process) based on a first operation (setting change operation, setting confirmation operation, RWM clear operation). ), and the second control means is capable of performing discharge control (frame control board ball removal operation processing) for discharging gaming media corresponding to the gaming value outside the gaming machine based on the second operation (ball removal operation) being performed, and is characterized in that when the discharge control is performed, no information is sent to the outside of the gaming machine (dedicated unit 170), and when the predetermined processing is performed, information (information related to Bit 0 to Bit 2 of fraud detection status 1 in the HC/fraud monitoring information) can be sent to the outside of the gaming machine. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the control load of the control means.

(U) A second configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine in which a game can be played using a gaming value owned by a player, comprising a control means (frame control board 120) that stores the gaming value owned by the player and controls the update of the gaming value, and the control means is capable of performing discharge control (frame control board ball removal operation processing) for discharging gaming media corresponding to the gaming value outside the gaming machine, and control for clearing the gaming value (clearing the number of gaming balls), and is characterized in that when the discharge control is performed, no information is sent to the outside of the gaming machine (dedicated unit 170), and when the gaming value is cleared, information can be sent to the outside of the gaming machine. This makes it possible to reduce the control load on the control means.

(q) A third configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine in which a game can be played using a gaming value owned by a player, the gaming machine being equipped with a control means (frame control board 120) that stores the gaming value owned by the player and controls the update of the gaming value, the control means being capable of transmitting information corresponding to the first event (for example, in the case of "setting change", "setting confirmation", "power on (RWM clear)", and "acquisition limit device operation", the corresponding bit of "fraud detection status 1 (main control)" in "HC/fraud monitoring information" is "1") to the outside of the gaming machine when a first event occurs, and being capable of not transmitting information corresponding to the second event (for example, in the case of "ball removal operation in progress", "ball removal lever operation error", "communication line abnormality error", and "communication no response error", the corresponding bit of "fraud detection status 2 (frame control)" in "HC/fraud monitoring information" is not "1" and no information is transmitted) to the outside of the gaming machine when a second event different from the first event occurs. This makes it possible to reduce the control load on the control means.

(r) A fourth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine in which a player can play using a gaming value owned by the player, which includes a control means (frame control board 120) that stores the gaming value owned by the player and controls the update of the gaming value, and the control means is capable of not transmitting information corresponding to the first event to the outside of the gaming machine (dedicated unit 170) when a first event occurs (for example, in the case of "ball removal operation in progress" or "ball removal lever operation error", the corresponding bit of "fraud detection status 2 (frame control)" of "HC/fraud monitoring information" is not set to "1" and no information is transmitted), and is capable of not transmitting information corresponding to the second event to the outside of the gaming machine when a second event different from the first event occurs (for example, in the case of "communication line abnormality error" or "communication no response error", the corresponding bit of "fraud detection status 2 (frame control)" of "HC/fraud monitoring information" is not set to "1" and no information is transmitted). This makes it possible to reduce the control load on the control means.

(s) A fifth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine in which a player can play using a gaming value owned by the player, and includes a control means (frame control board 120) that stores the gaming value owned by the player and controls the update of the gaming value, and the control means is capable of transmitting information corresponding to the first event (for example, for "setting change" and "setting confirmation", the corresponding bit of "fraud detection status 1 (main control)" in "HC/fraud monitoring information" is "1") to the outside of the gaming machine when a first event occurs, and is capable of transmitting information corresponding to the second event (for example, for "power on (RWM clear)" and "acquisition limit device operation", the corresponding bit of "fraud detection status 1 (main control)" in "HC/fraud monitoring information" is "1") to the outside of the gaming machine when a second event different from the first event occurs. This makes it possible to reduce the control load of the control means.

(Content 7 of the invention described in this embodiment)
Here, in conventional gaming machines, there are gaming machines in which a player plays using a gaming value owned by the player. Some of these gaming machines are equipped with a ball removal switch for discharging gaming balls circulating inside the gaming machine to the outside of the gaming machine (see, for example, JP 2020-39943 A). However, no consideration was given to the execution of other control processes during the discharge of the gaming balls, and there was a risk that the discharge of the gaming balls would be delayed.

(V) The first configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine that allows a player to play using a gaming value owned by the player, and includes a first control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a second control means (frame control board 120) that stores the gaming value owned by the player and controls the update of the gaming value, and the first control means is capable of performing a predetermined process (setting change process, setting confirmation process, RWM clear process) based on the first operation (setting change operation, setting confirmation operation, RWM clear operation) being performed, and the second control means is capable of performing discharge control (frame control board ball removal operation process) to discharge gaming media corresponding to the gaming value out of the gaming machine based on the second operation (ball removal operation), and the first control means is capable of not performing the predetermined process when the discharge control is being performed, and performing the predetermined process when the discharge control is not being performed. Therefore, it is possible to discharge game balls without delay.

(W) A second configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine in which a player can play using a gaming value owned by the player, comprising a first control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, and a second control means (frame control board 120) for storing the gaming value owned by the player and controlling the update of the gaming value, the first control means being capable of performing a process (RWM clear process) for clearing predetermined information stored in a predetermined area, the second control means being capable of performing an ejection control (frame control board ball ejection operation process) for ejecting gaming media corresponding to the gaming value from the gaming machine, and the first control means being capable of not performing a process for clearing the predetermined information when the ejection control is being performed, and performing a process for clearing the predetermined information when the ejection control is not being performed. This makes it possible to eject game balls without delay.

(X) A third configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine in which a player can play using a gaming value owned by the player, which includes a first control means (main control board 110) that can restore the state before the power supply was stopped when the power supply is restored after the power supply is stopped, and a second control means (frame control board 120) that stores the gaming value owned by the player and controls the update of the gaming value, the second control means being capable of performing discharge control (frame control board ball removal operation processing) to discharge gaming media corresponding to the gaming value out of the gaming machine, and the first control means being capable of not restoring the state before the power supply was stopped when the discharge control is being performed, and of restoring the state before the power supply was stopped when the discharge control is not being performed. Therefore, it is possible to discharge game balls without delay.

(Y) A fourth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine in which a player can play using a gaming value owned by the player, comprising a first control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game when the game is in a playable state (for example, a state in which all interrupts are permitted in step S33 of the main control board main processing), and a second control means (frame control board 120) that stores the gaming value owned by the player and controls the update of the gaming value, the second control means being capable of performing discharge control (frame control board ball removal operation processing) to discharge gaming media corresponding to the gaming value out of the gaming machine, and the first control means being capable of not setting the game to the playable state when the discharge control is being performed, and setting the game to the playable state when the discharge control is not being performed. This makes it possible to discharge game balls without delay.

(Z) A fifth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine in which a player can play using a gaming value owned by the player, comprising a control means (frame control board 120) that stores the gaming value owned by the player and controls the update of the gaming value, and a notification means (audio output device 9, image display devices 70-73, frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 76) that can notify the occurrence of a specified event (for example, a magnet detection error, an unauthorized radio wave detection error), the control means being capable of performing discharge control (frame control board ball removal operation processing) for discharging a gaming medium corresponding to the gaming value out of the gaming machine, and the notification means being capable of notifying the occurrence of the specified event when the discharge control is being performed, and of notifying the occurrence of the specified event when the discharge control is not being performed. This makes it possible to discharge game balls without delay.

(Content 8 of the invention described in this embodiment)
Here, in conventional gaming machines, there are gaming machines in which a player plays using a gaming value owned by the player. Among such gaming machines, there are some in which a game is played using a gaming ball (enclosed gaming ball) circulating in the gaming machine (see, for example, JP 2020-39943 A). However, no consideration was given to holding the gaming balls circulating in the gaming machine, and there was a risk of a shortage of gaming balls reducing the interest in the game.

(c) A first configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine in which a player can play using a gaming value owned by the player, the machine being equipped with a control means (frame control board 120) that stores the gaming value owned by the player and controls the update of the gaming value, an openable and closable door body (inner frame 3, glass frame 4), a detection means (glass frame open detection switch 31a, inner frame open detection switch 31b) that detects the state of the door body, and an alarm means (audio output device 9, image display devices 70-73, frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 76), and the control means controls (touch sensor 1) to launch a gaming medium corresponding to the gaming value into a gaming area (gaming area 5a). 5a, when the launch volume 15b is input, the launch solenoid 92b is driven to operate the launch hammer, and the game value is cleared (the number of game balls is cleared). The notification means is capable of making a notification in response to the clearing of the game value (notification of the number of game balls being cleared). The control means is capable of firing the game medium into the game area if the detection means is not detecting when the notification is made, and is capable of restricting the firing of the game medium into the game area if the detection means is detecting when the notification is made. This prevents a decrease in interest in the game due to a shortage of game balls.

(Content 9 of the invention described in this embodiment)
Here, among conventional gaming machines, there are gaming machines in which a player plays using a gaming value owned by the player. Some of these gaming machines are equipped with a forced termination means that forcibly terminates a game on the condition that the difference between the number of balls indicated by the ball information and the number of balls equivalent to the total loan amount reaches a predetermined upper limit (see, for example, Patent No. 6318340). Although a sound game can be realized by forcibly terminating a game, no consideration is given to the player, and there is a risk of reducing the interest in the game.

(d) A first configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine in which a game can be played using a game value owned by a player, the machine comprising a control means (frame control board 120) for storing the game value owned by the player and controlling the update of the game value, and an alarm means (audio output device 9, image display devices 70-73, frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 76), and when the value of the game value owned by the player (for example, the amount of game value owned by the player displayed on the game ball count display 135) reaches a first value (40,000), the control means outputs first game information ( When the gaming machine is in an error state in the HC/fraud monitoring information, a message such as "H23 number of game balls exceeded" can be transmitted, and when the value of the specific information counted when the counting condition is met (for example, the value of the maximum increase) reaches a second value (95,000), second gaming information (information in which Bit 6 of fraud detection state 1 in the HC/fraud monitoring information is "1") can be transmitted to the outside of the gaming machine, and the notification means is characterized in that when the first value is met, it does not issue a predetermined caution promotion notification (be careful not to get addicted, be careful not to forget to remove cards), and when the second value is met, it is capable of issuing the predetermined caution promotion notification. This prevents a decline in interest in gaming.

(e) A second configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine in which a game can be played using a gaming value owned by a player, the machine comprising a control means (frame control board 120) for storing the gaming value owned by the player and controlling the update of the gaming value, an alarm means (audio output device 9, image display devices 70-73, frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 76), and a counting operation unit (counting button 20) for counting the gaming value owned by the player, the alarm means being When the value of the game value owned by the player (for example, the amount of game value owned by the player displayed on the game ball count display 135) reaches a first value (for example, 40,000), no notification is given to encourage the player to operate the counting operation unit (press the counting button to count), but when the value of the specific information counted when the counting condition is met (for example, the value of the maximum increase) reaches a second value (for example, 95,000), a notification can be given to encourage the player to operate the counting operation unit. This makes it possible to prevent a decline in interest in the game.

(f) A third configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine in which a game can be played using gaming value owned by a player, the gaming machine comprising: a first control means (main control board 110) that acquires judgment information (random number value for jackpot judgment) when an acquisition condition is met (winning at the first start port 45 or the second start port 47) and executes control to judge whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player based on the acquired judgment information; and a second control means (performance control board 130) that executes performance control in response to a command sent from the first control means, the first control means executing control to make a pre-judgment (e.g., a first pre-judgment process) based on the judgment information as to whether or not to execute the special game prior to the judgment. The second control means is capable of executing a pre-performance (e.g., a reserved consecutive game performance) according to a command based on the pre-determination (e.g., a first look-ahead designation command), and the pre-performance can be executed before the value of the game value owned by the player (e.g., the amount of game value owned by the player displayed on the game ball count display 135) meets a first value (e.g., 40,000), but the execution of the pre-performance can be restricted before the value of the specific information counted by the establishment of the counting condition (e.g., the value of the maximum increase number) meets a second value (e.g., 95,000) and a predetermined condition for restricting the execution of the pre-performance is established (e.g., the value of the maximum increase number becomes "94,000"). This prevents a decline in interest in the game.

(g) A fourth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine in which a player can play using game value owned by the player, comprising a first control means (main control board 110) that performs control to determine whether or not to play a special game advantageous to the player, a second control means (frame control board 120) that stores the game value owned by the player and controls the update of the game value, and a presentation execution means (sound output device 9, image display devices 70-73, frame lighting device 10, board 110) that is capable of performing a game presentation related to the special game. and a lighting device 76 for playing the special game, and the presentation execution means is characterized in that when the value of the game value owned by the player (for example, the amount of game value owned by the player displayed on the game ball count display 135) reaches a first value (for example, 40,000), a specific game presentation (for example, a completion presentation) is not performed as a game presentation related to the special game, and when the value of specific information counted when the counting condition is met (for example, the value of the maximum increase) reaches a second value (for example, 95,000), the specific game presentation is performed. This makes it possible to prevent a decline in interest in the game.

In the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are not displayed simultaneously (in parallel), and the second special symbol is displayed preferentially. However, the gaming machine may be configured to display the first special symbol and the second special symbol simultaneously (in parallel), or the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be displayed in the order of the winning balls entering the first start hole 45 and the second start hole 47.

In addition, the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment is controlled to a time-saving gaming state or a probability variable gaming state until the variable display of the special pattern is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times after the end of the first jackpot game, and 10,000 times after the end of the second and third jackpot games), but it may also be controlled to a time-saving gaming state or a probability variable gaming state until the variable display of the normal pattern is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times after the end of the first jackpot game, and 10,000 times after the end of the second and third jackpot games).

The gaming machine 1 of the present invention is not limited to a pachinko gaming machine (managed gaming machine) that uses circulating gaming balls, but can also be used in a pachinko gaming machine (general pachinko machine) that does not use circulating gaming balls. It can also be used in a reel type gaming machine (general slot machine) that awards a predetermined amount of medals to a player when a winning symbol is displayed on a winning line by playing with medals. It can also be used in a reel type gaming machine (managed gaming machine) that awards a predetermined amount of gaming value (virtual medals) to a player when a winning symbol is displayed on a winning line by playing with gaming value (virtual medals) (satisfying the awarding condition). It can also be used in a Janball gaming machine and an Arrange Ball gaming machine.

Furthermore, the embodiments disclosed herein should be considered to be illustrative and not restrictive in all respects. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the claims, not the above description, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope of the claims.

1 Gaming machine 5 Gaming board 17 Performance button 20 Counting button 43 General prize opening 44 General map gate 45 First start opening 47 Second start opening 50 Large prize opening 70 First image display device 71 Second image display device 72 Third image display device 73 Fourth image display device 110 Main control board 110a Main CPU
120 Frame control board 120a Frame control CPU
121 Game ball count clear switch 122 Ball removal switch 123 Error release switch 125 Frame control display 130 Performance control board 130a Sub-CPU
135 Game ball number display 170 Dedicated unit

Claims (1)

In a gaming machine in which a player can play a game using a gaming value owned by the player,
A first control means for performing control to determine whether or not a special game advantageous to a player is to be played;
A second control means for storing the game value owned by the player and performing update control of the game value;
A counting means for counting the specific information when a counting condition is satisfied;
An openable and closable door body;
A detection means for detecting a state of the door body;
A third control means for controlling game presentations related to the special game;
A notification means,
The first control means is
When the value of the specific information satisfies a predetermined value, a predetermined control can be restricted;
The second control means is
It is possible to perform discharge control for discharging gaming media corresponding to the gaming value from the gaming machine,
The notification means includes:
A first notification in response to the detection by the detection means and a second notification in response to the discharge control can be performed,
The first notification and the second notification have different notification priorities,
The third control means is
Before the value of the specific information satisfies a predetermined value, execution of a normal game presentation can be controlled as a game presentation related to the special game,
A gaming machine characterized in that after the value of the specific information reaches a predetermined value, the execution of a specific game presentation different from the normal game presentation can be controlled as a game presentation related to the special game .